Skip to main content

Full text of "Building code of the city of Boston; consisting of chapter 479 of the Acts of 1938, as amended by chapter 217 of the Acts of 1939, with the amendments by ordinance incorporated"

See other formats


r€ 


ciV? 


slsJL 


Bn 


LP 


FROM     THE 

ROBERT  C.   BILLINGS  FUND 


31 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 

Boston  Public  Library 


http://www.archive.org/details/buildingcodeofci1954bost 


JZ^->,    J& 


*aJtZ) 


M 


BUILDING    CODE 


OF    THE 


CITY   OF   BOSTON 


Consisting  of  Chapter  479  of  the  Acts  of  1938,  As  Amended 

by  Chapter  217   of  the  Acts  of   1939,   With  the 

Amendments   by   Ordinance   Incorporated. 


CITY  OF  BOSTON 

ADMINISTRATIVE  SERVICES  DEPARTMENT 

PRINTING   SECTION 

1954 


CITY  OF  BOSTON, 
Office  of  the  City  Clerk. 

April  1,  1955. 

I  hereby  certify  that  Chapter  479  of  the  Acts  of  1938, 
as  amended  by  Chapter  217  of  the  Acts  of  1939,  was 
accepted  by  order  passed  by  the  City  Council  on 
May  10,  1943,  and  approved  by  the  Mayor  on  May  15, 
1943. 

I  hereby  further  certify  that  pages  5  to  284,  inclusive, 
of  this  volume  contain  a  true  copy  of  Chapter  479  of 
the  Acts  of  1938  as  amended  by  Chapter  217  of  the 
Acts  of  1939  and  by  ordinances  of  the  City  of  Boston 
adopted  in  the  period  from  May  15,  1943,  to  date. 

Attest : 


W.  J.  Malloy, 

City  Clerk. 


(2) 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Part  1  —  Administration 5 

2  —  Fire  Limits 32 

3  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  A  Occupancy:  Theatres    .  34 

4  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  B  Occupancy:  Halls  .       .  43 

5  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  C  Occupancy:  Schools       .  50 

6  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  D  Occupancy:  Hospitals 

and  Detention  Buildings 55 

7  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  E  Occupancy:  Commercial 

Buildings  of  Hazardous  Occupancy 59 

8  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  F  Occupancy:  Offices  and 

Commercial  Buildings 62 

9  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  G  Occupancy:  Commercial 

Buildings  of  Non-Hazardous  Occupancy     ....  66 

10  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  H  Occupancy:  Unlimited 

Habitations  and  Large  Dwellings 69 

11  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  I   Occupancy:  Limited 

Habitations  and  Small  Dwellings 77 

12  —  Special  Requirements  for  Group  J  Occupancy:  Miscellaneous 

Structures 79 

13  —  Separation  of  Occupancies 82 

14  —  Walls  and  Partitions 86 

15  —  Protection  of  Vertical  Openings 100 

16  —  Floor  Construction 104 

17  —  Roof  Construction  and  Covering 109 

18  — Exits Ill 

19  —  Doors,  Windows  and  Skylights 123 

20  —  Penthouses  and  Roof  Structures 126 

21  —  Chimneys  and  Heating  Apparatus 128 

22  —  Fire-Resistive  Construction 138 

23  —  Live  and  Dead  Loads 156 

24  — Masonry 163 

25  —  Wood 171 

26  —  Reinforced  Concrete 183 

27  —  Precast  Gypsum  Concrete 224 

28  —  Steel  and  Iron 226 

29  —  Excavations  and  Foundations 240 

30  —  Fire  Extinguishing  Apparatus 253 

31  — Plumbing 261 

32  — Validity .284 

33  —  War  Provision \-     .        .       .284 

Gasfitting  Regulations 285 

Fire  Zones 299 

Index 301 

(3) 


&fje  Commontoealtf)  of  iflassacljusietto 


ACTS  OF   1938,   CHAPTER  479 


An  Act  for  codification,  revision  and  amendment  of  the  laws  relative 
to  the  construction,  alteration  and  maintenance  of  buildings 
and  other  structures  in  the  city  of  boston. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  in  General  Court 
assembled,  and  by  the  authority  of  the  same,  as  follows: 

PART   I. 

ADMINISTRATION. 

Section 
101— Title. 

102  —  Repeals. 

103  —  Pending  Actions. 

104  —  Other  Statutes. 

105  — Effective  Date. 

[105A  —  Amendment  by  Ordinance.] 

106  —  Definitions. 

107  —  Scope. 

108  —  Maintenance. 

109  —  Organization. 

1 10  —  Application  for  Permit. 

111  —  Permits. 

112  — Fees. 

113  —  Inspection. 

114  —  Posting  Floor  Loads. 

115  —  Annual  Report. 

116  —  Powers  and  Duties  of  Building  Commissioner, 

117  —  Board  of  Appeal. 

118  —  Appeals. 

1 19  —  Decisions  of  the  Board  of  Appeal. 

120  —  Board  of  Examiners. 

121  —  Board  of  Examiners  of  Gas  Fitters. 

122  —  Penalties. 

123  —  Enforcement  Jurisdiction. 

124  —  Classification  of  Buildings  by  Types  of  Construction. 

125  —  Types  of  Construction. 

126  —  Type  I,  Fireproof  Construction. 

127  —  Type  II,  Semi=Fireproof  Construction. 

128  —  Type  III,  Heavy  Timber  and  Masonry  Construction. 

129  —  Type  IV,  Light  Wood  and  Masonry  Construction. 

(5) 


Sees.  101-105 

Section 

130  —  Type  V,  Metal  Frame  Construction. 

131  — Type  VI,  Wooden  Frame  Construction. 

132  —  Occupancies  Classified. 

133  —  Change  of  Occupancy. 

134  —  Multiple  Occupancies. 

135  —  Elevators  and  Escalators. 

136  — Building  Height. 

Section  101.  Title. —  This  act  shall  be  known  and  may  be  cited  as  the 
Boston  Building  Code  and  is  hereinafter  referred  to  as  this  code. 

Sect.  102.  Repeals. —  Except  as  provided  in  section  one  hundred  and 
three,  the  following  acts  and  parts  of  acts,  as  severally  amended,  are  hereby 
repealed;  —  chapter  two  hundred  and  sixty-five  of  the  acts  of  eighteen 
hundred  and  ninety-seven;  the  two  paragraphs  added  to  section  four  of 
chapter  three  hundred  and  eighty-three  of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and 
five  by  section  one  of  chapter  one  hundred  and  fifty-six  of  the  Special  Acts 
of  nineteen  hundred  and  nineteen;  chapter  five  hundred  and  fifty  of  the 
acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  seven,  except  section  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
eight  thereof;  chapter  three  hundred  and  forty-two  of  the  acts  of  nineteen 
hundred  and  eleven;  chapter  seven  hundred  and  twenty-nine  of  the  acts  of 
nineteen  hundred  and  thirteen;  chapter  seven  hundred  and  eighty-two 
of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  fourteen;  sections  one  to  five,  inclusive, 
of  chapter  one  hundred  and  sixty-three  of  the  Special  Acts  of  nineteen  hundred 
and  nineteen;  chapter  two  hundred  and  seventy -eight  of  the  acts  of  nineteen 
hundred  and  twenty-three;  chapter  one  hundred  and  eighty-two  of  the 
acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  twenty-six;  and  chapter  forty-two  of  the  acts 
of  nineteen  hundred  and  twenty-seven. 

Sect.  103.  Pending  Actions. —  All  actions  and  proceedings,  at  law  or  in 
equity,  and  all  prosecutions,  pending  on  the  effective  date  of  this  code,  whether 
commenced  for  the  purpose  of  enforcing  any  of  the  provisions  of  the  acts,  or 
parts  thereof,  repealed  by  the  preceding  section  or  brought  upon  any  complaint 
or  indictment  for  the  violation  of  any  of  such  provisions,  or  for  the  violation 
of  any  ordinance,  rule  or  regulation  established  thereunder  for  the  violation 
of  which  a  penalty  of  a  fine  or  imprisonment,  or  otherwise,  is  provided  therein, 
may  be  prosecuted  and  enforced  to  the  same  extent  as  if  said  acts,  or  parts 
thereof,  were  still  in  force  and  effect. 

Sect.  104.  Other  Statutes. —  All  statutes  applicable  generally  to  depart- 
ments of  the  city  of  Boston,  including  the  provisions  of  section  five  of  chapter 
four  hundred  and  eighty-six  of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  nine,  as  most 
recently  amended  by  chapter  two  hundred  and  twenty-seven  of  the  acts  of 
nineteen  hundred  and  thirty-four,  and  any  pertinent  action  taken  thereunder 
whether  before  or  after  the  effective  date  of  this  code,  shall  apply  to  the 
building  department  and  to  the  boards  established  under  sections  one  hundred 
and  nine,  one  hundred  and  seventeen,  one  hundred  and  twenty  and  one 
hundred  and  twenty-one  hereof. 

*Sect.  105.     Effective  Date. —  This  code  shall  take  full  effect  upon  its 
acceptance  by  vote  of  the  city  council  of  the  city  of  Boston,  subject  to  the 

(6) 


Sees.  I  OS- 1 06 

provisions  of  its  charter.  If  an  application  for  a  permit  is  filed  before  said 
effective  date,  and  a  permit  is  issued  thereon  and  the  work  is  actually  com- 
menced within  ninety  days  after  the  issuance  of  the  permit,  the  applicant 
notwithstanding  any  provision  to  the  contrary  in  section  one  hundred  and 
seven,  may  elect  to  be  governed  in  the  entire  operation  covered  by  the  permit 
either  by  the  building  laws  as  they  existed  when  the  application  was  filed  or 
by  this  code. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 
fSect.  105A.  [Amendment  by  Ordinance.]  —  The  city  of  Boston, 
for  the  purposes  of  the  prevention  of  fire  and  the  preservation  of  life, 
health  and  morals,  or  for  any  of  such  purposes,  may  from  time  to  time, 
by  ordinance  and  upon  the  written  recommendation  of  the  building  com- 
missioner or  the  board  of  appeal,  regulate  the  inspection,  materials,  con- 
struction, alteration,  repair,  height,  area,  location  and  use  of  buildings  and 
other  structures  in  said  city,  except  such  buildings  or  structures  as  are  excluded 
from  the  operation  of  this  code  by  sub -section  (a)  of  section  one  hundred 
and  seven,  and  for  any  or  all  of  said  purposes  may  from  time  to  time,  by 
ordinance  upon  like  written  recommendation,  alter,  amend,  extend  or  render 
ineffective  any  provision  or  provisions  of  this  code  regulating  building  and 
other  structures  as  aforesaid. 

[  fAs  inserted  by  Stat.  1939,  ch.  217  ] 
JSect.  106.     Definitions. —  (a)     For  the  purposes  of  this  code  the  words 
and  phrases  defined  in  this  section  shall  be  construed  as  so  defined  except 
when  the  context  clearly  indicates  that  another  meaning  is  intended. 

"Abut",  touch,  be  contiguous.  A  building  abuts  upon  a  street  when  some 
part  of  the  building  touches  or  extends  to  the  line  of  the  street.  A  building 
shall  be  construed  to  abut  upon  a  street  if  it  is  nearer  at  any  point  than  ten 
feet  from  the  street  or  when  the  space  between  the  building  and  the  side  line 
of  the  street  is  used  wholly  or  chiefly  for  the  purposes  of  a  street  or  sidewalk. 

"Apartment",  a  room  or  suite  of  rooms  occupied  by  one  person  or  one 
family  for  living  and  sleeping  purposes. 

"Apartment  hotel",  a  building  containing  four  or  more  apartments  without 
kitchens,  primarily  for  persons  who  have  their  residences  therein. 

"Apartment  house",  a  building  containing  four  or  more  apartments  with 
kitchens,  primarily  for  persons  who  have  their  residences  therein. 

"Approved",  approved  by  the  building  commissioner  of  the  city  of 
Boston. 

"Area  of  a  building",  see  "Building,  area  of". 

"Assembly  hall",  a  hall  or  room,  including  the  balconies  thereof,  if  any, 
in  which  persons  may  assemble  in  a  manner  as  permitted  in  Group  B,  Part  4. 

"Attic",  finished  or  unfinished  story  situated  within  a  sloping  roof,  the 
area  of  which  at  a  height  of  four  feet  (4)  above  the  level  of  its  finished  floor 
does  not  exceed  two-thirds  (2/3)  of  the  area  of  the  story  immediately  below  it. 
There  shall  be  only  one  attic  in  any  building,  and  it  shall  be  considered  as  a 
half  story. 

"Auditorium",  an  assembly  hall  in  which  persons  may  assemble  to  hear  or 
see  concerts,  plays,  lectures,  athletic  or  sports  events  or  similar  performances. 

(7) 


Sec.  106 

"Automatic  sprinklers",  a  system  of  piping  supplied  with  water  under 
pressure  with  devices  for  releasing  under  the  influence  of  heat  and  spraying 
the  water  on  ceilings,  walls  and  floors. 

"Balcony",  within  an  auditorium,  is  a  floor,  inclined,  stepped,  or  level, 
above  the  main  floor,  the  open  side  or  sides  of  which  shall  be  protected  by  a 
rail  or  railings.  Where  a  balcony  of  an  auditorium  has  exits  at  two  or  more 
levels  opening  into  separate  foyers,  one  above  another,  each  portion  thereof 
served  by  such  a  foyer  shall  be  considered  a  separate  balcony  for  the  purpose 
of  this  code. 

"Basement",  a  story  of  a  building  below  the  first  story. 

"Building",  a  structure  forming  a  shelter  for  persons,  animals  or  property, 
and  having  a  roof-  The  word  "building"  shall  be  construed,  where  the  con- 
text allows,  as  though  followed  by  the  words  "or  part  thereof."  The  word 
"building"  shall  not  include  such  frame-works  and  tents  as  are  customarily 
used  exclusively  for  outdoor  carnivals,  lawn  parties  or  like  activities. 

"Building,  area  of",  the  maximum  horizontal  projected  area  of  a  building, 
above  ground,  within  the  property  lines,  including  exterior  walls  one  or  more 
of  which  may  be  party  walls  and  including  covered  porches  but  excluding 
terraces,  steps  and  cornices. 

"Building,  height  of",  in  linear  measure,  the  vertical  distance  of  the 
highest  point  of  the  roof,  excluding  pent  houses  and  roof  structures,  above 
the  mean  grade  of  the  sidewalk  at  the  line  of  the  street  or  streets  on  which 
the  building  abuts;  and,  if  the  building  does  not  abut  on  a  street,  above  the 
mean  grade  of  the  ground  around  and  contiguous  to  the  building;  and  provided, 
further,  that  for  the  purposes  of  establishing  said  mean  grade,  the  ground 
bounded  by  the  lot  lines  and  contiguous  to  the  building  and  within  twenty 
feet  of  it,  shall  be  considered  to  slant  toward  the  building  not  more  than  one 
foot  upward  or  downward  in  two  horizontal  feet.  In  stories,  the  number  of 
stories  above  the  floor  of  the  first  story. 

"Building,  pre-code",  a  building  already  erected  on  the  effective  date  of 
this  code,  or  thereafter  erected,  as  provided  in  section  one  hundred  and  five, 
under  permit  for  its  construction  subject  to  the  provisions  of  law  in  effect  prior 
to  such  effective  date. 

"Building,  post-code",  a  building  erected  after  the  effective  date  of  this 
code  and  subject  to  the  provisions  thereof. 

"Bulkhead",  the  raised  portion  of  a  floor  or  roof,  raised  for  the  passage 
of  persons,  materials,  light  or  air,  through  the  side  of  such  raised  portion,  or 
for  other  purpose. 

"  Cellar  ",  see  basement. 

"Chimney",  a  vertical  structure  of  masonry  with  one  or  more  flues  in 
which  smoke  or  the  products  of  combustion  are  conducted  upward  for  dis- 
posal in  the  open  air  at  a  height  above  the  ground. 

"Code",  "this  code",  the  Boston  Building  Code,  consisting  of  this  act 
and  the  regulations  established  thereunder. 

"Commissioner",  the  building  commissioner  of  the  city  of  Boston. 

"Corridor",  an  enclosed  passageway. 

"Dead  load",  the  weight  of  materials  built  into  the  construction  of  a 

(8) 


Sec.  106 

building  including  walls,  permanent  partitions,  floors,  roofs,  framing  and  all 
other  permanent  stationary  construction  entering  into  and  becoming  part 
of  a  building. 

"Department",  the  building  department  of  the  city  of  Boston. 

"Exit",  a  means  of  egress;  a  way  out. 

"Exit  from  a  room",  a  doorway  or  other  means  of  egress  from  the  room 
on  the  way  toward  an  exit  from  the  building. 

"Exit  from  a  story",  a  stairway,  ramp,  ladder  or  other  means  of  egress 
from  the  story  on  the  way  toward  an  exit  from  the  building. 

"Exit  from  a  building",  a  doorway  or  other  means  of  egress  from  the  build- 
ing opening  upon  a  street  or  upon  an  open  space  with  unobstructed  access  to 
a  street. 

"Exit,  path  of",  the  continuous  series  of  doorways,  connecting  rooms, 
corridors,  passages,  stairways,  ramps  and  the  like,  which  leads  from  any 
exit  from  a  room  through  an  exit  from  the  building. 

"Family",  a  group  of  persons  living  together  who  share  at  least  in  part 
their  living  quarters  and  accommodations. 

"Fire  division",  a  portion  of  a  building  so  separated  from  the  rest  by 
separations  as  specified  in  Part  13,  that  it  may  be  erected  to  the  maximum 
height  and  area  allowed  for  its  principal  occupancy  and  type  of  construction, 
independently  of  adjoining  occupancies.  A  portion  of  a  building  separated 
from  the  rest  by  fire  walls.  A  fire  division  may  not  be  larger  than  a  maximum 
unit  of  occupancy  and  may  be  further  limited  by  the  application  of  require- 
ments of  Table  A,  (2),  section  thirteen  hundred  and  two. 

"Fire  division,  area  of",  the  maximum  horizontal  projected  area  of  the 
division  within  the  property  lines  including  exterior  walls,  one  or  more  of 
which  may  be  party  walls,  and  in  the  case  of  separation  walls  within  the 
property  lines  to  the  center  of  the  separation  wall. 

"Fire  door",  a  door  of  fire-resistive  construction  as  described  in  Part  22. 

"Fire  extinguisher",  a  portable  device  the  contents  of  which  are  for  ex- 
tinguishing a  fire. 

"First  aid  hose  station",  a  hose  connection  with  valve  in  a  system  of  piping 
adequately  supplied  with  water,  hose  and  nozzle  for  use  of  occupants  of  a 
building  in  extinguishing  a  fire. 

"Floor  area",  of  a  room,  the  area  of  the  floor  contained  within  the  walls. 

"Foundation",  that  portion  of  a  building  or  structure  of  which  the  sole 
or  chief  purpose  or  use  is  to  transmit  the  weight  of  the  building  or  structure  to 
the  earth;  the  support  of  the  lowest  portions  of  columns,  walls,  piers  or  other 
vertical  members. 

"Foyer",  a  foyer,  lobby,  corridor  or  passage,  one  or  more  in  combination, 
adjacent  to  the  auditorium  of  a  theatre  or  assembly  hall  at  the  level  of  the 
main  floor  or  a  balcony  thereof  and  into  which  one  or  more  exits  therefrom 
open,  in  the  path  of  normal  egress  from  the  building. 

"Front",  a  building  or  wall  fronts  upon  a  street  when  a  wall  of  the  building 
or  the  wall  faces  the  street  and  is  parallel  thereto  or  makes  an  angle  of  less 
than  forty-five  degrees  therewith. 

(9) 


Sec.  106 

"Fusible  link",  a  device  consisting  of  two  pieces  of  brass  or  other  suitable 
metal  connected  by  solder  or  other  metal  fusible  at  a  moderate  temperature, 
arranged  to  release  in  the  presence  of  fire  or  excessive  heat;  or  any  equivalent 
approved  device. 

"Gage",  for  sheet  metal,  United  States  Standard  Gage;  for  brass  and 
copper  tubing,  Stubs  Gage;  for  wire,  Washburn  &  Moen  or  Roebling  Steel 
wire  gage. 

"Garage",  a  building  or  portion  thereof  in  which  is  housed  or  stored  one  or 
more  motor  vehicles  containing  or  using  a  volatile  flammable  fluid  for  fuel  or 
power,  or  in  which  such  motor  vehicles  are  painted,  repaired  or  serviced. 

"Gasfitting",  the  art  of  installing,  repairing  or  altering  pipes,  fittings, 
fixtures  and  other  apparatus  for  distributing  gas  for  heat,  light,  power  or  other 
purposes;  the  system  of  pipes,  fittings,  fixtures  and  other  apparatus  for 
distributing  gas  for  heat,  light,  power  or  other  purposes. 

"Grade",  elevation  with  reference  to  Boston  city  base,  namely,  a  hori- 
zontal plane  of  reference  established  and  used  by  the  city  of  Boston. 

"Grade,  mean",  the  average  of  the  grades  of  mid-points  of  successive  equal 
distances  of  not  over  ten  feet  measured  along  the  line  or  lines  along  which 
the  mean  grade  is  to  be  determined. 

"Hotel",  a  building  containing  four  or  more  apartments  without  kitchens, 
or  sleeping  accommodations  for  ten  or  more  persons,  primarily  the  temporary 
abode  of  persons  who  have  their  residences  elsewhere. 

"Kitchen",  a  room  used  or  adapted  for  cooking  and  containing  a  stove, 
range,  hot-plate  or  other  cooking  apparatus,  which  burns  coal,  oil,  gas  or 
other  fuel  or  is  heated  by  electricity,  except  electric  appliances  consuming 
less  than  eighteen  hundred  watts. 

"Lintel",  a  beam  in  a  masonry  wall  supporting  the  masonry  above  an 
opening. 

"Live  load",  the  load  or  weight  to  be  supported  on  floors  or  other  portions 
of  buildings  incidental  to  their  occupancy;  the  pressure  of  wind,  the  weight 
of  snow,  and  all  loads  other  than  dead  loads. 

"Masonry",  construction  of  assembled  units  of  stone,  brick,  concrete, 
gypsum  or  other  similar  incombustible  materials  separated  from  one  another 
and  held  in  place  by  mortar. 

"Masonry,  dry",  masonry,  except  that  the  units  are  not  separated  or  held 
in  place  by  mortar. 

"May",  a  term  giving  permission  but  not,  except  in  the  negative,  making  a 
requirement.  "May"  is  used  in  this  code  to  emphasize  that  specified  con- 
struction is  not  prohibited  by  the  code  when  such  prohibition  might  other- 
wise be  implied  or  construed;  or  to  limit  the  scope  of  a  prohibition  by  except- 
ing specified  construction  from  its  effect.  A  permission  so  expressed  in  this 
code  in  specific  terms  shall  not  be  construed  as  a  prohibition  of  other  con- 
struction.   "May  not"  is  prohibitive. 

"Mezzanine  floor",  a  floor  within  a  story  between  the  floor  and  ceiling 
thereof,  having  an  area  not  over  forty  per  cent  of  the  area  of  the  building  at 
the  level  at  which  the  mezzanine  floor  occurs.  A  floor  of  larger  area  separates 
two  stories. 

(10) 


Sec.  106 

"Non-corrodible  metal",  a  metal  which,  under  the  conditions  of  its  use, 
may  reasonably  be  expected,  without  unusual  or  excessive  maintenance, 
to  serve  its  purpose  throughout  the  probable  life  of  the  structure  in  which  it  is 
used  as  determined  by  the  commissioner. 

''Occupancy",  use  or  occupancy  of  a  building,  character  of  use,  or  desig- 
nated purpose  of  a  building  or  structure  or  portion  thereof. 

"Occupancy,  unit  of",  that  portion  of  one  building  within  separations 
within  which  the  occupancy,  whether  of  one  or  more  tenants,  falls  in  a  single 
group  and  division  as  classified  in  section  one  hundred  and  thirty -two  and 
Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  of  this  code. 

"Or",  providing  an  alternative  at  the  option,  unless  the  contrary  is  clearly 
indicated,  of  the  applicant  for  a  permit. 

"Owner",  the  owner  ofethe  land  as  recorded  in  the  registry  of  deeds  for 
Suffolk  county,  or  as  registered  in  the  land  court,  except  as  otherwise  provided 
in  paragraph  (d)  of  this  section. 

"Partition",  see  Wall. 

"Passageway",  a  continuous  way,  of  required  width,  kept  clear  for  use 
as  an  exit,  whether  enclosed  or  not. 

"Pier",  a  vertical  body  of  masonry  used  as  a  column,  the  portion  of  a 
masonry  wall  between  thinner  portions  or  between  openings  when  the  hori- 
zontal dimension  parallel  to  the  wall  does  not  exceed  four  times  the  thickness. 

"Plan  or  plans".  The  word  plan  or  plans  shall  be  construed  to  mean 
drawing  or  drawings  illustrating  the  work  involved. 

"Plumbing",  the  art  of  installing,  repairing  or  altering  the  pipes,  fixtures 
and  other  apparatus  for  distributing  the  water  supply  and  removing  liquid 
and  water-carried  wastes;  the  system  of  pipes,  fixtures  and  other  apparatus 
installed  in  buildings  for  distributing  the  water  supply  and  for  the  disposal 
of  liquid  and  water-carried  wastes,  including  valves,  traps  and  soil,  waste  and 
vent  pipes;  provided,  that  nothing  herein  contained  shall  include  the  work 
of  steamfitting. 

"Projection  room",  a  room  in  a  theatre  or  assembly  hall  containing  a 
projector  of  moving  pictures. 

"Remote",  in  reference  to  two  or  more  exits,  removed  or  distant  from  one 
another  in  such  manner  that  a  person  in  any  place  served  by  such  exits  may 
choose  either  of  two  directions  in  a  path  toward  an  exit  and  in  such  manner 
that  a  single  fire  could  not,  in  its  early  stages,  block  both  paths  toward  an 
exit. 

"Seating  capacity",  the  number  of  seats  within  an  auditorium  or  other 
hall  when  fastened  to  the  floor;  the  number  of  persons  who  may  be  seated 
within  an  auditorium  or  hall  allowing  six  square  feet  of  floor  area  per  person 
unless  fixed  seats  are  provided. 

"Separation",  a  system  of  walls,  floors  or  other  construction  serving  to 
separate  or  cut  off  one  unit  of  occupancy  from  another. 

"Shaft",  an  enclosure  of  a  vertical  opening  in  two  or  more  stories. 

"Smoke  pipe",  a  flue,  approximately  horizontal,  of  metal  or  other  material, 
in  which  smoke  or  the  products  of  combustion  are  conducted  from  a  furnace 
to  a  chimney  or  stack. 

(ID 


Sec.  106 

"Smoke  stack",  a  vertical  flue  of  metal  or  reinforced  concrete,  whether  or 
not  lined  with  masonry  or  other  protective  material,  in  which  smoke,  or  the 
products  of  combustion,  are  conducted  upward  for  disposal  in  the  open  air 
at  a  height  above  the  ground. 

"Soil",  the  softer  matter  mostly  inorganic  composing  part  of  the  surface 
of  the  earth  in  distinction  from  the  firm  rock;  including  gravel,  clay,  loam 
and  the  like,  and  filling  materials  of  similar  nature. 

"Sprinklers,  automatic",  a  system  of  automatic  sprinklers  installed  in 
accordance  with  this  code. 

"Stair,  rise  of",  the  vertical  distance  between  successive  treads  or  steps 
measured  always  from  the  same  relative  position  thereon. 

"Stair,  tread  of",  the  horizontal  distance  from  one  riser  to  the  next  or  from 
one  nosing  to  the  next. 

"Story",  that  portion  of  a  building  included  between  the  top  surface  of  a 
floor  and  the  top  surface  of  the  next  floor  or  roof  above,  except  that  a  space 
used  exclusively  for  the  housing  of  mechanical  services  of  the  building  shall 
not  be  considered  to  be  a  story  if  access  to  such  space  may  be  had  only  for 
maintenance  of  such  services. 

"Story,  first",  the  lowest  story  of  which  sixty-five  per  cent  or  more  of  the 
height  is  above  the  mean  grade  from  which  the  height  of  the  building  is 
measured. 

"Structure",  a  combination  of  materials  assembled  at  a  fixed  location  to 
give  support  or  shelter,  such  as  a  building,  bridge,  trestle,  tower,  frame-work, 
retaining  wall,  tank,  tunnel,  tent,  stadium,  reviewing  stand,  platform,  bin, 
fence,  sign,  flag-pole  or  the  like.  The  word  "structure"  shall  be  construed, 
where  the  context  allows,  as  though  followed  by  the  words  "or  part  thereof". 

"Unit  of  occupancy",  see  "Occupancy,  unit  of". 

"Unit  of  occupancy,  area  of",  the  maximum  horizontal  projected  area  of  a 
unit  of  occupancy. 

"Vertical  opening",  an  opening  in  a  floor  or  roof  for  giving  access  vertically 
from  the  story  below  or  above  for  light,  ventilation,  the  movement  of  persons 
or  materials  or  for  any  other  purpose. 

"Wall,  bearing",  a  wall  which  supports  a  floor,  roof  or  other  vertical  load 
in  addition  to  its  own  weight. 

"Wall,  curtain",  an  exterior,  non-bearing  wall  more  than  one  story  high 
and  not  supported  at  each  floor  level,  which  is  laterally  stayed  by  masonry 
piers  or  by  the  frame  of  the  building. 

"Wall,  enclosure",  an  interior  wall,  bearing  or  non-bearing,  which  encloses 
a  stairway,  elevator  shaft  or  other  vertical  opening. 

"Wall,  fire",  a  wall  separating  two  fire  divisions  of  a  building. 

"Wall,  non-bearing",  a  wall  which  supports  only  its  own  weight. 

"Wall,  panel",  a  non-bearing  exterior  wall  not  over  one  story  high,  or 
supported  at  each  floor  level. 

"Wall,  parapet",  a  wall  or  part  of  a  wall  above  the  roof  of  a  building. 

"Wall,  partition",  an  interior  bearing  or  non-bearing  wall,  not  over  one 
story  in  height  the  chief  function  of  which  is  to  separate  two  rooms. 

"Wall,  party",  a  wall  used  or  adapted  for  use  in  common  as  a  part  of  two 
buildings. 

(12) 


Sees.  106-107 

"Wall,  retaining",  a  wall  used  to  resist  the  lateral  displacement  of  liquid, 
granular  or  other  materials. 

(b)  In  conformity  with  the  purposes  of  this  code,  to  prescribe  the  minimum 
requirements  for  structures  and  the  maximum  utility  of  structures  consonant 
with  safety,  the  phrases  "at  least",  "not  less  than"  or  "not  more  than" 
shall  be  construed  to  precede  quantitative  specifications,  as  determined 
by  the  commissioner. 

(c)  Wherever  in  this  code  a  public  official  is  referred  to  by  the  title  of  his 
office  without  mention  of  any  municipality,  unless  the  context  otherwise 
requires,  such  reference  shall  be  to  an  official  of  the  city  of  Boston. 

(d)  Nothing  in  this  code  shall  be  held  to  prevent  the  owner  of  land  from 
transferring  to  another  his  rights  and  responsibilities  under  this  code  by  means 
of  a  lease  or  other  suitable  agreement.  The  commissioner  may  recognize 
the  person  to  whom  such  a  transfer  by  operation  of  law  or  otherwise  has  been 
made  as  the  possessor  of  such  rights  and  responsibilities  and  to  such  extent 
as  the  owner  in  receiving  applications,  issuing  permits  and  otherwise  in  en- 
forcing this  code. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  and  Ord.  1945,  ch.  6  ] 

*Sect.  107.  Scope. —  (a)  The  provisions  of  this  code  shall  apply  to 
every  building  or  structure  hereafter  erected  in  the  city  of  Boston,  except 
public  highway,  railroad  or  railway  bridges  or  trestles,  quays  or  wharves, 
buildings  owned  and  occupied  by  the  United  States  or  the  commonwealth, 
railroad  structures  and  stations  used  primarily  for  railroad  purposes,  subway 
and  elevated  railway  structures  and  stations  used  primarily  for  railway 
purposes,  voting  booths  erected  and  maintained  by  the  board  of  election 
commissioners,  prefabricated  metal  tanks  of  less  than  five  thousand  gallons 
capacity  and  tanks  exceeding  ten  thousand  gallons  capacity  for  liquids  other 
than  water,  tunnels  constructed  and  maintained  by  a  public  authority,  tents 
covering  an  area  less  than  one  hundred  square  feet,  fences  less  than  six  feet 
high,  signs  or  billboards  upon  the  ground  and  signs  less  than  one  square 
foot  in  area,  upon  or  attached  to  the  outside  of  a  structure  and  flagpoles 
less  than  twenty  feet  in  length. 

(b)  The  provisions  of  sections  one  hundred  and  eight,  one  hundred  and 
fourteen,  one  hundred  and  sixteen,  one  hundred  and  eighteen,  one  hundred 
and  nineteen,  one  hundred  and  twenty-two,  and  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
three  shall  apply  to  pre-code  buildings. 

(c)  A  pre-code  building  may  be  altered,  repaired,  enlarged,  moved,  or 
converted  to  other  uses,  only  in  conformity  with  the  following  provisions  of 
this  section  and  subject  to  permit  as  hereinafter  provided. 

(d)  A  pre-code  building  which  is  altered  or  repaired  within  any  period  of 
twelve  months,  said  alterations  or  repairs  costing  in  excess  of  fifty  per  cent 
of  its  physical  value,  shall  be  made  to  conform  to  the  requirements  of  this 
code  for  post-code  buildings.  A  pre-code  building  damaged  by  fire  or  other- 
wise in  excess  of  fifty  per  cent  of  its  physical  value  before  such  damage  shall 
be  made  to  conform  to  such  requirements,  if  repaired.  If  the  cost  of  such 
alterations  or  repairs  or  the  amount  of  such  damage  is  more  than  twenty-five 
but  not  more  than  fifty  per  cent  of  the  physical  value  of  the  building  it  shall 

(13) 


Sec.  107 

be  made  to  conform  to  such  requirements  in  the  portions  so  altered  or  repaired 
to  such  extent  as  the  commissioner  may  determine.  For  the  purposes  of  this 
paragraph  physical  value  shall  mean  the  reproduction  cost  of  the  building 
less  physical  deterioration  as  determined  by  the  building  commissioner. 

(e)  When  occupancy  of  a  pre-code  building,  or  portions  thereof  separated 
from  the  remainder  as  required  in  Part  13,  is  so  changed  that  the  hazard  is 
increased,  the  commissioner  may  require  that  said  pre-code  building  or  said 
portions  thereof  be  made  to  conform  with  the  provisions  of  this  code,  which 
will  specifically  eliminate  said  increased  hazard. 

1.  All  buildings  altered  or  repaired  shall,  in  the  opinion  of  the  building 
commissioner,  provide  structural  safety,  adequate  resistance  to  the  spread 
of  fire,  and  safe  egress  in  the  event  of  fire  to  the  occupants. 

2.  Structural  safety  shall  be  construed  to  mean  that  a  building  or 
parts  thereof  shall  sustain  twice  the  loads  and  stresses  subjected  therein  or 
thereupon  by  actual  normal  use.  Owners,  if  directed  to  do  so  by  the 
building  commissioner,  shall  demonstrate  such  structural  safety  by  actual 
load  tests  made  as  directed  by  him. 

3.  Adequate  resistance  to  the  spread  of  fire  shall  be  construed  to  mean 
protection  to  adjacent  properties  and  protection  to  egress  enclosures 
keeping  them  free  from  fire  long  enough  to  permit  the  occupants  to  evacuate 
the  building.  The  resistance  of  various  materials  and  constructions  to  fire 
shall  be  assumed  to  be  as  stated  in  this  code  or  as  otherwise  satisfactorily 
demonstrated  to  the  commissioner. 

4.  Safe  egresses  not  less  than  two  in  number  shall  be  construed  to 
mean  egress  facilities  sufficient  to  evacuate  the  building  in  three  minutes. 
Owners  of  buildings  shall,  if  directed  by  the  building  commissioner,  demon- 
strate the  time  required  to  evacuate  the  occupants  by  actual  test  conducted 
under  the  direction  of  the  commissioner. 

5.  An  electrical  fire  alarm  system  shall  be  installed,  if  it  is  necessary 
in  the  opinion  of  the  commissioner  to  meet  the  above  egress  requirements. 

(f)  A  pre-code  building  which  is  enlarged  in  floor  area  or  in  number  of 
stories  shall  be  made  to  conform  throughout  the  entire  building  to  the  require- 
ments of  this  code  in  respect  to  egress  and  fire  protection. 

(g)  A  pre-code  building  to  which  repairs  and  alterations  are  made  which 
are  not  covered  by  the  preceding  paragraphs  of  this  section,  may  be  repaired 
or  altered  with  the  same  kind  of  materials  as  those  of  which  the  building  is 
constructed,  providing  such  alterations  or  repairs  will  not  increase  an  existing 
non-conformity  or  hazard;  but  not  more  than  twenty-five  per  cent  of  the 
roof  covering  of  a  building  shall  be  replaced  in  any  period  of  twelve  months 
unless  the  entire  roof  covering  is  made  to  conform  with  the  requirements  of 
this  code  for  post-code  buildings.  New  roofing  meeting  the  requirements 
of  this  code  may  be  placed  over  existing  roofing  providing  that  it  be  properly 
supported  and  securely  fastened. 

(h)  A  pre-code  building  when  moved  to  another  location  shall  conform 
to  the  requirements  of  this  code  relative  to  the  fire  limits,  to  location  on  the 
lot  and  to  exterior  walls. 

(i)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section,  no  provision  of  this 
code  shall  be  held  to  deprive  the  health  department,  the  police  commissioner, 

(14) 


Sees.  107=109 

the  board  of  street  commissioners,  the  licensing  board,  the  fire  commissioner 

or  the  park  department  of  the  city  of  Boston  either  of  any  power  or  authority 

which  it,  he  or  they  had  on  the  effective  date  of  this  act  or  of  any  remedy 

then  existing  for  the  enforcement  of  its,  his  or  their  orders. 

(j)     Provisions  of  this   code  relating  to  buildings   shall   also   apply  to 

structures  other  than  buildings  to  such  extent  as  they  are  pertinent. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

fSect.  108.     Maintenance. —  All  buildings  or  structures,  and  all  parts 

thereof,  shall  be  maintained  in  a  safe  condition.    All  devices  or  safeguards 

which  are  required  by  this  code  in  a  building  when  erected,  altered  or  repaired, 

shall  be  maintained  in  good  working  order,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in 

section  twenty-seven  A  of  chapter  one  hundred  and  forty-eight  of  the  General 

Laws.    Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  paragraph  (d)  of  section  one  hundred 

and  six,  the  owner  shall  be  responsible  for  the  maintenance  of  all  buildings 

and  structures.    This  section  shall  apply  to  pre-code  as  well  as  to  post-code 

buildings. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

Sect.  109.  Organization. —  (a)  There  is  hereby  established  in  the  city 
of  Boston  a  department  to  be  called  the  building  department,  which  shall 
be  in  charge  of  the  building  commissioner. 

(b)  The  commissioner  shall  have  had  at  least  ten  years'  experience  as  an 
architect,  builder  or  civil  engineer,  and  shall  be  appointed  by  the  mayor 
for  a  term  of  five  years.  He  shall  receive  such  salary  as  shall  be  fixed  by 
the  city  council,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor. 

(c)  Upon  the  effective  date  of  this  code  the  building  commissioner  of 
the  building  department,  as  constituted  immediately  prior  thereto,  shall 
become  the  building  commissioner  of  the  building  department  established  by 
paragraph  (a)  of  this  section,  the  members  of  the  board  of  appeal,  as  consti- 
tuted immediately  prior  thereto,  shall  become  the  members  of  the  board  of 
appeal  established  by  paragraph  (a)  of  section  one  hundred  and  seventeen, 
the  members  of  the  board  of  examiners,  as  constituted  immediately  prior 
thereto,  shall  become  the  members  of  the  board  of  examiners  established  by 
paragraph  (a)  of  section  one  hundred  and  twenty,  and  the  licensed  master 
gasfitter  member  of  the  board  of  examiners  of  gasfitters,  as  constituted 
immediately  prior  thereto,  shall  become  the  licensed  master  gasfitter  member 
of  the  board  of  examiners  of  gasfitters  established  by  paragraph  (a)  of  section 
one  hundred  and  twenty-one,  and  each  of  said  persons  shall  thereafter  hold 
his  respective  position  until  the  expiration  of  such  period  of  time  as  shall  be 
equal  to  the  remainder  of  the  term  for  which  he  was  appointed,  unless  sooner 
removed  or  discharged  according  to  law;  and  all  of  the  employees  of  the 
building  department,  as  constituted  immediately  prior  thereto,  who  are 
subject  to  the  civil  service  laws  shall  be  reappointed  to  similar  positions  in 
the  building  department  or  the  several  boards  established  by  this  code  with 
the  same  status  and  compensation  held  and  received  by  them,  respectively, 
immediately  prior  thereto  in  the  building  department  and  the  several  boards 
established  by  this  code,  without  civil  service  examination  or  registration; 
and  the  said  building  commissioner,  and  all  such  employees  upon  such  re- 

(15) 


Sees.  109=110 

appointment,  shall  retain  all  rights  to  retirement  with  pension  that  shall 
have  accrued  or  would  thereafter  accrue  to  them,  and  their  services  shall  be 
deemed  to  have  been  continuous  to  the  same  extent  as  if  this  code  had  not 
been  passed. 

(d)  The  commissioner,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor,  may  appoint 
such  number  of  officers,  inspectors,  assistants  and  other  employees  as  the 
city  council  shall  from  time  to  time  determine.  No  person  shall  be  appointed 
as  inspector  of  construction  who  has  not  had  at  least  five  years'  experience 
as  a  builder,  civil  engineer  or  architect,  or  as  a  superintendent,  foreman  or 
competent  mechanic  in  charge  of  construction. 

(e)  The  commissioner  may  appoint  as  his  deputy  an  officer  or  other 
employee  in  the  department  who  shall,  during  the  absence  or  disability  of  the 
commissioner,  exercise  all  the  powers  of  the  commissioner. 

(f)  No  officer  or  employee  connected  with  the  department,  except  one 
whose  only  connection  is  as  a  member  of  a  board,  shall  be  financially  interested 
in  furnishing  of  labor,  material  or  appliances  for  the  construction,  alteration 
or  maintenance  of  a  building,  or  in  the  making  of  plans  or  of  specifications 
therefor,  unless  he  is  the  owner  of  such  building.  No  such  officer  or  employee 
shall  engage  in  any  work  which  is  inconsistent  with  his  duties  or  with  the 
interests  of  the  department.  The  provisions  of  this  paragraph  shall  not 
apply  to  the  members  of  boards  established  by  this  code. 

(g)  The  commissioner  shall  keep  a  record  of  the  business  of  the  depart- 
ment. The  records  of  the  department  shall  be  open  to  public  inspection. 
The  commissioner  shall  not,  however,  be  required  to  allow  inspection  of  the 
plans  of  buildings  except  upon  request  of  the  owner.  If  such  request  is 
made  more  than  two  months  after  completion  of  the  work  described  in 
the  plans,  the  commissioner  shall  allow  such  inspection  only  upon  payment 
of  such  fee  as  the  commissioner,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor,  may  establish. 

*Sect.  110.  Application  for  Permit. —  (a)  Whoever  desires  in  the 
city  of  Boston  to  erect,  enlarge,  alter,  substantially  repair,  move,  demolish 
or  change  the  occupancy  of  a  building  or  structure,  or  to  install,  alter  or 
substantially  repair  plumbing,  gasfitting,  fire  extinguishing  apparatus  or 
elevators,  or  to  install  a  steam  boiler,  furnace,  heater,  or  other  heat  pro- 
ducing apparatus  the  installation  of  which  is  regulated  by  this  code,  or  to 
install  an  engine  or  dynamo,  or  to  cause  any  such  work  to  be  done,  shall 
first  make  application  to  the  building  commissioner  and  obtain  a  permit 
therefor. 

No  engine,  dynamo,  boiler  or  furnace  shall  be  placed  in  any  building 
without  a  permit  from  the  commissioner.  Every  application  for  such  permit 
shall  be  in  writing,  shall  be  filed  with  the  commissioner  and  shall  set  forth 
the  character  of  the  building,  the  size,  power  and  purpose  of  the  apparatus, 
and  such  other  information  as  the  commissioner  may  require.  The  com- 
missioner may,  after  an  examination  of  the  premises  described  in  the  applica- 
tion, and  after  hearing  the  applicant  and  any  objectors,  issue  a  permit  for 
placing  a  boiler  or  furnace  on  such  premises,  upon  such  conditions  as  he 
shall  prescribe,  or  he  may  refuse  such  permit.  If  the  application  is  for 
anything  other  than  a  boiler  or  furnace,  the  applicant  shall  publish  in  at 
least  two  daily  newspapers  published  in  the  city  of  Boston,  and  on  at  least 

(16) 


Sec.  110 

three  days  in  each,  and,  if  so  directed  by  the  commissioner,  shall  also  post 
conspicuously  on  the  premises  a  copy  of  the  application,  and  shall  deliver 
copies  thereof  to  such  persons  as  the  commissioner  may  designate. 

If  no  objection  is  filed  with  the  commissioner  before  the  expiration  of 
ten  days  after  the  time  of  the  first  publication  of  notice,  or  within  ten  days 
of  the  delivery  and  first  posting  of  the  notice,  if  such  delivery  or  posting  is 
required,  the  commissioner  shall  if  the  arrangement,  location  and  construction 
of  the  proposed  apparatus  is  proper  and  in  accordance  with  the  provisions 
of  this  code,  issue  a  permit  for  the  same.  If  objection  is  filed,  the  application 
shall  be  referred  to  the  board  of  appeal  which  may  in  its  discretion  require 
the  deposit  by  the  objector  of  a  reasonable  sum  as  security  for  the  payment 
of  the  costs. 

After  such  notice  as  the  board  shall  order  it  shall  hear  the  same  and  shall 
direct  the  commissioner  to  issue  a  permit  under  such  conditions  as  it  may 
prescribe,  or  to  withhold  the  same.  If  the  permit  is  refused,  the  applicant 
and  if  it  is  granted  the  objectors  shall  pay  such  costs  as  the  board  may  order. 

The  commissioner  may,  from  time  to  time,  after  public  notice  and  hearing, 
prescribe  the  conditions  on  which  furnaces,  boilers,  or  other  steam  generators 
and  hot  water  heaters  may  be  maintained  in  buildings,  and,  if  any  person 
interested  objects  to  such  conditions  and  appeals  from  his  decision  establishing 
the  same,  the  appeal  shall  be  referred  to  the  board  of  appeal,  and  thereupon 
said  board  shall  prescribe  the  conditions. 

(b)  Each  application  for  a  permit  with  the  required  fee  shall  be  filed 
with  the  commissioner  on  a  form  furnished  by  him  and  shall  contain  a  general 
description  of  the  proposed  work  and  its  location.  It  shall  be  signed  by  the 
owner  or  his  authorized  agent,  and  before  a  permit  is  issued  such  application 
shall  also  be  signed  by  the  person  who  is  to  perform  or  take  charge  of  the  work 
covered  by  such  permit. 

(c)  Each  application  hereunder  shall  indicate  the  proposed  occupancy 
of  all  parts  of  the  building  and  of  that  portion  of  the  lot,  if  any,  not  covered 
by  the  building,  and  shall  contain  such  other  information  as  may  be  required 
by  the  commissioner. 

(d)  The  commissioner  may  require  the  material  facts  contained  in  each 
such  application  to  be  certified  by  the  applicant  under  oath. 

(e)  When  required  by  the  commissioner,  copies  of  plans  drawn  with 
sufficient  clarity  and  detail  to  indicate  the  nature  and  character  of  the  work 
shall  accompany  every  such  application,  and  shall  be  filed  in  duplicate  with 
the  commissioner.  Such  plans  shall  contain  information,  in  the  form  of 
notes  or  otherwise,  as  to  the  quality  of  materials  where  quality  is  essential 
to  conformity  with  this  code.  Such  information  shall  be  specific,  and  this 
code  shall  not  be  cited  as  a  whole  or  in  part,  nor  shall  the  term  "legal"  or  its 
equivalent  be  used,  as  a  substitute  for  specific  information. 

(i)  The  commissioner  may  require  details,  computations,  stress  diagrams 
and  other  data  necessary  to  describe  the  construction  and  basis  of  calculations. 
He  may  also  require  plans  showing  the  location  of  the  proposed  building 
and  of  every  existing  building  on  the  lot.  He  may  require  structural  plans 
and  computations  to  bear  the  signature  of  the  architect  or  engineer  in  charge 

(17) 


Sees.  110-111 

of  the  structural  design,  and  plot  plans  to  bear  the  signature  of  an  approved 
surveyor. 

(g)  An  application  for  a  permit  for  any  proposed  work  shall  be  deemed  to 
have  been  abandoned  six  months  after  the  date  of  filing,  unless  within  such 
time  a  permit  shall  have  been  issued;  provided,  that  for  cause  one  or  more 
extensions  of  time  for  periods  of  not  exceeding  ninety  days  each  may  be 
allowed  in  writing  by  the  commissioner. 

(h)  The  commissioner  shall  examine  each  application  for  permit  and  the 
plans  and  computations  filed  therewith  and  shall  ascertain  by  examination 
whether  the  construction  indicated  and  described  is  in  accordance  with  the 
requirements  of  this  code  and  of  all  other  pertinent  laws  or  ordinances. 

(i)  The  commissioner  may  accept  an  application  for  a  permit  accompanied 
by  plans  and  computations  and  an  affidavit  filed  therewith  by  a  competent 
architect  or  engineer  to  the  effect  that  said  plans  and  computations  are  in 
accordance  with  the  requirements  of  this  code  and  of  all  other  pertinent  laws 

or  ordinances. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  191^3,  ch.  2  ] 
fSect.  111.  Permits. —  (a)  If  the  commissioner  is  satisfied  that  the 
work  described  in  an  application  for  permit  conforms  to  the  requirements 
of  this  code  and  other  pertinent  laws  and  ordinances,  and  if  the  person  desig- 
nated by  signature  on  the  application  as  the  person  who  will  perform  or  take 
charge  of  the  work  is  duly  licensed,  the  commissioner  shall  issue  a  permit 
therefor  to  the  applicant;  provided,  that  if  the  work  to  be  done,  in  the  opinion 
of  the  commissioner,  is  of  minor  importance,  and  of  such  simple  character 
that  its  execution  by  an  unlicensed  person  will  not  endanger  the  public  or  any 
workman  engaged  thereon,  the  commissioner  need  not  require  the  signature 
to  be  that  of  a  licensed  person  but  may  issue  the  permit  applied  for  after 
entering  upon  the  application  his  reason  for  waiving  such  requirement. 

(b)  If  the  application  for  a  permit  and  the  plans  filed  therewith  describe 
work  which  does  not  conform  to  the  requirements  of  this  code  or  other  per- 
tinent laws  or  ordinances,  the  commissioner  shall  not  issue  a  permit,  but  shall 
return  the  plans  to  the  applicant  with  his  refusal  to  issue  such  permit.  Such 
refusal  when  requested  shall  be  in  writing  and  shall  contain  the  reasons 
therefor. 

(c)  Permits  for  ordinary  repairs,  for  minor  alterations  not  involving  vital 
structural  changes,  may  be  issued  upon  presentation  of  an  application  on  a 
special  form,  to  be  furnished  by  the  commissioner,  and  payment  of  the  required 
fee. 

(d)  When  application  for  permit  to  erect  or  enlarge  a  building  has  been 
filed,  and  pending  issuance  of  such  permit,  the  commissioner  may,  in  his 
discretion,  upon  payment  of  the  required  fee,  issue  a  special  permit  for  the 
foundations  of  such  building.  The  holder  of  such  a  special  permit  -shall 
proceed  only  at  his  own  risk  and  without  assurance  that  a  permit  for  the 
superstructure  will  be  granted. 

(e)  The  commissioner  shall  act  upon  an  application  for  a  permit  with 
plans  as  filed,  or  as  amended,  without  unreasonable  or  unnecessary  delay. 
A  permit  issued  shall  be  construed  to  be  a  license  to  proceed  with  the  work 
and  shall  not  be  construed  as  authority  to  violate,  cancel,  alter  or  set  aside  any 

(18) 


Sec.  !  1 1 

of  the  provisions  of  this  code,  nor  shall  such  issuance  of  a  permit  prevent  the 
commissioner  from  thereafter  requiring  correction  of  errors  in  plans  or  in 
construction  or  of  violations  of  this  code.  Any  permit  issued  shall  become 
invalid  unless  the  work  authorized  by  it  shall  have  been  commenced  within 
six  months  after  its  issuance;  provided,  that  for  cause  one  or  more  extensions 
of  time,  for  periods  not  exceeding  three  months  each,  may  be  allowed  in  writing 
by  the  commissioner,  except  that  in  no  event  shall  the  time  for  commencing  the 
work  be  extended  beyond  eighteen  months  after  the  issuance  of  the  permit. 
Any  permit  issued  may  be  revoked  by  the  commissioner  at  any  time  after 
notice  and  hearing  if  there  is  a  false  statement  or  misrepresentation  of  a 
material  fact  in  the  application  for  the  permit  or  in  the  plans  or  computations 
filed  therewith,  or  if  the  work  authorized  by  the  permit  violates  any  provision 
of  this  code  or  other  provision  of  law  or  the  permit  is  otherwise  issued  in 
error,  or  if  in  the  course  of  the  work  there  is  any  violation  of  any  provision 
of  this  code  or  other  provision  of  law,  or  if  after  commencement  of  the  work 
there  is  unreasonable  delay  in  completing  the  work,  or  if  there  is  other  good 
cause  for  revocation  of  the  permit. 

(f)  When  the  commissioner  issues  a  permit  he  shall  endorse  in  writing,  or 
stamp,  duplicate  sets  of  plans  "Approved".  One  set  of  plans  so  approved 
shall  be  retained  by  the  commissioner  and  the  other  set  shall  be  returned  to  the 
applicant,  shall  be  kept  at  the  site  of  work  and  shall  be  open  to  inspection  at 
all  reasonable  times  by  the  commissioner  or  his  authorized  representative. 

(g)  An  architect,  engineer  or  builder  who  is  preparing  plans  for  a  building 
or  structure  in  the  city  of  Boston  may  make  written  request  of  the  com- 
missioner for  an  interpretation  of  this  code  as  specifically  applicable  to  such 
building  or  structure.  The  request  shall  be  made  on  a  form  furnished  by  the 
commissioner,  shall  indicate  the  specific  provision  of  this  code  as  to  which 
interpretation  is  so  desired,  shall  be  accompanied  by  the  required  fee,  and 
shall  contain  or  be  accompanied  by  a  description  of  the  proposed  work  with 
plans  sufficient  to  enable  the  commissioner  to  form  an  opinion.  The  com- 
missioner shall  make  reply  in  writing  within  thirty  days  after  receipt  of  the 
request  either  that  the  description  of  the  proposed  work  is  inadequate  to 
form  the  basis  of  an  opinion,  or  that  he  discerns  no  reason  under  the  indicated 
provision  of  this  code  for  disallowing  the  proposed  construction,  or  that  his 
interpretation  of  such  provision  will  not  allow  the  proposed  construction  for 
reasons  which  he  shall  state.  If  the  commissioner  shall  interpret  such  pro- 
vision as  not  allowing  the  proposed  construction,  such  interpretation  shall 
be  deemed  a  disallowance  thereof  and  any  person  deeming  himself  aggrieved 
thereby  may  appeal  from  such  disallowance  as  provided  in  section  one  hundred 
and  eighteen. 

(h)  Whenever  a  permit  is  to  be  issued  in  reliance  upon  an  affidavit  as 
provided  in  paragraph  (i)  of  section  one  hundred  and  ten  or  whenever  the 
work  to  be  covered  by  a  permit  involves  construction  under  conditions  which, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  commissioner,  are  hazardous  or  complex,  the  commis- 
sioner shall  require  that  the  architect  or  engineer  who  signed  the  affidavit 
or  made  the  plans  or  computations  shall  supervise  such  work,  be  responsible 
for  its  conformity  with  the  approved  plans,  and  forthwith  upon  its  completion 

(19) 


Sees.  111-114 

make  and  file  with  the  commissioner  written  affidavit  that  the  work  has  been 
done  in  conformity  with  the  approved  plans  and  with  the  structural  provisions 
of  this  code.  In  the  event  that  such  architect  or  engineer  is  not  available 
a  competent  person  whose  qualifications  are  approved  by  the  commissioner 
shall  be  employed  by  the  owner  in  his  stead. 

[f  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  and  Ord.  1953,  ch.  7] 
JSect.  112.  Fees. —  (a)  Whoever  applies  for  a  permit  shall  pay,  at 
the  time  of  filing  his  application,  the  fee  established  under  authority  of  chapter 
two  hundred  and  ninety-seven  of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  thirty- 
one  as  amended  by  Chapter  173  of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  thirty- 
nine. 

(b)  The  commissioner,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor,  may  establish 
and  from  time  to  time  alter  or  amend  fees  — 

(1)  For  producing  for  inspection  the  plans  of  buildings.,  as  provided  in 
section  one  hundred  and  nine. 

(2)  For  issuance  of  a  special  foundation  permit,  as  provided  in  para- 
graph (d)  of  section  one  hundred  and  eleven. 

(3)  For  written  interpretation  of  this  code  given  for  the  purpose  of  an 
appeal  from  a  disallowance  as  provided  in  paragraph  (g)  of  said  section  one 
hundred  and  eleven. 

(c)  No  fee  paid  in  connection  with  an  application  for  a  permit  shall  be 

returned,  whether  or  not  the  permit  is  granted. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 
Note— Chapter  297  of  the  Acts  of  1931  was  affected  by  Stat.  1949, 
ch.  222,  which  gave  to  the  City  of  Boston  authority  to  fix  certain  fees 
and  charges. 
Sect.    113.     Inspection. —  (a)     The   commissioner   shall   examine  each 
site,  application  for  permit  to  erect  or  enlarge  a  building  or  structure  upon 
which  has  been  received,  and  shall  examine  all  buildings,  applications  for 
permit  to  enlarge,  alter,  repair,  move,  demolish  or  change  the  occupancy  of 
which  has  been  received.    He  shall  inspect  all  such  buildings  and  structures 
from  time  to  time  during  and  finally  upon  the  completion  of  their  erection, 
enlargement,   alteration,  repair,  moving  or  demolition.     He  shall  make  a 
record  of  every  such  examination  and  inspection  and  of  all  violations  of  this 
code.    The  publication  of  such  records  shall  be  privileged. 

(b)  No  building  operation  requiring  a  permit  shall  be  commenced  until 
the  permit  holder  or  his  authorized  agent  shall  have  posted  a  building  permit 
card  in  a  conspicuous  place  protected  from  the  weather  on  the  front  of  the 
premises  and  in  such  a  position  as  to  permit  the  commissioner  to  make  the 
required  entries  thereon  respecting  inspection  of  the  work.  Such  card  shall 
be  preserved  and  shall  remain  posted  until  the  completion  of  the  work. 
*Sect.  114.  Posting  Floor  Loads. —  No  pre-code  or  post-code  building 
shall  be  occupied  for  any  purpose  which  will  cause  the  floors  thereof  to  be 
loaded  beyond  their  safe  capacity  as  specified  in  this  code;  provided,  that 
the  commissioner  may  permit  occupancy  of  a  building  for  mercantile,  com- 
mercial or  industrial  purposes,  by  a  specific  business,  when  he  is  satisfied 
that  such  safe  capacity  will  not  thereby  be  exceeded,  even  though  the  class  of 
occupancy  of  such  business,  under  this  code,  requires  a  greater  load  capacity. 

(20) 


Sees.  114-116 

In  every  such  case  the  safe  floor  loads,  as  determined  by  the  commissioner, 
shall  be  marked  on  metal  plates  of  approved  design  which  shall  be  supplied 
and  securely  affixed  by  the  owner  of  the  building  in  a  conspicuous  place  in 
each  story  to  which  they  relate.  Such  plates  shall  not  be  removed  or  defaced, 
and  if  lost,  removed  or  defaced  shall  be  replaced  by  such  owner.  No  such 
owner  shall  place  or  permit  to  be  placed,  or  to  remain  on  any  floor  of  a  building 
a  greater  load  than  the  safe  load  so  determined  and  posted. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 
fSect.  115.  Annual  Report. — The  commissioner  shall  annually,  not 
later  than  May  first,  submit  a  report  to  the  mayor,  covering  the  work  of  the 
department  during  the  preceding  calendar  year,  and  shall  incorporate  in  said 
report  a  summary  of  the  decisions  of  the  board  of  appeal,  a  summary  of  the 
proceedings  of  the  board  of  examiners  and  of  the  board  of  examiners  of  gas 
fitters,  during  said  year,  and  his  recommendations  as  to  desirable  amend- 
ments of  this  code. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  2  ] 
{Sect.  116.  Powers  and  Duties  of  Building  Commissioner. — (a) 
The  commissioner  and  the  health  commissioner  shall  severally  enforce  the 
provisions  of  this  code  relative  to  his  powers  and  duties  and  they  may,  them- 
selves or  by  their  respective  duly  authorized  representatives,  enter  any  build- 
ing or  premises  in  said  city  to  perform  any  duty  imposed  upon  them,  respec- 
tively, by  this  code. 

(b)  Upon  notice  from  the  commissioner  that  work  on  any  building  or 
structure  is  being  done  contrary  to  the  provisions  of  this  code  or  in  a  dangerous 
or  unsafe  manner,  such  work  shall  be  immediately  stopped.  Such  notice  shall 
be  in  writing  and  given  to  the  owner  of  the  property,  or  his  agent,  or  the 
licensed  builder  or  mechanic  doing  the  work,  and  shall  state  the  conditions 
under  which  work  may  be  resumed. 

(c)  Whoever  hinders  or  prevents,  or  attempts  to  hinder  or  prevent,  the 
commissioner  or  his  authorized  representative  from  entering  a  building,  struc- 
ture or  enclosure,  or  part  thereof,  in  the  performance  of  his  duty  in  the 
enforcement  of  any  provision  of  this  code  shall  be  punished  by  a  fine  of  not 
less  than  fifty  nor  more  than  one  hundred  dollars.  Each  day  during  any 
portion  of  which  such  hindering  continues  shall  be  considered  a  separate 
offence. 

(d)  Every  building  of  which  the  exits  are  insufficient  shall  be  provided 
with  exits  satisfactory  to  the  commissioner;  and  every  building  which  is 
dangerous  or  unsafe  shall  be  made  safe  or  removed;  or  every  such  building 
shall  be  vacated  forthwith  on  order  of  the  commissioner,  with  the  approval  of 
the  mayor.  Such  order  shall  be  in  writing  and  shall  be  addressed  and  de- 
livered, or  mailed,  postage  prepaid,  to  the  owner  or  tenant,  if  he  is  known  and 
can  be  found,  or  otherwise  by  posting  an  attested  copy  of  the  order  in  a  con- 
spicuous place  upon  an  external  wall  of  the  building,  and  shall  state  the  con- 
ditions under  which  the  building  may  again  be  used  or  occupied.  An  attested 
copy  so  posted  shall  not  be  defaced  or  removed  without  the  approval  of  the 
commissioner.  If  in  the  opinion  of  the  commissioner  the  public  safety  so 
requires  the  commissioner,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor,  may  at  once  enter 
the  building  or  other  structure  which  he  finds  unsafe  or  dangerous,  or  land 

(21) 


Sec.  116 

on  which  it  stands,  or  the  abutting  land  or  buildings,  with  such  assistance  as 
he  may  require,  and  make  safe  or  remove  said  unsafe  or  dangerous  building 
or  other  structure  and  may  protect  the  public  by  a  proper  fence  or  otherwise! 
as  may  be  necessary,  and  for  this  purpose  may  close  a  public  or  private  way. 

(e)  A  claim  for  the  expense  incurred  by  the  commissioner  under  paragraph 
(d)  shall  constitute  a  debt  due  the  city  upon  completion  of  the  work  and 
rendering  to  the  owner  of  an  account  therefor  and  recoverable  from  the  owner 
in  an  action  of  contract.  Said  debt,  together  with  interest  thereon  at  the  rate 
of  six  per  cent  per  annum  from  the  date  upon  which  said  debt  became  due, 
shall  constitute  a  lien  upon  the  real  estate  on  which  the  expense  was  incurred 
in  the  manner  hereafter  provided.  Such  lien  shall  take  effect  upon  the  filing, 
within  ninety  days  after  the  debt  became  due,  for  record  in  the  registry  oi 
deeds  for  Suffolk  county,  or  in  the  case  of  registered  land  with  the  assistant 
recorder  for  the  Suffolk  district,  of  a  statement  of  the  claim,  signed  by  the 
commissioner,  setting  forth  the  amount  claimed  without  interest.  Such  lien 
shall  continue  for  two  years  from  the  first  day  of  October  next  following  the 
date  of  filing  said  statement.  Such  lien  may  be  dissolved  by  filing  for  record 
in  such  registry  of  deeds  or  with  said  assistant  recorder,  as  the  case  may  be> 
a  certificate  from  the  collector  of  taxes  that  the  debt  for  which  such  lien 
attached,  together  with  interest  and  costs  thereon,  has  been  paid  or  legally 
abated.  The  collector  shall  have  the  same  powers  and  be  subject  to  the  same 
duties  with  respect  to  such  claim  as  in  the  case  of  the  annual  taxes  upon  real 
estate,  and  the  provisions  of  law  relative  to  the  collection  of  such  annual  taxes, 
the  sale  of  land  for  the  non-payment  thereof,  and  the  redemption  of  land  so 
sold  shall  apply. 

(i)  The  owner  of  the  real  estate  to  which  a  lien  has  attached,  as  provided 
in  paragraph  (e),  within  ninety  days  after  the  statement  of  said  lien  was  filed 
in  the  registry  of  deeds  or  with  said  assistant  recorder,  as  the  case  may  be, 
may  appeal  to  the  municipal  court  of  the  city  of  Boston,  which  shall  hear  and 
determine  after  a  hearing  whether  the  amount  of  the  claim  is  more  than  the 
amount  actually  expended  to  make  safe  or  remove  the  building  or  structure,  if 
amount  is  more,  said  court  may  reduce  the  amount  of  the  claim  to  the  amount 
so  actually  expended. 

(g)  Any  requirement  necessary  for  the  strength  or  stability  of  a  pre-code 
or  proposed  structure  or  for  the  safety  of  the  occupants  thereof,  not  specif- 
ically covered  by  this  code,  shall  be  determined  by  the  commissioner  subject 
to  appeal  to  the  board  of  appeal. 

(h)  The  commissioner  shall  examine  every  building  reported  as  dangerous 
or  damaged,  and  shall  make  a  written  record  of  such  examination,  stating 
the  nature  and  estimated  amount  of  the  damage,  and  the  purpose  for  which 
the  building  was  used,  and  in  case  of  fire  the  probable  origin  thereof. 

(i)  The  commissioner  and  the  health  commissioner  shall  from  time  to 
time,  as  either  deems  proper,  inspect  the  gas  fixtures  and  appliances  in  any 
building  and  shall  make  such  rules,  regulations  and  requirements  relating 
thereto  as  they  deem  safety  requires,  and  the  owner  of  such  building  shall 
comply  therewith.    The  materials  used  and  work  performed  in  gas  fitting 

(22) 


Sees.  116-117 

shall  be  subject  to  such  regulations  as  shall  be  made  by  the  health  commis- 
sioner and  the  building  commissioner. 

(j)    The  commissioner  shall  make  and  issue  rules  and  regulations  governing 
the  tearing  down  of  buildings. 

(k)  The  provisions  of  this  section  shall  apply  to  pre-code  as  well  as  post- 
code buildings. 

(I)  Whoever  desires  to  substitute  for  the  materials  or  methods  covered 
by  this  code,  materials  or  methods  of  construction  or  maintenance  not  covered 
thereby,  shall  present  to  the  commissioner  plans,  methods  of  analysis,  and 
tests  or  other  information  substantiating  the  analysis  of  the  system  or  qual- 
ities of  the  material  and  shall  make  such  additional  tests  or  present  satis- 
factory evidence  of  such  tests  as  the  commissioner  may  require.  The  costs 
of  any  tests  required  to  determine  acceptability  of  substitute  materials  or 
methods  shall  be  paid  by  the  applicant.  When  the  strength  of  any  construc- 
tion cannot  be  satisfactorily  determined  by  the  application  of  accepted  en- 
gineering principles,  its  safe  strength  shall  be  determined  as  one  sixth  of  the 
ultimate  strength  evidenced  by  tests  of  full  size  units  or  assemblies  thereof 
of  such  construction  so  loaded  as  to  produce  critical  stresses.  Such  materials 
or  methods  of  construction  shall  not  be  used  until  after  the  commissioner 
has  issued  regulations  fixing  the  practices  to  be  followed  but  no  such  regula- 
tion shall  have  the  effect  of  altering  the  working  stresses  for  any  material 
herein  mentioned  or  of  reducing  the  fire-resistive  and  fire-protective  require- 
ments of  this  code. 

[  XAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ck.  2  ] 
*Sect.  117.  Board  of  Appeal. —  (a)  There  is  hereby  established  in 
the  city  of  Boston  a  board,  to  be  called  the  board  of  appeal,  and  to  consist 
of  five  members  appointed  by  the  mayor  in  the  following  manner:  —  One 
member  from  two  candidates,  one  to  be  nominated  by  the  Boston  Real  Estate 
Exchange  and  one  by  the  Massachusetts  Real  Estate  Exchange;  one  member 
from  two  candidates,  one  to  be  nominated  by  the  Boston  Society  of  Architects 
and  one  by  the  Boston  Society  of  Civil  Engineers;  one  member  from  three 
candidates,  one  to  be  nominated  by  the  Master  Builders  Association,  one  by 
the  Building  Trades  Employers'  Association  and  one  by  the  Building  Con- 
tractors Association  of  Massachusetts,  Inc. ;  one  member  from  two  candidates 
to  be  nominated  by  the  Building  Trades  Council  of  Boston  and  Vicinity; 
and  one  member  selected  by  the  mayor. 

(b)  Upon  the  expiration  of  the  term  of  office  of  a  member  of  said  board  in 
office  on  the  effective  date  of  this  code  his  successor  shall  be  appointed  for  the 
term  of  five  years;  and  subsequent  appointments  to  said  board  shall  be  for 
terms  of  five  years  each.  Vacancies  shall  be  filled  for  an  unexpired  term  in 
the  manner  in  which  original  appointments  are  required  to  be  made.  Each 
member  of  the  board  of  appeal  shall  receive  for  every  day  or  part  thereof  of 
actual  service  twenty  dollars  or  such  other  sum  as  may  from  time  to  time  be 
fixed  by  the  city  council  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor;  but  no  member 
shall  so  receive  in  any  one  year  more  than  fifteen  hundred  dollars  or  such 
other  sum  as  may  from  time  to  time  be  fixed  by  the  city  council  with  the 
approval  of  the  mayor.    No  member  shall  act  in  a  case  in  which  he  has  a 

(23) 


Sees.  117-119 

personal  interest,  and  when  a  member  is  so  disqualified,  or  absent,  the  remain- 
ing members  shall  designate  a  substitute. 

Note — Chapter  6  of  the  Ordinances  of  1952  provides:  "Each  member  of 
the  board  of  appeal  shall  receive  for  every  day  or  part  thereof  of  actual 
service  twenty-five  dollars;  but  in  no  event  shall  any  member  of  said  board 
receive  in  any  one  year  more  than  thirty-five  hundred  dollars  in  the  ag- 
gregate for  services  rendered  by  him  under  the  building  code  and  the 
zoning  law.     .     .     . "    Effective  January  1,  1953. 

(c)  Members  of  said  board  shall  be  residents  of  or  engaged  in  business  in 
the  city  of  Boston. 

(d)  Said  board  shall  cause  to  be  made  a  detailed  record  of  all  its  pro- 
ceedings, which  shall  set  forth  the  reasons  for  its  decisions,  the  vote  of  each 
member  participating  therein,  the  absence  of  a  member,  the  name  of  his 
substitute  and  any  failure  of  a  member  to  vote. 

(e)  The  board  shall  establish  rules  and  regulations  for  its  own  procedure 
not  inconsistent  with  this  code. 

[*  As  amended  by  Stat.  1949,  ch.  201,  and  Stat.  1952,  ch.  212  ] 
Sect.  118.  Appeals. —  (a)  A  person  whose  application  for  a  permit 
has  been  refused  by  the  commissioner  may  appeal  to  said  board  of  appeal 
within  ninety  days  thereafter.  A  person  who  has  been  ordered  by  the  com- 
missioner to  incur  expense  may  so  appeal  therefrom  within  thirty  days  of  the 
date  of  such  order,  except  that,  in  case  of  a  building  or  structure  which,  in 
the  opinion  of  the  commissioner,  is  unsafe  or  dangerous,  the  commissioner 
may  in  his  order  limit  the  time  for  such  appeal  to  a  shorter  period.  A  person 
aggrieved  by  an  adverse  interpretation  of  this  code  and  a  disallowance  by  the 
commissioner  of  proposed  construction  thereunder,  as  provided  in  section  one 
hundred  and  eleven,  may  so  appeal  from  such  disallowance  within  thirty  days 
after  the  date  thereof.  Appeals  hereunder  shall  be  on  forms  provided  by  the 
commissioner  and  shall  be  accompanied  by  such  fee  as  may  be  established  by 
the  commissioner,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor. 

(b)  The  commissioner  may  refer  without  fee  to  the  board  of  appeal  for 
its  decision  such  cases  as,  in  his  opinion,  justice  requires. 

fSect.  119.  Decisions  of  the  Board  of  Appeal. —  (a)  The  board 
of  appeal,  when  so  appealed  to  and  after  a  hearing,  may  vary  the  application 
of  any  provision  of  this  code  to  any  particular  case  when  in  its  opinion  the 
enforcement  thereof  would  do  manifest  injustice,  provided  that  the  decision 
of  the  board  shall  not  conflict  with  the  spirit  of  any  provision  of  this  code. 

(b)  Every  decision  of  said  board  shall  be  in  writing,  shall  indicate  the 
vote  of  each  member  upon  the  decision,  and  if  it  is  to  vary  the  application 
of  any  provision  of  this  code  or  modify  an  order  of  the  commissioner,  shall 
require  the  assent  of  at  least  four  members.  Every  decision  shall  promptly 
be  filed  in  the  office  of  the  commissioner,  and  shall  be  open  to  public  inspec- 
tion; a  certified  copy  shall  be  sent  by  mail  or  otherwise  to  the  appellant  and 
a  copy  shall  be  kept  publicly  posted  in  the  office  of  the  commissioner  for 
two  weeks  after  filing. 

(c)  A  decision  of  said  board  to  vary  the  application  of  any  provision  of 
this  code  or  modify  an  order  of  the  commissioner  shall  specify  in  what  manner 

(24) 


Sees.  119-120 


such  variation  or  modification,  respectively,  is  made,  the  conditions  upon 
which  it  is  made  and  the  reasons  therefor. 

(d)  Said  board  shall  in  every  case  reach  a  decision  without  unreasonable 
or  unnecessary  delay. 

(e)  If  the  refusal,  order  or  disallowance  of  the  commissioner  is  reversed 
or  modified,  or  the  application  of  any  provision  of  this  code  is  varied  by  a 
decision  of  said  board,  the  commissioner  shall  immediately  take  action  in 
accordance  with  such  decision;  but  no  decision  of  said  board  shall  be  regarded 
as  establishing  a  precedent  or  be  held  to  amend  this  code  or  the  commis- 
sioner's interpretation  thereof. 

(f)  A  person  aggrieved  by  a  decision  of  said  board,  whether  previously 
a  party  to  the  proceeding  or  not,  or  a  municipal  officer  or  board,  may,  within 
fifteen  days  after  the  filing  of  such  decision  in  the  office  of  the  commissioner, 
bring  a  petition  in  the  supreme  judicial  court  for  the  county  of  Suffolk  for  a 
writ  of  certiorari  to  correct  errors  of  law  in  such  decision,  and  the  provisions 
of  section  four  of  chapter  two  hundred  and  forty-nine  of  the  General  Laws 
shall,  except  as  hereinbefore  provided,  apply  to  such  petition. 

The  person  filing  the  petition  shall  file  a  bond  with  sufficient  surety,  to  be 
approved  by  the  court,  for  such  sum  as  shall  be  fixed  by  the  court,  to  indemnify 
and  save  harmless  the  person  or  persons  in  whose  favor  the  decision  was 
rendered  from  all  damages  and  costs  which  they  may  sustain  in  case  the 
decision  of  said  board  is  affirmed.  In  case  the  decision  of  the  board  is  affirmed 
the  court,  on  motion,  shall  assess  damages,  and  execution  shall  issue  therefor. 
[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 
JSect.  120.  Board  of  Examiners. —  (a)  There  is  hereby  established 
in  the  City  of  Boston  a  Board  of  Examiners  to  consist  of  three  members 
appointed  by  the  Mayor.  The  Board  shall  consist  of  an  engineer  or  architect 
with  at  least  five  years'  experience  in  the  City  of  Boston,  a  contractor  or 
person  well  qualified  in  the  supervision  of  construction  work  with  at  least 
five  years'  experience  in  the  City  of  Boston,  and  a  lawyer  or  other  person 
with  proper  legal  qualifications.  Said  Board  shall  exercise  the  powers  and 
perform  the  duty  herein  provided.  Upon  the  expiration  of  the  term  of  office 
of  a  member  of  said  Board  in  office  on  the  effective  date  of  this  code,  his 
successor  shall  be  appointed  for  the  term  of  three  years;  and  subsequent 
appointments  to  said  Board  shall  be  for  terms  of  three  years  each.  Vacancies 
shall  be  filled  by  appointments  by  the  Mayor  for  the  remainder  of  the  un- 
expired term.  Each  member  of  the  board  of  examiners  shall  receive  for 
every  day  or  part  thereof  of  actual  service  ten  dollars  or  such  other  sum  as 
may  from  time  to  time  be  fixed  by  the  city  council  with  the  approval  of  the 
mayor;  but  no  member  shall  so  receive  in  any  one  year  more  than  one  thousand 
dollars  or  such  other  sum  as  may  from  time  to  time  be  fixed  by  the  city 
council  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor. 

Note — Section  6  of  the  Ordinances  of  1952  provides:  "Each  member  of 
the  board  of  examiners,  and  the  appointive  member  of  the  board  of  ex- 
aminers of  gasfitters,  shall  receive  for  every  day  or  part  thereof  of  actual 
service  fifteen  dollars,  bat  in  no  event  more  than  fifteen  hundred  dollars 
in  any  one  year. " 

(25) 


Sec.  120 

(b)  Said  board  shall  hold  examinations,  under  rules  and  regulations 
adopted  by  it,  of  persons  desiring  to  be  registered  as  qualified  to  have  charge 
or  control  of  the  construction,  alteration,  removal  or  tearing  down  of  build- 
ings or  structures,  or  the  installation  or  repair  of  elevators  and  escalators. 
Due  notice  of  the  time  and  place  for  such  examinations  shall  be  posted  in 
the  office  of  the  building  department  and  published  in  the  City  Record. 

Note — Stat.  1945,  Chap.  626,  provides  that  the  licensing  of  elevator  and 
escalator  mechanics  shall  be  under  the  jurisdiction  of  the  State  Depart- 
ment of  Public  Safety. 

(c)  Said  board  shall  establish  various  classes  of  persons  to  be  registered, 
shall  determine  the  qualifications  required  for  each  class,  and  after  examina- 
tion shall  register  in  each  class  the  persons  found  to  possess  the  requisite 
qualifications  therefor.  The  name  and  address  of  each  person  so  found  to 
be  qualified,  with  the  designation  of  the  class  in  which  he  is  registered,  shall 
thereupon  be  certified  by  said  board  to  the  commissioner,  who  shall  make 
a  record  thereof,  which  shall  be  open  to  public  inspection. 

Cd)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  section  one  hundred  and  eleven, 
all  work  of  erecting,  enlarging,  altering,  repairing,  moving  and  demolishing 
of  buildings  or  structures  and  installing  and  repairing  of  elevators  and  es- 
calators in  the  city  of  Boston  shall  be  under  the  charge,  control  and  personal 
supervision  of  a  licensed  builder  or  mechanic,  qualified  by  education,  training 
and  experience  for  the  performance  of  that  duty  in  a  manner  which  shall 
preserve  the  public  safety  and  conform  to  this  code  and  all  other  pertinent 
laws  and  ordinances. 

(e)  Any  person  who  shall  by  affidavit,  together  with  such  other  evidence 
as  may  be  required  by  said  board,  show  to  it  that  he  has  had  charge  or  control 
of  such  work  in  the  class  in  which  he  applies  to  be  registered,  and  shall  satisfy 
the  board  that  he  is  qualified  by  education,  training  and  experience  to  have 
charge  or  control  of  such  work,  may,  without  other  examination,  be  registered 
in  such  class  and  be  certified  to  the  commissioner  as  a  person  qualified  within 
such  class. 

(f)  Said  board,  upon  payment  of  the  required  fee,  shall  issue  a  license 
to  each  person  so  certified  by  it  to  the  commissioner.  Each  license  shall 
expire  one  year  from  the  date  of  its  issuance.  Said  board  shall  renew  a 
license,  upon  the  expiration  thereof  and  upon  payment  of  the  required  fee 
therefor,  for  the  further  period  of  one  year  from  the  date  of  renewal.  The 
fees  to  be  paid  to  said  board  for  such  licenses  and  renewals  shall  be  as  pro- 
vided in  chapter  two  hundred  and  ninety-seven  of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hun- 
dred and  thirty-one,  as  amended  by  Chapter  173  of  the  acts  of  nineteen 
hundred  and  thirty -nine. 

(g)  Any  person  who  is  duly  licensed  as  aforesaid  shall  be  entitled  to 
have  charge  or  control  of  any  work  described  in  this  section,  in  the  class  in 
which  he  is  registered,  until  his  license  is  revoked  or  suspended  by  the  com- 
missioner, upon  the  order  of  said  board.  No  such  license  shall  be  revoked 
or  suspended  except  upon  proof,  satisfactory  to  said  board,  or  specific  charges, 
filed  with  said  board  by  the  commissioner  or  other  person,  that  the  licensee 
has  been  careless  or  negligent  in  the  performance  of  his  duty  in  connection 
with  work  under  his  charge  or  control,  or  has  caused  or  permitted  a  violation 

(2G) 


Sees.  120=121 

of  this  code  in  connection  therewith,  or  that  this  code  has  been  violated  in 
connection  with  such  work  and  that  the  licensee,  being  in  charge  of  such 
work,  knew,  or,  in  the  exercise  of  due  diligence,  should  have  known,  of  such 
violation.  Upon  learning  of  such  carelessness,  neglect  of  duty  or  violation 
of  this  code,  the  commissioner  shall  file  charges  with  said  board  and  prosecute 
them.  Upon  the  filing  thereof  by  the  commissioner  or  other  person,  said 
board  shall  give  to  the  licensee  notice  of  a  hearing  thereon,  which  hearing 
shall  be  held  by  said  board  not  less  than  seven  days  after  date  of  said  notice. 
Such  notice  shall  be  served  upon  the  licensee  either  by  service  in  hand  or  by 
registered  mail,  shall  state  the  time  and, place  of  the  hearing  and  shall  con- 
tain a  copy  of  the  charges.  At  such  hearing  the  licensee  may  be  represented 
by  counsel,  and  the  commissioner  may  be  assisted  by  a  representative  of  the 
law  department  of  the  city. 

(h)  If,  for  any  cause,  a  person  licensed  as  herein  provided  shall  cease  to 
have  charge  or  control  of  work  described  in  this  section  before  such  work  is 
finished,  the  work  shall  stop  until  another  person  duly  licensed  for  the  doing 
of  such  work  has  been  placed  in  charge  thereof. 

(i)  Whoever  violates  any  provision  of  this  section  shall  be  punished  by  a 
fine  of  not  more  than  fifty  dollars. 

[  tAs  amended  by  Stat.  1952,  ch.  212  and  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 
*Sect.  121.  Board  of  Examiners  of  Qasfitters. —  (a)  There  is  hereby 
established  in  the  city  of  Boston  a  board  of  examiners  of  gasfitters,  to  consist 
of  three  members,  who  shall  be  the  building  commissioner,  the  health  com- 
missioner and  a  licensed  master  gasfitter.  The  member  of  the  board  of 
examiners  of  gasfitters  who  is  a  licensed  master  gasfitter  shall  be  appointed 
annually  by  the  mayor  for  a  term  ending  on  the  first  day  of  May  of  the  year 
next  ensuing;  and  he  shall  receive  for  every  day  or  part  thereof  of  actual 
service  ten  dollars  or  such  other  sum  as  may  from  time  to  time  be  fixed  by 
the  city  council  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor.  He  shall  have  been  con- 
tinuously engaged  in  business  as  a  master  gasfitter  during  the  five  years 
next  preceding  his  appointment. 

Note — See  note  under  Sect.  120,  par.  (a). 

(b)  Said  board  shall  hold  examinations,  under  rules  and  regulations 
adopted  by  it,  of  persons  desiring  to  engage  in  business  as  master  gasfitters 
or  to  work  as  journeyman  gasfitters.  Due  notice  of  the  time  and  place  for 
such  examinations  shall  be  posted  in  the  office  of  the  department  and  published 
in  the  City  Record. 

(c)  Said  board  shall  determine  the  qualifications  required  for  registration 
as  master  gasfitter  and  as  journeyman  gasfitter,  and  after  examination  shall 
register  as  such  the  persons  found  to  possess  the  requisite  qualifications. 
Said  board  shall,  without  re-examination,  register  as  qualified  master  gas- 
fitters  or  journeyman  gasfitters,  as  the  case  may  be,  persons  desiring  so  to  be 
registered  who  were  so  licensed  before  the  effective  date  of  this  code.  The 
name  and  address  of  each  person  so  found  to  be  qualified  and  registered, 
and  the  place  of  business  of  each  person  qualified  as  a  master  gasfitter,  shall 
thereupon  be  certified  by  said  board  to  the  commissioner  who  shall,  upon 
payment  of  the  required  fee,  issue  to  each  person  so  registered  and  certified  a 

(27) 


Sees.  121=122 

license  to  engage  in  business  as  a  master  gasfitter  or  to  work  as  a  journeyman 
gasfitter,  as  the  case  may  be. 

(d)  Every  original  license  issued  under  this  section  shall  take  effect  upon 
its  issuance  and  shall  expire  on  such  date,  not  later  than  one  year  after  its 
effective  date,  as  said  board  shall  determine.  Upon  the  expiration  of  any 
license  issued  under  this  section,  the  commissioner  shall,  upon  payment  of 
the  required  fee,  renew  the  same  except  that,  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  said 
board,  he  shall  not  renew  the  license  of  any  person  whose  registration  has  been 
cancelled  or  whose  license  has  been  revoked  or  suspended.  Every  renewal 
license  issued  under  this  section  shall  take  effect  on  such  date,  not  later  than 
one  month  after  its  issuance,  and  expire  on  such  date,  not  later  than  one  year 
after  its  effective  date,  as  said  board  shall  from  time  to  time  determine.  The 
registration  of  any  person  whose  license  has  not  been  renewed  within  one  year 
after  its  expiration  shall  be  cancelled. 

(e)  The  fee  for  issuance  or  renewal  of  a  master  gasfitter's  license  shall  be 
two  dollars  and  that  for  issuance  or  renewal  of  a  journeyman  gasfitter's 
license  shall  be  fifty  cents;  provided,  that  such  fees  may  be  changed  from 
time  to  time  by  the  building  commissioner,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor. 

(f)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section  all  gas  fitting  in  buildings 
shall  be  done  by  licensed  master  gasfitters,  either  themselves  or  through 
licensed  journeymen  gasfitters  employed  by  them.  A  firm  or  corporation 
employing  journeymen  gasfitters  shall  be  deemed  to  be  licensed  for  the 
purpose  of  this  section  if  a  member  of  the  firm  or  an  officer  of  the  corporation 
is  duly  licensed  as  a  master  gasfitter.  A  permit  for  gas  fitting  in  buildings 
shall  be  issued  only  to  licensed  master  gasfitters. 

(g)  No  person  shall  connect,  disconnect  or  remove  a  gas  meter,  except 
the  duly  authorized  representative  of  the  gas  company  owning  such  meter. 
Nothing  in  this  section  shall  be  construed  to  affect  the  operations  of  a  gas 
company  upon  its  own  premises  or  upon  its  mains  and  service  pipes. 

(h)     Whoever  violates  any  provision  of  this  section  shall  be  punished 
by  a  fine  of  not  more  than  one  hundred  dollars,  and,  in  addition,  if  the  offender 
is  licensed  under  this  section,  his  license  shall  be  revoked  or  suspended  by 
the  commissioner,  when  so  ordered  by  said  board  after  a  hearing. 
[*As  amended  by  Stat.  1952,  ch.  212,  Stat.  1955,  ch.  4,  and  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2] 

Sect.  122.  Penalties. —  (a)  A  building  or  structure  which  is  erected 
or  maintained  in  violation  of  any  provision  of  this  code  shall  be  deemed  a 
common  nuisance  without  other  proof  thereof  than  proof  of  the  unlawful 
construction  or  maintenance,  and  the  commissioner  may  abate  and  remove 
it  in  the  same  manner  in  which  boards  of  health  may  remove  nuisances 
under  sections  one  hundred  and  twenty-three  to  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
five,  inclusive,  of  chapter  one  hundred  and  eleven  of  the  General  Laws. 

(b)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  code,  whoever  violates  any 
provision  thereof,  or  whoever  builds,  alters,  or  maintains  a  structure  or  a 
part  thereof  in  violation  of  any  provision  thereof,  shall  be  punished  by  a 
fine  of  not  exceeding  five  hundred  dollars.  Each  day  during  any  portion 
of  which  such  violation  is  allowed  to  continue,  or  is  permitted  by  the  owner, 
shall  be  considered  a  separate  offence. 

(28) 


Sees.  123=124 

Section  123.  Enforcement  Jurisdiction. —  (a)  Any  court  having 
jurisdiction  in  equity,  or  any  justice  thereof,  may,  upon  the  application  of  the 
city  by  its  attorney  — 

(1)  Restrain  the  construction,  alteration,  repair,  maintenance,  use  or 
occupation  of  any  building  or  structure  constructed,  maintained,  used  or 
occupied  in  violation  of  any  provision  of  this  code,  and  order  its  removal 
or  abatement  as  a  nuisance; 

(2)  Restrain  the  further  construction,  alteration,  repair,  maintenance, 
use  or  occupation  of  any  building  or  structure  which  is  unsafe  or  dangerous ; 

(3)  Restrain  the  unlawful  construction,  alteration,  repair,  maintenance, 
use  or  occupation  of  any  building  or  structure; 

(4)  Compel  compliance  with  the  provisions  of  this  code; 

(5)  Order  the  removal  by  the  owner  of  a  building  or  structure  unlaw- 
fully existing  and  authorize  the  commissioner,  with  the  written  approval 
of  the  mayor,  in  default  of  such  removal  by  the  owner,  to  remove  it  at  the 
owner's  expense. 

(b)  The  municipal  court  of  the  city  of  Boston,  concurrently  with  the 
superior  court,  shall  have  jurisdiction  throughout  the  city  of  prosecutions 
and  proceedings  at  law  under  the  provisions  of  this  code,  and  all  other  pertinent 
laws  and  ordinances. 

(c)  Upon  the  entry  of  any  case  brought  under  any  provision  of  this  code 
the  court  shall,  at  the  request  of  either  party,  advance  the  case,  so  that  it 
may  be  heard  and  determined  with  as  little  delay  as  possible. 

*Sect.  124.     Classification  of  Buildings  by  Types  of  Construction.— 

(a)  Buildings  shall  be  classified  by  types  of  construction  representing 
varying  degrees  of  resistance  to  fire.  All  buildings  required  to  be  of  a  given 
type  of  construction  shall  conform  to  the  minimum  requirements  of  this  code 
for  that  type,  but  materials  and  combinations  of  materials  which  offer  greater 
resistance  to  fire  than  those  specified  for  minimum  requirements  may  be 
used.  Every  building  shall  be  classified  as  of  the  most  fire-resistive  type 
all  of  the  minimum  requirements  of  which  it  fully  meets.  No  building  or 
portion  thereof  shall  be  required  to  conform  to  a  type  of  construction  more 
fire-resistive  than  that  specified  for  its  occupancy  and  size,  or  for  its  location 
in  the  fire  zones,  in  this  code. 

(b)  When  two  or  more  types  of  construction  occur  in  the  same  building 
and  are  separated  as  provided  in  this  code,  each  portion  so  separated  may  be 
classified  as  of  the  type  of  construction  to  which  it  conforms;  otherwise  the 
entire  building  shall  be  classified  as  of  the  least  fire-resistive  type  of  con- 
struction used,  and  shall  be  subject  to  the  restrictions  of  this  code  imposed 
upon  that  type. 

(c)  A  pre-code  building  which  cannot  be  definitely  classified  as  one  of 
the  types  defined  in  sections  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  to  one  hundred  and 
thirty-one,  inclusive,  shall  be  deemed  for  the  purpose  of  this  code  to  belong 
to  the  less  fire-resistive  of  the  two  types  to  which  it  most  nearly  conforms. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 
(29) 


Sees.  125=132 

Sect.  125.     Types  of  Construction. —  All  buildings  shall  be  classified 
for  the  purpose  of  this  code  in  the  following  types  of  construction: — 
Type  I.        Fireproof. 
Type  II.      Semi-Fireproof. 
Type  III.     Heavy  Timber  and  Masonry. 
Type  IV.     Light  Wood  and  Masonry. 
Type  V.       Metal  Frame. 
Type  VI.     Wooden  Frame. 

Sect.  126.  Type  I,  Fireproof  Construction. —  Buildings  of  Type  I 
construction  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials  in  all  structural  parts;  their 
exterior  bearing  walls  and  frames  shall  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construc- 
tion and  their  floors  and  roofs  shall  be  of  three-hour  fire  resistive  construction 
and  shall  furnish  protection  of  three-hour  fire-resistive  rating  against  the 
spread  of  fire. 

Sect.  127.  Type  II,  Semi=Fireproof  Construction. —  Buildings  of 
Type  II  construction  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials  in  all  structural 
parts;  their  exterior  bearing  walls  shall  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  con- 
struction, their  columns  and  frames  shall  be  of  two-hour  fire-resistive  con- 
struction and  their  floors  and  roofs  shall  be  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  construc- 
tion and  shall  furnish  protection  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  rating  against  the 
spread  of  fire. 

Sect.  128.  Type  III,  Heavy  Timber  and  Masonry  Construction. — 
Buildings  of  Type  III  shall  have  exterior  bearing  walls  of  masonry  or  other 
construction  of  incombustible  materials  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construc- 
tion, and  their  frames,  floors  and  roofs  shall  be  of  heavy  timber  construction 
without  concealed  air  spaces. 

Sect.  129.  Type  IV,  Light  Wood  and  Masonry  Construction. — 
Buildings  of  Type  IV  shall  have  exterior  bearing  walls  of  masonry  or  other 
construction  of  incombustible  materials  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction 
and  their  frames,  floors  and  roofs  may  be  of  wood. 

Sect.  130.  Type  V,  Metal  Frame  Construction. —  Buildings  of  Type 
V  shall  have  walls,  frames,  floors  and  roofs  of  metal  or  other  incombustible 
materials  which  may  be  without  protection  against  fire. 

Sect.  131.  Type  VI,  Wooden  Frame  Construction. —  Buildings  of 
Type  VI  may  have  walls,  frames,  floors  and  roofs  of  wood. 

*Sect.  132.  Occupancies  classified. —  (a)  Every  building,  whether 
pre-code  or  post-code,  shall,  for  the  purpose  of  this  code,  be  classified  according 
to  its  principal  occupancy,  as  follows:— 

Group  A.  Theatres. 

Group  B.  Halls. 

Group  C.  Schools. 

Group  D.  Hospitals  and  detention  buildings. 

Group  E.  Commercial  buildings  of  hazardous  occupancy. 

Group  F.  Offices  and  commercial  buildings. 

Group  G.  Commercial  buildings  of  non-hazardous  occupancy. 

Group  H.  Unlimited  habitations  and  large  dwellings. 

Group  I.  Limited  habitations  and  small  dwellings. 

Group  J.  Miscellaneous  structures. 

(30) 


Sees.  132=136 

(b)  An  occupancy  not  mentioned  specifically  in  this  section  or  in  the 
definitions  of  groups  and  sub-divisions  of  groups  contained  in  Parts  3  to  12, 
inclusive,  of  this  code,  or  about  which  there  is  any  question,  shall  be  classified 
by  the  commissioner  and  included  in  the  group  which  it  most  nearly  resembles, 
as  regards  fire  hazard  and  danger  to  the  lives  of  persons. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  2  ] 
fSect.  133.  Change  of  Occupancy. —  The  occupancy  of  a  building  shall 
not  be  changed  unless  such  building  conforms  or  is  made  to  conform  with 
the  requirements  of  this  code  for  the  group  in  which  it  is  to  be  classified, 
except  that  the  occupancy  of  a  pre-code  building  may  be  changed  as  provided 
in  section  one  hundred  and  seven. 

[  f  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2] 

Sect.  134.  Multiple  Occupancies. —  When  a  building  contains  two  or 
more  units  of  occupancy,  whether  of  the  same  or  of  different  occupancy 
classifications,  the  separations  between  such  units  and  the  aggregate  area  of 
such  units  within  the  building  shall  be  as  provided  in  this  code. 

Sect.  135.  Elevators  and  Escalators. —  No  elevator  or  escalator  shal] 
be  installed  in  a  building  or  structure  except  under  the  provisions  of  sections 
sixty-two  to  seventy-one,  inclusive,  of  chapter  one  hundred  and  forty-three 
of  the  General  Laws  and  the  regulations  issued  thereunder,  and  in  conformity 
with  section  one  hundred  and  twenty  of  this  code. 

Sect.  136.  Building  Height. —  (a)  No  building  or  structure  shall  be 
so  erected  or  altered  that  any  part  thereof  shall  be  higher  above  the  ground 
than  two  and  one  half  times  the  shortest  horizontal  distance  of  that  part  from 
the  further  side  of  the  street  upon  which  it  fronts ;  provided,  that,  in  case  of  a 
building  at  the  intersection  of  two  streets,  within  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet 
measured  along  the  streets  from  the  intersection  of  the  nearer  side  lines  thereof, 
the  width  of  each  street  shall  for  the  purpose  of  this  section  be  taken  as  the 
width  of  the  wider  street. 

(b)  No  building  or  structure  shall  be  erected  or  altered  to  a  greater  height 
measured  to  the  highest  point  of  the  roof  thereof  than  one  hundred  and  fifty- 
five  feet  except  as  provided  in  this  paragraph.  If  a  building  or  structure  shall 
be  erected  or  altered  to  a  greater  height  than  one  hundred  and  fifty-five  feet 
every  part  of  such  building  shall  not  be  higher  above  the  ground  than  one 
hundred  and  twenty-five  feet  plus  two  and  one  half  times  the  shortest  hori- 
zontal distance  of  that  part  from  the  nearest  lot  or  street  line.  No  building 
shall  be  erected  or  enlarged  to  contain  a  volume  above  the  grade  of  the  ground 
greater  than  the  buildable  area  of  the  lot  multiplied  by  one  hundred  and 
fifty-five  feet. 

(c)  In  determining  the  height  of  any  part  of  a  building  for  the  purposes 
of  this  section,  the  grade  of  the  ground  from  which  measurement  shall  be  made 
shall  be  that  from  which  the  height  of  the  building  is  measured  as  defined  in 
section  one  hundred  and  six.  Flag  poles  and  weather  vanes  shall  not  be 
considered  a  part  of  a  building  for  the  purposes  of  this  section. 


(31) 


Sees.  20N203 


PART  2. 
FIRE  LIMITS. 

Section 

201  —  Fire  Limits. 

202  —  Boundaries. 

203  —  Construction  within  the  Fire  Zones. 

Section  201.  Fire  Limits. —  For  the  purposes  of  this  code  there  shall 
be  established  in  the  city  of  Boston  two  fire  districts  or  zones  within  which 
building  construction  shall  be  limited  as  provided  in  this  part  of  the  code. 
Outside  of  the  boundaries  of  the  zones  no  limitation  is  placed  by  this  part 
of  the  code  upon  the  construction  of  buildings. 

Sect.  202.  Boundaries. —  (a)  The  boundaries  of  the  first  fire  zone 
shall  be  the  boundaries  of  the  building  limits  as  they  existed  prior  to  the 
twenty-second  day  of  September  in  the  year  nineteen  hundred  and  thirteen. 

(b)  The  boundaries  of  the  second  fire  zone  shall  be  the  boundaries  of 
the  building  limits  as  they  were  established  on  and  after  the  twenty-second 
day  of  September  in  the  year  nineteen  hundred  and  thirteen. 

(c)  The  city  council  of  the  city  of  Boston  may  by  ordinance  from  time 
to  time  extend  either  fire  zone  and  re-establish  its  boundaries. 

*Sect.  203.  Construction  within  the  Fire  Zones. —  (a)  Buildings 
hereafter  erected  in  the  first  or  second  fire  zone  shall  be  of  Type  I,  Type  II, 
Type  III  or  Type  IV  construction  except  as  hereinafter  provided. 

(b)  The  limitations  of  this  section  shall  not  apply  to  buildings  not  over 
twenty-seven  feet  high  on  wharves  and  buildings  for  the  storage  and  handling 
of  coal  or  grain  in  bulk,  of  Type  V  or  Type  VI  construction,  in  either  fire 
zone,  if  the  exterior  thereof  is  covered  with  slate,  tin,  sheet  metal  or  other 
equally  fire-resistive  construction,  erected  with  the  approval  of  the  com- 
missioner and  subject  to  such  conditions  as  he  may  in  each  case  specify. 

(c)  Temporary  structures  to  be  used  in  connection  with  construction 
work  and  temporary  reviewing  stands,  frame-works  and  tents,  as  are  cus- 
tomarily used  exclusively  for  outdoor  carnivals,  lawn  parties  or  like  activities, 
may  be  erected  in  either  fire  zone  and  of  any  type  of  construction,  subject  to 
the  approval  of  the  commissioner,  and  to  such  conditions  and  for  such  time 
as  he  may  in  each  case  specify. 

(d)  Buildings  of  Type  VI  construction  for  dwellings  for  one  or  two  families 
may  be  erected  or  enlarged  in  the  second  fire  zone  where  the  area  of  each  does 
not  exceed  sixty  per  cent  of  the  area  of  the  lot  on  which  it  is  located  and  the 
roof  is  pitched  at  not  less  than  thirty  degrees  with  the  horizontal. 

(e)  Buildings  of  Type  V  construction  may  be  erected  or  enlarged  for  use 
as  garages  in  the  second  fire  zone  providing  they  are  equipped  with  fire  win- 
dows and  are  not  within  two  feet  of  a  lot  line  or  within  five  feet  of  a  building 
of  Type  VI  construction  and  the  height  does  not  exceed  one  story  and  the 
area  six  hundred  square  feet  and  the  capacity  two  cars. 

(32) 


Sec.  203 

(f)  Buildings  of  Type  V  construction  for  other  occupancies  may  be  erected 
in  the  second  fire  zone  providing  the  location  and  the  occupancy  are  approved 
by  the  building  commissioner. 

(g)  Buildings  in  the  first  or  second  fire  zone  erected,  enlarged  or  con- 
verted to  use  as  a  garage  for  more  than  four  cars  shall  be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II 
construction  and  if  such  garage  be  more  than  one  story  in  height  it  shall  be 
of  Type  I  construction. 

(h)  Every  building  in  Group  C  in  the  first  or  second  fire  zone  shall  be  of 
Type  I  or  Type  II  construction. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1945,  ch.  6  ] 


(33) 


Sees.  30U303 


PART  3. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  A  OCCUPANCY: 

THEATRES. 

Section 

301  —  Group  A  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

302  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

303  —  Exterior  Wails. 

304  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

305  —  Exits  and  Entrances. 

306  —  Aisles  and  Seating. 

307  —  Exit  Lights. 

308  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

309  —  Stage  Ventilators,  Group  A  Occupancy. 

310  —  Proscenium. 

311  —  Stage  Construction. 

312  —  Dressing  Rooms  and  Workshops. 

313  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

314  —  Projection  Room. 

Section    301.     Group    A    Occupancy:    Type,    Height,    Area. —  (a) 

Group  A  shall  include  every  building  containing  an  auditorium  and  a  per- 
manent stage  equipped  with  a  gridiron  or  other  means  of  hanging  scenery, 
and  primarily  adapted  for  the  giving  of  plays,  operas  or  similar  forms  of 
entertainment. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings,  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  A, 
shall  be  of  Type  I  construction,  except  that  portion  of  the  stage  which,  under 
the  provisions  of  section  three  hundred  and  eleven,  may  be  of  wood  or  un- 
protected metal,  and  they  shall  not  hereby  be  limited  as  to  seating  capacity, 
area  or  height. 

Sect.  302.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Portions  of  a  building  of 
Group  A  occupancy  may  be  used  for  purposes  other  than  the  giving  of  plays, 
operas  and  the  like,  but  the  parts  given  to  such  other  occupancies  shall  be 
separated  from  that  devoted  to  Group  A  occupancy  by  separations  specified 
in  Part  13. 

*Sect.  303.  Exterior  Walls. — (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  five  feet  from  a  property 
line,  shall  be  without  openings,  except  that  openings  in  such  walls  at  the  ends 
of  courts  shall  be  allowed  when  protected  by  fire  windows  or  Class  B  fire 
doors.  Openings  in  such  walls  or  parts  of  walls  which  are  five  feet  or  more 
but  less  than  ten  feet  from  a  property  line  shall  be  protected  by  fire  windows 
or  Class  B  fire  doors. 

(b)  In  an  exterior  wall,  every  opening  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less 
than  twenty  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof 
or  an  unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same 
lot,  shall  be  protected  by  fire  windows  or  Class  B  fire  doors. 

(34) 


Sees.  303=305 

(c)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for 
protection  or  prohibition  of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  construc- 
tion on  an  adjoining  lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees  in  a 
writing  recorded  in  the  registry  of  deeds  for  Suffolk  county  to  comply  with  the 
said  requirements  on  demand  of  the  commissioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

Sect.  304.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)  Stair  or  ramp 
exits  from  only  the  first  or  lower  balcony  need  not  be  enclosed.  Stair  or  ramp 
exits  from  smoking  rooms,  lounges  or  other  public  rooms  in  the  basement 
shall  be  enclosed  in  the  basement  or  first  story,  and  the  doors  shall  be  self- 
closing  but  need  not  be  fire  doors.  Other  stairways  and  ramps  which  pierce 
only  one  floor  shall  be  enclosed  in  the  story  above  or  below  but  such  stairways 
or  ramps  which  serve  as  required  exits  from  one  story  shall  be  enclosed  in  the 
other  story.  Stairways  or  ramps  serving  dressing  rooms  need  not  be  enclosed 
above  the  stage  or  first  floor  if  separated  from  the  stage  by  a  two-hour  separa- 
tion. Other  stairways  and  ramps  shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in  which  they 
occur.  There  shall  be  no  openings  in  stair  or  ramp  enclosures  except  entrance 
and  exit  doorways  and  the  openings  required  for  ventilation. 

(b)  Vertical  openings  for  elevators  serving  dressing  rooms  need  not  be 
enclosed  above  the  stage  or  first  floor  if  they  are  separated  from  the  stage  by  a 
two-hour  separation.  Vertical  openings  for  elevators  serving  the  gridiron 
and  fly  galleries  need  not  be  enclosed  above  the  stage  level.  All  other  vertical 
openings  for  elevators  and  vertical  openings  for  ventilation  or  other  purposes, 
except  as  otherwise  specified  in  this  section,  shall  be  enclosed. 

fSect.  305.  Exits  and  Entrances. —  (a)  Group  A  buildings  shall  be 
so  located  that  the  main  entrances  shall  open  directly  from  a  public  street  or 
streets  not  less  than  thirty  feet  wide.  The  main  entrance  or  entrances,  which 
may  also  serve  as  exits,  shall  have  in  the  aggregate  twenty  inches  of  un- 
obstructed width  for  each  one  hundred  persons  to  and  including  one  thou- 
sand persons,  with  an  additional  ten  inches  for  each  additional  one  hundred 
persons  to  and  including  one  thousand  additional  persons,  and  an  additional 
five  inches  for  each  additional  one  hundred  persons  over  two  thousand,  all 
based  on  the  total  seating  capacity  of  the  building  served  by  said  entrances. 
No  main  entrance  shall  be  less  than  fifteen  feet  in  clear  width  between  walls 
or  in  aggregate  width  of  doorways  and  of  passageways  but  such  width  shall 
not  be  required  to  exceed  forty  feet  in  width.  Doorways  and  passageways  in 
such  entrances  shall  be  not  less  than  five  feet  in  clear  width. 

(b)  Adjacent  to  the  main  floor  and  each  balcony  of  the  auditorium  and 
between  the  auditorium  and  the  main  entrance,  in  the  path  of  normal  entrance 
and  egress,  there  shall  be  a  foyer  consisting  of  a  lobby,  corridor  or  passageway, 
one  or  more,  the  aggregate  floor  area  of  which  shall  be  at  least  equal  to  one 
square  foot  for  each  seat  in  such  division  of  the  auditorium. 

(c)  There  shall  be  at  least  two  remote  exits  from  the  main  floor  and  from 
each  balcony  of  the  auditorium.  One  of  these  exits  from  the  main  floor  and 
one  from  each  balcony  shall  open  into  the  foyer  required  therefor  in  this 
section.  Both  such  exits  may  open  into  the  required  foyer  if  it  has  two  remote 
exits. 

(35) 


Sec.  305 

(d)  From  the  main  floor  and  each  balcony  of  the  auditorium  there  shall 
be  at  least  two  paths  of  exit  independent  of  one  another.  Stairways  or  ramps 
serving  balconies  above  the  first  or  lowest  balcony  shall  be  enclosed  and  shall 
discharge  directly  into  a  street  or  open  court  independently  of  the  other 
required  exit  serving  the  same  balcony  or  balconies  and  independently  of  the 
paths  of  exit  from  the  main  floor.  Such  stairways  or  ramps  may  serve  also 
as  exits  from  the  first  or  lowest  balcony.  A  stairway  or  ramp  serving  as  an 
exit  only  from  the  first  or  lowest  balcony  need  not  be  enclosed  and  the  path 
therefrom  may  join  a  path  of  exit  from  the  main  floor.  Where  a  path  of  exit 
joins  another  at  an  angle,  the  common  path  of  exit  shall  be  at  least  as  wide  as 
the  sum  of  the  widths  of  the  paths  so  joined,  and  the  partition  or  railing  which 
bounds  a  path  so  joining  another  shall  either  be  stopped  back  from  the  nearer 
side  of  the  common  path  a  distance  equal  to  the  width  of  the  joining  path  or 
shall  extend  such  distance  beyond  the  side  of  the  common  path,  thus  enabling 
persons  either  to  join  the  common  path  before  turning  or  to  enter  and  turn 
before  joining  the  common  path. 

(e)  Exit  stairways  or  ramps  from  balconies  shall  not  extend  below  the 
level  at  which  they  discharge  from  the  building. 

(f )  Exits  and  paths  of  exit,  except  from  boxes  seating  less  than  twenty-five 
persons,  shall  be  not  less  than  five  feet  wide  at  any  point.  The  aggregate 
width  of  the  paths  of  exit  specified  heretofore  in  this  section  which  serve  one  or 
more  divisions  of  the  auditorium  shall  be  at  least  twenty  inches  for  every  one 
hundred  persons  for  whom  seats  are  provided  in  the  division  or  divisions  so 
served.  In  calculating  the  required  width  of  each  path  of  exit,  persons  seated 
in  the  auditorium  shall  be  allotted  to  those  exits  therefrom  which  they  can 
most  quickly  reach  in  an  emergency,  assuming  that  the  emergency  exits 
hereinafter  specified  are  not  used,  and  upon  any  other  reasonable  assumption. 

(g)  In  addition  to  the  exits  specified  in  paragraphs  (c),  (d),  (e)  and  (f) 
of  this  section,  hereinafter  called  normal  exits,  there  shall  be  provided  a  system 
of  emergency  exits  as  specified  in  this  paragraph  and  in  paragraphs  (h)  and  (i). 
Emergency  exits  from  the  auditorium  shall  be  at  least  five  feet  wide  and 
there  shall  be  at  least  one  such  exit  from  each  side  of  the  main  floor  and  of 
each  balcony  as  remote  as  practicable  from  the  normal  exits.  Emergency 
exits  from  the  main  floor  shall  be  exits  from  the  building  or  shall  be  con- 
nected by  passageways  with  exits  from  the  building  independent  of  the 
normal  exits.  The  paths  of  emergency  exit  from  the  main  floor  shall  be 
not  less  than  five  feet  wide,  nor  shall  the  aggregate  width  be  less  than  five 
inches  for  every  one  hundred  persons  served.  The  paths  of  exit  from  the 
emergency  exits  from  balconies  shall  be  either  of  inside  type  as  specified  in 
paragraph  (h)  or  of  outside  type  as  specified  in  paragraph  (i)  of  this  section, 
or  a  combination  of  the  two  types;  provided,  that  the  aggregate  width  of 
the  paths  of  emergency  exit  shall  have  five  inches  in  width  of  inside  path  or 
ten  inches  in  width  of  outside  path  for  every  one  hundred  seats  in  the  balcony 
or  balconies  served. 

(h)  An  inside  path  of  emergency  exit,  referred  to  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph, shall  consist  of  a  foyer  with  at  least  fifty  square  feet  of  floor  for  each 
emergency  exit  served,  and  an  enclosed  stairway  or  ramp  with  outside  ventila- 

(36) 


Sec.  305 

tion,  with  a  direct  exit  from  the  building,  or  an  enclosed  passageway  leading 
to  such  an  exit,  independent  of  normal  exits,  or  an  exit  to  another  building 
or  fire  division  of  Type  I  or  Type  II  construction.  An  exit  to  another  build- 
ing or  fire  division  shall  be  through  a  lobby  or  vestibule  of  at  least  one 
hundred  square  feet  in  floor  area  with  outside  ventilation  and  with  self- 
closing  Class  A  fire  doors  at  entrance  and  exit  and  shall  lead,  through  ade- 
quate corridors,  stairways  and  passageways,  to  the  street.  No  such  exit 
shall  be  made  through  a  building  or  fire  division  of  Group  E  occupancy. 
Inside  emergency  exits  shall  be  not  less  than  three  feet  wide. 

(i)  An  outside  path  of  emergency  exit,  referred  to  in  paragraph  (g)  of 
this  section,  shall  consist  of  an  exterior  fire  escape  balcony  not  less  than 
four  feet  wide  at  each  emergency  exit  from  a  balcony  and  not  more  than 
six  inches  below  the  sill  thereof.  Such  balconies  at  the  highest  level  shall 
be  at  least  eight  feet  long  and  at  lower  levels  at  least  twelve  feet  long.  Fire 
escape  stairs  of  rise  not  exceeding  eight  and  one  half  inches  and  tread  not 
less  than  nine  and  one  half  inches  and  not  less  than  thirty  inches  wide  shall 
lead  from  all  such  balconies  to  the  ground.  The  lowest  runs  may  be  hinged 
and  counterweighted.  Exterior  fire  escapes  shall  be  located  either  in  a 
street  or  in  an  open  court.  Such  courts  shall  be  at  least  six  feet  wide  and 
open  to  the  sky  for  the  full  depth  of  the  auditorium  and  shall  be  connected 
with  a  street  by  an  open  court  or  an  enclosed  passageway  ten  feet  high, 
either  of  which  shall  be  at  least  six  feet  wide.  Every  such  court  or  passage- 
way shall  have  such  additional  width  as  may  be  necessary,  if  any,  to  pro- 
vide, when  the  fire  escape  stairs  are  in  position  for  use,  the  clear  width 
required  for  it  as  a  path  of  emergency  exit  and  as  a  path  of  normal  exit  if  so 
used. 

(j)  At  least  one  exit,  three  feet  wide,  shall  be  provided  on  each  side  of 
the  stage.  These  exits  shall  open  directly  upon  a  street,  or  on  a  passageway 
or  court  not  less  than  three  feet  wide,  leading  to  a  street.  Ladders  may 
be  provided  as  exits  from  fly  gallery  and  gridiron.  Each  tier  of  dressing 
rooms  shall  be  provided  with  at  least  two  remote  exits  not  less  than  thirty 
inches  wide. 

(k)  All  exit  and  entrance  doors  or  gates  in  any  path  of  exit  shall  swing 
in  the  direction  of  egress  and  if  provided  with  latches,  such  latches  shall  be 
of  self-releasing  type  such  as  panic  bolts  or  similar  devices,  of  non-corrodible 
metal,  which  will  permit  the  door  to  open  when  pressed  against.  All  doors 
shall  be  so  installed  as  not  in  any  position  to  decrease  the  width  of  any  door- 
way (except  that  in  which  it  is  installed),  stairs,  landing,  passageway  or 
corridor  below  the  width  required. 

(1)  No  mirrors,  false  doors  or  windows  shall  be  so  placed  as  to  give  the 
appearance  of  a  doorway  or  exit,  hallway  or  corridor. 

(m)  In  buildings  of  Group  A  the  rise  of  stairs  shall  not  exceed  seven 
and  one  half  inches  nor  shall  the  tread  be  less  than  ten  and  one  half  inches. 
There  shall  be  no  flights  of  stairs  of  more  than  fifteen  or  less  than  three  risers 
between  landings. 

(n)  A  landing  between  two  flights  of  stairs  in  the  same  direction  shall 
be  at  least  as  wide  as  the  stairway  and  at  least  four  feet  long  in  the  direction 
of  travel.    Stairs  turning  at  a  right  angle  shall  have  a  square  or  rectangular 

(37) 


Sees.  305=306 

landing  the  full  width  of  the  respective  stairwaj's,  except  that  the  outer  line 
of  the  landing  shall  be  curved  to  a  radius  not  less  than  two  feet,  or  bevelled 
two  feet,  to  avoid  a  deep  corner.  Where  stairs  return  directly  on  them- 
selves, a  landing  without  steps  shall  be  provided  at  least  as  wide  as  the  stairs, 
and  the  outer  corners  shall  be  curved  or  bevelled.  Winders  may  be  provided 
only  in  stairs  from  boxes  seating  less  than  twenty-five  persons.  Where 
two  side  nights  of  stairs  join  and  continue  in  a  common  flight,  a  landing 
without  winders  shall  be  provided  and  the  width  of  the  common  flight  shall 
be  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  widths  of  the  side  flights.  A  door  opening  into  a 
stairway  shall  not  open  immediately  upon  a  flight  of  stairs,  but  a  landing 
at  least  three  feet  long  in  the  direction  of  travel  shall  intervene. 

(o)  All  stairways  shall  have,  on  both  sides,  strong  hand  rails  firmly 
secured  about  three  feet  high  above  the  upper  tread  at  each  riser,  except 
that  stairs  less  than  three  feet  wide  need  have  a  rail  only  on  one  side. 

(p)  Stairways  over  eight  feet  wide  shall  be  provided  with  a  central  rail, 
not  less  than  two  inches  in  diameter,  placed  at  a  height  of  about  three  feet 
above  the  upper  tread  at  each  riser,  firmly  supported  on  metal  standards. 
Stairways  over  twelve  feet  wide  shall  have  such  intermediate  rails  dividing 
the  stairs  into  equal  runs  not  over  six  feet  wide.  Where  hand  rails  are 
fastened  to  walls,  there  shall  be  a  minimum  clearance  of  two  inches  between 
the  rail  and  the  wall,  and  the  upper  ends  of  wall  hand  rails  shall  be  returned 
to  wall  or  posts.  At  the  head  of  each  flight  of  stairs  there  shall  be  a  post  or 
standard  at  least  six  feet  high,  to  which  the  intermediate  rail  or  rails  shall 
be  fastened. 

(q)  Except  as  otherwise  specified  in  this  section,  the  provisions  of  Part 
18  shall  apply  to  exits  from  Group  A  buildings. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

*Sect.  306.  Aisles  and  Seating. —  fa)  In  auditoriums,  aisles  having 
seats  on  both  sides  shall  be  not  less  than  thirty  inches  in  width  at  the  end 
remote  from  an  exit  and- shall  be  widened  by  two  inches  for  each  ten  feet  in 
length  measured  toward  the  exit.  Aisles  having  seats  on  one  side  only  shall 
be  not  less  than  twenty-four  inches  wide  at  the  end  remote  from  an  exit,  and 
shall  be  widened  toward  the  exit  by  two  inches  for  each  ten  feet  in  length. 
Side  aisles  serving  more  than  one  exit  shall  be  of  uniform  width  between  exits 
and  such  width  shall  be  not  less  than  that  required  by  this  paragraph  at  a 
point  midway  between  the  extreme  exits. 

(b)  Aisles  shall  be  so  arranged  that  not  more  than  six  seats  shall  intervene 
between  any  seat  and  the  nearest  aisle. 

(c)  There  shall  be  no  obstructions  of  any  kind  in  an  aisle.  Aisles  on  the 
main  floor  and  in  balconies  may  be  sloped  or  stepped.  When  sloped,  the 
slope  shall  not  exceed  two  inches  vertical  in  ten  inches  horizontal.  Where 
stepped  the  rise  shall  not  exceed  twenty-one  inches  in  a  horizontal  distance  of 
thirty-two  inches.    Stepped  aisles  shall  not  be  construed  to  be  stairways. 

(d)  The  main  floor  of  auditoriums  shall  have  a  cross-over  aisle,  either 
open  or  enclosed,  at  the  rear  extending  from  side  to  side  of  auditorium.  Fur- 
thermore, if  there  are  more  than  thirty-five  rows  of  seats,  there  shall  be  in 
addition  at  least  one  cross-over  aisle  extending  from  side  to  side  of  the  audi- 

(38) 


Sees.  306=308 

torium,  and  in  no  case  shall  there  be  more  than  thirty-five  rows  of  seats 
between  cross-over  aisles.  Balconies  with  more  than  five  rows  of  seats  shall 
have  at  least  one  cross-over  aisle  extending  from  side  to  side  of  balcony, 
and  in  no  case  shall  there  be  more  than  twenty  rows  of  seats  between  cross- 
over aisles.  Cross  aisles  shall  be  not  less  than  three  feet  wide  in  the  clear 
and  shall  lead  to  exits  that  are  easily  accessible.  Vomitories  shall  be  considered 
entrances  and  exits. 

(e)  Seats  shall  be  spaced  not  less  than  thirty-two  inches  except  that 
seats  with  backs  less  than  one  inch  thick  may  be  spaced  not  less  than  thirty 
inches  back  to  back.  Seats  in  stepped  balconies  shall  be  spaced  not  less  than 
thirty-two  inches  back  to  back.  No  seats  shall  be  less  than  eighteen  inches 
in  width  center  to  center.  All  seats  shall  be  securely  fastened  to  the  floor, 
except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section. 

(f)  Seats  in  boxes  accommodating  less  than  twenty-five  persons  need 
not  be  fastened  to  the  floor.  Boxes  accommodating  twenty-five  persons  or 
more  shall  be  considered  balconies. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

fSect.  307.  Exit  Lights. —  Over  every  exit  doorway  in  any  path  of  exit, 
on  the  inside,  and  over  every  opening  to  a  fire  escape,  on  the  inside,  there 
shall  be  an  illuminated  sign  bearing  the  word  "EXIT"  or  "FIRE  ESCAPE", 
respectively,  in  letters  not  less  than  four  inches  high.  Each  sign  shall  be 
provided  with  two  electric  lamps. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

{Sect.  308.  Light  and  Ventilation. —  (a)  Dressing  rooms,  work 
shops,  toilet  rooms,  auditoriums,  foyers,  and  other  public  rooms  shall  be 
provided  with  light  and  ventilation  by  means  of  windows  and  skylights  with 
an  area  not  less  than  one  eighth  the  floor  area  in  each  room,  or  they  shall  be 
provided  with  artificial  light  and  a  mechanically  operated  ventilating  system. 
The  mechanically  operated  ventilating  system  shall  provide  for  four  complete 
air  changes  per  hour  in  rooms  where  required  and  in  the  auditorium  shalj 
supply  at  least  fifteen  cubic  feet  of  fresh  air  per  minute  for  each  occupant 
thereof.  If  the  velocity  of  the  air  entering  the  room  exceeds  five  feet  per 
second,  the  opening  must  be  placed  more  than  eight  feet  above  the  floor 
directly  beneath.  Adequate  means  shall  be  provided  for  the  removal  of 
foul  air. 

(b)  Light  shall  be  electric.  Auditorium  lights  shall  be  on  circuits  separate 
from  those  of  the  stage  and  the  remainder  of  the  building,  and  shall  be  so 
arranged  that  they  can  be  turned  on  from  the  stage  and  from  at  least  one  other 
approved  point  in  the  front  of  the  house,  with  approved  indicators  to  show 
when  the  lights  are  on. 

(c)  Lights  in  foyers,  stairways,  corridors  and  other  paths  of  exit  shall  be 
on  circuits  separate  from  those  of  the  stage,  auditorium  and  the  remainder 
of  the  building  and  shall  be  so  arranged  that  they  can  be  turned  on  from  the 
stage  and  from  at  least  one  other  approved  point  in  the  front  of  the  house, 
with  approved  indicators  to  show  when  the  lights  are  on. 

(d)  Exit  sign  lights  and  selected  lights  in  foyers,  auditoriums,  stairways, 
corridors  and  other  paths  of  exit  sufficient  to  provide  illumination  for  egress 

(39) 


Sees.  308=310 

of  the  audience  in  case  of  emergency  shall  be  wired  on  separate  circuits,  and 
these  lights,  hereinafter  referred  to  as  emergency  lights,  shall  be  kept  lighted 
when  the  building  is  occupied,  except  that  outside  balconies  and  fire  escapes 
need  not  be  lighted  before  sunset  nor  auditorium  lights  during  a  performance. 
The  emergency  lights  may  also  include  lights  on  switchboards,  in  projection 
rooms,  in  boiler  rooms  and  at  other  critical  points.  Emergency  lights  shall 
be  protected  from  possible  physical  damage. 

(e)  The  emergency  lights  shall  be  provided  with  a  second  or  emergency 
source  of  current  and  a  transfer  switch  which  will  automatically  disconnect 
the  normal  service  and  instantly  connect  the  emergency  service  when  the 
voltage  of  the  normal  service  falls  below  fifty  per  cent  of  the  nominal  lamp 
voltage  and  which  will  also  automatically  disconnect  the  emergency  service 
and  instantly  connect  the  normal  service  when  the  voltage  of  the  latter  is 
restored  to  eighty  per  cent  of  the  nominal  lamp  voltage.  The  emergency 
source  of  current  shall  be  either :  — 

(1)  A  separate  feeder  of  the  service  company  other  than  that  from 
which  the  normal  service  is  taken,  or 

(2)  A  separate  feeder  from  a  reliable  generating  plant  independent  of 
that  from  which  the  normal  service  is  taken,  or 

(3)  An  approved  storage  battery,  or 

(4)  Illuminating  gas. 

(f)  Glass  in  lighting  fixtures  hung  in  auditoriums,  lobbies  or  other  public 
places  shall  be  secured  from  falling  by  an  approved  method. 

[  |As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  and  9  ] 

Sect.  309.  Stage  Ventilators,  Group  A  Occupancy. —  (a)  There 
shall  be  one  or  more  ventilators,  constructed  of  metal  or  other  non-combustible 
material,  near  the  center  and  above  the  highest  part  of  the  stage.  Such 
ventilator  or  ventilators  shall  be  raised  above  the  stage  roof  and  shall  have  a 
total  ventilating  area  at  least  equal  to  ten  per  cent  of  the  floor  space  behind 
the  proscenium  wall,  at  the  stage  floor  level,  not  separated  from  the  stage  by 
a  two-hour  separation. 

(b)  Doors  or  covers  for  ventilators  shall  open  by  gravity.  Doors  or 
covers  shall  be  held  closed  and  manually  operated  by  means  of  cords  extending 
to  each  side  of  the  stage.  These  cords  shall  each  be  equipped  with  three 
fusible  links  one  of  which  shall  be  placed  in  the  ventilator  above  the  main 
roof  level  and  the  other  two  at  approved  points  not  affected  by  sprinkler 
heads.  Fusible  links  shall  be  of  an  approved  type  which  will  release  at  a 
temperature  of  one  hundred  and  sixty  degrees  Fahrenheit.  Each  ventilator 
shall  be  opened  and  closed  at  least  once  before  each  performance. 

(c)  Glass,  if  used  in  ventilators,  may  be  either  plain  or  wired.  If  plain 
glass  is  used,  a  suitable  wire  netting  shall  be  placed  both  above  and  below 
the  glass. 

Sect.  310.  Proscenium. —  (a)  The  stage  portion  shall  be  separated 
from  the  auditorium  by  not  less  than  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  as 
specified  in  Part  22.  Such  separation  shall  be  known  as  the  proscenium  wall. 
This  wall  may  be  offset  as  desired,  but  such  offset  shall  also  be  of  not  less 

(40) 


Sees.  310=311 

than  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction.    The  proscenium  wall  shall  not  be 
finished  or  covered  with  combustible  materials. 

(b)  The  proscenium  opening,  the  main  opening  for  the  viewing  of  per- 
formances, shall  be  provided  with  a  proscenium  curtain  as  follows :  — 

(1)  The  proscenium  curtain  shall  be  of  incombustible  and  fire-resistive 
material.  If  of  fabric,  it  shall  be  of  asbestos  cloth  containing  not  over  ten 
per  cent  by  weight  of  cotton  or  other  combustible  fibre,  shall  be  reinforced 
by  wire  and  shall  weigh  not  less  than  three  pounds  per  square  yard. 

(2)  Proscenium  curtains  of  other  materials  than  fabric,  which  are  able 
to  withstand  a  standard  fire  test,  as  specified  in  Part  22,  for  thirty  minutes, 
may  be  used  with  the  approval  of  the  commissioner. 

(3)  If  the  proscenium  opening  is  not  more  than  thirty-five  feet  wide 
the  curtain  shall  have  a  rigid  metal  member  at  the  top  and  at  the  bottom 
edge  protected  by  the  fabric  on  both  stage  and  auditorium  sides.  If  the 
proscenium  opening  is  more  than  thirty-five  feet  wide  the  curtain  shall 
have  a  rigid  steel  frame  on  all  sides  braced  and  constructed  to  the  satis- 
faction of  the  commissioner  and  protected  from  fire  on  both  stage  and  audi- 
torium sides. 

(4)  The  proscenium  curtain  shall  extend  into  non-combustible  grooves 
at  the  side  a  distance  of  at  least  twelve  inches  and  the  edges  of  the  curtain 
shall  be  retained  in  the  groove  by  means  of  a  taut  steel  cable  or  by  other 
approved  means.  The  curtain  shall  overlap  the  top  of  the  proscenium 
opening  not  less  than  eighteen  inches.  At  the  bottom  edge  the  curtain 
shall  be  padded  for  a  depth  of  at  least  four  inches  with  flexible  incombustible 
material. 

(5)  The  proscenium  curtain  shall  be  so  rigged,  counter  balanced,  and 
operated  that  it  can  be  quickly  released  to  descend  by  gravity,  and  com- 
pletely close  the  opening  in  case  of  fire.  The  releasing  device  and  its 
location  shall  be  approved  by  the  commissioner. 

(6)  The  proscenium  curtain  shall  be  raised  and  lowered  at  least  once 
before  every  performance  and  shall  be  lowered  at  the  close  of  every  per- 
formance. The  operation  of  the  curtain  by  means  of  the  releasing  device 
shall  be  tested  at  intervals  as  required  by  the  commissioner. 

(c)  The  proscenium  wall  may  have,  in  addition  to  the  proscenium  opening 
not  more  than  two  openings  at  the  orchestra^  pit  level  and  two  openings  at 
about  the  auditorium  floor  or  stage  level,  none  of  which  shall  be  more  than 
twenty-five  square  feet  in  area.  Each  such  opening  shall  be  protected  on 
each  side  of  the  wall  by  a  Class  A  fire  door  as  specified  in  Part  22.  Ventilating 
ducts  may  pass  through  the  proscenium  wall,  provided  they  are  equipped 
with  automatic-closing  shutters  of  approved  fire-resistive  construction  with 
fusible  links. 

Sect.  311.  Stage  Construction. —  (a)  The  portion  of  the  stage 
floor  used  in  the  working  of  scenery,  traps  or  other  mechanical  apparatus, 
may  be  of  Type  III  floor  construction,  and  steel  beams  need  not  be  protected 
against  fire.  This  construction  shall  not  extend  beyond  the  proscenium 
wall  or  the  proscenium  curtain,  and  shall  not  exceed  the  width  of  the  pro- 
scenium opening  by  more  than  three  feet  on  each  side.  All  other  portions 
of  the  stage  shall  be  of  Type  I  construction  as  specified  in  Part  16.    The  room 

(41) 


Sees.  311=314 

or  rooms  under  a  stage  of  other  than  Type  I  construction  shall  not  be  used 
for  storage  or  for  any  purpose  other  than  the  working  of  traps  and  mechanical 
apparatus  necessary  for  a  performance  on  the  stage. 

(b)  Gridirons,  fly  galleries,  and  pin  rails  shall  be  constructed  of  incom- 
bustible materials,  but  fireproofing  of  metal  shall  not  be  required. 

(c)  A  protecting  hood  of  incombustible  material  shall  be  provided  over 
and  the  full  length  of  the  stage  switchboard.  The  switchboard  shall  be 
protected  on  the  sides  and  back  by  a  grille  of  three-sixteenths  inch  wire  with 
not  more  than  two-inch  mesh,  or  by  partitions  of  incombustible  materials 
having  a  one-hour  fire-resistive  rating,  and  on  the  front  by  a  railing  not 
less  than  three  feet  high. 

Sect.  312.  Dressing  Rooms  and  Workshops. —  The  dressing  rooms, 
workshops  and  storerooms  shall  be  separated  from  the  stage  by  a  two-hour 
separation  as  specified  in  Part  13. 

Sect.  313.  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Automatic  sprinklers 
shall  be  provided  throughout,  except  in  auditoriums,  foyers,  lounges,  entrances, 
exits  and  projection  rooms. 

(b)  The  proscenium  opening  shall  be  equipped  with  an  effective  water 
curtain  by  means  either  of  automatic  sprinkler  heads  of  suitable  design,  or 
open  heads  controlled  by  either  of  two  valves  on  the  stage,  one  on  each  side 
of  the  proscenium  opening. 

(c)  A  portable  fire  extinguisher  or  extinguishers  of  approved  type  shall 
be  provided  on  the  outside  of  each  projection  room  near  the  door  or  doors. 

(d)  Portable  extinguishers,  not  less  than  one  for  every  two  thousand  square- 
feet  of  floor  area,  shall  be  provided  throughout  except  in  entrances  and  exits. 

(e)  First  aid  hose  stations  shall  be  provided  throughout,  except  in  pro- 
jection rooms,  auditoriums,  foyers,  lounges,  entrances,  exits  and  other  rooms 
used  by  the  public.    There  shall  be  one  station  each  side  of  the  stage. 

(f)  Fire  department  standpipes  shall  be  provided  in  buildings  more  than 
seventy  feet  high. 

Sect.  314.  Projection  Room. —  The  size,  construction,  arrangement 
and  equipment  of  a  projection  room  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of 
sections  seventy-two  to  eighty-eight,  inclusive,  of  chapter  one  hundred  and 
forty-three  of  the  General  Laws,  and  to  the  regulations  established  thereunder 
by  the  commissioner  of  public  safety  of  the  commonwealth  of  Massachusetts. 


(42) 


Sec.  401 


PART  4. 


SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  B  OCCUPANCY: 

HALLS. 

Section 

401  —  Group  B  Occupancies:  Type,  Height,  Area, 

402  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

403  —  Exterior  Walls. 

404  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

405  —  Exits  and  Entrances. 

406  —  Aisles  and  Seating. 

407  —  Exit  Lights. 

408  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

409  —  Stage  and  Proscenium. 

410  —  Dressing  Rooms,  Workshops  and  Boiler  Rooms. 

411  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

412  —  Projection  Room. 

*Section    401.      Group    B    Occupancies:     Type,     Height,    Area, — 

(a)  Group  B  shall  include  places  where  persons  may  assemble  for  such 
and  similar  purposes  as  are  indicated  in  the  following  list  of  categories,  where 
the  main  floor  exceeds  nine  hundred  square  feet  in  area  or  where  the  total 
floor  area,  including  a  balcony,  exceeds  one  thousand  square  feet. 

(1)  Churches  in  the  commonly  accepted  sense  of  religious  societies. 

(2)  Rooms  and  halls  where  people  may  engage  in  any  form  of  dancing. 

(3)  Auditoriums,  Entertainment  and  Exhibition  Halls  without  gridiron 
equipped  stages  as  defined  in  Group  A. 

(4)  MoviDg    picture    theatres    without    gridiron    equipped    stages    as 
defined  in  Group  A. 

(5)  Gymnasiums  and  sports  events  halls. 

(6)  Meeting  and  gathering  places  of  fraternal,  social,  civic,  and  philan- 
thropic organizations. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  B, 
and  of  the  several  types  of  construction,  shall  not  exceed  in  height  and  area  of 
units  of  occupancy  the  following  limits: — 


Type  of 
Construction. 

Stories. 

Maximum  Area  of  Unit  (Square  Feet). 

I 

Not  hereby  limited. 
4 
1 

4 

1 

3 
1 

Not  allowed. 
1 

Not  hereby  limited. 

II 

Ill 

18,000 

Not  hereby  limited.    Maximum  distance  in  path 

of  exit,  175  feet. 
17,000 

IV 

Not  hereby  limited.    Maximum  distance  in  path 

of  exit,  150  feet. 
12,000 

V. 

Not  hereby  limited.    No  structure  of  combustible 
material  to  support  seats  or  aisles  to  be  super- 
imposed on  the  floor  construction.     Maximum 
distance  in  path  of  exit,  100  feet. 

VI 

5,000 

(43) 


Sees.  401=405 

The  maximum  area  may  be  increased  proportionately  within  the  limits 
given  as  the  number  of  stories  is  decreased  from  the  maximum. 

(c)  The  first  floor  of  all  buildings  more  than  two  stories  in  height  shall  be 
of  Type  I  construction.  No  assembly  hall  of  floor  area  exceeding  thirty-six 
hundred  square  feet  and  no  group  of  assembly  halls  of  aggregate  floor  area 
exceeding  forty-eight  hundred  square  feet  shall  be  above  the  first  story  unless 
the  building  is  of  Type  I  or  Type  II  construction. 

(d)  The  maximum  area  provided  in  this  section  may  be  increased  fifty 
per  cent  if  the  entire  floor  area  is  protected  by  automatic  sprinklers. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

Sect.  402.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  B  occupancies  shall  be 
separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  divisions  of  Group  B  occupancy 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13. 

fSect.  403.  Exterior  Walls. — (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  five  feet  from  a  property 
line,  shall  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction  without  openings,  except 
that  openings  in  such  walls  at  the  ends  of  courts  shall  be  allowed  when  pro- 
tected by  fire  windows  or  Class  B  fire  doors.  Such  walls  or  parts  of  walls 
which  are  five  feet  or  more,  but  less  than  ten  feet  from  a  property  line  shall 
be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  openings  therein  shall 
be  protected  by  fire  windows  or  Class  B  fire  doors. 

(b)  Every  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less  than 
twenty  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street,  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof  or  an 
unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same  lot, 
shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  all  openings  in 
such  portions  shall  be  protected  by  fire  windows  or  Class  B  fire  doors. 

(c)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for  the 
protection  or  prohibition  of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  construc- 
tion on  an  adjoining  lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees  in  a  writing 
recorded  in  the  registry  of  deeds  to  comply  with  the  said  requirements  on 
demand  of  the  commissioner. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

Sect.  404.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. — (a)  Main  stair  or  ramp 
exits  from  only  the  second  story  need  not  be  enclosed.  Stairways  or  ramps 
which  extend  only  from  a  balcony  in  a  hall  to  the  main  floor  level  need  not  be 
enclosed.  Other  stairways  and  ramps  which  pierce  only  one  floor  shall  be 
enclosed  in  the  story  above  or  below  but  such  stairways  which  serve  as  re- 
quired exits  from  one  story  shall  be  enclosed  in  the  other.  Other  stairways 
and  ramps  shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in  which  they  occur. 

(b)  Elevator  shafts,  ventilation  shafts  and  other  vertical  openings  except 
stairways  and  ramps,  shall  be  enclosed. 

JSect.  405.  Exits  and  Entrances. —  (a)  Group  B  buildings  shall  front 
upon  a  public  street  not  less  than  twenty  feet  wide  or  upon  an  open  area  not 
less  than  twenty  feet  wide  leading  to  a  public  street.  In  this  front  shall  be 
located  the  main  entrance  of  the  building.  The  main  entrance  or  entrances, 
which  may  also  serve  as  exits,  shall  have  in  the  aggregate  twenty  inches  of 
clear  width  for  each  one  hundred  persons  to  and  including  one  thousand  per- 

(44) 


Sec.  405 

sons,  with  an  additional  ten  inches  for  each  additional  one  hundred  persons 
to  and  including  one  thousand  additional  persons,  and  an  additional  five 
inches  for  each  additional  one  hundred  persons  over  two  thousand  persons. 
In  a  one  story  or  two  story  building  the  width  of  entrance  shall  be  based  upon 
the  total  seating  capacity  of  the  halls  served  by  it.  In  a  building  of  three  or 
more  stories  the  width  of  entrance  shall  be  based  upon  the  maximum  total 
seating  capacity  of  the  halls  served  by  it  which  are  contained  in  any  two 
stories.     (See  definition  of  "seating  capacity.") 

(b)  Adjacent  to  the  main  floor  and  to  each  balcony,  if  any,  of  an  assembly 
hall  and  between  the  hall  and  its  main  entrance  in  the  path  of  normal  entrance 
and  egress,  except  in  the  first  story,  there  shall  be  a  foyer,  consisting  of  a  lobby, 
corridor  or  passageway,  one  or  more,  the  aggregate  floor  area  of  which  shall 
be  at  least  equal  to  one  square  foot  for  each  seat  in  the  seating  capacity  of  the 
hall  or  balcony  so  served;  provided,  that  one  such  area  may  serve  two  or  more 
halls  or  balconies  on  the  same  floor  level  if  large  enough  for  the  largest  two  halls 
so  served.  A  hall,  with  a  balcony  seating  not  more  than  one  hundred  and 
fifty  persons,  may  have  a  common  foyer.  A  foyer  shall  have  a  width  of  at 
least  ten  inches  for  each  one  hundred  seats  in  the  seating  capacity  of  the 
largest  two  halls  served  by  it. 

(c)  Assembly  halls  having  a  seating  capacity  of  fifteen  hundred  or  less 
shall  have  exits  with  an  aggregate  width  of  at  least  twenty-four  inches  for 
each  one  hundred  seats  thereof  and  no  exit  shall  be  less  than  three  feet  wide. 
Halls  having  a  seating  capacity  of  five  hundred  or  less  shall  have  at  least  two 
remote  exits.  Halls  having  a  seating  capacity  of  more  than  five  hundred,  but 
not  more  than  eight  hundred,  shall  have  at  least  three  remote  exits.  Halls 
having  a  seating  capacity  of  more  than  eight  hundred,  but  not  more  than  one 
thousand,  shall  have  at  least  four  remote  exits  of  which  two  shall  be  at  least 
five  feet  wide.  Halls  having  a  seating  capacity  exceeding  one  thousand  shall 
have  at  least  four  remote  exits  five  feet  wide.  Every  assembly  hall  shall  have 
at  least  two  remote  and  independent  paths  of  exit.  Halls  having  a  seating 
capacity  of  more  than  fifteen  hundred  shall  have  exits  meeting  the  require- 
ments for  normal  and  emergency  exits  from  the  auditoriums  of  Group  A 
buildings.  Every  balcony  seating  more  than  twenty-five  persons  shall  have 
two  remote  exits. 

(d)  At  least  one  exit  from  every  hall  or  balcony  shall  lead  into  the  foyer 
thereof  and  all  such  exits  may  lead  into  the  foyer  if  it  has  two  remote  exits. 
Exterior  stairways  and  ramps  shall  not  serve  as  required  exits  of  Group  B 
buildings  except  the  emergency  exits  required  for  halls  seating  more  than 
fifteen  hundred.  Exits  from  foyers  and  all  paths  of  exit  from  doorways 
from  assembly  halls  shall  be  at  least  forty-four  inches  wide  and  shall  have 
an  aggregate  width  at  least  equal  to  twenty  inches  for  each  one  hundred 
seats  in  the  seating  capacity  of  the  halls  of  any  one  story  served  by  them. 
No  point  on  the  main  or  balcony  floor  of  an  assembly  hall  shall  be  further 
from  the  nearest  exit  from  the  story  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  along  a 
path  of  exit. 

(e)  Enclosed  stairways  or  ramp  exits  shall  discharge  directly  through  an 
exit  from  the  building  or  through  an  enclosed  corridor  leading  to  an  exit  from 
the  building. 

(45) 


Sees.  405-406 

(f)  Doorways  from  a  room  leading  into  a  stair  enclosure  shall  have  single 
acting,  self-closing  doors  opening  in  the  direction  of  any  path  of  exit. 

If  doors  in  exit  doorways  in  any  path  of  exit  have  latches,  such  latches  shall 
be  panic  bolts  or  similar  approved  devices,  of  non-corrodible  metal. 

(g)  Stairs  shall  have  a  handrail  on  each  side.  The  upper  ends  of  handrails 
shall  return  to  the  wall  or  to  a  post. 

(h)  Except  as  otherwise  specified  in  this  section  the  provisions  of  Part  18 
shall  apply  to  exits  from  Group  B  buildings. 

[J  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

*Sect.  406.  Aisles  and  Seating. —  (a)  Aisles  having  seats  on  both 
sides  shall  be  not  less  than  thirty  inches  in  width  at  the  end  remote  from  an 
exit  and  shall  be  widened  by  two  inches  for  each  ten  feet  in  length  measured 
toward  the  exit.  Aisles  having  seats  on  one  side  only  shall  be  not  less  than 
twenty-four  inches  wide  at  the  end  remote  from  an  exit,  and  shall  be  widened 
toward  the  exit  by  two  inches  for  each  ten  feet  in  length.  Side  aisles  serving 
more  than  one  exit  shall  be  of  uniform  width  between  exits  and  such  width 
shall  be  not  less  than  that  required  by  this  paragraph  at  a  point  midway 
between  the  extreme  exits. 

(b)  Aisles  shall  be  so  arranged  that  not  more  than  six  seats  shall  intervene 
between  any  seat  and  the  nearest  aisle. 

(c)  There  shall  be  no  obstructions  of  any  kind  in  an  aisle.  Aisles  on  the 
main  floor  and  in  balconies  may  be  sloped  or  stepped.  When  sloped,  the  slope 
shall  not  exceed  two  inches  vertical  in  ten  inches  horizontal.  When  stepped, 
the  rise  shall  not  exceed  twenty-one  inches  in  a  horizontal  distance  of  thirty- 
two  inches.    Stepped  aisles  shall  not  be  construed  to  be  stairways. 

(d)  The  main  floor  of  auditoriums  shall  have  a  cross-over  aisle,  either 
open  or  enclosed,  at  the  rear  extending  from  side  to  side  of  auditorium.  Fur- 
thermore, if  there  are  more  than  thirty-five  rows  of  seats  there  shall  be  in 
addition  at  least  one  cross-over  aisle  extending  from  side  to  side  of  the  audi- 
torium, and  in  no  case  shall  there  be  more  than  thirty-five  rows  of  seats 
between  cross-over  aisles.  Balconies  with  more  than  five  rows  of  seats  shall 
have  at  least  one  cross-over  aisle  extending  from  side  to  side  of  balcony,  and 
in  no  case  shall  there  be  more  than  twenty  rows  of  seats  between  cross-over 
aisles.  Cross  aisles  shall  be  not  less  than  three  feet  wide  in  the  clear  and 
shall  lead  to  exits  that  are  easily  accessible.  Vomitories  shall  be  considered 
extrances  and  exits. 

(e)  Seats  shall  be  spaced  not  less  than  thirty-two  inches  except  that 
fixed  seats  with  backs  less  than  one  inch  thick  may  be  spaced  not  less  than 
thirty  inches  back  to  back.  Seats  in  stepped  balconies  shall  be  spaced  not 
less  than  thirty-two  inches  back  to  back.  No  seats  shall  be  less  than  eighteen 
inches  in  width  center  to  center. 

(f)  In  a  hall  or  balcony  seating  more  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  persons, 
seats  shall  either  be  fastened  to  the  floor  or  approved  means  shall  be  provided 
so  that  the  relative  position  of  seats  shall  be  maintained.  In  smaller  halls 
or  balconies,  unless  the  seats  are  so  secured,  the  aisles  shall  be  four  inches  wider 
than  as  provided  in  paragraph  (a)  of  this  section. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

(46) 


Sees.  407=408 

*Sect.  407.  Exit  Lights. —  Over  every  exit  doorway  in  any  path  of  exit 
on  the  inside,  there  shall  be  an  illuminated  sign  bearing  the  word  "EXIT" 
in  letters  not  less  than  four  inches  high.  Each  sign  shall  be  provided  with 
two  electric  lamps. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

fSect.  408.  Light  and  Ventilation. —  (a)  Assembly  halls,  foyers, 
toilet  rooms  and  other  public  rooms  shall  be  provided  with  light  and  ventilation 
by  means  of  windows  or  skylights  with  an  aggregate  area  not  less  than  one 
eighth  the  floor  area  in  each  room,  or  they  shall  be  provided  with  artificial 
light  and  a  mechanically  operated  ventilating  system.  The  mechanically 
operated  ventilating  system  shall  provide  for  four  complete  changes  of  air 
per  hour,  and  in  assembly  halls  shall  supply  at  least  fifteen  cubic  feet  of  fresh 
air  per  minute  for  each  occupant  thereof.  If  the  velocity  of  the  air  entering 
the  rooms  exceeds  five  feet  per  second,  the  opening  must  be  placed  more  than 
eight  feet  above  the  floor  directly  beneath.  Adequate  means  shall  be  provided 
for  the  removal  of  foul  air. 

(b)  Registers  or  ventilating  ducts  for  supplying  air  to  or  exhausting  air 
from  stages  shall  be  equipped  with  automatic-closing  shutters  with  fusible 
links. 

(c)  Lights  for  stages  shall  be  on  circuits  separate  from  the  lights  of 
the  remainder  of  the  building.  Lights  in  corridors,  stairways,  and  other 
parts  of  exits  shall  be  suitably  protected. 

(d)  In  an  assembly  hall  having  a  seating  capacity  in  excess  of  eight 
hundred  the  exit  sign  lights  and  selected  lamps  in  foyers,  auditoriums,  stair- 
ways, corridors  and  other  paths  of  exit  therefrom  sufficient  to  provide  illu- 
mination for  egress  in  case  of  emergency  shall  be  wired  on  a  separate 
emergency  circuit  with  a  second  source  of  current  as  provided  for  in  Group  A 
occupancy.  Exit  sign  lights  shall  be  kept  lighted  when  the  hall  is  occupied, 
and  other  emergency  lights,  except  auditorium  lights,  when  the  hall  is 
occupied  except  before  sunset  in  rooms,  corridors  and  stairways  sufficiently 
lighted  by  windows. 

(e)  The  emergency  lights  shall  be  provided  with  a  second  or  emergency 
source  of  current  and  a  transfer  switch  which  will  automatically  disconnect 
the  normal  service  and  instantly  connect  the  emergency  service  when  the 
voltage  of  the  normal  service  falls  below  fifty  per  cent  of  the  nominal  lamp 
voltage  and  which  will  also  automatically  disconnect  the  emergency  service 
and  instantly  connect  the  normal  service  when  the  voltage  of  the  latter  is 
restored  to  eighty  per  cent  of  the  nominal  lamp  voltage.  The  emergency 
source  of  current  shall  be  either: — 

(1)  A  separate  feeder  of  the  service  company  other  than  that  from  which 
the  normal  service  is  taken,  or 

(2)  A  separate  feeder  from  a  reliable  generating  plant  independent 
of  that  from  which  the  normal  service  is  taken,  or 

(3)  An  approved  storage  battery,  or 

(4)  Illuminating  gas. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  and  9  \ 

(47) 


Sees.  409=412 

Sect.  409.  Stage  and  Proscenium. —  (a)  Where  a  stage  or  platform 
is  without  provisions  for  scenery,  no  separation  from  the  auditorium  shall 
be  required,  and  such  stage  or  platform  may  be  of  the  same  type  of  con- 
struction as  the  auditorium  floor;  or  it  may  be  constructed  of  wood,  if  the 
auditorium  floor  extends  under  the  full  area  of  such  stage  or  platform. 

(b)  Where  a  stage  has  provisions  for  standing  scenery  only,  such  stage 
shall  be  separated  from  the  auditorium  by  a  proscenium  wall  of  not  less 
than  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction.  Each  opening  through  this  wall, 
other  than  the  proscenium  opening,  shall  not  exceed  twenty-five  square 
feet  in  area,  and  shall  be  protected  by  a  Class  A  fire  door.  Where  such 
stage  exceeds  fifteen  feet  in  depth,  or  where  the  proscenium  opening  exceeds 
twenty-five  feet  in  width  or  twelve  feet  in  height,  the  proscenium  opening 
shall  be  provided  with  a  proscenium  curtain  as  specified  for  theatres  in  Part  3. 
Where  such  stage  is  less  than  fifteen  feet  in  depth,  and  the  proscenium  open- 
ing is  less  than  twenty-five  feet  in  width  and  twelve  feet  in  height,  the  pros- 
cenium curtain  shall  be  either  of  asbestos  fabric  or  of  cotton  or  other  fabric 
flame-proofed  by  approved  chemical  process. 

Sect.    410.     Dressing    Rooms,    Workshops    and    Boiler    Rooms. — 

Dressing  rooms,  workshops  and  store  rooms  near  the  stage  shall  be  separated 
therefrom  by  a  two-hour  separation  as  defined  in  Part  13.  Every  boiler 
room  or  room  containing  a  heating  plant  shall  be  separated  from  the  rest  of 
the  building  by  a  two-hour  separation. 

*Sect.  411.  Fire  Extinguishing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Cellars  and  base- 
ments, stages  with  proscenium  walls,  accessible  areas  —  other  than  the 
Assembly  Hall,  entrances  and  exits,  and  projection  rooms  shall  be  equipped 
with  Automatic  Sprinklers.  Attics,  the  space  under  stages  and  other  such 
spaces,  if  available  for  storage,  shall  be  equipped  with  Automatic  Sprinklers. 

(b)  In  buildings  where  Group  B  occupancy  is  located  above  occupancy 
of  other  grouping  or  groupings,  the  areas  of  the  other  grouping  or  groupings 
shall  be  equipped  with  Automatic  Sprinklers. 

(c)  In  every  Assembly  Hall  where  stage  shall  have  a  proscenium  wall  as 
required  by  Section  409  (b),  the  proscenium  opening  shall  be  equipped  with  a 
water  curtain  as  specified  in  Part  3. 

(d)  A  portable  fire  extinguisher  of  approved  type  shall  be  provided  out- 
side of  every  projection  room  near  each  projection  room  door. 

(e)  In  buildings  more  than  two  stories  high,  either  portable  extinguishers, 
not  less  than  one  for  every  two  thousand  square  feet  of  floor  area,  or  first 
aid  standpipes,  shall  be  provided  in  spaces  other  than  projection  rooms,  but 
first  aid  standpipes  shall  not  be  provided  in  assembly  halls,  corridors,  foyers, 
exits  and  other  rooms  used  by  persons  assembled  in  such  halls. 

(f)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided 
in  buildings  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  ] 

fSect.  412.  Projection  Room. — A  projection  room  shall  have  a  floor 
of  incombustible  material  supported  on  a  concrete  base  not  less  than  three 

(48) 


Sec.  412 

inches  in  total  thickness  which  may  be  supported  by  a  floor  of  the  same 
type  of  construction  as  that  of  the  building,  or  of  other  materials  having 
equivalent  fire-resistance.  A  projection  room  shall  have  walls  and  ceiling 
of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction  of  incombustible  materials. 
In  other  respects  a  projection  room  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of 
sections  seventy-two  to  eighty-eight,  inclusive,  of  chapter  one  hundred  and 
forty-three  of  the  General  Laws,  and  to  the  regulations  established  there- 
under  by   the   commissioner   of   public    safety   of   the   commonwealth   of 

Massachusetts. 

[  fits  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  2  ] 


(49) 


Sec.  SOI 


PART  5. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  C  OCCUPANCY: 

SCHOOLS. 

Section 

501  —  Group  C  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

502  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

503  —  Exterior  Walls. 

504  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

505  —  Exits. 

506  —  Aisles  and  Seating. 

507  —  Light. 

508  —  Ventilation  and  Heating. 

509  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

510  —  Special  Requirements. 

511  — Toilet  Accommodations. 

*Section  501.     Group  C  Occupancy:  Type,  Area. —  (a)     Group  C  shall 
include  every  post-code  building  used  wholly  or  in  part  as  a  school. 

(b)    Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  C 
shall  be  limited  as  to  type  of  construction,  height  and  area  of  units,  as  follows :— 


Type  of  Construction. 

Stories. 

Maximum  Area  of  Unit  (Square  Feet). 

I 

Not  hereby  limited. 
4 
1 
2 
1 
2 
1 
Not  allowed. 
1 

Not  hereby  limited. 

II 

18,000 

Ill 

24,000 
17,000 

IV 

20,000 
12,000 

V 

18,000 

Not  allowed. 

VI 

5,000 

The  maximum  area  may  be  increased  proportionately  within  the  limits 
given  as  the  number  of  stories  is  decreased  from  the  maximum. 

(c)  The  maximum  area  provided  in  this  section  may  be  increased  fifty 
per  cent  if  the  entire  floor  area  is  protected  by  automatic  sprinklers. 

(d)  Assembly  halls  with  seating  capacity  of  more  than  one  hundred  and 
fifty  persons  shall  conform  with  the  requirements  of  Part  4  and,  in  addition, 
the  width  of  exits  shall  be  computed  in  multiples  of  twenty  inches  for  each 
one  hundred  seats. 

(e)  Every  Group  C  post-code  building  in  the  first  or  second  fire  zone 
shall  be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II  construction. 

(50) 


Sees.  501-504 

(f)  When  school  usage  involves  special  conditions  such  as  the  use  of 
hazardous,  highly  inflammable  or  explosive  materials  or  liquids  or  any  other 
special  occupancy  that  is  a  hazard,  they  shall  also  conform  to  the  special 
requirements  of  that  occupancy  or  hazard. 

(g)  Pre-code  buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  involving  a  change  of  occu- 
pancy to  Group  C,  whether  or  not  altered  or  enlarged  shall  conform  to  the 
general  requirements  of  this  section  as  they  shall  be  interpreted  by  the  com- 
missioner as  delineated  in  Section  107,  paragraph  (e),  and  they  shall  be  limited 
as  to  type  of  construction,  (number  of  stories,)  and  area  of  units  as  follows: 


Type  of  Construction. 

Stories. 

Maximum  Area  of  Unit  (sq.  ft.) 

I 

Not  hereby  limited. 
4 
1 
5 
5 
Not  allowed. 
2 

Not  hereby  limited. 

II 

18,000 

Ill 

24,000 

5,000 

IV 

5,000 

V 

VI 

4,000 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

Sect.  502.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  C  occupancies  shall 
be  separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  division  of  Group  C  occupancy 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13. 

fSect.  503.  Exterior  Walls. —  (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  five  feet  from  a  property 
line,  shall  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction  without  openings.  Such 
walls  or  parts  of  walls  which  are  five  feet  or  more,  but  less  than  ten  feet  from 
a  property  line,  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and 
all  openings  therein  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(b)  Every  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less 
than  twenty  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street,  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof, 
or  an  unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same 
lot,  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  all  openings 
in  such  portions  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(c)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for 
protection  or  prohibition  of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  con- 
struction on  an  adjoining  lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees 
in  a  writing  recorded  in  the  registry  of  deeds  for  Suffolk  county  to  comply 
with  the  said  requirements  on  demand  of  the  commissioner. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943.  ch.  3  ] 

JSect.  504.     Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)     Elevator  shafts, 

ventilating  shafts,  dust  chutes  and  other  vertical  openings  shall  be  enclosed. 

(b)     Stairways  and  ramps  which  pierce  only  one  floor  shall  be  enclosed  in 

the  story  above  or  below,  but  such  stairways  or  ramps  which  serve  as  required 

(51) 


Sees.  504=505 

exits  from  one  story  shall  be  enclosed  in  the  other  story.     Other  stairways 
and  ramps  shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in  which  they  occur. 
[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  S  ] 

*Sect.  505.  Exits. —  (a)  All  rooms  used  for  the  instruction  of  pupils 
shall  have  at  least  two  means  of  egress;  one  of  which  shall  open  into  a  corridor, 
stairway,  ramp  or  other  egress  enclosure;  the  other  shall  lead  to  another 
separate  corridor,  stairway,  ramp  or  other  egress  enclosure  through  intervening 
rooms  and  intercommunicating  doors.  The  width  of  exit  doors  shall  be  not 
less  than  thirty-six  inches  nor  less  than  twenty  inches  for  each  one  hundred 
occupants  thereof. 

(b)  Corridors  shall  have  uniform  width  between  exits  and  shall  have  a 
clear  exit-width  not  less  than  six  feet,  nor  less  than  twenty  inches  for  each  one 
hundred  persons  or  fraction  thereof  allotted  to  it  as  a  path  of  exit;  provided, 
that  the  exit-width  of  a  corridor  shall  not  be  required  to  exceed  ten  feet. 
If  classroom  doors  on  one  or  both  sides  of  a  corridor  project  into  it  when 
in  open  position,  the  width  of  the  corridor  shall  be  increased  over  its  required 
exit-width  by  one  half  the  sum  of  such  projections.  If  lockers  are  installed 
in  the  walls  of  corridors  on  one  or  both  sides,  the  width  of  the  corridor  shall  be 
increased  over  its  required  exit-width  by  eighteen  inches  for  each  side  on 
which  lockers  are  installed.  No  obstruction  shall  be  placed  in  corridors 
except  that  the  drip  of  a  recessed  drinking  fountain  or  a  radiator  may  project 
into  a  corridor.  If  a  radiator  less  than  six  feet  six  inches  above  the  floor  is 
placed  in  a  path  of  exit  and  is  not  fully  recessed,  the  width  of  the  corridor 
shall  be  measured  from  the  face  of  the  radiator. 

(c)  Each  corridor  shall  have  at  least  two  remote  exits  which  shall  be 
exits  from  the  story  as  specified  in  Part  18.  Such  exits  shall  be  so  located 
that  every  doorway  from  a  room  for  pupils  to  a  corridor  shall  be  not  more 
than  seventy  feet  from  an  exit  from  the  corridor.  The  persons  in  each  room 
having  an  exit  to  a  corridor  shall  be  allotted  to  a  path  of  exit  through  the 
corridor  to  the  nearest  exit  therefrom  for  the  purpose  of  computing  the 
width  of  corridors  and  their  exits;  provided,  that  if  the  mid-length  point  of 
a  corridor  between  its  exits  lies  in  an  exit  from  a  room  or  between  two  exits 
from  a  room,  the  persons  in  such  room  may  be  allotted  to  either  exit  from  the 
corridor.  The  width  of  every  exit  from  a  corridor  shall  be  not  less  than 
forty  inches,  nor  less  than  twenty  inches  for  each  one  hundred  persons  or 
fraction  thereof  allotted  to  it. 

(d)  Each  story  of  a  Group  C  building  shall  have  at  least  two  remote 
exits.  The  width  of  stairs  and  ramps  and  of  exits  from  them  shall  be  not  less 
than  forty  inches  nor  less  than  twenty  inches  for  each  one  hundred  persons 
or  fraction  thereof  allotted  to  them  and  shall  be  based  upon  the  largest 
number  of  persons  from  any  one  story  whom  they  serve  as  exits.  If  doors 
in  exit  doorways  more  than  four  feet  wide  have  latches,  such  latches  shall  be 
panic  bolts  or  similar  devices  of  non-corrodible  material. 

(e)  No  intake  for  a  dust  or  waste  paper  chute  shall  open  directly  upon  a 
corridor  or  enclosed  exit,  but  may  open  in  a  closet  off  a  corridor. 

(f)  All  stairs  shall  have  a  handrail  on  each  side.  Stairs  eighty  inches 
or  more  in  width  shall  have  one  or  more  intermediate  rails  dividing  the  stairs 

(52) 


Sees.  505=508 

jnto  widths  less  than  eighty  inches  but  not  less  than  forty  inches;  provided, 
that  in  calculating  the  capacity  as  an  exit  of  a  stair  so  divided,  each  division 
shall  be  considered  an  exit.  The  upper  ends  of  handrails  shall  be  returned 
to  the  wall  or  shall  so  terminate  at  a  post  as  not  to  leave  a  free  or  projecting 
end. 

(g)  Stair  landings  shall  have  a  width  at  least  equal  to  that  of  the  stairs. 
No  run  of  stairs  shall  have  more  than  fifteen  nor  less  than  three  risers.  The 
rise  shall  not  exceed  seven  and  one  half  inches  nor  shall  the  tread  be  less 
than  ten  inches.    Winders  shall  not  be  permitted. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

Sect.  506.  Aisles  and  Seating. —  (a)  Classrooms  with  fixed  seats 
shall  have  aisles  at  least  thirty  inches  wide  next  to  the  windows  and  at  least 
thirty-six  inches  wide  on  other  sides,  and  intermediate  aisles  at  least  sixteen 
inches  wide. 

(b)  Unless  definitely  fixed  on  the  plans  the  normal  seating  capacity  of 
classrooms  shall  be  determined  by  dividing  the  floor  area  of  each  room  as 
follows:  — 

Elementary  Schools by  15  square  feet 

Intermediate  Schools by  17  square  feet 

High  Schools  and  Colleges by  19  square  feet 

fSect.  507.  Light. —  (a)  Rooms  used  by  pupils  for  study  and  class 
work  shall  have  outside  windows  with  a  total  sash  area  not  less  than  one 
fifth  the  floor  area  of  each  such  room.  The  windows  shall  preferably  be 
on  the  long  side  of  a  room.  The  clear  height  of  a  room  shall  be  not  less 
than  ten  feet.  No  room  shall  be  used  for  class  work  where  an  exterior  wall 
outside  and  opposite  the  required  windows  shall  extend  above  a  line  from 
the  window  sills  at  thirty  degrees  above  the  horizontal  unless  such  wall  is 
at  least  sixty  feet  from  the  windows.  The  possibility  of  a  building  on  an 
adjoining  lot  shall  be  provided  for. 

(b)  Corridors,  stairways  and  other  exits  shall  have  artificial  illumination 
which,  if  electric,  shall  be  on  circuits  and  control  separate  from  other  lighting 
in  the  building. 

\-\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  1] 

Sect.  508.  Ventilation  and  Heating. —  (a)  In  all  rooms  used  by 
pupils  for  school  purposes  shall  be  installed  a  positive  system  of  ventilation 
that  will  supply  fresh  air,  heated  when  necessary,  and  adequately  remove 
the  foul  air.  In  class,  recitation  and  study  rooms  there  shall  be  provided 
at  least  six  complete  air  changes  per  hour  but  not  less  than  twenty  cubic 
feet  of  fresh  air  per  minute  per  pupil  normally  seated,  and  in  assembly  rooms, 
gymnasiums,  lunch  rooms  and  vocational  rooms  at  least  four  complete 
changes  of  air  per  hour  but  not  less  than  fifteen  cubic  feet  per  minute  per  pupil 
for  whom  seating  or  work  space  is  provided.  In  toilets,  shower  and  locker 
rooms  at  least  eight  complete  air  changes  per  hour  shall  be  provided  and 
these  rooms  shall  be  ventilated  by  an  exhaust  system. 

(b)  The  heating  and  ventilating  system  shall  be  capable  of  maintaining, 
when  the  outside  temperature  is  zero,  in  gymnasiums  and  toilets  a  temperature 

(53) 


Sees.  508-511 

of  sixty  degrees,  in  shower  and  locker  rooms  appurtenant  to  gymnasiums 
seventy-five  degrees,  and  in  other  rooms  used  by  pupils  or  teachers  seventy 
degrees,  all  by  Fahrenheit  scale. 

Sect.  509.  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Cellars  and  base- 
ments, except  those  portions  used  for  classes,  shall  be  equipped  with  auto- 
matic sprinklers.  Mechanical  trade  shops,  storage  rooms  and  attics  available 
for  storage  shall  have  automatic  sprinklers  where  required  by  the  commissioner. 

(b)  A  portable  fire-extinguisher  of  approved  type  shall  be  provided  out- 
side every  projection  room  near  the  door. 

(c)  In  buildings  more  than  two  stories  high,  either  portable  fire-extin- 
guishers, not  less  than  one  for  every  thirty-five  hundred  square  feet  of  floor 
area  and  not  less  than  one  in  each  story,  or  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  pro- 
vided, but  first  aid  standpipes  shall  not  be  provided  in  assembly  halls  or  in 
exits  therefrom. 

(d)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided 
in  buildings  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

Sect.  510.  Special  Requirements. —  Every  boiler  room  shall  be  sepa- 
rated from  the  remainder  of  the  building  by  a  two-hour  separation  as  speci- 
fied in  Part  13. 

Sect.  511.  Toilet  Accommodations. — (a)  Adequate  toilets  shall  be 
provided  for  pupils,  with  fixtures  in  accordance  with  the  following  table: — 


Number  of  Pupils  of  Either  Sex. 

Girls. 

Boys. 

Water  Closets. 

Water  Closets. 

Urinals. 

50 

4 
6 
9 
12 
14 
16 
18 
20 
22 
24 
43 
61 

3 

4 

6 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

25 

36 

4 

100 

6 

-  150 

8 

200 

10 

250 

12 

300 

14 

350 

16 

400 

18 

450 

20 

500 

22 

i,000 

40 

1,500 

56 

(b)  For  intermediate  numbers  of  pupils,  fixtures  shall  be  provided  by 
interpolation  in  the  table  and  for  numbers  in  excess  of  fifteen  hundred  at  the 
rate  provided  for  fifteen  hundred. 

(c)  Separate  toilets  shall  be  provided  for  the  teachers  and  for  the  janitors. 


(54) 


Sec.  60! 


PART   6. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  D  OCCUPANCY: 
HOSPITALS  AND   DETENTION   BUILDINGS. 

Section 

601  —  Group  D  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

602  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

603  —  Exterior  Walls. 

604  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

605  —  Exits. 

606  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

607  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

608  —  Special  Requirements. 

609  —  Exceptions. 

[610  —  Emergency  Lights.] 

*Section    601.      Group    D    Occupancy:    Type,    Height,     Area. — (a) 

Group  D  shall  include  such  occupancies  as  — 

Division  1.  Jails,  prisons,  reformatories,  houses  of  correction,  asylums 
for  the  insane  or  feeble  minded,  the  parts  of  police  stations  wherein  more  than 
ten  persons  may  be  detained,  and  similar  buildings. 

Division  2.  Hospitals,  sanitariums,  orphanages,  nurseries,  homes  for  the 
aged  and  similar  buildings,  with  sleeping  accommodations  for  ten  or  more 
persons. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  D 
shall  be  limited  as  to  type  of  construction,  height  and  area  of  units,  as  follows: — 


Type  of  Construction. 

Stories. 

Maximum  Area  of  Unit  (Square  Feet) 

I 

Not  hereby  limited. 
4 
1 
2 
1 
2 
1 
Not  allowed. 
1 

Not  hereby  limited. 

II 

17,000 

Ill 

20,000 
12,000 

IV 

18,000 
10,000 

V 

15,000 

Not  allowed. 

VI 

2,500 

The  maximum  area  may  be  increased  proportionately  within  the  limits 
given  as  the  number  of  stories  is  decreased  from  the  maximum. 

(c)  Division  1  buildings  of  Group  D  shall  be  of  Type  I  construction 
throughout.    The  ceilings  and  partitions  of  Division  2  buildings  of  Group  D 

(55) 


Sees.  601=605 

more  than  one  story  in  height  shall  be  of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive 
construction  and  the  first  floor  of  such  buildings  more  than  two  stories  in 
height  shall  be  of  Type  I  construction. 

(d)  The  provisions  of  this  section  and  of  Part  16  shall  not  be  held  to  pro- 
hibit cell  block  mezzanine  floor  construction  of  unprotected  metal  without 
limitation  as  to  number  and  area  of  such  floors  provided  the  entire  cell  block 
construction  is  of  incombustible  materials. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

Sect.  602.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  D  occupancies  shall 
be  separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  divisions  of  Group  D  occupancy 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13. 

Sect.  603.  Exterior  Walls. — (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  five  feet  from  a  property 
line,  shall  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction  without  openings,  except 
that  openings  in  such  walls  at  the  ends  of  courts  shall  be  allowed  when  pro- 
tected by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows.  Such  walls  or  parts  of  walls 
which. are  five  feet  or  more,  but  less  than  ten  feet  from  a  property  line  shall  be 
of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  openings  therein  shall  be 
protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(b)  Every  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less  than 
twenty  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street,  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof,  or  an 
unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same  lot, 
shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  all  openings  in  such 
portions  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(c)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for 
protection  or  prohibition  of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  con- 
struction on  an  adjoining  lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees  in 
a  writing  recorded  in  the  registry  of  deeds  for  Suffolk  county  to  comply 
with  the  said  requirements  on  demand  of  the  commissioner. 

(d)  In  buildings  of  Type  V  construction  exterior  walls  of  unprotected 
metal  may  be  considered  to  meet  the  requirements  of  this  section  for  two- 
hour  walls. 

Sect.  604.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. — (a)  Elevator  shafts, 
ventilating  shafts  and  other  vertical  openings,  except  stairways  and  ramps, 
shall  be  enclosed. 

(b)  Stairways  and  ramps  which  pierce  only  one  floor  shall  be  enclosed 
in  the  story  above  or  below  but  such  a  stairway  or  ramp  which  serves  as 
required  exit  from  one  story  shall  be  enclosed  in  the  other  story.  Other 
stairways  and  ramps  shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in  which  they  occur. 

(c)  This  section  and  Part  15  shall  not  be  held  to  require  enclosure  of 
mezzanine  floors  in  Group  D  buildings  nor  of  vertical  openings  in  such 
floors,  nor  of  cell  block  floors  if  such  cell  blocks  are  constructed  entirely  of 
incombustible  materials. 

fSect.    605.     Exits. — (a)    Every  portion  of  a  building  shall  be  provided 
with  exits  as  specified  in  Part  18. 

(56) 


Sees.  605=609 

(b)  In  buildings  of  Division  2  exits  from  a  story,  as  specified  in  Part  18, 
shall  be  so  located  that  no  bed  shall  be  more  than  seventy  feet  distant  from 
at  least  one  such  exit  measured  along  the  path  of  exit. 

(c)  In  buildings  of  Division  2  exit  doorways  from  patients'  rooms  shall 
be  not  less  than  forty-two  inches  wide.  In  such  buildings  corridors,  stair- 
ways, ramps,  doorways  in  stair  or  ramp  enclosures  and  doorways  from  the 
building,  which  serve  as  required  exits,  shall  be  not  less  than  sixty  inches 
wide.  In  such  stairways  the  tread  shall  not  be  less  than  eleven  inches  nor 
the  rise  more  than  six  and  one  half  inches;  stair  landings  at  turns  shall  be 
not  less  than  sixty  inches  wide. 

(d)  Except  in  places  of  detention,  exit  doors  shall  not  be  fastened  against 
egress  except  by  self-releasing  latches,  panic-bolts  or  similar  devices  which 
can  readily  be  opened  from  the  inside  at  all  times  without  the  use  of  keys 
or  any  special  knowledge  or  effort.  Revolving  doors  shall  not  be  installed 
in  required  exit  doorways  from  buildings  of  Group  D  occupancy. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

{Sect.  606.  Light  and  Ventilation. —  Rooms  ordinarily  occupied  by 
human  beings  shall  be  provided  with  light  by  means  of  windows  in  exterior 
walls  or  skylights  in  roofs,  the  area  of  which  shall  not  be  less  than  one-eighth 
of  the  floor  area,  and  the  same  shall  be  ventilated  by  windows  in  exterior 
walls  the  area  of  which  when  open  shall  not  be  less  than  one-sixteenth  of  the 
floor  area  of  the  room,  or  by  mechanically  operated  ventilating  system  sup- 
plying at  least  fifteen  cubic  feet  of  fresh  air  per  minute  per  occupant  or 
four  complete  changes  of  air  each  hour,  whichever  is  greater.  Rooms  accom- 
modating a  bed  shall  be  provided  with  light  and  ventilation  by  means  of 
windows  in  exterior  walls,  the  area  of  which  shall  not  be  less  than  one-eighth 
of  the  floor  area  for  light  and  when  opened  for  ventilation  not  less  than 
one-sixteenth  of  the  floor  area. 

[  {As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 
Sect.  607.     Fire=Extinguishing    Apparatus. — (a)     All    cellars,    base- 
ments and  shafts  shall  be  protected  by  automatic  sprinklers.     Store  rooms, 
kitchens  and  utility  rooms  in  buildings  of  other  than  Type  I  or  Type  II 
construction  shall  be  protected  by  automatic  sprinklers. 

(b)  In  all  buildings  either  portable  fire  extinguishers,  not  less  than  one 
for  every  twenty-five  hundred  square  feet  of  floor  area  and  at  least  one  in 
each  story,  or  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided. 

(c)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided 
in  buildings  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

Sect.  608.  Special  Requirements. —  (a)  Every  gas  service  shall  have 
a  shut-off  easily  accessible  from  the  outside  and  conspicuously  marked. 

(b)  Every  boiler  room  or  room  containing  heating  apparatus  shall  be 
separated  from  the  rest  of  the  building  with  a  three-hour  fire  separation,  as 
specified  in  Part  13. 

Sect.  609.  Exceptions. —  No  requirement  of  this  chapter  shall  be  so 
construed  as  to  prohibit  the  construction  of  cells  in  jails  or  prevent  the  use 
of  locks  or  safety  devices  in  buildings  where  it  is  necessary  forcibly  to  restrain 
the  inmates. 

(57) 


Sec.  610 

*Sect.  610.  Emergency  Lights.—  There  shall  be  emergency  lights  and 
they  shall  be  provided  with  a  second  or  emergency  source  of  current  and  a 
transfer  switch  which  will  automatically  disconnect  the  normal  service  and 
instantly  connect  the  emergency  service  when  the  voltage  of  the  normal 
service  falls  below  fifty  per  cent  of  the  nominal  lamp  voltage  and  which  will 
also  automatically  disconnect  the  emergency  service  and  instantly  connect 
the  normal  service  when  the  voltage  of  the  latter  is  restored  to  eighty  per 
cent  of  the  nominal  lamp  voltage.  The  emergency  source  of  current  shall  be 
either:  — 

(1)  A  separate  feeder  of  the  service  company  other  than  that  from 
which  the  normal  service  is  taken,  or 

(2)  A  separate  feeder  from  a  reliable  generating  plant  independent  of 
that  from  which  the  normal  service  is  taken,  or 

(3)  An  approved  storage  battery,  or 

(4)  Illuminating  gas. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  and  9  ] 


(58) 


Sec,  701 


PART  7. 


SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  E  OCCUPANCY: 
COMMERCIAL  BUILDINGS  OF  HAZARDOUS  OC= 
CUPANCY. 

Section 

701  —  Group  E  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area, 

702  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

703  —  Exterior  Walls. 

704  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

705  —  Exits. 

706  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

707  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

708  —  Special  Hazards. 

♦Section  701.  Group  E  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. — (a)  Group 
E  shall  include  such  occupancies  as  — 

Division  1.  Planing  mills,  box  factories,  wood  working  plants,  mattress 
factories,  paint  shops  and  dry  cleaning  plants. 

Division  2.  Buildings  for  the  storage  of  hazardous,  highly  flammable  or 
explosive  material. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group 
E  shall  be  limited  as  to  type  of  construction,  height  and  area  of  units,  as 
follows :  — 


Type    of 
Construction. 


Height 
Stories. 


Maximum  Area  of  Unit  in  Square  Feet. 


Accessibility  from  Outside  Walls. 


25% 
or  less. 


More  than 
25%  to  50%. 


More  than 
50%  to  75%. 


More  than 

75%. 


I.. 
II. 
Ill 
IV. 

V.. 
VI. 


15 

10,000 

4 

8,000 

4 

8,000 

3 

1 

4,000 
6,000 

1 

6,000 

1 

3,000 

15,000 

10,000 

10,000 

6,000 
8,000 

8,000 

4,000 


20,000 

12,000 

12,000 

8,000 
10,000 

10,000 

5,000 


25,000 

14,000 

14,000 

10,000 
12,000 

12,000 

6,000 


The  maximum  area  of  Type  IV  units  may  be  increased  proportionately 
within  the  limits  givenas  the  number  of  stories  is  decreased  from  the  maximum. 

(c)     The  limitations  upon  area  of  the  foregoing  table  shall  not  apply  to 

buildings  one  story  high  of  Division  1,  of  Type  I  construction,  the  units  of 

which  may  have  areas  not  in  excess  of  fifteen  thousand,  twenty  thousand  and 

twenty-five  thousand  square  feet,  if  accessible  from  one,  two  or  three  sides, 

respectively. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  } 

(59) 


Sees.  702=706 

Sect.  702.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  E  occupancies  shall 
be  separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  divisions  of  Group  E  occupancy- 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13.  Two 
tenants  shall  be  separated  by  partitions  of  at  least  one-hour  and,  in  a  basement, 
at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  rating. 

Sect.  703.  Exterior  Walls. —  (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  five  feet  from  a  property 
line,  shall  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction  without  openings,  except 
that  openings  in  such  walls  at  the  ends  of  courts  shall  be  allowed  when  pro- 
tected by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows.  Such  walls  or  parts  of  walls 
which  are  five  feet  or  more,  but  less  than  ten  feet  from  a  property  line,  shall 
be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  openings  therein 
shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(b)  Every  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less  than 
twenty  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street,  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof,  or  an 
unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same  lot, 
shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  all  openings  in 
such  portions  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(c)  The  Commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for 
protection  or  prohibition  of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  construc- 
tion on  an  adjoining  lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees  in  a 
writing  recorded  in  the  registry  of  deeds  for  Suffolk  county  to  comply  with 
the  said  requirements  on  demand  of  the  commissioner. 

(d)  In  buildings  of  Type  V  construction  exterior  walls  of  unprotected 
metal  may  be  considered  to  meet  the  requirements  of  this  section  for  two-hour 
walls. 

*Sect.  704.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)  Elevator  shafts, 
ventilating  shafts  and  other  vertical  openings  except  stairways  and  ramps 
shall  be  enclosed. 

(b)  Mezzanine  floors  shall  be  enclosed  when  otherwise  the  total  floor  area 
in  one  story  exposed  to  a  single  fire  would  exceed  the  maximum  area  of  unit 
specified  in  section  seven  hundred  and  one.  Vertical  openings  in  enclosed 
mezzazine  floors  shall  be  enclosed  as  herein  provided  for  other  floors. 

(c)  Stairways  and  ramps  which  pierce  only  one  floor,  shall  be  enclosed  in 
the  story  above  or  below  but  such  stairways  or  ramps,  which  serve  as  required 
exits  from  one  story,  shall  be  enclosed  in  the  other  story.  Other  stairways 
shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in  which  they  occur. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  705.  Exits. —  (a)  Every  portion  of  a  building  shall  be  provided 
with  exits  as  specified  in  Part  18. 

(b)  Exits  from  every  story  shall  be  so  located  that  no  point  within  the 
story  shall  be  further  than  one  hundred  feet  from  the  nearest  exit. 

(c)  Doorways  serving  as  exits  from  rooms  into  a  stair  or  ramp  enclosures 
shall  have  one-way  swinging  self-closing  doors  opening  in  the  direction  of 
egress. 

fSect.  706.  Light  and  Ventilation.—  Rooms  used  by  human  beings 
shall  be  provided  with  light  and  ventilation  by  means  of  windows  or  skylights 
or  with  artificial  light  and  a  ventilating  system. 

[  fils  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

(60) 


Sees.  707-708 

*Sect.  707.  Fire-Extinguishing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Automatic  sprin- 
klers or  other  adequate  fire-extinguishing  apparatus  as  approved  by  the  com- 
missioner shall  be  installed  in  the  following  locations: — 

(1)  Throughout  every  unit  of  occupancy  higher  than  two  stories  or 
having  an  aggregate  floor  area  greater  than  ten  thousand  square  feet. 

(2)  In  cellars  and  basements  of  which  the  floor  area  is  more  than  fifteen 
hundred  square  feet. 

(3)  Throughout  a  building  which  is  occupied  wholly  or  in  part  as  a 
planing  mill,  box  factory,  or  other  wood  working  establishment,  in  which 
more  than  two  power-operated  wood  working  machines,  other  than  saws, 
are  used. 

(4)  Throughout  a  building  which  is  occupied  wholly  or  in  part  as  a 
mattress  factory  or  used  to  manufacture,  assemble  or  renovate  mattresses 
or  stuffed  furniture  using  cotton,  silk  floss,  mohair  or  other  like  material 
for  packing  or  stuffing. 

(5)  In  a  building  used  as  a  film  exchange,  or  for  the  manufacture  or 
storage  of  nitro-cellulose  pyroxylin  products. 

(b)  Portable  fire-extinguishers,  not  less  than  one  for  every  two  thousand 
square  feet  of  floor  area  and  at  least  one  in  each  story,  or  first  aid  standpipes 
shall  be  provided,  except  as  required  by  chapter  one  hundred  and  forty-eight 
of  the  General  Laws  and  regulations  issued  thereunder. 

(c)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided 
in  every  building  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

fSect.  708.  Special  Hazards. —  (a)  Neither  apparatus  having  an 
open  flame  nor  a  heater  with  an  enclosed  flame  shall  be  installed  or  operated 
in  a  dry  cleaning  establishment  or  place  where  volatile  flammable  liquids 
are  used  or  stored,  unless  approved  by  the  state  fire  marshal. 

(b)  Rooms  in  which  volatile  flammable  liquids  are  used  or  stored  shall  be 
enclosed  with  partitions  of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction 
as  specified  in  Part  22.  Doorways  in  such  partitions  shall  have  Class  C  fire 
doors  so  equipped  as  to  close  automatically  in  case  of  fire. 

(c)  In  a  dry  cleaning  establishment  each  machine  which  uses  a  volatile 
flammable  liquid  shall  have  an  adequate  steam  line  directly  connected  to  it, 
so  arranged  as  automatically  to  fill  the  machine  with  steam  in  case  of  fire 
or  explosion  therein. 

(d)  In  dry  cleaning  establishments  and  other  buildings  in  which  volatile 
flammable  liquids  are  used,  sold  or  stored; 

(1)  Type  VI  construction  shall  not  be  used; 

(2)  Type  IV  construction  shall  not  be  used  more  than  two  stories  in 
height  or  over  six  hundred  square  feet  in  area. 

(e)  Rooms  in  which  paint,  petroleum  or  other  flammable  liquids  are  used 
or  stored  otherwise  than  in  unopened  containers  shall  have  non-absorbent, 
incombustible  floor  finish. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  3  \ 


(61) 


See,  801 


PART  8. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  F  OCCUPANCY 
OFFICES  AND  COMMERCIAL  BUILDINGS. 

Section 

801  —  Group  F  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

802  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

803  —  Exterior  Walls. 

804  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

805  —  Exits. 

806  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

807  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 


*Section    801.     Group    F    Occupancy:    Type, 

Group  F  shall  include  such  occupancies  as  — 


Height,    Area. —  (a) 

Office  buildings,  restaurants,  police  and  fire  stations,  museums 


Division  1. 

and  libraries. 

Division  2.  Wholesale  and  retail  stores,  printing  plants,  factories  and 
work  shops  using  materials  not  highly  flammable. 

Division  3.  Buildings  for  the  storage  or  sale  of  goods  not  highly  flam- 
mable, stables  and  buildings  not  on  wharves  for  the  storing  or  handling  of 
transient  freight. 

Division  4.  Wharf  buildings  for  the  storage  or  handling  of  transient 
freight. 

Division  5.     Garages  of  more  than  six  cars  capacity  and  hangars. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  F 
except  those  in  Division  4  thereof,  shall  be  limited  as  to  type  of  construction, 
height  and  area  of  units,  as  follows:  — 


Type  of 
Construction 


Height  in 
Stories. 


Maximum  Area  of  Unit  in  Square  Feet  Accessible  From 


Minimum  within 
block  Less  than  30%, 


30%  and  less  than 
50%  of  perimeter. 


More  than  50% 
of  perimeter. 


I 

8 
1 
4 
1 
3 
1 
2 
1 
2 

Not 

10,000 
15,000 
10,000 
15,000 
10,000 
15,000 

6,000 

6,000 

3,000 

hereby  limited. 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

8,000 

8,000 

5,000 

II 

40,000 

Ill 

Not  hereby  limited. 
20,000 

IV 

Not  hereby  limited. 
20,000 

V 

Not  hereby  limited. 
10,000 

VI 

20,000 
10,000 

Note. —  Where  areas  in  1  story  buildings  are  not  hereby  limited,  the  maximum  distance 
from  any  point  to  an  exit  from  the  building  shall  be  175  lineal  feet. 

In  garages  over  six  cars  Type  VI  shall  not  be  allowed. 

(02) 


Sees.  801=803 

The  maximum  area  of  Type  IV  units  may  be  increased  proportionately 
within  the  limits  given  as  the  number  of  stories  is  decreased  from  the 
maximum. 

(c)  The  portions  of  police  stations  in  which  not  more  than  ten  persons 
may  be  detained  shall  be  constructed  of  incombustible  materials  and  shall 
be  separated  from  the  remainder  of  the  building,  if  of  combustible  materials, 
by  a  two-hour  fire-resistive  separation. 

(d)  Buildings  on  wharves,  used  for  storage  other  than  that  which  is 
incidental  to  handling  water-borne  freight,  or  used  for  manufacturing  or  any 
purpose  other  than  such  handling,  shall  be  classified  in  an  occupancy  group 
according  to  such  use,  disregarding  their  location  on  wharves.  Buildings 
on  wharves  of  pile  or  other  open  construction  over  water,  or  of  filled  construc- 
tion behind  retaining  walls  or  bulkheads,  beside  docks  wherein  vessels  may 
be  moored,  used  for  handling,  namely  for  assembling,  loading,  discharging 
and  sorting  water-borne  freight,  or  for  passengers,  and  of  the  several  types 
of  construction  shall  not  exceed  in  height  and  area  of  units  of  occupancy  the 
following  limits:  — 


Type  of  Construction. 

Stories. 

Maximum  Area  of  Unit  (Square  Feet). 

I 

Not  hereby  limited. 
3  to  7 

2 
3  to  4 

2 

3 

2 

2 

Not  hereby  limited. 

II 

15,000 

Ill 

120,000 
12,000 

IV 

60,000 
10,000 

V 

60,000 
60  000 

(e)  In  buildings  on  wooden  wharves,  such  units  of  occupancy  shall  not 
exceed  twenty  thousand  square  feet  in  area. 

(f)  The  maximum  areas  provided  in  this  section  for  buildings  of  Division  1, 
and  for  buildings  of  Divisions  2  and  3  less  than  six  stories  in  height,  may  be 
increased  fifty  per  cent  if  the  entire  floor  area  is  protected  with  automatic 
sprinklers. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

Sect.  802.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  F  occupancies  shall  be 
separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  divisions  of  Group  F  occupancy 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13.  Two 
tenants  shall  be  separated  by  partitions  of  at  least  one-hour  and,  in  a  base- 
ment, at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  rating. 

Sect.  803.  Exterior  Walls. —  (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  ten  feet  from  a  property 
line,  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  openings 
therein  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(63) 


Sees.  803=805 

(b)  Every  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less  than 
twenty  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street,  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof,  or  an 
unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same  lot,  shall 
be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  all  openings  in  such 
portions,  except  doorways  and  windows  in  the  first  story  fronting  on  a  public 
way,  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(c)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for  pro- 
tection of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  construction  on  an  adjoining 
lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees  in  a  writing  recorded  in  the 
registry  of  deeds  for  Suffolk  county  to  comply  with  the  said  requirements  on 
demand  of  the  commissioner. 

(d)  In  buildings  of  Type  V  construction  exterior  walls  of  unprotected 
metal  may  be  considered  to  meet  the  requirements  of  this  section  for  two-hour 
walls. 

*Sect.  804.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)  Elevator  shafts, 
ventilating  shafts  and  other  vertical  openings  except  stairways  and  ramps, 
shall  be  enclosed. 

(b)  Ramps  for  the  movement  of  freight  shall  be  enclosed  as  specified  in 
Part  15  or  shall  be  provided  with  automatic-closing  Class  A  fire  doors  which 
will  serve  as  a  fire  stop  between  stories.  A  ramp  with  such  doors  shall  not  be 
counted  as  a  required  exit. 

(c)  In  buildings  of  Division  1  and  in  retail  stores,  stairways  and  ramps 
other  than  for  freight,  serving  only  basements,  first  and  second  stories,  need 
not  be  enclosed.  Exit  stairways  and  ramps  which  pierce  only  one  floor, 
except  as  provided  in  the  preceding  sentence,  shall  be  enclosed  in  the  story 
above  or  below.  Other  exit  stairways  and  ramps  shall  be  enclosed  in  all 
stories  in  which  they  occur. 

(d)  This  section  shall  not  be  held  to  require  enclosure  of  mezzanine  floors 
nor  of  vertical  openings  in  such  floors.  The  provisions  of  this  section  shall  not 
apply  to  book  stacks  of  incombustible  material  in  libraries  of  Type  I  or  Type 
II  construction. 

(e)  Ramps  which  are  used  for  the  movement  of  automobiles  from  one 
story  to  another,  or  for  a  similar  purpose,  shall  be  enclosed  or  shall  be  provided 
with  automatic-closing,  Class  A  fire  doors  which  will  serve  as  a  fire  stop 
between  stories.  A  ramp  with  such  doors  shall  not  be  counted  as  a  required 
exit. 

(f)  Doors  which  are  part  of  an  automobile  ramp  enclosure  may  be  kept 
normally  open  but  shall  be  so  equipped  as  to  close  automatically  in  case  of 
fire. 

(g)  Mechanical  stairways  or  mechanical  conveyors  and  ramps  may  be 
installed  with  manually  operated  closing  devices  satisfactory  to  the  com- 
missioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  805.  Exits. —  Every  portion  of  a  Group  F  building  except  library 
book  stacks  three  levels  or  less  in  height  shall  be  provided  with  exits  as 
specified  in  Part  18. 

(64) 


Sees.  806=807 

*Sect.  806.  Light  and  Ventilation. —  Rooms  used  by  human  beings  shall 
be  provided  with  light  and  ventilation  by  means  of  windows  or  skylights  or 
with  artificial  light  and  a  ventilating  system. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  } 

fSect.  807.  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus.—  (a)  Automatic  sprin- 
klers shall  be  installed  in  cellars  and  basements  of  which  the  floor  area  is  more 
than  fifteen  hundred  square  feet.      "* *" 

(b)  Buildings  of  Divisions  2  and  3,  six  or  more  stories  in  height  shall  be 
equipped  throughout  with  automatic  sprinklers. 

(c)  Buildings  of  Division  4  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  or  Type  VI  construction 
or  on  wooden  wharves,  more  than  five  thousand  square  feet  in  area  of  units, 
and  buildings  of  Type  I,  Type  II  or  Type  V  construction  on  incombustible 
wharves,  more  than  twenty  thousand  square  feet  in  area,  shall  be  protected 
by  automatic  sprinklers. 

(d)  In  buildings  more  than  two  stories  high  either  portable  fire-extinguish- 
ers, not  less  than  one  for  every  twenty-five  hundred  square  feet  of  floor  area 
and  at  least  one  in  each  story,  or  first  aid  standpipes,  shall  be  provided. 

(e)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided 
in  buildings  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

(f)  Garages  shall  have  automatic  sprinklers  and  other  suitable  fire-fighting 
apparatus  when  floor  area  exceeds  ten  thousand  square  feet  on  any  one  floor 
or  if  the  height  is  five  stories  or  more.  Hangars  shall  have  approved  fire- 
extinguishing  apparatus. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 


(05) 


Sec.  901 


PART  9. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  Q  OCCUPANCY: 
COMMERCIAL  BUILDINGS  OF  NON-HAZARDOUS 
OCCUPANCY. 

Section 

901  —  Group  Q  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

902  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

903  —  Exterior  Walls. 

904  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

905  —  Exits. 

906  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

907  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

*Section    901.     Group    G    Occupancy:    Type,    Height,    Area. —  (a) 

Group  G  shall  include  such  occupancies  as  — 

Division  1.  Ice,  power  and  pumping  plants,  cold  storage  rooms  and 
plants,  creameries,  breweries  and  other  similar  buildings. 

Division  2.  Factories  and  workshops  using  incombustible  and  non- 
explosive  materials. 

Division  3.  Buildings  for  the  storage  or  sale  of  incombustible  and  non- 
explosive  materials. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  G 
shall  be  limited  as  to  type  of  construction,  height  and  area  of  units,  as  follows: — 


Type  of 
Construction. 


Height  in 
Stories. 


Maximum  Area  of  Unit  in  Square  Feet  Accessible  From 


Minimum  within 
block  Less  than  30%. 


30%  and  less  than 
50%  of  perimeter. 


More  than  50% 
of  perimeter. 


I.  . 
II. 

Ill 

IV. 

V.. 
VI. 


10,000 

15,000 

15,000 

10,000 

15,000 

15,000 

10,000 

15,000 

15,000 

6,000 

6,000  ' 

3,000 


Not  hereby  limited. 


15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

15,000 

8,000 

8,000 

5,000 


40,000 

80,000 
Not  hereby  limited. 

20,000 

40,000 
Not  hereby  limited. 

20,000 

30,000 
Not  hereby  limited. 

10,000 

20,000 

10,000 


Note. —  Where  areas  in  1  story  buildings  are  not  hereby  limited,  the  maximum  distance 
from  any  point  to  an  exit  from  the  building  shall  be  175  lineal  feet. 

The  maximum  area  of  Type  IV  units  may  be  increased  proportionately 
within  the  limits  given  as  the  number  of  stories  is  decreased  from  the  maximum. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  } 
(66) 


Sees.  902=906 

Sect.  902.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  G  occupancies  shall 
be  separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  divisions  of  Group  G  occupancy 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13. 

Sect.  903.  Exterior  Walls. —  (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  ten  feet  from  a  property- 
line,  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  openings 
therein  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(b)  Every  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less 
than  twenty  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street,  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof, 
or  an  unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same 
lot,  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  all  openings  in 
such  portions  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(c)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for 
protection  of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  construction  on  an 
adjoining  lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees  in  a  writing  recorded 
in  the  registry  of  deeds  for  Suffolk  county  to  comply  with  the  said  require- 
ments on  demand  of  the  commissioner. 

(d)  In  buildings  of  Type  V  construction  exterior  walls  of  unprotected 
metal  may  be  considered  to  meet  the  requirements  of  this  section  for  two- 
hour  walls. 

*Sect.  904.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)  Elevator  shafts, 
ventilating  shafts,  and  other  vertical  openings,  except  stairways  and  ramps 
shall  be  enclosed. 

(b)  Ramps  for  the  movement  of  freight  shall  be  enclosed  as  specified 
in  Part  15  or  shall  be  provided  with  automatic-closing  Class  A  fire  doors 
which  will  serve  as  a  fire  stop  between  stories.  A  ramp  with  such  doors 
shall  not  be  counted  as  a  required  exit. 

(c)  Stairways  and  ramps  other  than  for  freight  which  pierce  only  one 
floor  shall  be  enclosed  in  the  story  above  or  below  but  such  stairways  or 
ramps  which  serve  as  required  exits  from  one  story  shall  be  enclosed  in  the 
other  story.  Other  stairways  and  ramps  shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in 
which  they  occur. 

(d)  This  section  shall  not  be  held  to  require  enclosure  of  mezzanine 
floors  nor  of  vertical  openings  in  such  floors. 

(e)  Doors  which  are  part  of  an  automobile  ramp  enclosure  may  be  kept 
normally  open  but  shall  be  so  equipped  as  to  close  automatically  in  case  of  fire. 

(f)  Mechanical  stairways  or  mechanical  conveyors  and  ramps  may  be 
installed  with  manually  operated  closing  devices  satisfactory  to  the  com- 
missioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  905.  Exits. —  Every  portion  of  a  building  shall  be  provided  with 
exits  as  specified  in  Part  18. 

fSect.  906.  Light  and  Ventilation.— Rooms  used  by  human  beings 
shall  be  provided  with  light  and  ventilation  by  means  of  windows  or  skylights 
or  with  artificial  light  and  a  ventilating  system. 

[  1[As  amended  by  Ord.  1943.  ch.  3  ) 

(67) 


Sec.  907 

*Sect.  907.  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Automatic  sprin- 
klers shall  be  installed  in  all  cellars  and  basements,  of  Division  2  and  3,  of 
which  the  floor  area  is  more  than  fifteen  hundred  square  feet. 

(b)  Automatic  sprinklers  shall  be  installed  throughout  buildings  of 
Division  2  or  3,  of  Type  IV  construction  more  than  seventy-five  hundred 
square  feet  in  area. 

(c)  In  buildings  more  than  two  stories  high  either  portable  fire-extin- 
guishers not  less  than  one  for  every  thirty-five  hundred  square  feet  of  floor 
area  and  at  least  one  in  each  story,  or  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided. 

(d)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  provided 
in  buildings  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 


(68) 


Sec.  1001 


PART   10. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  H  OCCUPANCY: 
UNLIMITED  HABITATIONS  AND  LARGE  DWELL- 
INGS.* 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  S  ] 
Section 

1001  —  Group  H  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

1002  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

1003  —  Exterior  Walls. 

1004  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

1005  —  Exits. 

1006  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

1007  —  Rooms. 

1008  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

1009  —  Plumbing  and  Heating. 

fSection   1001.     Group    H    Occupancy:    Type,    Height,   Area. —  (a) 

Group  H  shall  include  such  occupancies  as  — 

Division  1.  Hotels,  apartment  hotels,  dormitories,  lodging  houses, 
convents,  monasteries,  and  club  houses,  with  sleeping  accommodations  for 
ten  or  more  persons,  or  for  more  than  three  families,  or  for  more  than  two 
families  above  the  first  story,  and  without  kitchens  in  the  individual  apart- 
ments. 

Division  2.  Apartment  houses  accommodating  more  than  three  families, 
or  more  than  two  families  above  the  first  story,  and  with  kitchens  in  the 
individual  apartments. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  H 
and  of  the  several  types  of  construction  shall  not  exceed  in  height  and  area 
of  units  of  occupancy  the  following  limits: — 


Type  of  Construction. 

Stories. 

I 

Not  hereby  limited. 
5 
3 
3 
3 

II 

Ill 

IV 

VI 

Maximum  Area  of  Unit  (Square  Feet.) 


Not  hereby  limited. 

12,000 

8,000 

6,000 

5,000 


Type  V  construction  shall  not  be  used  in  buildings  of  Group  H. 

(c)  Assembly  halls  in  Group  H  buildings  shall  be  classified  in  Group  A 
or  Group  B  as  the  case  may  be,  and  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  this 
code  for  the  group  in  which  they  are  so  classified. 

(69) 


Sees.  1001-1005 

(d)  The  first  floor  of  buildings  more  than  two  thousand  square  feet  in 
area  and  more  than  three  stories  in  height  shall  be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II 
construction.  The  basement  ceilings  of  other  buildings  shall  be  of  at  least 
one-hour  fire-resistive  construction.  All  ceilings  of  buildings  more  than  two 
thousand  square  feet  in  area  and  three  stories  or  more  in  height  shall  be  of 
at  least  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 

(e)  Partitions  forming  separations  between  adjoining  apartments  shall 
be  of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 

(f)  Buildings  of  Type  VI  shall  not  be  used  for  more  than  four  families, 
nor  more  than  two  families  above  the  first  story. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

Sect.  1002.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  H  occupancies  shall 
be  separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  divisions  of  Group  H  occupancy 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13.  A 
garage  of  not  more  than  six  cars  capacity  shall  be  separated  from  a  Group  H 
occupancy  as  specified  in  Part  12. 

Sect.  1003.  uxterior  Walls. —  (a)  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls, 
o™ej_ .  "ronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  ten  feet  from  a  property 

line,  st_  ~c;  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  openings 
in  such  walls  which  are  less  than  seven  feet  six  inches  from  a  property  line 
shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(b)  Every  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  faces,  at  a  distance  of  less 
than  fifteen  feet,  the  further  side  of  a  street,  or  a  combustible  wall  or  roof, 
or  an  unprotected  opening  in  a  wall  or  roof  of  another  building  on  the  same 
lot,  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  all  openings 
in  such  portions  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(c)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements  of  this  section,  for 
protection  of  openings  in  walls,  temporarily  pending  construction  on  an 
adjoining  lot  or  across  a  street,  provided  the  owner  agrees  in  a  writing  recorded 
in  the  registry  of  deeds  for  Suffolk  county  to  comply  with  the  said  require- 
ments on  demand  of  the  commissioner. 

JSect.    1004.     Enclosure   of  Vertical   Openings. —  (a)   Vertical  shafts 
and  floor  openings,  except  as  hereinafter  mentioned,  shall  be  enclosed. 

(b)  Except  as  otherwise  noted  herein,  stairways  and  ramps  shall  be 
enclosed  in  all  stories  in  which  they  occur  as  specified  in  Part  15.  Stairways 
serving  as  exits  from  sleeping  rooms  shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories.  Stairways 
serving  only  basement  rooms  for  the  use  of  the  public  need  not  be  enclosed. 
Stairways  serving  only  rooms  for  use  of  public  in  the  basement,  first  and 
second  story  need  not  be  enclosed.  Auxiliary  stairway  within  an  apartment 
serving  only  two  floors  need  not  be  enclosed. 

(c)  This  section  and  Part  15  shall  not  be  held  to  require  enclosure  of 
mezzanine  floors  in  Group  H  buildings  nor  of  vertical  openings  in  such  floors. 

[  JAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

*Sect.    1005.     Exits. —  (a)    Every  portion  of  a  Group  H  building  shall 
be  provided  with  exits  as  specified  in  Part  18. 

(b)  Every  apartment  of  less  than  four  rooms  shall  have  at  least  one 
exit  opening  upon  a  corridor  which,  has  at  least  two  remote  exits,  or  such 

(70) 


Sees.  1005=1006 

apartment  shall  have  two  remote  exits.  Every  apartment  of  four  or  more 
rooms  shall  have  at  least  two  remote  exits.  Such  exits  may  open  into  a 
common  corridor  which  has  at  least  two  remote  exits. 

(c)  Every  exit  from  an  apartment  shall  not  be  more  than  fifty  feet  from 
the  nearest  exit  from  the  story. 

(d)  Corridors  which  serve  as  common  exits  from  two  or  more  apartments 
shall  have  walls  of  at  least  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction.  Corridors, 
including  their  changes  in  directions  and  extensions  beyond  separations  serv- 
ing as  required  egress,  shall  be  at  least  thirty-six  inches  wide.  If  more  than 
fifty  feet  and  less  than  seventy-five  feet  in  length  they  shall  be  at  least  forty- 
eight  inches  wide.  If  seventy-five  or  more  feet  in  length  they  shall  be  at 
least  sixty  inches  wide. 

(e)  Doors  affording  access  from  a  stairway  to  a  roof  shall  not  be  so  locked 
as  to  prevent  egress  to  the  roof  in  emergency. 

(f)  Every  stairway  and  corridor  common  to  two  or  more  apartments 
shall  be  adequately  lighted  at  all  times  as  determined  by  the  building 
commissioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,' ch.  S  ] 

fSect.  1006.  Light  and  Ventilation. —  (a)  Kitchens  1  is.  a  floor 
area  more  than  seventy  square  feet  and  dining  rooms,  within  apartments, 
all  sleeping  rooms  and  living  rooms  shall  be  provided  with  light  and  venti- 
lation by  means  of  windows  in  the  exterior  walls.  The  area  of  windows  in 
kitchens  shall  not  be  less  than  one  eighth  of  the  floor  area  thereof,  nor  less 
than  eleven  square  feet.  Windows  in  toilets  or  bathrooms  shall  not  be  less 
than  one  eighth  of  the  floor  area  thereof  nor  less  than  six  square  feet.  Win- 
dows shall  be  arranged  to  open  for  ventilation  on  not  less  than  one  half  the 
required  area. 

(b)  Every  window  required  by  paragraph  fa)  of  this  section  shall  front 
upon  a  street,  alley  or  open  passageway  not  less  than  fifteen  feet  wide,  or  upon 
a  public  park,  cemetery,  railroad  right  of  way  or  other  similar  approved 
open  space,  or  upon  a  yard  or  court  of  the  dimensions  herein  specified.  A 
court  upon  which  such  a  window  fronts  shall  be  open  to  the  sky  and  no  cornice, 
balcony,  stairway,  fire  escape  or  other  construction  shall  encroach  upon 
the  required  open  area  thereof  herein  specified.  The  height  of  a  court  shall 
be  measured  from  the  sill  of  the  lowest  window  required  to  front  upon  it. 
The  width  and  the  horizontal  area  of  such  court  shall  not  be  less  than  as 
provided  in  the  following  numbered  paragraphs  (1)  to  (5),  inclusive. 

(1)  If  the  court  is  open  at  both  opposite  ends  for  its  full  width  and  full 
height  to  a  street,  alley,  park,  or  other  permanently  open  space,  not  less 
than  fifteen  feet  wide,  or  to  a  yard,  it  shall  be  a  through  court.  The  least 
width  of  such  court  shall  be  not  less  than  six  feet  nor  less  than  one  tenth  its 
length  from  open  end  to  open  end  measured  along  the  center  line  and  not 
necessarily  in  a  straight  line.  The  width  of  such  court  at  any  level  more 
than  fifty  feet  above  the  sill  of  the  lowest  window  required  to  front  upon 
it  shall  be  not  less  than  six  feet  plus  one  eighth  the  excess  of  such  height  over 
fifty  feet,  except  a  court  the  length  of  which  is  less  than  five  times  its  least 
width.  If  windows  required  by  this  section  face  a  wall  on  the  opposite 
side  of  a  through  court  in  which  windows  also  required  by  this  section 

(71) 


Sec.  1006 

occur,  the  width  of  the  court  as  determined  by  the  foregoing  requirements 
shall  be  increased  by  fifty  per  cent.  The  width  of  a  through  court  need 
not,  however,  exceed  the  width  required  in  this  section  for  an  inner  court 
of  the  same  height. 

(2)  If  the  court  is  open  at  one  end  for  its  full  width  and  full  height  to  a 
street,  alley,  park,  or  other  permanently  open  space  not  less  than  fifteen 
feet  wide,  or  to  a  yard,  it  shall  be  an  outer  court.  The  least  width  of  such 
court  shall  be  not  less  than  eight  feet  nor  less  than  one  fourth  its  horizontal 
length  measured  along  the  center  line,  and  not  necessarily  in  a  straight  line. 
The  width  of  such  court  at  any  level  more  than  fifty  feet  above  the  sill  of  the 
lowest  window  required  to  front  upon  it  shall  be  not  less  than  eight  feet 
plus  one  eighth  the  excess  of  such  height  over  fifty  feet,  except  a  court  the 
length  of  which  is  less  than  twice  its  least  width.  If  windows  required  by 
this  section  face  a  wall  on  the  opposite  side  of  an  outer  court  in  which 
windows  also  required  by  this  section  occur,  the  width  of  the  court  as 
determined  by  the  foregoing  requirements  in  this  paragraph  shall  be  in- 
creased by  fifty  per  cent.  The  width  of  an  outer  court  need  not,  however, 
exceed  the  width  required  in  this  section  for  an  inner  court  of  the  same 
height. 

(3)  Every  court  which  is  not  open  at  one  or  both  ends  as  provided  for 
an  outer  court  or  a  through  court  shall  be  an  inner  court.  The  least  width 
of  an  inner  court  shall  be  not  less  than  ten  feet.  The  width  of  such  court  at 
any  level  more  than  fifty  feet  above  the  sill  of  the  lowest  window  required 
to  front  upon  it  shall  be  not  less  than  ten  feet  plus  one  eighth  the  excess  of 
such  height  over  fifty  feet.  If  windows  required  by  this  section  face  a  wall 
on  the  opposite  side  of  an  inner  court  in  which  windows  also  required  by  this 
section  occur,  the  width  of  the  court  as  determined  by  the  foregoing  require- 
ments in  this  paragraph  shall  be  increased  by  fifty  per  cent.  The  horizontal 
area  of  an  inner  court  shall  be  not  less  than  three  hundred  square  feet  nor  less 
above  any  floor  level  than  sixty  square  feet  for  each  story  below  said  level 
served  by  such  court.  Every  inner  court  shall  be  provided  with  an  intake 
for  fresh  air,  consisting  of  a  court,  corridor,  passageway  or  ventilating 
duct,  of  which  the  area  of  cross-section  below  the  level  of  the  top  of  the 
lowest  required  window  shall  be  not  less  than  one  fifteenth  the  maximum 
required  area  of  the  court.  Such  intake  or  the  required  area  thereof  shall 
be  permanently  open  and  unobstructed  except  for  a  grille  or  screen  at  least 
eighty  per  cent  open  at  one  or  both  ends  and  shall  extend  from  the  court 
to  a  street,  alley,  park,  or  other  permanently  open  space,  not  less  than 
fifteen  feet  wide,  or  to  a  yard,  above  the  level  of  the  ground  thereof. 

(4)  Windows  required  by  paragraph  (a)  of  this  section  may  front  upon 
an  open  recess  from  the  street,  alley,  park,  court,  yard  or  other  open  space 
from  which  they  derive  light  and  ventilation,  provided  the  width  of  the 
recess  is  not  less  than  four  feet  nor  less  than  its  horizontal  depth,  and  its 
depth  is  not  more  than  six  feet.  A  recess  from  an  inner  court  of  width 
less  than  the  required  width  of  the  court  of  which  it  is  a  part  shall  be  dis- 
regarded in  computing,  for  the  purpose  of  this  section,  the  area  of  the  court. 

(5)  The  length  of  outer  courts  T-shaped  in  plan  shall  be  measured 
from  the  open  end  to  the  end  of  each  branch  independently.    A  branch, 

(72) 


Sec.  1006 

open  at  only  one  end,  of  a  through  court,  shall  be  considered  to  be  a  part 
of  an  outer  court  of  length  measured  from  the  nearest  open  end  to  the 
closed  end  of  the  branch,  in  determining  the  width  of  such  branch.  Where 
a  recess  occurs  at  the  closed  end  of  an  outer  court  the  length  of  the  court 
shall  include  the  depth  of  the  recess.  Adjoining  courts  which  conform 
independently  to  this  section  may  be  combined  by  omission  of  dividing 
walls.  An  inner  court  between  two  sections  of  a  through  court  may  be 
disregarded  in  computing  the  length  of  the  through  court.  Other  arrange- 
ments of  courts  shall  be  measured  for  the  purposes  of  this  section  as  deter- 
mined by  the  commissioner  with  a  view  to  providing  for  every  required 
window  light  and  ventilation  substantially  as  herein  specified. 

(6)  Courts  of  exceptional  form  may  be  approved  by  the  building 
commissioner  if  in  volume,  lighting  and  ventilating  properties  they  are  in 
his  opinion  the  equivalent  of  the  courts  above  described. 

(c)  Every  kitchen  having  a  floor  area  not  more  than  seventy  square  feet 
within  an  apartment  and  every  room  containing  a  water  closet,  shall  be 
provided  with  light  and  ventilation  by  means  of  a  window,  except  as  specified 
in  paragraph  (d)  of  this  section,  in  an  exterior  wall  or  in  a  ventilating  shaft 
or,  if  such  room  is  immediately  under  a  roof,  by  a  skylight  in  the  roof. 
Such  window  or  skylight  shall  have  an  area  not  less  than  three  square  feet 
nor  less  than  one  tenth  of  the  floor  area  of  the  room,  and  shall  be  arranged 
to  open  for  ventilation  not  less  than  three  square  feet  nor  less  than  one 
twentieth  the  floor  area  of  the  room.  Such  windows  shall  front  upon  an 
open  space  or  a  ventilating  shaft  of  which  the  width  shall  be  not  less  than 
three  feet  and  of  which  the  horizontal  area  shall  be  not  less  than  fifteen 
square  feet.  If  the  height  of  such  space  or  shaft  above  the  sill  of  the  lowest 
window  served  is  in  excess  of  fifty  feet,  the  width  thereof  shall  be  increased 
one  half  foot  and  the  area  eight  square  feet  for  every  ten  feet  or  fraction  of 
such  excess.  If  such  ventilating  shaft  is  covered,  the  covering  shall  be  a 
skylight  with  openings  under  the  edges  thereof  on  at  least  three  sides  equal 
in  the  aggregate  to  at  least  twice  the  required  area  of  the  ventilating  shaft. 

(d)  Rooms  containing  water  closets  need  not  have  windows  as  specified 
in  paragraph  (c)  of  this  section  if  they  are  provided  with  adequate  artificial 
light  and  an  approved  system  of  mechanical  ventilation  which  will  com- 
pletely exhaust  the  air  in  the  room  at  least  four  times  per  hour.  A  kitchen 
having  a  floor  area  not  more  than  seventy  square  feet  within  an  apartment 
need  not  have  windows  if  it  is  so  provided  with  artificial  light,  and  such 
mechanical  ventilation  or  ventilation  by  means  of  a  ventilating  exhaust 
duct  with  at  least  one  square  foot  net  area  of  cross-section  independent  of 
ducts  from  other  rooms  to  a  point  above  the  roof.  A  kitchen  ventilated  as 
provided  in  this  paragraph  or  by  a  ventilating  shaft  shall  have  a  permanent 
opening  of  adequate  size  for  fresh  air  which  may,  however,  be  drawn  from 
other  rooms  in  the  apartment. 

(e)  Dining  rooms  in  hotels,  dining  rooms  common  to  more  than  one 
family,  kitchens  serving  such  dining  rooms  and  other  kitchens  and  rooms 
for  eating  purposes  except  those  within  apartments,  shall  be  provided  with 
light  and  ventilation  as  specified  for  kitchens  and  dining  rooms  respectively 

(73) 


Sees.  1006=1007 

in  paragraphs  (a)  and  (b)  of  this  section  or  shall  have  artificial  light  and  an 
approved  system  of  mechanical  ventilation  providing  not  less  than  four 
complete  changes  of  air  per  hour. 

(f)  The  boundary  line  of  a  lot  on  which  a  building  is  to  be  erected  subject 
to  the  provisions  of  this  section,  unless  it  is  a  common  boundary  between 
such  lot  and  a  street,  alley,  public  park,  cemetery,  railroad  right  of  way  or 
other  similar,  permanently  open  space,  not  less  than  fifteen  feet  wide  shall 
be  a  boundary  to  an  adjacent  court  or  ventilating  shaft  required  by  this 
section  as  though  a  wall  without  windows  were  erected  on  such  line.  If 
there  is,  appurtenant  to  such  lot,  an  easement  for  light  and  air  over  a  portion 
of  an  adjoining  lot,  in  terms  which  assure  that  the  easement  will  remain  in 
force  and  effect  so  long  as  any  windows  require  it  for  light  and  ventilation 
under  the  provisions  of  this  code,  and  duly  recorded  in  the  registry  of  deeds 
for  Suffolk  county,  the  portion  subject  to  such  easement  may  be  considered 
to  be  part  of  such  lot  for  the  purposes  of  this  section.  No  building  or 
structure  shall  be  erected  in  such  manner  as  to  reduce  the  light  and  ventila- 
tion in  a  building  on  the  same  lot  subject  to  the  provisions  of  this  section 
below  the  requirements  thereof,  nor  shall  a  lot  line  be  moved  by  sale  of 
land  or  otherwise  so  as  to  permit  such  reduction  by  a  building  on  an  adjoining 
lot. 

(g)  In  a  residence  district,  as  defined  in  chapter  four  hundred  and  eighty- 
eight  of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  twenty-four,  a  building  of  Divi- 
sion 2  upon  a  lot  which  abuts  on  only  one  street  shall  have  a  yard  at  the 
rear.  Such  yard  shall  be  open  and  unobstructed  above  the  level  of  the  sills 
of  windows  opening  thereon  required  by  this  section,  shall  extend  the  full 
width  of  the  lot,  and  shall  have  a  depth,  measured  from  the  rear  of  the  build- 
ing to  the  rear  line  of  the  lot  or,  if  an  alley  or  open  passageway  lies  at  the 
rear  of  the  lot,  to  the  middle  line  of  such  alley  or  passageway,  not  less  than 
twelve  feet  nor  less  than  one  fourth  the  height  of  the  building  above  the 
sill  of  the  lowest  window  required  to  front  upon  such  yard.  If  the  rear  line 
of  such  lot  is  other  than  a  straight  line  the  required  yard  shall  have  an  area 
not  less  than  twelve  feet  times  the  width  of  the  lot  at  the  rear  of  the  building 
and  the  building  shall  be  so  disposed  at  the  rear  as  to  leave  a  yard  having 
approved  continuity  with  the  yards  of  adjoining  lots.  The  provisions  of 
this  paragraph  shall  not  apply  to  a  lot  which  abuts  at  the  rear  upon  a  rail- 
road right  of  way,  cemetery,  park  or  other  permanently  open  space,  not 
less  than  fifteen  feet  wide.  The  Boston  zoning  law  (chapter  four  hundred 
and  eighty-eight  of  the  acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  twenty-four)  also 
contains  provisions  relative  to  yards. 

(h)  Every  room  containing  a  water  closet  compartment  shall  have 
adequate  means  for  lighting  at  all  times. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.3] 
JSect.  1007.  Rooms. —  (a)  In  every  apartment  of  an  apartment 
house  or  apartment  hotel,  at  least  one  room  shall  have  a  floor  area  not  less 
than  one  hundred  and  twenty  square  feet.  However,  every  kitchen  in  such 
apartment  shall  be  not  less  than  six  feet  wide  nor  less  than  forty-eight  square 
feet  in  area.  Every  room  containing  a  water  closet  shall  be  not  less  than 
thirty-three  inches  wide  and  shall  have  a  floor  area  not  less  than  fifteen  square 

(74) 


Sees.  1007=1009 

feet.     Every  other  room  in  such  apartment,  except  closets  and  vestibules, 
shall  have  not  less  than  seventy  square  feet  of  floor  area. 

(b)  Rooms  in  apartments,  except  closets,  shall  be  at  least  eight  feet  high 
in  half  their  required  area,  an  average  of  at  least  six  feet  high  in  the  remainder 
of  the  required  area,  and  not  less  than  four  feet  high  at  any  point  within 
the  required  area. 

(c)  If  the  walls  or  floor  of  a  sleeping  room  or  living  room  are  in  contact 
with  the  ground,  the  portions  thereof  in  such  contact  shall  be  waterproofed 
as  specified  in  Part  29  or  damp  proofed  in  an  approved  manner,  and  the 
interior  finish  of  such  portions  of  the  walls  of  such  rooms  shall  be  furred 
with  impervious  material.  Not  more  than  thirty  per  cent  of  the  area  of  the 
walls  enclosing  such  a  room  shall  be  in  contact  with  the  ground. 

(d)  The  floor  of  every  room  containing  a  water  closet  shall  be  of  tile, 
terrazzo,  linoleum  or  other  impervious  material  with  a  base  of  similar  ma- 
terial around  the  walls  at  least  four  inches  high.  No  water  closet  shall  be 
enclosed  in  woodwork  placed  close  about  the  fixture.  The  walls  of  every 
room  containing  a  water  closet  shall  extend  to  the  ceiling. 

[  XAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

*Sect.  1008.  Fire  Extinguishing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Automatic 
sprinklers  shall  be  installed  in  cellars,  basements,  workrooms,  shops,  store 
rooms  and  kitchens,  in  buildings  of  Type  I  and  Type  II  construction  more 
than  six  stories  high,  and  in  other  buildings  more  than  three  stories  high. 

(b)  First  aid  standpipes,  as  specified  in  Part  30,  or  portable  extinguishers, 
at  least  one  for  every  twenty-five  hundred  square  feet  of  floor  area  and  at 
least  one  in  each  story,  shall  be  provided  in  buildings  more  than  five  thousand 
square  feet  in  area  or  more  than  six  stories  high. 

(c)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  installed 
in  buildings  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3] 

Sect.  1009.  Plumbing  and  Heating. —  (a)  Every  apartment  in  an 
apartment  house  and  every  apartment  of  two  or  more  rooms  in  an  apartment 
hotel  shall  have  within  it  at  least  one  room  containing  a  water  closet  and 
devoted  exclusively  to  use  as  a  bathroom  or  toilet  room.  One  such  room 
shall  be  accessible  from  every  sleeping  room  without  passing  through  another 
sleeping  room.  In  every  such  apartment  there  shall  be  a  lavatory  or  sink 
with  running  water. 

(b)  Every  apartment  in  a  hotel  and  every  apartment  in  an  apartment 
hotel  not  included  in  paragraph  (a)  of  this  section  shall  have  within  it  at 
least  one  room  containing  a  water  closet,  as  specified  in  paragraph  (a)  of  this 
section,  or  shall  have  access  in  common  with  other  apartments  to  such  a  room 
in  the  same  story  or  in  the  next  story  above  or  below,  by  means  of  a  common 
corridor.  Where  the  number  of  sleeping  rooms  without  a  water  closet  within 
the  apartment  exceeds  six  in  a  story,  separate  toilet  rooms  for  men  and  for 
women  shall  be  provided  in  the  same  story,  plainly  marked,  and  shall  con- 
tain one  water  closet  for  every  nine  sleeping  rooms  or  fraction  of  nine.    Com- 

(75) 


Sec.   1009 

mon  bathrooms  shall  have  means  for  securely  locking  the  door  on  the  inside. 
Every  such  room  shall  contain  at  least  one  lavatory  or  sink  with  running 
water. 

(c)  In  every  apartment  of  an  apartment  house  or  apartment  hotel  which 
is  not  adequately  heated  from  a  central  heating  plant,  at  least  one  room 
with  a  floor  area  not  less  than  one  hundred  and  twenty  square  feet  shall  have 
a  chimney,  as  specified  in  Part  21,  with  a  separate  flue  not  less  than  eight 
inches  in  diameter,  or  a  common  flue  not  less  than  twelve  inches  in  diameter, 
with  a  thimble  at  least  six  inches  in  diameter  about  six  feet  above  the  floor. 

(d)  In  buildings  more  than  three  stories  high,  every  boiler  room  or  room 
containing  a  central  heating  plant  shall  be  separated  from  the  rest  of  the 
building  by  at  least  a  two-hour  separation  as  specified  in  Part  13. 


(76) 


Sees.  1101-1102 


PART   11. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  I  OCCUPANCY: 
LIMITED   HABITATIONS  AND   SMALL  DWELLINGS.* 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 
Section 

1101  — Group  I  Occupancy:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

1 102  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

1103  — Exterior  Walls. 

1104  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

1105  — Exits. 

1106  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

1 107  —  Fire=»Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

fSection  1101.     Group     I     Occupancy:    Type,    Height,    Area. —  (a) 

Group  I  shall  include  such  occupancies  as  — 

Division  1 .  Dwellings  accommodating  not  more  than  three  families,  nor 
more  than  two  families  above  the  first  story. 

Division  2.  Dormitories,  lodging  houses,  clubs,  convents  and  monasteries, 
with  sleeping  accommodations  for  less  than  ten  persons. 

(b)  Buildings  or  parts  of  buildings  classified  for  occupancy  in  Group  I 
shall  be  limited  as  to  type  of  construction,  height  and  area  of  units,  as 
follows :  — 


Type  of  Construction. 

Stories. 

Maximum  Area  of  Unit  (Square  Feet). 

I 

Not  hereby  limited. 
5 
3 
3 
3 

Not  hereby  limited. 

II 

12,000 

Ill 

8,000 

IV 

6,000 

VI 

5,000 

(c)  The  basement  or  cellar  ceiling  of  all  Group  I  buildings,  more  than 
three  stories  in  height,  shall  be  of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  con- 
struction. Boiler  rooms  in  Type  IV  and  Type  VI  construction  with  more 
than  one  family  above  the  first  story  shall  be  separated  by  walls  and  ceilings 
of  not  less  than  one-hour  separation  with  any  openings  in  the  separation  to  be 
Class  B  fire  doors  and  windows. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  } 

Sect.  1102.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  Group  I  occupancies  shall 
be  separated  from  other  occupancies,  and  fire  divisions  of  Group  I  occupancy 
shall  be  separated  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13.  A 
garage  of  not  more  than  six  cars  capacity  may  be  constructed  as  part  of  a 
Group  I  building  as  specified  in  Part  12. 

(77) 


Sees.  1103=1107 

Sect.  1103.     Exterior   Walls. —  (a)     Exterior   walls   or   parts   of   walls, 
except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  five  feet  from  a  property- 
line  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  openings 
therein  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

fSect.  1104.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)  Elevator  shafts, 
ventilating  shafts  and  other  vertical  openings,  including  stairways,  except 
stairway  in  a  single  family  occupancy,  shall  be  enclosed. 

(b)  Where  two  or  more  stairways  are  required  as  exits  at  least  one  shall 
be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in  which  it  occurs.  Stairways  which  pierce  more  than 
three  floors  shall  be  enclosed. 

(c)  In  stairway  enclosures  not  more  than  three  stories  high,  the  doors  in 
stories  other  than  the  basement  or  cellar  need  not  be  fire  doors  if  they  are  of 
wood  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  thick. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943.  ch.  3  ] 

JSect.  1105.  Exits. —  Group  I  buildings  more  than  three  stories  in  height, 
and  Group  I  buildings  in  which  the  area  of  any  floor,  except  the  first  floor, 
exceeds  fifteen  hundred  square  feet,  shall  have  at  least  two  stairways  or 
ramps,  one  of  which  shall  be  interior  and  enclosed,  and  every  Group  I  build- 
ing where  each  dwelling  does  not  have  its  own  stairway  within  its  own  apart- 
ment shall  have  two  stairways,  one  of  which  shall  be  enclosed.  A  single 
family  house  may  have  one  stairway  if  it  is  less  than  three  stories  in  height. 
[  JAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  and  Ord.  1954,  ch.  7  } 

§Sect.  1106.  Light  and  Ventilation. —  (a)  Rooms  of  Group  I  build- 
ings used  for  eating,  living  or  sleeping  purposes,  shall  be  provided  with  light 
and  ventilation  by  means  of  windows.  The  space  on  which  such  windows 
shall  open  shall  not  be  less  than  as  specified  in  Part  10  for  similar  windows  in 
Group  H  buildings. 

(b)     Kitchens  and  rooms  containing  water  closets  shall  be  lighted  and 
ventilated  as  provided  for  similar  rooms  of  Group  H  buildings  in  Part  10. 
[  §As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

iJSect.  1107.  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Automatic  sprin- 
klers shall  be  installed  in  cellars,  basements,  workrooms,  sloops,  storerooms  and 
kitchens  other  than  in  apartments,  in  buildings  more  than  six  stories  high. 

(b)  First  aid  standpipes,  as  specified  in  Part  30,  or  portable  fire-extin- 
guishers, at  least  one  for  every  twenty-five  hundred  square  feet  of  floor  area, 
and  at  least  one  in  each  story  shall  be  provided  in  Group  I  buildings  more  than 
five  thousand  square  feet  in  area  or  more  than  six  stories  high. 

(c)  Fire  department  standpipes  and  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  installed 
in  buildings  more  than  seventy  feet  high. 

(d)  This  section  shall  not  apply  to  buildings  of  Division  1,  referred  to  in 
section  eleven  hundred  and  one. 

[  ||  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 


(78) 


Sec.  1201 


PART   12. 

SPECIAL  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GROUP  J  OCCUPANCY: 
MISCELLANEOUS  STRUCTURES. 

Section 

1201  —  Group  J  Occupancies:  Type,  Height,  Area. 

1202  —  Separation  of  Occupancies. 

1203  —  Exterior  Walls. 

1204  —  Exits. 

1205  —  Aisles  and  Seating. 

1206  —  Light  and  Ventilation. 

1207  —  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. 

1208  —  Floor  Finish. 

*Section    1201.     Group    J    Occupancies:    Type,   Height,    Area. —  (a) 

Group  J  shall  include  such  occupancies  as  — 

Division  1.     Garages  for  six  cars  or  less. 

Division  2.     Tanks,  towers,  advertising  signs  and  similar  structures. 

Division  3.  Amusement  park  structures,  reviewing  stands,  grand  stands, 
and  similar  structures. 

(b)  Garages  for  six  cars  or  less,  not  exceeding  two  stories  in  height  nor 
thirteen  hundred  square  feet  in  floor  area,  may  be  of  any  type  of  construction 
except  Type  VI.  Garages,  for  three  cars  or  less,  one  story  in  height  and  not 
exceeding  six  hundred  and  fifty  square  feet  in  area,  may  be  of  Type  VI 
construction. 

(c)  Structures  of  Division  2,  erected  on  the  roof  or  on  the  facade  of  a 
building  in  the  first  or  second  fire  zone,  shall  be  constructed  with  incom- 
bustible materials,  except  water  tanks,  flag  poles,  isolated  signs  flat  against 
an  exterior  wall  not  more  than  twenty  square  feet  in  area,  and  isolated  signs 
projecting  from  an  exterior  wall;  provided,  that  such  projecting  signs  have  a 
frame  of  incombustible  material,  that  the  combustible  material  in  such  pro- 
jecting signs  is  no  more  combustible  than  wood,  that  no  part  of  such  combus- 
tible materia]  is  nearer  an  exterior  wall  than  fifteen  inches,  and  that  the  surface 
area  of  such  combustible  material  is  not  more  than  thirty-five  square  feet  on 
any  face  and  not  more  than  seventy  square  feet  in  the  aggregate,  except  that 
the  surface  area  of  such  combustible  material,  if  the  nearest  point  thereof  is 
eighteen  or  more  inches  from  all  exterior  walls,  may  be  more  than  thirty-five 
square  feet  on  a  face  and  more  than  seventy  square  feet  in  the  aggregate  if 
the  building  commissioner  certifies  on  the  application  for  the  permit  to  erect 
such  sign  that  in  his  opinion  the  spread  of  fire  therefrom  is  no  more  likely 
than  from  a  projecting  sign  having  an  incombustible  frame  and  two  wooden 
faces  each  thirty-five  square  feet  in  area  the  nearest  point  of  which  wood  is 
fifteen  inches  from  the  nearest  exterior  wall. 

(d)  Reviewing  stands  and  grand  stands  may  be  constructed  of  masonry, 
reinforced  concrete,  steel  or  wood  or  any  combination  thereof.  When  con- 
structed, except  for  the  seats,  of  incombustible  materials,  the  size  shall  not 

(79) 


Sees.  1201=1202 

hereby  be  limited.  When  the  structure  below  the  deck  is  constructed  of 
incombustible  material,  and  the  decking  is  of  wood  or  other  combustible 
material,  the  horizontal  distance  from  front  to  back  shall  not  exceed  one 
hundred  feet.  When  the  entire  structure  is  constructed  of  wood  or  other 
combustible  material,  the  horizontal  distance  from  front  to  back  shall  not 
exceed  fifty  feet. 

(e)  Amusement  park  structures  of  the  open  or  skeleton  framed  type 
may  be  constructed  of  any  type  of  construction  and  are  not  hereby  limited  in 
height  and  area. 

(f)  Amusement  park  structures  of  the  enclosed  type,  shall  be  limited  as 
to  type  of  construction,  height  and  area  of  units,  as  follows: — 


Type  of  Construction. 

Height. 

Area 

of  Unit. 

(Square  Feet.) 

Feet. 

Stories 

I 

Not  herebv  limited. 

Not  hereby  limited. 

II 

75 
55 
35 
35 
35 

■1 
3 

2 
2 
2 

15,000 

Ill 

10,000 

IV 

10,000 

V 

5,000 

VI 

5,000 

(g)  Amusement  park  structures  of  enclosed  type  used  as  places  of  assembly 
shall  be  classified  in  Group  A  or  Group  B  in  accordance  with  the  definitions 
thereof. 

(h)     The  maximum  areas  provided  in  this  section  may  be  increased  fifty 
per  cent  if  the  entire  floor  area  is  protected  by  automatic  sprinklers. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  and  Ord.  1950,  cfi.  6  ] 


Sect.  1202.  Separation  of  Occupancies. —  (a)  When  a  garage  of 
size  and  arrangement  to  accommodate  not  more  than  two  cars  is  constructed 
as  part  of  a  Group  H  or  Group  I  building,  the  walls  and  ceilings  of  the  garage 
shall  be  of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction.  When  a  garage 
to  accommodate  more  than  two  but  not  more  than  six  cars  is  constructed  as 
part  of  a  Group  H  or  Group  I  building,  the  walls  and  ceiling  of  the  garage 
shall  be  of  not  less  than  three-hour  fire-resistive  construction.  Openings  in 
such  walls  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  by  fire  windows.  A 
garage  to  accommodate  not  more  than  six  cars  shall  be  separated  from  other 
occupancies  and  from  adjoining  fire  divisions  as  specified  in  Part  13. 

(b)  In  a  separation  between  a  garage  of  Group  J  occupancy  and  another 
occupancy  there  shall  not  be  more  than  one  opening,  and  the  sill  thereof 
shall  be  raised  one  foot  above  the  garage  floor.  There  shall  be  no  opening 
from  a  garage  directly  into  a  living  room,  sleeping  room  or  kitchen. 

(80) 


Sees.  1203=1208 

Sect.  1203.  Exterior  Walls. —  Exterior  walls  or  parts  of  walls,  of  Group  J 
structures,  except  where  fronting  on  a  street,  which  are  less  than  five  feet 
from  a  property  line  or  less  than  ten  feet  from,  another  building  on  the  same 
lot,  shall  be  of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  all  open- 
ings therein  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows,  and  such 
walls  which  are  less  than  three  feet  from  a  property  line  or  less  than  six  feet 
from  another  building  on  the  same  lot,  shall  be  of  at  least  two-hour  fire-resistive 
construction  and  all  openings  therein  shall  be  protected  by  Class  B  fire  doors 
or  fire  windows,  except  that  in  garages  for  three  cars  or  less  of  Type  V  con- 
struction, such  walls  may  be  of  unprotected  metal. 

Sect.  1204.  Exits. —  (a)  Reviewing  stands,  grand  stands  and  similar 
structures  shall  be  provided  with  exits  not  less  than  four  feet  wide  nor  less 
than  one  foot  in  width  for  each  three  hundred  persons  or  fraction  thereof 
served.  Exits  shall  have  not  less  than  seven  feet  in  clear  height  nor  be  more 
than  sixty  feet  apart. 

(b)  Where  the  space  under  a  grand  stand,  reviewing  stand  or  similar 
structure  is  used  for  any  purpose  other  than  ingress  and  egress,  the  required 
exits  through  this  space  shall  be  enclosed  by  walls,  floors,  and  ceilings  of 
not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 

(c)  Amusement  park  structures,  other  than  grand  stands  or  similar 
structures,  of  either  open  or  enclosed  type  shall  be  provided  with  exits  as 
required  for  Group  B  occupancy  in  Part  4. 

Sect.  1205.  Aisles  and  Seating. —  Reviewing  stands,  grand  stands 
and  similar  structures  having  more  than  twenty  rows  of  seats  shall  have 
transverse  aisles  not  over  sixty  feet  apart  leading  to  exits.  Transverse 
aisles  shall  have  a  clear  width  not  less  than  thirty  inches  nor  less  than  one 
foot  for  ever}'  three  hundred  persons  or  fraction  thereof  served.  Where 
separate  seats  are  not  provided  or  marked  off,  a  width  of  eighteen  inches 
shall  be  considered  one  seat  in  computing  the  required  width  of  aisles  and 
exits. 

*Sect.     1206.     Light    and     Ventilation. —  Amusement  park  structures 

shall  be  provided  with  light  and  ventilation  sufficient  to  avoid  dangerous  or 

unhealthful  conditions  as  may  be  required  by  the  commissioner.     They  shall 

be  lighted  by  artificial  light  sufficiently  for  safe  egress. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  3  ] 

Sect.  1207.  Fire=Extinguishing  Apparatus. — •  Fire-extinguishing  ap- 
paratus shall  be  provided  in  buildings  and  structures  of  Group  J  where 
the  fire  hazard,  in  the  judgment  of  the  commissioner,  is  commensurate  with 
that  for  which  such  apparatus  is  specified  in  buildings  of  other  groups. 

Sect.  1208.  Floor  Finish. —  Garages  shall  have  non-absorbent  incom- 
bustible floor  finish. 


(81) 


Sec.  1301 


PART    13. 
SEPARATION   OF  OCCUPANCIES. 

Section 

1301  —  Multiple  Occupancies. 

1302  —  Separations. 

*Section  1301.  Multiple  Occupancies. —  (a)  A  >fire  division,  whether 
occupying  the  whole  or  a  part  of  a  building,  shall  be  limited  as  to  type  of 
construction,  height  and  area  as  provided  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  according 
to  its  principal  occupancy. 

(b)  Adjoining  fire  divisions  in  a  building  shall  be  separated  by  a  separation 
at  least  as  fire-resistive  as  required  by  Table  A,  section  thirteen  hundred  and 
two. 

(c)  A  fire  division  may  contain  two  or  more  units  of  different  occupancies, 
and  every  such  unit  shall  be  limited  as  to  height  above  the  ground  and  as  to 
area  as  provided  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  according  to  its  occupancy  and 
the  type  of  construction  of  the  building. 

(d)  Adjoining  units  of  different  occupancy  in  a  fire  division  shall  be 
separated  by  a  separation  at  least  as  fire-resistive  as  specified  in  Table  A, 
section  thirteen  hundred  and  two.  Space  within  a  unit  of  occupancy  used 
for  a  purpose  or  process  customarily  incidental  to  that  occupancy  and  under 
the  same  management  and  control  shall  not  be  considered  a  separate  unit 
of  occupancy  unless  the  floor  area  of  such  space  exceeds  one  tenth  the  area 
of  the  fire  division  in  which  it  is  located;  but  garage  use  shall  not  so  be  con- 
sidered incidental. 

(e)  Every  unit  of  occupancy  shall  conform  to  the  provisions  of  Parts  3 
to  12  of  this  code  for  the  group  and  division  in  which  it  is  classified. 

(f)  Two  adjoining  fire  divisions  may  be  of  different  types  of  construction 
subject  to  the  following  limitations: 

(1)  Construction  required  to  be  of  Type  I  shall  not  be  supported 
wholly  or  in  part  by  construction  of  any  other  type. 

(2)  Construction  required  to  be  of  Type  II  shall  not  be  supported  by 
construction  other  than  of  Type  I  or  Type  II. 

(3)  Construction  required  to  be  of  Type  III  shall  not  be  supported  by 
construction  other  than  of  Type  I,  Type  II  or  Type  III. 

(4)  Construction  required  to  be  of  Type  IV  shall  not  be  supported  by 
construction  other  than  of  Type  I,  Type  II,  Type  III  or  Type  IV. 

(5)  Construction  required  to  be  of  Type  V  shall  not  be  supported  by 
construction  other  than  of  Type  I,  Type  II  or  Type  V. 

(82) 


Sees.  1301=1302 

(6)     Construction  required  to  be  of  Type  VI  shall  not  be  supported  by- 
construction  other  than  of  Type  I,  Type  II,  Type  III,  Type  IV  or  Type  VI. 

(g)  Separations,  as  specified  in  this  code,  may  be  vertical,  horizontal, 
or  inclined,  depending  upon  the  relative  position  of  the  portions  of  the  building 
to  be  separated,  and  shall  consist  of  a  system  of  walls,  partitions,  floors  or 
other  construction  of  such  materials  and  construction  and  so  arranged  as  to 
provide  a  complete,  secure  and  continuous  fire-break  of  the  required  fire- 
resistive  rating  between  the  portions  of  the  building  separated. 

(h)  A  building  more  than  three  stories  high  used  on  first  floor  or  basement, 
for  commercial  use  and  adapted  for  more  than  two  families  above  the  first 
floor  shall  be  equipped  with  automatic  sprinklers  throughout  that  portion 
used  for  commercial  use  when,  in  the  judgment  of  the  commissioner,  public 
safety  demands  such  protection. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  4  ] 

fSect.  1302.  Separations. — ■  (a)  Separations  between  units  of  occu- 
pancy within  a  fire  division  and  between  fire  divisions  of  a  building  shall  be 
classified,  each  classification  being  designated  in  Table  A  of  this  section  by 
the  letter  or  figure  s}^mbol  set  against  it,  having  the  following  significance: 

A  —  means  absolute  separation. 
4  —  means  four-hour  separation. 
3  — ■  means  three-hour  separation. 
2  —  means  two -hour  separation. 
1  —  means  one-hour  separation. 
N  —  means  no  separation  required. 

(b)  An  absolute  separation  shall  provide  in  all  its  parts  effective  fire- 
resistance  of  not  less  than  four-hour  rating  as  specified  in  Part  22  and  shall 
have  no  openings. 

(c)  A  four-hour  separation  shall  provide  effective  fire-resistance  of  not 
less  than  four-hour  rating  as  specified  in  Part  22.  Openings  in  the  walls 
of  such  separations  shall  be  protected  on  each  side  thereof  by  automatic  - 
closing  Class  A  fire  doors  as  specified  in  Part  22.  The  sum  of  the  areas  of 
such  openings  in  one  story  shall  not  exceed  one  third  the  area  of  the  separating 
wall  and  no  single  opening  shall  have  a  greater  area  than  one  hundred  square 
feet. 

(d)  A  three-hour  separation  shall  provide  effective  fire-resistance  of  not 
less  than  three-hour  rating  as  specified  in  Part  22.  Openings  in  the  walls 
of  such  separations  shall  be  protected  on  each  side  thereof  by  automatic - 
closing  Class  B  fire  doors  as  specified  in  Part  22.  The  sum  of  the  areas  of 
such  openings  in  one  story  shall  not  exceed  one  third  the  area  of  the  separating 
wall  and  no  single  opening  shall  have  a  greater  area  than  two  hundred  square 
feet. 

(e)  A  two-hour  separation  shall  provide  effective  fire-resistance  of  not 
less  than  two-hour  rating  as  specified  in  Part  22.  Openings  in  the  walls  of 
such  separations  shall  be  protected  on  one  side  thereof  by  automatic-closing 
Class  A  fire  doors  as  specified  in  Part  22.     The  sum  of  the  areas  of  such 

(83) 


Sec.  1302 

openings  in  one  story  shall  not  exceed  one  third  the  area  of  the  separating 
wall  and  no  single  opening  shall  have  a  greater  area  than  two  hundred  square 
feet. 

(f)  A  one-hour  separation  shall  provide  effective  fire-resistance  of  not 
less  than  one-hour  rating  as  specified  in  Part  22.  Openings  in  the  walls  of 
such  separations  shall  be  protected  on  one  side  thereof  by  automatic -closing 
Class  B  fire  doors  as  specified  in  Part  22. 

(g)  Walls  which  form  separations  between  fire  divisions  shall  be  fire 
walls  as  specified  in  Part  14.  Such  walls,  whether  bearing  or  non-bearing, 
shall  be  solid  masonry  not  less  than  eight  inches  thick  or  reinforced  concrete 
not  less  than  six  inches  thick.  Openings  in  fire  walls  shall  have  fire  doors  on 
both  sides. 

(h)  The  commissioner  may  waive  in  part  the  requirements  of  this  section 
for  the  protection  of  openings  less  than  two  square  feet  in  area  subject  to 
such  conditions  as  he  shall  in  each  case  specify. 

(i)  A  fixed  fire  window,  as  specified  in  Part  22,  may  be  considered  equiva- 
lent to  one  Class  B  fire  door  in  the  walls  of  separations,  but  two  such  windows 
shall  not  be  substituted  as  equivalent  to  two  doors  in  an  opening  where  two 
fire  doors  are  required. 

(j)     Table  A, 

(1)  For  required  separations  between  different  unit  occupancies  in  one 
fire  division  read  above  the  zigzag  line.  Exception :  For  separation  re- 
quirements between  units  of  occupancy  of  Group  J,  Division  1  Occupancy, 
and  units  in  the  same  fire  division  of  Group  H  or  Group  I  Occupancy  see 
Section  1202,  Part  12. 

(2)  For  required  separations  between  fire  divisions  read  below  the  zigzag 
line. 

Separations  between  adjoining  fire  divisions  of  Type  I,  Type  II,  and 
Type  V  construction  shall  be  as  listed.  If  either  of  two  contiguous  fire 
divisions  is  of  Type  III,  Type  IV,  or  Type  VI  construction  the  provisions 
of  the  Table  shall  be  modified  in  accordance  with  the  following: 

The  symbol  of  four  hour  separation  shall  be  construed  to  require 
absolute  separation,  and  the  other  separation  symbols  shall  be  con- 
strued to  require  one  hour  more  than  that  indicated  in  the  Table. 

In  the  following  table  ordinates  and  coordinates  are  designated  by  the 
letters  and  numbers  used  in  this  Code  indicating  various  occupancies.  The 
requirements  for  separation  between  fire  divisions  and  unit  occupancies  are 
indicated  by  the  number  or  letter  which  appears  at  the  intersection  of  the 
ordinate  and  coordinate  representing  any  two  contiguous  fire  divisions  or 
unit  occupancies.  See  paragraph  (a)  for  significance  of  said  numbers  and 
letters. 


(84) 


Sec*  1302 


Table  A,  (l)— Required  Separations  Between  Different 
Occupancies  in  One  Fire  Division. 
(Above  Zigzag  Line.) 


Group. 


A 

B 

C 

Dl 

D2 

El 

E2 

Fl 

F2 

F3 

F4 

Fo 

Gl 

G2 

G3 

HI 

H2 

11 

12 

N 
4 

2 

2 
1 

3 
3 

3 
2 

3 
4 

3 
4 

3 
2 

3 
2 

3 
3 

3 
3 

3 

4 

3 
3 

3 
2 

3 
2 

3 
1 

3 
1 

3 

1 

3 

1 

3 

4 
4 
4 

2 
4 
4 

2 
4 
4 

3 

2 
3 

4 
4 

4 

4 
4 
4 

1 
3 
1 

2 

3 
2 

2 

3 
2 

2 
3 
3 

4 
4 
4 

3 
3 
3 

2 

3 
2 

2 
3 
2 

1 
3 
1 

1 
3 
1 

N 
3 
1 

X 

3 
1 

2 
4 

2 

A 

A 

4 

4 

A 

3 

2 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

A 

A 

4 

4 

A 

3 

3 

2 

2 

2 

o 

3 

3 

2 

2 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

3 

3 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

X 

X 

X 

3 

3 

X 

X 

X 

N 

N 

X 

4 

3 

3 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

X 

X 

3 

3 

X 

X 

1 

1 

1 

1 

4 

4 

3 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

X 

3 

3 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

4 
4 

4 
4 

3 
4 

4 

4 

A 
A 

3 

o 
O 

3 
3 

3 
3 

3 
3 

3 
3 

3 
3 

3 

3 
3 

1 

3 

1 
3 

1 
4 

1 
4 

1 

4 

1 
4 

3 

4 

4 

4 

4 

A 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

3 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

2 

X 

1 

1 

1 

1 

4 

4 

4 
3 

3 
3 

4 
4 

3 

3 

3 
4 

3 
4 

3 
3 

3 
3 

3 
3 

3 

3 

3 
4 

3 
3 

2 
3 

3 

1 

1 

X 

1 
X 

1 

X 

3 

4 

3 

3 

4 

3 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

X 

X 

4 

3 

3 

4 

3 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

2 

X 

4 

3 

3 

4 

3 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

2 

2 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

2 

2 

Jl 


A 

B. 

C. 

Dl 

D2 

El 

E2 

Fl 

F2 

F3 

F4 

Fa 

Gl 

G2 

G3 

HI 

H2 

II. 

12. 

Jl 


13 


Table  A,  (2)  —  Required  Separations  Between  Fire  Divisions. 

(Below  Zigzag  Line.) 

[  "fvls  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 


(85) 


Sec.  1401 


PART    14. 
WALLS  AND   PARTITIONS. 

Section 

1401  —  Definition  of  Walls  for  Use  or  Function. 

1402  —  General  Requirements  for  Walls. 

1403  —  Lateral  Support  of  Walls. 

1404  —  Classification  of  Walls  for  Type  of  Construction. 

1405  —  Reinforced  Concrete  Walls. 

1406  —  Masonry  Walls. 

1407  —  Bond  in  Masonry. 

1408  —  Lateral  Support  of  Masonry. 

1409  —  Masonry  Piers. 

1410  —  Beam  Supports  on  Masonry  Walls. 

1411  —  Masonry  Chases,  Recesses,  Corbels  and  Lintels. 

1412  —  Masonry  Foundation  Walls. 

1413  — Parapet  Walls. 

1414  —  Use  of  Existing  Masonry  Walls. 

1415  —  Masonry  Veneer. 

1416  —  Steel  Frame  Walls. 

1417  —  Wooden  Frame  Walls. 

*Section   1401.     Definition  of  Walls  for  Use  or  Function.— (a)     Walls 
and  partitions  shall  be  classified  for  use  or  function  as  follows: — 

(1)  A  bearing  wall  is  a  wall  which  supports  a  floor,  roof  or  other  load 
in  addition  to  its  own  weight. 

(2)  A  non-bearing  wall  is  a  wall  which  supports  no  load  other  than  its 
own  weight. 

(3)  An  exterior  wall  is  a  wall  separating  the  interior  from  the  exterior 
of  a  building,  marking  the  boundary  or  extent  thereof  which  may  be  and 
usually  is  exposed  to  the  weather  on  one  side. 

(4)  An  interior  wall  is  a  wall  wholly  within  a  building  and  protected 
from  the  weather. 

(5)  A  party  wall  is  a  wall  used  or  adapted  for  use  in  common  as  a 
part  of  two  buildings.    A  party  wall  may  be  either  bearing  or  non-bearing- 

(6)  A  fire  wall  is  an  interior  wall,  bearing  or  non-bearing,  forming 
part  of  a  separation  between  two  fire  divisions  of  a  building,  as  provided 
in  Part  13. 

(7)  A  partition  is  an  interior  wall,  bearing  or  non-bearing,  not  over 
one  story  in  height,  the  chief  function  of  which  is  to  separate  two  rooms 
of  a  story.     A  partition  in  one  story  may  be  supported  by  a  bearing 

partition  in  the  story  below. 

(8)  A  foundation  wall  is  a  foundation  in  the  form  of  a  wall,  either 
exterior  or  interior;  that  portion  of  the  exterior  bearing  wall  of  a  building 
which  is  below  the  grade  of  adjoining  ground. 

(86) 


Sees.  1401=1402 

(9)  A  retaining  wall  is  a  wall  of  which  the  chief  function  is  to  resist 
the  lateral  displacement  of  liquid,  granular  or  other  materials.  It  may- 
be either  bearing  or  non-bearing,  exterior  or  interior. 

(10)  A  curtain  wall  is  an  exterior,  non-bearing  wall  more  than  one 
story  high  and  not  supported  at  each  floor  level,  which  is  laterally  stayed 
either  by  masonry  piers  or  by  the  structural  frame  of  the  building. 

(11)  A  panel  wall  is  an  exterior,  non-bearing  wall  not  over  one  story 
high,  or  supported  at  each  floor  level. 

(12)  An  enclosure  wall  is  an  interior  wall,  bearing  or  non-bearing, 
which  encloses  a  stairway,  elevator  shaft  or  other  vertical  opening. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  1 

fSect.  1402.  General  Requirements  for  Walls. —  (a)  Walls  shall 
have  the  resistance  to  fire  and  to  the  spread  of  fire  required  of  them  in  Parts  3 
to  13,  inclusive,  and  Part  15  of  this  code,  but  may  be  finished,  except  on  the 
outside  of  exterior  walls  and  within  enclosures  of  vertical  openings,  with 
wooden  or  other  combustible  wainscoating,  insulating  or  acoustical  material. 
In  Type  III  buildings,  there  shall  be  no  concealed  air  spaces  between  such 
finish  and  the  wall.  In  Type  V  buildings  such  material  shall  be  protected 
from  fire  on  both  sides  by  sheet  metal  or  its  equivalent.  In  Type  IV  or 
Type  VI  buildings  every  hollow  space  in  walls  shall  be  firestopped  at  floor 
and  ceiling. 

(b)  Bearing  walls  shall  be  so  supported  and  constructed  as  to  be  stable 
and  to  support  their  weight  and  the  loads  which  may  be  placed  upon  them 
without  exceeding  the  stresses  allowed  for  the  materials  of  which  they  are 
constructed  as  provided  in  Parts  23  to  29,  inclusive.  Exterior  walls,  party 
walls,  bearing  walls  and  fire  walls  and  their  vertical  or  lateral  supports  shall 
be  capable  of  resisting  the  pressure  of  the  wind  applied  to  either  side. 

(c)  Court  walls  shall  be  of  such  fire-resistive  construction  and  shall  have 
such  limitations  as  to  openings  and  the  protection  of  openings  as  are  specified 
for  exterior  walls  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive. 

(d)  Exterior  bearing  walls  pi  buildings  of  Type  I,  Type  II,  Type  III  and 
Type  IV  shall  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction  as  provided  in  sec- 
tions one  hundred  and  twenty-six  to  one  hundred  and  twenty-nine,  inclusive, 
of  Part  I.  Where  such  exterior  walls  are  required,  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive, 
to  be  without  openings  the  panels  or  non-bearing  portions  of  the  walls  shall 
afford  resistance  of  four-hour  rating  to  the  spread  of  fire.  Where  openings 
in  such  exterior  walls  are  required,  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  to  be  protected 
with  fire  doors  or  fire  windows,  the  panels  or  non-bearing  portions  of  the  walls 
shall  afford  resistance  of  two-hour  rating  to  the  spread  of  fire.  Where  the 
openings  in  such  exterior  walls  are  unrestricted,  panels  or  non-bearing  portions 
of  such  walls  shall  be  of  incombustible  construction,  excepting,  that  sash, 
window  frames,  blinds,  shutters,  screens,  doors,  door  frames,  door  and  window 
trims,  their  architraves,  pilasters  and  entablatures  may  be  of  wood  or  other 
not  easily  inflammable  material;  and  in  buildings  outside  the  fire  limits  isolated 
pilasters  and  building  cornices  may  be  of  wood  or  some  other  not  easily 
inflammable  material.  Furthermore,  architectural  surfaces,  trimmings, 
plaques,  panels  or  the  like  of  wood  covered  with  metal  or  other  incombustible 

(87) 


Sees.  1402=1405 

material  may  be  applied  to  the  exterior  of  buildings,  and  there  may  be  in- 
corporated in  the  masonry  backing  the  necessary  wooden  grounds  for  their 
attachment,  or  wooden  grounds  may  be  applied  to  masonry  wall  if  embedded 
in  mortar.  Metal  cornices  and  the  like  may  be  applied  to  wooden  outriggers 
and  suitable  grounds. 

(e)     In  buildings  with  combustible  floors,  doorways  required  to  have  fire 
doors  shall  have  incombustible  thresholds  the  full  thickness  of  the  wall  and 
doors  in  their  closed  positions,  and  the  space  thereunder  shall  be  filled  solid 
with  masonry.    Thresholds  may  be  flush  with  the  floor. 
[  jAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.  1403.  Lateral  Support  of  Walls. —  (a)  Walls  of  any  type  or 
construction  may  be  considered  to  have  lateral  support  where  anchored  or 
secured: — 

(1)  To  intersecting  walls  of  equal  or  better  fire-resistance. 

(2)  To  buttresses  or  piers. 

(3)  To  the  floors,  roof  and  framing. 

Sect.  1404.     Classification  of  Walls  for  Type  of  Construction. —  (a) 

Walls,  including  partitions,  shall  be  classified  for  type  of  construction  as 
follows: — 

(1)  Reinforced  concrete. 

(2)  Masonry. 

(3)  Steel  frame. 

(4)  Wooden  frame. 

(b)  Any  wall  which  does  not  fall  readily  into  one  of  the  classifications  of 
this  section  shall  be  assigned  thereto  by  the  commissioner  according  to  its 
pertinent  characteristics. 

Sect.  1405.  Reinforced  Concrete  Walls. —  (a)  Reinforced  concrete 
walls  may  be  used  for  any  use  or  function  •  described  in  section  fourteen 
hundred  and  one. 

(b)  Reinforced  concrete  walls  other  than  foundation  walls  shall  be  sup- 
ported upon  foundations  of  concrete  or  masonry  or  upon  construction  of 
masonry,  reinforced  concrete  or  structural  steel  the  metal  of  which,  except 
as  otherwise  provided  in  section  fourteen  hundred  and  eleven,  shall  have  pro- 
tection against  fire  of  at  least  the  rating  required  for  the  wall  itself,  and  not 
less  than  two-hour  fire-resistive  protection.  Reinforced  concrete  walls  shall 
not  be  supported  upon  wood  except  wooden  piles  or  other  approved  under- 
water construction  of  wood. 

(c)  The  pertinent  provisions  of  Part  26  shall  apply  to  walls  of  reinforced 
concrete. 

(d)  Reinforced  concrete  bearing  walls  shall  have  a  thickness  of  at  least 
one  twenty-fifth  the  height  or  length  between  supports,  whichever  is  the  lesser 
dimension. 

(e)  Foundation  walls  of  reinforced  concrete  shall  be  not  less  than  eight 
inches  thick. 

(88) 


Sees.  1405=1406 

(f)  Non-bearing  walls  of  reinforced  concrete  shall  have  a  thickness  of  at 
least  one  sixtieth  of  the  height  or  length  between  lateral  supports,  whichever 
is  the  lesser  dimension,  and  shall  not  be  thinner  than  three  inches.  Reinforced 
concrete  beams  which  serve  in  part  as  walls  shall  conform  to  the  requirements 
for  non-bearing  walls. 

(g)  Party  and  fire  walls  of  reinforced  concrete  shall  be  at  least  six  inches 
thick. 

(h)  Walls  of  reinforced  concrete  may  be  covered  with  a  veneer  of  masonry 
or  other  material  adequately  supported  but  such  veneer  shall  not  be  con- 
sidered to  be  a  part  of  the  wall  for  the  purposes  of  this  section. 

(i)  No  chase  or  recess  shall  be  cut  or  formed  in  a  reinforced  concrete  wall 
so  as  to  impair  its  stability,  or  to  reduce  the  minimum  thickness  to  less  than 
four  inches. 

(j)  Where  structural  steel  beams  or  other  metal  members  frame  into 
exterior,  party,  fire  or  enclosure  walls  of  reinforced  concrete,  the  ends  shall 
have  protection  against  fire  of  the  rating  specified  for  the  wall.  Where  wooden 
joists,  beams  or  other  combustible  members  frame  into  such  walls,  the  ends 
shall  be  separated  from  the  opposite  side  of  the  wall  and  from  such  members 
framing  into  the  opposite  side  of  the  wall  by  not  less  than  four  inches  of  con- 
crete. In  buildings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  or  Type  VI  construction  party 
walls  and  fire  walls  shall  extend  through  the  roof  as  provided  in  section 
fourteen  hundred  and  thirteen. 

(k)  Exterior  and  bearing  walls  of  reinforced  concrete  shall  be  anchored 
to  the  floor  and  roof  construction  as  specified  in  Parts  16  and  17. 

*Sect.  1406.  Masonry  Walls. —  (a)  Masonry  may  be  used  for  walls  of 
any  use  or  function  described  in  section  fourteen  hundred  and  one.  Specifica- 
tions for  masonry  in  this  chapter  shall  also  apply  to  plain  concrete. 

(b)  Masonry  walls  and  piers,  other  than  foundation  walls,  shall  be  sup- 
ported upon  foundations  of  concrete  or  masomy,  or  upon  construction  of 
masonry,  reinforced  concrete  or  structural  steel  the  metal  of  which,  except  as 
otherwise  provided  in  section  fourteen  hundred  and  eleven,  shall  have  pro- 
tection against  fire  of  at  least  the  rating  required  for  the  wall  itself,  and  not 
less  than  two-hour  fire-resistive  protection.  Masonry  walls  and  piers  shall 
not  be  supported  upon  wood  except  wooden  piles  or  other  approved  under- 
water construction  of  wood,  but  this  provision  shall  not  apply  to  fire  stopping 
and  nogging. 

(c)  Exterior  bearing  walls  of  masonry  shall  have  a  thickness  of  at  least 
one  sixteenth  the  height  or  length  between  lateral  supports  in  the  top  story 
of  a  building  and  at  least  one  twentieth  such  height  or  length  in  stories  other 
than  the  top,  whichever  is  the  lesser  dimension.  Masonry  exterior  bearing 
walls  supporting  the  walls  of  Type  V  or  Type  VI  buildings  shall  be  not  less 
than  eight  inches  thick. 


(89) 


Sec.  1406 

(d)     Exterior  bearing  walls  of  masonry  shall  have  at  least  the  thickness 
given  in  the  following  tables: 

Table  A:  Exterior  Bearing  Walls  of  Masonry  for  Group  A,  B,  C,  E,  F, 

Q,  J  Occupancy. 

Note. —  Hollow  masonry  units  may  be  used  in  walls  of  the  thickness  given  only  on  the  top 
four  stories.    Minimum  thickness  of  walls  is  given  in  inches. 


Story. 

Height 

of  Wall  in  Stories 

8. 

7. 

6. 

5. 

4. 

3. 

2. 

1. 

Eighth 

12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 
20 
20 
20 

12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 
20 
20 

12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 
20 

12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 

12 
12 
12 
16 
16 

12 
12 
12 
16 

12 
12 
12 

Seventh 

Sixth 

Fifth 

Fourth 

— 

Third 

Second 

— 

First 

12 

Basement 

12 

Table    B:    Exterior    Bearing  Walls  of   Masonry   for  Group   D,   H,   I 

Occupancy. 

Note. —  For  special  provisions  with  respect  to  single-family,  Group  I  occupancy,  see  the 
following  Table  C. 


Story. 

Height 

of  Wall  in  Stories 

. 

8. 

7. 

6. 

5. 

4. 

3. 

2. 

1. 

Eighth 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 
16 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
16 
16 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
16 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 

12 
12 

12 
12 

8 
12 
12 

Fifth 

Fourth 

Third 

First 

8 

12 

(90) 


Sees.  1406=1407 

Table  C:  Exterior  Bearing  Walls  of  Masonry  for  Group  I  Occupancy, 
Single-Family  Dwellings  Not  Over  Three  Stories  High,  Supporting 
Floors  Not  Over  Twenty  Feet  in  Span. 


Story. 

Height  of  Wall  in  Stories. 

3. 

2. 

1. 

Third 

8 

8 

12 

12 

8 

8 

12 

First 

8 

s 

(e)  Interior  bearing  partitions  of  masonry,  supporting  not  more  than  one 
floor  and  a  roof  shall  have  a  thickness  of  at  least  one  twentieth  the  height  or 
length  between  lateral  supports,  whichever  is  the  lesser  dimension,  and  at 
least  six  inches.  Such  partitions,  not  over  one  story  high,  supporting  stairs, 
stair  landings,  platforms,  a  mezzanine  floor,  or  the  like,  shall  have  a  thickness 
of  at  least  one  twentieth  the  height  or  length  between  lateral  supports,  which- 
ever is  the  lesser  dimension,  and  at  least  three  and  one  half  inches.  Other 
interior  bearing  walls  of  masonry  shall  have  at  least  the  thickness  required 
in  this  section  for  masonry  exterior  bearing  walls. 

(f )  Bearing  party  walls  of  masonry  shall  be  solid  not  less  than  twelve 
mches  thick.  Non-bearing  party  walls  and  bearing  or  non-bearing  fire  walls, 
of  masonry  shall  be  solid  not  less  than  eight  inches  thick. 

(g)  Exterior  masonry  panel  walls  shall  be  not  less  than  three  and  one  half 
'inches  thick.     Panel  walls  more  than  four  feet  high,  and  curtain  walls,  of 

masonry  shall  be  not  less  than  eight  inches  thick.  Panel  or  curtain  walls  of 
metal  or  fire-resisting,  impervious  material  may  be  backed  up  with  masonry 
at  least  two  inches  in  thickness. 

(h)  Non-bearing  masonry  partitions  and  enclosure  walls  shall  have  a 
thickness  of  at  least  one  forty-fifth  the  height  or  length  between  lateral 
supports,  whichever  is  the  lesser,  and  at  least  three  inches. 

(i)  The  minimum  thickness  specified  in  this  section  for  masonry  walls, 
except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  paragraph,  shall  be  exclusive  of  unbonded 
veneer,  plaster  or  other  covering  on  either  face  of  the  wall.  The  minimum 
thickness  specified  in  this  section  for  non-bearing  partitions  and  enclosure 
walls  shall  be  inclusive  of  plaster  which  is  at[least  one  half  inch  thick  on  either 
or  both  sides,  and  when  the  masonry  beneath  the  plaster  is  at  least  three 
inches  thick. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

fSect.  1407.  Bond  in  Masonry. —  (a)  Brick  walls  shall  be  bonded 
with  at  least  one  full  header,  every  other  brick  in  every  sixth  course,  on  both 
faces  and  the  interior  of  the  walls. 


(91) 


Sees.  1407=1408 

(b)  In  homogeneous  masonry  walls  of  stone,  bond  stones  shall  be  uni- 
formly distributed  and  shall  have  a  cross-section  not  less  than  ten  per  cent 
of  the  area  of  the  wall. 

(c)  In  homogeneous  masonry  walls  of  structural  clay  tile  or  of  solid  or 
hollow  concrete  or  gypsum  blocks  or  of  similar  masonry  units,  unless  all  the 
units  are  the  full  thickness  of  the  wall,  the  two  faces  of  the  wall  shall  be 
bonded  together  through  the  wall,  by  varying  the  thickness  of  units  in  alter- 
nate courses  so  that  the  blocks  will  overlap  across  the  wall  not  less  than  three 
and  one  half  inches. 

(d)  Walls  of  structural  clay  tile,  concrete  blocks  or  similar  masonry 
units,  faced  with  brick,  in  which  the  backing  is  bonded  as  required  for  the 
material  of  which  it  is  built  and  the  brick  facing  is  bonded  to  the  backing  as 
required  in  a  brick  wall,  shall  be  considered  to  have  the  strength  and  stability 
of  a  homogeneous  wall  of  the  same  total  thickness  of  the  weaker  material. 

(e)  A  wall  of  stone,  brick,  structural  clay  tile,  concrete  blocks  or  other 
masonry  units  faced  with  stone  ashlar  bonded  to  the  wall  as  herein  provided, 
shall  be  considered  to  have  the  strength  and  stability  of  a  homogeneous  wall 
of  the  same  total  thickness  of  the  weaker  material.  In  order  so  to  be  con- 
sidered a  part  of  the  wall,  the  ashlar  facing  shall  be  laid  in  a  full  bed  of  mortar, 
shall  be  not  less  than  three  and  one  half  inches  thick  and  bond  stones  shall  be 
uniformly  distributed  in  all  or  at  least  in  alternate  courses,  not  less  than 
seven  and  one  half  inches  thick,  nor  less  than  four  inches  thicker  than  the 
remainder  of  the  facing,  and  constituting  not  less  than  twenty  per  cent  of  the 
area  of  the  wall. 

(f)  Brick,  stone  or  block  facing  may  be  considered  to  be  bonded  to  back- 
ing of  plain  or  reinforced  concrete  when  the  facing,  with  all  the  provisions 
for  bond  required  for  a  facing  backed  with  masonry,  is  laid  in  advance  of  the 
pouring  of  concrete,  and  the  concrete  is  poured  in  direct  contact  with  the 
facing,  embedding  the  header  brick  or  bonding  units. 

(g)  Masonry  walls  covered  with  a  veneer  not  bonded  to  the  wall  as  pro- 
vided for  a  facing  in  this  section  shall  be  considered  to  have  a  thickness  equal 
to  that  of  the  wall  exclusive  of  the  veneer. 

(h)  Hollow  walls  of  brick,  laid  with  every  alternate  brick  in  every  other 
course  on  each  side  of  the  wall  a  full  header,  or  any  equivalent  bond,  may  be 
used  where  walls  of  structural  clay  tile  may  be  used. 

[  1[As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  } 

JSect.  1408.  Lateral  Support  of  Masonry. —  (a)  Masonry  bearing 
walls,  exterior  walls,  and  other  masonry  walls,  which  depend  upon  inter- 
secting walls  for  lateral  support  shall  be  bonded  to  such  walls  at  intersections 
and  corners  by  having  each  unit  if  other  than  brick  alternately  overlap  by  at 
least  one  half  the  thickness  of  the  wall  at  the  intersection,  and  if  of  brick 
have  each  alternate  brick  overlap  by  half  the  length  of  the  brick,  or  a  group 
of  not  over  six  bricks  overlap  in  alternating  groups  at  least  half  the  thickness 
of  the  wall. 

(b)  Masonry  walls  which  depend  upon  anchorage  to  the  frame  of  a  build- 
ing for  lateral  support  shall  be  tied  to  the  frame  by  suitable  anchorage  ap- 
proved by  the  commissioner. 

(92) 


Sees.  1409=1411 

(c)  Exterior  and  bearing  walls  of  masonry  shall  be  anchored  to  the  floor 
and  roof  construction  as  specified  in  Part  16. 

[  JAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.  1409.  Masonry  Piers. — (a)  In  walls  with  openings  such  that 
the  portion  of  wall  between  openings  constitutes  a  pier,  such  portion  of  wall 
shall  be  computed  and  constructed  as  required  for  piers.  The  height  of 
such  a  pier,  with  a  continuous  wall  above  and  below  the  openings  shall  be 
taken  as  the  height  of  the  openings. 

(b)  When  the  clear  horizontal  distance  between  piers  in  masonry  walls 
exceeds  ten  feet  they  shall  be  considered  isolated  piers. 

(c)  Isolated  piers  shall  be  built  of  solid  units,  for  which  hollow  units 
filled  with  concrete  shall  not  be  substituted.  The  unsupported  height  of 
isolated  piers  shall  not  exceed  twelve  times  their  least  dimension. 

Sect.  1410.  Beam  Supports  on  Masonry  Walls. —  (a)  Joists,  beams 
and  other  structural  members  shall  not  bear  directly  on  hollow  walls  or  walls 
of  hollow  units,  but  shall  be  supported  on  a  sufficient  number  of  courses  of 
solid  units  or  equivalent  concrete  or  a  metal  plate  or  grillage  sufficient  to 
distribute  the  load  to  the  webs  and  shells  in  such  manner  as  not  to  exceed 
the  allowable  unit  stress. 

(b)  Where  structural  steel  beams  or  other  metal  members  frame  into 
exterior,  party,  fire  or  enclosure  walls  of  masonry,  the  ends  shall  have  pro- 
tection against  fire  of  the  rating  specified  for  the  wall.  Where  wooden  joists, 
beams  or  other  combustible  members  frame  into  such  walls  the  ends  shall  be 
separated  from  the  other  side  of  the  wall  and  from  members  framing  into  the 
other  side  of  the  wall  by  not  less  than  four  inches  of  masonry. 

*Sect.  1411.     Masonry    Chases,    Recesses,    Corbels    and    Lintels. — 

(a)  There  shall  be  no  chases  in  masonry  bearing  or  exterior  walls  eight 
inches  or  less  in  thickness  or  within  the  required  area  of  a  pier,  and  no  chase 
in  a  bearing,  exterior  or  fire  wall  or  pier  shall  reduce  the  thickness  thereof 
to  less  than  eight  inches.  No  horizontal  or  diagonal  chase  shall  be  allowed 
except  subject  to  the  limitations  and  conditions  provided  in  this  section  for 
recesses. 

(b)  Recesses  for  stairways,  elevators  or  other  purposes  may  be  made  in 
masonry  bearing,  or  exterior  walls,  but  in  no  case  shall  the  walls  at  such 
points  be  reduced  to  less  than  the  thickness  required  in  the  fourth  story. 
Such  walls  of  reduced  thickness  shall  have  such  additional  lateral  support 
as  may  be  necessary.  Recesses  in  masonry  bearing  or  exterior  walls  for 
radiators  and  similar  purposes,  shall  have  not  less  than  eight  inches  of  masonry 
at  the  back.  Such  recesses  shall  be  not  more  than  eight  feet  in  length  unless 
the  wall  at  the  back  may  be  considered  a  curtain  or  panel  wall,  and  they 
shall  then  be  arched  over  or  spanned  with  lintels. 

(c)  No  chases  or  recesses  shall  be  permitted  in  fire  or  party  walls  that  will 
reduce  the  thickness  below  the  minimum  specified  in  this  code. 

(d)  Chases  and  recesses  may  be  built  as  provided  in  this  section,  but 
shall  not  be  cut  in  masonry  walls  of  hollow  masonry  units  or  in  hollow  walls 
of  brick. 

(93) 


Sees.  1411=1412 

(e)  Chases  shall  be  fire-stopped  at  floor  and  ceiling  levels. 

(f)  Corbels  may  be  built  in  masonry  walls  to  furnish  bearing  for  floors 
or  roof  but  such  corbels  shall  not  project  from  the  face  of  the  wall  more  than 
one  fourth  the  thickness  of  the  wall  nor  more  than  one  fourth  the  height  of  the 
corbel.  Corbels  shall  be  built  with  solid  masonry  units  and  thoroughly 
bonded  to  the  wall.  No  corbel  in  a  masonry  wall  less  than  twelve  inches 
thick  shall  be  used  for  the  support  of  a  floor  or  roof. 

(g)  Chimneys  constructed  of  the  same  material  as  that  of  the  wall,  and 
lined  as  provided  in  Part  21,  may  be  supported  by  corbels  of  which  the 
projection  is  not  more  than  one  fourth  the  height  nor  more  than  the  thickness 
of  the  wall,  but  no  chimney  shall  be  supported  on  a  corbel  from  a  wall  less  than 
twelve  inches  thick. 

(h)  Openings  in  masonry  walls  for  doorways  and  windows  shall  have 
well  buttressed  arches  or  lintels  of  incombustible  material.  Structural  or 
reinforcing  steel  in  such  lintels  shall  have  protection  against  fire  of  the  rating 
required  for  the  wall,  but  not  less  than  two-hour  fire-resistive  protection; 
except  that  the  masonry  over  an  opening  may  be  supported  by  a  steel  plate, 
angle  or  similar  member  not  fireproofed  on  the  under  side,  if  the  width  of  the 
opening  does  not  exceed  six  feet  in  bearing  walls  and  ten  feet  in  non-bearing 
walls,  or  if  the  member  so  unprotected  is  itself  supported,  at  intervals  not 
exceeding  six  feet  in  bearing  walls  and  ten  feet  in  non-bearing  walls,  from  a 
beam  or  other  adequate  structure  which  has  the  required  protection. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4] 

fSect.   1412.     Masonry  Foundation  Walls. —  (a)     Masonry  foundation 
walls  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  for  foundations  of  Part  29. 

(b)  Sand  lime  brick,  gypsum  tile  and  cinder  concrete  poured  in  place 
shall  not  be  used  in  foundation  walls  nor  as  part  of  the  required  thickness 
thereof.  Wood  shall  not  be  used  in  the  foundations  of  permanent  structures 
except  as  provided  in  Part  29. 

(c)  Rough  or  random  rubble  stone  masonry  without  level  beds  shall  not 
be  used  for  foundation  walls  more  than  ten  feet  high  or  supporting  buildings 
more  than  forty-five  feet  high. 

(d)  Masonry  foundation  walls  shall  be  at  least  as  thick  as  the  wall  sup- 
ported, and  not  less  than  the  following  thickness: — ■ 

Minimum  Thickness  (Inches)  of  Masonry  Foundation  Walls. 

Concrete 8 

Solid  masonry  (except  rubble)  .        .        .        ...        .        .     .  8 

Hollow  masonry .12 

Rubble  masonry .        ...     20 

(e)  Foundation  walls  and  retaining  walls,  which  depend  upon  a  floor  or 
superimposed  structure  for  resistance  to  overturning  shall  not  be  back-filled 
until  so  supported  or  properly  shored  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  commissioner. 
Walls  damaged  by  premature  back-filling  shall  be  removed  and  replaced 
if  so  required  by  the  commissioner. 

(94) 


Sees.  1412-1415 

(f)  Masonry-foundation  walls  supporting  wood  shall  be  carried  at  least 
eight  inches  above  adjoining  ground  and  shall  be  effectually  sealed  to  prevent 
moisture  from  reaching  the  wood  through  capillary  action. 

(g)  Masonry  in  foundation  walls  shall  be  laid  in  cement  mortar  or  cement- 
lime  mortar. 

[  |As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.  1413.  Parapet  Walls.—  (a)  In  buildings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV 
or  Type  VI  construction  not  more  than  forty-five  feet  in  height,  party  walls 
and  fire  walls  shall  extend  through  the  roof  not  less  than  twelve  inches,  and  in 
such  buildings  more  than  forty-five  feet  in  height,  not  less  than  thirty  inches. 
Masonry  walls  extending  above  the  roof  shall  have  a  coping  of  incombustible 
material. 

(b)  In  such  buildings,  exterior  walls  required  by  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive, 
to  be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction  without  openings,  shall  extend 
above  the  roof,  as  provided  in  this  section  for  party  walls. 

JSect.  1414.  Use  of  Existing  Masonry  Walls. —  An  existing  masonry 
wall  may  be  used  in  the  construction  of  a  post-code  building  and  in  the  repair, 
alteration  or  enlargement  of  a  building  providing  it  meets  the  requirements  of 
this  code,  and  is  structurally  sound  or  can  be  made  so  by  reasonable  repairs. 
Existing  masonry  walls  which  are  structurally  sound  but  which  are  of  insuffi- 
cient thickness  for  their  proposed  use  shall  be  strengthened  by  an  addition  of 
similar  material  not  less  than  eight  inches  in  thickness  laid  in  mortar  of  re- 
quired proportions.  Foundations  and  lateral  supports  shall  be  provided  as 
required  for  newly  constructed  walls  under  similar  conditions.  Such  addi- 
tions or  linings  shall  be  thoroughly  bonded  to  the  existing  masonry  by  toothings 
bonded  with  the  new  masonry  and  built  solidly  into  openings  cut  in  the  old 
masonry  at  least  four  inches  deep.  Such  toothings  shall  be  distributed  uni- 
formly throughout  the  wall  and  shall  aggregate  in  vertical  cross-sectional  area 
not  less  than  fifteen  per  cent  of  the  total  vertical  area  of  the  wall  or  lining.  If 
the  existing  wall  is  covered  with  plaster  or  other  covering  that  might  impair 
the  bond  of  the  lining,  such  covering  shall  be  stripped  off  and  the  masonry 
cleaned.  The  repair,  lining,  or  other  strengthening  of  an  existing  masonry 
wall  to  be  used  in  the  construction  of  a  post-code  building  and  in  the  repair, 
alteration  or  enlargement  of  a  building  shall  be  in  every  respect  satisfactory  to 
the  commissioner  and  subject  to  such  conditions  as  he  may  in  any  case  pre- 
scribe. 

[  tAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.  1415.  Masonry  Veneer. —  (a)  Unbonded  masonry  veneer  may 
be  used  as  a  covering  for  a  wall  of  any  type  of  construction  with  or  without  air 
space.  It  shall  not  be  regarded  as  a  structural  part  of  the  wall  or  as  contribut- 
ing to  its  strength  or  stability,  but  it  may  serve  as  protection  from  the  weather 
and  where  built  without  hollows  or  air  spaces  it  may  serve  as  protection  for 
metal  against  fire.  Gypsum  shall  not  be  used  in  veneer  exposed  to  the 
weather. 

(b)  Masonry  veneer  shall  be  anchored  to  the  backing,  if  of  masonry,  by 
headers  or  bond  units,  built  at  least  three  and  one  half  inches  into  the  back- 
OS) 


Sees.  1415-1417 

ing,  uniformly  distributed,  and  having  an  area  at  least  one  fortieth  the  area 
of  the  wall,  or  by  approved  non-corrodible  metal  ties  spaced  not  further  apart 
than  one  foot,  or  three  times  the  thickness  of  the  veneer  except  that  masonry 
veneer  of  thin  flat  stones  on  edge  shall  be  anchored  every  twelve  inches  in  all 
horizontal  joints  by  non-corrodible  anchors  not  less  than  one  quarter  inch  in 
least  dimension  dowelled  at  least  one  inch  into  the  top  of  veneer  stones  and 
well  secured  to  the  backing. 

Sect.  1416.  Steel  Frame  Walls. —  (a)  Walls  framed  with  structural 
steel  may  be  used  for  any  of  the  functions  described  in  section  fourteen 
hundred  and  one. 

(b)  The  frames  of  exterior  steel  frame  bearing  walls  shall  have  fire  pro- 
tection of  the  rating  specified  for  the  exterior  bearing  walls  of  the  building 
according  to  its  type  of  construction  in  sections  one  hundred  and  twenty-six 
to  one  hundred  and  thirty,  inclusive,  of  Part  1  and  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive. 

(c)  The  frames  of  interior  steel  frame  bearing  walls  shall  have  fire  protec- 
tion as  required  for  structural  steel  columns  in  Parts  16  and  17. 

(d)  The  frames  of  steel  frame  party  walls  shall  have  four-hour  fire-resistive 
protection. 

(e)  The  frames  of  steel  frame  curtain  and  panel  walls  shall  have  fire  pro- 
tection of  the  rating  specified  for  such  walls  in  section  fourteen  hundred  and 
two  and  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive. 

(f)  The  frames  of  steel  frame  enclosure  and  fire  walls  shall  have  fire 
protection  of  the  rating  specified  for  the  walls  in  Parts  3  to  13  inclusive  and 
in  Part  15. 

(g)  The  steel  frames  of  walls  required  by  this  section  to  be  protected 
against  fire  shall  not  be  supported  upon  wood  or  other  combustible  material 
nor  upon  metal  with  less  protection  than  is  required  for  such  frames. 

(h)  The  frames  of  steel  frame  exterior  walls  and  other  walls  exposed  to 
moisture  shall  be  protected  from  rusting. 

(i)  Solid  or  hollow  non-bearing  partitions  of  steel  frame  and  plaster  shall 
have  a  total  thickness  not  less  than  one  sixtieth  the  height  between  lateral 
supports,  nor  less  than  two  inches.  The  plaster  of  hollow  partitions  shall  be 
not  less  than  three  quarters  inch  thick.  Vertical  steel  frame  members  shall  be 
at  least  equivalent  to  twenty-four  gage  steel  channels  of  a  depth  not  less  than 
half  the  thickness  of  the  partition  spaced  not  over  twenty-four  inches  on 
centers. 

(j)  Except  as  otherwise  specified  in  this  section  steel  frame  bearing  or 
non-bearing  walls  may  have  frames  of  unprotected  steel  and  panels  of  incom- 
bustible materials.  Steel  frame  walls,  bearing  or  non-bearing,  with  panels  of 
combustible  materials,  may  be  used  only  where  wooden  frame  walls  are 
allowed  by  this  code,  except  that  in  buildings  of  Type  V,  unprotected  steel 
frame  walls  may  have  panels  containing  a  layer  of  combustible  insulating 
material  between  sheets  of  steel  or  equally  protective  covering. 

*Sect.  1417.  Wooden  Frame  Walls. —  (a)  Wooden  frame  walls  shall 
not  be  used  for  exterior  walls  except  in  buildings  of  Type  VI  construction  nor 
for  interior  bearing  walls  except  in  buildings  of  Type  IV  or  Type  VI  con- 

(96) 


Sec.   1417 

struction.  Wooden  frame  walls  shall  not  be  used  for  party  walls,  fire  walls, 
enclosure  walls  required  to  have  greater  than  one-hour  fire  resistance,  nor 
for  walls  where  incombustible  materials  are  specified.  Wooden  frame  walls 
shall  not  be  used  for  foundation  walls,  nor  for  bearing  partitions  in  basements 
or  cellars. 

(b)  Non-bearing  wooden  frame  partitions  may  be  used  in  buildings  of 
Type  I,  Type  II,  and  Type  V,  in  occupancy  of  Group  F  and  Group  G  only, 
solely  for  the  purpose  of  sub-dividing  space  occupied  by  one  tenant,  provided 
that  the  space  so  divided  shall  be  separated  from  any  other  tenant  in  the 
same  story  by  partitions  of  fire-resistive  quality  as  required  by  the  particular 
conditions. 

Non-bearing  wooden  stud  partitions  covered  on  both  sides  with  three 
quarter  inch  thick  plaster  on  incombustible  lath  may  be  used  in  buildings  of 
Type  I  and  Type  II  for  Groups  H  and  J  occupancy,  solely  for  the  purpose  of 
sub-dividing  apartments  or  similar  space  occupied  by  one  tenant,  provided 
that  such  partitions  shall  not  exceed  five  hundred  lineal  feet  within  a  single 
floor  area,  separated  from  the  rest  of  the  story  by  partitions  of  fire-resistive 
quality  as  required  for  the  particular  conditions. 

Nothing  in  this  paragraph  shall  be  construed  to  allow  wooden  frame 
partitions  in  Type  I,  Type  II,  and  Type  V  buildings  where  fire-resistive 
partitions  of  other  materials  for  egress,  enclosures  or  vertical  openings,  or 
separations  are  required  elsewhere  in  this  code. 

(c)  Wooden  frame  exterior  walls  shall  have  posts,  sills,  and  girts  not 
smaller  than  three  and  five  eighths  by  five  and  five  eighths  inches.  When  the 
studs  are  continuous  throughout  two  stories  they  shall  be  of  one  piece,  the  girts 
shall  be  replaced  by  a  ledger  board  not  less  than  fifteen  sixteenths  by  five  and 
five  eighths  inches  housed  into  the  studs.  Studs  shall  be  no  smaller  than  one 
and  five  eighths  by  three  and  five  eighths  inches.  Dimensions  of  members  in 
this  paragraph  are  actual  net  dimensions. 

Posts  shall  be  well  braced  the  full  story  height,  and  walls  shall  be  framed  to 
them  by  a  stud-sized  brace  attached  to  the  post  just  below  the  girt  and  running 
in  the  wall  at  an  angle  not  more  than  sixty  degrees  from  the  vertical,  attached 
at  the  other  end  to  the  girt  or  sill.  These  braces  shall  be  horizontally  braced 
at  the  corner  post  at  least  once  in  each  story,  and  the  studs  which  they  inter- 
sect shall  be  well  fastened  above  and  below  the  brace.  Posts  and  girts 
shall  be  mortised,  tenoned,  and  pinned  at  each  floor  level  or  connected  by 
approved  metal  fasteners  which  provide  equal  rigidity.  The  tenons  shall  be 
not  less  than  one  inch  in  thickness  and  the  full  height  of  the  girt. 

Where  a  ledger  board  replaced  a  full  girt  the  space  behind  the  ledger  board 
shall  be  fire  stopped  with  at  least  one  and  five  eighths  inch  lumber  cut  between 
the  studs.  In  wooden  stud  exterior  bearing  walls  more  than  one  story  high? 
the  studs  shall  be  not  over  sixteen  inches  apart  on  centers,  and  shall  be  bridged 
at  least  once  at  mid-height.  In  one  story  walls  studs  shall  be  spaced  not  over 
twenty  inches  apart  on  centers,  and  need  not  be  bridged.  At  intersections, 
between  such  walls  and  interior  partitions,  studs  shall  be  well  blocked,  making 
what  is  commonly  known  as  solid  corners.     Wall  plates  shall  consist,  either 

(97) 


Sec.  1417 

of  two  layers  of  wood  not  less  than  one  and  five  eighths  by  three  and  five  eighths 
inches,  each,  or  of  one  layer  of  wood  not  less  than  three  and  five  eighths  by 
three  and  five  eighths  inches.  At  openings  in  bearing  walls,  studs  shall  be 
doubled  or  have  a  minimum  section  of  three  and  five  eighths  by  three  and 
five  eighths  inches  and  the  heads  of  openings  shall  be  trussed. 

Posts  in  one  and  two  story  walls  shall  be  in  one  piece  — ■  in  three  stories  they 
may  be  spliced  once  in  their  length,  just  above  the  second  or  third  floor  girt. 
Girts  and  caps  may  be  spliced  not  oftener  than  once  in  twelve  feet.  Such 
splices  shall  be  made  by  halving  the  piece  of  wood  with  a  lap  of  at  least  eight 
inches.  The  lap  shall  be  securely  pinned  or  spiked.  In  two-piece  caps  the 
minimum  length  of  pieces  shall  be  the  full  length  of  the  wall  or  twelve  feet. 
Joints  shall  be  broken  with  at  least  twelve  inches  overlap.  If  studs  are 
spaced  farther  apart  than  indicated  in  this  paragraph  they  shall  be  classed  as 
wooden  columns,  girts  and  caps  framing  on  them  shall  be  classed  as  wooden 
beams,  and  they  shall  all  meet  the  requirements  of  section  twenty-five  hundred 
and  five  and  twenty-five  hundred  and  six. 

(d)  Wooden  stud  bearing  partitions  shall  have  studs  not  less  than  one  and 
five  eighths  by  three  and  five  eighths  inches  supported  upon  a  girder  or  upon  a 
sole  plate  not  less  than  one  and  five  eighths  inches  thick.  The  partition  plate 
shall  be  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  thick.  Studs  of  a  partition 
in  an  upper  story  over  a  partition  below  shall  rest  upon  the  plate  of  the  lower 
partition  and  not  upon  the  ends  of  the  floor  beams.  Studs  of  wooden  frame 
bearing  partitions  shall  be  bridged  at  least  once  at  mid-height  and  studs 
supporting  a  floor  shall  be  not  more  than  sixteen  inches  apart  on  centers. 
Studs  shall  be  doubled  beside  openings  in  partitions,  and  the  heads  of  such 
openings  shall  be  trussed  or  framed  sufficiently  heavy  to  carry  the  load. 
Wooden  stud  bearing  partitions  shall  not  be  used  to  support  more  than  a  roof 
and  three  floors  and  in  buildings  three  stories  or  more  in  height  shall  have 
one-hour  fire-resistive  rating.  If  studs  are  spaced  farther  apart  than  indicated 
in  this  paragraph,  they  shall  be  classed  as  wooden  columns  and  the  caps  over 
them  shall  be  classed  as  wooden  beams  and  they  shall  both  meet  the  require- 
ments of  sections  twenty-five  hundred  and  five  and  twenty-five  hundred  and 
six  unless  in  the  category  of  the  following:  In  one  story  habitations,  where 
height  from  sill  to  plate  does  not  exceed  nine  feet,  the  studs  may  be  one  and 
five  eighths  by  two  and  five  eighths  inches,  plate  may  be  two  pieces  of  one  and 
five  eighths  by  two  and  five  eighths  inches  or  one  piece  of  two  and  five  eighths 
by  three  and  five  eighths  inches,  sills  may  be  two  and  five  eighths  by  five  and 
five  eighths  inches  and  corner  posts  may  be  blocked  studs. 

(e)  Hollow  wooden  frame  walls  and  partitions  shall  be  firestopped  at 
floor  and  ceiling  levels.  Bearing  partitions  shall  be  firestopped  the  full  height 
between  ceiling  and  floor  above.  Firestopping  shall  consist  of  incombustible 
materials  or  of  wood  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  thick. 

(f)  Exterior  wooden  frame  bearing  walls  shall  be  covered  on  the  outside 
with  wood  boarding  nailed  to  the  studs  or  with  other  approved  material 
equally  effective  in  stiffening  the  frame  of  the  building.  Boards  shall  be  not 
less  than  three  quarters  inch  thick  unless  a  weather  boarding  is  used,  in  which 
case  it  shall  have  an  average  thickness  of  at  least  five  eighths  inch.    Each 

(98) 


Sec.  1417 

board  shall  have  at  least  two  nails  to  each  stud.  Stucco,  masonry  veneer 
and  any  material  composed  principally  of  gypsum  shall  not  be  considered  a 
satisfactorjr  substitute  for  boarding  on  exterior  wooden  frame  walls. 

(g)  Any  other  style  of  wall  construction  which  provides  stability,  rigidity 
and  fire-resistance  equal  to  that  of  the  walls  specified  in  this  section,  as  dis- 
closed in  tests  prescribed  by  the  commissioner  and  satisfactorily  passed,  may 
be  used  where  wooden  frame  walls  are  allowed. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4,  Orel  1953,  ch.  7,  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2  ] 


(99) 


Sees.  1501-1502 


PART    15. 
PROTECTION  OF  VERTICAL  OPENINGS. 

Section 

1501  — Protection  of  Vertical  Openings. 

1502  — Trap  Doors. 

1503  —  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. 

1504  —  Floor  Construction  within  Enclosures. 

1505  —  Openings  for  Ventilation  in  Ventilating  Shafts. 

1506  — Ventilating  Ducts. 

1507  —  Use  of  Enclosures. 

*Section  1501.  Protection  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)  Where 
an  opening  in  only  one  floor  is  required  to  be  enclosed  by  provisions  of  Parts  3 
to  12,  inclusive,  or  by  Part  18,  it  shall  be  enclosed  either  in  the  story  above 
or  in  the  story  below,  or  protected  by  a  trap  door  in  such  manner  as  to  resist 
the  spread  of  fire  from  one  story  to  the  other.  Where  a  series  of  openings  in 
two  or  more  floors,  required  to  be  enclosed,  are  enclosed  in  one  shaft,  they 
shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories.  A  required  exit  shall  not  be  closed  by  a  trap 
door,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  Part  18.  The  exterior  walls  of  buildings 
are  excluded  from  the  provisions  of  this  part,  except  as  specifically  provided 
in  section  fifteen  hundred  and  three. 

(b)  Openings  in  floors  which  are  not  provided  with  trap  doors  and  are 
not  enclosed  in  the  story  above,  shall  be  protected  by  an  adequate  railing 
at  least  thirty  inches  high.  Openings  in  roofs,  unless  covered  by  trap  doors 
or  skylights,  shall  be  protected  by  an  adequate  railing  or  parapet  at  least 
thirty  inches  high. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4] 

*Sect.  1502.  Trap  Doors. —  (a)  A  trap  door  in  a  floor  or  roof  shall 
be  able  to  support  its  own  weight  and  a  concentrated  load  of  two  hundred 
pounds;  and  unless  protected  by  a  curb  not  less  than  six  inches  high  or  by  a 
railing,  shall  be  able  to  support  a  live  load  equal  to  that  of  the  floor  or  roof 
in  which  it  is  placed.  The  requirements  of  this  section  shall  not  apply  to 
stage  construction  in  a  theatre.  A  trap  door  in  a  floor  shall  be  arranged  to 
close  automatically  in  case  of  fire  in  a  manner  satisfactory  to  the  commissioner. 

(b)  In  buildings  of  Type  I  and  Type  II  construction  a  trap  door  shall 
not  exceed  six  feet  in  either  dimension,  and  shall  have  fire  resistance  equiva- 
lent to  that  of  a  Class  A  fire  door  as  specified  in  Part  22. 

(c)  In  buildings  of  a  type  of  construction  other  than  Type  I  or  Type  II, 
trap  doors  shall  be  of  the  construction  required  for  the  floor  or  roof,  except 
that  a  trap  door  in  a  ceiling  required  to  have  fire  resistance  shall  be  equivalent 
in  fire  resistance  to  a  Class  A  fire  door  as  specified  in  Part  22  and  shall  not 
exceed  six  feet  in  either  dimension. 

(d)  The  commissioner  may  waive  in  part  or  modify  the  requirements  of 
this  section  for  protection  of  openings  less  than  four  square  feet  in  area  subject 
to  such  conditions  as  he  shall  in  each  case  specify. 

(100) 


Sec.  1503 

*Sect.  1503.  Enclosure  of  Vertical  Openings. —  (a)  In  buildings 
of  Type  I,  Type  II  or  Type  III  construction,  the  required  enclosure  of  a 
floor  opening  shall  have  two-hour  fire-resistive  rating. 

(b)  In  buildings  of  Type  IV  construction,  except  as  otherwise  provided 
in  this  section,  the  required  enclosure  of  a  floor  opening  shall  have  not  less 
than  one-hour  fire-resistive  rating.  In  such  buildings  four  stories  or  more 
in  height  and  in  such  buildings  three  stories  in  height  other  than  of  Group  H 
or  Group  I  occupancy,  such  enclosures  shall  also  be  of  incombustible  ma- 
terials. In  buildings  of  Type  IV  construction  more  than  three  stories  high 
an  enclosure  about  both  stairs  and  elevator  shall  have  not  less  than  two-hour 
fire-resistive  rating. 

(c)  In  buildings  of  Type  V  construction  floor  openings,  if  enclosed,  shall 
be  enclosed  with  incombustible  materials. 

(d)  In  buildings  of  Type  VI  construction,  except  as  otherwise  provided 
in  this  section,  the  enclosure  of  a  floor  opening  where  required,  shall  have 
not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  rating,  and  this  provision  shall  apply 
to  the  inside  face  of  that  portion  of  an  exterior  wall  which  forms  part  of  such 
an  enclosure  as  well  as  to  an  interior  wall. 

(e)  Combustible  wainscoting,  insulating  or  acoustical  material  may  be 
attached  to  the  walls  of  enclosures  provided  for  in  this  section,  but  not  within 
the  enclosure,  as  specified  in  Part  14. 

(f)  Doorways  in  enclosures  only  about  passenger  elevators  shall  be  pro- 
tected by  Class  C  fire  doors  or  doors  of  incombustible  materials  in  which 
glass  shall  be  wire  glass.  Doorways  in  other  enclosures  of  vertical  openings 
shall  be  protected,  in  enclosures  required  to  have  two-hour  fire-resistive  rating 
by  Class  B  fire  doors  and  in  enclosures  required  to  have  one-hour  rating  by 
Class  C  fire  doors,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive. 
Window  openings  in  required  enclosures  shall  be  protected  by  fire  windows. 
Openings  for  ventilation  in  required  enclosures  shall  be  protected  as  pro- 
vided in  section  fifteen  hundred  and  five.  Other  openings  in  required  en- 
closures shall  be  protected  as  the  commissioner  shall  in  each  case  specify. 

(g)  In  required  enclosures  of  floor  openings,  fire  windows  shall  be  fixed  or 
automatic-closing;  doors  shall  be  self-closing  or  automatic-closing,  except 
access  doors  for  repairs  which  shall  be  kept  closed  and  locked,  and  except 
doors  in  enclosures  only  about  passenger  elevators. 

(h)  The  enclosure  of  chutes  and  dumb-waiters  not  exceeding  four  square 
feet  in  area  need  not  have  fire-resistive  protection  if  constructed  of  metal 
not  thinner  than  sixteen  gauge  if  in  Type  I,  Type  II,  or  Type  V  construction. 
If  in  Type  III,  Type  IV,  or  Type  VI  construction  they  shall  be  protected  by 
not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  enclosure  and  Class  B  automatic-clos- 
ing doors. 

(i)  Every  elevator  shaft  and  stairway  enclosure,  except  dumb-waiter 
enclosures  and  enclosures  in  the  interior  of  a  building  which  do  not  serve  the 
top  story,  shall  be  ventilated  at  the  top  by  an  opening  to  the  outside  air 
not  less  in  area  than  one  per  cent  of  the  area  of  the  shaft.  In  addition,  each 
such  shaft  shall  have  at  the  top  means  for  emergency  ventilation  in  the  form 

(101) 


Sees.  1 §03=1506 

of  windows  or  sk}'lights  with  thin  plain  glass,  with  metal  screen  beneath, 
or  wire  glass,  or  in  other  approved  form,  not  less  in  area  than  one  quarter  the 
area  of  the  shaft. 

[  *As  amended  by  Orel.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.  1504.  Floor  Construction  within  Enclosures. —  Where  the 
enclosure  of  floor  openings  is  required  by  the  provisions  of  Parts  3  to  12,  inclu- 
sive, or  of  this  part  to  be  of  a  construction  more  fire-resistive  than  the  floors 
of, the  buildings  or  where  such  enclosure  is  required  to  be  of  incombustible 
materials,  any  portion  of  a  floor  of  the  building  which  shall  form  part  of  the 
enclosure,  as  when  the  walls  thereof  are  offset,  in  successive  stories,  shall  be 
of  materials  and  construction  equivalent  in  fire  resistance  to  that  required 
for  the  walls. 

fSect.   1505.     Openings    for    Ventilation    in    Ventilating    Shafts. — 

(a)  Openings  for  ventilating  purposes  in  enclosures,  larger  than  one  square 
foot  in  area,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section  shall  be  protected 
in  one  of  the  six  following  methods : — 

(1)  Louvres  or  dampers,  which  shall  close  by  gravity  or  be  held  open 
by  a  fusible  link  so  placed  as  to  permit  them  to  close  in  the  case  of  fire. 

(2)  Openings  into  a  shaft  or  duct  used  exclusively  to  exhaust  the  air 
from  two  or  more  stories  may  be  protected  by  louvres  of  incombustible 
material  which  close  by  gravity,  like  a  check  valve,  to  prevent  reversal 
of  the  air  current. 

(3)  Openings  into  a  shaft  or  duct  used  exclusively  to  supply  air  to  two 
or  more  stories  of  a  building  may  be  protected  by  louvres  which  close  by 
gravit}r,  like  a  check  valve,  to  prevent  reversal  of  the  air  current. 

(4)  Openings  in  a  ventilating  shaft,  connected  with  branch  ducts  at 
least  as  long  as  twelve  times  the  larger  transverse  dimension  of  the  duct 
need  not  have  additional  protection. 

(5)  An  opening  for  ventilating  exhaust  in  a  shaft  enclosure  when 
connected  to  a  duct  without  openings  in  other  stories,  leading  to  a  point 
above  the  roof  level,  need  not  have  the  protection  of  automatic-closing 
louvres  or  dampers. 

(6)  An  opening  for  the  supply  of  air  to  a  ventilated  space  which  is 
connected  by  means  of  a  duct  without  openings  in  other  stories  to  a  fan, 
plenum  chamber  or  other  source  of  air  supply,  need  not  have  the  protection 
of  automatically  closing  louvres  or  dampers. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943.  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.  1506.  Ventilating  Ducts. —  (a)  Ventilating  ducts  in  all  buildings 
shall  be  of  incombustible  materials,  but  may  be  lined  with  fibrous  insulating 
or  sound  deadening  material  which  has  been  chemically  treated,  if  necessary, 
so  that  it  will  not  by  itself  support  combustion.  Horizontal  offsets  of  vertical 
ducts  shall  be  protected  in  Type  I  and  Type  II  buildings  by  at  least  one-hour 
fire-resistive  construction  of  incombustible  materials. 

( b)  The  combustible  material  of  partitions  and  floors  through  which  sheet 
metal  ventilating  ducts  pass  shall  be  kept  at  least  one  inch  from  the  metal  or  be 

(102) 


Sees.  1506=1507 

protected  by  not  less  than  one  half  inch  of  plaster  or  one  quarter  inch  of 
asbestos  board  or  other  incombustible  material  of  equal  insulating  value. 
Openings  between  sheet  metal  ventilating  ducts  and  combustible  floor  con- 
struction through  which  they  pass  shall  be  fire  stopped  with  incombustible 
material. 

Sect.  1507.  Use  of  Enclosures.  Except  as  otherwise  specifically  pro= 
vided,  no  limitation  is  imposed  in  this  chapter  upon  the  shape  or  size  of  the 
enclosure  in  any  story  of  a  vertical  opening,  but  the  area  within  a  stairway 
shall  not  be  used  for  storage  or  manufacturing,  or  within  any  enclosure  for 
other  than  the  purpose  or  purposes  for  which  the  vertical  opening  was  con- 
structed, but  this  provision  shall  not  be  held  to  prevent  the  placing  of  electrical 
cabinets,  piping,  fire  extinguishing  apparatus  and  the  like,  in  vertical  enclosures 
in  such  manner  as  shall  not  interfere  with  its  required  use.  A  corridor  serving 
as  a  passageway  to  two  remote  exits  from  a  story  shall  be  separated  from  such 
exits,  if  enclosed,  by  the  enclosure  thereof. 


(103) 


Sees,  1601=1602 


PART    16. 

FLOOR   CONSTRUCTION. 

Section 

1601  —  Floor  Construction. 

1602  —  Type  I:  Fireproof  Floor  Construction. 

1603  — Type  II:  Semi=Fireproof  Floor  Construction. 

1604  —  Type  III :  Heavy  Timber  Floor  Construction. 

1605  —  Type  IV:  Light  Wooden  Floor  Construction. 

1606  —  Type  V:  Metal  Frame  Floor  Construction. 

1607  —  Type  VI:  Wooden  Frame  Floor  Construction. 

1608  —  Ratproofing. 

Section  1601.  Floor  Construction. —  The  floor  construction  in  all 
buildings  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  other  chapters  of  this  code  as 
to  structural  design,  quality  and  strength  of  materials.  Floors  shall  be  so 
constructed  as  to  afford  to  walls,  columns,  piers,  beams  and  other  supporting 
members  the  lateral  support  which  is  required  for  their  stability. 

*Sect.     1602.     Type     I:     Fireproof     Floor     Construction. —  (a)      In 

buildings  of  Type  I  construction  the  floors  shall  be  of  steel,  reinforced  concrete, 
brick  or  structural  clay  tile  arches,  reinforced  gypsum,  or  of  combinations  of 
these  materials  or  other  approved  system  of  floor  construction,  and  shall  be 
of  not  less  than  three-hour  fire-resistive  construction  as  provided  in  Part  22. 
Floor  beams  which  are  spaced  not  further  apart  than  half  the  spacing  of 
columns,  including  in  this  case  those  connected  to  columns,  may  be  considered 
as  a  part  of  the  floor  and  not  of  the  building  frame  for  purposes  of  this  section. 

(b)  In  buildings  of  Type  I  construction  columns  and  framing  supporting 
floors,  where  they  are  not  supported  on  masonry  walls  or  piers,  and  such  mem- 
bers of  the  floor  framing  as  are  connected  to  columns  or  necessary  for  the 
stability  of  columns,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section,  shall  be  of 
structural  steel  protected  by  not  less  than  four-hour  fire-resistive  protection 
or  of  reinforced  concrete  the  reinforcement  of  which  is  so  protected,  except 
that  fire  protection  need  not  be  provided  on  steel  or  iron  forms,  on  lintels  not 
more  than  six  feet  in  span  in  bearing  masonry  walls  and  not  more  than  ten  feet 
in  span  in  non-bearing  masonry  walls,  on  supports  for  elevator  guides  and 
elevator  machines  except  where  they  support  other  loads  or  brace  the  floor 
framing,  on  the  metal  framing  of  mezzanine  floors  which  may  be  of  wood  as 
specified  in  this  section,  or  on  the  landings  of  enclosed  stairways. 

(c)  Floors  in  Type  I  buildings  may  be  covered  with  wood  or  other  com" 
bustible  flooring.  Where  wooden  sleepers  are  used  for  laying  wooden  floors  the 
space  between  the  structural  floor  and  the  flooring  shall  be  filled  solidly  with 
incombustible  material  under  corridor  and  permanent  partitions  and  else- 
where on  continuous  lines  for  at  least  a  foot  in  width  in  such  manner  that  there 
will  be  no  hollow  spaces  under  the  flooring  exceeding  one  thousand  square  feet 

(104) 


Sees.  1602-1603 

in  area.  Wooden  flooring  shall  not  underlie  enclosure  or  toilet  room  parti- 
tions, nor  masonry  partitions. 

(d)  Mezzanine  floors  in  Type  I  buildings  may  be  of  wood  or  unprotected 
metal  provided  there  are  not  more  than  two  such  mezzanines  in  any  one  room, 
the  total  area  of  the  mezzanines  does  not  exceed  one  third  the  area  of  the  room 
or  five  hundred  square  feet,  and  one  is  not  above  the  other. 

(e)  The  fire  protective  material  required  for  structural  steel  shall  prefer- 
ably be  applied  directly  to  the  metal  but  structural  steel  members  enclosed  in 
spaces  not  over  five  thousand  square  feet  in  horizontal  area,  which  are  pro- 
tected above,  below  and  on  all  sides  by  ceilings,  floors  and  walls  of  four-hour 
fire-resistive  construction  and  are  unoccupied  and  inaccessible  except  in 
emergency,  need  not  have  other  fire  protection. 

(f)  Ceilings  in  Type  I  buildings  may  be  finished  in  wood  or  other  combus- 
tible but  not  highly  flammable  material  for  ornamental,  insulating,  acoustical 
or  similar  purposes.  Such  material,  with  similar  materials  on  walls  and 
partitions,  shall  not  exceed  ten  pounds  per  square  foot  of  floor  area  enclosed 
by  exterior  walls  and  partitions  of  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  nor  a 
total  of  five  thousand  pounds  if  said  floor  space  is  enclosed  in  exterior  walls 
and  partitions  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction.  Such  materials  shall 
be  backed  up  by  three-quarter  inch  plaster  or  equivalent  fire-resistive  material. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

fSect.  1603,     Type  II:  Semi=Fireproof  Floor  Construction. —  (a)     In 

buildings  of  Type  II  construction  the  floors  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials 
and  structural  metal  shall  have  one-hour  fire-resistive  protection.  Floor 
beams  which  are  spaced  not  further  apart  than  half  the  spacing  of  columns, 
including  in  this  case  those  connected  to  columns,  may  be  considered  as  a 
part  of  the  floor  and  not  of  the  building  frame  for  purposes  of  this  section. 

(b)  In  buildings  of  Type  II  construction  columns  and  framing  supporting 
floors,  where  they  are  not  supported  on  masonry  walls  or  piers,  and  such 
members  of  the  floor  frame  as  are  connected  to  columns  or  necessary  for 
the  stability  of  columns,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section,  shall 
be  of  structural  steel  protected  by  not  less  than  two-hour  fire-resistive  pro- 
tection or  of  reinforced  concrete  the  reinforcement  of  which  is  so  protected, 
except  that  fire  protection  need  not  be  provided  on  steel  or  iron  forms,  on 
lintels  not  more  than  six  feet  in  span  in  masonry  bearing  walls  and  not  more 
than  ten  feet  in  span  in  non-bearing  masonry  walls,  on  supports  for  elevator 
guides  or  elevator  machines  except  where  they  support  other  loads  or  brace 
the  floor  framing,  or  on  the  landings  of  enclosed  stairways. 

(c)  Floors  in  Type  II  buildings  may  be  covered  with  wood  or  other  com- 
bustible flooring  as  provided  in  section  sixteen  hundred  and  two  for  Type  I 
buildings. 

(d)  The  fire  protective  material  required  for  structural  steel  shall  prefer- 
ably be  applied  directly  to  the  metal  but  structural  steel  members  enclosed 
in  spaces  not  over  three  thousand  square  feet  in  horizontal  area,  which  are 
protected  above,  below  and  on  all  sides  by  ceilings,  floors  and  walls  of  two- 
hour  fire-resistive  construction,  and  are  unoccupied  and  inaccessible  except 
in  emergency,  need  not  have  other  fire  protection. 

(105) 


Sees.  1603-1604 

(e)  Floor  construction  which  consists  of  steel  or  other  incombustible 
beams  or  joists,  spaced  not  more  than  the  thirty-six  inches  on  centers,  sup- 
porting a  floor  of  reinforced  concrete,  steel  plate  or  other  incombustible 
materials,  and  protected  on  the  under  side  by  an  incombustible  ceiling  of  one- 
hour  fire-resistive  construction  shall  be  considered  as  meeting  the  require- 
ments of  this  section.  Enclosed  spaces  formed  by  such  a  ceiling  shall  not 
exceed  five  hundred  square  feet  in  horizontal  area  within  incombustible  fire 
stops  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 

(f)  Ceilings  in  Type  II  buildings  may  be  finished  in  wood  or  other  com- 
bustible but  not  highly  flammable  material  for  ornamental,  insulating, 
acoustical  or  similar  purposes.  Such  material,  with  similar  materials  on  walls 
and  partitions,  shall  not  exceed  ten  pounds  per  square  foot  of  floor  space 
enclosed  with  exterior  walls,  ceilings  of  three-hour  fire-resistive  incombustible 
construction,  and  partitions  of  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction,  nor  six 
pounds  per  square  foot  of  floor  space  enclosed  by  exterior  walls  and  par- 
titions of  one-hour  fire-resistive  incombustible  construction  or  a  total  of 
three  thousand  pounds.  Such  material  shall  be  backed  up  by  three  quarters 
inch  plaster  or  equivalent  fire-resistive  material. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Orel.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.    1604.     Type    III:     Heavy   Timber   Floor   Construction. —  (a) 

In  buildings  of  Type  III  construction  the  floor  planking,  if  of  wood,  shall 
be  not  less  than  one  and  five  eighths  inches  thick,  tongued  and  grooved  or 
splined,  and  fire-stopped  by  a  continuous  layer  of  asbestos  fabric  or  other 
approved  fire-resistive  material,  covered  with  wooden  flooring  not  less  than 
three  quarters  inch  thick,  or  equivalent  protective  flooring.  Enclosed  or 
concealed  spaces  shall  be  avoided. 

(b)  Laminated  floor  construction  consisting  of  lumber  not  less  than  one 
and  one  half  inches  nor  more  than  three  inches  thick  placed  on  edge,  and 
securely  spiked  together,  making  a  floor  not  less  than  three  and  one  half 
inches  thick,  may  be  used  in  place  of  planking. 

(c)  Floor  beams  in  buildings  of  Type  III  construction,  except  as  otherwise 
provided  in  this  section,  shall  be  of  structural  timber  not  less  than  five 
inches  in  least  dimension  nor  less  than  forty  square  inches  in  cross-sectional 
area,  but  this  limitation  shall  not  apply  to  nailing  strips  supported  on  masonry, 
structural  steel  or  the  like. 

(d)  Columns  supporting  floors  in  buildings  of  Type  III  construction  shall 
be  of  structural  timber  not  less  than  seven  inches  in  least  dimensions  or  of 
steel  protected  as  specified  in  this  section.  Column  caps  for  the  support  of 
beams  and  girders  shall  be  of  cast  iron,  steel  or  reinforced  concrete,  except 
that  wooden  bolsters  may  be  used  on  columns  supporting  not  more  than  a 
roof  and  one  floor.  Columns  shall  not  rest  upon  the  ends  of  wooden  beams. 
Wood  shall  not  be  used  for  columns  in  basements  or  cellars. 

(e)  The  metal  of  steel  column  caps  or  of  stirrups  supporting  beams  or 
girders  shall  not  be  thinner  than  three  sixteenths  inch  nor  shall  that  of  cast 
iron  caps  be  thinner  than  one  half  inch. 

(f)  Timbers  supported  on  masonry  walls  shall  be  bevelled  so  that  they 
may  fall  free  of  the  wall  in  case  of  fire. 

(106) 


Sees.  1604=1607 

(g)  Structural  steel  I-beams  or  columns  of  H  section  may  be  used  instead 
of  timber  provided  they  are  fireproofed  by  filling  the  space  between  flanges 
solidly  with  concrete  or  masonry  held  in  place  by  ties  through  or  secured  to 
the  web,  or  by  enclosing  the  exposed  faces  in  one-hour  fire-resistive  protection. 
Other  structural  steel  shapes  may  be  used  for  beams  or  columns,  protected 
by  one-hour  fire-resistive  protection.  Standard  weight  steel  pipe  filled  with 
concrete  may  be  used  for  columns  in  buildings  of  Type  III  construction. 

(h)  Floors  shall  be  anchored  to  exterior  and  bearing  walls  and  the  beams 
thereof  shall  be  connected  to  form  continuous  ties  from  wall  to  wall  sufficient 
to  resist  the  wind  pressure  specified  in  Part  23  applied  outwardly  to  the  walls. 

(i)  Structural  masonry  and  reinforced  concrete  shall  not  be  supported 
upon  wooden  floor  constructions,  but  this  restriction  shall  not  apply  to  fire- 
stopping,  the  protective  foundations  under  heat-producing  apparatus  or  to 
tile  or  concrete  flooring  with  its  base  not  more  than  four  inches  in  total  thick- 
ness, laid  upon  the  planking. 

*Sect.  1605.    Type   IV:  Light  Wooden   Floor  Construction. — (a)    In 

buildings  of  Type  IV  construction  the  floors  may  be  of  wood  unprotected 
against  fire.  Floor  beams  and  joists  of  wood  shall  not  be  less  than  one  and 
five  eighths  inches  thick.  Where  joists  frame  on  a  girder  or  bearing  partition 
on  both  sides  thereof,  the  spaces  between  the  joists  shall  be  fire-stopped 
with  incombustible  materials  or  with  wood  not  less  than  one  and  one  half 
inches  thick. 

(b)  Floors  may  be  supported  upon  the  masonry  walls  of  the  building  or 
upon  wooden  columns  or  bearing  partitions.  Structural  steel  beams,  steel  or 
iron  columns  without  protection  against  fire,  reinforced  concrete  or  other 
approved  materials  may  be  used  in  the  floor  framing  or  for  its  support.  Wood 
shall  not  be  used  for  columns  or  bearing  partitions  in  basements  or  cellars. 

(c)  Timbers  supported  on  masonry  walls  shall  be  bevelled  so  that  they 
may  fall  free  of  the  wall  in  case  of  fire. 

(d)  Floors  shall  be  anchored  to  exterior  and  bearing  walls  and  the  beams 
thereof  shall  be  connected  to  form  continuous  ties  from  wall  to  wall  sufficient 
to  resist  the  wind  pressure  specified  in  Part  23  applied  outwardly  to  the  walls. 

(e)  Structural  masonry  and  reinforced  concrete  shall  not  be  supported 
upon  wooden  floor  construction,  but  this  restriction  shall  not  apply  to  fire- 
stopping,  the  protective  foundations  under  heat-producing  apparatus  or  to 
tile  or  concrete  flooring  with  its  base  not  more  than  four  inches  in  total  thick- 
ness, laid  upon  the  boarding. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  4  ] 

Sect.  1606.  Type  V:  Metal  Frame  Floor  Construction. — In  buildings 
of  Type  V  construction  the  floors  shall  be  constructed  of  incombustible 
materials.  Structural  steel  or  iron  floor  plates,  structural  steel  beams,  or 
steel  or  iron  columns  supporting  floors  need  not  be  protected  against  fire. 

Sect.  1607.     Type  VI:  Wooden  Frame  Floor  Construction. — (a)     In 

buildings  of  Type  VI  construction  the  floors  may  be  of  wood  unprotected 
against  fire.    Floor  beams  and  joists  of  wood  shall  be  not  less  than  one  and 

(107) 


Sees.  1607-1608 

five  eighths  inches  thick.  Where  joists  frame  on  a  girder  or  bearing  partition 
on  both  sides  thereof,  the  spaces  between  the  joists  shall  be  fire-stopped  with 
incombustible  materials  or  with  wood  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches 
thick. 

(b)  Floors  may  be  supported  upon  the  walls  of  the  building  or  upon 
wooden  columns  or  bearing  partitions.  Structural  steel  beams  or  steel  or 
iron  columns  without  protection  against  fire,  reinforced  concrete  or  other 
approved  materials  may  be  used  in  the  floor  framing  or  for  its  support.  Wood 
shall  not  be  used  for  columns  or  bearing  partitions  in  a  basement  or  cellar. 

(c)  Structural  masonry  and  reinforced  concrete  shall  not  be  supported 
upon  wooden  floor  construction,  but  this  restriction  shall  not  apply  to  fire- 
stopping,  the  protective  foundations  under  heat-producing  apparatus  or  to 
tile  or  concrete  flooring  with  its  base  not  more  than  four  inches  in  total  thick_ 
ness,  laid  upon  the  under  boarding. 

Sect.  1608.  Ratproofing. — (a)  Every  basement  or  cellar  in  buildings 
hereafter  erected  shall  be  completely  covered  with  a  ratproof  floor  of  con- 
crete, or  solid  masonry  laid  in  cement  mortar,  not  less  than  two  inches  thick, 
or  other  approved  flooring.  Pits  or  openings  in  such  floors  shall  be  lined  on 
all  sides  and  the  bottom  with  similar  material. 

(b)  Recesses  and  inaccessible  spaces  where  rats  might  find  refuge  and 
breed  shall  be  avoided  if  possible,  and  otherwise  shall  be  sealed  with  masonry 
or  with  substantial  wire  mesh  of  incorrodible  metal. 


(108) 


Sec,  1701 


PART    17. 
ROOF  CONSTRUCTION  AND   COVERING. 

Section 

1701  —  Roof  Construction. 

1702  —  Roof  Covering. 

1703  —  Roof  Drainage. 

*Section  1701.  Roof  Construction. — (a)  Except  as  otherwise  pro- 
vided in  this  part,  in  so  far  as  they  are  pertinent,  the  provisions  of  Part  16 
for  the  construction  of  floors  and  their  supports  shall  also  apply  to  the  con- 
struction of  roofs  of  buildings  of  the  respective  types  of  construction. 

(b)  Members  of  structural  steel  frames  of  roofs  and  other  incombustible 
roof  construction  covered  with  fire-retardant  roofing,  on  Type  I  and  Type  II 
buildings,  over  rooms  of  Group  B  occupancy  and  over  approved  rooms  of 
Group  G  occupancy  shall  be  deemed  to  be  sufficiently  protected  against  fire 
if  they  are  not  less  than  twenty-five  feet  distant  from  the  floor,  and  from  a 
mezzanine  floor  or  balcony  below;  or  if  they  are  not  less  than  eighteen  feet  so 
distant  and  are  protected  by  an  incombustible  ceiling  of  one-hour  fire-re- 
sistive construction  suspended  at  least  one  inch  below  the  steel.  Proximity 
within  these  limiting  distances  of  an  inclined  or  stepped  balcony  with  fixed 
seats,  of  a  mezzanine  floor  or  level  balcony  not  more  than  five  feet  wide, 
shall  not  be  grounds  for  requiring  greater  fire  protection  than  is  required 
in  this  paragraph.  The  ceilings  of  such  rooms  and  the  walls  more  than  five 
feet  above  the  floor  shall  not  be  covered  or  finished  with  combustible  material. 

(c)  Filling  for  drainage  on  the  roof  of  a  building  of  Type  I,  Type  II  and 
Type  V  construction  shall  be  of  incombustible  material  except  that  wood,  in 
amount  not  more  than  two  board  feet  per  square  foot,  may  be  used  on  a  roof 
of  Type  I  or  Type  II  construction  designed  for  a  future  floor.  Filling  for 
thermal  insulation  may  be  of  combustible  but  not  highly  flammable  material 
laid  without  air  space. 

(d)  In  buildings  of  Type  III  the  roof  planking,  if  of  wood,  shall  be  not 
less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  thick.  Wooden  columns  supporting  a  roof 
in  a  building  of  Type  III  construction  shall  be  not  less  than  five  inches  in 
least  dimension. 

(e)  In  buildings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  and  Type  VI  construction  where 
the  exterior  wall  is  required  by  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  to  be  of  fire-resistive 
construction  without  unprotected  openings,  wooden  joists,  rafters  and  other 
combustible  roof  construction  shall  not  extend  through  or  across  the  exterior 
wall,  except  the  roof  boarding,  planking  or  a  nailing  piece,  which  shall  then 
be  covered  with  metal.  Such  walls  shall  extend  up  to  the  under  side  of  the 
roof  boarding  or  planking  and  where  required  by  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  to 
be  of  four-hour  fire-resistive  construction  without  openings,  shall  have  para- 
pets above  the  roof  as  specified  in  Part  14.     Where  such  walls  may  have 

(109) 


Sees.  1701-1703 

unprotected  openings  combustible  roof  construction  may  project  not  more 
than  one  foot  to  form  eaves  except  in  the  first  and  second  fire  zones. 
[  *As  amended  hij  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  1702.  Roof  Covering. —  Roof  covering  on  buildings  of  Type  I, 
Type  II  or  Type  V  shall  be  either  fire-retardant  or  ordinary  roofings  as 
specified  in  Part  22.  Roof  covering  on  buildings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  or 
Type  VI  shall  be  fire-retardant. 

Sect.  1703.  Roof  Drainage. —  (a)  Roofs  of  buildings  and  of  all  parts 
thereof  shall  be  sloped  to  drain  at  a  pitch  of  not  less  than  one  inch  in  ten  feet. 
Gutters  and  conductors  or  leaders  shall  be  provided  at  the  low  points  to 
which  water  will  flow,  except  on  one  story  or  two  story  buildings  not  over 
six  hundred  and  fifty  square  feet  in  area,  with  drains  to  lead  away  and  satis- 
factorily to  dispose  of  rain  water.  Means  shall  be  provided  to  prevent  rain 
water  from  any  part  of  a  building  except  window  sills,  copings  and  cornices 
not  more  than  one  foot  wide  and  awnings  or  marquises  discharging  off  the 
outer  edge,  from  filling  or  flowing  upon  a  public  way. 

(b)  Where  a  roof  is  finished  with  a  smooth  surface  of  tile,  terrazzo  or 
similar  material  and  under  other  favorable  circumstances,  the  commissioner 
may  waive  the  requirement  of  a  slope  and  permit  construction  of  a  level  roof 
subject  to  such  conditions  as  he  shall  in  any  case  specify. 

(c)  No  part  of  any  roof  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  discharge  snow  or 
ice  upon  a  public  way. 

(d)  Rain  water  leaders  shall  not  be  discharged  upon  a  public  way  nor 
upon  land  of  another  owner,  nor  so  as  to  flow  upon  such  public  way  or  land. 

(e)  This  section  shall  not  be  held  to  prevent  the  construction  of  a  spray 
pond  on  a  roof  or  the  use  of  a  roof  to  contain  water  for  industrial  or  other 
approved  purposes  provided  it  is  not  allowed  to  become  stagnant. 


(110) 


Sees.  180N1802 


PART   18. 
EXITS. 

Section 

1801  —  General  Requirements  for  Exits. 

1802  —  Kinds  of  Exits. 

1803  —  Number  of  Occupancies. 

1804  —  Number  and  Location  of  Exits. 

1805  —  Corridors  and  Passageways. 

1806  —  Doorways  as  Exits. 

1807  —  Windows  as  Exits. 

1808  —  Interior  Stairways. 

1809  —  Interior  Ramps. 

1810  —  Smokeproof  Towers. 

1811  —  Exterior  Stairways  or  Ramps. 

1812  —  Fire  Escapes. 

1813  —  Ladders  as  Exits. 

1814  —  Elevators  as  Exits. 

1815  —  Horizontal  Exits. 

1816  — Other  Exits. 

1817  —  Exit  Enclosures. 

1818  — Exit  Signs. 

1819  —  Exit  Maintenance  and  Lighting. 

Section  1801.  General  Requirements  for  Exits. —  Every  new  building 
and  every  portion  thereof  shall  have  exits  in  conformity  with  this  part  and 
Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive.  No  building  shall  be  enlarged,  altered  or  repaired 
in  such  manner  as  to  reduce  the  number  or  capacity  of  exits  to  less  than 
required  nor  shall  the  occupancy  be  changed  unless  the  exits  conform  or  are 
made  to  conform  to  the  requirements  for  the  new  occupancy. 

Sect.   1802.     Kinds  of  Exits. —  (a)     An  exit  from  a  room  may  be  either  — 


(b 


(c 


A  doorway. 

A  window. 

An  exit  from  a  story. 
An  exit  from  a  story  may  be  either  — - 

An  interior  stairway. 

An  interior  ramp. 

A  smokeproof  tower. 

An  exterior  stairway  or  ramp. 

A  fire  escape. 

A  ladder. 

Elevators. 

An  exit  from  the  building  or  from  the  fire  division. 
An  exit  from  a  building  or  from  the  fire  division  may  be  either  — 

(HI) 


Sees.  1802=1804 

(1)  A  doorway  in  the  exterior  wall  of  the  building  opening  upon  a 
street  or  an  open  space  with  access  to  a  street. 

(2)  A  horizontal  exit. 

(d)  All  exits  shall  be  of  the  kinds  listed  in  the  preceding  paragraphs 
of  this  section  subject  to  the  limitations  and  requirements  of  this  part,  except 
that  where  two  exits  are  required  the  commissioner  may  permit  the  substi- 
tution for  one  of  them  of  sliding  poles,  chutes  or  other  means  of  egress  when 
all  the  persons  who  may  in  emergency  need  to  use  such  means  of  egress  are 
trained  to  their  use  in  their  daily  occupations  and  when  all  other  relevant 
conditions  are  satisfactory  to  the  commissioner. 

(e)  No  exit  of  any  kind  may  serve  as  a  required  exit  unless  it  is  or  forms 
part  of  a  continuous  path  of  exit  from  the  floor  space  served  to  the  street. 

(f)  At  least  one  exit  from  every  story  of  a  building,  except  a  basement, 
cellar,  first  or  second  story  from  which  there  is  a  doorway  exit  to  a  street  or  to 
an  open  space  accessible  to  a  street,  shall  be  an  interior  stairway,  an  interior 
ramp  or  a  smokeproof  tower. 

*Sect.  1803.  Number  of  Occupancies. —  (a)  The  number  of  persons 
to  be  served  by  an  exit  shall  be  stated  in  the  application  for  permit  and  shall 
be  computed  from  the  floor  area  on  the  following  basis: 

(1)  One  person  for  every  six  square  feet  in  auditoriums,  assembly  halls, 
dance  halls,  gymnasiums,  armories,  lodge  rooms. 

(2)  One  person  for  every  fifteen  square  feet  in  court  rooms,  restaurants, 
retail  stores,  class  rooms  in  schools. 

(3)  One  person  for  every  twenty-five  square  feet  in  lodging  houses, 
reading  rooms. 

(4)  One  person  for  every  thirty-five  square  feet  in  factories  and  work 
rooms. 

(5)  One  person  for  every  fifty  square  feet  in  offices  and  show  rooms. 

(6)  One  person  for  every  one  hundred  square  feet  in  Group  D  buildings , 
hotels,  apartments  and  other  dwellings,  police  and  fire  stations. 

(7)  One  person  for  every  two  hundred  square  feet  in  automobile  repair 
shops  and  service  rooms,  museums,  libraries,  wholesale  stores,  and  club- 
houses, except  in  assembly  halls  thereof. 

(8)  One  person  for  every  thousand  square  feet  in  storage  garages  and 
warehouses. 

(b)  For  other  occupancies  the  commissioner  shall  determine  the  ratio  of 
occupants  to  floor  area  in  each  case. 

(c)  Where  the  kind  or  width  of  an  exit  depends  upon  the  number  of  per- 
sons served  by  it,  such  number  shall  be  determined  by  dividing  the  maximum 
number  of  persons  in  any  room  or  group  of  rooms,  or  in  any  story  and  within 
a  fire  division,  by  the  number  of  alternative  exits  to  which  they  all  have  access 
less  one  (assuming  that  one  such  exit  may  be  blocked)  except  where  only  one 
exit  is  required. 

[  *As  amended,  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

fSect.  1804.  Number  and  Location  of  Exits. — (a)  Except  as  other- 
wise specified  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  buildings  and  parts  thereof  shall  have 
at  least  the  number  of  exits  required  in  this  section.     The  kinds  of  exits  pro- 

(112) 


Sec.   1804 

vided,  as  required  in  this  part,  shall  be  subject  to  the  limitations  imposed  by- 
sections  eighteen  hundred  and  five  to  eighteen  hundred  and  sixteen  inclusive. 

(b)  Every  room  and  group  of  less  than  four  rooms  shall  have  at  least  one 
exit  conforming  to  the  requirements  of  this  chapter.  The  exit  from  an  attic  or 
similar  enclosed  space,  accessible  but  normally  unoccupied,  may  be  a  scuttle 
not  less  than  two  feet  by  three  feet  in  the  ceiling  of  the  story  below.  Such 
scuttle  shall,  if  required  by  the  commissioner,  be  provided  with  a  permanent 
ladder.  The  flat  roof  of  a  building,  if  occupied  by  persons,  shall  be  considered 
a  room  and  a  story  for  the  purposes  of  this  section. 

(c)  Every  room  or  group  of  rooms  containing  in  the  aggregate  more  than 
twenty-five  hundred  square  feet  of  floor  area  or  seventy-five  occupants  and 
every  group  of  four  or  more  rooms,  except  an  attic  or  similar  enclosed  space, 
accessible  but  normally  unoccupied,  shall  have  at  least  two  remote  exits. 
Such  exits  may  open  into  a  common  corridor  which  has  at  least  two  remote 
exits.  Closets,  vestibules,  toilet  rooms  and  the  like  shall  not  be  counted  as 
rooms  of  a  group  for  the  purpose  of  this  paragraph. 

(d)  When  a  story  of  a  building  is  occupied  by  two  or  more  tenants,  each 
tenant  shall  have  access  to  at  least  two  remote  exits  from  the  story. 

(e)  Every  story  in  a  building  shall  have  at  least  two  remote  exits  except : 

(1)  Stories  above  the  first  story  in  single  family  dwellings  less  than  three 
stories  in  height. 

(2)  A  basement  or  cellar  constructed  large  enough  for  low  pressure 
heating  apparatus  and  its  fuel  storage  only,  requiring  attendance  of  not 
more  than  two  persons. 

(f )  Every  room  or  story  required  to  have  two  remote  exits  shall  have  two 
remote  and  independent  paths  of  exit  of  the  required  width  at  all  points. 

(g)  A  single  exit  from  a  room  or  group  of  rooms  which  has  no  other  exit 
shall  not  be  further  than  sixty  feet  from  any  point  within  the  room  or  rooms 
measured  along  the  path  of  exit. 

(h)  Where  two  or  more  exits  from  a  room  are  required  they  shall  be 
remote  or  distant  from  one  another  in  such  manner  that  persons  in  any  place 
may  choose  either  of  two  directions  in  a  path  toward  an  exit,  and  in  such  a 
manner  that  a  single  fire  in  its  early  stages  cannot  block  both  paths  toward  an 
exit.  The  distance  from  any  point  in  a  room  to  the  nearest  exit,  except  as 
specifically  indicated  in  special  group  requirements,  shall  not  exceed  one 
hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  buildings  of  Type  I,  Type  II  and  Type  V  nor  seventy- 
five  feet  in  buildings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  and  Type  VI. 

(i)  The  exits  from  a  story  in  a  fire  division  shall  be  of  such  number  and 
so  located  that  at  least  one  such  exit  is  within  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in 
buildings  of  Type  I,  Type  II  and  Type  V,  and  within  seventy-five  feet  in 
buidings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  and  Type  VI,  from  every  exit  from  a  room  or 
group  of  rooms  into  a  corridor  or,  in  a  story  without  a  corridor,  from  every 
point  within  the  story  and  fire  division,  except* as  specifically  indicated  in 
special  group  requirements.  The  distance  to  an  exit,  if  a  doorway,  shall  be 
measured  to  the  nearer  jamb  thereof;  if  an  enclosed  stairway  or  ramp,  to 
the  doorway  in  the  enclosure;  and  if  a  stairway  or  ramp  not  enclosed,  to  the 
nearest  point  of  the  top  riser  or  commencement  of  slope. 
[  1[As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 
(113) 


Sees,  1805=1806 

*Sect.  1805.  Corridors  and  Passageways. —  (a)  A  passageway  shall 
be  provided  and  maintained  in  every  story  of  a  building  from  all  parts  of 
the  floor  to  the  required  exits,  of  width  not  less  than  the  required  width  of 
the  exit  to  which  each  leads,  nor  less  than  twelve  inches  for  every  one  hun- 
dred persons  served. 

(b)  Corridors  may  serve  as  exits  from  the  doorways  from  rooms  to  exits 
from  the  story.  The  clear  exit  width  of  corridors  shall  be  not  less  than  the 
required  width  of  any  doorway  from  which  it  leads,  nor  of  the  exit  to  which 
it  leads,  nor  less  than  thirty-six  inches  nor  less  than  twelve  inches  for  every 
one  hundred  persons  served. 

(c)  Neither  radiators  nor  pipes,  doors  in  an  open  position  nor  any  other 
equipment  or  construction  shall  be  allowed  to  reduce  or  encroach  upon  the 
required  width  of  a  corridor.  If  lockers  are  placed  along  one  or  both  sides 
of  a  corridor  its  clear  width  between  lockers  shall  be  increased  over  its  required 
exit  width  by  eighteen  inches  for  each  side  on  which  lockers  are  placed  and 
if  other  use  than  egress  and  lockers  is  made  of  corridors,  the  clear  width 
shall  similarly  be  increased  over  its  required  exit  width  as  the  commissioner 
shall  in  each  case  determine. 

(d)  Passageways  which  serve  as  exits  from  enclosed  stairways  or  ramps 
to  exits  from  the  building  shall  be  enclosed  corridors  except  where  they  may 
occur  in  a  building  which  is  not  over  forty  feet  wide  and  of  a  total  area  not 
exceeding  two  thousand  square  feet.  In  such  a  building  one  of  the  enclosed 
corridors  in  the  first  floor  only  may  be  omitted  provided  the  basement  and 
first  story  are  equipped  with  automatic  sprinklers  and  the  class  of  construc- 
tion is  Type  IV  or  more  fire-resistant. 

(e)  The  clear  width  of  such  passageways  shall  be  not  less  than  required 
for  the  stairway  or  ramp  nor  less  than  twelve  inches  for  every  one  hundred 
persons  in  any  story  of  the  building  served.  The  clear  height  shall  be  not  less 
than  seventy-eight  inches. 

(f )  The  floor  and  walls  of  a  corridor  serving  as  an  exit  from  an  enclosed 
stairway  or  ramp  shall  have  fire-resistance  of  the  rating  required  for  the 
enclosure  and  the  ceiling  shall  be  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 

(g)  The  floor  of  such  a  corridor  shall  be  level  or  shall  slope  not  over  one 
vertical  in  ten  horizontal,  but  such  floor  shall  be  level  for  a  distance  of  forty- 
four  inches  from  a  stairway  and  at  all  doorways  or  connecting  corridors  for 
the  full  width  thereof  and  one  foot  additional  on  each  side. 

(h)     An  outside  passageway  leading  from  an  exit  from  a  building  to  a 
street  shall  have  the  clear  width  required  for  an  interior  passageway,  and  if 
covered  shall  be  covered  by  incombustible  construction.     Such  passageway 
shall  be  subject  to  all  pertinent  requirements  for  exits. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

fSect.  1806.  Doorways  as  Exits. —  (a)  Doorways  which  serve  as 
required  exits  shall  be  not  less  than  twenty-four  inches  wide.  Doorways 
which  serve  as  exits  for  more  than  ten  persons  shall  be  not  less  than  seventy- 
eight  inches  high  nor  less  than  thirty  inches  wide  nor  less  than  twelve  inches 
in  width  for  every  hundred  persons  so  served. 

(b)     The  floor  both  sides  of  a  doorway  exit  shall  be  at  the  same  level  for 

(114) 


Sees.  1806=1808 

a  distance  of  three  feet  in  either  direction  from  the  doorway,  except  that  in 
doorway  exits  from  a  building  to  the  outside  there  may  be  a  single  step-down 
not  over  six  inches  to  a  level  landing  not  less  than  three  feet  wide. 

(c)  Thresholds  in  exit  doorways  shall  not  be  over  one  inch  high. 

(d)  In  enclosures  of  stairways  or  ramps  which  serve  as  required  exits, 
doors  shall  swing  in  the  direction  of  egress. 

(e)  Except  in  buildings  of  Group  I,  swinging  doors  in  doorways  which 
serve  as  required  exits  from  the  building  shall  swing  in  the  direction  of  egress. 

(f)  Revolving  doors  shall  be  of  an  approved  type,  without  cable  or  bar 
braces,  designed  and  constructed  to  release  when  simultaneous  outward 
forces  are  exerted  by  persons  of  ordinary  strength  on  both  sides  of  the  pivot 
so  that  the  wings  will  fold  back  on  themselves  like  the  leaves  of  a  book  in 
the  direction  of  egress.    The  use  of  revolving  doors  shall  be  limited  as  follows: 

(1)  They  shall  not  be  used  in  occupancies  of  Group  A,  Group  B,  Group 
C,  and  Group  D. 

(2)  They  may  be  used  in  other  group  occupancies  only  if  swinging  doors 
immediately  adjacent  to  them  provide  seventj^-five  per  cent  of  the  required 
egress. 

(3)  They  shall  not  be  used  in  any  exit  from  premises  where  alcoholic 
beverages  are  sold  for  consumption  on  the  premises. 

(g)  Except  in  detention  buildings,  doors  in  required  exits  shall  not  be  so 
locked  or  fastened  that  they  cannot  be  opened  from  the  inside  without  use 
of  a  key. 

[  -\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  eh.  5  } 

Sect.  1807.  Windows  as  Exits. —  A  window  shall  not  serve  as  an  exit 
except  in  an  existing  building  and  in  such  case  only  as  the  second  of  two  re- 
quired exits  serving  not  more  than  ten  persons  and  subject  to  the  approval  of 
the  commissioner  and  to  such  conditions  as  he  may  in  each  case  prescribe. 
This  provision  shall  not  be  held  to  limit  the  use  of  glass  in  a  door. 

JSect.  1808.  Interior  Stairway. —  (a)  Interior  stairways  may  serve  as 
exits  from  any  story  of  a  building.  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this 
section,  every  interior  stairway  required  to  be  enclosed  shall  have  a  direct 
doorway  exit  from  the  building  or  shall  have  an  enclosed  corridor  leading  to 
such  exit,  except  as  provided  in  paragraph  (d)  of  Section  1805. 

(b)  In  buildings  more  than  three  stories  high  with  flat  roofs  at  least  one 
interior  stairway  or  ramp  shall  extend  to  the  roof;  and  where  more  than  two 
stairways  or  ramps  serve  as  required  exits,  at  least  two  shall  be  interior  stair- 
ways or  ramps  which  shall  extend  to  the  roof.  In  such  buildings  more  than 
three  hundred  feet  long  there  shall  be  at  least  two  remote  stairways  or  ramps 
extending  to  the  roof.  In  a  two-story  or  three-story  building  with  flat  roof, 
unless  a  stairway  extends  to  the  roof,  there  shall  be  a  scuttle  in  the  roof,  not 
less  than  two  feet  by  three  feet,  with  a  ladder,  near  a  stairway. 

(c)  An  interior  stairway  shall  be  located  entirely  within  the  exterior  walls 
of  a  building,  but  this  requirement  shall  not  be  held  to  constrain  the  shape 
or  plan  of  the  exterior  walls  or  the  construction  of  the  enclosure  wall. 

(d)  No  interior  stairway  serving  as  a  required  exit  shall  be  less  than 
thirty  inches  wide  except  a  single  flight  stairway  to  a  balcony  serving  not  more 

(115) 


Sec.  1808 

than  ten  persons  which  may  be  not  less  than  twenty-four  inches  wide.  No 
stairway  serving  as  a  required  exit  for  ten  or  more  persons  shall  be  less  than 
thirty-six  inches  wide  nor  less  than  twelve  inches  additional  for  every  one 
hundred  persons  so  served  in  excess  of  three  hundred.  The  clear  vertical 
headroom  over  each  riser  shall  be  not  less  than  six  feet  six  inches. 

(e)  Interior  stairways  shall  be  enclosed  where  so  required  in  Parts  3  to  12, 
inclusive,  and  in  Part  15  of  this  code. 

(f)  In  buildings  of  Type  I,  Type  II  or  Type  V  interior  stairs,  including 
landings,  which  serve  required  exits  shall  be  constructed  of  incombustible 
materials,  except  that  stairs  with  solid  treads,  risers  and  landings  of  incom- 
bustible materials  may  have  top  surfaces  of  wood,  linoleum  or  other  similarly 
combustible  material.  Treads,  risers  or  landings  of  marble,  slate  or  similarly 
brittle  material  shall  be  backed  with  sheet  steel,  for  stairs  three  feet  or  less  in 
width  of  at  least  number  twelve  gage,  and  for  wider  stairs  at  least  number  ten 
gage.  Cast  iron  shall  have  a  thickness  of  at  least  three  sixteenths  inch  in 
treads  and  risers  and  three  eighths  inch  in  landings.  Cast  iron  landings  shall 
not  have  greater  area  than  nine  square  feet  between  steel  or  other  supports. 
Enclosed  metal  stairs  and  landings  need  not  be  protected  against  fire.  Stairs 
which  are  not  enclosed  as  provided  in  Part  15,  in  buildings  of  Type  I  or  Type 
II  shall  have  protection  against  fire  as  specified  for  floors. 

(g)  In  buildings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  or  Type  VI  not  over  three  stories 
high,  stairs,  including  landings,  may  be  of  wood.  In  buildings  of  Type  III 
wooden  stairs  which  are  not  enclosed  as  provided  in  Part  15  shall  have  treads 
at  least  one  and  one  half  inches  thick;  the  risers,  if  any,  shall  be  one  and  one 
half  inches  thick;  stringers  shall  be  not  less  than  three  and  one  half  inches  in 
least  dimension;  and  the  stairs  shall  be  constructed  without  concealed  spaces. 
Wooden  stairs  with  soffits  enclosed  by  plaster,  sheathing  or  otherwise,  shall  be 
fire-stopped  at  floors  and  landings  and  not  further  apart  than  at  every  eighth 
riser  with  incombustible  material  or  with  wood  not  less  than  one  and  one  half 
inches  thick. 

(h)  Treads  and  risers  of  stairs  serving  as  required  exits,  except  in  schools, 
shall  be  so  proportioned  that  the  product  of  the  tread  and  the  rise  in  inches 
shall  be  not  less  than  seventy  nor  more  than  seventy-seven;  and  the  treads 
shall  not  be  less  than  nine  and  one  half  inches  nor  the  rise  more  than  seven  and 
three  quarters  inches.  In  schools,  the  treads  and  risers  may  be  proportioned, 
with  the  approval  of  the  commissioner,  to  suit  the  age  of  the  pupils.  Treads 
and  risers  shall  be  uniform  throughout  any  one  flight. 

(i)  No  flight  of  stairs  shall  have  more  than  fifteen  nor  less  than  two  risers 
between  landings.  A  landing  between  two  flights  of  stairs  in  the  same 
direction  shall  be  at  least  as  wide  as  the  stairs  and  at  least  three  feet  long  in 
the  direction  of  travel.  Stairs  turning  at  a  right  angle  shall  have  a  square 
or  rectangular  landing  the  full  width  of  the  respective  stairways.  Where 
stairs  return  directly  on  themselves,  a  landing  without  steps  shall  be  provided 
at  least  as  wide  as  the  stairs. 

(j)  Spiral  stairs  shall  not  be  used  in  a  stairway  serving  as  a  required  exit 
for  ten  persons  or  more  nor  in  stairways  more  than  one  story  in  height,  except 
in  a  single  family  dwelling;  and  in  pre-code  buildings  with  the  approval  of 

(116) 


Sees.  1808-1809 

the  commissioner.    Stairs  may  be  curved  if  the  tread  and  rise  one  foot  from 
the  inner  rail  are  as  specified  in  this  section. 

(k)  Where  stairs  and  landings  are  not  guarded  at  the  side  by  a  wall  or 
partition,  they  shall  have  a  railing,  balustrade,  grille  or  similar  guard  at  least 
thirty-three  inches  high  at  the  face  of  the  riser.  In  case  a  stairway  more  than 
two  stories  high  has  recurring  flights  and  landings,  about  an  interior  well 
more  than  twelve  inches  wide  in  horizontal  projection,  the  guard  next  the 
well  shall  be  not  less  than  three  feet  high  at  the  face  of  the  riser,  and  shall  con- 
sist, if  a  railing,  of  at  least  two  rails,  if  a  balustrade,  of  balusters  not  over 
six  inches  apart,  and  if  a  grille  or  other  form  of  guard,  of  meshes  not  more 
than  six  inches  in  least  dimension,  and  the  edge  of  the  stairs  and  of  the  land- 
ings shall  have  a  curb  at  least  three  inches  high. 

(1)  Stairs  less  than  forty-four  inches  wide  shall  have  a  handrail  on  one 
side;  stairs  forty-four  inches  wide  or  more  and  curved  stairs  shall  have  hand- 
rails on  both  sides.  Where  the  width  of  a  stairway  is  required,  as  an  exit, 
to  exceed  eighty-eight  inches  one  or  more  intermediate  handrails  shall  be 
provided  not  over  eighty-eight  inches  apart.  Handrails  shall  be  about  three 
feet  high  above  the  center  of  the  treads,  shall  be  continuous  between  landings 
and  in  stairways  which  serve  as  required  exits,  handrails  which  are  not  con- 
tinuous shall  be  returned  at  the  upper  end  to  the  wall  or  terminate  at  a  post 
in  such  manner  as  not  to  leave  a  free  or  projecting  end.  Handrails  may  be 
of  wood. 

(m)  No  pipe,  radiator  or  other  equipment  shall  obstruct  or  encroach  upon 
the  required  width  of  a  stairway  or  landing.  No  stairway  which  serves  as  a 
required  exit  shall  be  obstructed  while  the  building  is  occupied,  within  the 
enclosure  thereof,  on  the  steps  or  landings  or  on  the  floors  within  the  area 
required  for  exit  or  for  approach  to  the  stairway,  by  materials,  equipment 
or  by  any  use  of  such  space  except  for  passage. 

(n)  There  shall  be  no  closet  within  the  required  enclosure  of  a  stairway. 
There  shall  be  no  closet  for  storage  under  a  stairway  of  combustible  material 
which  is  a  required  exit  except  a  coat  closet  in  dwellings  or  a  toilet  or  similarly 
non-hazardous  use,  and  in  such  case  the  soffit  of  the  stairway  shall  be  pro- 
tected by  a  ceiling  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 
[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943.  ch.  5  ] 

*Sect.    1809.      Interior    Ramps. — (a)     Interior    ramps    may    serve    as 
exits  from  any  story  of  a  building. 

(b)  An  interior  ramp  shall  be  located  entirely  within  the  exterior  walls  of 
a  building. 

(c)  The  width,  enclosure,  guarding  and  construction  of  ramps  shall  be 
the  same  as  provided  for  interior  stairways.  All  requirements  for  interior 
stairways  which  are  pertinent  shall  also  apply  to  interior  ramps  except  the 
requirement  for  handrails. 

(d)  Ramps  which  serve  as  required  exits  shall  not  have  a  slope  greater 
than  one  vertical  in  ten  horizontal. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  J 

(117) 


Sees.  1810=1811 

*Sect.  1810.  Smokeproof  Towers. — Smokeproof  towers,  if  built,  may 
serve  as  required  exits  from  any  story  of  a  building.  Interior  stairways  con- 
structed and  arranged  as  follows  shall  be  known  as  smokeproof  or  fire  towers. 

(a)  The  enclosed  walls  of  fire  towers  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials 
or  assemblies  having  a  fire-resistive  rating  of  at  least  four  hours.  Such  walls 
shall  be  without  openings,  except  for  doors  serving  as  means  of  egress. 

(b)  At  each  story  served  by  a  fire  tower  access  to  the  stairways  of  such 
fire  tower  shall  be  provided  through  outside  balconies  or  fire-proof  vestibules. 
Such  balconies  or  vestibules  shall  be  at  least  three  feet  eight  inches  in  width 
and  shall  have  unpierced  floors  of  incombustible  materials  and  shall  be  pro- 
vided with  substantial  guard  rails  at  least  four  feet  high,  without  any  open- 
ings greater  than  eight  inches  in  width." 

(c)  Such  balconies  or  vestibules  of  fire  towers  shall  be  level  with  the  floors 
of  the  structure  and  the  platforms  of  the  stairs  connected  by  such  balconies. 
Such  balconies  or  vestibules  shall  be  separated  from  the  structure  and  the 
stairs  by  self-closing  fire  doors  capable  of  being  opened  from  both  sides 
without  the  use  of  a  key,  except  the  final  balcony  or  vestibule  as  described 
in  paragraph  (d)  which  may  open  only  from  one  side  without  the  use  of  a  key. 

(d)  Balconies  or  vestibules  of  fire  towers  shall  open  on  a  street  or  yard 
or  on  a  court  open  vertically  to  the  sky  for  its  full  height,  having  a  minimum 
net  area  of  one  hundred  and  five  square  feet  and  a  minimum  dimension  of 
seven  feet.  The  opening  from  the  vestibule  to  the  street,  yard  or  court  shall 
have  a  minimum  area  of  eighteen  square  feet  and  a  minimum  dimension  of 
two  feet  six  inches.  It  shall  be  unlawful  to  leave  openings  in  the  court  walls 
surrounding  an  interior  fire  tower  other  than  the  openings  from  the  vestibules, 
within  fifteen  feet  of  the  balcony,  except  that  self-closing  fire  windows  may  be 
used  if  such  windows  are  at  least  ten  feet  from  the  balcony,  provided  that  the 
area  of  the  court  is  at  least  twelve  feet  by  twenty-four  feet. 

(e)  Fire  towers  shall  terminate  at  the  grade  level  and  shall  exit  directly 
to  the  street  independently  of  corridors  serving  other  stairways  except  when 
the  fire  tower  terminates  in  the  ground  floor  corridor  outside  of  the  inner 
vestibule  and  within  ten  feet  of  the  building  line. 

(f)  Doors  opening  into  fire  towers  may  be  constructed  with  observation 
panels  made  of  polished  wire  glass,  one-quarter  of  an  inch  thick,  if  such  glass 
is  set  with  a  three-quarter  inch  rabbet.  Such  glass  shall  have  a  maximum 
area  of  sixteen  square  inches.  Doors  shall  be  capable  of  being  opened  from 
both  sides  without  the  use  of  a  key.  A  handrail  shall  be  provided  on  both 
sides. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  1811.  Exterior  Stairways  or  Ramps. — (a)  Exterior  stairways 
or  ramps  may  serve  as  required  exits  from  any  story  or  stories  of  a  building. 
Except  as  to  enclosure  and  location  within  the  exterior  walls  of  a  building, 
an  exterior  stairway  or  ramp  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  for  interior 
stairways  or  ramps,  respectively.  Exterior  stairways  or  ramps  shall  be 
located  outside  the  exterior  walls  of  a  building,  but  not  nearer  than  five 
feet  from  a  lot  line  other  than  a  street  line. 

(b)     Exterior  stairways  or  ramps  serving  as  required  exits,  and  their  land- 

(118) 


Sees.  1811=1812 

ings,  railings  and  enclosures,  if  any,  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials  except 
on  buildings  of  Type  VI  construction  and  except  that  handrails  may  be  of  wood. 

(c)  A  doorway  serving  as  an  exit  from  a  story  to  an  exterior  stairway  or 
ramp  shall  open  upon  a  landing  level  with  or  not  more  than  one  six-inch  step 
below  the  floor,  and  shall  be  protected  except  in  buildings  of  Type  VI  con- 
struction by  a  self-closing  Class  B  fire  door.  Openings  for  doorways  or  win- 
dows under  or  within  five  feet  from  an  exterior  stairway  or  ramp,  except  in 
buildings  of  Type  VI  construction,  shall  be  protected  by  automatic-closing 
Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows,  unless  the  exterior  stairway  or  ramp  is 
enclosed  in  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 

(d)  Except  where  guarded  on  the  side  by  the  exterior  wall  of  the  building, 
or  by  an  enclosing  wall,  an  exterior  stairway  or  ramp  more  than  three  stories 
or  thirty  feet  above  the  ground  shall  be  guarded  by  a  railing,  balustrade  or 
grille  not  less  than  six  feet  high  with  openings  not  more  than  six  inches  wide. 

*Sect.  1812.     Fire  Escapes. —  (a)     Fire  escapes  shall  not  be  erected  to 
serve  as  required  exits  except  as  follows : — 

(1)  From  pre-code  buildings  where  ordered  by  the  commissioner  under 
the  provisions  of  Section  16  of  Part  I. 

(2)  From  post-code  buildings  four  stories  or  less  in  height  and  five 
thousand  square  feet  or  less  in  area. 

(3)  Where  ladders  may  serve  as  exits. 

(4)  As  emergency  exits  from  buildings  of  Group  A  or  Group  B  occu- 
pancy as  provided  in  Parts  3  and  4,  and 

(5)  Where  ordered  by  the  commissioner  under  the  provisions  of  section 
sixteen  of  Part  1. 

(b)  Fire  escape  landings  and  stairs  shall  have  a  clear  exit  width  of  not 
less  than  twenty-four  inches  where  the  maximum  number  of  persons  to  be 
served  does  not  exceed  one  hundred  and  forty-four,  and  an  additional  one 
inch  in  width  shall  be  added  for  each  additional  six  persons  served,  excepting 
therefrom  emergency  exits  as  required  in  Group  A  and  Group  B. 

(c)  Fire  escapes  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials. 

(d)  The  floors  of  fire  escape  balconies  or  landings,  if  of  steel,  shall  be  of 
open  construction  with  steel  bars  not  over  one  half  inch  nor  less  than  one 
quarter  inch  wide  and  spaces  not  over  one  and  one  quarter  inches  each  nor 
less  in  the  aggregate  than  two  thirds  the  floor  area.  The  bars  shall  be  rigidly 
spaced  near  their  ends  and  at  intervals  not  exceeding  two  feet.  Floors  shall 
be  securely  attached  to  supports. 

(e)  Fire  escape  stairs,  if  steeper  than  is  allowed  for  interior  stairs,  shall 
not  be  steeper  than  necessary,  nor  in  any  event  steeper  than  sixty  degrees 
with  the  horizontal.  Stairs  steeper  than  sixty  degrees  shall  be  deemed 
ladders  and  shall  not  be  used  for  exits  except  where  ladders  are  allowed. 
The  product  of  the  tread  and  rise  in  inches  shall  be  not  greater  than  seventy- 
seven  and  the  rise  shall  not  exceed  nine  inches.  The  construction  of  the 
tread  shall  be  as  required  for  landing  floors,  if  of  steel,  and  not  less  than  seven 
and  one-half  inches  wide.  Treads  shall  be  securely  attached  to  stringers. 
There  shall  not  be  less  than  three  nor  more  than  fifteen  risers  between 
landings. 

(119) 


Sees.  1812-1813 

(f )  The  sides  and  ends  of  fire  escape  landings  and  the  sides  of  stairs,  where 
not  guarded  by  a  wall,  shall  have  a  railing  at  least  three  feet  high,  consisting 
of  a  bar  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  by  three  eighths  inch  and  a  balustrade 
of  half-inch  round  bars  or  equivalent  with  a  lower  rail.  The  railing  shall  be 
supported  by  posts  and  shall  be  sufficient  to  withstand  safely  a  lateral  force 
of  twenty  pounds  per  foot  of  rail,  and  in  Group  H  and  Group  I  shall  have 
one-half  inch  round  bar  palings  not  over  six  inches  from  center  to  center. 

(g)  Openings  for  doorways  or  windows  under  or  within  five  feet  from  a 
fire  escape,  except  in  buildings  of  Type  VI  construction,  shall  be  protected 
by  automatic-closing  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows,  unless  in  the  case  of 
show  windows  or  other  windows  the  commissioner  modifies  this  requirement 
in  consideration  of  other  specific  provisions  contributing  to  safe  egress  over 
the  fire  escape  in  question. 

(h)  Fire  escapes  shall  not  be  bracketed  from  masonry  walls  more  than  five 
times  the  thickness  of  the  wall.  Bracketed  cantilevers  shall  be  bolted  through 
the  wall  with  plate  washers  set  in  mortar  on  the  inside. 

(i)  Except  in  the  webs  of  structural  channels  and  I-beams,  and  in  the 
recticular  or  cross  bars  of  factory-assembled  floor  gratings  approved  as 
flooring  for  fire  escapes,  the  steel  in  fire  escapes  shall  not  be  thinner  than 
one  quarter  inch  nor  shall  bolts  be  less  than  three  eighths  inch.  Stove  bolts 
shall  not  be  used.  If  stringers  of  stairs  are  spliced,  the  splice  shall  be  made 
by  riveting  or  welding,  and  not  by  bolting. 

(j)  The  lowest  run  of  fire  escape  stairs  may  be  hinged  near  the  top  to 
swing  up  into  a  horizontal  position  when  not  in  use.  Such  runs  shall  be 
counter-balanced  but  not  so  heavily  that  they  will  fail  to  lower  by  gravity 
when  released.  The  hinge  shall  consist  of  a  single  round  bar,  not  less  than 
seven  eighths  inch  diameter,  with  approved  bearings  on  both  stringers  of  the 
lower  run  and  properly  supported.  The  hinge  bar  shall  be  not  less  than  two 
inches  horizontally  back  from  the  nosing  of  the  stair  tread  under  which  it  is 
placed.  The  hinged  run  shall  be  held  in  horizontal  position  by  a  bent  bar 
at  least  seven  eighths  inch  in  diameter,  rigidly  held  in  bearings  and  bent 
across  the  stairway  above  the  hinged  run  in  such  manner  that  a  person  using 
the  fire  escape  for  egress  must  release  the  hinged  run  before  reaching  it,  or 
by  other  approved  device. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  191+3,  ch.  5  ] 

fSect.  1813.  Ladders  as  Exits.  —  (a)  Ladders  shall  not  serve  as 
exits  except  where  specifically  allowed  in  this  part  and  in  Parts  3  to  12,  in- 
clusive. A  ladder  not  more  than  one  story  high  may  serve  as  exit  where  a 
scuttle  is  allowed. 

(b)  Ladders  serving  as  exits  shall  be  permanently  fixed  in  place  and  shall 
be  not  over  fifteen  feet  in  length.  In  buildings  of  Type  I,  Type  II  and  Type  V, 
ladder  exits  shall  be  incombustible.  Rungs  shall  be  uniformly  spaced,  not 
over  twelve  inches  top  to  top,  and  shall  be  supported  by  two  rails  not  less 
than  twelve  inches  apart. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  } 
(120) 


Sees.   1814=1815 

*Sect.  1814.  Elevators  as  Exits.  —  (a)  Elevators  may  serve  as 
exits  from  stories  of  buildings  where  all  the  following  requirements  are  com- 
plied with,  namely :  — 

(1)  There  are  at  least  two  other  remote  exits  from  the  stories  conform- 
ing with  the  provisions  of  Section  1804  and  not  less  than  three  feet  six 
inches  wide. 

(2)  The  elevators  shall  be  passenger  elevators,  not  less  than  two  in 
number  enclosed  in  a  single  shaft  or  in  adjoining  shafts.  The  elevators 
shall  have  capacity  to  evacuate  the  occupants  of  any  floor  in  five  trips  each. 

(3)  The  elevators  shall  be  in  operation  and  in  charge  of  licensed  opera- 
tors during  usual  business  hours  and  when  the  building  is  occupied. 

(4)  The  elevators  shall  have  a  lobby  outside  their  enclosure  in  each 
story  served  by  the  elevators  with  a  floor  area  of  at  least  two  square  feet 
for  every  occupant  in  the  story,  separated  from  the  occupied  area  of  the 
story  by  partitions  of  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 
Vertical  openings  within  such  lobbies  shall  be  enclosed  in  all  stories  in 
which  they  occur.  Corridor  space  contiguous  to  the  lobby  shall  be  con- 
sidered a  part  of  the  lobby. 

(5)  In  buildings  of  Type  III  or  Type  IV  construction,  the  enclosure 
of  lobbies  in  successive  stories  shall  be  continuous,  forming  a  complete 
one-hour  separation  as  specified  in  Part  13,  through  all  stories. 

(b)     Elevators  serving  as  exits  shall  have  sufficient  speed  to  make  a  round 
trip  from  first  story  to  top  and  back  without  intermediate  stops  in  two  minutes. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  1815.  Horizontal  Exits.  —  (a)  A  horizontal  exit  shall  consist 
of  a  doorway  in  an  exterior  or  party  wall  of  a  building  or  in  a  fire  wall  separat- 
ing two  fire  divisions  of  a  building,  which  leads  to  a  story,  in  another  building 
or  fire  division,  at  the  same  or  approximately  the  same  level,  from  which 
egress  may  be  made. 

(b)  A  horizontal  exit  may  serve  as  an  exit  from  a  room,  from  a  story  or 
from  a  building,  but  not  from  the  interior  stairway  or  ramp  required  in 
paragraph  (f)  of  section  eighteen  hundred  and  two. 

(c)  The  clear  floor  area  in  the  story  in  the  building  or  fire  division  to  which 
a  horizontal  exit  leads  shall  be  sufficient  to  contain  the  occupants  of  the  story 
in  both  buildings  or  fire-divisions  allowing  three  square  feet  for  each  person. 

(d)  A  horizontal  exit  shall  have  at  least  the  width  required  for  it  as  an 
exit,  or  for  the  exits  which  it  serves  as  outlet. 

(e)  Where  the  floors  connected  by  a  horizontal  exit  are  at  different  levels 
a  ramp  shall  be  provided  the  full  width  of  the  exit  sloping  not  over  one  vertical 
in  ten  horizontal,  with  guard  railing  on  the  open  sides. 

(f )  The  doorway  of  a  horizontal  exit  in  an  exterior  wall  of  a  building  may 
lead  to  an  adjoining  or  nearby  building  by  means  of  a  connecting  balcony 
or  bridge  or  by  a  tunnel,  at  least  as  wide  as  the  doorway.  The  floor  of  such 
balcony  or  bridge,  except  as  provided  in  paragraph  (g)  of  this  section,  shall  be 
solid  of  Type  I  construction,  and  shall  be  level  with,  or  not  more  than  one 
six-inch  step  down  from,  the  floors  with  which  it  connects.  The  floor  of  such 
a  balcony,  bridge  or  tunnel  shall  be  horizontal  or  have  a  slope  not  exceeding 

(121) 


Sees.  1815=1819 

one  vertical  in  ten  horizontal,  and  shall  not  contain  steps  or  stairs  except  with 
the  approval  of  the  commissioner.  Unless  the  balcony  or  bridge  is  enclosed 
in  one-hour  fire-resistive  incombustible  construction,  doorways  or  windows 
opening  on  or  under,  or  within  five  feet  from  such  balcony  or  bridge,  shall 
have  automatic-closing  Class  B  fire  doors  or  fire  windows.  The  open  sides 
of  such  balcony  or  bridge  shall  be  guarded  as  required  for  the  landings  of 
exterior  stairways. 

(g)  Connecting  balconies  of  fire  escape  construction  may  be  used  for 
horizontal  exits  only  where  fire  escapes  are  permitted. 

Sect.  1816.  Other  Exits. —  Sliding  poles,  chutes  or  other  devices  pro- 
vided as  means  of  egress  shall  conform  in  all  respects  to  such  requirements 
as  the  commissioner  shall  in  any  case  prescribe. 

Sect.  1817.  Exit  Enclosures. —  (a)  Interior  stairways  and  ramps  shall 
be  enclosed  as  specified  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  and  in  Part  15. 

(b)  Interior  stairways  and  ramps  which  serve  as  required  exits  from 
stories  above  the  second  story  shall  be  enclosed,  except  as  otherwise  provided 
in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  in  all  stories  in  which  they  occur. 

(c)  Doors  in  a  stair  enclosure  shall  be  automatic  or  self-closing  and  shall 
never  be  locked  against  egress  except  in  detention  buildings.  Such  doors 
shall  swing  in  the  direction  of  egress  and  shall  not  in  any  position  reduce  the 
width  of  the  stairway  or  its  landings  below  that  which  is  required. 

Sect.  1818.  Exit  Signs. —  Required  exits,  except  in  buildings  of  Group  I, 
Division  1,  shall  be  marked  by  suitable  signs  sufficiently  illuminated  to  be 
easily  read  when  the  building  is  occupied.  If  exits  are  located  where  they 
would  not  be  expected  to  be  found,  directing  signs  shall  be  provided  as  they 
may  be  required  by  the  commissioner. 

Sect.  1819.  Exit  Maintenance  and  Lighting. —  (a)  Required  stair- 
ways, passageways,  corridors  and  other  exits  shall  be  at  all  times  maintained 
in  safe  condition,  and  when  the  building  is  occupied,  shall  be  kept  clear  of 
obstructions  and  ready  for  use. 

(b)  Outside  stairs  and  fire  escapes  and  the  vestibules  of  smokeproof 
towers  shall  be  cleared  promptly  of  ice  or  snow.  Awnings  shall  not  be  per- 
mitted to  interfere  with  fire  escapes. 

(c)  Required  stairways,  passageways,  corridors  and  other  exits,  interior 
or  exterior,  except  in  single-family  dwellings  and  within  apartments  or  suites 
of  buildings  of  Group  H  and  Group  I,  shall  be  kept  adequately  lighted  when 
the  building  is  occupied,  or  shall  be  provided  with  approved  means  for  light- 
ing which  can  be  turned  on  by  an  occupant  at  a  convenient  point  or  points. 


(122) 


Sec.  1 90 1 


PART   19. 
DOORS,   WINDOWS   AND   SKYLIGHTS. 

Section 

1901  —  Doors. 

1902  —  Windows. 

1903  —  Skylights. 

1904  —  Sidewalk  Lights. 

^Section   1901.     Doors. — -(a)     Doors   in   doorways   which   serve   as    re- 
quired exits  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  Part  18. 

(b)  Doorways  in  enclosures  of  vertical  openings  shall  have  doors  which 
conform  to  the  requirements  of  Part  15. 

(c)  Doorways  in  required  separations  between  two  units  of  occupancy  or 
between  two  fire  divisions  of  a  building  shall  have  doors  which  conform  to  the 
requirements  of  Part  13. 

(1)  Except  where  otherwise  specified  in  this  code,  doorways  in  walls 
required  to  have  one-hour  resistance  to  the  spread  of  fire  shall  have  doors 
which,  if  of  wood,  shall  be  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  thick  in 
any  part.  Such  doors,  if  not  of  wood,  or  if  larger  than  twenty-five  square 
feet  in  area,  shall  be  Class  C  fire  doors. 

(2)  Except  where  otherwise  specified  in  this  code,  doorways  in  walls 
required  to  have  two-hour  resistance  to  the  spread  of  fire  shall  be  automatic- 
closing  Class  B  fire  doors. 

(3)  Except  where  otherwise  specified  in  this  code,  doorways  and  other 
openings  in  walls  required  to  have  three-hour  resistance  to  the  spread  of  fire 
shall  have  automatic-closing  Class  B  fire  doors  on  both  sides  of  the  wall. 
The  sum  of  the  areas  of  such  openings  in  one  story  shall  not  exceed  one-half 
the  area  of  the  sum  of  said  walls  and  no  single  opening  shall  be  greater  in 
area  than  two  hundred  square  feet. 

(4)  Doorways  and  other  openings  in  party  walls  and,  except  where 
otherwise  specified  in  this  code,  in  walls  required  to  have  four-hour  re- 
sistance to  the  spread  of  fire,  shall  have  automatic-closing  Class  A  fire 
doors  on  both  sides  of  the  wall.  The  sum  of  the  areas  of  such  openings 
in  one  story  shall  not  exceed  one-half  of  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  said  party 
walls  and  no  single  opening  shall  be  greater  in  area  than  one  hundred 
square  feet. 

(5)  In  the  protection  of  openings  less  than  two  square  feet  in  area  in 
fire-resistive  walls,  the  commissioner  may  waive  in  part  or  modify  the 
requirements  of  this  section  subject  to  such  conditions  as  he  shall  in  each 
case  specify. 

(6)  In  doorways  required  to  have  specified  width  and  height  a  stop 
moulding  forming  a  rabbet  of  the  frame  may  project  on  each  side  and  at 
the  top  not  more  than  three-quarters  of  an  inch  inside  the  required  dimen- 

(123) 


Sees.   1901=1903 

sions.  The  door,  in  open  position,  shall  clear  the  required  width  of  the 
doorway  completely  and  the  door  and  frame  shall  have  additional  width 
if  necessary  for  this  purpose. 

(7)  Doors  required  to  be  automatic-closing  shall  be  self-closing  and 
normally  closed,  or  equipped  to  close  automatically  by  the  action  of  heat 
in  the  event  of  fire. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

fSect.    1902.     Windows. —  (a)     Fire    windows    shall    conform    to    the 
requirements  of  Part  22. 

(b)  Windows  in  exterior  walls  of  buildings  shall  conform  to  the  require- 
ments of  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  and  Parts  14  and  20. 

(c)  Windows  in  enclosures  of  vertical  openings  shall  conform  to  the 
requirements  of  Part  15. 

(d)  Windows  in  required  separations  between  two  units  of  occupancy  or 
between  two  fire  divisions  of  a  building  shall  conform  to  the  requirements 
of  Part  13. 

(e)  Windows  in  other  walls  and  partitions  required  to  have  resistance  to 
the  spread  of  fire  shall  be  fire  windows. 

(f)  In  walls  and  partitions  the  openings  of  which  are  required  to  have 
the  protection  of  fire  doors,  a  fixed  fire  window  may  be  considered  equivalent 
to  one  Class  B  fire  door,  but  two  such  windows  shall  not  be  substituted  as 
equivalent  to  two  doors  in  an  opening  where  two  fire  doors  are  required. 

(g)  In  the  exterior  walls  of  buildings  of  approved  occupancy  and  con- 
struction the  commissioner  may  allow  the  substitution  of  an  approved  system 
of  open  sprinklers  and  ordinary  windows  for  the  fire  windows  specified  in 
this  section. 

(h)  Windows  in  exterior  walls  of  elevator  shafts  shall  be  protected  by 
vertical  metal  bars  not  less  than  five  eighths  inch  in  diameter,  outside  the 
sash,  forming  spaces  not  more  than  ten  inches  wide,  firmly  secured  in  the 
opening. 

(i)  Openings  in  cellar  and  basement  walls  shall  have  effective  protection 
against  the  passage  of  rats. 

(j)  In  display  windows  fronting  on  a  public  way,  in  the  first  story  of  a 
building,  a  bulkhead  may  be  constructed  which  shall  be  of  the  same  type 
of  construction  as  the  first  floor.  Where  the  first  floor  is  continuous  to  the 
exterior  wall  without  opening,  a  platform  of  wood  or  other  combustible 
material  may  be  built  to  form  the  raised  floor  of  the  display  space.  In  dis- 
play windows,  fronting  on  a  public  way,  not  more  than  two  stories  high, 
the  back,  sides  and  ceiling  of  the  display  space,  shelves,  partitions  and  the 
like,  and  entrance  vestibules  and  doorways  in  connection  with  such  display 
windows,  may  be  of  wood  or  other  combustible  but  not  highly  flammable 
material;  provided,  that  this  paragraph  shall  not  be  construed  to  allow  a 
vertical  opening  in  any  floor  without  the  enclosure  specified  in  Part  15. 
[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

JSect.   1903.     Skylights. —  (a)     Except   on   greenhouses   skylights   shall 
be  of  incombustible  materials. 

(124) 


Sees.  1903-1904 

(b)  Except  on  greenhouses,  and  except  over  photographic  studios  with 
the  approval  of  the  commissioner,  skylights  shall  be  glazed  with  wire  glass 
or  shall  be  protected  by  wire  screens.  Such  screens  shall  be  of  at  least  No.  12 
gage  wire  with  not  larger  than  one-inch  mesh,  on  substantial  metal  supports, 
at  least  six  inches  but  not  more  than  twelve  inches  above  the  glass  and  parallel 
thereto,  and  projecting  at  least  six  inches  beyond  the  edge  of  the  skylight. 

(c)  Skylights  over  stairways  and  corridors,  except  in  buildings  of  Group  I, 
and  skylights  over  restaurants,  halls  and  other  public  rooms,  shall  be  glazed 
with  wire  glass  or  protected  by  a  wire  screen  or  a  ceiling  light  of  wire  glass 
below. 

(d)  Skylights,  except  the  glass  thereof,  shall  be  designed  to  support  the 
loads  provided  in  Part  23  for  roofs  of  corresponding  slope. 

(e)  The  parts  of  skylights  exposed  to  the  weather,  gutters  for  leakage 
or  condensation,  outside  screens  and  their  supports  if  of  metal,  shall  be  of 
metal  protected  against  corrosion. 

[  |As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  1904.  Sidewalk  Lights. —  Glass  units  of  approved  shape,  size 
and  thickness  may  be  set  in  reinforced  concrete  roofs,  floors  or  sidewalks, 
with  or  without  metal  shields,  in  a  manner  approved  by  the  commissioner. 
Screen  protection  shall  not  be  required  above  or  below  such  construction 
except  where  specifically  required  by  the  commissioner. 


(125) 


Sees.  2001=2002 


PART  20. 
PENTHOUSES  AND  ROOF  STRUCTURES. 

Section 

2001  —  Height  of  Buildings. 

2002  —  Penthouses. 

2003  —  Roof  Structures. 

*Section  2001.  Height  of  Buildings. —  (a)  Limitation,  wherever  it 
occurs  in  this  code,  upon  the  height  of  buildings  measured  to  the  highest 
point  of  the  roof  thereof  shall  not  be  held  to  limit  the  height  of  the  steeples 
of  churches,  towers,  domes,  cupolas,  belfries,  parapets,  or  other  walls,  cor- 
nices, statuar}^,  balustrades,  railings,  flag  poles,  weather-vanes,  chimneys, 
vent  pipes,  skylights,  ventilators,  steam  exhausts,  tanks,  signs  and  pent- 
houses for  the  enclosure  of  tanks,  stairways,  elevator  machinery,  ventilating 
fans  and  the  like,  erected  upon  or  above  the  roof  of  a  building,  provided 
such  structures  shall  not  be  occupied  by  persons  nor  be  used  for  storage  or 
for  a  manufacturing  process  requiring  constant  or  frequent  attendance. 

(b)  The  provisions  of  this  part  shall  not  be  held  to  authorize  construc- 
tion of  any  kind  above  the  limit  of  height  specified  for  every  part  of  a  build- 
ing in  section  one  hundred  and  thirty-six  of  Part  1  of  this  code. 

(c)  The  limitation  of  height  of  buildings  contained  in  Parts  3  to  12,  in- 
clusive, of  this  code  and  the  provisions  of  this  part  shall  not  be  held  to  pro- 
hibit the  use  of  the  open  roof  of  a  building,  nor  the  la\dng  of  suitable  flooring 
over  the  roof  covering,  which  conforms  with  the  provisions  of  this  code  for 
the  type  of  construction  of  the  building. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  2002.  Penthouses. —  (a)  Penthouses  enclosing  elevator  machin- 
ery, ventilating  fans,  tanks,  elevators,  stairways  and  the  like  shall  not  be 
larger  than  reasonably  necessary  for  their  purpose,  including  the  storage  of 
tools,  spare  parts,  appliances  and  materials  necessary  for  the  maintenance 
and  repair  of  such  equipment. 

(b)  Penthouses  on  buildings  of  Type  I  or  Type  II  construction  shall  be  of 
incombustible  materials  and  the  walls  and  roofs  thereof  shall  afford  protection 
against  fire  outside  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction.  Doors  and  win- 
dows in  such  walls  shall  be  Class  C  fire  doors  or  fire  windows. 

(c)  Penthouses  on  buildings  of  Type  V  construction  shall  be  of  incom- 
bustible materials  including  the  doors  and  windows  thereof. 

(d)  Penthouses  on  buildings  of  Type  III,  Type  IV  or  Type  VI  shall  be 
of  the  same  type  of  construction  as  the  building  and  the  walls  thereof  may 
be  constructed  as  provided  in  this  code  for  partitions,  covered  on  the  outside 
by  metal,  cement  plaster  on  metal  lath  or  equally  fire-retardant  covering. 

(e)  The  wall  of  a  penthouse  which  rests  upon  the  exterior  wall  of  a  build- 
ing shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  this  code  for  an  exterior  wall. 

(126) 


Sees.  2002=2003 

(f)  Except  where  used  as  provided  for  in  paragraph  (a)  of  this  section,  a 
penthouse  upon  the  roof  of  a  building  shall  be  considered  an  additional  story 
or  additional  stories  of  the  building  and  shall  conform  to  the  requirements 
therefor.  The  provisions  of  this  section  shall  not  be  held  to  limit  the  con- 
struction of  such  additional  stories. 

Sect.  2003.  Roof  Structures. —  (a)  The  walls  of  dormers  shall  be 
constructed  as  specified  in  this  code  either  for  the  exterior  walls  or  for  the 
roof  of  the  building  on  which  they  are  built. 

(b)  Where  persons  occupy  or  use  the  open  roof  of  a  building,  such  roof 
or  the  portion  so  occupied  shall  be  guarded  by  a  parapet  wall  or  approved 
fence  or  railing  not  less  than  forty- two  inches  high. 

(c)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  part,  and  except  flag  poles  and 
water  tanks,  all  structures  erected  on  the  roof  of  a  building  shall  be  of  incom- 
bustible materials. 


(127) 


Sees.  2101=2102 

PART  21. 
CHIMNEYS  AND   HEATING   APPARATUS. 

Section 

2101  —  Support  of  Chimneys. 

2102  —  Chimney  Construction. 

2103  —  Chimney  Height. 

2104  —  Wood  near  a  Chimney. 

2105  —  Smokestacks. 

2106  —  Smoke  Pipes. 

2107  —  Fireplaces. 

2108  —  High  Pressure  Boilers. 

2109  —  Low  Pressure  Boilers. 

2110  —  Hot  Air  Furnaces. 

2111  —  Hot  Air  Pipes  and  Registers. 

2112  —  Electric  Ranges,  Water  Heaters  and  Hot  Plates. 

2113  —  Domestic  Stoves  and  Ranges, 

2114  —  Commercial  Stoves  and  Ranges. 

2115  — Oil  Burners. 

2116  —  Incinerators. 

2117  —  Support  of  Heat  Producing  Apparatus. 

21 18  —  Smoke  Connection. 

2119  —  Other  Heat  Producing  Apparatus. 

*Section  2101.  Support  of  Chimneys. — ■  (a)  A  chimney  shall  support 
no  vertical  load  except  its  own  weight,  but  this  provision  shall  not  apply  to 
masonry  bonded  to  a  chimney  outside  the  required  thickness  thereof,  nor  shall 
it  be  held  to  forbid  a  suspended  staging  for  erection  or  maintenance.  An 
independent  or  free-standing  chimney  shall  be  stable  and  shall  support  its 
weight  and  resist  the  force  of  the  wind  without  exceeding  the  stresses  allowed 
by  this  code  for  the  materials  of  which  it  is  constructed. 

(b)  Unless  corbelled  from  a  masonry  wall,  a  chimney  shall  be  supported 
upon  a  foundation  of  masonry  or  reinforced  concrete  conforming  to  the  pro" 
visions  of  Part  29,  upon  the  furnace  which  it  serves,  if  of  masonry  and  capable 
of  supporting  the  chimney,  or  upon  primary  framing  of  Type  I  or  T}^pe  II 
construction. 

(c)  No  chimney  shall  be  corbelled  from  a  masonry  wall  more  than  the 
thickness  of  the  wall  nor  from  a  wall  less  than  twelve  inches  thick. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  2102.  Chimney  Construction. —  (a)  The  walls  of  chimneys 
shall  be  of  brick,  stone,  cast  stone,  concrete  blocks,  structural  clay  tile  or  plain 
or  reinforced  concrete,  with  such  lining  as  is  specified  in  this  section. 

(b)  For  the  purposes  of  this  part  the  lining  of  a  chimney  flue  shall  mean 
the  material  forming  the  inner  surface  of  the  flue,  whether  the  remainder  of 
the  chimney  wall  is  (1)  integral  with  the  lining,  (2)  additional  thickness  of 
similar  material  or  (3)  of  different  materials.  Except  as  otherwise  specified 
in  paragraph  (i)  of  this  section,  the  lining  of  every  flue  in  a  chimney  shall  be 
of  burned  clay  or  shale  brick  not  less  than  three  and  one'  half  inches  thick  of 

(128) 


Sec.  2102 

A  or  B  quality  as  specified  in  Part  24,  or  of  refractory  material  as  specified 
in  this  section.  The  lining  of  every  chimney  flue  more  than  two  hundred 
and  fifty-six  square  inches  in  area  of  cross-section  shall  be  of  refractory 
material  from  a  point  not  less  than  twice  the  inside  diameter  of  the  chimney 
(the  larger  diameter  if  rectangular)  below  the  bottom  of  the  smoke  pipe 
entrance,  or  from  the  bottom  of  the  flue,  to  a  point  not  less  than  six  times  such 
inside  diameter  above  the  top  of  the  smoke  pipe  entrance.  Refractory 
material  shall  consist  of  burned  fire  clay  flue  lining  not  less  than  five  eighths 
inch  thick,  fire  brick  not  less  than  three  and  one  half  inches  thick,  or  radial 
hollow  clay  chimney  tile,  made  of  suitable  refractory  clay  capable  of  with- 
standing the  heat  and  corrosive  effect  of  flue  gases  and  having  a  softening  point 
not  lower  than  nineteen  hundred  degrees  Fahrenheit.  In  such  a  chimney 
mounted  upon  a  masonry  furnace  the  required  refractory  flue  lining  shall  be 
continuous  with  the  lining  of  the  furnace  and  shall  extend  not  less  than  six 
times  the  inside  diameter  of  the  flue  above  the  top  of  the  furnace. 

(c)  Burned  fire  claj'"  flue  linings  shall  be  built  in  as  the  masonry  of  the 
chimney  is  laid.  All  joints  and  spaces  between  the  masonry  and  lining  shall 
be  thoroughly  filled  with  mortar  as  each  course  of  the  masonry  is  laid. 
Cracked,  broken  or  otherwise  defective  flue  lining  shall  not  be  used  in  a 
chimney.  Fire  brick  or  radial  tile  lining  shall  be  laid  in  fire  clay  or  with 
narrow  beds  and  joints  of  mortar.  Burned  clay  or  shale  brick  lining  shall  be 
laid  in  mortar  or  fire  clay.  Brick  or  radial  tile  lining  may  be  separated  from 
the  chimney  wall  provided  the  wall  outside  the  lining  is  not  less  than  eight 
inches  thick,  and  both  wall  and  lining  are  independently  stable. 

(d)  Not  more  than  three  flues  of  burned  fire  clay  flue  lining  may  be  laid 
contiguous  in  a  chimney  nor  shall  the  aggregate  width  of  such  contiguous 
flues  exceed  thirty-seven  inches  without  separating  masonry  withes  at  least 
four  inches  thick  bonded  to  the  walls  of  the  chimney.  Walls  of  brick  between 
two  flues  in  a  chimney  shall  be  not  less  than  three  and  one  half  inches  thick. 

(e)  The  masonry  wall  of  a  chimney  outside  the  flue  lining  shall  be  not  less 
than  four  inches  thick.  In  chimneys  of  radial  hollow  clay  chimney  tile  in 
which  wall  and  lining  are  integral  the  total  wall  thickness  shall  not  be  less  than 
six  inches. 

(f)  Stone  masonry  of  sawed  or  dressed  stone  in  courses,  well  bonded  at 
corners  and  tied  with  anchors  of  non-corrodible  metal  shall  be  not  less  than 
four  inches  thick  outside  the  flue  lining.  Chimney  walls  of  other  stone 
masonry  shall  be  not  less  than  twelve  inches  thick  outside  the  flue  lining. 

(g)  Concrete  block  masonry  shall  not  be  used  in  an  independent  or  free- 
standing chimney  nor  in  chimneys  bonded  to  walls  more  than  three  stories 
in  height. 

(h)  Structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  of  A  grade,  as  specified  in  Part  24, 
may  be  used  in  the  walls  of  chimneys,  or  radial  hollow  clay  chimney  tile  of 
equivalent  qualit}".  Other  hollow  clay  tile  shall  not  be  used.  Units  shall 
be  so  laid  that  the  ends  of  cells  are  not  exposed. 

(i)  Chimneys  of  concrete  cast  in  place  shall  be  reinforced  for  shrinkage 
and  temperature  stresses.  Concrete  integral  with  the  chimney  wall  shall  be 
considered  satisfactory  flue  lining  in  such  chimneys  above  a  point  thirty  feet 
above  the  smoke  entrance,  and  in  flues  less  than  one  hundred  and  forty-four 

(129) 


Sees.  2102-2105 

square  inches  in  area  in  buildings  of  Group  I,  Division  1,  provided  the  con- 
crete walls  are  not  less  than  six  inches  thick  and  the  concrete  is  proportioned 
for  a  strength  of  two  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch  as  specified  in  Part  26. 

(j)  Chimneys  shall  have  a  coping  at  the  top  for  protection  of  the  masonry 
from  the  weather. 

Sect.  2103.  Chimney  Height. — (a)  Chimneys  shall  be  carried  to  a 
height  sufficient  to  protect  adjoining  buildings  from  fire  and  smoke  and  unless 
the  roof  is  covered  with  incombustible  material,  shall  extend  at  least  thirty 
inches  above  the  highest  point  of  intersection  with  the  roof. 

(b)  Chimney  flues  shall  have  a  well  below  the  entrance  of  the  lowest 
smoke  pipe  and  shall  be  provided  with  a  metal  cleanout  door  with  built-in 
frame. 

*Sect.  2104.  Wood  near  a  Chimney. — (a)  No  chimney  shall 
be  built  nearer  than  one  inch  from  wooden  floor  or  roof  joists  or  nearer  than 
one  inch  from  wooden  studding,  furring  or  other  woodwork.  The  space 
about  a  chimney  shall  be  fire-stopped  at  each  floor  and  ceiling  level  with 
incombustible  material,  unless  such  space  is  treated  as  a  vertical  opening 
and  is  enclosed  as  provided  in  Part  15. 

(b)     In  case  wooden  beams  or  other  woodwork  are  supported  on  a  masonry 

wall  or  pier  bonded  to  a  chimney,  such  woodwork  shall  not  be  nearer  than 

four  inches  from  the  chimney.     For  the  purposes  of  this  section  a  chimney 

shall  consist  of  the  flue  or  flues,  the  lining,  if  any,  and  the  walls  to  the 

required  thickness. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

fSect.  2105.  Smokestacks. — (a)  A  smokestack  shall  support  no 
vertical  load  other  than  its  own  weight,  but  this  shall  not  be  held  to  forbid 
a  suspended  staging  for  erection  or  maintenance.  A  smokestack  exposed  to 
the  force  of  the  wind  shall  be  capable  of  resisting  such  force  and  support  its 
own  weight  without  exceeding  the  stresses  allowed  by  this  code  for  the 
materials  of  which  it  is  constructed. 

(b)  A  smokestack  shall  be  supported  by  incombustible  construction  or 
by  the  construction  supporting  the  furnace  which  it  serves,  but  in  buildings  of 
wooden  construction  a  stack  may  be  stayed  laterally  by  incombustible  stays 
to  the  wooden  construction.  A  smokestack  may  be  mounted  directly  upon 
and  supported  by  the  boiler  or  furnace  which  it  serves  if  such  boiler  or  furnace 
is  designed  and  constructed  to  support  safely  the  weight  thereof. 

(c)  The  metal  of  a  circular  steel  or  sheet  iron  smokestack  shall  have  not 
less  than  the  following  thickness: — 


Diameter  of  Stack. 


Thickness. 


Not  more  than  16  inches 

More  than  16,  not  over  24  inches. 
More  than  24,  not  over  30  inches . 
More  than  30,  not  over  48  inches . 
More  than  48,  not  over  60  inches . 


No.  10  Gage 
No.  8  Gage 
3/16  inch 
1/4  inch 
5/16  inch 


(130) 


Sees.  2105-2107 

(d)  A  smokestack  may  be  mounted  on  the  outside  of  a  building  sup- 
ported by  and  secured  to  the  exterior  wall  thereof.  If  the  wall  is  of  com- 
bustible materials  the  stack  shall  be  not  less  than  four  inches  and  not  less 
than  one  third  the  stack  diameter  away  and  the  wall  for  a  width  not  less  than 
twice  the  diameter  of  the  stack  shall  be  covered  by  one  quarter  inch  of  asbestos 
and  sheet  metal,  or  approved  equivalent. 

(e)  A  smokestack  inside  a  building  shall  be  protected  from  contact  with 
goods  or  persons  by  a  substantial  shield  of  incombustible  materials,  with 
provision  for  ventilating  the  space  between  stack  and  shield.  If  a  smoke 
stack  is  within  a  ventilating  shaft  or  other  enclosure  of  a  vertical  opening, 
provision  shall  be  made  for  ventilating  the  shaft  or  enclosure  at  the  bottom 
and  above  the  roof.  Such  enclosure  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials  and 
the  stack  shall  stand  clear  of  the  enclosing  walls  on  all  sides. 

(f)  A  smokestack  shall  have  at  least  four  inches  clearance  from  com- 
bustible material;  such  material  within  twelve  inches  of  the  stack  shall  be 
covered  by  one  quarter  inch  asbestos  and  sheet  metal  or  its  approved  equiva- 
lent and  the  space  about  the  stack  shall  be  ventilated. 

(g)  Pertinent  provisions  for  chimneys  shall  apply  also  to  smokestacks. 

[  -\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

JSect.  2106.  Smoke  Pipes. —  (a)  Smoke  pipes  of  metal  shall  be  not 
less  than  number  twenty-four  gage  copper-bearing,  black  or  galvanized  sheet 
iron,  except  that  where  gas  is  used  for  fuel,  sheet  copper  weighing  not  less  than 
sixteen  ounces  per  square  foot,  or  other  approved  material  may  be  used. 

(b)  Smoke  pipes,  where  they  connect  with  a  chimney,  shall  be  tightly 
fitted  in  a  burned  fire  clay,  cast  iron  or  other  substantial  thimble  built  into  the 
masonry,  or  a  smooth-sided  opening  of  brick  or  other  masonry. 

(c)  Smoke  pipes  of  unprotected  metal  shall  not  be  nearer  than  eighteen 
inches  below  exposed  combustible  construction  unless  the  combustible 
material  is  protected  by  an  incombustible  shield  having  a  width  equal  to  twice 
the  diameter  of  the  pipe,  suspended  at  least  three  inches  below  such  combus- 
tible material  and  three  inches  above  the  pipe  and  ventilated  on  both  sides. 
The  space  between  a  metal  smoke  pipe  covered  with  not  less  than  one  and  one 
half  inches  of  asbestos  or  other  approved  insulation  and  combustible  material 
above,  or  between  a  smoke  pipe  of  unprotected  metal  and  woodwork  above 
protected  by  a  ceiling  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  rating  shall  be  not  less  than 
three  inches. 

(d)  Metal  smoke  pipes  shall  be  at  least  twelve  inches  horizontally  from 
combustible  material  unless  protection  and  clearance  are  provided  as  speci- 
fied in  paragraph  (c)  of  this  section. 

(e)  If  a  masonry  flue  connects  a  furnace  with  a  chimney  or  a  stack,  it  shall 
be  lined  and  otherwise  constructed  as  specified  for  a  chimney. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  j 

*Sect.  2107.  Fireplaces. —  (a)  Fireplace  walls  shall  be  not  less  than 
eight  inches  thick  and  if  built  of  stone  or  hollow  units  shall  be  not  less  than 
twelve  inches  thick.  The  faces  of  such  walls  exposed  to  fire  shall  be  lined 
with  fire  brick  or  other  suitable  fire-resistive  material.    When  lined  with  four 

(131) 


Sees.  2107=2110 

inches  of  fire  brick  such  lining  may  be  included  in  the  required  minimum 
thickness.  Every  fireplace  shall  be  connected  to  a  chimney  flue  built  as 
specified  in  section  twenty-one  hundred  and  two. 

(b)  Fireplaces  shall  have  hearths  supported  by  trimmer  arches  or  other 
approved  fire-resistive  construction.  Trimmer  arches  and  hearths  shall  be 
not  less  than  twenty  inches  wide  measured  from  the  face  of  the  chimney 
breast  and  shall  extend  not  less  than  twelve  inches  beyond  the  fireplace  open- 
ing on  each  side.  Trimmer  arches  shall  be  of  brick,  stone  or  hollow  tile  not 
less  than  four  inches  thick,  shall  spring  from  the  masonry  supporting  the 
fireplace  and  may  thrust  against  the  floor  frame  whether  of  wood  or  other 
material.  A  flat  stone  or  reinforced  concrete  slab  may  be  used  to  support  a 
hearth  instead  of  an  arch  if  it  is  properly  supported  and  a  suitable  fill  provided 
between  it  and  the  hearth.  Hearths  shall  be  of  brick,  stone,  tile  or  concrete. 
Wood  centering  under  a  trimmer  arch  shall  be  removed  after  the  masonry 
has  thoroughly  set.  No  combustible  materials  shall  be  placed  within  three 
inches  from  the  jambs  or  from  the  top  or  arch  of  a  fireplace  opening. 

(c)  No  heater  burning  solid  or  liquid  fuel  shall  be  placed  in  a  fireplace 
which  does  not  conform  with  the  requirements  of  this  section.  The  provi- 
sions of  this  section  shall  not  be  held  to  prevent  construction  without  flue 
of  a  suitable  foundation  and  wall  protection,  resembling  a  fire  place  for  a  gas- 
burning  space  heater;  but  if  such  construction  has  a  flue,  it  shall  conform  in 
all  respects  to  the  provisions  of  this  section  for  a  fireplace. 

(d)  Each  fireplace  shall  have  a  separate  and  independent  flue  throughout 
its  length  to  the  open  air. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  2108.  High  Pressure  Boilers. — (a)  Boilers  generating  steam 
at  a  pressure  in  excess  of  fifteen  pounds  per  square  inch  shall  be  so  located 
that  no  combustible  material  shall  be  less  than  two  feet  from  the  top  or  sides 
or  ten  feet  from  the  front;  and  all  combustible  material  less  than  four  feet  from 
the  top  or  sides  shall  be  protected  by  incombustible  construction  of  at  least 
one-hour  fire-resistive  rating  and  shall  be  well  ventilated  to  prevent  the 
temperature  from  rising  above  two  hundred  and  fifty  degrees  Fahrenheit. 

(b)  Steel,  cast  iron  or  reinforced  concrete  columns  adjacent  to  such  boilers, 
except  columns  which  support  only  the  boilers,  shall  not  be  in  direct  contact 
with  boiler  settings  but  there  shall  be  an  open  and  unobstructed  space  at 
least  four  inches  wide  for  ventilation. 

Sect.  2109.  Low  Pressure  Boilers. —  Boilers  generating  steam  at  a 
pressure  not  over  fifteen  pounds  per  square  inch,  and  hot  water  heaters  not 
including  domestic  water  supply  heaters,  shall  have  clearance  from  wooden 
partitions,  ceiling  and  other  combustible  material,  the  same  as  specified  for 
hot  air  furnaces  in  section  twenty-one  hundred  and  ten. 

fSect.  2110.  Hot  Air  Furnaces. — (a)  Hot  air  furnaces  shall  be  en- 
cased in  a  metal  or  masonry  shield  with  an  air  space  between  shield  and  fire 
box.  Unless  the  shield  over  the  top  is  double  with  an  air  space,  the  top  of 
the  furnace  shall  be  covered  with  approved  insulating  material  one  inch  thick. 

(132) 


Sees.  2110=2111 

(b)  Combustible  material  placed  within  seven  feet  from  a  hot  air  furnace 
at  the  front  or  within  two  feet  at  the  sides  or  rear  shall  be  protected  by  sheet 
metal,  or  asbestos  board,  and  if  such  material  is  within  one  foot  from  such 
furnace  at  the  sides  or  rear,  it  shall  be  protected  in  the  manner  required  in 
section  twenty-one  hundred  and  six  for  woodwork  near  a  metal  smoke  pipe. 
The  distance  from  the  top  of  a  hot  air  furnace  to  exposed  combustible  ma- 
terial above,  within  two  feet  laterally  from  such  furnace  and  four  feet  in  front, 
shall  be  not  less  than  eighteen  inches  unless  such  woodwork  is  protected  as 
provided  in  section  twenty-one  hundred  and  six  for  combustible  material 
above  a  metal  smoke  pipe. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Grd.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

JSect.  2111.  Hot  Air  Pipes  and  Registers. — (a)  Horizontal  hot 
air  furnace  pipes  shall  be  placed  at  least  six  inches  below  combustible  material 
except  that  if  such  material  is  protected  by  metal  lath  and  plaster  or  a  loose- 
fitting  metal  shield  or  if  the  hot  air  pipe  is  covered  with  one  half  inch  of  corru- 
gated asbestos  insulation,  the  clear  distance  may  be  reduced  to  three  inches 
for  portions  of  pipes  within  five  feet  from  the  furnace  and  to  one  inch  for 
more  distant  pipes. 

(b)  Hot  air  pipes  passing  through  combustible  partitions  or  floors  either 
shall  be  double  sheet  metal  pipes  with  at  least  one  half  inch  air  space  or  be 
covered  with  asbestos  paper  weighing  not  less  than  sixteen  pounds  per  one 
hundred  square  feet. 

(c)  No  hot  air  pipes  shall  be  placed  in  a  wooden  stud  partition  or  wooden 
enclosure  unless  it  is  at  least  five  feet  horizontally  from  its  outlet  on  the 
furnace.  Hot  air  pipes  in  combustible  partitions  either  shall  be  double  with 
one  half  inch  air  space,  or  the  space  shall  be  lined  with  sheet  metal  or  other 
incombustible  material,  or  the  pipe  shall  be  covered  securely  with  asbestos 
paper  weighing  not  less  than  sixteen  pounds  per  one  hundred  square  feet. 
Hot  air  pipes  in  closets  shall  be  not  less  than  one  inch  away  from  woodwork 
or  be  double  pipe  with  one  half  inch  air  space  or  be  covered  with  asbestos 
paper  weighing  not  less  than  sixteen  pounds  per  one  hundred  square  feet. 

(d)  Every  hot  air  furnace  shall  have  at  least  one  hot  air  pipe  and  register 
without  damper,  valve  or  louvres. 

(e)  Where  a  register  in  the  floor  directly  over  a  furnace  is  connected  by 
a  pipe  from  the  top  thereof,  such  pipe  shall  be  double  with  not  less  than  one 
inch  ventilated  air  space  and  no  combustible  material  shall  be  within  three 
inches  from  the  inner  pipe. 

(f)  Hot  air  registers  placed  in  woodwork  shall  be  surrounded  with  borders 
of  incombustible  material  which  shall  prevent  the  register  from  coming  in 
contact  therewith. 

(g)  Register  boxes  for  warm  air  in  wooden  floors  or  partitions  shall  be  made 
of  sheet  metal,  double,  with  at  least  one  half  inch  air  space  or  shall  be  kept 
at  least  one  half  inch  from  woodwork  and  covered  with  asbestos  paper  weigh- 
ing not  less  than  sixteen  pounds  per  one  hundred  square  feet. 

(h)     The  provisions  of  this  section  shall  not  apply  to  hot  air  pipes  and 
registers  from  indirect  low  pressure  steam  or  hot  water  radiators. 
[  JAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

(133) 


Sees.  2112-2114 

*Sect.  2112.  Water  Heaters  and  Hot  Plates. —  (a)  Gas  or  electric 
domestic  water  supply  heaters  and  gas  or  electric  hot  plates  shall  not  be 
nearer  than  seven  inches  from  a  combustible  wall  unless  the  combustible 
material  in  the  wall  is  protected  by  two  inches  clearance  and  sheet  metal  or 
its  approved  equivalent  extending  at  least  nine  inches  beyond  each  side  and 
two  feet  above  the  apparatus.  Wooden  ceiling  or  shelving  shall  not  be  less 
than  three  feet  above  such  apparatus. 

(b)  Gas  hot  plates  and  electric  hot  plates  or  appliances  of  more  than 
eighteen  hundred  watts  capacity  shall  not  be  placed  upon  a  wooden  shelf 
or  counter  unless  the  appliance  has  a  solid  metal  floor  under  the  burners  or 
heating  elements,  raised  not  less  than  two  inches  above  the  shelf,  and  the 
shelf  is  protected  with  sheet  metal;  or  unless  equivalent  approved  protection 
is  provided. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

fSect.  2113.  Domestic  Stoves  and  Ranges. —  (a)  Insulated  or  un- 
insulated stoves  and  ranges  not  of  the  flushback  type  used  for  heating  rooms, 
water,  or  for  the  cooking  or  laundry  of  a  family,  whether  burning  solid,  liquid, 
gaseous  fuel  or  electricity  shall  not  be  placed  within  seven  inches  from  a 
combustible  wall.  No  wood  or  other  combustible  materials  forming  shelves, 
ceiling,  cabinets  or  fixed  furnishings  shall  be  installed  less  than  three  feet 
above  the  top  of  stove  or  range  or  the  uppermost  oven  of  either,  or  within 
seven  inches  of  the  sides  of  ranges  or  stoves.  Where  incombustible  materials 
are  used  for  shelving  —  ceiling,  cabinets  or  fixed  furnishings  —  the  minimum 
clearance  above  the  top  of  range,  stove  or  uppermost  oven  of  either  shall  be 
eighteen  inches  and  from  the  sides  of  range  or  stove,  four  inches. 

(b)  Insulated  Flushback  Type  Ranges  or  stoves  may  be  placed  directly 
against  existing  or  new  partitions,  walls  or  other  structure  providing  the 
entire  wall,  partition  or  structure  is  composed  wholly  of  incombustible  ma- 
terials. Arrangement  of  shelving,  cabinets,  ceiling  and  fixed  furnishings  shall 
be  as  mentioned  in  paragraph  (a)  of  this  section. 

(c)  Combustion  chambers  of  stoves  or  ranges  burning  solid  or  liquid  fuel 
shall  be  connected  to  a  chimney  or  a  smokestack.  Ovens  and  hoods  of  stoves 
and  ranges  may  be  ventilated  to  a  chimney,  smokestack,  or  ventilating  duct. 
Such  connections  shall  be  of  metal  not  less  than  number  twenty-six  gage 
thickness  and  wherever  they  pass  through  construction  of  combustible 
material  they  shall  be  encased  in  a  sleeve  of  approved  type  which  provides  a 
clearance  of  at  least  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  any  combustible  material. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 

Sect.  2114.  Commercial  Stoves  and  Ranges. —  (a)  Stoves  and  ranges 
such  as  are  used  in  kitchens  of  restaurants,  hotels,  clubs  and  similar  estab- 
lishments shall  not  be  placed  nearer  than  twenty-four  inches  from  a  com- 
bustible wall  unless  the  combustible  material  in  the  wall  is  protected  by  six 
inches  clearance,  not  less  than  one-hour  fire-resistive  construction  and  a  shield 
of  metal  or  other  approved  incombustible  material  with  free  circulation  of  air 
between  it  and  the  wall,  extending  at  least  twenty-four  inches  beyond  each 
side  of  the  range  and  four  feet  above  the  top. 

(134) 


Sees.  2114=2117 

(b)  Such  stoves  and  ranges  shall  be  provided  with  hoods  of  incombustible 
material  connected  by  pipe  or  duct  with  an  independent  chimney  flue  or  smoke 
stack  extending  above  the  roof.  The  hood,  if  of  sheet  metal  or  other  simi- 
larly thin  material,  shall  be  separated  from  combustible  material  above  by 
at  least  nine  inches  clearance,  or  by  a  ceiling  of  one-hour  fire-resistive  con- 
struction. The  connecting  pipe  or  duct  shall  be  separated  from  combustible 
material  as  specified  for  smoke  pipes  in  section  twenty-one  hundred  and  six, 
with  one  half  the  clearances  there  specified. 

Sect.  2115.  Oil  Burners. —  Oil  burners  shall  be  installed  in  accordance 
with  chapter  one  hundred  and  forty-eight  of  the  General  Laws  and  regulations 
issued  thereunder. 

Sect.  2116.  Incinerators. —  (a)  All  incinerators,  except  those  not 
exceeding  four  square  feet  in  grate  area,  shall  be  constructed  of  brick  masonry 
or  reinforced  concrete.  The  walls  and  roof  shall  be  at  least  eight  inches 
thick;  if  the  area  of  the  combustion  chamber  is  fifteen  square  feet  or  more, 
the  walls  and  roof  shall  be  at  least  twelve  inches  thick. 

(b)  The  combustion  chamber  above  the  grate,  and  both  above  and  below 
the  grate  in  down-draft  incinerators,  shall  be  lined  with  fire  brick  laid  in  mor- 
tar or  fire  clay  or  with  equally  fire-resistive  material.  Fire  brick  lining  may  be 
included  in  the  required  wall  and  roof  thickness. 

(c)  If  the  smoke  flue  is  used  as  a  refuse  chute,  it  shall  be  a  smooth-lined 
chimney,  vertical  and  directly  over  the  combustion  chamber.  Charging 
hoppers  shall  be  of  approved  design  and  construction  and  shall  not  project 
within  the  flue  area.  The  area  of  charging  opening  shall  not  exceed  one  third 
the  flue  area  nor  shall  the  least  dimension  of  the  flue  be  less  than  three  times  the 
vertical  dimension  of  the  charging  hopper.  The  top  of  the  chimney  shall  be 
covered  with  a  cage  or  screen  of  non-corrodible  metal  of  approved  design,  and 
having  an  area  not  less  than  twice  the  flue  area. 

Sect.  2117.  Support  of  Heat  Producing  Apparatus. —  (a)  Except 
as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section,  heat  producing  apparatus  whether 
electrical  or  by  the  combustion  of  solid,  liquid  or  gaseous  fuel  shall  be  sup- 
ported upon  a  substantial  foundation  of  incombustible  and  heat-resistive 
materials  laid  on  the  ground,  or  upon  a  floor  of  Type  I  construction. 

(b)  Electrical  appliances  of  less  than  eighteen  hundred  watts  capacity 
shall  not  be  subject  to  the  requirements  of  this  section. 

(c)  Domestic  stoves  and  ranges  used  for  heating  one  room  or  for  the 
cooking  or  laundry  of  one  family,  gas  or  electric  water  supply  heaters,  and 
heaters  burning  solid  or  liquid  fuel  for  the  domestic  hot  water  supply  of  one 
family,  may  be  supported  upon  floors  of  Type  II  or  Type  V  construction  with 
incombustible  flooring.  Such  apparatus  may  be  supported  upon  a  wooden 
floor  or  combustible  flooring,  either; — 

(1)  Where  the  apparatus  has  solid  metal  construction  under  the  heating 
elements,  fire  or  burners  and  ovens,  not  less  than  six  inches  above  the  floor 
and,  except  under  gas  or  electric  apparatus,  with  free  circulation  of  air  over 
the  floor;  or 

(135) 


Sees.  2117-2119 

(2)  Where  the  floor  is  protected  by  sheet  metal  under  and  extending 
at  least  six  inches  beyond  the  sides  and  rear  and  at  least  twelve  inches 
beyond  the  front  of  the  apparatus  and  at  least  four  inches  of  solid  brick 
masonry  or  concrete  under  the  apparatus;  or  with  equivalent  approved 
protection. 

(d)  Stoves,  ranges  and  coal  or  oil  burning  water  supply  heaters,  for 
restaurants,  hotels,  clubs  and  similar  establishments  may  be  supported  upon 
Type  II  or  Type  V  construction  with  incombustible  flooring,  when  the  appa- 
ratus has  solid  metal  construction  under  the  fire,  burners  or  other  heating- 
elements  and  ovens,  raised  on  metal  legs  not  less  than  four  inches  above  the 
floor  with  free  circulation  of  air  between.  Such  apparatus  ma}'  be  supported 
upon  a  wooden  floor  or  combustible  flooring,  either; — 

(1)  Where  the  apparatus  has  solid  metal  construction  under  the  fire, 
burners,  or  other  heating  elements  and  ovens,  raised  on  metal  legs  not  less 
than  four  inches  above  the  floor  with  free  circulation  of  air  between,  and 
the  floor  is  protected  with  non-corrodible  sheet  metal  under  and  extending 
at  least  six  inches  beyond  the  sides,  rear  and  front  of  the  apparatus  and  a 
baffle  sheet  of  one  half  inch  asbestos  secured  between  two  sheets  of  non- 
corrodible  sheet  metal  under  the  entire  apparatus  suspended  two  inches 
below  the  floor  thereof;  or 

(2)  Where  the  floor  is  protected  by  non-corrodible  sheet  metal  under 
and  extending  at  least  six  inches  beyond  the  sides,  rear  and  front  of  the 
apparatus,  and  hollow  construction,  under  the  apparatus,  of  brick  on  edge 
not  less  than  four  nor  more  than  twelve  inches  apart,  topped  by  reinforced 
concrete  not  less  than  three  inches  thick;  or  by  equivalent  approved  pro- 
tection. 

(e)  Heating  apparatus  such  as  down-draft  and  oil  burning  furnaces  in 
which  the  floor  of  the  combustion  chamber  rests  directly  upon  a  reinforced 
concrete  or  other  structural  floor,  shall  have  a  heat-resistive  foundation,  with 
ventilation  and  insulation  if  necessary,  to  prevent  injury  to  structural  metal 
or  other  materials  in  the  floor. 

(f)  Under  boilers,  furnaces  and  other  heat-producing  apparatus  sup- 
ported upon  a  floor  required  by  the  provisions  of  Part  29  to  be  waterproofed, 
shall  be  installed  insulation  equivalent  to  that  required  for  a  wooden  floor, 
to  protect  the  waterproofing  against  damage  from  heat. 

Sect.  2118.  Smoke  Connection. —  Every  apparatus  for  the  generation 
of  heat  by  the  combustion  of  fuel  shall  have  suitable  connection  to  an  ade- 
quate chimney  or  smokestack  except  gas  appliances  exempted  by  the  regu- 
lations for  gas  fitting  issued  under  section  one  hundred  and  sixteen  of  Part  1 
of  this  code  and  other  small  apparatus  of  similarly  intermittent  use  burning 
oil  and  generating  not  over  twenty  thousand  British  thermal  units  per  hour, 
and  except  such  apparatus  in  foundries,  forge  shops  and  similar  establish- 
ments as  shall  be  exempted  with  the  approval  of  the  commissioner. 

*Sect.  2119.  Other  Heat  Producing  Apparatus. —  Other  heat  pro- 
ducing apparatus  such  as  bake  ovens,  coffee  roasting  ovens,  core  ovens, 
japanning  ovens,  rendering  furnaces,  stereotype  furnaces,  wood-drying  kilns, 

(13G) 


Sec.  2119 

annealing  furnaces,  charcoal  furnaces,  galvanizing  furnaces,  gas  producers, 
smoke  houses,  forges  and  the  like,  shall  be  supported,  and  nearby  woodwork 
and  other  combustible  material  shall  be  protected  from  such  apparatus  in  the 
manner  specified  in  this  chapter  for  apparatus  of  similar  size,  temperature, 
and  character  of  heat  exposure.  These  and  other  special  or  uncommon 
sources  of  heat  and  flame  shall  be  so  constructed  and  protected  as  to  prevent 
heating  any  wood  or  other  combustible  material  used  in  the  construction  of 
floors,  ceilings,  partitions  or  other  parts  of  a  building,  or  required  waterproof- 
ing, to  a  temperature  over  two  hundred  and  fifty  degrees  Fahrenheit,  when  in 
full  operation,  and  shall  be  so  constructed  as  not  to  be  liable  to  undue  corro- 
sion or  deterioration  or  to  accidental  overturn  or  other  disarrangement  con- 
ducive to  danger. 

Every  application  for  such  permit  shall  be  in  writing,  shall  be  filed  with  the 
commissioner  and  shall  set  forth  the  character  of  the  building,  the  size, 
power  and  purpose  of  the  apparatus,  and  such  other  information  as  the  com- 
missioner may  require.  The  commissioner  may,  after  an  examination  of  the 
premises  described  in  the  application,  and  after  hearing  the  applicant  and 
any  objectors,  issue  a  permit  for  placing  this  apparatus  on  such  premises,  upon 
such  conditions  as  he  shall  prescribe,  or  he  may  refuse  such  permit.  If  the 
application  is  for  anything  other  than  a  boiler  or  furnace  the  applicant  shall 
publish  in  at  least  two  daily  newspapers  published  in  the  city  of  Boston,  and 
on  at  least  three  days  in  each,  and  if  so  directed  by  the  commissioner,  shall 
also  post  conspicuously  on  the  premises  a  copy  of  the  application,  and  shall 
deliver  copies  thereof  to  such  persons  as  the  commissioner  may  designate. 

If  no  objection  is  filed  with  the  commissioner  before  the  expiration  of  ten 
days  after  the  time  of  the  first  publication  of  notice,  or  within  ten  days  of  the 
delivery  and  first  posting  of  the  notice,  if  such  delivery  or  posting  is  required 
the  commissioner  shall  if  the  arrangement,  location  and  construction  of  the 
proposed  apparatus  is  proper  and  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  this 
act,  issue  a  permit  for  the  same.  If  objection  is  filed  the  application  shall 
be  referred  to  the  board  of  appeal  which  may  in  its  discretion  require  the 
deposit  by  the  objector  of  a  reasonable  sum  as  security  for  the  payment  of 
the  costs. 

After  such  notice  as  the  board  shall  order  it  shall  hear  the  same  and  shall 
direct  the  commissioner  to  issue  a  permit  under  such  conditions  as  it  may 
prescribe,  or  to  withhold  the  same.  If  the  permit  is  refused,  the  applicant 
and  if  it  is  granted  the  objectors  shall  pay  such  cost  as  the  board  may  order. 

The  commissioner  may,  from  time  to  time,  after  public  notice  and  hearing, 
prescribe  the  conditions  on  which  furnaces,  boilers,  or  other  steam  generators 
and  hot  water  heaters  may  be  maintained  in  buildings,  and,  if  any  person 
interested  objects  to  such  conditions  and  appeals  from  his  decision  establishing 
the  same,  the  appeal  shall  be  referred  to  the  board  of  appeal,  and  thereupon 
said  board  shall  prescribe  the  conditions. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  5  ] 


(137) 


Sec.  2201 


PART  22. 
FIRE=RESISTIVE  CONSTRUCTION. 

Section 

2201  —  Determination  of  Fire=Resistance. 

2202  —  Fire=Resistive  Materials  and  Construction. 

2203  —  Fire=Protection  of  Steel  Columns. 

2204  —  Fire=Protection  of  Cast  Iron  Columns. 

2205  —  Fire=>Protection  of  Steel  in  Reinforced  Concrete  Columns. 

2206  —  Fire=Protection  of  Steel  Beams,  Girders  and  Trusses. 

2207  —  Fire=Protection  of  Steel  in  Reinforced  Concrete  Beams. 

2208  —  Fire=Protection  of  Steel  Reinforcing  in  Floors  and  Roofs. 

2209  —  Fire=Resistive  Floor  and  Roof  Construction. 

2210  —  Fire=Resistive  Ceiling  Construction. 

2211  —  Fire=Resistive  Bearing  Walls  and  Partitions. 

2212  —  Fire=Resistive  Non=Bearing  Walls  and  Partitions. 

2213  —  Fire=Resistive  Doors. 

2214  —  Fire  Door  Construction. 

2215  —  Fire=Resistive  Shutters. 
2216 —  Fire=Resistive  Windows. 
2217  —  Fire=Resistive  Roof  Covering. 

*Section  2201.  Determination  of  Fire=Resistance. —  (a)  Materials 
of  construction  and  fire-protective  materials,  and  assemblies  or  combinations 
thereof,  shall  be  classified  for  fire-protective  and  fire-resistive  purposes  in 
terms  of  their  performance  in  authoritative  tests  made  in  accordance  with 
Standard  Specifications  for  Fire  Tests  of  Building  Construction  and  Materials 
of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials,  hereinafter  called  the  Standard 
Fire  Test. 

(b)  The  materials,  assemblies  and  combinations  of  materials  specified  and 
listed  in  this  chapter  shall  be  assumed  to  have  the  fire-resistive  rating  here 
given.  Other  materials,  assemblies  and  combinations  shall  be  given  fire- 
resistive  ratings  by  the  commissioner.  Such  ratings  shall  be  determined  by 
reasonable  interpolation  among  the  materials,  assemblies  and  combinations 
listed  and  rated  in  this  chapter,  and  by  authenticated  evidence  of  performance 
in  standard  fire  tests,  with  such  margin  of  safety  as  he  shall  consider  necessary 
to  provide  for  the  exigencies  of  commercial  production  and  field  construction. 

(c)  Where  the  interior  of  a  building  of  Type  III  construction  is  of  incom- 
bustible construction  protected  to  provide  one-hour  fire-resistive  rating,  the 
exterior  walls  may  be  of  two-hour  fire-resistive  construction. 

(d)  Where  the  interior  of  a  building  of  Type  IV  construction  is  of  incom- 
bustible construction,  the  exterior  walls  may  be  of  two-hour  fire-resistive 
construction. 

(138) 


Sees.  2201=2202 

(e)  In  such  group  occupancies  and  where  Type  VI  is  allowed,  but  in  no 
case  over  two  stories  in  height,  Type  IV  buildings  may  be  constructed  with 
their  frames  and  exterior  walls  of  incombustible  construction. 

(f)  All  construction  referred  to  in  paragraphs  (c),  (d),  and  (e)  shall  be 
subject  to  the  structural  requirements  of  other  parts  of  this  code. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

fSect.     2202. — Fire=Resistive     Materials     and     Construction.  —  (a) 

Materials,  to  be  given  the  fire-resistive  ratings  specified  in  this  part,  shall 
have  the  following  minimum  qualities: — 

(1)  Concrete  of  Class  1  shall  be  so  proportioned,  in  accordance  with 
Part  26,  as  to  have  a  strength  of  at  least  fifteen  hundred  pounds  per  square 
inch  and  the  coarse  aggregate  shall  consist  of  limestone,  trap  rock,  blast 
furnace  slag,  cinders  containing  not  more  than  twenty  per  cent  of  combus- 
tible material,  burned  clay  or  shale. 

(2)  Concrete  of  Class  2  shall  be  so  proportioned,  in  accordance  with 
Part  26,  as  to  have  a  strength  of  at  least  fifteen  hundred  pounds  per  square 
inch,  the  coarse  aggregate  consisting  of  sandstone,  granite,  quartzite, 
siliceous  gravel  or  other  similar  material  not  over  one  inch  in  size. 

(3)  Masonry  shall  consist  of  the  materials  specified  in  Part  24  laid  in 
lime-cement  or  cement  mortar,  or  approved  masonry  cement  mortar, 
except  that  masonry  of  gypsum  tile  shall,  and  masonry  of  structural  clay 
tile  may,  be  laid  in  gypsum  mortar.  Masonry  shall  be  thoroughly  bonded 
by  breaking  joints  in  successive  courses  or  by  the  use  of  metal  ties. 

(4)  Brick  shall  be  burned  clay  or  shale,  concrete  or  sand-lime  brick 
of  Grade  C  or  better  as  specified  in  Part  24. 

(5)  Stone  shall  be  limestone,  marble,  slate  or  equally  fire-resistive  natural 
stone.  Sandstone,  granite  or  other  stone  which,  because  of  its  crystalline 
structure  or  for  other  reason,  is  less  fire-resistive,  shall  not  be  considered 
fire-protection  for  structural  metal,  but  may  be  used  in  a  masonry  wall 
not  less  than  twelve  inches  thick  required  to  have  fire-resistance.  Stone 
masonry  shall  have  the  same  fire-resistive  rating  as  brick  masonry. 

(6)  Cast  stone  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  Part  24.  Cast 
stone  masonry  shall  have  the  same  fire-resistive  rating  as  brick  masonry. 

(7)  Concrete  blocks,  whether  solid  or  hollow,  shall  have  as  coarse 
aggregate  limestone,  trap  rock,  blast  furnace  slag,  cinders  containing  not 
more  than  twenty  per  cent  of  combustible  material,  burned  clay  or  shale, 
and  shall  otherwise  conform  to  the  requirements  of  Part  24. 

(8)  Structural  clay  tile  shall  conform  to  the  specifications  for  load- 
bearing  tile,  floor  tile  or  partition  tile  of  Part  24.  Where  partition  tile  is 
specified,  load-bearing  tile  may  be  used. 

(9)  Gypsum  tile  or  pre-cast  gypsum  concrete,  whether  solid  or  hollow, 
shall  conform  to  Standard  Specifications  for  Gypsum  Partition  Tile  or 
Block  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials  and  shall  not  contain 
more  than  three  per  cent  by  weight  of  wood  or  other  combustible  binder 
or  filler. 

(139) 


Sec.  2202 

(10)  Gypsum  concrete  shall  not  contain  more  than  twelve  and  one-half 
per  cent  by  weight  of  wood  or  other  combustible  binder  or  filler,  and  shall 
have  a  compressive  strength  of  at  least  five  hundred  pounds  per  square 
inch  as  provided  in  Part  27.  It  shall  not  be  used  where  exposed  to  the 
elements. 

(11 )  Expanded  metal  or  wire  lath  as  a  base  or  reinforcement  for  plaster- 
ing shall  weigh  not  less  than  two  and  two  tenths  pounds  per  square  yard 
and  shall  have  not  less  than  two  and  one  half  meshes  per  inch. 

(12)  Metal  mesh  reinforcement  specified  for  masonry  fire  protection 
of  structural  metal  shall  consist  of  wire  lath  strips  the  full  thickness  of 
the  masonry,  laid  in  the  beds  thereof,  or  its  approved  equivalent. 

(13)  Metal  mesh  reinforcement  specified  for  concrete  fire  protection 
of  structural  metal  shall  consist  of  wire  mesh  weighing  not  less  than  one 
and  one  half  pounds  per  square  yard  with  wire  spaced  not  over  four  inches, 
or  not  less  than  number  eleven  gage  steel  wire  spaced  not  over  four  inches 
apart,  or  its  approved  equivalent. 

(14)  Cement  plaster  shall  be  proportioned  of  one  part  Portland  cement, 
and  not  more  than  two  parts  of  sand  measured  by  volume  dry  and  loose 
to  which  may  be  added  lime  putty  or  hydrated  lime  not  exceeding  fifteen 
per  cent  of  the  cement. 

(15)  Gypsum  plaster,  except  where  otherwise  specified,  may  contain 
sand  not  in  excess  of  three  times  the  weight  of  the  gypsum. 

(16)  Lime  plaster  shall  consist  of  a  mixture  of  one  part  lime,  not  over 
three  parts  sand,  and  water. 

(17)  Pneumatically  projected  mortar  made  of  Portland  cement,  sand 
and  water  shall  be  rated  for  fire-protection  the  same  as  Class  1  concrete. 

(18)  Concrete  fill,  where  specified  in  this  chapter  in  connection  with 
hollow  masonry  units,  shall  consist  of  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete  poured 
in  the  hollow  spaces  of  the  units  as  they  are  laid. 

(b)  Portland  cement  concrete  or  gypsum  concrete  poured  in  place  as 
fire-protection  for  beams,  trusses  and  other  horizontal  or  inclined  members  of 
structural  steel  and  pneumatically  projected  mortar  applied  to  structural 
steel  as  fire-protection  shall  be  reinforced  with  metal  mesh  reinforcement. 
Concrete  protection  for  vertical  columns  of  structural  metal  shall  have  rein- 
forcing consisting  of  number  five  wire  spaced  not  over  eight  inches  apart  or 
its  equivalent.  Reinforcement  shall  be  wrapped  around  the  structural 
member  and  so  arranged  as  to  be  completely  embedded  in  the  fire-protective 
material  and  to  ensure  its  integrity. 

(c)  Plaster  used  as  fire-protection  or  to  resist  the  spread  of  fire  shall  be 
reinforced  with  metal  lath,  except  plaster  less  than  one  inch  thick  on  masonry 
or  concrete. 

(d)  In  the  protection  of  structural  metal  including  reinforcement,  one 
half  inch  of  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  may  replace  an  equal  thickness  of 
poured  concrete  or  pneumatically  projected  mortar  as  protective  material; 
and  one  inch  of  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  reinforced  with  metal  lath  may 
replace  an  equal  thickness  of  poured  concrete,  pneumatically  projected  mortar 
or  masonry  protection. 

(140) 


Sees.  2202=2203 

(e)  Where  plaster  is  required  without  other  specification,  it  shall  consist 
of  one  half  inch  of  cement  or  gypsum  plaster,  except  that  only  gypsum  plaster 
shall  be  used  on  gypsum  masonry. 

(f)  In  this  chapter,  except  where  otherwise  specifically  stated,  the  thick- 
ness given  in  a  list  of  materials  applies  to  the  next  following  item  only,  and  not 
to  the  total  thickness  where  additional  materials  are  specified. 

(g)  Pipes,  wires,  conduits  and  ducts  shall  not  be  embedded  in  or  placed 
behind  the  fire-protective  materials  required  for  the  protection  of  structural 
steel  or  iron  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  paragraph.  Above  fire- 
protective  hung  ceilings  and  within  the  enclosed  spaces  in  buildings  of  Type 
I  and  Type  II  construction,  within  which,  other  than  the  enclosure,  fire  pro- 
tection of  steel  is  not  required,  as  specified  in  Part  16,  pipes,  wires,  conduits 
and  ducts  may  be  placed,  provided  they  are  so  arranged  and  so  secured  that 
they  will  not,  either  by  expanding  in  the  event  of  fire,  or  otherwise  impair  the 
effectiveness  of  the  enclosing  protective  materials.  Electric  conduits  and 
wires  and  gas  pipes  may  be  embedded  in  concrete  or  masonry  fire  protection  of 
structural  steel  where  the  protective  material  is  reinforced  with  wire  mesh, 
provided  they  shall  have  protective  covering  except  over  the  tops  of  beams 
and  girders,  at  least  as  thick  as  required  for  the  steel. 

(h)  In  factories,  garages,  warehouses  and  other  buildings  in  which  the 
fire-protective  covering  required  for  steel  or  iron  columns  may  be  injured  by 
the  movement  of  vehicles,  materials  or  equipment,  the  commissioner  shall 
require  such  covering  to  be  protected  by  metal  or  other  material  in  a  manner 
satisfactory  to  him. 

(i)  Fire-stopping,  for  the  purposes  of  this  chapter,  shall  mean  the  stop- 
ping-off  or  enclosure  at  the  ends  and  wherever  else  specified  of  the  spaces 
between  studs  of  partitions,  joists  of  floors  and  roofs  and  other  similar  spaces 
to  prevent  drafts  of  air  and  the  communication  of  fire  from  one  such  space  to 
another.  Fire-stopping  shall  consist  of  wood  not  less  than  one  and  one  half 
inches  thick,  of  sheet  metal  not  less  than  twenty-four  gage  or  of  masonry,  or  a 
combination  of  such  materials.  Fire-stopping  shall  be  tightly  fitted  in  the 
space  to  be  filled,  about  pipes,  wires  and  ducts  and  if  cut  or  disturbed  in  the 
placement  of  pipes,  wires  and  ducts  shall  be  repaired. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

JSect.  2203.  Fire=Protection  of  Steel  Columns. —  (a)  Structural 
steel  columns  required  to  have  fire-protection  of  a  given  rating  shall  be 
covered  on  all  sides  with  protective  material  having  not  less  than  the  thickness 
necessary  for  the  required  rating.  Except  where  "no  fill"  is  specified,  re- 
entrant and  other  accessible  spaces  behind  the  specified  outer  protection 
shall  be  filled  with  concrete  or  brick  masonry  or  the  material  of  the  outer 
protection. 

(b)     The  following  materials  shall  be  assumed  to  afford  to  steel  columns 
fire-protection  of  the  rating  indicated: 
Four-hour  rating: 

(1)  Two  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(2)  Three  inches  Class  2  concrete,  metal  mesh  reinforcement. 

(3)  Three  and  one  half  inches  brick  masonry. 

(HI) 


Sees.  2203=2204 

(4)  Two  layers  two-inch  structural  clay  partition  tile  masonry,  metal 
mesh  in  beds. 

(5)  Two  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  masonry,   concrete  fill, 
metal  mesh  in  beds,  three  fourths  inch  gypsum  plaster. 

(6)  Four  inches  structural   clay  partition  tile  masonry,  concrete  fill, 
metal  mesh  in  beds,  five  eighths  inch  lime  plaster. 

(7)  Four  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  or  concrete  block  mason- 
ry, concrete  fill,  plaster. 

(8)  Three  inches  hollow  gypsum  tile  masonry  and  plaster. 

(9)  Two  inches  gypsum  concrete,  metal  mesh  reinforcement. 

(10)  Two  inches  solid  gypsum  tile  masonry  and  plaster. 

(11)  Three  inches  solid  cinder  concrete  block  masonry  and  plaster. 

(12)  Four  inches  hollow  cinder  concrete  block  masonry  and  plaster. 

Three-hour  rating: 

(13)  One  and  three  fourths  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(14)  Two  inches  Class  2  concrete,  metal  mesh  reinforcement. 

(15)  Two  inches  gypsum  concrete. 

(16)  Two  inches  solid  cinder  concrete  block  masonry  and  plaster. 

(17)  Two  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  masonry,  concrete  fill. 
Two -hour  rating: 

(18)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(19)  Two  inches  Class  2  concrete,  metal  mesh  reinforcement. 

(20)  One  inch  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete  encased  in  standard  weight 
steel  or  wrought  iron  pipe. 

(21)  Two  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  masonry  and  plaster. 

(22)  Two  layers  plaster,  each  on  metal  lath,  with  three  fourths  inch  air 
space  between,  two  inches  total  thickness. 

(23)  Two  inch  gypsum  concrete. 

(24)  Two  inches  solid  or  three  inches  hollow  gj^psum  tile  masonry. 

One-hour  rating: 

(25)  One  inch  Class  1  concrete. 

(26)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  2  concrete  with  metal  mesh  rein- 
forcement. 

(27)  Two  and  one  fourth  inches  brick  masonry. 

(28)  Two  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  or  concrete  block  masonry. 

(29)  One  inch  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath. 

(c)     The  thickness  of  protection  on  the  outer  edges  of  lugs  or  brackets 
need  not  exceed  one  inch. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

*Sect.  2204.  Fire=Protection  of  Cast  Iron  Columns. —  (a)  Cast 
iron  columns  required  to  have  fire-protection  of  a  given  rating  shall  be  covered 
on  all  sides  with  protective  materials  having  not  less  than  the  thickness 
necessary  for  the  required  rating.  Re-entrant  spaces,  if  any,  on  the  exterior 
of  cast  iron  columns,  and  other  accessible  spaces  behind  the  specified  protec- 
tion, shall  be  filled  with  Class  1  concrete  or  brick  masonry  or  the  material 
of  the  outer  protection. 

(142) 


Sees.  2204=2206 

(b)  The  following  materials  shall  be  assumed  to  afford  to  cast  iron  columns 
fire-protection  of  the  rating  indicated: — ■ 

Four-hour  rating: — ■ 

Cast  iron  columns  shall  not  be  used  where  protection  of  four-hour  rating  is 
required. 

Three-hour  rating: — 

(1)  Two  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(2)  Three  inches  Class  2  concrete,  metal  mesh  reinforcement. 

(3)  Two  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  or  concrete  block  masonry, 
concrete  fill. 

(4)  One  and  one  half  inches  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath 
and  metal  furring  to  form  one  half  inch  air  space. 

Two-hour  rating: — ■ 

(5)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(6)  Two  inches  Class  2  concrete  with  metal  mesh  reinforcement. 

One-hour  rating: — 

(7)  One  inch  Class  1  concrete. 

(8)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  2  concrete  with  metal  mesh  rein- 
forcement. 

(9)  One  inch  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

fSect.  2205.     Fire=Protection     of     Steel     in     Reinforced     Concrete 

Columns. — (a)  The  main  steel  reinforcement,  including  spiral  reinforce- 
ment and  ties  larger  than  one  half  inch,  in  reinforced  concrete  columns  re- 
quired to  have  fire-protection  of  a  given  rating  shall  be  covered  with  concrete 
having  not  less  than  the  thickness  listed  in  this  section  for  the  rating  indi- 
cated:— 

Four-hour  rating: — 

(1)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(2)  Two  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

Three-hour  rating: — 

(3)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete. 

Two-hour  rating: — 

(4)  One  inch  Class  1  concrete. 

(5)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

One-hour  rating: — ■ 

(6)  One  inch  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete. 

(b)     The  thickness  of  protection  on  column  ties  not  larger  than  one  half 
inch  may  be  one  half  inch  thinner  than  that  listed  above. 
[  }As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  } 

{Sect.  2206.     Fire=Protection  of  Steel  Beams,  Girders  and  Trusses. — 

(a)  Steel  beams,  girders  and  trusses  or  the  members  of  trusses,  required  to 
have  fire-protection  of  a  given  rating,  shall  be  covered  on  all  sides  with  ma- 
terial having  not  less  than  the  thickness  necessary  for  the  required  rating. 

(b)  The  following  materials  shall  be  assumed  to  afford  steel  beams,  girders 
and  trusses,  or  the  members  thereof,  fire-protection  of  the  rating  indicated: 

(143) 


Sees.  2206=2207 

Four-hour  rating: 

(1)  Two  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(2)  Three  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

(3)  Three  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  or  concrete  block  masonry 
and  plaster. 

(4)  Three  inches  hollow  gypsum  tile  masonry  and  plaster. 

(5)  Two  inches  gypsum  concrete. 

(6)  Two  inches  solid  gypsum  tile  masonry  and  plaster. 

Three-hour  rating: 

(7)  One  and  three  quarters  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(8)  Two  and  one  half  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

(9)  Two  inches  gypsum  concrete. 

(10)  Two  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile,  or  concrete  block  masonry 
and  plaster. 

(11)  Two  inches  solid,  or  three  inches  hollow  gypsum  tile  masonry. 

Two-hour  rating: 

(12)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(13)  Two  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

(14)  Two  inches  gypsum  concrete. 

One-hour  rating: 

(15)  One  inch  Class  1  concrete. 

(16)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

(17)  Seven  eighths  inch  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath. 

[  tAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

*Sect.  2207.  Fire=Protection  of  Steel  in  Reinforced  Concrete 
Beams. — (a)  The  main  steel  reinforcement,  including  stirrups  larger  than 
one  half  inch,  in  reinforced  concrete  beams,  girders  and  trusses,  including 
the  ribs  of  reinforced  concrete  ribbed  floors  or  roofs  where  one  or  both  sides 
of  the  ribs,  in  addition  to  the  soffit,  are  exposed  to  fire,  required  to  have  fire- 
protection  of  a  given  rating,  shall  be  covered  on  all  sides  with  concrete  having 
not  less  than  the  thickness  listed  in  this  section  for  the  required  rating.  Where 
a  reinforced  concrete  floor  or  roof  has  a  flush  ceiling  formed  with  approved 
permanent  masonry  fillers  between  ribs,  the  reinforcement  shall  have  the 
protection  required  for  reinforcing  steel  of  floors  and  roofs  in  section  twenty- 
two  hundred  and  eight. 
Four-hour  rating: — 

(1)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  1  concrete. 

(2)  Two  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

Three-hour  rating: — 

(3)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete. 

Two-hour  rating: — 

(4)  One  inch  Class  1  concrete. 

(5)  One  and  one  half  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

One-hour  rating: — 

(6)  One  inch  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete. 

(144) 


Sees.  2207=2209 

(b)     The  thickness  of  protection  on  stirrups  not  larger  than  one  half  inch 
may  be  less  than  that  listed  by  not  more  than  one  half  inch. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

fSect.  2208.  Fire=Protection  of  Steel  Reinforcing  in  Floors  and 
Roofs. — (a)  The  steel  reinforcement  in  reinforced  concrete  floors  and  roofs 
with  flush  or  plane  ceilings,  such  that  the  exposure  to  fire  is  on  the  soffit  only, 
required  to  have  fire-protection  of  a  given  rating,  shall  be  covered  with  con- 
crete having  not  less  than  the  thickness  listed  in  this  section  for  the  required 
rating.  In  floors  or  roofs  having  reinforced  concrete  ribs  where  the  concrete 
surrounding  the  steel  reinforcement  is  exposed  to  fire  on  one  or  both  sides  in 
addition  to  the  soffit,  such  reinforcement  shall  have  the  protection  specified 
in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  seven  for  steel  in  reinforced  concrete 
beams. 

Four-hour  rating: — ■ 

(1)  One  inch  Class  1  concrete. 

(2)  One  and  one  fourth  inches  Class  2  concrete. 

Three-hour  rating: 

(3)  One  inch  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete. 

Two-hour  rating: — 

(4)  Three  fourths  inch  Class  1  concrete. 

(5)  One  inch  Class  2  concrete. 

One-hour  rating: — 

(6)  Three  fourths  inch  Class  1  or  Class  2  concrete. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  } 

{Sect,    2209.      Fire=Resistive    Floor    and    Roof    Construction.  —  (a) 

Floors  and  roofs  required  to  have  resistance  of  a  given  rating  to  the  spread  of 
fire  shall  have  such  thickness  of  the  materials  of  which  it  is  constructed,  as 
shall  be  necessary  for  the  required  rating,  and  structural  metal  forming  a 
part  of  such  floors  or  roofs  shall  have  protection  against  fire  of  such  required 
rating.  Floors  and  roofs  required  to  have  two-hour  or  longer  resistance  to 
fire  shall  be  constructed  of  incombustible  materials.  Granolithic,  burned 
clay  tile,  ceramic  tile  or  other  similar  incombustible  floor  finish  of  a  given 
thickness  may  be  substituted  for  an  equal  thickness,  and  sand,  cinder  or 
other  incombustible  filling  material,  with  or  without  embedded  wooden 
screeds,  may  be  substituted  for  two  thirds  its  thickness,  of  the  floor  or  roof 
construction  material  specified  in  this  section;  provided,  that  such  floors  and 
roofs  shall  have  adequate  thickness  for  structural  purposes. 

(b)  The  following  floor  or  roof  construction  shall  be  assumed  to  afford 
resistance  to  the  spread  of  fire  of  the  rating  indicated: 

Four-hour  rating: 

(1)  Four  inches  solid  slab  of  reinforced  Portland  cement  concrete  or 
reinforced  precast  gypsum  concrete. 

(2)  Four  inches  solid  masonry  arches  or  slabs. 

(3)  Four  inches  structural  clay  floor  tile  masonry  arches  or  slabs  with 
top  covering  of  not  less  than  two  inches  of  solid  masonry  or  reinforced 
concrete. 

(H5) 


Sees.  2209=2210 

(4)  Five  inches  combination  reinforced  Portland  cement  concrete  slab 
consisting  of  permanent  fillers  of  concrete  block,  gypsum  or  structural 
clay  tile  and  one  and  one  half  inches  of  concrete  topping;  but  if  structural 
clay  partition  tiles  are  used  for  fillers  they  shall  be  plastered  on  the  soffit. 
Three-hour  rating: 

(5)  Three  inches  solid  slab  of  reinforced  Portland  cement  concrete  or 
reinforced  precast  gypsum  concrete. 

(6)  Three  inches  solid  masonry  arches  or  slabs. 

(7)  Four  inches  structural  clay  floor  tile  masonry,  arches  or  slabs  with 
top  covering  of  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  of  solid  masonry  or 
reinforced  concrete. 

(8)  Four  inches  combination  reinforced  Portland  cement  concrete  slab 
consisting  of  permanent  fillers  of  concrete  block,  gypsum  or  structural  clay 
tile  and  one-inch  concrete  topping;  but  if  structural  clay  partition  tiles 
are  used  for  fillers,  they  shall  be  plastered  on  the  soffit. 

Two-hour  rating: 

(9)  Two  and  one  half  inches  solid  slab  of  reinforced  Portland  cement 
concrete  or  reinforced  precast  gypsum  concrete. 

(10)  Two  and  one  half  inches  solid  masonry  arches  or  slabs. 

(11)  Three  inches  structural  clay  floor  tile  masonry,  arches  or  slabs 
with  top  covering  of  not  less  than  one  inch  of  solid  masonry  or  reinforced 
concrete. 

One-hour  rating: 

(12)  Three  inches  structural  clay  floor  tile  masonry,  arches  or  slabs 
with  all  joints  thoroughly  filled  with  cement  or  gypsum  mortar. 

(13)  Wood  floor  or  roof  construction  with  joists  not  less  than  one  and 
five-eighths  inches  in  least  dimension,  fire-stopped,  double  board  floor, 
approved  asbestos  felt  between  layers  of  boards,  and  with  a  ceiling  of  at 
least  three  quarters  inch  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath. 

(14)  Steel  beams  or  steel  joists  not  more  than  thirty-six  inches  apart 
on  centers  with  incombustible  floor  and  a  ceiling  of  at  least  three  fourths 
inch  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath  metal  furring. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943.  ch.  6  J 

*Sect.  2210.  Fire=Resistive  Ceiling  Construction.  —  (a)  Ceilings 
required  to  afford  fire-protection  of  a  given  rating  to  the  floor  or  roof  framing 
under  which  it  is  supported  shall  be  of  fire-resistive  materials  of  at  least  the 
thickness  necessary  for  the  given  rating.  A  fire-resistive  ceiling  and  all 
hangers  and  fastenings  necessary  for  its  support  to  the  protected  framing 
shall  be  of  incombustible  materials.  It  shall  be  capable  of  sustaining  its 
own  weight  without  exceeding  allowable  stresses.  Metal  reinforcement  in 
such  a  ceiling  shall  be  protected  from  fire  as  specified  in  section  twenty-two 
hundred  and  eight  for  reinforcing  in  a  floor. 

(b)     The  following  ceiling  construction  shall  be  assumed  to  afford  to  floor 
or  roof  framing  fire-protection  of  the  rating  indicated:— 

Four-hour  rating: — ■ 

(1)     Two  and  one  half  inches  solid  slab  of  reinforced  Portland  cement 

concrete  or  reinforced  precast  gypsum  concrete. 

(146) 


Sees.  2210=2211 

(2)  Two  inches  precast  reinforced  gypsum  concrete,  plastered. 

Three-hour  rating: — 

(3)  Two  inches  solid  slab  of  reinforced  Portland  cement  concrete  or 
reinforced  precast  gypsum  concrete. 

(4)  Two  inches  precast  reinforced  gypsum  concrete,  lapped  or  rabbeted 
joints. 

Two-hour  rating: — ■ 

(5)  One  and  one  half  inches  solid  slab  of  reinforced  Portland  cement 
concrete  or  reinforced  precast  gypsum  concrete. 

One-hour  rating: — 

(6)  Three  fourths  inch  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

fSect.     2211.     Fire-Resistive    Bearing   Walls    and    Partitions. — (a) 

Bearing  walls  and  partitions  required  to  have  resistance  to  fire  or  the  spread 
of  fire  of  a  given  rating  shall  be  constructed  of  fire-resistive  materials  and 
shall  have  at  least  the  thickness  necessary  for  the  required  rating.  Walls 
required  to  have  two-hour  or  longer  rating  shall  be  of  incombustible  materials. 
Steel  reinforcement  in  reinforced  concrete  walls  shall  have  the  same  protection 
for  the  given  rating  as  is  required  in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  eight 
for  steel  in  floors. 

(b)  Bearing  walls  and  partitions  of  the  following  construction  and  thick- 
ness shall  be  assumed  to  have  resistance  to  fire  and  the  spread  of  fire  of  the 
rating  indicated: 

Four-hour  rating: 

(1)  Eight  inches  solid  brick  masonry. 

(2)  Twelve  inches  hollow  wall  of  brick  masonry,  minimum  eight  inch 
masonry  thickness. 

(3)  Twelve  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  masonry  with  two 
units  and  not  less  than  three  cells  in  the  thickness  of  the  wall. 

(4)  Eight  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  masonry  with  one  unit 
and  not  less  than  two  cells  in  the  thickness  of  the  wall,  plastered  both  sides. 

(5)  Twelve  inches  concrete  block  masonry  with  one  unit  and  not  less 
than  two  cells  in  the  thickness  of  the  wall. 

(6)  Eight  inches  one-piece  concrete  block  masonry  with  shells  and 
webs  at  least  one  and  one  half  inches  thick,  plastered  both  sides. 

(7)  Twelve  inches  total  thickness  of  brick  masonry  facing  bonded  to 
structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  masonry  backing. 

(8)  Eight  inches  solid  concrete. 

(9)  Six  inches  solid  reinforced  concrete. 

(10)  A  steel  or  reinforced  concrete  frame  bearing  wall  in  which  the 
steel  has  fire-protection  of  four-hour  rating,  with  panel  filling  as  specified 
in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  twelve  for  a  non-bearing  wall  of  four- 
hour  rating. 

Three-hour  rating: 

(11)  Eight  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  masonry  with  two 
units  and  not  less  than  four  cells  in  the  thickness  of  the  wall. 

(147) 


Sees.  2211=2212 

(12)  Twelve  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  masonry  with  one 
unit  and  not  less  than  three  cells  in  the  thickness  of  the  wall. 

(13)  Eight  inches  one-piece  concrete  block  masonry  with  shells  and 
webs  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  thick,  plastered  both  sides. 

(14)  Eight  inches  one-piece  concrete  block  masonry  with  shells  and 
webs  not  less  than  two  inches  thick. 

(15)  Five  inches  solid  reinforced  concrete. 

(16)  A  steel  or  reinforced  concrete  frame  bearing  wall  in  which  the 
steel  has  fire-protection  of  three-hour  rating,  with  panel  filling  as  specified 
in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  twelve  for  a  non-bearing  wall  of  three- 
hour  rating. 

Two-hour  rating: 

(17)  Eight  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  masonry  with  not 
less  than  three  cells  in  the  thickness  of  the  wall. 

(18)  Eight  inches  concrete  block  masonry  with  shells  and  webs  not  less 
than  one  and  one  half  inches  thick. 

(19)  A  steel  or  reinforced  concrete  frame  bearing  wall  in  which  the 
steel  has  fire-protection  of  two-hour  rating,  with  panel  filling  as  specified 
in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  twelve  for  a  non-bearing  wall  of  two-hour 
rating. 

One-hour  rating: 

(20)  A  steel  or  wooden  stud  bearing  wall  covered  on  both  sides  with 
one-inch  cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath,  fire-stopped,  if  of  wood. 

(21)  A  steel  or  reinforced  concrete  frame  bearing  wall  in  which  the 
steel  has  fire-protection  of  one-hour  rating,  with  panel  filling  as  specified 
in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  twelve  for  a  non-bearing  wall  of  one- 
hour  rating. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

JSect.  2212.     Fire=Resistive    Non=Bearing   Walls   and    Partitions. — 

(a)  Non-bearing  walls  and  partitions  required  to  have  resistance  to  fire  and 
the  spread  of  fire  of  a  given  rating  shall  be  constructed  of  fire-resistive  ma- 
terials and  shall  have  at  least  the  thickness  necessary  for  the  required  rating. 
Walls  required  to  have  two-hour  or  longer  rating  shall  be  of  incombustible 
materials.  Steel  reinforcement  in  reinforced  concrete  walls  shall  have  the 
same  protection  for  the  given  rating  as  is  required  in  section  twenty-two 
hundred  and  eight  for  steel  in  floors. 

(b)  Non-bearing  walls  and  partitions  of  the  following  construction  and 
thickness  shall  be  assumed  to  have  resistance  to  fire  and  the  spread  of  fire 
of  the  rating  indicated: 

Four-hour  rating: 

(1)  Eight  inches  solid  brick  masonry. 

(2)  Three  and  one  half  inches  solid  brick  masonry,  plastered  both  sides . 

(3)  Six  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile,  plastered  both  sides. 

(4)  Six  inches  solid  concrete. 

(5)  Four  inches  solid  reinforced  concrete. 

(148) 


Sees.  2212=2213 

(6)  Any  wall  which,  as  a  bearing  wall,  has  a  three-hour  or  four-hour 
rating  in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  eleven,  except  the  steel  or  re- 
inforced concrete  frame  bearing  wall. 

Three-hour  rating: 

(7)  Three  and  one  half  inches  solid  brick  masonry. 

(8)  Four  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile,  plastered  both  sides. 

(9)  Four  inches  solid  concrete. 

(10)  Three  inches  reinforced  concrete. 

(11)  Any  wall  which,  as  a  bearing  wall,  has  a  two-hour  rating  in  section 
twenty-two  hundred  and  eleven,  except  the  steel  or  reinforced  concrete 
frame  bearing  wall. 

Two-hour  rating: 

(12)  Three  inches  gypsum  tile  masonry,  plastered  both  sides  except  in 
exterior  walls. 

(13)  Eight  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  masonry,  plastered  both 
sides. 

(14)  Eight  inches  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile,  with  three  cells  in 
the  thickness  of  the  wall. 

(15)  Four  inches  concrete  block  plastered  both  sides. 

(16)  Two  inches  solid  neat,  fibered,  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath  and 
incombustible  studding. 

One-hour  rating: 

(17)  Three  inches  gypsum  tile  masonry. 

(18)  Two  inches  solid  gypsum  tile  masonry  plastered  both  sides. 

(19)  Three  inches  structural  clay  partition  tile  plastered  both  sides. 

(20)  Two  and  one  half  inches  solid  cement  or  sanded  gypsum  plaster 
on  metal  lath  and  incombustible  studding. 

(21)  Three  inches  total  thickness  of  hollow  wall,  three  fourths  inch 
cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath  and  incombustible  studding. 

(22)  Three  inches  total  thickness  of  hollow  wall,  three  fourths  inch 
cement  or  gypsum  plaster  on  metal  lath  and  wooden  studding,  fire-stopped. 

[  XAs  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  6  ] 

*Sect.  2213.  Fire=Resistive  Doors. — (a)  Doors  which  are  required 
to  be  fire  doors,  fire-resistive  doors,  or  of  fire-resistive  construction  shall 
conform  to  the  requirements  of  this  section  and  section  twenty-two  hundred 
and  fourteen. 

(b)  Fire  doors  shall  be  classified  for  the  purposes  of  this  code  as  Class  A, 
Class  B,  and  Class  C. 

(c)  Class  A  fire  doors  shall  be  doors  of  the  following  construction  as 
specified  in  Section  twenty-two  hundred  and  fourteen. 

(1)  Tin-clad,  three-ply  wood  core,  sliding. 

(2)  Tin-clad,  three-ply  wood  core,  swinging  single  leaf,  doorway  not 
over  six  feet  wide. 

(3)  Tin-clad,  three-ply  wood  core,  swinging  in  pairs,  doorway  not  over 
ten  feet  wide. 

(149) 


Sec.  2213 

(4)  Hollow  metal,  swinging  single  leaf,  doorway  not  over  four  feet  wide. 

(5)  Hollow  metal,  swinging  in  pairs,  doorway  not  over  eight  feet  wide. 

(6)  Sheet  metal,  sliding,  single,  doorway  not  over  ten  feet  wide. 

(7)  Sheet  metal,  sliding  in  pairs,  doorway  not  over  twelve  feet  wide. 

(8)  Sheet  metal,  swinging  single  leaf,  doorway  not  over  six  feet  wide. 

(9)  Sheet  metal,  swinging  in  pairs,  doorway  not  over  ten  feet  wide. 

(10)  Steel  rolling,  doorway  not  over  twelve  feet  wide. 

(11)  Steel  plate,  doorway  not  over  four  feet  wide. 

(12)  Any  other  construction  equal  or  superior  to  a  tin-clad  three-ply 
wood  core  door  in  a  standard  fire  test,  for  resistance  to  fire,  the  spread  of  fire 
and  smoke,  and  transmission  of  heat. 

(d)  Class  B  fire  doors  shall  be  doors  of  the  following  construction  as 
specified  in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  fourteen. 

(13)  Tin-clad,  three-ply  wood  core. 

(14)  Tin-clad,  two-ply  wood  core,  sliding,  doorway  not  over  ten  feet 
wide. 

(15)  Tin-clad,  two-ply  wood  core,  swinging  single  leaf,  doorway  not 
over  six  feet  wide. 

(16)  Tin-clad,  two-ply  wood  core,  swinging  in  pairs,  doorway  not  over 
ten  feet  wide. 

(17)  Hollow  metal,  sliding,  doorway  not  over  eight  feet  wide. 

(18)  Metal-clad,  paneled,  swinging  single  leaf,  doorway  not  over  three 
feet  wide. 

(19)  Metal-clad,  paneled,  swinging  in  pairs,  doorway  not  over  six  feet 
wide. 

(20)  Any  other  construction  equal  or  superior  to  a  tin-clad  two-ply 
wood  core  door  in  a  standard  fire  test,  for  resistance  to  fire,  the  spread  of 
fire  and  smoke,  and  transmission  of  heat. 

(e)  Class  C  fire  doors  shall  be  doors  of  the  following  construction  as 
specified  in  section  twenty-two  hundred  and  fourteen. 

(21)  Metal-clad,  paneled,  swinging  single  leaf,  doorway  not  over  four 
feet  wide. 

(22)  Metal-clad,  paneled,  swinging  in  pairs,  doorway  not  over  eight 
feet  wide. 

(f)  A  Class  A  door  may  be  used  where  Class  B  or  Class  C  is  specified; 
a  Class  B  door  may  be  used  where  Class  C  is  specified.  Two  Class  B  or 
Class  C  doors  on  opposite  sides  of  the  wall  may  be  used  where  a  single  Class  A 
or  Class  B  door  is  specified. 

(g)  Fire-resistive  doors,  when  closed,  shall  completely  cover  the  doorways 
in  the  walls  and  partitions  or  the  openings  in  the  floors  or  roofs  to  which  they 
are  fitted.  A  swinging  fire  door  shall  either  overlap  both  jambs  and  the  head 
of  the  opening  not  less  than  four  inches  or  be  fitted  to  a  fire-resistive  frame 
with  a  rabbet  the  full  thickness  of  the  door  and  with  not  less  than  one  half 
inch  overlap  on  the  door.  A  sliding  fire  door,  except  in  enclosures  about 
passenger  elevators,  shall  overlap  both  jambs  and  the  head  of  the  opening 
not  less  than  four  inches.  A  sliding  fire  door  in  an  enclosure  about  a  passenger 
elevator  shall  overlap  jambs,  head  and  adjoining  panels  not  less  than  one 

(150) 


Sec.  2213 

half  inch.     Fire  doors  shall  fit  closely  at  the  floor  with  clearance  of  not  over 
one  quarter  inch. 

(h)  In  buildings  with  combustible  floors,  doorways  required  to  have  fire 
doors  shall  have  incombustible  thresholds  the  full  thickness  of  the  wall,  extend- 
ing at  least  four  inches  from  the  face  of  the  wall  where  a  door  is  hung  and 
extending  laterally  at  least  six  inches  beyond  each  jamb  of  the  doorway. 
Thresholds  may  be  flush  with  the  floor. 

(i)  The  rabbeted  frame  of  a  swinging  fire  door  shall  be  constructed  of 
structural  steel  built  into  the  concrete,  masonry  or  other  fire-resistive  material 
of  the  wall  about  the  opening  and  secured  thereto,  except  that  the  rabbeted 
frame  of  a  Class  B  or  Class  C  door  may  be  of  wood,  covered  with  sheet  metal 
not  less  than  twent}^-six  gage  in  thickness,  secured  to  the  wall  in  the  opening. 

(j)  Fire  doors  when  closed  shall  fit  tightly  against  the  wall  or  frame  so 
as  to  provide  an  effective  stop  for  fire  and  smoke.  Except  for  the  metal - 
covered  wooden  frame  specified  in  this  section,  combustible  material  shall 
not  intervene  between  the  door  and  the  fire -resistive  material  of  the  wall, 
floor  or  roof  to  which  it  is  fitted. 

(k)  Hinge  hardware  for  fire  doors  shall  be  of  malleable  iron  or  rolled  struc- 
tural steel  not  less  than  one  fourth  inch  thick  except  that  tubular  steel  track  for 
sliding  doors  may  be  not  less  than  one  eighth  inch  thick.  Equivalent  thickness 
of  solid  bronze  or  brass  may  be  used.  Fire  doors  shall  not  depend  upon  cords, 
cables  or  chains  to  support  them  in  closed  position  except  in  elevator  shafts. 

(1)  Tracks  for  sliding  fire  doors  shall  be  so  supported  that  a  track  hanger 
comes  at  each  door  hanger  when  the  door  is  closed.  Track  hangers  shall  be 
secured  to  wood  stud  walls  by  screws  or  bolts,  to  steel  stud  walls  by  bolts  or 
rivets,  to  masonry  walls  by  through  bolts  and  to  concrete  walls  by  through 
bolts  or  approved  built-in  inserts.  Expansion  shields  shall  not  be  used  to 
support  fire  doors. 

(m)  Hinges  for  swinging  fire  doors,  except  in  wooden  stud  walls,  shall  be 
riveted  or  through-bolted  to  the  structural  steel  frame  of  the  opening,  through- 
bolted  to  the  wall  if  of  masonry  or  concrete  or  secured  by  approved  inserts 
in  the  concrete  or  built  into  masonry  in  approved  manner. 

(n)  Strap  hinges  and  sliding  door  hangers  shall  be  secured  to  fire  doors  by 
through-bolting,  riveting  or  welding.  Swinging  fire  doors  in  rabbeted  frames, 
except  tin-clad,  wood  core  doors,  may  be  hung  on  butts.  Other  swinging 
fire  doors  shall  have  strap  hinges. 

(o)  Sliding  fire  doors  shall  have  adequate  stops  for  the  closed  position. 
Swinging  Class  A  fire  doors  shall  have  surface  latches  or  unit  locks.  Class  B 
and  Class  C  doors  shall  have  surface  latches,  unit  or  mortise  locks.  The 
latch  bolts  of  unit  or  mortise  locks  on  fire  doors  shall  have  a  throw  of  three 
fourths  inch.  When  mounted  in  pairs  fire  doors  shall  be  rabbeted  by  means  of 
an  astragal  or  otherwise  where  they  come  together.  One  of  a  pair  of  swinging 
fire  doors  shall  have  push  bolts  at  top  and  bottom  with  a  throw  of  three 
fourths  inch  and  the  other  shall  be  held  by  latch  to  the  first. 

(p)  Except  in  detention  buildings,  fire  doors  hung  in  required  exits  shall 
be  so  fitted  with  hardware  that  they  can  be  opened  from  inside  without  use 
of  a  key  when  the  building  is  occupied. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  0  J 

(151) 


Sec.  2214 

*Sect.  2214.  Fire  Door  Construction.— (a)  In  the  construction 
of  fire  doors  solder  shall  not  be  used,  except  for  filling  joints.  Sheet  metal 
shall  be  fastened  to  wood  by  nailing  and  to  metal  frame  by  bolting,  riveting 
or  welding. 

(b)  Class  A  doors  shall  not  have  glass  panels.  Class  B  doors  may  have 
glass  panels  not  larger  than  one  hundred  square  inches  in  exposed  area  nor 
more  than  twelve  inches  in  width  or  height.  Class  C  doors  may  have  glass 
panels  not  larger  than  two  thousand  and  sixteen  square  inches  in  total  ex- 
posed area,  and  no  single  light  shall  have  an  exposed  area  exceeding  twelve 
hundred  and  ninety-six  square  inches.  Glass  in  fire  doors  shall  be  wire 
glass  not  less  than  one  quarter  inch  thick  and  shall  be  set  five  eighths  inch  in 
grooves  three  quarters  of  an  inch  deep. 

(c)  Fire  doors  shall  be  constructed  as  follows :  — 

(1)  Tin-clad,  three-ply  wood  core  doors  shall  be  constructed  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  specifications  of  the  National  Board  of  Fire  Under- 
writers for  such  doors  in  Class  A  openings,  and  shall  bear  the  label  of 
the  Underwriters  Laboratories  to  this  effect. 

(2)  Tin-clad,  two-ply  wood  core  doors  shall  be  constructed  in  accord- 
ance with  the  specifications  of  the  National  Board  of  Fire  Underwriters 
for  such  doors  in  Class  B  openings  and  shall  bear  the  label  of  the  Under- 
writers Laboratories  to  this  effect. 

(3)  Hollow  metal  doors  shall  have  substantial  stiles  and  rails  of  heavy 
pressed  steel,  reinforced  for  hinges  and  other  hardware.  Panels  shall  be 
of  sheet  steel  filled  with  asbestos  board  or  other  approved  insulating 
materials.     The  door  shall  be  assembled  by  welding  or  riveting. 

(4)  Sheet  metal  doors  shall  be  constructed  with  a  rolled  steel  rigid 
frame  covered  both  sides  with  one  sixteenth  inch  asbestos  board  and 
twenty-six  gage  corrugated  sheet  metal,  with  corrugations  vertical  on  one 
side  and  horizontal  on  the  other,  bound  on  the  edges  with  rolled  steel  or 
pressed  steel  shapes. 

(5)  A  steel  rolling  fire  door  shall  be  constructed  of  sheet  steel  inter- 
locking slats,  sliding  in  grooves,  counterweighted  by  springs,  the  roller  and 
mechanism  enclosed  in  heavy  sheet  metal. 

(6)  A  steel  plate  fire  door  shall  be  constructed  of  not  less  than  twelve 
gage  steel  plate  mounted  on  a  rolled  steel  frame,  assembled  by  welding  or 
riveting. 

(7)  A  metal  clad,  paneled  fire  door  shall  have  a  wood  core  with  stiles 
and  rails  not  less  than  one  and  three  fourths  inches  thick  covered  with 
twenty-six  gage  sheet  steel;  panels  three  fourths  inch  thick  covered  with 
twenty-six  gage  sheet  steel,  set  three  fourths  inch  in  grooves;  joints  of 
metal  lapped  and  well  nailed. 

(d)  A  door  properly  bearing  the  Underwriters'  Label  certifying  that  it  is 
suitable  for  the  protection  of  a  Class  A  opening  shall  be  acceptable  as  a 
Class  A  door. 

(e)  A  door  properly  bearing  the  Underwriters'  Label  certifying  that  it  is 
suitable  for  the  protection  of  a  Class  B  opening  shall  be  acceptable  as  a  Class 
B  door,  except  that  metal  clad  doors  wider  than  three  feet  shall  not  be 
accepted  as  Class  B  doors. 

(152) 


Sees.  2214=2216 

(f)  A  door  properly  bearing  the  Underwriters'  Label  certifying  that  it  is 
suitable  for  the  protection  of  a  Class  C  opening  shall  be  acceptable  as  a  Class 

C  door. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

Sect.  2215.  Fire=Resistive  Shutters. —  Shutters  required  to  be  fire 
shutters  or  fire-resistive  shutters  shall  be  constructed  and  hung  as  specified 
for  Class  B  fire-resistive  doors  in  sections  twenty-two  hundred  and  thirteen 
and  twenty- two  hundred  and  fourteen. 

jSect.  2216.  Fire=Resistive  Windows. —  (a)  Windows  which  are  re- 
quired to  be  fire  windows,  fire-resistive  windows,  or  of  fire-resistive  construc- 
tion shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  this  section. 

(b)  Fire-resistive  windows  may  be  fixed  or  arranged  to  open  and  close. 
Fixed  fire-resistive  windows  shall  be  so  secured  in  the  walls  in  which  they 
are  placed  that  they  may  expand  in  case  of  fire  without  buckling.  Movable 
fire-resistive  windows  shall  be  opened  or  closed  in  one  of  the  following 
manners:  — 

(1)  One  or  more  sashes  may  slide  horizontally  in  a  fire-resistive  frame. 

(2)  One  or  more  sashes  may  slide  vertically  with  counterweights  or 
with  two  sashes  counterbalanced  and  hung  on  chains.  If  a  sash  is  closed 
in  raised  position  it  shall  have  a  fastening. 

(3)  A  sash  may  be  hinged  at  top,  bottom,  or  either  side. 

(4)  A  sash  may  be  pivoted  at  top  and  bottom  or  at  the  sides. 

(5)  A  sash  may  be  arranged  to  open  and  close  in  any  other  approved 
manner,  with  approved  hardware. 

(c)  Movable  sashes  in  fire-resistive  windows  shall  be  fitted  to  fire-resistive 
frames  of  the  same  or  similar  construction.  Both  sashes  and  frames,  and 
metal  mullions  between  window  units,  shall  be  so  fitted  in  the  walls  in  which 
they  are  placed  as  to  be  continuous  with  the  fire-resistive  material  of  the  wall 
and  so  secured  that  they  may  expand  in  case  of  fire  without  buckling. 

(d)  Glass  in  fire-resistive  windows  shall  be  wire  glass  not  less  than  one 
fourth  inch  thick  and  the  area  of  a  single  light  shall  not  exceed  seven  hundred 
and  twenty  square  inches.  Glass  shall  be  set  three  eighths  inch  in  grooves 
at  least  one  half  inch  deep.  Glass  shall  be  secured  by  glazing  angles  or  mold- 
ings screwed  to  the  sash  and  forming  continuous  grooves  for  the  glass. 

(e)  Fire-resistive  windows  shall  be  of  the  following  construction: — ■ 

(6)  Hollow  sheet  metal  sashes  and  frames  fabricated  by  pressing, 
welding,  riveting  or  crimping  without  the  use  of  solder  or  other  fusible 
alloy,  except  for  filling  joints,  and  bearing  the  label  of  the  Underwriters' 
Laboratories. 

(7)  Rolled  steel  or  pressed  steel  sashes  fabricated  by  pressing,  welding, 
riveting  or  crimping,  of  a  make  and  style  approved  by  the  commissioner. 

(8)  Any  other  approved  constructions  as  fire-resistive  as  that  specified  in 
paragraph  (6). 

(f)  Fixed  fire-resistive  windows  of  hollow  sheet  metal  construction  shall 
not  exceed  seven  feet  in  width  nor  ten  feet  in  height.  Fire-resistive  windows 
of  hollow  sheet  metal  construction  with  movable  sashes  shall  not  exceed  six 
feet  in  width  nor  ten  feet  in  height. 

(153) 


Sees.  2216=2217 

(g)  Fire-resistive  windows  of  rolled  steel  construction  shall  not  exceed 
eighty-four  square  feet  in  area  nor  twelve  feet  in  either  height  or  width. 

(h)  Fire-resistive  windows  and  their  fastenings  shall  be  capable  of  resist- 
ing the  wind  pressure  on  the  wall  of  the  building  applied  either  on  the  inside  or 
the  outside  of  the  window  without  exceeding  allowable  stresses. 

(i)  Where  fire-resistive  windows  are  required,  wooden  windows  and  plain 
glass  may  be  substituted  provided  the  openings  are  protected  by  fire-resistive 
doors  or  shutters,  or,  in  buildings  of  approved  occupancy  and  construction, 
by  an  approved  system  of  open  sprinklers. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

JSect.  2217.  Fire=Resistive  Roof  Covering.—  (a)  Roof  covering 
allowed  under  this  code  shall  be  classified  as  fire-retardant  or  ordinary,  accord- 
ing to  their  resistance  to  fire  outside,  as  provided  in  this  section.  Fire- 
retardant  roof  covering  is  the  more  fire-resistive  and  may  be  used  on  any 
building.  Ordinary  roof  covering  shall  not  be  used  where  fire-retardant  roof- 
ing is  specified.  Roof  covering  less  fire-resistive  than  ordinary  roof  covering 
shall  not  be  used  on  any  building. 

(b)  Fire-retardant  roofing  shall  be  any  roof  covering  which  meets  the 
requirements  of  Class  A  or  Class  B  roofing  under  the  specifications  of  the 
Underwriters'  Laboratories,  Inc.  The  following  roof  covering  shall  be  as- 
sumed to  meet  the  requirements  for  fire-retardant  roofing: — 

(1)  Built  up  roofing  consisting  of  successive  layers  of  roofing  felt  im- 
pregnated with  asphalt;  a  final  layer  of  asphalt  in  which,  while  molten,  is 
embedded  a  continuous  layer  of  roofing  gravel  or  slag. 

(2)  Built  up  roofing  consisting  of  successive  layers  of  roofing  felt  im- 
pregnated with  coal  tar;  a  final  layer  of  tar  in  which,  while  molten,  is 
embedded  a  continuous  layer  of  roofing  gravel  or  slag. 

(3)  Built  up  roofing  consisting  of  successive  layers  of  roofing  felt  impreg- 
nated with  asphalt;  a  final  layer  of  asbestos  roofing  felt  impregnated  with 
asphalt  weighing  not  less  than  fourteen  pounds  per  hundred  square  feet, 
or  a  final  layer  of  asphalt-saturated  prepared  roofing  coated  with  granu- 
lated slate  or  other  similar  material. 

(4)  Built  up  roofing  consisting  of  successive  layers  of  roofing  felt  im- 
pregnated with  tar  or  asphalt  and  a  finish  of  burned  clay  floor  tile,  stone 
flagging,  cement  concrete  or  other  similar  material. 

(5)  Sheet  metal  with  locked  and  soldered  joints  not  less  than  number 
twenty-six  gage  in  thickness. 

(6)  Shingles  of  natural  slate . 

(7)  Shingles  of  burned  clay  tile. 

(8)  Shingles  of  sheet  metal  not  less  than  number  twenty-six  gage  in 
thickness. 

(9)  Shingles  of  asbestos  board  not  less  than  one  eighth  inch  thick. 

(10)  Shingles  of  asphalt  saturated  felt  surfaced  with  granulated  slate 
or  other  similar  material  and  carrying  the  Underwriters  Class  "C"  label. 

(11)  Corrugated  sheet  metal  with  lapped  joints  not  less  than  number 
twenty-six  gage  in  thickness. 

(12)  Corrugated  asbestos  board   not  less   than   three  sixteenths   inch 
thick. 

(154) 


Sec.  2217 

(c)  Ordinary  roofing  shall  be  any  roof  covering  which  meets  the  require- 
ments of  class  C  roofing  under  the  specifications  of  the  Underwriters'  Labora- 
tories, Inc.  The  following  roof  covering  shall  be  assumed  to  meet  the  require- 
ments for  ordinary  roofing: — ■ 

(13)  Built  up  roofing  consisting  of  successive  layers  of  roofing  felt 
impregnated  with  asphalt,  coal  tar  or  other  approved  material,  not  equal 
in  fire-resistance  to  a  fire-retardant  roofing. 

(14)  Prepared  roofing  consisting  of  felt  or  fabric  impregnated  or  coated, 
or  both,  with  asphalt,  tar  or  other  approved  material  or  shingles  of  such 
prepared  roofing,  not  equal  in  fire-resistance  to  fire-retardant  roofing. 

(15)  Canvas  stretched  tightly  and  coated  with  paint. 

(d)  Built-up  roofing  shall  be  secured  to  the  roof  deck  in  the  following 
manner: 

1  Over  masonry  slab.  The  first  layer  shall  be  laid  in  molten  asphalt 
or  tar  mopped  on  the  roof  deck,  after  the  deck  is  properly  primed,  or  by 
nailing  a  layer  of  building  paper  to  nailing  inserts  other  than  wood  placed 
in  the  deck. 

2  Over  wood  decks  the  built-up  roofing  shall  be  secured  by  nailing  a 
layer  of  building  paper  to  the  roof  deck  over  which  the  prepared  roofing 
is  to  be  laid  with  the  first  layer  laid  in  molten  asphalt  or  tar. 

3  Roofings  other  than  built-up  roofings,  such  as  shingles,  slates,  tile 
roll  roofing  shall  be  well  secured  to  the  deck  by  nailing,  bolting,  wiring, 
or  other  approved  methods. 

[  tAs  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  6  and  9  ] 


(155) 


Sees.  2301-2303 


PART  23. 
LIVE  AND  DEAD   LOADS. 

Section 

2301  —  Design  for  Loads. 

2302  —  Dead  and  Live  Loads. 

2303  —  Weights  of  Materials. 

2304  —  Loads  from  Partitions. 

2305  —  Live  Loads  on  Floors. 

2306  —  Special  Concentrations. 

2307  —  Partial  Loadings. 

2308  —  Impact. 

2309  —  Lateral  and  Uplift  Forces. 

2310  —  Reduction  of  Live  Loads. 

2311  — Roof  Loads. 

2312  — Wind  Loads. 

2313  —  Load  Tests  of  Structure. 

Section  2301.  Design  for  Loads. —  All  buildings  and  parts  thereof  shall 
be  designed  to  support  the  loads  and  withstand  the  forces  to  which  they  are 
subject,  both  dead  and  live,  without  exceeding  stresses  allowed  for  the  various 
materials  elsewhere  in  this  code. 

Sect.  2302.  Dead  and  Live  Loads. —  (a)  The  dead  loads  of  a  building 
include  all  the  forces  due  to  weight  of  the  walls,  permanent  partitions,  floors » 
roofs,  framing,  and  all  other  permanent  stationary  construction  entering  into 
and  becoming  part  of  the  building. 

(b)     The  live  loads  include  all  loads  other  than  the  dead  loads. 
*Sect.  2303.     Weights  of  Materials. —  (a)     The  actual  weights  of  the 
elements  of  construction  and  of  materials  to  be  supported  shall  be  used  in 
calculation  of  the  loads.    The  materials  listed  in  the  following  table  shall  be 
assumed  to  weigh  not  less  than  there  indicated:  — 

Pounds  per 
Cubic  Foot. 

Brick  (face,  sandlime,  concrete)  masonry 140 

Brick  (common)  masonry         .        .        .        .  .       .        .120 

Cast  iron 450 

Cast  stone  masonry 144 

Cinders,  dry,  in  bulk 45 

Cinder  fill 54 

Sand-cinder  concrete,  fill   .        .        . 96 

Sand-cinder  concrete,  structural 108 

Stone  or  gravel  concrete,  plain 144 

Stone  or  gravel  concrete,  reinforced 150 

Common  earth,  dry  and  packed 100 

Wet  mud 120 

Granite  masonry 170 

(156) 


Sees.  2303-2305 

Pounds  per 
Cubic  Foot, 

Limestone  masonry    .       ,       .  .       .       .       .       .       .160 

Marble  masonry .   160 

Sandstone  masonry 145 

Steel 490 

Timber 40 

Water 62.5 

Pounds  per 
Square  Foot. 

Plaster  on  metal  lath  exclusive  of  furring 8 

Roofing,  tar  and  gravel 6 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  2  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2  ] 

fSect.  2304.  Loads  from  Partitions. —  (a)  In  buildings  in  which 
permanent  partitions  occur  their  weight  shall  be  counted  as  affecting  the 
design  of  all  supporting  structural  members,  including  columns  and  founda- 
tions, as  part  of  the  dead  load;  and  in  those  portions  of  office  buildings  in 
which  the  prescribed  live  load  does  not  exceed  fifty  pounds  per  square  foot, 
allowance  for  partition  weight  shall  always  be  made,  whether  or  not  par- 
titions are  shown  on  plans. 

(b)  If  a  lay-out  of  partitions  is  included  in  the  building  plans,  the  weights 
of  the  partitions  and  their  locations  shall  be  determined  in  accordance  there- 
with, or  such  lay-out  shall  be  used  to  determine  an  equivalent  load  per  square 
foot  of  floor  to  be  applied  uniformly  as  a  superimposed  dead  load  for  purposes 
of  design.  But  the  allowance  for  partition  weight  in  portions  of  buildings 
given  to  office  occupancy,  when  expressed  in  pounds  per  square  foot  of  floor, 
shall  in  no  case  be  less  than  a  minimum  of  two  pounds  for  each  foot  of  story 
height  for  each  square  foot  of  floor. 

(c)  In  estimating  loading  from  actual  weights  of  partitions  it  may  be 
assumed  that  the  partition  occupies  a  space  one  foot  wide,  and  a  deduction 
may  be  made  of  the  live  load  displaced  on  this  width. 

(d)  Arch  action  of  partitions  shall  not  be  assumed  to  relieve  the  supporting 

members. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

JSect.  2305.  Live  Loads  on  Floors. —  The  live  loads  assumed  on  floors 
for  purposes  of  design  shall  be  the  greatest  loads  that  will  probably  be  produced 
by  the  intended  occupancies,  but  the  following  distributed  live  loads  in 
pounds  per  square  foot  shall  be  taken  as  the  minimum  for  the  occupancies 
named,  and  for  similar  occupancies  not  listed  which  create  or  accommodate 
corresponding  loadings. 

Pounds  per 
Square  Foot. 

Domestic  Occupancy:  all  parts  of  private  dwellings,  rooms  and  suites 
in  apartment  houses,  lodging  houses  and  clubs;  private,  ward  or  dor- 
mitory rooms  in  hospitals,  asylums,  educational  and  religious  institu- 
tions, including  corridors  giving  access  thereto;  and  bedrooms  of 
hotels 40 

(157) 


Sec.  2305 

Pounds  per 
Square  Foot. 

Office  Buildings:  first  and  basement' floors 100 

Office  Occupancy:*  above  first  floor  in  office  buildings,  offices  in  other 

buildings,  including  corridors 50 

Church  Auditoriums:  with  fixed  seats,  including  aisles,  sanctuary 

or  chancel,  sacristies,  choirs  and  chapels 60 

Class  Rooms:  in  schools  and  colleges,  not  exceeding  nine  hundred 
square  feet  in  area,  or  larger  size  rooms  where  fixed  seats  are  used; 
and  school  laboratories 50 

Theatre  Auditoriums  and  Assembly  Halls:*  with  fixed  seats, 
including  aisles  and  passageways 75 

Theatre  Stages:  gridirons  and  fly  galleries 100 

Public  Occupancy:  lobbies,  foyers,  vestibules  and  similar  public 
spaces  of  hotels,  theatres,  churches,  clubs  and  public  buildings; 
assembly  halls,  including  class  and  lecture  rooms  exceeding  nine 
hundred  square  feet  in  area,  without  fixed  seats;  dance  halls,  public 
dining  rooms  and  restaurants,  public  rooms  for  social  purposes, 
skating  rinks,  gymnasiums 100 

Bleachers:  grandstands  and  temporary  grandstands 150 

Corridors: 

In  theatres  and  serving  assembly  halls 100 

In  school  buildings 75 

Other  corridors, — same  loading  as  heaviest  occupancy  to  which 
they  provide  access. 

Fire  Escapes   and   Exterior  Balconies: 

In  theatres  and  serving  assembly  halls 100 

In  other  buildings 75 

Stairs  :*  same  loading  as  heaviest  occupancy  to  which  they  give  access, 
but  maximum  required 100 

Stores : 

For  light  merchandise,  first  and  basement  floors 100 

For  light  merchandise,  above  first  floor,  including  mezzanine 75 

For  heavy  merchandise,  all  floors 125 

Storage: 

Light  storage 125 

Heavy  storage 250 

Manufacturing: 

Light  manufacturing 75 

Intermediate  manufacturing 150 

Heavy  manufacturing 250 

Locker  Rooms 75 

Stables 75 

*  For  special  floor  concentrations  and  lateral  thrusts  on  stair  and  balcony  rails,  see  sections 
2306  and  2309. 

(158) 


Sees.  2305-2306 

Pounds  per 
Square  Foot. 

Garages:*  including  Apparatus  Rooms  of  Fire  Stations: 

Class  A — Floors  used  for  vehicles  exceeding  twenty  thousand 
pounds  in  weight,  including  load;  and  first  or  street  floors  of 
garages  except  those  limited  exclusively  to  passenger  vehicles  of 
not  more  than  nine  persons  capacity . . , 250 

Class  B — Floors  not  included  in  Class  A  and  first  or  street  floors  of 
garages  limited  to  passenger  vehicles  exclusively  weighing  not 
more  than  nine  thousand  pounds 150 

Class  C — Floors  above  the  first  or  street  floors  for  passenger  vehicles 

weighing  less  than  six  thousand  pounds 100 

A  floor  connected  directly  with  the  street  or  by  a  ramp  or  driveway 
not  more  than  eight  feet  high  shall  be  regarded  as  a  first  or  street 
floor. 

Hangars* 150 

Sidewalks* 250 

Driveways* 250 

Ceilings*   — 

[  %  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 


§Sect.  2306.  Special  Concentrations. — In  the  design  of  floors,  con- 
sideration shall  be  given  to  the  effects  of  known  or  probable  concentrations 
of  load  to  which  they  may  be  subjected;  and  in  buildings  designed  for  the 
occupancies  listed  herein,  floors  shall  be  made  capable  of  carrying  the  prescribed 
distributed  loads  or  the  following  minimum  concentrations,  whichever  may 
result  in  the  greater  stresses.  The  concentrations  indicated  shall  be  assumed 
to  occupy  spaces  two  and  one  half  feet  square,  and  so  placed  as  to  produce 
maximum  stresses  in  the  members  affected. 

(1)  For  office  floors,  including  corridors,  a  load  of  two  thousand  pounds. 

(2)  For  portions  of  garages  subject  to  Class  A  loading,  a  concentrated 
load  of  twenty  thousand  pounds,  and  to  Class  B  loading,  ten  thousand 
pounds. 

(3)  For  sidewalks,  a  concentrated  load  of  eight  thousand  pounds. 

(4)  For  driveways,  and  for  trucking  spaces  within  the  limits  of  a  struc- 
ture a  concentrated  load  of  twenty  thousand  pounds. 

(5)  For  structural  supports  of  ceilings  under  accessible  spaces,  for  trap 
doors  and  skylights  a  concentrated  load  of  two  hundred  pounds. 

(6)  That  portion  of  hangars  subject  to  concentrated  loads  shall  be 
designed  to  accommodate  the  heaviest  vehicle  housed  therein. 

[  §As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  J 

*  For  special  floor  concentrations  and  lateral  thrusts  on  stair  and  balcony  rails,  see  sections 
2306  and  2309. 

(159) 


Sees.  2307-2310 

Sect.  2307.  Partial  Loadings. — Consideration  shall  be  given  to  the 
effects  of  partial  as  well  as  full  live  loading. 

Sect.  2308.  Impact. — The  live  loads  prescribed  herein  may  be  assumed 
to  include  a  sufficient  allowance  to  cover  the  effects  of  ordinary  impact. 
For  special  occupancies  and  loadings  involving  unusual  impacts,  such  as 
those  resulting  from  moving  machinery,  elevators,  craneways,  and  the  like, 
provision  shall  be  made  by  suitably  increasing  the  assumed  live  loading. 

Sect.  2309.  Lateral  and  Uplift  Forces. — fa)  In  the  design  of  base- 
ment walls  and  similar  approximately  vertical  structures  below  grade,  the 
forces  due  to  lateral  pressure  of  adjacent  soil  shall  be  calculated.  Due  allow- 
ance shall  be  made  for  possible  surcharge  from  fixed  or  moving  loads.  When 
a  portion  or  the  whole  of  the  adjacent  soil  is  below  a  free  water  surface,  cal- 
culations shall  be  based  on  the  weight  of  the  soil  as  diminished  by  buoyancy, 
plus  full  hydrostatic  pressure. 

(b)  In  the  design  of  basement  floors  and  similar  approximately  horizontal 
structures  below  grade,  the  upward  pressure  of  water,  if  any,  in  the  supporting 
soil  shall  be  taken  as  the  full  hydrostatic  pressure  applied  over  the  entire  area. 

(c)  Balcony  and  stairway  railings,  exterior  and  interior,  shall  be  designed 
to  resist  a  horizontal  thrust  of  twenty  pounds  per  linear  foot  applied  at  the 
top  of  the  rail. 

Sect.  2310.  Reduction  of  Live  Loads. —  A  reduction  of  the  total 
live  load  to  be  assumed  as  affecting  structural  members  supporting  con- 
siderable tributary  floor  area,  or  supporting  multiple  floors,  and  also  of  the 
live  load  supported  by  flat  and  two-way  reinforced  concrete  slabs,  shall  be 
permitted  according  to  the  following  schedule.  In  this  section  the  term 
"area  tributary"  to  a  supporting  member  means  the  load  supported  by  the 
member,  divided  by  the  average  load  per  square  foot,  and  the  reductions 
indicated  are  applicable  to  beams,  girders,  trusses,  columns,  piers,  hangers, 
walls,  and  foundations.  The  "tributary  area"  for  a  flat  or  two-way  slab  is 
the  area  of  a  panel.  No  reductions  shall  be  allowed  in  the  roof  load^as  given 
in  section  twenty-three  hundred  and  eleven,  on  any  portion  of  a  structure 
nor  in  the  special  concentrations  specified  in  section  twenty-three  hundred 

and  six. 

Per  Cent  Live  Load  Reductions. 


Occupancies  for  which 
Prescribed  Live  Load  per 

In  Members  sup- 
porting Tributary 
Areas  of  More 
than  — 

In  Members  supporting 
Stories  to  Number  of  — 

Square  Foot  is  — 

100 
sq.  ft. 

200 
sq.  ft. 

300 
sq.  ft. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6  or 

more. 

125  pounds  or  less 

5 
0 
0 
5 

10 
0 
0 

10 

15 

0 

25 

15 

15 

5 

25 

20 
10 

25 

30 
15 
25 

40 
20 
25 

50 

Over  125  pounds  (except  garages), 

20 
25 

Two-way  and  flat  slabs,  all  occu- 
pancies. 

(160) 


Sees.  2311=2313 

Sect.  2311.  Roof  Loads. —  (a)  Flat  roofs,  and  roofs  having  a  rise 
of  four  inches  or  less  per  foot  of  run  shall  be  designed  to  support  a  vertical 
live  load  of  thirty  pounds  per  square  foot  of  horizontal  projection.  Roofs 
used  as  roof  gardens,  or  for  other  such  purposes  shall  be  designed  as  floors  to 
support  the  loads  prescribed  for  corresponding  occupancies. 

(b)  Roofs  having  a  rise  of  more  than  four  and  less  than  twelve  inches  per 
foot  of  run  shall  be  designed  for  a  vertical  live  load  of  fifteen  pounds  per  square 
foot  of  horizontal  projection,  applied  to  the  entire  roof  or  to  either  of  the  slop- 
ing surfaces,  whichever  produces  the  greater  stress,  and  a  wind  load  as  pre- 
scribed in  section  twenty-three  hundred  and  twelve. 

(c)  Roofs  having  a  rise  of  twelve  inches  or  more  per  foot  of  run  shall  be 
designed  for  wind  load  only,  without  other  live  load. 

*Sect.  2312.  Wind  Loads. —  (a)  All  buildings  shall  be  made  capable 
of  resisting  horizontal  wind  pressures  on  their  exposed  vertical  surfaces,  and 
wind  pressures  normal  to  their  sloping  roofs  without  exceeding  the  stresses 
allowed  in  this  act. 

(b)  The  overturning  moment  due  to  wind  pressure  shall  not  exceed  two 
thirds  of  the  moment  of  stability  (as  measured  by  the  moment  of  the  dead 
loads,  about  the  leeward  edge  of  the  foundation  or  critical  section  at  any 
other  level)  unless  the  structure  is  anchored  to  resist  the  excess  overturning 
moment  without  exceeding  the  stresses  prescribed. 

(c)  The  wind  pressure  on  vertical  plane  surfaces  other  than  signs  shall  be 
taken  at  ten  pounds  per  square  foot  for  those  portions  less  than  forty  feet 
above  the  ground,  at  fifteen  pounds  per  square  foot  for  portions  between 
forty  and  eighty  feet  above  the  ground  and  at  twenty  pounds  per  square  foot 
for  portions  more  than  eighty  feet  above  the  ground. 

(d)  The  wind  pressure  on  vertical  plane  surfaces  of  all  signs  shall  be 
taken  at  fifteen  pounds  per  square  foot  for  those  portions  less  than  sixty 
feet  above  the  ground,  at  twenty  pounds  per  square  foot  for  portions  between 
sixty  and  eighty  feet  above  the  ground,  and  at  a  minimum  of  thirty  pounds 
per  square  foot  for  portions  more  than  eighty  feet  above  the  ground.  The 
Commissioner  may  require  a  sign  structure  to  be  designed  for  greater  pressure 
than  the  pressures  given  herein  if  in  his  judgment  the  exposure  requires  it. 

(e)  For  cylindrical  surfaces  the  area  exposed  to  wind  shall  be  assumed 
as  two  thirds  of  the  projected  area. 

(f)  On  roofs  having  a  rise  of  more  than  four  inches  per  foot  of  run  the 
wind  pressure  normal  to  the  surface  shall  be  taken  as  one  and  one  half  pounds 
per  square  foot  for  each  inch  of  rise  on  one  foot  run,  with  a  maximum  pressure 
of  twenty  pounds  per  square  foot  when  the  rise  exceeds  twelve  inches  per 
foot. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  and  Ord.  1945,  ch.  11  ] 

fSect.  2313.  Load  Tests  of  Structure. —  (a)  The  commissioner 
shall  have  the  right  to  order  tests  under  load  of  any  portion  of  a  structure 
when  the  conditions  have  been  such  as  to  leave  reasonable  doubt  as  to  the 
adequacy  of  the  structure  to  serve  the  purpose  for  which  it  was  intended. 
Such  tests  shall  not  be  required  to  be  made  on  any  concrete  or  masonry 
construction  until  it  is  at  least  sixty  days  old. 

(161) 


Sec.  2313. 

(b)  In  such  tests,  the  member  or  portion  of  the  structure  under  test  shall 
be  subjected  to  a  total  load,  including  its  own  weight,  which  shall  equal  the 
total  dead  load  plus  twice  the  live  load  for  which  it  is  required  to  be  designed. 
This  load  shall  be  left  in  position  for  a  period  of  twenty-four  hours  before 
removal.  The  structure,  if  a  floor  or  roof  or  portion  thereof,  shall  be  con- 
sidered to  have  passed  the  test  if  within  twenty-four  hours  after  the  removal 
of  the  load  such  floor  or  roof  recovers  three  quarters  of  the  maximum  deflection 
under  the  test  load.  If  the  member  or  portion  of  the  structure  shows  evident 
failure  or  fails  to  meet  the  recovery  requirement,  such  changes  or  modifications 
as  are  necessary  to  make  the  structure  adequate  for  the  rated  capacity  shall 
be  made  or,  where  lawful,  and  where  the  structure  is  undamaged,  a  lower 
rating  may  be  established. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 


(162) 


Sees.  2401-2402 


PART  24, 

MASONRY, 

Section 

2401  —  Design  of  Masonry. 

2402  —  Materials  of  Masonry. 

2403  —  Brick. 

2404  —  Stone. 

2405  —  Cast  Stone. 

2406  —  Concrete  Blocks. 

2407  —  Structural  Clay  Tile. 

2408  —  Gypsum  Tile. 

2409  —  Plain  Concrete. 

2410  —  Plain  Gypsum  Concrete. 

2411  — Mortar. 

2412  —  Bond  in  Masonry. 

2413  —  Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Masonry. 

2414  —  Masonry  Arches. 

2415  —  Reinforced  Masonry. 

2416  —  Second=Hand  Materials  for  Masonry. 

Section  2401.  Design  of  Masonry. — Masonry  shall  be  designed  by  a 
method  admitting  of  rational  analysis  according  to  established  principles  of 
mechanics,  supplemented  by  the  assumptions  herein  specified,  to  support 
the  loads  and  withstand  the  forces  to  which  it  is  subject  without  exceeding 
the  stresses  allowed  in  this  chapter  for  the  various  materials  thereof. 

Sect.  2402.  Materials  of  Masonry. —  (a)  The  quality  of  materials 
assembled  in  masonry  and  the  method  and  manner  of  their  assembly  shall  be 
suitable  for  their  use  and  shall  conform  to  the  minimum  requirements  of 
this  chapter. 

(b)  The  materials  entering  into  masonry  shall  be  classified  for  the  purposes 
of  this  code  as  follows: — 


(1) 

Brick. 

(2) 

Stone. 

(3) 

Cast  Stone. 

(4) 

Concrete  Blocks. 

(5) 

Structural  Clay  Tile. 

(6) 

Gypsum  Tile. 

(7) 

Plain  Concrete. 

(8) 

Plain  Gypsum  Concrete. 

(9) 

Mortar. 

(c)  A  material  of  masonry  other  than  those  classified  in  this  chapter, 
which  is  incombustible  and  otherwise  sufficiently  embodies  the  characteristics 
of  one  of  the  materials  here  classified,  and  which  satisfies  the  requirements  of 

(163) 


Sees.  2402-2405 

this  chapter  for  that  material  may  be  included  by  the  commissioner  in  the 
classification  of  that  material  which  it  most  closely  resembles. 

(d)  The  commissioner  may  require  reasonable  tests  from  time  to  time  of 
masonry  to  determine  their  quality  and  whether  they  conform  to  the  require- 
ments of  this  chapter. 

(e)  Tests  of  masonry  or  of  the  materials  thereof  shall  be  made  in  accord- 
ance with  the  standard  specifications  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing 
Materials  for  testing  the  material  in  question  and  if  for  any  material  such 
standard  specification  is  not  available  the  commissioner  shall  specify  the 
method  and  manner  of  making  the  test. 

*Sect.  2403.  Brick. —  (a)  Brick,  as'  classified  in  this  code,  shall  include 
masonry  units  usually  about  two  and  one  quarter  inches  thick,  three  and 
three  quarters  inches  wide  and  eight  inches  long.  Brick  shall  be  made  of 
burned  clay  or  shale,  concrete,  or  a  mixture  of  sand  and  lime. 

(b)  Burned  clay  brick  shall  be  either  solid  or  hollow,  but  if  hollow  shall 
be  at  least  three  quarters  solid. 

(c)  Concrete  brick  shall  be  made  of  Portland  cement,  aggregates  and 
water  as  specified  for  concrete  in  Part  26. 

(d)  Sand-lime  brick  shall  be  made  of  sand,  lime,  and  water  well  mixed, 
pressed  and  cured  in  a  carefully  controlled  process  to  a  uniformly  hard  and 
durable  product. 

(e)  Brick,  whether  of  burned  clay,  concrete,  or  sand  and  lime,  shall  be 
classified  for  strength  when  tested  flatwise  according  to  the  following  table: — 

Classification  of  Brick  by  Strength. 


Grade. 

compressive  strength 

(Pounds  per  Square 

Inch). 

Modulus  of  Rupture 

(Pounds  per  Square 

Inch). 

Average  of 
Five  Tests. 

Individual 
Minimum. 

Average  of 
Five  Tests. 

Individual 
Minimum. 

A 

4,500  or  more 
2,500  to  4,500 

3,500 
2,000 

600  or  more 
450  or  more 

400 

B 

300 

(f)  Brick  for  load-bearing  masonry  or  masonry  exposed  to  the  weather 
shall  be  of  Grade  A  or  B. 

(g)  Brick  for  fire  protection,  fire-resistive  walls,  or  fire-stopping  shall  be 
of  Grade  B  or  better. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

Sect.  2404.  Stone. —  Stone  for  masonry  shall  be  hard  and  durable . 
Sandstone  in  masonry  exposed  to  the  weather  shall  be  laid  with  its  natural 
bed  horizontal. 

fSect.  2405.  Cast  Stone. —  (a)  Cast  stone  shall  be  made  of  Portland 
cement,  aggregates  and  water  with  or  without  admixtures.  Cast  stone  for 
load-bearing  masonry  or  exposed  to  the  weather  shall  have  an  average  com- 

(164) 


Sees.  2405=2407 

pressive  strength  at  an  age  of  twenty-eight  days  of  at  least  five  thousand 
pounds  per  square  inch  and  shall  have  not  more  than  seven  nor  less  than  three 
per  cent  water  absorption  by  weight. 

(b)  Cast  stone  shall  not  project  more  than  six  inches  beyond  the  support- 
ing material.  Cast  stone  shall  have  reinforcing  as  required  for  reinforced 
concrete  in  Part  26  of  this  code  together  with  three  inch  damp-proofing 
protection  of  the  reinforcing. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

Sect.  2406.  Concrete  Blocks. —  (a)  Concrete  blocks,  as  classified  in 
this  Code,  shall  include  hollow  masonry  wall  units  of  concrete  made  from 
Portland  cement,  water  and  suitable  aggregates,  such  as  sand,  gravel,  crushed 
stone,  bituminous  or  anthracite  cinders,  burned  clay  or  shale  and  blast-furnace 
slag.  The  materials  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  for  the  materials  of 
concrete  specified  in  Part  26  except  that  cinder  aggregate  for  concrete  blocks 
shall  contain  not  more  than  twenty  per  cent  of  combustible  matter. 

(b)  Concrete  blocks  shall  have  outer  shells  at  least  five  eighths  inch  thick 
and  shall  have  strength  in  compression  not  less  than  two  hundred  and  fifty 
pounds  per  square  inch  of  gross  area  for  an  average  of  five  blocks  tested. 
Concrete  blocks  in  load-bearing  masonry  or  in  masonry  exposed  to  weather 
or  soil  shall  have  a  strength  in  compression  not  less  than  one  thousand  pounds 
per  square  inch  of  gross  area  for  an  average  of  five  blocks  tested,  and  a  mini- 
mum of  seven  hundred  pounds  per  square  inch  for  any  block. 

(c)  Concrete  blocks  exposed  to  weather  or  soil  in  masonry  shall  have  not 
more  than  twelve  per  cent  water  absorption  by  weight. 

Sect.  2407.  Structural  Clay  Tile. —  (a)  Structural  clay  tile  shall  con- 
sist of  well  burned  hollow  units  of  clay  or  shale. 

(b)  Structural  clay  tile  shall  be  classified  for  use  as  follows: — 

(1)  Partition  Tile. 

(2)  Floor  Tile. 

(3)  Load-Bearing  Tile. 

(c)  Structural  clay  partition  tile  shall  be  classified  for  physical  quality  as 
Grade  A  or  Grade  B  according  to  the  following  table:— 

Structural   Clay   Partition   Tile. 


Grade. 

Water  Absorption  by  Weight  (per  cent). 

Average  of 
Five  Blocks. 

Individual 
Maximum. 

Individual 
Minimum. 

A 

5  to  16 
10  to  25 

19 

28 

4 

B 

4 

(165) 


Sec.  2407 

(d)     Structural  clay  partition  tiles  of  the  dimensions  indicated  shall  have 
the  construction  and  dry  weights  given  in  the  following  table:— 


Structural  Clay  Partition  Tile. 

Dimensions  (Inches). 

Minimum  Number 
of  Cells. 

Minimum  Weight 
(Pounds). 

2x12x12 

3 
3 
3 
3 
4 
4 
4 
4 

14 

3  x  12  x  12 

15 

4x12x12 

16 

6x12x12 

22 

6x12x12 

25 

8x  12  x  12 

30 

10  x  12  x  12 

35 

12  x  12  x  12 

40 

(e)  Structural  clay  partition  tile  shall  not  be  used  in  load-bearing  masonry. 
Partition  tile  exposed  to  the  weather  shall  be  Grade  A.  Partition  tile  in  fire- 
resistive  construction  shall  be  Grade  B  or  better.  The  exterior  shells  shall  be 
at  least  five  eighths  inch  and  the  interior  webs  at  least  one  half  inch  thick. 

(f)  Structural  clay  floor  tile  shall  be  classified  for  physical  quality  as 
Grade  A  or  Grade  B  according  to  the  absorption  table  of  paragraph  (c)  of  this 
section  for  Structural  Clay  Partition  Tile.  Structural  clay  floor  tile  used  in 
floor  and  roof  arches  shall  have  at  least  the  physical  qualities  of  the  tile  here 
classified  as  Grade  B,  as  provided  in  Specifications  for  Structural  Clay  Floor 
Tile  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials. 

(g)  Structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  shall  be  classified  for  physical  quality 
as  Grade  A  or  Grade  B  according  to  the  absorption  table  of  paragraph  (c) 
of  this  section,  and  the  tile  of  each  grade  shall  satisfy  also  the  requirements 
for  strength  of  the  following  table  :— 

Structural  Clay  Load=Bearing  Tile. 


Compressive  Strength 
(Pounds  per  Square  Inch  op  Gross  Area). 

Grade. 

END   CONSTRUCTION. 

SIDE  construction. 

Average  of 
Five  Blocks. 

Individual 
Minimum. 

Average  of 
Five  Blocks. 

Individual 
Minimum. 

A 

1,400  or  more 
1,000  or  more 

1,000 
700 

700  or  more 
700  or  more 

500 

B 

500 

(h)  Test3  to  establish  the  grade  of  structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  shall 
be  made  as  provided  in  Specifications  for  Structural  Clay  Load-Bearing  Wall 
Tile  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials. 

(166) 


Sees.  2407=2411 


(i)     Structural  clay  load-bearing  tile  shall  have  the  cellular  construction 
and  minimum  weights  given  in  the  following  table: — 

Structural  Clay  Load=Bearing  Tile. 


Thickness  in  Wall  (Inches). 

Minimum  Cells  in 
Thickness  of  Wall. 

Minimum  Tile 

Weight  per  Square 

Foot  (Pounds). 

4    

1 
2 
2 
2 
3 

20 

6    

30 

8 

36 

10 

42 

12 

52 

(j)  Structural  clay  tile  used  in  load-bearing  masonry  shall  be  load-bearing 
tile  having  at  least  the  physical  qualities  of  Grade  B,  and  such  tile  in  masonry 
exposed  to  weather  or  soil  shall  be  of  Grade  A.  Load-bearing  tile  shall  have 
shells  at  least  seven  eighths  inch  and  webs  at  least  five  eighths  inch  thick  and 
shall  otherwise  conform  to  Specifications  for  Structural  Clay  Load-Bearing 
Wall  Tile  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials. 

*Sect.  2408.  Gypsum  Tile. —  (a)  Gypsum  tile  used  for  fire-resistive 
purposes  shall  conform  to  the  provisions  of  Specifications  for  Gypsum  Parti- 
tion Tile  or  Block  and  Specifications  for  Gypsum  of  the  American  Society  for 
Testing  Materials. 

(b)  Gypsum  tile  shall  not  be  used  in  load-bearing  masonry  or  in  masonry 
exposed  to  weather  or  soil. 

*Sect.  2409.  Plain  Concrete. —  (a)  Plain  concrete  is  concrete  cast 
in  place  and  not  reinforced,  or  reinforced  only  for  shrinkage  or  changes  of 
temperature.  Plain  concrete  shall  be  mixed,  placed  and  cured  as  specified 
for  concrete  in  Part  26. 

(b)  Plain  concrete  in  load-bearing  masonry  or  where  exposed  to  soil  or 
where  used  for  fire-resistive  purposes,  shall  be  of  such  proportions  as  to  have 
a  strength  of  at  least  fifteen  hundred  pounds  per  square  inch  and  where  ex- 
posed to  wetting  or  freezing  at  least  two  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch  as 
provided  in  Part  26. 

[*As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2} 

fSect.  2410.     Plain   Gypsum    Concrete. —  (a)     Plain  gypsum  concrete 
may  be  used  for  fire  protection  and  non -structural  purposes  and  shall  contain 
not  over  fifteen  per  cent  by  weight  of  wood  or  other  combustible  binder. 
[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  6  ] 

JSect.  2411.  Mortar. —  (a)  Masonry,  other  than  plain  concrete  and 
plain  gypsum  concrete,  shall  be  laid  in  mortar  except  stone  masonry  in  under- 
water masonry,  in  retaining  walls  not  in  buildings  which  may  be  laid  without 
mortar.  Load-bearing  masonry  laid  in  mortar  shall  have  full  beds  and  full 
builds  of  mortar  in  which  the  units  are  placed. 

(167) 


Sec.  2411 

(b)  Mortar  shall  consist  of  a  mixture  of  suitable  proportions  of  [Portland 
cementr  lime,  sand  and  water;  but  approved  special  masonry  cement  may  be 
substituted  for  the  Portland  cement  or  lime,  or  both. 

(c)  Portland  cement  and  sand  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  for  these 
materials  in  Part  26  of  this  code.  Lime  shall  conform  to  Specifications  for 
Quicklime  for  Structural  Purposes  or  Specifications  for  Hydrated  Lime  for 
Structural  Purposes  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials. 

(d)  Lime  putty  shall  be  made  by  slaking  to  a  smooth  paste  fresh  and 
properly  burned  quicklime.  The  resultant  paste  shall  be  stored  in  a  suitable 
box  or  other  receptable  for  not  less  than  forty-eight  hours  before  being  mixed 
with  sand.  Hydrated  lime  may  be  substituted  in  equivalent  amount  for 
lime  putty. 

(e)  Lime  mortar  shall  be  composed  of  one  part  of  lime  putty  and  not 
over  three  parts  of  sand  by  volume.  Portland  cement  may  be  added  to 
lime  mortar,  replacing  an  equal  volume  of  lime  putty,  and  when  the  cement 
is  not  less  than  one  half  the  lime  by  volume,  the  working  stress  allowed  in 
the  masonry  may  be  increased  proportionally  up  to  the  stress  specified  for 
lime-cement  mortar. 

(f)  Lime-cement  mortar  Class  A  shall  be  composed  of  one  part  of  lime 
putty,  one  part  of  Portland  cement  and  not  more  than  six  parts  of  sand  by 
volume.  Portland  cement  may  be  added  to  lime-cement  mortar  replacing 
an  equal  volume  of  lime  putty,  and  when  such  addition  is  made,  the  working 
stress  allowed  in  the  masonry  may  be  increased  proportionally  up  to  the 
stress  specified  for  cement  mortar. 

(g)  Lime-cement  mortar  Class  B  shall  be  composed  of  two  parts  lime 
putty,  one  part  of  Portland  cement  and  not  more  than  eight  parts  of  sand  by 
volume.  Portland  cement  may  be  added  to  lime-cement  mortar  replacing 
an  equal  volume  of  lime  putty,  and  when  such  addition  is  made,  the  working 
stress  allowed  in  the  masonry  may  be  increased  proportionally  up  to  the 
stress  specified  for  cement  mortar. 

(h)  Cement  mortar  shall  be  composed  of  one  part  of  Portland  cement 
and  not  more  than  three  parts  of  sand  by  volume  with  an  allowable  addition 
of  lime  putty  or  hydrated  lime  not  to  exceed  fifteen  per  cent  by  volume  of  the 
cement  content. 

(i)  Mortar  made  of  so-called  "Masonry  Cement"  may  be  used.  The 
unit  stress  allowed  in  masonry  laid  with  such  mortar  shall  be  determined  by 
the  commissioner  after  tests  or  other  satisfactory  evidence  have  been  sub- 
mitted to  him,  but  the  unit  stress  shall  not  be  greater  than  that  given  in 
section  twenty-four  hundred  and  thirteen  for  masonry  laid  in  lime-cement 
mortar. 

(j)  In  proportioning  mortar  a  sack  of  Portland  cement  weighing  about 
ninety-four  pounds  shall  be  taken  as  one  cubic  foot  and  the  volume  of  the 
sand  shall  be  based  on  dry  and  loose  measurement. 

(k)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  paragraph  (a)  of  this  section  load- 
bearing  masonry,  party  walls,  fire  walls  and  masonry  exposed  to  weather  or 
soil  shall  be  laid  in  lime  mortar,  lime-cement  mortar,  cement  mortar  or 

(168) 


Sees.  241N2413 

approved  masonry  cement  mortar.  Hollow  masonry  walls  and  masonry  of 
hollow  units  shall  be  laid  in  lime-cement  mortar,  cement  mortar  or  approved 
masonry  cement  mortar.  Masonry  likely  to  be  under  water  or  in  contact 
with  wet  soil,  if  laid  in  mortar,  shall  be  laid  in  cement  mortar.  Mortar  or 
grout  under  metal  bases  of  columns  or  beams  resting  upon  concrete  shall  be 
made  without  lime. 

(1)     Gypsum  tile  walls  and  other  non-bearing  masonry  walls  may  be  laid 
in  gypsum  mortar. 

[  |As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6} 

Sect.   2412.     Bond   in    Masonry. —  Masonry   walls  and  piers  shall   be 
bonded  as  provided  in  Part  14. 

*Sect.  2413.  Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Masonry. —  (a)  In  ma- 
sonry walls  and  piers  subject  to  axial  loads  the  average  unit  compressive 
stress  shall  not  exceed  the  values  given  in  the  following  table: — 


Average  Unit  Compressive  Stress  in  Masonry. 

(Pounds  Per  Square  Inch,  Gross  Area.) 


Masonry. 

Lime 
Mortar. 

Lime-Cement  Mortar. 

Cement. 

Class  A. 

Class  B. 

Mortar. 

Brick: 

Grade  A 

100 

75 

300 

100 

200 
150 

450 

200 
100 

80 
80 

180 
130 

400 

180 

90 

70 
70 

300 

Grade  B 

225 

Cut  Stone: 

Granite 
Limestone    1 

600 

Marble         j ' 

Sandstone    j 

Cast  Stone       \ 

Rubble  Stone  / 

Concrete  Blocks 

300 
150 

Structural  Clay  Tile: 

Load-Bearing  Tile 

100 

Floor  Tile 

100 

The  compressive  unit  stress  in  plain  concrete  shall  not  exceed  one  fifth  the 
compressive  strength  at  twenty-eight  days  when  determined  as  specified 
in  Part  26. 

(b)  The  unit  shear  in  masonry  shall  not  exceed  one  tenth  the  allowable 
unit  compressive  stress. 

(c)  The  maximum  unit  stress  in  bending  in  sound  natural  stones  used  in 
lintels,  foundations,  retaining  walls  and  elsewhere  shall  not  exceed  the  values 
given  in  the  following  table: — 

(169) 


Sees.  2413=2416 

Maximum  Unit  Stress  in  Bending. 
[Pounds  Per  Square  Inch.] 

Granite 180 

Limestone 140 

Marble 120 

Sandstone 100 

The  maximum  unit  stress  in  bending  in  plain  concrete  shall  not  exceed  one 
fiftieth  the  compressive  strength  at  twenty-eight  days  when  determined  as 
specified  in  Part  26. 

(d)  The  unit  bearing  stress  in  masonry  under  supported  beams,  columns 
and  other  concentrations,  and  the  maximum  unit  stress  in  masonry  walls  and 
piers  including  stress  due  to  calculated  bending  and  eccentric  loading  shall 
not  exceed  by  more  than  twenty-five  per  cent,  the  allowable  average  stresses 
given  in  this  section. 

(e)  In  hollow  walls  or  in  masonry  of  hollow  units,  solid  masonry  shall  be 
provided  under  concentrations  of  load  to  transmit  the  load  without  excessive 
stress. 

(f)  Masonry  bearing  walls  shall  have  at  least  the  thickness  specified  in 
Part  14. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

fSect.  2414.  Plain  Masonry  Arches. —  (a)  Masonry  arches  shall  be 
so  designed  that  the  line  of  thrust  under  all  loadings  lies  within  the  middle  third 
of  the  structural  arch,  or  arch  ring.  Abutments  shall  be  provided  capable  of 
resisting  the  horizontal  as  well  as  the  vertical  component  of  the  thrust  without 
settlement  which  would  permit  the  line  of  thrust  to  depart  from  the  middle 
third  of  the  arch  ring. 

(b)  The  horizontal  component  of  the  arch  thrust  may  be  resisted  by 
metal  ties  so  placed  that  the  horizontal  component  furnished  by  the  ties  com- 
bined with  the  vertical  supporting  reaction  shall  be  in  line  with  the  arch 
thrust. 

(c)  In  the  design  of  tie  rods  and  beams  to  resist  the  thrust  of  successive 
masonry  floor  arches,  the  load  producing  the  thrust  shall  be  considered  to  be 
the  live  load  for  interior  panels  and  the  total  load  for  exterior  panels. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

JSect.  2415.     Reinforced  Masonry. — Lintels  in  masonry  walls,  and  other 

approved  structures,  may  be  constructed  of  reinforced  masonry  when  designed 

and  constructed  in  a  manner  consistent  with  the  provisions  of  Parts  26  and  28 

of  this  code. 

[  f  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

Sect.  2416.  Second=Hand  Materials  for  Masonry. —  Second-hand 
brick,  stone,  blocks  and  other  masonry  units  shall  not  be  used  in  masonry 
unless  they  conform  to  the  requirements  of  this  code  and  have  been  thoroughly 
cleaned. 


(170) 


Sees.  2501=2502 


PART  25. 
WOOD. 

Section 

2501  —  Design  of  Wood, 

2502  —  Quality  of  Lumber. 

2503  —  Lumber  Sizes  and  Grades. 

2504  —  Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Wood. 

2505  —  Wooden  Columns. 

2506  —  Wooden  Beams. 

2507  —  Wooden  Floors  and  Roofs. 

2508  —  Wooden  Walls  and  Partitions. 

2509  —  Wood  Framing. 

Section  2501.  Design  of  Wood. — (a)  Structures  of  wood  shall  be 
designed  by  methods  admitting  of  rational  analysis  according  to  established 
principles  of  mechanics,  supplemented  by  the  assumptions  herein  specified,  to 
support  the  loads  and  withstand  the  forces  to  which  they  are  subject  without 
exceeding  the  stresses  allowed  in  this  part  for  the  various  grades  and  species 
of  wood. 

(b)  Wooden  structural  members  shall  be  so  framed,  tied,  braced  and 
anchored  as  to  develop  the  strength  and  rigidity  necessary  for  the  purposes 
for  which  they  are  used. 

(c)  Walls  and  partitions  of  wood  shall  conform  to  the  provisions  of  Part  14. 
Floor  and  roof  construction  shall  conform  to  the  provisions  of  Parts  16  and 
17  respectively.  Wood  near  chimneys  and  heating  apparatus  shall  con- 
form to  the  provisions  of  Part  21. 

(d)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  Part  29,  wood  shall  not  be  used  in 
the  foundation  of  a  structure.  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  Parts  14,  16 
and  17,  wood  shall  not  be  used  to  support  masonry. 

Sect.  2502.  Quality  of  Lumber. —  Structural  wood  of  the  species 
listed  in  the  tables  of  allowable  unit  stresses  in  section  twenty-five  hundred 
and  four  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  for  the  several  grades  in  specifica- 
tions or  grading  rules  of  regional  associations  of  lumber  manufacturers  which 
are  based  upon  the  grading  procedure  of  American  Lumber  Standards  in 
Simplified  Practice  of  the  United  States  Department  of  Commerce  and  the 
Guide  to  the  Grading  of  Structural  Timbers  and  the  Determination  of  Work- 
ing Stresses  (Miscellaneous  Publication  No.  185  of  the  United  States  De- 
partment of  Agriculture).  The  lumber  of  the  several  grades  and  species 
shall  be  so  specified  as  to  justify  the  allowable  stresses  in  accordance  with 
the  said  Guide  to  the  Grading  of  Structural  Timbers  and  the  Determination 
of  Working  Stresses. 

(171) 


Sees.  2503=2504 

*Sect.  2503.  Lumber  Sizes  and  Grades. — (a)  The  minimum  sizes 
of  structural  members  of  wood  specified  in  this  part  refer  to  net  sizes, 
for  which  American  Lumber  Standard  dressed  sizes  shall  be  accepted  as 
minimum.  For  convenience  nominal  sizes  may  be  shown  on  the  plans  sub- 
mitted with  applications  to  the  commissioner  for  permit,  provided  that  com- 
putations of  stresses  in  wood  members  used  structurally  shall  be  determined 
by  the  net  finished  sizes  of  lumber  and  timber  employed.  The  actual  di- 
mensions of  greater  rough  and/or  dressed  sizes  of  lumber  supplied  may  be 
computed  for  strength  provided  such  sizes  are  specified  or  shown  on  the 
drawings. 

(b)  The  species,  classification  and  grade  of  all  wood  used  structurally 
shall  be  specified  on  the  drawings  filed  with  the  commissioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

fSect.  2504.  Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Wood.— (a)  The  unit 
stress  in  wooden  structural  members  of  the  several  species  and  grades  shall 
not  exceed  the  allowable  values  specified  in  the  following  tables  computed 
on  the  net  cross  section,  except  stresses  due  to  wind  impact  and  temporary 
loads  and  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section. 

[The  tables  which  in  law  follow  here  are,  for  typographical 
reasons,   reproduced  on  pages   178  to   181,   inclusive.] 

The  working  stresses  listed  in  the  tables  are  allowed  for  lumber  in  con- 
tinuously dry  locations,  for  pressure  impregnated  lumber  and  timber  with 
approved  preservative  toxics,  and  for  wet  timbers  below  mean  low  water 
level.  Compression  across  the  grain  in  untreated  lumber  used  in  damp 
locations,  alternately  wet  and  dry  or  wholly  wet  shall  not  exceed  seventy 
per  cent  of  the  values  shown  in  Table  I.  In  structures  such  as  bridges  in 
the  open,  trestles,  towers  and  reviewing  stands,  the  allowable  unit  stresses, 
except  for  shear  and  rigidity,  in  untreated  lumber  and  timbers  shall  be  re- 
duced to  eighty-five  per  cent  of  the  unit  stresses  listed  and  in  untreated 
structures  more  or  less  continuously  damp  or  wet  such  unit  stresses  shall 
not  exceed  seventy-five  per  cent. 

(b)  Except  for  form-work,  sewer  and  trench  dynnage  and  other  tem- 
porary purposes,  sheathing,  inaccessible  attic  joists,  lumber  and  timber 
used  structurally  or  for  load  bearing  purposes  shall  be  of  the  grades  and 
species  listed  in  accompanying  Tables  I  and  II  and  their  corresponding 
allowable  unit  stresses,  in  pounds  per  square  inch,  computed  on  the  basis 
of  actual  dimensions,  shall  not  be  exceeded  except  as  herein  modified  for 
impact,  wind,  etc.  Those  species,  grades  and  corresponding  stresses  not 
included  in  Tables  I  and  II  shall  be  established  by  the  commissioner  on  the 
basis  of  miscellaneous  publication  now  known  as  No.  185  "Guide  to  the 
Grading  of  Structural  Timbers  and  Determination  of  Working  Stresses" 
and  supplement  thereto  of  the  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture. 

(172) 


Sec.  2504 

(c)  In  wooden  members  subject  to  axial  tension  the  tensile  stress  shall 
not  exceed  the  allowable  stress  in  bending.  Compression  parallel  to  the 
grain  shall  not  exceed  the  stress  allowed  in  short  columns. 

(d)  The  unit  stress  in  wooden  structural  members  due  to  wind  alone  or 
in  combination  with  static  live  and  dead  loads  shall  not  exceed  by  more  than 
one  half  the  allowable  stresses  specified  in  this  section. 

(e)  When  the  unit  stress  in  wooden  structural  members  due  to  impact 
does  not  exceed  that  due  to  static  live  load  the  members  need  not  be  increased 
in  size  on  account  of  impact.  When  the  stress  due  to  impact  exceeds  that 
due  to  static  live  load,  the  unit  stress  in  the  member  due  to  impact  and  dead 
load  combined  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable  stresses  specified  in  this  section. 

(f)  All  structural  lumber  shall  be  grade  marked  or  other  evidence  satis- 
factory to  the  commissioner  shall  be  submitted  verifying  its  appropriate 
grade.    Salvaged  lumber,  if  it  meets  grading  requirements,  may  be  used. 

(g)  Temporary  Structures. 

1.  In  temporary  structures  and  structures  subject  to  loading  for  short 
periods  allowable  stresses  may  be  exceeded  by  not  more  than  fifty  per 
cent  in  the  discretion  of  the  commissioner. 

2.  In  joists  supported  on  a  ribbon  or  ledger  board  and  spiked  to  the 
studs,  the  allowable  unit  stress  in  compression  across  the  grain  may  exceed 
the  allowable  stresses  specified  in  this  section  by  not  more  than  one  half. 

3.  The  unit  stress  in  compression  across  the  grain  in  a  limited  area 
not  over  six  inches  long  along  the  grain  nor  less  than  three  inches  from  the 
ends  of  the  timber  may  exceed  the  allowable  stresses  specified  in  this 
section  by  not  more  than  the  following  percentages: 


Length  of  Bearing  (Inches). 


Percentage  Excess. 


1/2 

1 

1  1/2 

2 

3 

4 

6  or  more . 


85 
60 
45 
30 
15 
10 
None 


Intermediate  values  shall  be  determined  by  interpolation.  The  bearing 
stress  under  a  washer  or  small  plate  shall  not  exceed  that  provided  in  this 
paragraph  for  a  bearing  the  length  of  which  equals  the  diameter  of  the 
washer  or  plate. 

4.  Temporary  structures  as  considered  above  shall  be  removed  within 
one  year. 

(173) 


Sees.  2504-2505 

(h)     Unit  compressive  stress  on  a  surface  inclined  to  the  grain  shall  not 

exceed  the  following  value: — 

CQ 

C  Sin2  $  +  Q  cos2  Q 

in  which  (C)  is  the  allowable  unit  compression  parallel  to  the  grain. 
(Q)  is  the  allowable  unit  compression  across  the  grain. 
{0)  is  the  angle  between  the  direction  of  the  pressure  and  the  direc- 
tion of  the  grain. 

(i)  The  allowable  unit  shear  specified  in  this  section  is  based  upon  the 
maximum  amount  of  checking,  due  to  shakes  or  seasoning,  permitted  by  the 
grading  rules  for  each  species.  Lumber  with  greater  checking  than  is  per- 
mitted in  the  grading  rules  may  be  used  in  structures  with  the  approval  of  the 
commissioner,  provided  the  unit  shear  is  proportionately  less  than  the  allow- 
able values  specified  in  this  section. 

(j)  The  unit  shear  in  joint  or  connection  details  of  wooden  trusses  or 
framing  may  exceed  the  values  specified  in  this  section  by  not  exceeding  fifty 

per  cent, 

[•\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2} 

JSect .  2505.  Wooden  Columns. —  (a)  The  average  unit  compression 
in  wooden  columns  axially  loaded  shall  not  exceed  the  values  specified  in 
section  twenty-five  hundred  and  four,  depending  upon  the  ratio  of  length  to 
least  net  dimension.  Intermediate  values  shall  be  determined  by  inter- 
polation.    The  ratio  of  length  to  least  dimension  shall  not  exceed  fifty. 

(b)  The  axial  load  on  a  wooden  column  of  round  cross-section  shall  not 
exceed  that  allowed  on  a  square  column  of  the  same  cross-sectional  area. 

(c)  The  least  lateral  dimension  of  a  tapered  column  for  determining  its 
slenderness  ratio  shall  be  measured  at  a  point  one  third  the  length  from  the 
small  end  but  shall  not  be  taken  as  more  than  three  halves  the  least  dimension 
at  the  small  end.  The  average  unit  compression  at  the  small  end  shall  not 
exceed  the  allowable  stress  for  a  short  column. 

(d)  Built  up  wooden  columns  of  several  adequately  seasoned  pieces  shall 
have  each  well  spiked,  screwed,  glued,  or  bolted  together  with  approved 
mechanical  connectors.  Solid  laminated  columns  shall  have  boards  or  planks 
coverplated  securely  to  the  edges  of  all  laminations. 

(e)  In  a  built  up  wooden  column  subject  to  axial  load  the  average  unit 
compression  shall  not  exceed  three  quarters  of  the  allowable  stress  specified 
in  section  twenty-five  hundred  and  four  nor  shall  its  load  exceed  the  allowable 
load  of  a  solid  rectangular  wooden  column  of  which  the  moment  of  inertia 
about  each  principal  axis  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  moments  of  inertia  of  the 
several  pieces  of  the  built  up  column  about  corresponding  axes. 

(f)  Wooden  columns  and  posts  shall  be  squared  at  the  ends  at  right  angles 
to  their  axes. 

(g)  Wooden  columns  resting  upon  concrete  or  masonry  which  is  in  contact 

with  the  ground  shall  be  separated  from  such  concrete  or  masonry  by  an 

effectual  seal  to  prevent  moisture  from  reaching  the  wood  through  capillary 

action. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

(174) 


Sec.  2506 

*Sect.  2506.  Wooden  Beams. —  (a)  In  computing  the  maximum  unit 
shear  in  wooden  beams  the  effect  of  loads  not  further  from  the  center  of  the 
support  than  the  depth  of  the  beam  may  be  neglected. 

(b)  Wooden  beams  notched  at  the  end  supports  shall  not  be  so  loaded 
that  the  unit  shear  exceeds  the  allowable  value  specified  in  section  twenty-five 
hundred  and  four  when  computed  by  the  following  formula — 

3  Vh 


2bd2 
in  which  (V)  is  the  shear. 

(h)  is  the  total  depth  of  the  beam, 
(b)  is  the  breadth  of  the  beam. 

(d)  is  the  depth  of  the  beam  from  the  bottom  of  the  notch  to  the 
opposite  face. 

(c)  Unless  the  local  unit  stress  is  calculated  and  found  to  be  not  in  excess 
of  allowable  stresses  specified  in  section  twenty-five  hundred  and  four,  wooden 
beams  shall  not  be  cut,  notched  or  bored  to  clear  pipes,  wires,  conduits  or 
for  other  purposes  except  as  follows:  — 

(1)  Notches  may  be  cut  in  the  top  or  bottom  not  deeper  than  one 
fifth  the  depth  of  the  beam  and  not  further  from  the  support  than  one 
fifth  the  span. 

(2)  Holes  may  be  bored  in  the  middle  third  of  the  depth  and  length 
not  larger  in  diameter  than  one  quarter  the  depth. 

(3)  Holes  may  be  bored  elsewhere  in  the  piece  limited  as  to  size  and 
placement  the  same  as  knots  in  the  grade  of  lumber  used,  having  due 
regard  to  the  existence  of  knots  in  the  piece. 

(d)  Trimmers,  tail  joists  and  headers  more  than  eight  feet  long  or  more 
than  four  feet  long  where  the  live  load  exceeds  fifty  pounds  per  square  foot 
unless  framed  on  top  of  supporting  beams,  shall  be  hung  in  approved  stirrup 
irons  or  joist  hangers. 

(e)  In  wooden  floor  and  roof  construction  where  the  depth  of  joists  is 
more  than  three  times  the  thickness,  and  where  the  span  is  greater  than  eight 
feet,  bridging  shall  be  placed  between  joists  not  less  than  eight  feet  apart 
nor  less  than  eight  feet  from  supports.  Cross-bridging  shall  not  be  less  than 
two  square  inches  in  net  cross-section;  and  where  the  live  load  is  greater 
than  fifty  pounds  per  square  foot,  not  less  than  four  square  inches. 

(f)  Joists  doubled  under  bearing  partitions  shall  be  well  spiked  together 
or  separated  by  solid  bridging  not  more  than  sixteen  inches  apart. 

(g)  Beams  built  up  of  timbers  shall  be  firmly  bolted  together.  Bolts 
shall  be  staggered  and  spaced  longitudinally  not  further  apart  than  four 
times  the  depth  of  the  beam. 

(h)  Where  wooden  girders  or  beams  meet  at  columns  they  shall  be  fitted 
around  the  columns  or  butted  up  close,  and  unless  the  post  caps  or  bolsters 
provide  sufficient  anchorage,  shall  be  held  in  place  and  tied  through  to  form 
a  continuous  tie  across  the  building  sufficient  to  resist  the  wind  pressure 

(175) 


Sees.  2506=2507 

specified  in  Part  23  applied  outwardly  to  the  walls.  Where  wooden  beams 
are  supported  by  girders  they  shall  be  tied  to  form  a  similar  continuous  tie 
across  the  building. 

(i)  Wooden  beams  or  girders  resting  upon  masonry  walls,  or  parallel  to 
masonry  walls,  and  nailing  pieces  for  planking  or  boarding  supported  by 
masonry  walls,  shall  be  bolted  or  otherwise  anchored  to  the  walls  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  resist  the  wind  pressure  specified  in  Part  23  applied  outwardly 
to  the  walls. 

(j)  Joists  supporting  a  live  floor  or  roof  load  not  more  than  forty  pounds 
per  square  foot  and  supported  at  the  ends  by  a  wooden  girder,  may  rest  upon 
a  wooden  strip  or  cleat,  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  by  three  and  one  half 
inches,  well  spiked  or  otherwise  secured  to  the  girder.  Such  joists  supporting 
heavier  loads  shall  rest  on  top  of  the  girder  or  be  hung  in  approved  joist 
hangers. 

(k)  Nailing  strips  for  the  support  of  wooden  joists  or  planking  on  a  steel 
girder  or  beam  shall  be  bolted  to  the  web  of  the  girder  or  beam.  Where  the 
live  load  exceeds  forty  pounds  per  square  foot  the  nailing  strip  shall  be  bolted 
to  the  girder  or  beam  and  shall  rest  upon  the  flanges  or  upon  shelf  angles 
attached  to  the  web  which  provide  a  three-inch  bearing  or  upon  other  approved 
support. 

(I)  The  ends  of  wooden  beams  or  girders  resting  upon  masonry  or  concrete 
exterior,  party  or  fire  walls  shall  be  separated  from  the  opposite  face  of  the 
wall  and  from  beams  entering  the  opposite  face  of  the  wall  by  at  least  four 
inches  of  solid  masonry  or  concrete. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  6  ] 

Sect.  2507.  Wooden  Floors  and  Roofs. —  (a)  Wood  shall  not  be  used 
in  the  first  floor  of  a  building  where  there  is  not  a  basement  or  cellar  below, 
unless  it  has  clearance  above  the  ground  of  at  least  twenty-four  inches,  and  the 
space  below  is  ventilated  either  to  a  heated  basement  or  to  the  outside  air. 
Ventilation  of  such  space  to  a  heated  basement  shall  consist  of  at  least  two 
remote  openings  in  the  basement  wall  having  a  total  area  of  at  least  two  square 
feet  for  each  twenty-five  linear  feet  of  wall.  Ventilation  of  such  space  to 
outside  air  shall  consist  of  one  or  more  openings  in  each  exterior  wall  thereof, 
well  distributed,  except  that  openings  need  not  be  provided  in  the  front  wall 
when  the  space  is  ventilated  in  the  rear  and  both  side  walls.  The  aggregate 
area  of  openings  shall  be  not  less  than  two  square  feet  for  each  twenty-five 
linear  feet  of  wall.  Openings  in  exterior  walls  shall  be  protected  by  non- 
corrodible  wire  mesh  with  openings  not  greater  than  one  half  inch. 

(b)  Rough  or  sub-floor  boards  in  buildings  of  Type  IV  or  Type  VI  shall 
be  laid  across  the  joists  at  an  angle  of  not  less  than  forty-five  degrees.  Each 
board  shall  be  nailed  twice  at  each  joist.  The  sub-flooring  shall  extend  to 
and  be  fitted  to  the  rough  walls  and  partitions. 

(c)  Floor  boards  and  planking  shall  not  penetrate  a  party  or  fire  wall  nor 
extend  through  a  doorway  in  a  party  or  fire  wall.  Roof  boarding  and  planking 
shall  not  penetrate  or  extend  over  a  party  or  fire  wall. 

(176) 


Sees.  2508=2509 

jSect.  2508.  Wooden  Walls  and  Partitions. —  (a)  Wooden  stud 
bearing  walls  shall  be  designed  to  support  their  vertical  loads  without  assist- 
ance from  boarding  or  other  wall  covering.  Bridging  and  other  bracing  shall 
be  provided  as  may  be  necessary  for  this  purpose  and  otherwise  as  provided 
in  Part  14. 

(b)  Floor  or  roof  girders,  hip  and  valley  rafters  framing  on  exterior  stud 
walls  shall  be  supported  by  adequate  posts. 

(c)  Stud  partitions  containing  plumbing,  heating  or  other  pipes  shall  be 
so  framed  and  the  joists  beneath  so  spaced  as  to  provide  proper  clearance  for 
the  piping.  Where  a  partition  containing  such  piping  is  parallel  to  supporting 
floor  joists,  the  joists  shall  be  doubled  under  the  partition,  spaced  to  clear  the 
piping  and  bridged  with  solid  bridging. 

(d)  All  concealed  openings  through  floors  shall  be  fire-stopped  as  provided 
in  section  2202,  paragraph  (i)  of  this  code. 

ft  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  6  ] 

Sect.  2509.  Wood  Framing. —  (a)  In  bolted  connections  of  wooden 
trusses  or  framing  the  center  of  a  bolt  shall  not  be  less  than  twice  its  diameter 
from  the  edge  of  the  member.  In  the  direction  of  the  force  transmitted  the 
distance  from  the  edge  shall  be  such  that  the  unit  shear  shall  not  exceed 
the  allowable  shear  specified  in  section  twenty-five  hundred  and  four.  The 
bolt  shall  fill  the  hole  completely  without  splitting  the  timber.  Bolts  with 
rolled  threads  shall  not  be  used  in  shear.  Bolt  threads  shall  be  full  and 
clean  and  of  sufficient  length  to  allow  the  nut  to  be  screwed  up  tight.  Washers 
shall  be  used  under  nuts  and,  except  on  carriage  bolts,  under  heads.  Nuts 
shall  be  concentric. 

(b)  Timber  joints  in  which  other  fastening  devices  and  connectors  are 
used  shall  be  designed  and  framed  in  accordance  with  good  engineering 
practice. 


(177) 


03 

A 

<! 
O 

•    5 

S       « 


U3 

o 

z 

Ph 

tt 

«a 

Ct^ 

r/> 

o 

H 

03 

£ 

►H 

o 

1 

t-3 

1 

03" 

UJ 

«* 

03 

w 

pq 


►J 

H 
Q 

&      Q 


3 
H 


MH 

°s« 

© 

0 

O 

0 

0 

0 

oo.t:  go  *-■ 

0 

0 

O 

0 

0 

0 

P  3  £  0 

0 

0 

O 

0 

0 

0 

,— 1  -r-l     r*  -+^> 

0 

0 

O 

0* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

O 

CO 

0 

0 

3 

a 

0 

(N 

1— I 

CO 

r-l 

I-H 

CO 

I-I 

0 

•  r-l 

el        fl 

0) 
CO 

g.2       'g 

0 

O 

O  iC  1O1O 

O 

O 

o»o»o 

0 

O 

00  "#  IN  IN 

O 

O 

00-*  (N 

0) 

52; 

<N 

CO 

00  CO  CO  CO 

CO 

CO 

CO  CO  CO 

. > 

■ V 

0 

0 

•cj  s** 

O 

OO 

OOOO 

OCN 

0 

000 

O 

(NO 

(NO  OO 

t»iO 

0 

(NOO 

D1 
CO 

1—1 

1-1 1-1 

1-1              rH 

7-1 

Hrtrt 

M 

0> 

CO 

^^-^ 

*d 

,0 

0 

a  a  *\i 

O 

OO 

OOOO 

OO 

0 

0 

OOO 

0 

O 

OO 

OOOO 

OO 

■* 

OOO 

P-t 

llfl 

O 

Tfl  I-H 

00  CO  (NO 

1—1  O 

0 

00  COIN 

1-1 

l-l  T-l 

tH  1— 1  I-* 

1—1 

I— 1 

rH  r-l  i-l 

^s^S 

<# 

H 

a 
"00 

GO 

a 

0 

ci 

^05 

«►§  R 

00 

go 

<3 

J3 

< 

CQ 

<3 

3*1 

f  «  3 
55 

00 
CI 

a 

00 

a*05 
P<  00 

.  00 

"00 

00 

<! 

4^>       . 

00  00 

03  a 

GO 

a 

a 

(H 

0) 

S  0 

(1    S3 

P 

D 

00  -., 

H)H 

O 

5  GO 

N 

CoJ^ 

£ 

» 

^* 

^<5 

_G0 

T3 

►h 

f-a3 

0) 

<! 

■73 

C 

ERCI. 
ADE 

MES 

05 -# 

-5      °3 

•a 

150 

PI 

e3 

13     +^ 

M 

Ph 

u       0 

§  «  *< 

-r= 

L*a 

T3" 

-is-*5  Ra 

3+^ 
Iff 

3 

a 

S 

3        3 
■*>        u 
O       += 
3^hCO 

0 

0 

"e8 

2 

COcO«m«*-i 

J3CO 
co«« 

*<  cS  — 

co  5  0 

0 

3 

00 
00 

0  ^^^ 

mrnOO 

JS 

0 

^"S  a 

.2  s  a 
•3*0 

cocoO 

co 

i-H  rH 

H  CO  i-i 

ojo 
CO 

£ 

t5 

c 

(H 

bO 

ai    ' 

♦♦1 

** 

1  s 

S  0 

* 

OO 

0 

Species  and 

Stress 
Grades 

OO 
TJHrH 

QO 

** 

0 

T3 

0 
0 

T3 

M-,  (+-(  C*H  «4H 

00 
00 

1— 1 

*a 

0 

O 

OOOO 

I-I  0 

GO 

c3 
0 

0 

CD 
CD 

0>    • 

00  cu 

0> 

0 
0) 

u 

OOOO 
CO  CO  (NO 

O 

go 

(h 
00 

s 

00 

H 
co 

CO 

<5H 

M 

0 

0 

OOO 

OOO 
OOCD<N 

ti 

Ah 

K-PCO 

0 

0 

0 

O 

0<! 

Ha 

h 

Q 

po 

S 

S 

rt 

H 

>* 

ou 

a 

H 

•< 

O 

O 

Q 

n 

n 

H 

(178) 


© 

o 

o 

O 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

O 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o" 

o" 

o" 

© 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

K3 

CO 

CO 

e* 

°i 

CN 

iH 

l-H 

l-H 

rH 

1-1 

j-T 

o 

o 

o 

o 

t^ 

o 

o 

00 

00 

o 

CO 

«3 

»o 

CO 

CO 

CO 

<N 

CN 

oooo 

o 

o 

<*tH 

OOO 

OOO 

CNtNCNO 

o 

o 

COCO 

OOOOt^ 

000  GO 

■ — 1 1— I  > — 1 1 — I 

1-1 

OOOO 

oo  o 

o  o 

O    O    OOO 

oo 

OOO 

ooo 

oooo 

oo  o 

o  «a 

O    O    OiOO 

oo 

OOO 

ooo 

00CD">*  CN 

000    CO 

Ttf     o 

CO    *#    <NOO 

oo 

CO-tfCN 

(NrH© 

rtrtHH 

CNl-t      l-l 

1-1      l-H 

l-H      l-l      •— i  I— i 

1-1 

•xi 

% 

Hard- 
tnber 
on 

Ms 

"   (3   45 

si 
fj 

o    . 
O   CO 

a 

e8_,  O 

^  d 

(4     {J 

®  O 

™    03 

National 
wood  Lu 
Associati 

Southern 
Inspectio 
eau  of  th 

Californi 
Redwood 
Associati 

rd  . 

+i    CQ 

S-<    !i 

£2 

ructural  or  > 
L.  Dimension 
L.  1050  #f  Dim'n. 

a      d* 

CD 

a 

.  Edge  &  Sound 
o.  1  Structural 
ense  Dimension 
imension 
ense  1050  #f  Di 
ed.  Gr'n.  900  # 

Red  &  Whit 

a                     u 

Structural 

'ble  "          or 
q.  Edge  &  Sou 

do 

Close  grain 
sl'ct.  AU-Ht. 
ll-Heart 

4) 

w 

a 
to 

"(-13      3 

to 

«*H  *+-l  *4H  *t-i 

^Zppp^ 

•  oa --h  >-h  <n  cn 

r-1  d    •    •    •    • 

H   4)   O  O   O  O 

«»-,to<< 

<+-l  t*H  4-H 

OOOO 

+3  v&ai 
o  d  °   . 

cd a  6?— ' 

I-Hl-HCN 

0003 

oo 

^  4)  +a 

o  52  o 

O    0    4) 

OOO 

oooo 

odd 

oo 

OOO 

00cO"tftN 

rtrirtrt 

4)   >-'ierl  -^> 
toP-:i<3to 

£££ 

SQfcfcfcfc 

OOl 

©n  4) 

r-i  P  to 

(Ni-iO 
i-(  i— 1 1— i 

4)                     4) 

0}                         CO 

4> 

«    *      3     5* 

fi  3         3 
45 

3          * 

0)                    a) 
P                   P 

.9 

P 

tH       MH      *WIH*W 

*"«« 

'3  s      3 

«4-**4-l  «+-» 

IfH  lu      •+-♦ 

•41      «*H 

=*t=    *    *** 

*=* 

t-l 
M 

4) 
CO 

Os      3 

6 

*** 

800  #f 
600  #f 
400  #f 
200  #f 

2000  # 
1800  # 

1600  # 

o  o 
o  >o 
-*  o 

l-H      1-1 

o    o    OOO 

©    ©    OiOO 
CO     r)(     CN003 
,-H     i-l     l-H  rH 

So 

Ooi 

OOO 
OOO 

«hO 

I— I  I— 1  l-H 

psi 

CD 

12 

<1 

o 

H 

i— i 

ooo 

ooo 

a 

M 

4) 
+i 
(A 

03 

W-3 

P 
■« 

11 

2  S 

CO  t^cN 
P 

H3 

K 
< 

5  ° 
g  to 

O 

o 

P 

I-1  S 

O 

1-4 

& 

ft 

3 

to 

(179) 


CO 

p 

3 

o 

H^ 

H 

tn 

55 

c/v 
t/J 

pi 

Ctf 

w 

H 

Ph 

c/5 

| 

a 

CO 

z 

ri 
w 

* 

Ctf 

w 

o 

2 

£ 

55 

O 

M 

1 

co 

u 

CO 

H 

w 

« 

03 

£ 

o 

D 

U 

J 

•8 

co 

J 

2! 

< 

s 

of 

p 

3 

i-i 

o 

H 

O 

u 

1 — ) 

r/3 

mJ 

H 

u 

CO 

e/) 

O 

Ph 
1 

1 
CN* 

H 

h1 

pq 

«! 

H 

o 

CD 

CN 

IO 

. 

CO 

CN 

"5 

O 

eo 

r- 

CN 

o 

^ 

fi 

i—i 

f=H 

i— t 

1-t 

f=l 

M-.*3 

0_* 

Q 

o 

CO 

■<* 

00 

o 

CO 

u«o 

"«* 

t~ 

o 

t> 

00 

"* 

CN 

^> 

i-H 

CN 

CN 

l-H 

CN 

CN 

o 

iO 

CO 

00 

00 

CO 

CO 

l-H 

CO 

CM 

CO 

iO 

Tt< 

i-H 

OJ 

CO  d 

H  S 

8  J 

CN 

CN 

CO 

CN 

CO 

CN 

o 

CO 

rt* 

IO 

N 

iO 

00 

CO 

Q 

02  r- 1 

O 

CO 

00 

CO 

"* 

OS 

CO 

CO 

"* 

CO 

■>SH 

CO 

T3^ 
d   S 

3  C4 

o 

CO 

o> 

CO 

Ci 

N 

o  <u 

co 

o 

00 

•«# 

■* 

■^i 

CN 

f^HH* 

.S3 

c+3 

CM 

■* 

■* 

CO 

•* 

IO 

*o 

OS 

<N 

Ot-i— 1  IO 

rj< 

IO 

CO 

"3  ao 
H  d 

CO 

i—i 

CN 

CNCNi-HO 

IO 

i-H 

t~ 

CN 

CO 

CO 

00  00  00 1> 

»o 

CO 

CO 

boS 

oP 

■^fH 

00 

CN© 

©COI>CO 

i-H 

o 

i-h00tJ( 

"3.2 

O 
CN 

CO 

CNO0 

CO  00 COO 

i-H 

CO 

Ot>-iO 

^  1 

CO 

00 1> 

OOSOIN 
i— 1 

CO 

co 

00  00  00 

U     1 

Ph  o 

d  -M 

CO 

COlO 

00  00»OI> 

CO 

00 

OCNi-H 

t>. 

t-H 

ooo 

lOOO^HCO 

"5 

00 

CO  COb- 

i-H 

t» 

ooo 

i-HOOOO 

CO 

CO 

i-HOOS 

$°2 

CO 

1—1 

T-Hi-lr-l 

tH  tH 

s-   m 

a  o 

<N 

ON 

IO00OO 

00 

CO 

IO  i-H  i-H 

15 

•* 

CO 

1-HlHH 

CO-*  CO  CO 

l> 

o 

CNCN-* 

i— 1 

t^ 

i-H  C3> 

CNi-HOOO 

CO 

l> 

MHO 

1—1 

rH  i-t  i-H 

i-H  i-H  i-H 

o 

oo 

oooo 

o 

o 

COOO 

O    CO 

o 

oo 

OOO00 

o 

CN 

OOO 

*d  O 

00 

CN© 

COCNi-HOO 

N 

N 

TttCNi-H 

co  a 

i— 1  i-H 

i-Hi-H  i-H 

i-H  i-H  i-H 

CO 

U 

d 

CO 

. 

Rules 
Under  Whic: 
Graded 

"co 

CO 

< 

d 

a 

p 
b 

p  . 

o2 

Ceo 

KPh 

Oh 

co< 

CO 

coWO 

oHS 

F-nfflO 
cogO 

gpco 

WPh 

a . 

WQ 

OO 

d 

CO 
CO 

< 

CO 

d 

a 

u 

rO 

Hi 

o 

PhO 

p^<j 

Q 

P* 

j 

Pi 

* 

ERCIA 
ADE 

MES 

^Soo-2 

*3 

d 

d 
.2 

o3 
f-. 

(-i        o 

d      d 

§  "3d 

Q 

■p-p  t.  2 

O  O  <D  d 

o 

"oQ 

d 

o 

O 

13 

s 

OO 

CD   d,0   CD 

co  co£^ 

d 

M 

CO 

CD 

a 

s 

d^co 

t-r    03    n 

CO  d  g 

o 

d 

o© 

g§HH 

CD 

r-< 

°  2  d 

CD   d  B 

tn 

o  o 

O r— '  O  O 

o 

13^  o 

cocoO 

+3 

co 

CNO 
i— 1 1— I 

QcoZ£ 

CO 

fc 

OO 

C3 

^^fc 

(H 

o 

O 

oo 

0,0 

* 

* 

oo 

co    . 

O 

o 

CO 

H 

c^P 

o 
o 

00 

CNO 

T-H-H 

d    ffi 
CD   CO 

QO 

o 

CN 

OO 

** 

oooo 

o 

•ts 

Ooo 
JLOO 

^CNi-H 

T3 

Q 

^^^^ 

c3 

CO    Ph 

CD 

oooo 

d 

O 

<oHri 

HO 

1— I 

Ph 

Ph 

OOO00 
COCNt-100 

CD 

o 

HP 

co  _i 
rjH  d 

CO  K 
H 
SQ 

d 

u 

CO 

+=> 
co 

CD 

Ph* 

P5 

p 

co> 
cot> 
WW 

Ph" 

Ph  o 

CO'hfl 
<3    CD 

3p^ 

co 

c3 
H 

o 
o 

s 

co 

CD 

o 
o 

Hi 

co    • 

d  <u 

flo 
W 

<1 

PhQ 

g-B 

o 

Q 

PhC 

p  03 

Ph 

W 

>hH 

g<3 

W 

H 

<1 

O 

O 

w 

ffl 

Hi 

(180) 


=* 

iO 

o 

« 

CO 

F»          1        I>= 

eo 

r-=« 

1 

^ 

t>- 

"<* 

■* 

CD 

»o 

t» 

t>. 

O 

CN 

CN 

CN 

CN 

CD 

00 

00 

00 

CO 

»o 

ID 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CN 

1> 

In. 

l>. 

tO 

iO 

00 

00 

CO 

1< 

1* 

-* 

CO 

00 

OS 

OS 

CO 

o 

"* 

TP 

00 

CO 

CO 

CO 

^ 

•**eocN 

OS  OS    t^-    CO 

csost>co 

tN 

t^COCN 

CTN    N    00 

CNCNCN00 

CN 

t-l>I> 

0000    00    t> 

00  00  00 1> 

CO 

rflOSOO 

COO    CD    CO 

COOCOCD 

CNOO 

HIO© 

t>C0    00    t-- 

r^cocot^ 

CNi-iOO 

OiO0t> 

OO    OS    00 

0003  00 

00  00  b- 

r-l  I—l 

l-H  l-H 

eocot>. 

iCOO    00    iO 

lOOOOOlO 

COOOUO 

OCNr+l 

»o«o    00    CO 

lOiOOOCO 

O"*00 

OOSGO 

CNi-h    O    OS 

(Ni-HOOS 

OOSOO 

i—l 

i-li-H     i-l 

i-H  I-H  rH 

I—l 

tO  CD  CO 

OiO    00    o 

OiOOOO 

OHN 

iOCOI> 

coco   •<#   i> 

CDC0TtH> 

l-H  CO  T* 

OO3  00 

CO  CM     rH     OS 

CO  CN  i-H  OS 

r-i  O  OS 

i— 1 

i—l  I-H      I-H 

l-H  l-H  i-H 

l-H  l-H 

OOO 

OO   o    o 

OOOO 

ooo 

ooo 

■OO   o    o 

lOOOO 

ooo 

HO» 

-*CO    tN     O 

"tf  C0CNO 

WHO 

I—l  l-H 

I— I  i-H      i-H      i-H 

l—1  l-H  l-H  l-H 

rH  i-H  i-H 

P 

1 

w 

£5o2f« 

^£ 

QTHERN  PI 
3PECTI0N  E 

U  OF  THE 

N  PINE  ASS 

LIFORNIA 

DWOOD 

30CIATI0N 

TIONAL 

RDWOOD 

30CIATI0 

2203 

o>z<n 

<1Hco 

fcH<! 

OPh<1 

CO 

T3 

t3 

■43 

CD 

.r-l  3      3 
rfl 

03      3 

OOO 

t  Structural 
e  Structural 
ih'ble  Structura 
Sq.  Edge  &  Snd 
Structural 

Select  Strl. 
Structural 
Strl.  Sq.  E.  & 
No.  1  Strl. 

C  Clse.  Grain 
C     " 

C     "           " 

4J:** 

CO   Ct>   CO  CO 

=£1=  =♦};  =tt: 

ooo 
ooo 

o>  a  £— i 

r-'H     0)     h     O 

CO  <n   CO  to 

q  c  a  d 

0}   02   G2   0 

OOO 
OOO 

l-HOOS 

rH  I—l 

ID  -f<  *H  -t»  yZ 

PPQP 

CNi-hO 
rH  rH  rH 

T3 

CO 

a 

o3  -    a 

o 

OOO 

CO 

=fc%=fc 

OOOOO 

OOOO 

o 

OOO 

ooo 

^  ^  ^  ^t  ^ 

^i  =rt:  =fc):  4t; 

ooo 

i-hOOS 

OOOOO 

OOOO 

^^^ 

I—l   T-t 

lOOOOO 

«oooo 

TfCCNNO 

"#COCNO 

ooo 

i-H  i-H  rH  i-H 

rH  i-H  rH  rH 

ooo 

(MHO 

CO 

m 

®^3  5 

CO 

co 

CD   c3   ,_, 

P 

O 

«£ 

Q  co  CO 

.•as 

H«3 

o 

H03 

Q 
H 

£  o  o 

5j  o 

o 

Ph 

Ph 

P3 

(181) 


PART  26. 

REINFORCED  CONCRETE, 

Section 

2601  —  Design  of  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2602  —  Definitions  Pertaining  to  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2603  —  Inspection  of  Concrete. 

2604  —  Tests  of  Materials  of  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2605  —  Cement. 

2606  —  Concrete  Aggregates. 

2607  —  Water  in  Concrete. 

2608  —  Metal  Reinforcement. 

2609  —  Storage  of  Materials  for  Concrete. 

2610  —  Concrete  Quality. 

261 1  —  Average  Concrete. 

2612  —  Controlled  Concrete. 

2613  —  Field  Tests  of  Concrete. 

2614  —  Concrete  Proportions  and  Consistencies. 

2615  —  Mixing  Concrete. 

2616  —  Concrete  Forms  and  Equipment. 

2617  —  Removal  of  Water  from  Excavations, 

2618  —  Transporting  Concrete. 

2619  —  Placing  Concrete. 

2620  —  Depositing  Concrete  in  Cold  Weather. 

2621  —  Curing  Concrete. 

2622  —  Construction  Joints  in  Concrete. 

2623  —  Bonding  Fresh  and  Hardened  Concrete. 

2624  —  Bending  Reinforcement. 

2625  —  Placing  Reinforcement. 

2626  —  Splices  in  Reinforcement. 

2627  —  Protective  Covering  of  Reinforcement. 

2628  —  Pipes  and  Conduits  Embedded  in  Concrete. 

2629  —  Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Concrete. 

2630  —  Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Steel. 

2631  —  Design  of  Reinforced  Concrete  for  Wind  Loads. 

2632  —  Design  of  Reinforced  Concrete  in  Flexure. 

(182) 


Section 

2633  —  Span  Length  of  Reinforced  Concrete  Members. 

2634  —  Depth  of  Reinforced  Concrete  Beams  or  Slabs. 

2635  —  Analysis  of  Bending  in  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2636  —  Arbitrary  Moment  Coefficients  for  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2637  —  Points  of  Inflection  in  Reinforced  Concrete,  and  Shear. 

2638  —  Diagonal  Tension  in  Reinforced  Concrete  Beams. 

2639  —  Types  of  Web  Reinforcement. 

2640  —  Design  of  Web  Reinforcement. 

2641  —  Shearing  Stress  in  Concrete  Flat  Slabs. 

2642  —  Shear  and  Diagonal  Tension  in  Footings. 

2643  —  Bond  Stress  in  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2644  —  Ordinary  Anchorage  of  Reinforcement. 

2645  —  Special  Anchorage  of  Reinforcement. 

2646  —  Anchorage  of  Web  Reinforcement. 

2647  —  Slenderness  of  Reinforced  Concrete  Beams. 

2648  —  T=Beams  of  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2649  —  Compression  Reinforcement  in  Beams  and  Girders. 

2650  —  Structural  Steel  Beams  Encased  in  Concrete. 

2651  —  Shrinkage  and  Temperature  Reinforcement. 

2652  —  Concentrated  Loads  on  Concrete  Slabs. 

2653  —  Concrete  Ribbed  and  Combination  Slabs. 

2654  —  Two=way  Slabs  of  Reinforced  Concrete. 

2655  —  Limitations  upon  Reinforced  Concrete  Flat  Slabs. 

2656  —  Assumptions  in  Concrete  Flat  Slab  Design. 

2657  —  Bending  in  Interior  Flat  Slab  Panels. 

2658  —  Spacing  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement. 

2659  —  Thickness  of  Concrete  Flat  Slabs. 

2660  —  Point  of  Inflection  in  Flat  Slabs. 

2661  — Arrangement  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement  at  Column  Heads. 

2662  —  Arrangement  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement — Two=way  System. 

2663  —  Arrangement  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement — Four=way  System. 

2664  —  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement  Other  than  Two=way  or  Four=\vay. 

2665  —  Discontinuous  Flat  Slab  Panels. 

2666  —  Marginal  Beams  in  Flat  Slabs. 

2667  —  Openings  in  Flat  Slabs. 

2668  —  Construction  Joints  in  Flat  Slabs. 

2669  —  Limiting  Dimensions  of  Concrete  Columns. 

2670  —  Unsupported  Length  of  Concrete  Columns. 

(183) 


Sees.  2601=2602 

2671  —  Design  of  Spirally  Reinforced  Concrete  Columns. 

2672  —  Design  of  Tied  Reinforced  Concrete  Columns. 

2673  —  Long  Columns. 

2674  —  Bending  in  Concrete  Columns. 

2675  —  Combined  Axial  and  Bending  Stresses. 

2676  —  Allowable  Combined  Axial  and  Bending  Stresses, 

2677  —  Combination  Columns. 

2678  —  Concrete  Walls. 

2679  —  Sloped  or  Stepped  Concrete  Footings. 

2680  —  Bending  in  Concrete  Footings. 

2681  —  Plain  Concrete  Footings. 

2682  —  Bearing  on  Concrete  Footings. 

2683  —  Pedestals  —  Plain  Concrete. 

Section  2601.  Design  of  Reinforced  Concrete. —  Reinforced  concrete 
shall  be  designed  by  methods  admitting  of  rational  analysis  according  to 
established  principles  of  mechanics,  supplemented  by  the  assumptions  herein 
specified,  to  support  the  loads  and  withstand  the  forces  to  which  it  is  subject 
without  exceeding  the  stresses  allowed  in  this  part  for  the  various  materials 
thereof. 

*Sect.  2602.     Definitions  Pertaining  to  Reinforced   Concrete. — (a) 

The  following  terms  are  defined  for  use  in  this  part  of  the  code: — 

Aggregate:  Inert  material  used  as  a  filler  in  concrete. 

Blast-Furnace  Slag:  The  non-metallic  product,  consisting  essential^  of 
silicates  and  alumino-silicates  of  lime,  which  is  developed  simultaneously  with 
iron  in  a  blast  furnace. 

Column:  An  upright  compression  member  the  length  of  which  exceeds 
three  times  its  least  lateral  dimension,  excluding  piles  and  caisson  piers. 

Column  Capital :  An  enlargement  of  the  upper  end  of  a  reinforced  concrete 
column  designed  and  built  to  act  as  a  unit  with  the  column  and  flat  slab.  A 
framework  of  metal  for  the  same  purpose. 

Column  Strip :  A  portion  of  a  flat  slab  panel  one  half  panel  in  width  occupy- 
ing the  two  quarter-panel  areas  outside  of  the  middle  strip.  (See  Middle 
Strip.) 

Combination  Column:  A  column  in  which  a  structural  steel  section,  de- 
signed to  carry  the  principal  part  of  the  load,  is  encased  in  concrete  in  such 
a  manner  that  some  additional  load  may  be  allowed. 

Composite  Column:  A  column  in  which  the  structural  steel  or  cast  iron 
column  designed  to  carry  the  principal  part  of  the  load  is  encased  in  concrete 
containing  reinforcement  of  spiral  and  longitudinal  steel. 

Concrete:  A  mixture  of  Portland  cement,  fine  aggregate,  coarse  aggregate 
and  water. 

(184) 


Sec.  2602 

Diameter:  The  diameter  of  a  square  bar  shall  be  the  distance  between 
opposite  sides.  The  diameter  of  a  deformed  bar  shall  be  the  diameter  of  a 
plain  bar  having  the  same  area  of  cross-section. 

Dropped  Panel:  The  structural  portion  of  a  flat  slab  which  is  thickened 
throughout  an  area  surrounding  the  column  capital. 

Effective  Area  of  Concrete:  Of  a  cross-section,  the  area  which  lies  between 
the  centroid  of  the  tensile  reinforcement  and  the  compression  surface  in  a 
beam  or  slab,  and  having,  a  width  equal  to  the  width  of  the  rectangular  beam 
or  slab,  or  the  effective  width  of  the  flange  of  a  T-beam. 

Effective  Area  of  Reinforcement:  The  area  obtained  by  multiplying  the 
right  cross-sectional  area  of  the  metal  reinforcement  by  the  cosine  of  the  angle 
between  its  direction  and  that  for  which  the  effectiveness  of  the  reinforcement- 
is  to  be  determined. 

Flat  Slab:  A  concrete  slab  reinforced  in  two  or  more  directions  generally 
without  beams  or  girders  to  transfer  the  loads  to  columns. 

Hook:  A  hook  made  by  bending  a  length  at  the  end  of  a  bar  one  hundred 
and  eighty  degrees  about  a  pin  of  a  diameter  not  less  than  five  nor  more  than 
eleven  bar-diameters,  with  a  straight  extension  of  at  least  four  bar-diameters 
at  the  free  end. 

Laitance:  Extremely  fine  material  of  little  or  no  strength  which  may  collect 
on  the  surface  of  freshly  deposited  concrete  or  mortar,  usually  recognized  by 
its  relatively  light  color. 

Middle  Strip:  A  portion  of  a  flat  slab  panel  one  half  panel  in  width,  sym- 
metrical with  respect  to  the  panel  center  line  and  extending  through  the  panel 
in  the  direction  in  which  bending  moments  are  being  considered. 

Paneled  Ceiling:  The  ceiling  of  a  flat  slab  in  which  approximately  that 
portion  of  the  area  enclosed  within  the  intersection  of  the  two  middle  strips  is 
reduced  in  thickness. 

Panel  Length:  In  a  flat  slab,  the  distance  along  a  panel  side  from  center  to 
center  of  columns. 

Pedestal:  An  upright  compression  member  whose  height  does  not  exceed 
three  times  its  least  lateral  dimension. 

Pedestal  Footing:  A  column  footing  projecting  less  than  one  half  its  depth 
from  the  faces  of  the  column  on  all  sides  and  having  a  depth  not  more  than 
three  times  its  least  width. 

Portland  Cement:  The  product  obtained  by  finely  pulverizing  clinker  pro- 
duced by  calcining  to  incipient  fusion  an  intimate  and  properly  proportioned 
mixture  of  argillaceous  and  calcareous  materials,  with  no  additions  subse- 
quent to  calcination  excepting  water  and  calcined  or  uncalcined  gypsum. 

Ratio  of  Reinforcement:  The  ratio  of  the  effective  area  of  the  reinforce- 
ment cut  by  a  section  of  a  beam  or  slab  to  the  effective  area  of  the  concrete 
at  that  section. 

Reinforced  Concrete:  Concrete  in  which  metal  other  than  that  provided 
for  expansion  and  contraction,  is  embedded  in  such  a  manner  that  the  two 
materials  act  together  in  resisting  forces. 

(185) 


Sec.  2602 

Screen:  A  metal  plate  with  closely  spaced  circular  perforations. 
Sieve:  Woven  wire  cloth  or  a  metal  plate  with  square  openings  of  uniform 
size. 

Strut:  A  compression  member  other  than  a  column  or  pedestal. 

Water-Cement  Ratio:  The  total  quantity  of  water  entering  the  concrete 
mixture,  including  the  surface  water  carried  by  the  aggregate,  expressed  in 
terms  of  the  quantity  of  cement.  The  water-cement  ratio  shall  be  expressed 
in  U.  S.  gallons  per  bag  (ninety-four  pounds)  of  cement. 

(b)     The  symbols  and  notations  used  in  this  part  are  defined  as  follows: 

a — Angle  between  inclined  web  bars  and  axis  of  beam. 

A — Total  area  of  pedestal,  pier,  or  footing  at  the  column  base. 

A' — Loaded  area  of  pedestal,  pier,  or  footing  at  the  column  base. 

Ac — Total  area  of  the  concrete  section  =  Ag-Ar. 

Ar — The  ei oss-sectional  area  of  the  steel  column. 

Ag — Gross  area  of  concrete  column. 

A8 — Effective  cross-sectional  area  of  steel  in  tension  in  beams  and  slabs,  or 

compression  in  columns. 
Av — Total  area  of  cross-section  of  one  unit  of  web  reinforcement. 
b — Width  of  rectangular  beam  or  width  including  flange  of  T-beam. 
b' — Thickness  of  web  in  beams  of  I  or  T  section. 
c- — Diameter  of  column  capital  of  a  flat  slab. 

c' — The  distance  from  gravity  axis  to  extreme  fiber  in  compression. 
C — The  ratio  of  fa  to  the  allowable  fiber  stress  for  members  in  flexure. 
Co — In  two-way  slab  design,  coefficient  dependent  on  position  of  panel 

relative  to  adjacent  continuous  panels. 
Ci — Coefficient  for  bending  dependent  upon  continuity  and  restraint. 
d — Depth  of  beam  or  slab  from  compression  face  to  center  of  longitudinal 

tensile  reinforcement, 
d' — Least  lateral  dimension  of  a  column. 

e — The  eccentricity  of  resultant  load,  measured  from  the  gravity  axis. 
Ec — Modulus  of  elasticity  of  concrete  in  compression. 

E8 — Modulus  of  elasticity  of  steel  (thirty  million  pounds  per  square  inch). 
fa — Average   allowable  stress   on   an   equivalent   axially  loaded   concrete 

column. 
fc — Compressive  unit  stress  in  concrete. 

f'c — Ultimate  compressive  strength  of  concrete  at  age  of  twenty-eight  days. 
f'r — The  allowable  stress  for  unencased  steel  column. 
fB — Tensile  unit  stress  in  longitudinal  reinforcement. 

f'8 — The  useful  limit  stress  of  spiral  reinforcement.     See  Sec.  2671,  par.  (d). 
fv — Tensile  unit  stress  in  web  reinforcement, 
g — Sum  of  perimeters  of  bars  in  one  set. 

(186) 


Sees.  2602=2603 

h — Unsupported  length  of  column. 

I — Moment  of  inertia  of  a  section  about  the  neutral  axis  for  bending. 

j — Ratio  of  arm  of  resisting  couple  in  bending  to  depth  (d). 

L — Span  length  of  beam  or  slab;  length  or  width  of  flat  slab  panel. 

Li — Length  of  width  of  a  two-way  or  flat  slab  panel  at  right  angles  to  the 
direction  in  which  bending  is  considered. 

M — Bending  moment  or  moment  of  resistance  in  general. 

M0 — Sum  of  positive  and  negative  bending  moments  at  the  principal  design 

sections  of  a  panel  of  a  flat  slab. 
n — Ratio  of  modulus  of  elasticity  of  steel  to  that  of  concrete  (E8/Ec). 
p — Ratio  of  effective  area  of  tensile  reinforcement  in  bending. 

p' — Ratio  of  volume  of  spiral  reinforcement  to  the  volume  of  the  concrete 
core  (out  to  out  of  spirals). 

pg — Ratio  of  the  effective  cross-sectional  area  of  vertical  reinforcement 

to  the  gross  area  Ag. 
P — Total  safe  axial  load  on  a  short  column. 
P' — Total  safe  axial  load  on  a  long  column. 
r — Ratio  of  breadth  to  span  of  panel  of  a  two-way  slab. 

R — Least  radius  of  g}Tation  of  a  column  section  or  equivalent  concrete 
section. 

s — Spacing  of  web  reinforcement  measured  along  the  axis  of  the  beam. 

s' — Distance  from  the  center  of  a  concentrated  load  to  nearer  support  of  a 

slab, 
t — Thickness  of  flange  of  T-beams. 
t' — The  overall  depth  of  section. 

ti — Thickness  of  flat  slab  near  column  (including  dropped  panel,  if  any). 
t2 — Thickness  of  flat  slab  outside  the  dropped  panel, 
u — Bond  stress  per  unit  of  surface  area  of  bar. 
v — Shearing  unit  stress. 
V — Total  shear  at  a  cross -section. 

V — Excess  of  the  total  shear  over  the  allowed  resistance  in  shear  of  the 

concrete  unreinforced. 
w — Uniformly  distributed  load  per  unit  length  of  beam  or  slab  or  per  unit 

area. 

w' — Actual  width  of  a  concentrated  load  upon  a  slab. 
W — Total  uniformly  distributed  load  in  a  single  panel  area. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2603.  Inspection  of  Concrete. —  The  commissioner  shall  require 
an  applicant  for  a  permit  involving  the  structural  use  of  concrete  to  have  a 
competent  inspector  at  all  times  on  the  work  while  such  concrete  is  being 
proportioned,  mixed  and  deposited. 

(187) 


Sees.  2604=2607 

Sect.  2604.     Tests    of    Materials    of    Reinforced    Concrete. —    The 

commissioner  shall  have  the  right  to  require  reasonable  tests  from  time  to 
time  to  determine  whether  the  materials  and  methods  in  use  are  such  as  to 
produce  reinforced  concrete  of  the  necessary  quality.  Copies  of  the  reports 
of  such  tests  shall  be  kept  readily  available  by  the  commissioner  for  a  period 
of  two  years  after  the  completion  of  the  structure. 

Sect.  2605.  Cement. —  (a)  Portland  cement  shall  conform  to  the 
Standard  Specifications  and  Tests  for  Portland  Cement  of  the  American 
Society  for  Testing  Materials. 

(b)  Special  cement  may  be  used  for  Portland  cement,  subject  to  the  ap- 
proval of  the  commissioner,  provided  it  meets  the  requirements  for  Portland 
cement  in  regard  to  strength,  soundness  and  setting  time. 

Sect.  2606.  Concrete  Aggregates. —  (a)  Concrete  aggregates  shall 
consist  of  graded  natural  sands  and  gravels,  crushed  rock,  or  other  inert 
materials  having  clean,  uncoated  grains  of  strong  and  durable  minerals. 
Aggregates  containing  soft,  friable,  thin,  flaky,  elongated  or  laminated  par- 
ticles totaling  more  than  three  per  cent,  or  containing  shale  in  excess  of 
one  and  one  half  per  cent,  or  silt  and  crusher  dust  finer  than  the  number 
one  hundred  standard  sieve  in  excess  of  two  per  cent,  shall  not  be  used. 
These  percentages  shall  be  based  on  the  weight  of  the  combined  aggregate 
as  used  in  the  concrete.  When  all  three  groups  of  these  deleterious  materials 
are  present  in  the  aggregates,  the  combined  amounts  shall  not  exceed  five 
per  cent  by  weight  of  the  combined  aggregate. 

(b)  Burnt  shale  or  clay,  cinders,  slag  or  other  hard,  clean,  inert,  artificial 
materials  may  be  used  as  concrete  aggregates,  subject  to  the  approval  of  the 
commissioner,  provided  they  contain  not  more  than  one  per  cent  by  weight 
of  sulphur  or  similar  compounds  (free  or  combined),  nor  more  than  ten  per 
cent  by  weight  of  combustible  matter,  are  properly  prepared  by  crushing  and 
screening  to  give  a  graded  coarse  and  fine  aggregate,  and  come  from  a  source 
that  is  known  to  give  uniform  quality. 

(c)  Fine  aggregate  shall  not  contain  organic  material  sufficient  to  give 
a  color  darker  than  the  standard  color  when  tested  in  accordance  with  the 
Standard  Method  of  Test  for  Organic  Impurities  in  Sands  for  Concrete  of 
the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials. 

(d)  Coarse  aggregate  shall  not  be  larger  than  one  fifth  of  the  narrowest 
dimension  between  forms  of  the  member  in  which  the  concrete  is  to  be  used, 
nor  larger  than  three  fourths  of  the  minimum  clear  spacing  between  reinforcing 
bars.  By  maximum  size  of  aggregate  is  meant  the  smallest  sieve  size  through 
which  eighty-five  per  cent  by  weight  of  the  materials  can  be  passed.  Aggre- 
gate larger  than  one  inch  of  sandstone,  granite,  quartzite  and  siliceous  gravel 
shall  not  be  used  in  fire-protective  concrete. 

(e)  Fine  aggregate  shall  consist  of  all  particles  passing  a  number  four  sieve. 

Sect.  2607.  Water  in  Concrete. — Water  used  in  mixing  concrete  shall 
be  free  from  injurious  amounts  of  acids,  salts,  alkalies  or  organic  materials. 

(188) 


Sees.  2608=2610 

Sect.  2608.  Metal  Reinforcement. — (a)  Metal  reinforcement  shall 
be  steel  bars  conforming  to  the  requirements  of  the  Standard  Specifications 
for  Billet-Steel  Concrete  Reinforcement  Bars  of  Structural  or  Intermediate 
Grade,  or  for  Rail-Steel  Concrete  Reinforcement  Bars  of  the  American 
Society  for  Testing  Materials,  or  rerolled  bars,  whether  from  rails  or  from 
other  suitable  approved  sections,  which  otherwise  meet  the  requirements  of 
one  of  the  three  specifications,  or  wire  or  expanded  metal.  The  provision  in 
these  specifications  for  machining  deformed  bars  before  testing  shall  be 
disregarded.  The  tests  called  for  in  the  said  specifications  shall  always  be 
made  when  rerolled  steel  is  used. 

(b)  Wire  for  concrete  reinforcement  shall  conform  to  the  requirements 
of  the  Specifications  for  Cold-Drawn  Steel  Wire  for  Concrete  Reinforcement 
of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials. 

(c)  Structural  steel  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  Part  28. 

(d)  Cast-iron  sections  for  composite  columns  shall  conform  to  the  require- 
ments of  Part  28. 

(e)  Deformed  bars  shall  have  closely  spaced  shoulders,  lugs  or  projections 
formed  integrally  in  rolling,  of  such  nature  as  to  produce  a  bond  or  resistance 
to  slipping  when  embedded  in  concrete,  at  least  twenty-five  per  cent  greater 
than  that  of  plain  hot-rolled  round  bars.  Wire  mesh  with  welded  intersections 
not  further  apart  than  twelve  inches  (six  inches  in  web  reinforcement)  in  the 
direction  of  the  principal  reinforcing,  and  with  cross  wires  of  at  least  number 
ten  gage,  or  expanded  metal,  may  be  rated  for  bond  as  deformed  bars. 

Sect.  2609.  Storage  of  Materials  for  Concrete. — Cement  and  aggre- 
gates shall  be  stored  at  the  work  in  a  manner  to  prevent  deterioration  or  the 
intrusion  of  foreign  matter.  Any  material  which  has  deteriorated  or  has 
been  damaged  shall  not  be  used  in  concrete. 

Sect.  2610.  Concrete  Quality. — (a)  The  allowable  unit  stresses  for 
the  design  of  reinforced  concrete  structures  shall  be  based  upon  the  twenty- 
eight-day  strength  of  the  concrete  to  be  used  in  the  structure  in  accordance 
with  the  values  given  in  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  twenty-nine.  Plans 
submitted  for  approval  or  used  on  the  work  shall  clearly  show  the  strength 
of  concrete  for  which  all  parts  of  the  structure  were  designed.  The  strength 
of  concrete  shall  be  determined  in  accordance  with  one  of  the  following 
methods: — 

(1)  By  established  results  for  average  materials  as  provided  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  eleven  (Average  Concrete). 

(2)  By  specific  test  of  materials  for  the  structure  as  provided  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  twelve  (Controlled  Concrete). 

(b)  Structural  concrete  made  with  artificial  aggregates,  with  special 
cements,  or  with  admixtures,  shall  always  be  made  in  accordance  with 
method  (2)  for  controlled  concrete.  (The  water-cement  ratio  strength 
relation  will  generally  be  different  than  for  natural  aggregates,  normal 
cement,  or  usual  mixtures.)  The  commissioner  may  waive  the  requirements 
of  this  paragraph  subject  to  such  conditions  as  he  may  specify. 

(189) 


Sees.  2611=2612 

Sect.  2611.  Average  Concrete. — (a)  The  following  table  gives  the 
compressive  strength  in  pounds  per  square  inch  which  shall  be  assumed  as 
the  basis  for  design  where  no  preliminary  concrete  strength  tests  of  the 
materials  to  be  used  are  made.  A  bag  of  cement  weighing  ninety-four  pounds 
shall  be  assumed  to  measure  one  cubic  foot. 

Assumed  Strengths  of  Concrete  Mixtures. 


Minimum  Proportions: 

Volume  of  Portland  Cement  to 

Sum  of  Separate  Volumes  of 

Fine  and  Coarse  Aggregates, 

measured  Dry  and  Loose. 

Maximum  Water-Cement 

Ratio,  United  States 

Gallons  per  Bag  of 

Cement,  i 

Assumed  Compressive 

Strength  at  28  Days 

(Pounds  per  Square  Inch). 

1:7M 

1:6 

1:5 

1:4 

1:3 

8.00 
7.25 
6.50 
6.00 
5.00 

1,500 
2,000 
2,500 
3,000 
3,750 

1  Including  the  water  content  of  the  aggregate.  Unless  this  content  is  determined  by 
tests,  it  shall  be  assumed  to  be  one  half  gallon  per  cubic  foot  of  fine  aggregate. 

(b)  During  the  progress  of  the  work,  such  reasonable  number  of  com- 
pression tests  shall  be  made  as  may  be  required  by  the  commissioner,  but 
at  least  one  set  of  specimens  shall  be  tested  for  each  three  hundred  cubic 
yards  of  each  different  mixture  of  concrete  being  placed.  The  tests  shall 
be  made  in  accordance  with  provisions  of  section  twenty-six  hundred  and 
thirteen.  If  the  average  twenty-eight-day  strength  falls  below  the  strength 
called  for  on  the  plans,  the  commissioner  shall  have  the  right  to  require  a 
load  test  under  the  provisions  of  Part  23.  The  commissioner  may  waive 
the  requirement  of  tests  on  work  involving  in  all  less  than  two  hundred  cubic 
yards  of  concrete. 

(c)  Average  concrete  exposed  to  the  weather  shall  contain  not  less  than 
six  bags  of  cement  per  cubic  yard  of  concrete  and  the  water-cement  ratio 
shall  not  exceed  six  gallons  per  bag  of  cement. 

Sect.  2612.  Controlled  Concrete. — (a)  When  the  proportions  are  to 
be  established  by  tests,  the  tests  shall  be  made  in  advance  of  the  beginning 
of  construction  using  the  materials  proposed  and  consistencies  suitable  for 
the  work  and  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  section  twenty-six  hundred 
and  thirteen.  The  relation  between  the  average  twenty-eight-day  strength 
of  the  concrete  and  the  water-cement  ratio  shall  be  determined  by  such 
tests  for  a  range  of  values  including  all  of  the  strengths  called  for  on  the 
plans.  The  water-cement  ratio  determined  for  each  quality  of  concrete  to 
be  used  shall  allow  sufficient  margin  of  strength  to  provide  for  the  exigencies 
of  field  operations.  In  no  case,  however,  shall  concrete  exposed  to  the 
weather  contain  less  than  five  bags  of  cement  per  cubic  yard  of  concrete  or 
have  a  water-cement  ratio  in  excess  of  six  gallons  per  bag.  No  change  or 
substitution  shall  be  made  in  the  materials  being  used  on  the  work  without 
additional  tests  to  determine  the  new  water-cement  ratios  to  be  used. 

(190) 


Sees.  2612=2614 

(b)  During  the  progress  of  the  work,  a  reasonable  number  of  compression 
tests  may  be  required  by  the  commissioner,  but  at  least  one  set  of  specimens 
shall  be  tested  for  each  one  hundred  and  fifty  cubic  yards  of  concrete  of  a 
given  strength,  and  not  less  than  one  set  of  specimens  of  each  strength  of 
concrete  for  each  day's  operation.  Such  tests  shall  be  made  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  thirteen.  If  the 
average  twenty-eight-day  strength  of  the  tested  specimens  for  any  portion 
of  the  structure  falls  below  the  strength  called  for  on  the  plans,  the  com- 
missioner shall  have  the  right  to  require  load  tests  as  specified  in  Part  23  on 
the  portions  of  the  building  affected,  and  to  order  a  change  in  the  mixture 
for  the  remaining  portion  of  the  structure. 

(c)  Controlled  concrete  shall  be  proportioned,  mixed  and  placed  under 
the  supervision  of  an  approved  concrete  control  engineer. 

Sect.  2613.  Field  Tests  of  Concrete.—  (a)  Specimens  for  compres- 
sion tests  of  concrete,  when  required,  shall  be  made  and  stored  in  accordance 
with  the  Standard  Method  of  Making  and  Storing  Compression  Test  Speci- 
mens of  Concrete  in  the  Field,  and  tested  in  accordance  with  the  Standard 
Method  of  Making  Compression  Tests  of  Concrete,  of  the  American  Society 
for  Testing  Materials;  provided,  that  each  set  shall  consist  of  at  least  three 
specimens  which  shall  be  stored  under  moist  curing  conditions  at  seventy 
degrees  Fahrenheit,  and  no  specimens  need  be  stored  on  the  structure. 

(b)  If  tests  disclose  a  consistent  relation  between  the  seven-day  and  the 
twenty-eight-day  strength  of  the  concrete,  the  tests  required  during  the 
progress  of  concrete  work  may  be  made  at  seven  days  and  the  strength  at 
twenty-eight  days  determined  therefrom. 

Sect.    2614.     Concrete    Proportions    and    Consistencies. — (a)    The 

proportions  of  cement  and  aggregates  for  concrete  shall  be  such  as  to  produce 
concrete  that  will  work  readily  into  the  corners  and  angles  of  the  forms  and 
around  the  reinforcement  without  excessive  puddling  or  spading  and  without 
permitting  the  materials  to  segregate  or  free  water  to  collect  on  the  surface. 
The  combined  aggregate  shall  be  of  such  composition  of  sizes  that  when  sepa- 
rated by  a  number  four  standard  sieve,  the  weight  retained  on  the  sieve  shall 
not  be  less  than  one  third  nor  more  than  two  thirds  of  the  total.  The  consist- 
ency of  the  concrete  shall  be  such  that  the  slump  as  measured  by  the  slump 
test  shall  not  exceed  the  values  given  in  the  following  table: — 


CLASS   OF   CONCRETE. 

Maximum  Allowable  Slump. 

Heavy  foundations,  massive  walls 

4  inches 

6  inches 

(b)  The  methods  of  measuring  concrete  materials  shall  be  such  that  the 
proportion  of  all  ingredients  including  water  can  be  accurately  controlled 
during  the  progress  of  the  work  and  easily  checked  at  any  time  by  the 
commissioner. 

(191) 


Sees.  2615=2620 

Sect.  2615.  Mixing  Concrete. —  Concrete  shall  be  mixed  until  there  is  a 
uniform  distribution  of  the  materials  and  the  mass  is  homogeneous  and 
uniform  in  color.  In  machine  mixing,  only  batch  mixers  shall  be  used. 
Each  batch  shall  be  mixed  not  less  than  one  minute  after  all  the  materials 
are  in  the  mixer  and  must  be  completely  discharged  before  the  mixer  is 
recharged. 

Sect.  2616.  Concrete  Forms  and  Equipment. —  (a)  Forms  shall  be 
substantial  and  sufficiently  tight  to  prevent  loss  of  mortar  from  the  concrete. 

(b)  Before  concrete  is  placed  equipment  for  mixing  and  transporting  the 
concrete  and  forms  shall  be  clean;  the  spaces  to  be  occupied  by  the  concrete 
shall  be  free  of  snow,  ice  and  debris. 

Sect.  2617.  Removal  of  Water  from  Excavations. —  Water  shall  be 
removed  from  excavations  before  concrete  is  deposited,  unless  otherwise 
directed  by  the  commissioner.  Water  flowing  into  an  excavation  shall  be 
diverted  through  proper  side  drains  to  a  sump,  or  be  removed  by  other  ap- 
proved methods  which  will  avoid  washing  the  freshly  deposited  concrete. 

Sect.  2618.  Transporting  Concrete. —  (a)  Concrete  shall  be  handled 
from  the  mixer  to  the  place  of  final  deposit  by  methods  which  will  prevent  the 
separation  or  loss  of  the  ingredients.  Under  no  circumstances  shall  concrete 
that  is  partially  hardened  be  deposited  in  the  work. 

(b)  Concrete  otherwise  meeting  the  requirements  of  this  code  but  mixed 
at  a  distance  from  the  structure  in  which  it  is  to  be  deposited  may  be  used  pro- 
vided the  time  elapsed  between  addition  of  the  cement  to  the  aggregate  and  its 
deposit  in  the  forms  does  not  exceed  one  hour. 

Sect.  2619.  Placing  Concrete. —  (a)  Concrete  shall  not  be  placed  until 
the  forms  and  reinforcement  have  been  inspected  and  approved  by  the  in- 
spector required  by  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  three. 

(b)  When  concreting  is  once  started,  it  shall  be  carried  on  as  a  continuous 
operation  until  the  placing  of  the  section  or  panel  is  completed.  The  top 
surface  shall  be  kept  generally  level  and  accumulations  of  water  on  the  surface 
shall  be  promptly  removed.  Where  construction  joints  are  necessary,  they 
shall  be  made  in  accordance  with  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  twenty-two. 

(c)  Concrete  shall  be  thoroughly  compacted  by  puddling  with  suitable 
tools  during  the  operation  of  placing,  and  thoroughly  worked  around  the 
reinforcement. 

Sect.  2620.  Depositing  Concrete  in  Cold  Weather. — When  deposit- 
ing concrete  at  freezing  or  near  freezing  temperature,  the  concrete  shall  be 
maintained  at  a  temperature  of  not  less  than  fifty  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and  not 
more  than  one  hundred  and  twenty  degrees.  The  temperature  of  the  concrete 
shall  be  maintained  at  not  less  than  fifty  degrees  for  at  least  seventy-two  hours 
after  placing.  When  necessary,  concrete  materials  shall  be  heated  before 
mixing.  Dependence  shall  not  be  placed  on  salt  or  other  chemicals  for  the 
prevention  of  freezing. 

(192) 


Sees.  2621=2625 

Sect.  2621.  Curing  Concrete. — (a)  Exposed  surfaces  of  concrete  shall 
be  kept  moist  for  a  period  of  at  least  seven  days  after  being  deposited. 

(b)     Forms  shall  be  removed  in  such  a  manner  and  with  such  precautions 
as  to  insure  complete  safety  of  the  structure. 

*Sect.  2622.  Construction  Joints  in  Concrete.  —  (a)  Joints  not 
indicated  on  the  plans  shall  be  so  made  and  located  as  least  to  impair  the 
strength  of  the  structure.  Such  joints  in  floors  shall  be  located  near  the 
middle  of  spans  of  slabs,  beams,  or  girders,  unless  a  beam  intersects  a  girder 
at  this  point,  in  which  case  the  joint  in  the  girder  shall  be  offset  a  distance 
equal  to  twice  the  width  of  the  beam.  At  least  two  hours  must  elapse  after 
depositing  concrete  in  columns  or  walls  before  depositing  in  beams,  girders,  or 
slabs  supported  thereon.  Beams,  girders,  brackets,  column  capitals,  and 
haunches  shall  be  considered  part  of  the  floor  system  and  shall  be  placed 
monolithically  therewith.  All  joints  shall  be  bonded  in  accordance  with  sec- 
tion twenty-six  hundred  and  twenty-three.  (For  construction  joints  in  flat 
slabs,  see  also  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-eight.) 

(b)  Construction  joints  shall  occur  within  the  middle  third  of  the  span 
and  preferably  where  the  shear  is  least.  At  each  such  joint,  reinforcing  steel 
shall  be  provided  perpendicular  to  the  joint  and  near  the  top  of  the  slab  and 
its  amount  shall  be  equal  to  .003  of  cross-section  area  of  the  concrete.  These 
rods  shall  be  spaced  not  over  two  times  the  thickness  of  the  slab  or  within 
the  width  of  the  beam  or  girder.    Rods  shall  be  fully  anchored  each  side  of  the 

joint. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2.} 

fSect.  2623.  Bonding  Fresh  and  Hardened  Concrete. —  Before  new 
concrete  is  deposited  on  or  against  concrete  which  has  set,  the  surface  of  the 
set  concrete  shall  be  roughened,  cleaned  of  foreign  matter  and  laitance  and 
thoroughly  wetted  but  not  saturated.  Such  surfaces  shall  first  be  slushed 
with  a  coating  of  neat  cement  grout,  against  which,  before  it  has  attained  its 
initial  set,  the  new  concrete  shall  be  placed. 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2624.  Bending  Reinforcement. —  Metal  reinforcement  shall  not 
be  bent,  straightened  or  handled  in  any  manner  that  will  injure  the  material. 
Reinforcement  may  be  heated  only  when  approved  by  the  commissioner. 
Cold  bends  shall  be  made  around  a  pin  having  a  diameter  of  not  less  than 
four  times  the  diameter  of  the  bar.  Bars  with  kinks  or  bends  not  shown  on 
the  plans  shall  not  be  used. 

Sect.  2625.  Placing  Reinforcement. —  (a)  Metal  reinforcement  shall 
be  clean  and  free  of  loose  mill  and  rust  scale  and  of  other  coatings  that  would 
destroy  or  reduce  the  bond.  It  shall  be  accurately  placed,  supported  and 
secured. 

(b)  The  minimum  clear  distance  between  parallel  bars  shall  be  one  and 
one  half  times  the  diameter  for  round  bars  and  twice  the  diameter  for  square 
bars.  If  the  ends  of  bars  are  anchored  as  specified  in  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  forty-five,  the  clear  spacing  may  be  made  equal  to  the  diameter 

(193) 


Sees.  2625=2628 

of  round  bars  or  to  one  and  one  half  times  the  diameter  of  square  bars,  but 
in  no  case  shall  the  spacing  between  bars  be  less  than  one  inch,  nor  less  than 
one  and  one  third  times  the  maximum  size  of  the  coarse  aggregate.  The 
minimum  clear  distance  between  bars  and  forms  shall  be  the  diameter  of 
round  bars  and  one  and  one  half  times  the  diameter  of  square  bars.  Bars 
shall  be  embedded  a  distance  from  the  face  of  a  member  not  less  than  the 
distance  required  for  fire  and  rust  protection  in  this  code.  The  main  longi- 
tudinal steel  of  a  reinforced  concrete  slab  shall  be  spaced  not  more  than  three 
times  the  slab  thickness. 

Sect.  2626.  Splices  in  Reinforcement. —  (a)  In  slabs,  beams  and 
girders,  splices  of  reinforcement  shall  generally  be  avoided  at  points  of  maxi- 
mum stress  and,  where  made,  shall  provide  sufficient  lap  to  transfer  the  stress 
by  bond  and  shear. 

(b)  In  columns  longitudinal  reinforcement  may  be  spliced  by  lapping 
the  bars  a  length  sufficient  to  develop  the  working  stress  in  the  reinforcement 
by  means  of  bond,  but  in  no  case  shall  the  lap  be  less  than  twenty-four  bar 
diameters  for  deformed  bars  or  thirty  diameters  for  plain  bars.  Butt  joints  of 
approved  design  are  permitted  at  points  where  only  compressive  stress  occurs. 

Sect.   2627.     Protective   Covering  of   Reinforcement. —  (a)     At  the 

underside  of  footings  and  elsewhere  in  concrete  poured  in  contact  with  the 
ground,  the  main  metal  reinforcement  shall  have  a  minimum  covering  of 
three  inches  except  that  in  floor  slabs  poured  on  dry  earth  such  covering 
may  be  one  and  one  half  inches.  In  concrete  poured  in  forms  but  exposed 
to  soil  backfill,  moisture  or  weather,  such  covering  shall  be  two  inches. 

(b)  In  buildings  of  Type  I  and  Type  II  construction,  and  in  other  rein- 
forced concrete  required  to  have  specified  fire  resistance,  main  metal  rein- 
forcement shall  be  protected  as  required  in  sections  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
four  to  one  hundred  and  thirty-one,  inclusive,  of  Part  1,  in  Parts  16,  17  and 
22,  respectively,  and  elsewhere  in  this  code. 

(c)  Bars  used  for  the  support  or  spacing  of  reinforcement,  shrinkage 
reinforcement,  column  ties  and  stirrups  not  over  one  half  inch  in  diameter, 
shall  not  be  considered  main  reinforcement.  Such  bars  shall  have  minimum 
protective  covering  one  half  inch  less  than  specified  in  this  section  for  main 
reinforcement. 

Sect.  2628.  Pipes  and  Conduits  Embedded  in  Concrete. —  Pipes 
which  will  contain  liquid,  gas  or  vapor  at  other  than  room  temperature  shall 
not  be  embedded  in  concrete  necessary  for  structural  stability  or  fire  pro- 
tection. Drain  pipes  and  pipes  whose  contents  will  be  under  pressure  greater 
than  atmospheric  pressure  by  more  than  one  pound  per  square  inch  shall  not 
be  embedded  in  structural  concrete  except  in  passing  through  from  one  side 
to  the  other  of  a  floor,  wall  or  beam.  Electric  conduits  and  other  pipes 
embedment  of  which  is  allowed  shall  not,  with  their  fittings,  displace  that 
concrete  of  a  column  on  which  stress  is  calculated  or  which  is  required  for 
fire  protection,  to  greater  extent  than  four  per  cent  of  the  area  of  cross-section. 
Sleeves  or  other  pipes  passing  through  floors,  walls  or  beams  shall  not  be  of 

(194) 


Sects.  2628=2629 

such  size  or  in  such  location  as  unduly  to  impair  the  strength  of  the  construc- 
tion; such  sleeves  or  pipes  may  be  considered  as  replacing  structurally  the  dis- 
placed concrete,  provided  they  are  not  exposed  to  rusting  or  other  deterioration, 
are  of  galvanized  or  uncoated  iron  or  steel  not  thinner  than  standard  wrought 
iron  pipe,  have  a  nominal  inside  diameter  not  over  two  inches,  and  are  spaced 
not  less  than  three  diameters  on  centers.  Embedded  pipes  or  conduits  other 
than  those  merely  passing  through  shall  not  be  larger  in  outside  diameter  than 
one  third  the  thickness  of  the  slab,  wall  or  beam  in  which  they  are  embedded, 
shall  not  be  spaced  closer  than  three  diameters  on  centers,  nor  so  located  as 
unduly  to  impair  the  strength  of  the  construction.  Circular  uncoated  or 
galvanized  electric  conduit  of  iron  or  steel  may  be  considered  as  replacing  the 
displaced  concrete. 

*Sect.  2629.  Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Concrete.  —  (a)  Rein- 
forced concrete  members  shall  be  designed  with  reference  to  safe  loads  and 
working  stresses.  The  unit  stresses  in  pounds  per  square  inch  in  concrete  of 
the  strength  indicated  shall  not  exceed  the  following  allowable  values,  where 
(f'c)  is  the  strength  at  twenty-eight  days: — 


Allowable  Unit  Stresses. 

Expressed 

as  a 
Proportion 

of  the 
Strength. 

Specific  Values  for 

Common  Strengths 

(Pounds  per  Square  Inch). 

Strength. 

2,000. 

2,500. 

3,000. 

Flexure: 

0.40    f'c 

0.02    f'c 

0.03    f'c 

0.06    f'c 

0.09    f'c 

0.025  f'c 
0.02    f'c 

0.04    f'c 
0.05    f'c 

0.25    f'c 
0.375  f'c 

0.18    f'c 

0.225  f'c 

n  =  15 

n  =  12 

n  =  10 

Extreme  fiber  stress  in  compression 

800 

40 

60 

120 

180 

50 
40 

80 
100 

500 
750 

360 

450 

1,000 

50 

75 

150 

225 

62 
50 

100 
125 

625 
937 

450 

562 

1,200 

Shear: 

Beams  with  no  web  reinforcement  and  without 

Beams  with  no  web  reinforcement,  but  with  spe- 

60 
90 

Beams  with  web  reinforcement,  but  without  spe- 

180 

Beams  with  web  reinforcement  and  with  special 

270 

Flat  slabs  at  distance  (d)  from  edge  of  column 

75 
60 

Bond: 

Plain  bars  not  to  exceed  160  #  O" 

120 

Bearing: 

150 
750 

Axial  Compression: 

1,125 
540 

In  columns  with  continuous  spirals  enclosing  a 

675 

(b)  The  bond  stress  computed  in  accordance  with  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  forty-three  may  be  allowed  to  reach  double  these  values  where 
special  anchorage  is  provided  as  specified  in  section  twenty-six  hundred 
and  forty-five. 

(c)  The  allowed  bearing  stress  on  an  area  greater  than  one  third  but  less 
than  the  full  area  shall  be  interpolated  between  the  values  given  in  the  table. 

(195) 


Sees.  2629=2632 

(d)     The  ratio  of  the  moduli  of  elasticity  of  steel  and  concrete  shall  be 

30,000. 
assumed  as  (n)  = ■ 

1  c 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  2630.     Allowable  Unit  Stresses  in  Steel.  — (a)     The  following 
allowable  unit  stresses  shall  not  be  exceeded  in  reinforcing  steel. 

Allowable  Unit  Stress  (Pounds  per  Square  Inch). 

Tension : 

Structural  grade  billet  steel  bars 18,000 

Rerolled  steel  bars 18,000 

Intermediate  grade  billet  steel  bars 20,000 

Cold  drawn  steel  wire  or  cold  stretched  expanded  metal  fabric 20,000 

Rerolled  rail  steel  reinforcing  bars 20,000 

Web  reinforcement  (steel) 16,000 

Other  steel  reinforcement  fifty  per  cent  of  the  yield  point,   but 

not  to  exceed 18,000 

(b)  Compression  in  reinforcing  steel  except  in  columns,  shall  not  exceed 
(n)  times  the  compressive  stress  in  the  concrete  at  a  line  in  the  cross-section 
through  the  center  of  the  bars. 

(c)  Compression  in  structural  steel  and  cast  iron  in  composite  and  com- 
bination columns  shall  not  exceed  the  stress  specified  in  sections  twenty-six 
hundred  and  seventy-five  and  twenty-six  hundred  and  seventy-six. 

(d)  The  modulus  of  elasticity  shall  be  assumed  as  thirty  million  pounds 
per  square  inch. 

[  1[As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  and  Ord.  1949,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2631.     Design  of  Reinforced  Concrete  for  Wind  Loads. — In 

designing  the  members  of  reinforced  concrete  structures  to  resist  wind  loads, 
the  allowable  unit  stresses  for  dead  and  live  load  and  wind  loads  may  be 
increased  to  four  thirds  of  the  allowable  values  specified  in  sections  twenty-six 
hundred  and  twenty-nine  and  twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty,  but  no  member 
shall  be  less  than  that  required  if  the  wind  load  be  neglected. 

Sect.  2632.     Design  of  Reinforced  Concrete  in  Flexure. — (a)     The 

accepted  theory  of  flexure  as  applied  to  reinforced  concrete  shall  be  applied 
to  all  members  resisting  bending.    The  following  assumptions  shall  be  made : — ■ 

(1)  The  steel  alone  resists  tensile  stress  and  acts  only  in  the  direction 
of  its  length. 

(2)  The  ratio  (n)  of  the  modulus  of  elasticity  of  the  steel  either  in 
tension  or  compression  to  that  of  any  given  concrete  is  constant. 

(3)  Plane  sections  before  bending  remain  plane  after  bending. 

(196) 


Sees.  2632=2635 

(b)  Beams  and  slabs  shall  be  designed  to  resist  safely  the  actual  bending 
and  shear  produced  by  the  loads  and  supporting  forces  under  the  existing 
conditions  of  end  restraint  or  continuity.  It  is  the  intent  of  this  part  to 
require  that  the  bending  moments  throughout  the  spans  be  determined  so 
far  as  possible  consistently  with  the  elastic  deformation  of  the  structure, 
being  in  general  calculated  according  to  the  provisions  of  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  thirty-five  by  methods  of  elastic  analysis;  but  they  may  in  the 
special  cases  and  with  the  limitations  described  in  section  twenty-six  hundred 
and  thirty-six  be  approximated  by  the  use  of  arbitrary  moment  coefficients 
as  provided  therein.  Wherever  negative  bending  may  occur,  the  full  amount 
thereof  shall  be  provided  for,  except  in  slabs  thirty  inches  or  less  in  span. 

Sect.  2633.  Span  Length  of  Reinforced  Concrete  Members. — (a) 
The  span  length  of  freely  supported  beams  and  slabs  shall  be  the  distance 
between  centers  of  bearings,  but  need  not  exceed  the  clear  span  plus  the 
depth  of  beam  or  slab. 

(b)  The  span  length  for  continuous  or  restrained  beams  and  slabs  built 
to  act  integrally  with  supports  shall  be  the  clear  distance  between  faces  of 
supports,  the  spaces  occupied  by  supports  where  restraint  or  continuity 
occurs  being  suppressed  in  the  force  and  moment  diagrams. 

(c)  For  continuous  beams  having  brackets  built  to  act  integrally  with 
both  beam  and  support  and  of  a  width  not  less  than  the  width  of  the  beam 
and  making  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  or  more  with  the  beam,  the  span 
shall  be  measured  from  the  section  where  the  combined  depth  of  the  beam 
and  bracket  is  at  least  one  third  more  than  the  depth  of  the  beam.  Biackets 
making  an  angle  of  less  than  forty-five  degrees  with  the  beam  may  be  con- 
sidered as  increasing  the  effective  depth  of  the  beam,  but  not  as  decreasing 
the  span  length.  Beams  shall  be  designed  to  resist  at  each  section  the  bending 
there  occurring. 

(d)  Maximum  negative  moments  are  to  be  considered  as  existing  at  the 
ends  of  the  span,  as  defined  above. 

*Sect.  2634.     Depth  of  Reinforced  Concrete  Beam  and  Slabs. — (a) 

The  effective  depth  of  beams  and  slabs  shall  be  taken  as  the  distance  from 
the  center  of  gravity  of  the  tensile  reinforcement  to  the  compressive  surface 
of  the  structural  member;  except  for  monolithic  beams  and  slabs  where  the 
top  is  a  wearing  surface,  then  the  effective  depth  shall  be  taken  to  a  plane 
one-half  inch  below  the  finished  surface. 

(b)     For  beam  and  slab  construction  the  total  thickness  for  slabs  shall 
not  be  less  than  three  and  one-half  inches  except  as  provided  in  sections 
twenty-six  hundred  fifty-three  and  twenty-six  hundred  fifty-nine. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  } 

Sect.    2635.     Analysis    of    Bending    in    Reinforced    Concrete. — (a) 

The  determination  of  bending  moments  to  be  provided  for  at  various  points 
in  the  span  of  a  member  restrained  at  supports,  or  a  series  of  continuous 
spans,  in  accordance  with  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty-two,  shall 
be  made  by  application  of  the  theorem  of  three  moments,  principle  of  least 
work,  or  equivalent  method  based  on  elastic  deformation,  and  shall  be  subject 
to  the  following  qualifications: — 

(197) 


Sees.  2636=2638 


(1)  Supports  afforded  by  beams,  girders  and  columns  of  usual  arrange- 
ment shall  be  assumed  to  be  and  remain  in  alignment  conforming  to  the 
position  of  the  unloaded  beam  or  slab. 

(2)  The  effect  on  bending  moments  in  the  spans  produced  by  the 
torsional  resistance  of  interior  supporting  beams  and  by  the  bending 
resistance  of  ordinary  interior  supporting  columns  may  be  neglected, 
and  shall  be  neglected  unless  the  restraint  is  computed  and  provided  for 
in  the 'supports.  Restraint  at  exterior  supports  shall  be  provided  for  both 
in  the  spans  and  in  the  supports. 

(3)  The  difference  in  moment  of  inertia  of  beams  of  approximately 
the  same  depth  in  different  spans  and  of  the  same  beam  acting  to  resist 
positive  and  negative  bending,  may  be  considered  negligible  so  far  as 
regards  its  effect  on  distribution  of  moment  throughout  the  spans.  The 
moment  of  inertia  may  be  calculated  from  the  gross  section  of  the  concrete 
neglecting  reinforcement  and  the  flanges  of  T-beams  may  be  neglected. 

(4)  Design  for  bending,  both  positive  and  negative,  that  may  occur 
within  a  span  shall  include  consideration  of  the  effects  of  a  partial  distribu- 
tion of  load  on  the  span  itself  and  either  or  both  adjacent  spans,  but  not 
on  spans  more  remote  than  these.  Maximum  negative  moment  at  a 
support  may  be  assumed  to  result  from  full  loading  on  adjacent  spans  only. 
(b)     The  commissioner  may  approve  analyses  conforming  to  the  intent 

of  this  part,  based  on  accepted  theory,  and  incorporating  refinements  other 
than  these  provided  herein;  and  he  may  require  special  analysis  for  extraor- 
dinary conditions  of  support,  restraint,  span  lengths  and  distribution  of  load. 

Sect.  2636.  Arbitrary  Moment  Coefficients  for  Reinforced  Con= 
Crete. —  (a)  In  the  case  of  a  beam  or  a  slab,  or  a  series  of  continuous  beams 
or  slabs  with  spans  differing  not  more  than  twenty-five  per  cent  of  the  longer 
span,  uniformly  loaded,  and  falling  within  one  of  the  specified  cases  of  restraint 
at  the  supports,  designs  may  be  made  to  resist  bending  moments  computed 
by  the  arbitrary  coefficients  presented  in  this  section,  instead  of  by  elastic 
analysis. 

(b)  The  coefficients  of  CwL2)  set  forth  in  the  following  table  may  be  used 
to  compute  the  positive  bending  at  mid-span  and  the  negative  bending  at 
supports  in  the  locations  and  under  the  conditions  indicated. 

Table  of  Arbitrary  Coefficients  for  Bending. 


Number 

of 
Spans. 

End  Span. 

First 
Interior 
Support. 

Interior  Spans. 

Conditions  of  Restraint. 

End 
Support. 

Mid- 
Span. 

Mid- 
Span. 

Other 
Interior 
Supports. 

Case  1 :  Slabs   or  beams  with 
negligible    restraint    at    end 
supports. 

Case  2:  Slabs   or  beams   with 
moderate    restraint    at    end 
supports. 

Case  3:  Slabs   or   beams   with 
full    restraint    at    end    sup- 
ports. 

{    * 

[  Mult. 

{    * 

{  Mult. 

{    » 

{  Mult. 

1/24 
1/24 
1/24 

1/16 
1/16 
1/16 

1/12 
1/12 

1/12 

1/8 

1/10 

1/12 

1/10 
1/12 
1/14 

1/12 
1/16 
1/16 

i/i" 

l/9i 

1/9 
1/10 

1/10 
1/11 

1/16 
1/16 
1/16 

1/12 
1/12 
1/12 

1  One  tenth  for  slabs. 

(198) 


Sees.  2638=2640 

(c)  In  the  use  of  this  table  negligible  restraint  shall  be  assumed  for  slabs 
supported  on  walls  of  masonry  units,  or  on  the  upper  flanges  of  steel  beam3 
not  encased  in  concrete;  and  for  beams  supported  on  steel  or  cast  iron  columns 
not  encased  in  concrete,  or  on  combination  columns,  or  on  masonry  piers  or 
walls  of  any  type  other  than  reinforced  concrete  columns  acting  integrally 
therewith,  or  by  other  beams  or  girders;  or  on  any  supports  which  do  not 
assure  as  great  restraint  as  that  described  as  "moderate." 

(d)  Moderate  restraint  may  be  assumed  for  slabs  supported  by  rein- 
forced concrete  beams,  or  by  steel  beams  encased  in  concrete,  or  by  reinforced 
concrete  walls;  and  for  beams  or  girders  supported  on  composite  columns, 
or  on  reinforced  concrete  columns,  provided  the  slabs  or  beams  act  integrally 
with  the  support. 

(e)  Full  restraint  may  be  assumed  only  for  slabs  acting  integrally  with 
supporting  reinforced  concrete  walls  and  for  beams  or  girders  acting  integrally 
with  reinforced  concrete  columns,  when  (I/L)  for  the  slab,  beam  or  girder 
is  less  than  the  sum  of  the  values  of  (I/h)  for  the  walls  or  columns,  respec- 
tively, above  and  below.  In  this  section  (I)  represents  the  moment  of 
inertia,  calculated  for  the  gross  section  of  the  concrete,  neglecting  reinforce- 
ment and  the  flanges  of  T-beams.  (L)  and  (h)  are  span  length  and  column 
or  wall  height,  respectively. 

(f)  In  calculating  negative  bending  at  a  support  between  two  spans 
of  unequal  load  or  length,  the  average  unit  load  over  the  two  spans  shall  be 
used,  and  an  assumed  span  which  is  two  thirds  the  longer  span  plus  one  third 
the  shorter  span. 

(g)  For  continuous  or  restrained  beams  or  girders  subject  to  equal  con- 
centrated loads  which  occur  at  approximately  regular  intervals  with  a  con- 
centration at  each  support,  the  positive  and  negative  bending  may  be  deter- 
mined as  though  the  entire  load  were  distributed  uniformly  on  the  beam 
or  girder. 

*Sect.  2637.     Points  of  Inflection  in  Reinforced  Concrete,  and  Shear. 

—  The  location  of  points  of  inflection,  reactions  and  shears,  shall  be  assumed 
consistently  with  the  loading  and  the  computed  distribution  of  bending 
moments.  In  the  three  cases  of  slabs  and  beams  of  two  or  more  continuous 
spans  when  the  arbitrary  coefficients  for  bending  of  section  twenty-six  hun- 
dred and  thirty-six  may  be  applied,  the  reactions  on  end  supports  shall  be 
taken  as  forty  per  cent  for  Case  1,  forty-five  per  cent  for  Case  2,  and  fifty 
per  cent  for  Case  3,  of  the  load  on  the  end  span,  and  the  reaction  on  the  first 
interior  support  shall  be  computed  accordingly;  the  loads  on  interior  spans 
majr  be  assumed  as  evenly  divided  between  supports  in  determining  shears 
and  reactions. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2638.     Diagonal  Tension  in  Reinforced  Concrete  Beams. —  (a) 

Reinforced  concrete  beams  (including  ribs  of  ribbed  and  combination  slabs, 
and  other  members  subject  to  bending)  shall  be  designed  to  resist  the  diagonal 
tension  in  their  webs  without  exceeding  the  stresses  prescribed  in  sections 
twenty-six  hundred  and  twenty-nine  and  twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty. 

(199) 


Sees.  2638=2640 

(b)  For  the  purpose  of  design,  the  diagonal  tension  in  the  web  of  a  beam 
shall  be  assumed  to  be  directed  at  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  with  the 
axis  of  the  beam,  and  its  intensity  to  be  equal  to  the  unit  shear,  computed  by 
the  formula: 

V 

v  =  

b'jd 

In  this  formula  (b')  is  to  be  taken  as  the  width  of  the  concrete  section 
between  the  tensile  steel  and  the  compressive  flange,  the  average  width 
if  the  sides  slope  but  not  over  twenty  per  cent  more  than  the  minimum. 

(c)  Beams  in  which  the  diagonal  tension  in  any  portion  of  the  web  exceeds 
the  stress  allowed  in  beams  without  web  reinforcement  shall  be  reinforced 
in  that  portion  for  the  excess. 

Sect.  2639.  Types  of  Web  Reinforcement. —  (a)  Web  reinforcement 
shall  consist  of  vertical  stirrups  or  of  stirrups  or  bars  inclined  at  an  angle  of 
not  less  than  fifteen  degrees  with  the  axis  of  the  beam. 

(b)  Web  reinforcement  shall  be  considered  effective  only  to  the  extent 
that  its  stress  can  be  developed  by  bond  and  anchorage  as  provided  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  forty-six. 

Sect.  2640.  Design  of  Web  Reinforcement. —  (a)  A  web  reinforcing 
bar,  whether  vertical  or  inclined,  shall  be  considered  to  afford  for  resistance 
to  diagonal  tension  the  component  of  its  tensile  stress  in  the  direction  of  the 
diagonal  tension.  The  spacing  of  stirrups  (or  the  length  of  beam  over  which 
the  resistance  of  a  stirrup  or  bar  is  effective)  is  therefore  determined  by  the 
following  formula: 

Av  fv  jd  (cos  a  +  sin  a) 

s  =  

V 

For  vertical  stirrups  this  becomes  — 

Av  f  v  jd 
V 
and  for  stirrups  or  bars  inclined  at  forty-five  degrees  — 

Av  fv  jd 


8    = 


0.7  V 


(b)  In  the  formulas  of  this  section  (V)  is  the  shear  in  the  beam  at  any 
cross-section  in  excess  of  the  allowed  resistance  of  the  unreinforced  web,  and 
it  shall  be  subject  to  the  limitation  imposed  upon  the  unit  shear  by  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  twenty-nine.  The  spacing  (s)  of  stirrups,  vertical 
or  inclined,  or  of  bars  inclined  at  not  less  than  forty-five  degrees  shall  not 
exceed  three  fourths  the  effective  depth  of  the  beam.  In  the  case  of  bars 
inclined  at  less  than  forty-five  degrees,  (s)  shall  not  exceed  three  fourths  the 
axial  projection  of  the  inclined  length. 

(200) 


cs.  2640=2643 

(c)  In  portions  of  beams  where  the  unit  shear  exceeds  (0.06  f'c)  the 
limits  for  (s)  shall  be  reduced  by  changing  the  fraction  three-fourths  to  one- 
half  in  the  preceding  paragraph. 

Sect.  2641.  Shearing  Stress  in  Concrete  Flat  Slabs. —  (a)  In  flat 
slabs,  the  shearing  unit  stress  on  a  vertical  section  which  lies  at  a  distance 
(d)  from  the  edge  of  the  column  capital  and  parallel  with  it,  shall  not  exceed 
the  following  allowable  values  when  computed  by  the  formula  given  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty-eight  for  shearing  unit  stress  in  beams. 

(1)  0.03  f'c —  when  at  least  fifty  per  cent  of  the  total  negative  rein- 
forcement in  each  column  strip  passes  directly  over  the  column  capital. 

(2)  0.025  f 'c  —  when  twenty-five  per  cent  of  the  total  negative  rein- 
forcement in  each  column  strip  passes  directly  over  the  column  capital 
(which  is  the  least  that  shall  be  permitted). 

(3)  For  intermediate  percentages,  proportionate  intermediate  values  of 
the  allowable  shearing  unit  stress  shall  be  used. 

(b)  In  flat  slabs,  the  shearing  unit  stress  on  a  vertical  section  which  lies 
at  a  distance  (d)  from  the  edge  of  the  dropped  panel  and  parallel  with  it  shall 
not  exceed  (0.03  f'c). 

(c)  For  the  purposes  of  this  section  (d)  shall  be  the  average  depth  at  the 
section  in  question  from  the  compressive  surface  of  the  concrete  to  the  center 
of  the  tensile  reinforcement  for  negative  bending. 

Sect.  2642.     Shear  and  Diagonal  Tension  in  Footings.  — (a)     The 

shearing  unit  stress  computed  by  the  formula  given  in  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  thirty-eight  on  any  vertical  peripheral  or  plane  section  of  a 
footing  at  a  distance  (d)  from  the  face  of  the  supported  column  or  pier  and 
parallel  with  it,  shall  not  exceed  (0.02  f 'c)  for  footings  with  straight  bars,  nor 
(0.03  f'c)  for  footings  in  which  the  bars  have  special  anchorage  as  specified  in 
section  twenty-six  hundred  and  forty-five. 

(b)  Id  footings  supported  on  piles,  the  critical  section  for  diagonal  tension 
shall  be  considered  at  a  distance  (d/2)  from  the  face  of  the  supported  col- 
umn or  pedestal  and  any  piles  whose  centers  are  at  this  section  or  nearer  the 
supported  column  or  pedestal  shall  be  excluded  in  computing  the  shear. 

Sect.  2643.  Bond  Stress  in  Reinforced  Concrete. —  (a)  Members 
subject  to  bending  shall  be  so  proportioned  that  the  increments  of  stress  in  the 
tensile  steel  are  transmitted  to  it  from  the  concrete  in  which  it  is  embedded, 
without  producing  bond  stress  exceeding  that  specified  in  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  twenty-nine. 

(b)  In  beams  in  which  the  tensile  reinforcement  is  parallel  to  the  com- 
pressive face,  and  is  not  specially  anchored,  the  bond  stress  (u)  shall  be 
assumed  to  be  determined  by  the  following  formula: — 

V 
u  = 

gjd 

(c)  In  non-prismatic  or  wedge-shaped  beams,  as  represented  by  a  canti- 
lever bracket,  a  sloped  top  footing,  or  a  beam  with  cambered  compressive 
face,  in  which  the  depth  of  the  beam  is  increased  in  the  direction  of  increasing 

(201) 


Sees,  2643=2644 

bending  moment,  the  bond  stress  is  not  proportional  to  the  shear,  being  at  all 
sections  smaller  than  indicated  by  the  formula  of  paragraph  (b)  for  a  pris- 
matic beam  of  depth  equal  to  the  depth  at  the  section  considered.  For  such 
beams  the  bond  stress  shall  be  assumed  to  be  determined  by  the  following 
formula: — 

V  M 

u  = X       (1  -  m ) 

gjd  Vd 

in  which  (m)  is  the  tangent  of  the  angle  between  the  compressive  face  and 
the  tensile  re-inforcement. 

(d)  Adequate  end  anchorage  of  bars  in  prismatic  beams  which  are  sub- 
ject to  excessive  bond  stress,  as  computed  by  the  formula  of  paragraph  (b), 
may  result  in  the  relief  of  such  excessive  bond  stress,  by  inducing  in  the  beam 
an  arch  action,  with  distribution  of  bending  stresses  analogous  to  that  in  a 
cambered  beam.  About  bars  so  anchored  the  computed  bond  stress  may  be 
double  that  allowed  for  unanchored  reinforcement. 

(e)  Special  anchorage  adequate  to  justify  increased  bond  stress  shall  be 
capable  of  developing  the  maximum  tension  in  the  bars  in  excess  of  that 
developed  by  bond  at  its  allowable  value.  The  excess  tension  (T')  shall  be 
determined  by  the  formula: — 

u' 

T'  =  T  (1 ) 

u 

in  which  (T)  is  the  maximum  tensile  stress. 

(u')  is  the  allowable  stress  in  bond  for  unanchored  reinforcement, 
(u)  is  the  maximum  bond  stress  computed  by  one  of  the  formulas  of 
paragraphs  (b)  and  (c). 

(f )  In  simply  supported  beams  the  required  special  anchorage  shall  be  pro- 
vided beyond  the  face  of  the  support.  In  continuous  beams  sufficient  special 
anchorage  of  the  positive  reinforcement  beyond  the  point  of  inflection  may  be 
considered  to  be  provided  by  the  extension  of  such  bars  to  the  ends  of  the 
span.  For  the  negative  reinforcement  of  restrained  or  continuous  beams, 
and  for  the  tensile  reinforcement  of  cantilevers,  brackets  and  footings,  the 
required  special  anchorage  shall  be  provided  by  extending  or  hooking  the  bars 
beyond  the  point  at  which  tension  begins. 

(g)  In  applying  the  formulas  of  paragraphs  (b)  and  (c)  to  any  section  of 
a  beam  in  which  the  tensile  reinforcement  is  varied  by  bending  or  discon- 
tinuing a  portion  of  the  bars,  there  shall  be  counted  as  contributing  their 
perimeters  to  bond  resistance  only  those  bars  at  that  section  and  in  the  plane 
of  the  main  longitudinal  tensile  steel,  in  which  tensile  stress  is  increasing 
consistently  with  the  assumptions  under  which  the  beam  is  designed. 

Sect.  2644.  Ordinary  Anchorage  of  Reinforcement. — (a)  Rein- 
forcement acting  in  tension  at  a  restrained  end  of  a  beam  or  in  a  cantilever 
shall  have  anchorage  on  both  sides  of  the  face  of  the  support  and  beyond  the 
point  where  any  portion  of  the  reinforcement  is  discontinued  sufficient  to 
develop  the  tension  in  each  of  the  bars. 

(202) 


Sees.  2644-2646 

(b)  In  a  restrained  beam  at  least  one  third  of  the  tensile  reinforcement 
for  negative  bending  shall  be  extended  at  least  to  the  point  of  inflection  of  the 
beam. 

(c)  At  least  one  fourth  of  the  tensile  reinforcement  for  positive  bending 
in  a  beam  shall  be  extended  at  least  to  the  end  of  the  span.  Bars  not  so 
extended  may  be  bent  across  the  web,  becoming  continuous  with  the  nega- 
tive reinforcement,  or  otherwise  anchored  in  a  region  of  compression. 

Sect.  2645.  Special  Anchorage  of  Reinforcement. — (a)  Where,  by 
reasons  of  'special  anchorage  of  reinforcement,  increased  shearing  stresses  are 
allowed,  reinforcement  in  the  proportions  specified  in  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  forty-four  shall  be  extended  in  beams  as  there  specified,  and 
anchorage  shall  further  be  provided  beyond  the  points  of  inflection  for  the 
negative  reinforcement  of  restrained  beams,  and  beyond  the  end  of  the  span 
for  positive  reinforcement  of  freely  supported  beams,  sufficient  to  develop 
at  least  one  half  of  their  allowable  tensile  stress.  In  footings,  special  anchor- 
age justifying  increased  shearing  stress  shall  be  considered  as  provided  when 
all  bars  are  anchored  by  means  of  hooks  at  their  ends.  The  outer  face  of 
hooks  shall  be  as  close  to  the  face  of  the  footing  as  the  requirements  for  rust 
protection  will  allow. 

(b)  Where  anchorage  is  furnished  by  extension  of  the  bars,  such  exten- 
sion may  be  assumed  to  provide  an  anchorage  capacity  equal  to  the  embedded 
surface  multiplied  by  the  allowable  unit  bond  resistance  specified  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  twenty-nine.  A  hook,  for  the  purpose  of  this  section, 
means  a  complete  semicircular  hook  as  defined  in  section  twenty-six  hundred 
and  two.  Such  a  hook  may  be  assumed  to  develop  a  stress  of  not  more  than 
ten  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch  in  the  bar  so  anchored.  A  bend  of 
larger  radius  than  allowed  in  a  hook  shall  be  considered  as  a  mere  extension 
of  the  bar. 

Sect.  2646.  Anchorage  of  Web  Reinforcement. — (a)  The  stress  in  a 
stirrup  or  web  reinforcement  bar  for  resistance  of  diagonal  tension  in  a  beam 
shall  not  exceed  the  capacity  of  its  anchorage  in  the  upper  or  lower  one  half 
of  the  effective  depth  of  the  beam  nor  the  allowable  stress  specified  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty. 

(b)  Web  reinforcement  which  is  provided  by  bending  into  an  inclined 
position  one  or  more  bars  of  the  main  tensile  reinforcement  where  not  required 
for  resistance  to  positive  or  negative  bending  shall  be  considered  completely 
anchored  by  continuity  with  the  main  tensile  reinforcement  or  by  embed- 
ment of  requisite  length  in  the  upper  or  lower  half  of  the  beam,  provided  at 
least  one  half  of  such  embedment  is  as  close  to  the  upper  or  lower  surface 
of  the  beam  as  the  requirements  of  fire  or  rust  protection  allow.  A  hook 
placed  close  to  the  upper  or  lower  surface  of  the  beam  may  be  substituted 
for  a  portion  of  such  embedment. 

(c)  Stirrups  shall  be  anchored  at  both  ends  by  one  of  the  following  methods 
or  by  a  combination  thereof: — 

(1)  Rigid  attachment,  as  by  welding,  to  the  main  longitudinal  rein- 
forcement. The  capacity  of  this  anchorage  is  limited  to  that  of  the  attach- 
ment. 

(203) 


Sees.  2646=2650 

(2)  Bending  around  and  closely  in  contact  with,  a  bar  of  the  main 
longitudinal  reinforcement  in  the  form  of  a  U-stirrup  or  a  hook.  The 
capacity  of  this  anchorage  may  be  taken  as  sixteen  thousand  pounds  per 
square  inch  in  the  stirrup. 

(3)  A  hook  placed  as  close  to  the  upper  or  lower  surface  of  the  beam 
as  the  requirement  for  fire  and  rust  protection  will  allow.  The  capacity 
of  this  anchorage  shall  be  ten  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch  in  the 
stirrup  plus  the  stress  developed  by  bond  between  mid-height  of  the  effec- 
tive depth  of  the  beam  and  the  beginning  of  bending  of  the  hook. 

(4)  A  length  of  embedment  in  the  upper  or  lower  half  of  the  effective 
depth  of  the  beam,  whether  straight  or  curved.  The  capacity  of  this 
anchorage  shall  be  limited  to  the  stress  developed  by  bond  on  the  embedded 
length.  Anchorage  of  this  type  shall  not  be  used  on  stirrups  where  the 
unit  shear  exceeds  (0.06  f'c)« 

Sect.    2647.      Slenderness    of    Reinforced    Concrete    Beams. — The 

clear  distance  between  lateral  supports  of  a  beam  shall  not  exceed  thirty-two 
times  the  width  of  the  compression  area  of  the  cross-section. 

Sect.  2648.  T=Beams  of  Reinforced  Concrete. —  (a)  In  T-beam  con- 
struction the  slab  shall  be  built  integrally  with  the  beam.  In  the  design 
of  symmetrical  T-beams  the  overhanging  flange  width  on  either  side  of  the 
web  shall  not  exceed  one  tenth  the  span,  nor  eight  times  the  thickness  of 
the  slab  nor  one  half  the  clear  distance  to  the  next  beam. 

(b)  For  beams  having  a  flange  on  one  side  only,  the  effective  overhanging 
flange  width  shall  not  exceed  one  twelfth  of  the  span  length  nor  six  times 
the  thickness  of  the  slab  nor  one  half  the  clear  distance  to  the  next  beam. 

(c)  Where  the  principal  reinforcement  in  a  slab  which  serves  as  the  flange 
of  a  T-beam  (not  a  rib  in  ribbed  floors)  is  parallel  to  the  beam,  transverse 
reinforcement  shall  be  provided  in  the  top  of  the  flange.  The  spacing  of  the 
bars  shall  not  exceed  five  times  the  thickness  of  the  flange,  or  eighteen  inches. 

(d)  Isolated  beams  in  which  the  T-form  is  used  only  for  the  purpose  of 
providing  additional  compression  area,  shall  have  a  flange  thickness  not  less 
than  one  half,  and  a  total  flange  width  not  more  than  four  times,  the  web 
thickness. 

Sect.  2649.     Compression  Reinforcement  in  Beams  and  Girders. — 

Steel  reinforcing  bars  in  compression  in  girders  and  beams  shall  be  thoroughly 
anchored  against  buckling  by  ties  or  stirrups  not  less  than  one  quarter  inch 
in  diameter  spaced  not  further  apart  in  the  region  where  compression  steel  is 
required  than  twelve  times  the  diameter  of  the  bars,  or  by  equivalent  lateral 
support. 

*Sect.   2650.     Structural    Steel    Beams   Encased    in    Concrete. —  (a) 

Structural  steel  beams  which  are  fireproofed  by  being  wholly  encased  in  the 
concrete  of  a  reinforced  concrete  floor  or  roof  may  be  designed  for  bending 
as  composite  beams,  the  two  materials  assumed  to  act  elastically  together, 
the  concrete  not  to  act  in  tension,  the  stresses  in  the  respective  materials  not 
to  exceed  those  allowed  by  this  code. 

(204) 


Sees.  2650=2652 

(b)  Any  steel  beam  or  girder  completely  encased  in  concrete  as  described 
in  paragraph  (a)  having  a  compressive  strength  of  at  least  two  thousand 
pounds  per  square  inch  and  comprising  an  integral  part  of  a  complete  floor 
system  such  as  concrete  slabs  and  beams,  in  conformity  with  section  twenty- 
six  hundred  and  forty-eight,  may  have  its  resistance  to  bending  increased 
fifteen  per  cent. 

(c)  Stresses  allowed  in  paragraph  (b)  shall  be  allowed  in  tension  members 
of  trusses,  if  the  requirements  of  this  section  are  fulfilled. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  S  ] 

Sect.    2651.      Shrinkage    and    Temperature    Reinforcement. —  (a) 

Reinforcement  for  shrinkage  and  temperature  stresses  shall  be  provided  in 
floor  and  roof  slabs  perpendicular  to  the  reinforcement  for  bending  where 
this  runs  in  one  direction  only.  Such  reinforcement  shall  have  an  area  of 
cross-section  not  less  than  two  one  thousandths  times  the  area  of  the  concrete 
and  bars  shall  be  spaced  not  more  than  five  times  the  slab  thickness  nor  more 
than  eighteen  inches. 

(b)  In  reinforced  concrete  spandrel  beams  and  parapet  walls  shrinkage 
reinforcement  shall  be  provided,  in  amount  not  less  than  one  half  of  one  per 
cent,  in  addition  to  the  reinforcement  for  bending.  Such  reinforcement 
shall  be  continuous  and  rods  shall  be  spliced  by  lapping  or  otherwise,  except 
at  expansion  joints. 

(c)  Consideration  shall  be  given  to  the  stresses  due  to  expansion  and 
shrinkage  in  buildings  more  than  two  hundred  feet  long  and  provision  shall  be 
made  satisfactory  to  the  commissioner  for  avoiding  excessive  stress.  In 
buildings  longer  than  four  hundred  feet  expansion  joints  shall  be  provided  not 
more  than  three  hundred  feet  apart.  Such  joints  shall  be  constructed  with 
at  least  one  inch  opening  and  shall  allow  for  expansion  of  each  section  of 
building  not  less  than  one  half  inch  for  every  one  hundred  feet  of  its  length. 

Sect.    2652.      Concentrated    Loads    on    Concrete    Slabs.  —  (a)    For 

computation  of  stresses  due  to  bending  and  shear,  concentrated  loads  on 
one-way  slabs  may  be  considered  as  evenly  distributed  over  an  effective 
width  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  the  span  as  follows :  — 

Solid  concrete  construction     .        .        .     w  -f-  0.8  s 

Combination  floor  construction      .        .     w  +  0.6  s 

Ribbed  floor  construction        .        .        .     w  +  0.4  s  but  not  more  than 

w  +  twice  the  rib  spacing 
where  (w)  is  the  actual  width  of  the  concentration  and  (s)  is  the  distance  from 
the  nearer  support  to  the  center  of  the  concentration.  For  concentrations 
at  mid-span  or  for  loads  such  as  partitions  which  are  concentrated  laterally 
but  distributed  longitudinally  to  the  span,  (s)  shall  be  taken  as  equal  to 
half  the  span. 

(b)  If  adequate  bridging  is  provided  to  distribute  concentrations  among 
adjacent  ribs,  the  effective  width  for  combination  and  ribbed  slabs  may  be 

(205) 


Sees.  2652=2653 

taken  as  for  solid  slabs,  but  in  the  case  of  ribbed  slabs,  unless  the  bridging 
has  approximately  the  same  spacing  as  the  ribs,  not  more  than  three  adja- 
cent ribs  shall  be  assumed  to  share  the  Joad. 

*Sect.     2653.       Concrete    Ribbed    and     Combination    Slabs.  —  (a) 

Ribbed  floor  construction  consists  of  concrete  ribs,  running  in  one  or  two 
directions  and  topping  placed  monolithically  with  the  ribs,  not  over  twenty 
inches  apart  between  faces.  The  ribs  shall  be  straight  and  of  a  width  not  less 
than  four  inches  nor  less  than  one  third  the  depth.  The  topping  shall  be  of 
sufficient  strength  to  transmit  loads  coming  upon  it  to  the  adjacent  ribs 
and  shall  be  not  less  than  two  inches  thick.  Ribbed  slabs  shall  be  reinforced 
at  right  angles  to  the  ribs  with  a  minimum  of  forty-nine  one  thousandths 
square  inch  of  reinforcing  steel  per  foot  and  in  slabs  on  which  the  prescribed 
live  load  does  not  exceed  fifty  pounds  per  square  foot,  no  additional  rein- 
forcement shall  be  required. 

(b)  Combination  floor  construction  consists  of  concrete  ribs  running  in  one 
or  two  directions,  with  masonry  fillers,  filling  the  entire  space  between  ribs, 
and  either  with  or  without  a  monolithic  concrete  topping  over  the  ribs.  Each 
masonry  filler  shall  have  contact  with  ribs  on  two  opposite  sides.  Ribs  shall 
be  not  over  twenty  inches  apart  between  faces,  shall  be  straight  and  of  a 
width  not  less  than  four  inches  nor  less  than  one  third  the  depth.  Either  the 
fillers  or  the  topping  over  them,  or  the  combination  of  the  two  shall  be  of 
sufficient  strength  to  transmit  any  load  coming  on  them  to  the  adjacent 
ribs.     If  a  monolithic  topping  is  used,  it  shall  be  not  less  than  one  inch  thick. 

(c)  If  structural  fillers  as  specified  in  paragraph  (e)  are  used,  then,  and 
not  otherwise,  certain  portions  of  them  may  be  included  with  the  concrete  in 
calculations  of  resistance  to  shear  and  bending,  but  the  amount  included  shall 
nowhere  exceed  the  actual  thickness  of  the  portion  of  the  filler  nor  one  and  one 
half  inches.  In  one-way  construction  the  webs  of  structural  fillers  which  are 
in  contact  with  the  concrete  ribs  and  where  there  is  a  topping  the  web  in 
contact  therewith  may  be  included  with  the  concrete  in  calculations  of  re- 
sistance to  shear  and  bending.  In  construction  in  which  the  ribs  run  in  both 
directions  and  at  approximately  the  same  distance  on  centers,  and  whether 
designed  as  one-way  or  two-way  slabs,  the  webs  in  contact  with  the  concrete 
ribs  may  be  included  in  calculations  of  resistance  to  shear  and  bending  and 
the  top  and  bottom  webs  may  be  included  in  calculations  of  resistance  to 
bending. 

(d)  The  maximum  stress  in  both  the  concrete  and  the  filler  shall  not 
exceed  that  allowed.in  the  weaker  of  the  two  materials. 

(e)  A  structural  filler,  for  the  purpose  of  this  section,  shall  have  an  ultimate 
strength  in  compression,  on  its  net  section,  when  tested  on  end  at  the  age  of 
twenty-eight  days,  of  two  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch.  If  structural  clay 
tiles  are  used  as  fillers  they  shall  at  least  equal  those  classified  as  Grade  B  in 
Part  24  of  this  code.    Gypsum  tile  shall  not  be  used  as  a  structural  filler. 

(f)  The  unit  extreme  compressive  fibre  stress  in  the  filler  tile  shall  not 
exceed  four  tenths  of  its  ultimate  unit  compressive  strength,  determined  for 
the  net  section  from  an  average  of  three  fillers  tested  on  end  at  an  age  of 

(206) 


Sees.  2653=2654 

twenty-eight  days.  The  unit  stress  allowed  in  shear  computations  shall  not 
exceed  one  quarter  of  the  average  ultimate  strength  in  shear  of  the  joint 
between  the  ribs  and  the  filler  blocks. 

(g)  Where  the  topping  contains  conduits  or  pipes,  the  thickness  shall 
not  be  less  than  one  inch  plus  the  total  overall  depth  of  such  conduits  or  pipes 
at  any  point.  Such  conduits  or  pipes  shall  be  so  located  as  not  to  impair  the 
strength  of  the  construction. 

(h)  Shrinkage  reinforcement  shall  be  provided  in  the  slab  as  required  in 
section  twenty-six  hundred  and  fifty-one. 

(i)  Neither  paper,  wood,  nor  roofing  material  shall  be  used  between  or  at 
the  ends  of  structural  hollow  masonry  fillers  included  in  calculations  of  re- 
sistance to  shear  or  bending  to  prevent  concrete  from  flowing  into  the  inter- 
stices thereof,  nor  any  other  material  that  would  impair  the  bond  between 
the  end  of  the  filler  and  the  concrete,  but  this  shall  not  prevent  the  use  of 
such  materials  when  inserted  in  but  not  projecting  from  the  openings  of  the 
fillers  nor  the  use  of  the  same  material  that  is  permitted  for  the  fillers  them- 
selves. If  concrete  is  allowed  to  penetrate  the  interstices  of  hollow  masonry 
fillers,  the  weight  thereof  shall  be  included  in  the  dead  load  to  be  supported. 
The  webs  of  structural  filler  units  whose  ends  are  thus  in  contact  with  the 
concrete  may  be  included  in  calculations  of  resistance  to  bending. 
[  *As  amended,  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  2654.  Two=Way  Slabs  of  Reinforced  Concrete.  —  (a)  Con- 
crete slabs,  either  solid,  ribbed  or  combination  slabs,  supported  on  four  sides 
by  beams,  girders  or  walls,  and  reinforced  to  span  in  two  directions  shall  be 
designed  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  this  section. 

(b)  The  slab  shall  be  regarded  as  consisting  of  a  series  of  adjacent  strips 
of  unit  width  spanning  in  each  direction.  In  computations  for  shear  and 
diagonal  tension,  bond,  and  for  the  loading  of  supporting  members,  each  strip, 
spanning  in  either  the  longer  or  the  shorter  direction,  shall  be  assumed  to 
carry  and  transmit  to  its  supports  a  total  load  (W),  represented  by  the  expres- 
sion: 

W  =  1/2  C0r  w  L  =  1/2  C0w  U 

in  which  (w)      is  the  total  load  per  unit  area  of  the  slab. 

(L)       is  the  span  of  the  strip. 

(Li)     is  the  width  of  the  panel  transverse  to  the  span. 

(r)       is  the  ratio  of  Li  to  L. 

(Co)  is  a  coefficient  dependent  on  the  position  of  the  panel  relative 
to  adjacent  panels  continuous  with  it  at  its  ends  and  sides, 
as  indicated  on  the  accompanying  diagram.  Full  restraint 
at  end  support,  as  defined  in  section  twenty-six  hundred  and 
thirty-six,  shall  be  considered  equivalent  to  continuity  in 
determining  (C0). 

(207) 


Sees.  2654=2655 


MARGINAL  BEAM   OR  WALL 


t 


1.0 

o.<? 

I.I 

1.0 

z 

o 
o 
u 

s 


o 
m 

< 

h 

Ui 

> 
z 


Of 

z 

GO 


J 
J 

i 

o 
< 

IU 

£0 

J 

< 

z 
3 

< 

I 

VALUES  OF  C0)hi  VARIOUS  PANEL.5. 

(c)  The  positive  bending  moment  for  a  strip  of  unit  width  in  the  middle 
half  of  the  panel,  spanning  in  either  direction,  shall  be  assumed  as  given  by 
the  following  formula: — 

M  =  0.33  CiC0r2wL2  =  0.33  GC0wLi 
in  which  (Ci)  is  a  coefficient  for  bending  determined  in  accordance  with  the 
conditions  of  restraint  at  end  supports  of  the  strips  as  provided  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty-five  or  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty-six. 

(d)  Negative  moments  at  and  adjacent  to  supports  between  two  panels 
shall  be  determined  by  the  formula  given  in  paragraph  (c)  for  positive  moment 
taking  (Ci)  as  the  coefficient  for  negative  moment  determined  according 
to  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  thirty-five  or  section  twenty-six  hundred 
and  thirty-six,  and  in  case  the  conditions  of  continuity  in  the  two  panels  are 
different,  taking  the  mean  value  of  (C0). 

(e)  The  positive  bending  in  strips  of  unit  width  in  the  outer  quarters  of 
the  panel  may  be  assumed  to  be  three  quarters  that  of  the  strips  of  the  middle 
half. 

(f)  Lines  of  inflection  in  a  two-way  panel  shall  be  assumed  at  a  distance 
of  one  fourth  of  its  shorter  span  from  supports  over  which  the  slab  is  con- 
tinuous. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 
{Sect.  2655.     Limitations  upon   Reinforced  Concrete  Flat   Slabs. — 
(a)     The  term  "flat  slabs"  as  used  herein  refers  to  concrete  slabs  with  rein- 
forcing bars  in  two  or  more  directions,  whose  interior  supports  are  columns 
or  the  like,  generally  without  beams. 

(208) 


Sec.  2655 

(b)  The  methods  of  stress  computation  herein  specified  apply  to  a  series 
of  slabs  of  approximately  uniform  size  extending  at  least  three  panels  in  each 
direction  and  in  which  the  length  of  panel  does  not  exceed  one  and  one  half 
times  its  width.  Flat  slabs  of  other  arrangement  shall  be  proportioned  to 
have  at  least  equal  carrying  capacity  and  degree  of  safety  according  to  estab- 
lished principles  of  mechanics. 

(c)  Flat  slabs  with  paneled  ceiling  or  with  dropped  panels  may  be  pro- 
portioned by  the  methods  herein  specified  provided  the  dropped  panel  shall 
have  a  length  or  diameter  in  each  rectangular  direction  not  less  than  one  third 
the  panel  length  in  that  direction,  and  the  thickness  of  the  thicker  portion  of 
the  slab  shall  not  exceed  one  and  one  half  times  that  of  the  remainder.  In 
the  ceilings  of  flat  slabs,  concrete  between  rods  in  tensile  regions  and  in  com- 
pressive regions  where  it  can  be  spared  may  be  displaced  by  permanent  or 
removable  fillers,  provided  allowable  stresses  are  not  exceeded  in  the  concrete 
which  remains  and  provided  the  tensile  stress  in  the  reinforcing  rods  in  that 
region  shall  not  exceed  eight  ninths  the  stress  allowed  in  the  reinforcement  of 
solid  concrete  slabs.  Compression  concrete  above  such  fillers  shall  have  a 
thickness  not  less  than  two  inches,  and  the  construction  shall  safely  support 
any  concentration  of  load  that  may  come  upon  it.  The  term  "slab  thickness  " 
used  in  connection  with  such  construction  shall  refer  to  the  total  thickness  of 
the  structural  concrete. 

(d)  Column  capitals,  if  of  concrete,  shall  be  of  the  mixture  required  for 
the  column  up  to  a  level  where  the  area  of  a  horizontal  section  is  fifty  per 
cent  more  than  the  gross  area  of  the  shaft  of  the  column.  In  dimensioning 
the  concrete  capital  for  design  purposes,  no  portion  of  the  capital  shall  be 
considered  which  lies  outside  the  largest  ninety-degree  circular  cone  contained 
within  its  outlines.  The  diameter  of  the  capital  shall  be  measured  for  design 
purposes  at  the  junction  of  the  cone  with  the  bottom  of  the  slab  or  dropped 
panel. 

(e)  Column  capitals  of  structural  metal  may  be  substituted  for  concrete 
capitals,  whether  contained  within  the  thickness  of  the  slab  and  dropped 
panel,  or  not,  provided  they  meet  the  following  requirements: — ■ 

(1)  they  shall  have  the  same  protection  against  fire  required  for  rein- 
forcement in  similar  exposures; 

(2)  they  shall  safely  support  the  slab  on  the  periphery  of  the  capital 
without  exceeding  stresses  allowed  in  this  code  for  the  kind  of  metal  used; 

(3)  they  shall  provide  support  for  the  slab  or  dropped  panel  at  a  dis- 
tance above  the  bottom  thereof  not  substantially  greater  than  the  require- 
ments for  fire  protection,  and  such  support  shall  either  be  continuous  along 
the  periphery  of  the  capital  or  with  intervals  not  greater  than  three  times 
the  thickness  of  concrete  slab,  or  slab  and  dropped  panel; 

(4)  the  capitals  shall  be  so  designed  and  arranged  as  to  permit  the  proper 
placement  of  concrete  in  and  about  them  without  pockets  or  voids,  and  to 
provide  for  the  transmission  of  load  from  columns  above  to  columns  below; 

(5)  the  diameter  of  a  structural  metal  column  capital,  for  purposes  of 
slab  design,  shall  be  taken  as  twice  the  distance  from  the  center  of  the 
column  to  the  center  of  bearing  of  slab  or  dropped  panel  on  a  continuous 

(209) 


Sees.  2655=2657 

circumferential  support,  or  twice  the  average  distance  to  centers  of  bearing 
on  radial  or  non-continuous  supports,  the  unit  bearing  assumed  as  uniform 
and  not  in  excess  of  the  stress  allowed  by  this  code. 
[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.    2656.      Assumptions    in    Concrete    Flat    Slab    Design. — (a) 

A  flat  slab  panel  shall  be  considered  as  consisting  of  strips,  parallel  to  sides 
of  the  panel,  as  follows: — 

(1)  A  middle  strip  one  half  panel  in  width,  symmetrical  with  respect 
to  the  panel  center  line. 

(2)  A  column  strip  one  half  panel  in  width  made  up  of  two  quarter- 
panel  areas  outside  the  middle  strips. 

(3)  The  strips  shall  be  considered  in  each  rectangular  direction  for  the 
computation  of  bending  moments. 

(b)  The  critical  sections  for  bending  are  referred  to  as  the  principal 
design  sections  and  are  located  as  follows: — 

(1)  Sections  for  negative  bending  shall  be  taken  along  the  edges  of  the 
panel  at  ends  of  the  strips,  on  center  lines  of  columns,  and  around  the 
periphery  of  the  column  capital. 

(2)  Sections  for  positive  bending  shall  be  taken  at  mid-length  of  the 
strips,  on  the  center  line  of  the  panel. 

*Sect.    2657.      Bending    in    Interior    Flat    Slab    Panels.  — (a)     The 

numerical  sum  of  the  positive  and  negative  bending  moments  in  either 
rectangular  direction  of  an  interior  panel,  for  the  design  of  tensile  reinforce- 
ment, shall  be  assumed  as  not  less  than  — 

(2c\2 
1 )    =  Mpc  +  Mpm  +  Mno  +  Mnm 
3L/ 

where  (Mpc)       is  the  positive  moment  at  mid-span  of  the  column  strip. 
(Mpm)      is  the  positive  moment  at  mid-span  of  the  middle  strip. 
(Mnm)      is  the  negative  moment  at  one  end  of  a  middle  strip. 
(Mnc)       is  the  negative  moment  at  one  end  of  the  column  strip. 
(L)  is  the  length  of  the  strips  between  center  lines  of  columns, 

(c)  is  the  diameter  of  the  column  capital,  or  top  of  column  if 

there  is  no  capital. 
(W)  is  the  total  live  and  dead  load  uniformly  distributed  over 

a  single  panel  area. 

(b)  The  bending  moments  for  the  design  of  tensile  reinforcement  in  the 
principal  design  sections  shall  be  assumed  to  be  those  given  in  the  following 
table,  except  that  (Mnc)  may  be  (0.03  M0)  greater  or  smaller,  and  each  of 
(MpP),  (Mpm)  and  (Mnm)  may  be  (0.01  M0)  greater  or  smaller  provided  that 
the  sum  remains  not  less  than  the  value  specified  for  (M0). 

(c)  If  a  flat  slab  is  supported  at  interior  column  points  by  supports  less 
rigid  than  the  columns  specified  in  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-nine  > 
paragraph  (b),  the  positive  bending  in  column  and  middle  strips  shall  be 
increased  twenty  per  cent  above  the  tabular  values. 

(210) 


Sees.  2658=2660 


Bending  Moments  in  Flat  Slabs  for  Tensile  Reinforcement —  Interior 

Panels  Fully  Continuous. 


Two-way  Reinforcement. 

Four-way  Reinforcement. 

Moment. 

Without 
Dropped  Panel. 

With 
Dropped  Panel. 

Without 
Dropped  Panel. 

With 
Dropped  Panel. 

MPc 

0.22Mo 

0.20Mo 

0.20M<> 

0.19Mo 

Mpm 

O.I6M0 

0.15Mo 

0.20Mo 

0.19Mo 

Mnc 

0.46Mo 

0.50Mo 

0.50Mo 

0.54Mo 

Mnm 

0.16Mo 

0.15Mo 

O.lOMo 

O.O8M0 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2658.  Spacing  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement. —  (a)  Bands  of 
rods  in  two-way  systems  of  reinforcement  shall  be  spread  evenly  over  the 
width  of  the  strips. 

(b)  Direct  bands  of  rods  in  four-way  systems  shall  have  a  width  of  about 
(0.4)  times  the  panel  width,  diagonal  bands  (0.4)  times  the  average  panel 
widths,  and  the  rods  shall  be  spread  evenly  in  the  bands. 

(c)  The  maximum  spacing  of  rods  shall  not  exceed  three  times  the  thick- 
ness of  the  slab. 

fSect.  2659.  Thickness  of  Concrete  Flat  Slabs.  —  (a)  The  thickness 
of  a  flat  slab,  and  the  size  and  thickness  of  the  dropped  panel  shall  be  such 
that  the  compressive  stress  due  to  bending  will  not  exceed  that  allowed  for 
concrete  on  the  principal  design  sections  of  any  strip.  The  bending  moments 
for  which  the  compressive  stress  shall  be  computed  shall  be  assumed  to  be 
four  thirds  those  specified  for  the  design  of  reinforcement. 

(b)  The  width  of  section  for  computing  compression  in  concrete  due  to 
negative  bending  at  the  column  head  shall  be  taken  as  the  width  of  the  dropped 
panel  if  any;  otherwise,  half  the  panel  width.  The  width  of  other  principal 
sections  shall  be  taken  as  half  the  panel  width. 

(c)  The  thickness  of  the  slab  and  the  size  and  thickness  of  the  dropped 
panel  shall  be  such  that  shearing  stresses  computed  as  specified  in  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  forty-one  shall  not  exceed  the  stress  allowed. 

(d)  In  no  case,  however,  shall  the  slab  thickness  be  less  than  one  fortieth 
the  length  of  the  panel  nor  less  than  six  inches. 

[  1[As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2660.  Point  of  Inflection  in  Flat  Slabs. —  (a)  In  a  middle 
strip  the  point  of  inflection  for  slabs  without  dropped  panels  shall  be  assumed 
at  a  line  (0.33L)  distant  from  the  center  of  the  span  and  for  slabs  with  dropped 
panels  (0.3L)  distant  from  the  center  of  the  span. 

(b)  In  a  column  strip,  the  point  of  inflection  for  slabs  without  dropped 
panels  shall  be  at  a  line  0.33  (L-c)  distant  from  the  center  of  the  panel  and  0.3 
(L-c)  for  slabs  with  dropped  panel. 

(211) 


Sees.  2661=2663 

Sect.  2661.  Arrangement  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement  at  Column 
Heads. —  Reinforcement  shall  be  provided  not  only  for  the  moments  at 
principal  design  sections  but  also  for  moments  at  intermediate  sections. 
Steel  of  the  full  area  required  for  negative  moment  at  the  column  head  shall 
be  continued  in  the  same  plane  close  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  slab  to  the 
edge  of  the  dropped  panel,  and  not  less  than  a  distance  (0.2L)  from  the  center 
line  of  the  column.  Lapped  splices  shall  not  be  permitted  at  or  near  regions 
of  maximum  stress  except  as  described  in  section  twenty-six  hundred  and 
twenty-six. 

Sect.  2662.  Arrangement  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement  —  Two=way 
System. —  (a)  In  column  strips  at  least  four  tenths  of  the  area  of  steel 
required  at  the  principal  design  section  for  positive  moment  in  the  strip 
shall  be  in  bars  of  such  length  and  so  placed  as  to  reinforce  the  sections  for 
negative  moment  at  the  adjacent  column  heads.  These  bars,  and  other  bars 
for  negative  reinforcement  shall  extend  into  the  adjacent  panel  to  a  point 
at  least  (0.05L)  beyond  the  point  of  inflection.  Not  less  than  one  third  of 
the  bars  used  for  positive  reinforcement  in  the  column  strip  shall  be  straight 
and  extend  into  the  dropped  panel  at  least  twenty  diameters  of  the  bar,  but 
not  less  than  twelve  inches;  or  if  no  dropped  panel  is  used,  shall  extend  to 
within  (0.125L)  of  the  center  line  of  the  columns.  The  remainder  of  the 
bars  for  positive  reinforcement  in  the  column  strip  shall  extend  at  least 
(0.33L)  on  either  side  of  the  center  line  of  panel.  Not  less  than  one  fourth 
in  area  of  the  bars  for  negative  reinforcement  of  each  column  strip  shall  lie 
directly  over  the  column  capital  and  not  less  than  one  half  within  the  width 
of  the  dropped  panel,  if  any. 

(b)  In  the  middle  strip  at  least  one  half  of  the  bars  for  positive  moment 
shall  be  bent  up  for  negative  moment  and  extend  over  the  bands  of  the 
column  strips  at  both  sides  of  the  panel  to  a  point  at  least  (0.25L)  beyond  the 
center  line  of  columns.  The  location  of  the  bends  shall  be  such  that  for  a 
distance  (0.15L)  for  slabs  with  dropped  panels,  and  (0.1 25L)  for  slabs  without 
dropped  panels,  on  each  side  of  the  center  line  of  columns,  the  full  reinforce- 
ment required  for  negative  moment  will  be  provided  in  the  top  face  of  the 
slab.  The  full  reinforcement  for  positive  moment  in  the  middle  strip  shall 
extend  in  the  bottom  face  of  the  slab  to  a  point  at  least  (0.25L)  on  either 
side  of  the  panel  center  line,  and  at  least  one  half  of  it  shall  extend  to  points 
(0.325L)  on  either  side  of  the  panel  center  line  for  slabs  with  dropped  panels, 
and  (0.35L)  for  slabs  without  dropped  panels. 

Sect.  2663.  Arrangement  of  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement — Four=way 
System. —  (a)  Provisions  governing  the  placing  of  steel  in  column  strips 
in  two-way  systems  apply  as  well  to  the  direct  bands  in  four- way  systems. 

(b)  In  diagonal  bands,  at  least  four  tenths  of  the  area  of  steel  required 
at  the  section  for  positive  moment  shall  be  in  bars  of  such  length  and  so 
placed  as  to  reinforce  the  negative  moment  section  at  the  two  diagonally 
opposite  column  heads.  These  bars  and  other  bars  for  negative  reinforce- 
ment, if  any,  shall  extend  into  the  adjoining  panel  to  points  at  least  (0.4L) 
beyond  a  line  drawn  through  the  column  center  perpendicular  to  the  direc- 

(212) 


Sec.  2663=2665 


tion  of  the  band.     The  straight  bars  for  positive  moment  in  the  diagonal 
bands  shall  not  be  shorter  than  the  length  of  panel  center  to  center  of  columns, 
(c)     For  negative  moment  in  the  middle  strip,  the  required  steel  shall 
extend  not  less  than  (0.25L)  on  either  side  of  the  column  center  line. 

*Sect.  2664.  Flat  Slab  Reinforcement  Other  than  Two=way  or 
Four=way. —  Arrangement  of  reinforcement  other  than  two-way  or  four- 
way  shall  provide  reinforcing  at  the  principal  design  sections  and  at  inter- 
mediate sections  equivalent  to  that  specified  above.  All  such  arrangements 
shall  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  commissioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2665.  Discontinuous  Flat  Slab  Panels. —  (a)  In  panels  ad- 
jacent to  an  exterior  wall  and  other  panels  where  the  slab  is  discontinuous 
on  one  or  two  of  its  edges,  the  bending  on  principal  design  sections  parallel 
to  a  discontinuous  edge  shall  be  assumed  at  values  not  less  than  specified  in 
this  section,  depending  upon  the  degree  of  restraint  in  bending  furnished  by 
the  support  at  such  discontinuous  edge. 

(b)  The  numerical  sum  of  the  positive  bending  moment  at  mid-span  and 
the  average  of  the  negative  bending  moments  at  the  discontinuous  edge  and 
at  the  first  interior  supports  for  a  full  panel  width,  for  the  design  of  tensile 
reinforcement,  shall  be  assumed  as  not  less  than 

c  ~l~  a  ^ 
Mo  =  0.10  WL  I  1 


/  c+aV 


in  which  (L)  is  the  span  center  to  center  of  columns,  walls  or  other  supports; 
(c)  is  the  diameter  of  the  interior  column  capital  and  (a)  is  the  thickness  of 
the  exterior  support  in  the  direction  of  the  span.  A  bracket  on  the  inner 
face  of  an  exterior  column  shall  be  ignored  in  determining  the  value  of  (a). 

(c)  The  bending  moments  for  the  design  of  tensile  reinforcement  in  the 
principal  design  sections  of  the  several  strips  shall  be  assumed,  within  the 
range  of  allowable  variation  specified  in  paragraph  (b)  of  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  fifty-seven,  as  follows: — 

Bending  Moment  for  Tensile  Reinforcement  in  Wall  Panels  of  Flat 

Slabs. 


Moment. 


Two-way  Reinforcement. 


Without 
Dropped  Panel. 


With 
Dropped  Panel. 


Four-way  Reinforcement. 


Without 
Dropped  Panel. 


With 
Dropped  Panel. 


Negligible  Restraint  at  Discontinuous  Edge. 


Mp0 

0.32Mo 

0.31Mo 

0.30Mo 

0.29Mo 

Mpm 

0.26Mo 

0.25Mo 

0.30Mo 

0.29Mo 

Mnc  (ext.) 

0.05Mo 

0.05Mo 

0.05Mo 

0.05Mo 

Mnm  (ext.) 

0.05Mo 

0.05Mo 

0.05Mo 

0.05Mo 

Mnc  (int.) 

0.55Mo 

O.6OM0 

O.6OM0 

0.65Mo 

Mnm  (int.) 

0.19Mo 

O.I8M0 

O.lOMo 

0.09Mo 

(213) 

Sec.  2665 

Bending  Moment  for  Tensile  Reinforcement  in  Wall  Panels  of  Flat 

Slabs. —  Continued. 


Moment. 


Two-way  Reinfobcement. 


Without 
Dropped  Panel. 


With 
Dropped  Panel. 


Foub-way  Reinfobcement. 


Without 
Dropped  Panel. 


With 
Dropped  Panel. 


Modeeate  Restraint  at  Discontinuous  Edge. 


MpC 

0.29Mo 

0.27Mo 

0.26Mo 

0.25Mo 

Mpm 

0.23Mo 

0.22M0 

0.26Mo 

0.25Mo 

Mnc  (ext.) 

0.22Mo 

0.23Mo 

0.25Mo 

0.26Mo 

Mnm  (ext.) 

O.O8M0 

O.O8M0 

O.O6M0 

O.O6M0 

Mnc  (int.) 

0.50Mo 

0.55Mo 

0.55Mo 

O.6OM0 

Mnm  (int.) 

O.I8M0 

O.I6M0 

O.lOMo 

O.O8M0 

Full  Restraint  at  Discontinuous  Edge. 


Mpo 

0.25Mo 

0.22Mo 

0.22Mo 

0.2lMo 

Mpm 

0.20Mo 

0.20Mo 

0.22Mo 

0.21Mo 

Mnc  (ext.) 

0.38Mo 

0.4lMo 

0.46Mo 

0.48Mo 

Mnm  (ext.) 

O.lOMo 

O.lOMo 

O.O6M0 

O.O6M0 

Mnc  (int.) 

0.46Mo 

0.50Mo 

0.50Mo 

0.54Mo 

Mnm  (int.) 

O.I6M0 

0.15Mo 

O.lOMo 

O.O8M0 

(d)  If  restraint  at  a  discontinuous  edge  is  furnished  by  a  wall,  the  negative 
bending  at  the  exterior  support  may  be  more  nearly  evenly  distributed 
between  column  and  middle  strips.  If  the  supports  at  interior  column  points 
are  less  rigid  than  the  column  specified  in  section  twenty-six  hundred  and 
sixty-nine  the  positive  bending  in  column  and  middle  strips  shall  be  increased 
twenty  per  cent  above  the  tabular  values. 

(e)  Negligible  restraint  in  bending  at  the  discontinuous  edge  of  a  flat  slab 
panel  shall  be  considered  to  be  furnished  by  a  supporting  wall  of  masonry  or 
a  row  of  masonry  piers  or  by  any  support  that  does  not  assure  as  great 
restraint  as  that  specified  as  moderate. 

(f)  Moderate  restraint  shall  be  considered  to  be  furnished  by  a  wall  of 
reinforced  concrete  or  by  a  row  of  reinforced  concrete  columns  or  of  steel 
columns  encased  in  concrete  when  the  slab  acts  integrally  with  the  support 
and  when  the  support  is  not  sufficiently  rigid  to  afford  full  restraint. 

(g)  Full  restraint  shall  be  assumed  where  the  discontinuous  edge  of  a 
flat  slab  is  supported  by  a  reinforced  concrete  wall  or  row  of  columns  with 


which  it  acts  integrally  and  when  the  ratio  ( — )  for  the  slab  is  less  than  the  sum 

Li 
I 

of  the  ratios  (-)  for  the  walls  or  columns,  respectively,  above  and  below  the 
h 

(214) 


Sees.  2665=2666 

slab.  For  the  purpose  of  this  section  (I)  is  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  slab, 
wall  or  column  calculated  for  the  gross  area  of  the  concrete  and  neglecting 
the  reinforcement. 

(h)  Except  in  the  case  of  negligible  restraint  where  precautions  are  taken 
to  avoid  restraint,  the  bending  incidental  to  the  restraint  shall  be  trans- 
mitted to  the  supports,  with  or  without  the  aid  of  brackets,  in  such  manner 
that  the  stresses  specified  in  this  code  for  the  materials  used  shall  not  be 
exceeded.  The  supports  shall  be  made  capable  of  resisting  the  bending 
so  transmitted  in  addition  to  their  other  loads  and  forces  without  excessive 
stress.  The  bending  moments  transmitted  shall  be  assumed  to  be  four 
thirds  those  specified  in  this  section  for  design  of  the  tensile  reinforcement 
of  the  slab. 

(i)  The  reinforcement  for  positive  bending  perpendicular  to  the  dis- 
continuous edge  shall  extend  to  this  edge  and  have  an  embedment  of  at 
least  six  inches  in  spandrel  beams,  walls  or  columns.  Reinforcement  for 
negative  bending  shall  be  bent  or  hooked  at  spandrel  beams,  walls  or  columns 
to  provide  adequate  anchorage.  The  length  and  placement  of  other  rein- 
forcement in  wall  panels  shall  be  adapted  from  the  requirements  of  sections 
twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-one,  twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-two  and 
twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-three  having  in  view  the  changed  location  of 
the  points  of  inflection. 

(j)  The  half  column  strip  parallel  and  adjacent  to  a  marginal  beam 
having  a  depth  not  greater  than  one  and  one  half  times  the  slab  thickness, 
or  parallel  and  adjacent  to  a  discontinuous  edge  without  marginal  beam,  shall 
be  designed  to  resist  at  least  one  half  the  moments  specified  for  a  full  interior 
column  strip.  The  half  column  strip  parallel  and  adjacent  to  a  marginal 
beam  having  a  depth  greater  than  one  and  one  half  times  the  thickness  of  the 
slab,  shall  be  designed  to  resist  at  least  one  fourth  the  moments  specified  for 
a  full  column  strip. 

(k)  If  a  flat  slab  is  supported  at  a  discontinuous  edge  by  a  row  of  columns 
having  brackets  extending  from  the  side  of  the  column  in  a  direction  parellel 
to  the  discontinuous  edge  which  are  equivalent  to  column  capitals,  the  value 
of  (c)  parallel  to  the  discontinuous  edge  shall  be  the  total  width  of  the  capital 
or  brackets.  If  such  columns  are  without  brackets  the  value  of  (c)  parallel 
to  the  discontinuous  edge  shall  be  taken  as  the  width  of  the  column  plus 
twice  the  difference  between  the  depth  of  the  marginal  beam,  if  any,  and  the 
depth  of  the  slab. 

(1)  Dropped  panels  at  wall  columns  may  be  omitted,  provided  the  allowed 
unit  stresses  are  not  exceeded. 

(m)  The  provisions  of  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  fifty-nine  shall 
apply  to  wall  panels. 

Sect.  2666.  Marginal  Beams  in  Flat  Slabs. —  (a)  In  panels  having 
a  marginal  beam  on  one  edge  or  on  each  of  two  adjacent  edges,  whether  or 
not  the  slab  is  there  discontinuous,  the  beam  shall  be  designed  to  carry  at 
least  the  load  superimposed  directly  upon  it,  exclusive  of  the  panel  load. 
A  marginal  beam  which  has  a  depth  greater  than  one  and  one  half  times  the 
slab  thickness,  shall  be  designed  to  support,  in  addition  to  the  load  super- 

(215) 


Sees.  2266=2669 

imposed  directly  upon  it,  a  uniformly  distributed  load  equal  to  at  least  one 
fourth  the  total  live  and  dead  load  for  which  the  adjacent  panel  or  panels  are 
designed. 

(b)  Where  there  is  a  beam  or  a  bearing  wall  at  the  center  line  of  columns 
in  the  interior  portion  of  a  continuous  flat  slab,  the  negative  moment  at  the 
beam  or  wall  line  in  the  middle  strip  perpendicular  to  the  beam  or  wall  shall 
be  taken  as  thirty  per  cent  greater  than  the  negative  moment  specified  in 
section  twenty-six  hundred  and  fifty-seven  or  section  twenty-six  hundred 
and  sixty-five  for  a  middle  strip.  The  half  column  strip  adjacent  and  parallel 
to  and  lying  on  either  side  of  the  beam  or  wall  shall  be  designed  to  resist 
moments,  at  least  one  fourth  of  those  specified  in  section  twenty-six  hundred 
and  fifty-seven  or  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-five  for  a  column 
strip.  The  beam  or  wall  in  such  cases  shall  be  designed  to  carry  a  uniformly 
distributed  load  equal  to  one  fourth  of  the  panel  loads  on  both  sides  in  addition 
to  the  loads  directly  imposed  upon  it. 

Sect.  2667.  Openings  in  Flat  Slabs. —  (a)  Openings  of  any  size  may 
be  formed  in  the  area  common  to  two  intersecting  middle  strips,  provided  the 
total  positive  and  total  negative  moments  as  specified  in  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  fifty-seven  or  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-five  are 
effectually  resisted  when  these  total  positive  and  total  negative  moments  are 
redistributed  between  the  remaining  principal  design  sections  to  meet  the 
conditions. 

(b)  In  an  area  common  to  two  column  strips,  not  more  than  one  opening 
shall  be  allowed  and  the  greatest  dimension  of  such  an  opening  shall  not 
exceed  (0.05L). 

(c)  In  an  area  common  to  one  column  strip  and  one  middle  strip,  openings 
shall  not  interrupt  more  than  one  quarter  of  the  bars  in  either  strip  when 
evenly  spaced  and  the  equivalent  of  the  bars  so  interrupted  shall  be  provided 
by  extra  reinforcement  on  both  sides  of  the  opening. 

(d)  An  opening  larger  than  allowed  by  this  section  shall  be  completely 
framed  with  beams  to  carry  the  loads  to  the  columns. 

*Sect.  2668.  Construction  Joints  in  Flat  Slabs.  —  Construction 
joints  in  flat  slabs  shall  occur  preferably  midway  between  columns.  Where 
such  joints  occur,  steel  reinforcing  shall  be  provided  perpendicular  to  the 
joints  in  addition  to  the  reinforcement  required  for  bending  of  cross-sectional 
area  equal  to  one  third  that  required  for  bending  at  the  joint.  Steel  rods  so 
provided  shall  be  spaced  not  over  two  times  the  slab  thickness,  shall  be  fully 
anchored  for  the  allowed  tensile  stress  by  embedment  each  side  of  the  joint, 
and  shall  be  placed  in  the  same  plane  with  the  reinforcement  provided  for 
bending  in  each  strip. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.   2669.     Limiting    Dimensions    of    Concrete    Columns. —  (a) 

Unless  designed  as  long  columns  under  the  provision  of  section  twenty-six 
hundred  and  seventy-three,  reinforced  concrete  columns  shall  not  be  longer 
than  ten  times  the  least  lateral  dimension.  Struts  shall  be  designed  as 
columns. 

(216) 


Sees.  2669-2671 

(b)  In  flat  slab  construction,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  paragraph 
(c)  of  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  fifty-seven  and  paragraph  (d)  of  section 
twenty-six  hundred  and  sixty-five,  the  least  dimension  of  a  column  supporting 
a  floor  shall  be  not  less  than  one  fifteenth  the  average  center  to  center  spacing 
nor  less  than  sixteen  inches;  and  that  of  a  column  supporting  only  a  roof  not 
less  than  one  twentieth  the  average  spacing  nor  less  than  fourteen  inches. 
[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2670.     Unsupported  Length  of  Concrete  Columns. —  (a)     The 

unsupported  length  of  a  column  shall  be  taken  as  the  clear  distance  between 
lateral  supports.  When  the  lateral  support  consists  of  a  floor  or  roof  with 
beams  of  different  depths,  the  height  of  the  column  to  the  bottom  of  the 
deepest  beam  in  a  given  direction  shall  be  used  with  the  thickness  of  the 
column  in  that  direction  in  computing  the  slenderness  ratio.  When  free- 
standing ties  or  struts  are  provided  for  lateral  support,  they  shall  be  adequate 
to  prevent  the  column  from  bending,  and  the  clear  distance  between  supports 
in  any  direction  shall  be  used  with  the  thickness  of  the  column  in  that  direc- 
tion in  computing  the  slenderness  ratio. 

(b)  Concrete  column  capitals  in  flat  slab  construction,  and  brackets  the 
full  width  of  supported  beams  which  are  inclined  at  least  forty-five  degrees 
to  the  column,  may  be  considered  lateral  supports. 

{Sect.  2671.     Design   of  Spirally   Reinforced    Concrete  Columns. — 

(a)  The  maximum  allowable  axial  load,  P,  on  columns  reinforced  with 
longitudinal  bars  and  closely  spaced  spirals  enclosing  a  circular  core  shall  not 
exceed  P  =  0.225  f'c  Ag  +  Asfs.    See  section  2602  for  symbols. 

(b)  The  normal  working  stress  in  the  vertical  column  reinforcement,  f8, 
shall  be  taken  at  40%  of  the  minimum  specification  value  of  the  yield  point; 
viz.  16,000  lbs.  per  sq.  in.  for  intermediate  grade  steel  and  20,000  per  sq.  in. 
for  hard  grade  or  rail  steel.  This  reinforcement  shall  consist  of  at  least  six 
bars  and  the  minimum  diameter  of  the  bars  shall  be  five-eighths  inch  and 
not  less  than  one  per  cent  nor  more  than  eight  per  cent  of  the  gross  concrete 
area. 

(c)  Where  lapped  splices  are  required  in  the  longitudinal  reinforcement, 
the  minimum  amount  of  lap  for  deformed  bars,  where  the  strength  of  the 
concrete  is  3000  lbs.  per  square  inch  or  above,  shall  be  twenty-four  diameters 
of  bar  of  intermediate  grade  steel  and  thirty  diameters  of  bar  of  hard  grade 
steel.  For  bars  of  higher  yield  point,  the  amount  of  lap  shall  be  increased 
in  proportion  to  the  normal  working  stress.  When  the  concrete  strengths 
are  less  than  3000  lbs.  per  square  inch  the  amount  of  lap  shall  be  one-third 
greater  than  the  values  given  in  this  paragraph. 

The  lapped  splices  of  plain  bars  shall  be  at  least  25%  greater  than  that 
given  above  for  deformed  bars. 

Welded  splices  or  other  positive  connections  may  be  used  instead  of  lapped 
splices,  if  approved. 

(217) 


Sees.  2671=2672 

(d)  Spiral  reinforcement  shall  consist  of  evenly  spaced  continuous  spirals 
held  firmly  in  place  and  true  to  line  by  at  least  three  vertical  spacer  bars. 
The  outside  diameter  of  spirals  shall  be  maintained  constant  and  the  ends  of 
the  spiral  wire  shall  be  anchored.  Spiral  wire  may  be  spliced  by  lapping  one 
third  the  circumference  of  the  spiral  and  hooking  the  ends,  or  by  welding. 
The  spacing  of  the  spirals  shall  not  exceed  one  sixth  the  diameter  of  the 
core  nor  three  inches.  The  ratio  of  spiral  reinforcement,  p',  shall  not  be 
less  than 

/Ag         \  f'e 

p'  =  0.45  I 1  1  — 

\AC         /  f'B 

where  p'  is  the  ratio  of  volume  of  spiral  reinforcement  to  the  volume  of  the 
concrete  core  (out  to  out  of  spirals). 

Ag 

—  is  ratio  of  gross  area  to  core  area  of  column. 
Ac 

*  s  is  useful  limit  stress  of  spiral  reinforcement  to  be  taken  as  40,000  lbs. 
per  square  inch  for  hot  rolled  of  intermediate  grade,  50,000  lbs.  per  square 
inch  for  hard  grade  and  60,000  lbs.  for  cold  drawn  wire. 

(e)  Spiral  and  longitudinal  reinforcement  shall  be  protected  by  a  covering 
of  concrete  cast  monolithic  with  the  core  not  less  than  one  and  one  half 
inches  thick. 

(f)  In  columns  supporting  a  beam-and-slab  floor  or  roof,  the  spiral  rein- 
forcement shall  extend  from  the  floor  below  at  least  to  one  and  one  half  inches 
above  the  bottom  of  the  lowest  beam  of  the  floor  or  roof  above,  which  frames 
into  the  column. 

(g)  In  columns  supporting  a  flat  slab  floor  or  roof  the  spiral  reinforcement 

shall  extend  from  the  floor  at  least  to  mid-height  of  the  concrete  column 

capital  above. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

*Sect.   2672.     Design   of  Tied   Reinforced   Concrete   Columns. —  (a) 

The  maximum  allowable  axial  load,  P,  on  columns  reinforced  with  longitu- 
dinal bars  and  separate  lateral  ties  shall  not  exceed 
P  =  0.18f'cAg  +  0.8A3fs 

See  section  2671  (b)  for  value  of  fs. 

(b)  The  minimum  ratio  of  longitudinal  reinforcement  shall  not  be  less 
than  one  per  cent  nor  more  than  four  per  cent  of  the  gross  concrete  area, 
also  at  least  four  bars  shall  be  used,  of  minimum  diameter  of  five  eighths 
inch.  Clear  distance  of  the  face  of  each  bar  to  the  face  of  the  column  shall 
be  one  and  one-half  inches  plus  the  thickness  of  the  column  tie.  Corner 
rods  in  columns  shall  not  be  nearer  to  either  adjacent  surface  than  two  inches 
plus  the  thickness  of  the  column  tie. 

(c)  Lateral  ties  shall  be  at  least  one  quarter  inch  in  diameter.  They 
shall  be  spaced  not  more  than  twelve  inches  apart.  In  columns  of  rec- 
tangular section,  containing  more  than  four  longitudinal  bars  cross  ties  shall 
be  arranged  to  afford  support  to  all  bars. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  J 

(218) 


Sees.  2673=2675 

*Sect.  2673.  Long  Columns. —  (a)  The  axial  load  on  columns  which 
are  longer  than  ten  times  the  least  dimension  shall  not  be  greater  than  — 

h 
P'  =  P  (1.3-0.03-  ) 
d' 

(b)     The  maximum  allowable  load  P'  on  eccentrically  loaded  columns  in 
h 
which  -  exceeds  10  is  given  by  the  formula  in  paragraph  (a)  in  which  P  is 
d' 

the  allowable  eccentrically  applied  load  on  the  short  column.  In  long  columns 
subjected  to  definite  bending  stresses,  as  determined  by  Sections  2674,  2675, 
2676,  the  ratio  shall  not  exceed  20. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  } 

fSection  2674.  Bending  in  Concrete  Columns. —  (a)  The  bending 
moments  in  the  columns  of  all  reinforced  concrete  structures  shall  be  deter- 
mined on  the  basis  of  loading  conditions  and  restraint  and  shall  be  provided 
for  in  the  design.  When  the  stiffness  and  strength  of  the  columns  are  utilized 
to  reduce  the  moments  in  beams,  girders  and  slabs,  as  in  the  case  of  rigid 
frames,  or  in  other  forms  of  continuous  construction  wherein  column  moments 
are  unavoidable,  they  shall  be  provided  for  in  the  design.  In  building  frames, 
particular  attention  shall  be  given  to  the  effect  of  unbalanced  floor  loads  on 
both  exterior  and  interior  columns  and  of  eccentric  loading  due  to  other  cases. 
Wall  columns  shall  be  designed  to  resist  moments  produced  by 

1.  Loads  on  all  floors  of  the  building. 

2.  Loads  on  a  single  exterior  bay  at  two  adjacent  floor  levels,  or 

3.  Loads  on  a  single  exterior  bay  at  one  floor  level." 

(b)     Resistance  to  bending  moments  at  any  floor  level  shall  be  provided  by 

distributing  the  moment  between  the  columns  immediately  above  and  below 

the  given  floor  in  proportion  to  their  relative  stiffness  and  condition  of  restraint. 

At  the  roof  the  moments  shall  be  provided  for  in  the  section  of  the  column 

below. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

|Sect.  2675.  Combined  Axial  and  Bending  Stresses. —  (a)  In  rein- 
forced concrete  columns  subjected  to  bending  stresses,  recognized  methods  of 
analysis  shall  be  followed  in  calculating  the  stresses  due  to  combined  axial 
load  and  bending.  The  maximum  fiber  stress  in  compression  and  in  the  case 
of  large  eccentricities  of  loading  the  tensile  stresses  in  the  vertical  bars,  as  given 
in  this  Part  will  govern  the  design. 

(b)  For  designs  where  the  eccentricity  is  less  than  1/2  the  overall 
column  width,  and  the  value  of  pgn  is  0.3  or  more,  the  following  formula  shall 
be  used  to  calculate  the  combined  fiber  stress  in  compression. 


fc  = 


AE  1  +  (n-1)  pg 
(219) 


Sees.  2675=2676 

where  e  is  the  eccentricity  of  resultant  load,  measured  from  the  gravity  axis.. 
c'  is  the  distance  from  the  gravity  axis  to  the  extreme  fiber  in  com- 
pression. 
R  is  the  radius  of  gyration  of  the  equivalent  concrete  section, 
n  is  as  given  in  section  2629. 
t'  is  the  overall  depth  of  the  section. 
The  other  symbols  are  as  given  in  section  2602,  paragraph  (b). 

ec'  6e 

The  term  —  mav  be  replaced  by  the  value  —  for  rectangular  columns  and 

R2  t' 

8e 

—  for  round  columns, 
t' 

(c)     For  other  limitations  than  mentioned  in  paragraph  (b)  more  accurate 

methods  of  design  shall  be  used  to  insure  that  the  allowable  stresses  are  not 

exceeded. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943.  ch.  8] 

*Sect.   2676.     Allowable   Combined   Axial    and    Bending  Stresses. — 

(a)  For  spiral  and  tied  columns,  eccentrically  loaded  or  otherwise  subjected 
to  combined  axial  compression  and  flexural  stress,  the  maximum  allowable 
compressive  fiber  stress  shall  not  exceed  fc  in 


1  +  - 

r  R2 


fe   =  fa- 

i  +  cg 

where  fa  is  the  average  allowable  stress  on  an  equivalent  axially  loaded  con- 
crete column. 
C  is  the  ratio  of  fa  to  the  allowable  fiber  stress  for  members  in  flexure; 
This 

0.225  f'c  +  f3pg 

fa  =  for  spiral  columns. 

1  +  (n-1)  pg 


[0.225  f'c  +  f8pg  1 
1  +  (n-1)  pg  J 


fa  =  0.8  | I  for  tied  columns. 

g  J 

fa 

c  = 


0.45  f'c 


(b)  The  allowable  tensile  stress  in  the  longitudinal  reinforcement  shall 
equal  that  specified  for  flexural  members,  provided  however  that  splices 
in  the  tensile  steel  at  or  near  the  section  of  maximum  column  moment  are 
capable  of  developing  fully  the  yield  point  strength  of  the  reinforcement. 

(c)  When  columns  are  subjected  to  wind  stresses  in  addition  to  combined 
axial  loads  and  bending,  the  column  section  need  not  be  increased  unless  the 
allowable  stress  given  in  paragraph  (a)  of  this  section  is  exceeded  by  more  than 

one-third. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  J 

(220) 


Sees.  2677-2679 

*Sect.  2677.  Combination  Columns.  —  (a)  The  axial  load  on  combi- 
nation columns,  in  which  structural  steel  columns  of  rolled  or  built-up  section 
wrapped  with  No.  10  gage  wire  spaced  four  inches  on  centers  or  its  equivalent 
are  encased  in  concrete  not  less  than  two  inches  thick  over  all  of  the  metal, 
except  rivet  heads  and  connections,  shall  not  exceed 


P    =    Arfr 


f'+— 1 

L  100Ar  J 


where  Ac  is  the  total  area  of  the  concrete  =  Ag-Ar 

Ar  is  the  cross-sectional  area  of  the  steel  column 

f 't  is  the  allowable  stress  for  unencased  steel  column,  as  allowed  in 
Part  28. 

(b)  The  concrete  shall  be  at  least  equal  in  quality  to  two  thousand  pound 
concrete  as  specified  in  section  twenty-six  hundred  and  ten. 

(c)  Stress  allowed  in  paragraph  (a)  shall  be  allowed  in  compression 
members  of  trusses,  if  the  requirements  of  this  section  are  fulfilled. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  2678.  Concrete  Walls. —  (a)  Reinforced  concrete  walls  shall 
have  at  least  the  thickness  specified  in  Part  14.  Reinforced  concrete  walls 
shall  be  reinforced  in  two  directions  at  right  angles  by  steel  reinforcement 
having  an  effective  area  in  each  direction  of  not  less  than  (0.0025)  times  the 
cross-sectional  area  of  the  concrete.  In  walls  less  than  six  inches  thick  the 
reinforcement  may  be  placed  at  mid-thickness  of  the  wall  unless  calculated 
bending  requires  it  to  be  placed  near  one  face.  In  walls  six  inches  or  more  in 
thickness,  not  less  than  half  the  steel  required  by  this  paragraph  shall  be 
placed  as  close  to  each  face  of  the  wall  as  requirements  for  fire  and  rust  pro- 
tection will  allow.  Such  steel  reinforcement  shall  be  in  the  form  of  reinforcing 
bars  not  less  than  three-eighths  inch  in  diameter  and  spaced  not  over  eighteen 
inches  apart  or  of  approved  wire  mesh. 

(b)  Protective  covering  for  reinforcing  shall  be  as  required  in  section 
2627  and  Part  22,  except  as  provided  in  paragraph  (a). 

(c)  Provide  construction  joints  and  expansion  joints  for  walls,  copings 
and  balustrades,  together  with  drainage  and  weep  holes  as  required  by  the 
commissioner. 

(d)  The  capacity  of  a  reinforced  concrete  wall  to  support  a  vertical  load 
shall  be  computed  in  the  same  manner  as  specified  in  sections  twenty-six 
hundred  and  seventy-two,  twenty-six  hundred  and  seventy-three,  and  twenty- 
six  hundred  and  seventy-four  for  columns  with  lateral  ties.  The  vertical 
reinforcement  shall  not  be  assumed  to  contribute  to  the  capacity  of  the  wall 
unless  it  conforms  to  the  requirements  for  longitudinal  reinforcement  in 
columns  and  is  stayed  by  lateral  ties  perpendicular  to  the  wall. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

JSect.  2679.  Sloped  or  Stepped  Concrete  Footings.  —  (a)  Footings 
shall  be  designed  to  sustain  the  applied  loads  without  exceeding  the  allowable 
working  stresses  in  this  part.  Allowable  bond  stress  shall  be  reduced  25% 
from  the  stresses  allowed  in  section  2629  in  all  tension  regions  requiring 
moment  reinforcement  in  more  than  one  direction. 

(b)  Footings  may  have  sloped  or  stepped  tops  provided  the  thickness  of 
the  footing  above  the  reinforcement  shall  not  be  less  than  six  inches  for  footings 

(22U 


Sees.  2679=2680 

on  soil,  nor  less  than  nine  inches  for  footings  on  piles,  also  plain  concrete 
footings  may  have  sloped  or  stepped  tops  provided  the  thickness  is  not  less 
than  twelve  inches. 

(c)     Concrete  in  reinforced  footings  shall  be  proportioned  for  a  strength 
of  at  least  eighteen  hundred  pounds  per  square  inch. 
[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  S  } 

*Sect.  2680.     Bending  in  Concrete  Footings.   (Critical  Sections.)  — 

(a)  The  critical  section  for  bending  in  a  concrete  footing  which  supports  a 
concrete  column  or  pedestal,  shall  be  considered  to  be  at  the  face  of  the  column 
or  pedestal.  Where  a  steel  or  cast  iron  column  base  rests  on  a  concrete 
footing,  moments  in  the  footing  shall  be  considered  at  the  middle  and  at  the 
edge  of  the  base  and  the  larger  one  shall  be  used  in  the  design.  Loads  shall 
be  considered  as  uniformly  distributed  over  the  column.  In  the  case  of 
columns  other  than  square  or  rectangular  the  critical  section  shall  be  taken 
at  the  side  of  a  concentric  square  of  equal  area.  For  concrete  footings  under 
masonry  walls,  moments  in  the  footing  shall  be  taken  midway  between  the 
middle  and  the  edge  of  the  wall. 

(b)  The  bending  moment  at  a  critical  section  shall  be  computed  from  all 
the  forces  acting  on  the  footing  on  one  side  of  the  section  (excluding  the  weight 
of  the  footing).  Critical  sections  for  bond  and  shear  shall  be  taken  for  the 
same  loading  and  same  plane  as  for  bending.  Bonds  shall  also  be  investigated 
at  planes  where  changes  in  concrete  section  or  reinforcement  occur.  The 
critical  section  for  diagonal  tension  in  footings  on  soil  shall  be  considered  as  the 
concentric  vertical  section  through  the  footing  at  a  distance  d  from  each  face 
of  the  column  pedestal  or  wall.  This  depth  d  should  be  measured  from  the 
top  of  the  section  to  the  plane  of  the  centroid  of  longitudinal  reinforcement. 
The  critical  section  for  diagonal  tension  for  footing  supported  on  piles  should 
be  considered  as  the  concentric  vertical  section  through  the  footing  at  a 

d 
distance  —  from  each  face  of  the  column,  pedestal  or  wall,  and  any  piles 

2 
whose  centers  are  at,  or  outside  this  section  should  be  included  in  computing 
the  shear. 

(c)  Shear  in  footings  shall  be  computed  as  specified  in  section  2642. 

(d)  For  reinforced  concrete  columns,  the  critical  section  for  transverse 
bending  should  be  taken  at  the  faces  of  the  columns  or  pedestals.  For  footings 
under  metallic  column  bases,  the  critical  section  should  be  assumed  midway 
between  the  face  of  the  column  and  the  edge  of  the  metallic  base.  The  trans- 
verse reinforcement  should  be  divided  into  groups  proportionate  in  sectional 
area  to  the  column  loads.  The  transverse  reinforcement  at  each  column 
should  be  placed  uniformly  within  a  band  having  a  width  not  greater  than  the 
width  of  the  column  plus  twice  the  effective  depth  of  the  footing.  Longi- 
tudinal reinforcement  should  be  distributed  over  the  whole  width. 

The  critical  sections  for  diagonal  tension  in  combined  footings  should  be 
taken  at  the  faces  of  the  supported  members  for  all  beam  elements  and  also 
for  all  projecting  cantilevers. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

(222) 


Sees.  2681=2683 

*Sect.  2681.  Plain  Concrete  Footings.— (a)  The  critical  section  of 
plain  concrete  footings  shall  be  computed  and  cast  as  a  monolithic  section  of  the 
entire  width  and  depth  measured  from  a  plane  two  inches  above  the  bottom 
of  the  footing.  The  maximum  tensile  fiber  stress  in  the  concrete  shall  not 
exceed  0.025  of  the  ultimate  compression  strength  of  the  concrete.  The 
average  shearing  stress  shall  not  exceed  0.02  of  the  ultimate  compressive 
strength  of  the  concrete,  computed  on  a  concentric  vertical  section  through  the 
footing  at  a  distance  (d'-2)  inches  from  each  face  of  the  column,  pedestal  or 
wall,  excluding  two  inches  of  depth  nearest  the  bottom. 

(b)     The  area  of  the  top  of  the  footing  shall  not  be  less  than  the  amoun  t 
given  by  formula  section  2682. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  2682.  Bearing  on  Concrete  Footing. — (a)  The  compressive 
stress  in  the  longitudinal  reinforcement  at  the  base  of  a  reinforced  concrete 
column  shall  be  transferred  to  a  pedestal  or  to  a  footing  by  extending  the  bars 
into  the  pedestal  or  footing  or  by  use  of  dowels.  There  shall  be  at  least  one 
dowel  for  each  column  bar,  and  the  total  sectional  area  of  the  dowels  shall  be 
not  less  than  the  sectional  area  of  the  longitudinal  reinforcement  in  the  column. 
The  dowels  or  column  bars  shall  extend  into  the  column  and  into  the  pedestal 
or  footing  the  distance  required  to  transfer  to  the  concrete,  by  allowable  bond 
stress,  their  full  working  strength.  Hooks  shall  not  be  considered  as  adding 
to  bond  resistance  in  compression.  The  unit  compressive  stress  on  the  top 
of  the  pedestal  or  footing  directly  under  the  column  or  base  shall  not  be 
greater  than  that  determined  by  the  formula 

V 


16 


Kl 


nor  greater,  than  (0.375  f'c)  unless  the  pier  pedestal  or  footing  is  reinforced 
laterally  as  provided  in  paragraph  (b). 

(b)     When  lateral  reinforcement  in  the  form  of  a  spiral  or  hoops  is  provided 
in  the  pedestal  or  footing  the  unit  stress  in  bearing  for  the  core  area  may  be 
increased  to  (1  -f-  2.5  np')  times  that  allowed  for  plain  concrete,  but  no  area 
outside  the  outer  face  of  the  spiral  or  hoops  shall  be  considered. 
[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  } 

{Sect.  2683.  Pedestals  — ■  Plain  Concrete. — (a)  The  compressive 
unit  stress  on  the  gross  area  of  a  concentrically  loaded  pedestal  or  the  upper 
surface  of  a  pedestal  footing  shall  not  exceed  0.25  f'c. 

(b)  The  depth  and  width  of  a  pedestal  or  pedestal  footing  shall  be  deter- 
mined by  consideration  of  shear  and  bending  stresses  as  given  in  section 
2681.  However,  in  no  case  shall  the  depth  be  greater  than  three  times  its 
least  width. 

(c)  A  pedestal  or  pedestal  footing  supported  directly  on  piles  shall  have  a 
mat  of  reinforcing,  of  cross-sectional  area  not  less  than  0.20  square  inch  per 
foot  of  width  in  each  direction,  placed  three  inches  above  the  top  of  the  piles. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

(223) 


Sec.  2701 

PART  27.* 
PRECAST   GYPSUM   CONCRETE. 

Section 

2701  —  Precast  Gypsum  Concrete. 

Section  2701.  Precast  Gypsum  Concrete.  —  (a)  Precast  gypsum 
concrete  units  may  be  used  for  floor  construction  and  shall  be  of  uniform 
thickness  except  for  rabbets  at  support  and  shall  be  solid;  such  units  may  be 
used  for  roof  construction  and  shall  be  of  uniform  thickness,  whether  solid 
or  hollow,  or  recessed  on  the  under  side.  The  span  of  precast  gypsum  con- 
crete shall  not  exceed  four  feet  in  floors  and  six  feet  in  roofs  except  in  so-called 
suspension  construction  in  which  the  span  for  floors  shall  not  exceed  six 
feet  and  in  roofs  shall  not  exceed  eight  feet.  For  the  purpose  of  this  section 
any  span  over  three  feet  shall  be  called  long  span. 

(b)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  paragraph  (c)  of  this  section,  precast 
gypsum  concrete  units  shall  have  not  less  than  the  following  thicknesses :  — 

(1)  Solid  units  in  roofs  shall  be  not  less  than  two  inches  thick,  nor  if 
long  span,  less  than  three  inches  thick. 

(2)  Solid  units  in  floors  shall  be  not  less  than  two  and  one  half  inches 
thick,  nor,  if  long  span,  less  than  four  inches  thick. 

(3)  Hollow  units  in  roofs  shall  be  not  less  than  three  inches  nor  the  shell 
in  compression  less  than  three  fourths  inch  thick;  if  long  span,  the  units 
shall  be  not  less  than  five  inches  thick  nor  the  shell  in  compression  less 
than  one  and  three  eighths  inches  thick. 

(4)  Recessed  units  in  roofs  shall  be  not  less  than  five  inches  thick  nor 
the  panel  less  than  one  and  three  eighths  inches  thick. 

(c)  Precast  solid  reinforced  gypsum  concrete  units  not  more  than  fifteen 
inches  wide  and  bound  on  the  long  edges  with  structural  or  pressed  sheet 
steel  of  approved  design  anchored  to  the  units  shall  be  not  less  than  two  inches 
thick.  If  the  length  of  units  is  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  times  the  span 
and  the  steel  bearing  on  the  edges  is  designed  to  interlock  with  adjoining 
units  in  the  manner  of  tongue  and  groove,  and  if  of  sufficient  strength  to 
transmit  the  load  on  one  unit  to  adjoining  units,  the  end  joints  may  be  stag- 
gered at  random  provided  they  are  not  less  than  two  feet  apart  and  the  con- 
struction may  be  designed  as  continuous. 

(d)  Precast  gypsum  concrete  units  for  floor  and  roof  construction  shall 
be  reinforced  and  unless  the  shape  or  marking  of  the  unit  is  such  as  to  ensure 
its  being  placed  right  side  up,  the  reinforcing  shall  be  symmetrical  so  that 
the  unit  can  support  its  load  either  side  up. 

(e)  Precast  gypsum  concrete  units  shall  be  designed  in  accordance  with 
conditions  outlined  in  paragraph  (g)  below. 

(f)  Precast  gypsum  concrete  units  shall  not  be  used  structurally  in  floors 
or  roofs  until  the  manufacturer  thereof  has  submitted  satisfactory  evidence 
of  their  quality  and  the  commissioner  has  given  his  approval.  Approval 
shall  be  conditioned  upon  such  requirements  as  to  design,  materials,  methods 
of  manufacture,  erection  and  support  as  the  commissioner  shall  determine. 

(224) 


Sec.  2701 

(g)  The  basis  of  design  and  materials  shall  be  consistent  with  the  following 
requirements  to  qualify  for  approval : 

( 1 )  Precast  gypsum  concrete  shall  contain  not  more  than  three  per  cent 
wood  chips,  shavings  or  fibre  by  weight  of  dry  materials  before  mixing. 

(2)  Precast  gypsum  concrete  shall  have  a  minimum  strength  of  one 
thousand  pounds  per  square  inch. 

(3)  In  designing  the  precast  gypsum  concrete  the  modulus  of  elasticity 
shall  be  considered  as  six  hundred  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch. 

(4)  In  design  of  structural  members  of  reinforced  gypsum  concrete 
the  unit  stress  in  the  concrete  shall  not  exceed  the  following  allowable 
values : 

Maximum  unit  compression  in  bending 0 .  25  f g 

Axial  compression  or  bearing 0 .  20  f g 

Bond  on  plain  bars  or  wires 0 .  02  f g 

Bond  on  deformed  bars  or  wire  mesh 0 .  04  f g 

Shear  (straight  rods  or  wires) .        .  0.02  fg 

Shear  (reinforcement  anchored) 0.03  fg 

In  this  table  (fg)  indicates  the  ultimate  compressive  strength  of  the  gypsum 
concrete  as  approved  by  paragraph  (f)  of  this  section. 

Unit  stress  in  steel  reinforcement  shall  not  exceed  the  values  allowed  in 
Part  26. 

(5)  Fire  protection  coverage  for  steel  reinforcement  in  gypsum  shall  be 
limited  to  a  minimum  of  one-half  inch  in  thickness. 

(6)  In  no  case  shall  gypsum  concrete  be  used  for  a  wearing  surface  in 
gypsum  construction. 

(7)  Gypsum  concrete  shall  not  be  used  in  floors  of  garages,  dance  halls, 
gymnasiums,  armories  or  floors  used  for  any  other  purpose  where  subject 
to  extreme  vibration,  impact,  or  heavy,  moving  load  concentrations. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 


(225) 


Sees.  2801=2802 


PART  28. 

STEEL  AND    IRON. 

Section 

2801  —  Design  of  Steel  and  Iron. 

2802  —  Quality  of  Steel  and  Iron. 

2803  —  Allowable  Stresses  in  Structural  Steel. 

2804  —  Allowable  Stresses  in  Cast  Steel. 

2805  —  Allowable  Stresses  in  Cast  Iron. 

2806  —  Steel  Tension  Members. 

2807  —  Steel  Columns. 

2808  —  Steel  Beams  and  Girders. 

2809  —  Steel  Connections  and  Details. 

2810  —  Cast  Iron  Columns. 

2811  —  Concrete  Filled  Pipe  Columns. 

2812  —  Stresses  in  Steel  Due  to  Wind. 

2813  —  Thickness  of  Structural  Steel. 

2814  —  Expansion  and  Contraction  in  Steel  Frames. 

2815  —  Workmanship  in  Steel  Construction. 

2816  —  Painting  Steel  and  Iron. 

2817  —  Erection  of  Steel. 

2818  — Steel  Joists. 

2819  —  Column  Bases  of  Steel  and  Iron. 
[2820  —  Steel  Deck  Floors  and  Roofs.] 

Section  2801.  Design  of  Steel  and  Iron. — Structures  of  steel  and 
iron  shall  be  designed  by  methods  admitting  of  rational  analysis  according  to 
established  principles  of  mechanics,  supplemented  by  the  assumptions  herein 
specified,  to  support  the  loads  and  withstand  the  forces  to  which  they  are 
subject  without  exceeding  the  stresses  allowed  in  this  part  for  the  various 
members  and  the  materials  thereof. 

*Sect.  2802.  Quality  of  Steel  and  Iron.'— 3(a)  The  materials  of  steel 
and  iron  construction  shall  conform  to  the  specifications  of  the  American 
Society  for  Testing  Materials  as  follows: — 

(1)  Structural  steel  to  Standard   Specifications  for  Steel  for  Bridges 
and  Buildings. 

(2)  Rivet  steel  to  Standard  Specifications  for  Structural  Rivet  Steel. 

(3)  Cast  steel  to  Specifications  for  Carbon  Steel  Castings. 

(4)  Cast  Iron  to  Specifications  for  Gray  Iron  Castings. 

(b)  Special  steels,  alloys,  high  carbon  steel  and  other  metals  may  be  used 
jn  connection  with  steel  and  iron  construction  with  the  approval  of  the  com- 
missioner and  subject  to  such  conditions  as  he  shall  specify. 

(c)  Structural  steel  members  installed  in  pre-code  buildings  prior  to  the 
year  1924  shall  not  be  stressed  in  excess  of  eight-tenths  of  the  allowable 
stresses  specified  in  this  part.  Similar  members  installed  after  1924  and  prior 
to  the  year  1943  shall  not  be  stressed  in  excess  of  nine-tenths  of  the  allowable 
stresses  specified  in  this  part. 

(d)  Structural  steel  which  has  previously  been  used  in  a  building  or  other 

(226) 


Sees.  2802=2803 

structure  or  which  has  been  fabricated  for  such  use,  shall  not  be  used  in 
another  building  or  structure  except  with  the  approval  of  the  commissioner 
and  under  such  conditions  as  he  may  in  each  case  specify.  Holes  in  second- 
hand material  shall  not  be  filled  in  such  manner  as  will  tend  to  hide  their 
existence,  and  such  filling,  if  discovered,  shall  justify  the  commissioner  in 
refusing  to  allow  the  use  of  the  material. 

(e)  The  commissioner  may  require  reasonable  tests  from  time  to  time  of 
steel  and  iron  to  determine  its  quality  and  whether  it  conforms  to  the  require- 
ments of  this  chapter. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  2803.  Allowable  Stresses  in  Structural  Steel.  —  (a)  The  unit 
stress  in  members  of  rolled  structural  steel,  except  the  stress  due  to  wind, 
shall  not  exceed  the  following  allowable  stresses,  in  pounds  per  square  inch: — 

(1)  Tension,  on  net  section 20,000 

(2)  Compression,  in  short  members  where  lateral  deflection  is 
prevented 20,000 

(3)  Compression  in  columns  and  compression  members  axially 
loaded;  on  the  gross  cross  section: 

L 

where  values  of  ~  is  not  greater  than  120  for  main 

r  L2 

members 17,000  —  0.485  — 

r* 
L 
and  values  of  ~  greater  than  120  but  not  over  200 
r 

for  secondary  members 18,000 

L2 
1  + 


18,000  r2 


where  L  is  the  unbraced  length  of  the  member  and  r 
is  the  corresponding  radius  of  gyration  of  the  section 
both  in  inches. 

(4)     Bending,  maximum  stress  on  the  net  section : 
where  lateral  deflection  is  prevented  or  where  L  is  not 

b 
more  than  15 20,000 

L 

and  values  ~  is  greater  than  15,  but  not  greater  than  40 
b 

with  maximum  at  20,000  # 22,500 


1  + 


L2 


where  L  is  the  unbraced  length  of  the  compression 
flange,  and  b  is  the  width  of  the  compression  flange 
both  in  inches. 

(227) 


1,800  bs 


Sees.  2803-2804 

(5)     Shear,  on  the  gross  area  of  the  webs  of  beams 
and  girders: 

h 

where  -  is  not  more  than  60 13,000 

t 
h 

and  where  -  is  greater  than  60 18,000 

t  

h2 
1  + 


7,200  t2 

where  h  is  the  height  of  the  web  in  the  clear  between  flanges  or  length  in 
the  clear  between  stiffeners,  whichever  is  the  lesser  dimension,  and  t  is  the 
thickness  of  the  web  both  in  inches. 

(b)  The  bearing  stress  in  members  of  rolled  structural  steel  on  pins,  rivets 
and  bolts  with  which  they  are  connected,  except  the  stress  due  to  wind,  shall 
not  exceed  the  following  allowable  values  in  pounds  per  square  inch: — 

Bearing.  Double  Shear.         Single  Shear. 

Rivets,  power-driven .  . 40,000  32,000 

Turned  bolts  in  reamed  or  drilled  holes 40,000  32,000 

Unfinished  bolts  and  hand-driven  rivets 25,000  20,000 

Pins 32,000 


(c)  The  unit  stress  in  pins,  rivets  and  bolts  with  which  rolled  structural 
steel  members  are  connected,  except  the  stress  due  to  wind,  shall  not  exceed 
the  following  allowable  stresses  in  pounds  per  square  inch: — 

(1)  Shear: 

Pins  .        . .  .        .  15,000 

Rivets,  power-driven 15,000 

Turned  bolts  in  reamed  holes 15,000 

Rivets,  hand-driven 10,000 

Unfinished  bolts      .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .  10,000 

(2)  Tension: 

Rivets .      15,000 

Bolts  and  threaded  rods  on  area  at  root  of  thread   .       .      16,000 

(3)  Bending  in  pins 30,000 

(d)  The  bearing  on  expansion  rollers  in  pounds  per  linear  inch  shall  not 
exceed  six  hundred  times  the  diameter  in  inches  of  the  roller. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2804.  Allowable  Stresses  in  Cast  Steel. — The  unit  tension, 
compression  and  shear  in  cast  steel,  except  the  stress  due  to  wind,  shall  not 
exceed  sixteen  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch. 

(228) 


Sees.  2805=2807 

Sect.  2805.  Allowable  Stresses  in  Cast  Iron. — The  unit  stress  in  cast 
iron,  except  that  due  to  wind,  shall  not  exceed  the  following  allowable  stresses 
in  pounds  per  square  inch: — ■ 

(1)  Tension        .        .    ■     . 3,000 

(2)  Compression 10,000 

(3)  Compression  in  columns  axially  loaded         .        .  9,000 — 40  L 

r 

in  which  (L)  is  the  unbraced  length 

(r)  is  the  corresponding  least  radius  of  gyra- 
tion of  the  column  section. 

(4)  Bending: 

In  tension  flange 3,000 

In  compression  flange 10,000 

Sect.  2806.  Steel  Tension  Members. — (a)  Structural  steel  members 
and  their  connections,  subject  to  reversal  of  tension  and  compression  due  to 
the  action  of  live  loads,  shall  be  designed  to  sustain  either  stress  with  half 
the  other  stress  added,  whichever  requires  the  larger  section.  If  the  reversal 
of  stress  is  due  to  the  action  of  wind,  the  member  shall  be  designed  for  the 
stress  requiring  the  larger  section  and  the  connections  shall  be  designed  for 
the  larger  stress. 

(b)  In  calculating  the  net  section  of  tension  members,  the  area  of  rivet 
holes  shall  be  deducted  assuming  the  diameter  of  the  hole  to  be  at  least  one 
eighth  inch  larger  than  the  nominal  size  of  the  rivet. 

(c)  Pin-connected  tension  members  shall  have  an  area  of  cross-section 
through  the  pin  hole  at  least  twenty-five  per  cent  in  excess  of  the  net  area 
required  in  the  member,  and  a  net  area  of  cross-section  back  of  the  pin  hole 
at  least  equal  to  the  net  area  required  on  one  side  of  the  pin  hole. 

L 
*Sect.  2807.     Steel  Columns. — (a)     The  ratio  ( — )  shall  not  exceed  one 

r 
hundred  and  twenty  for  columns  in  buildings  and  main  compression  members 
in  trusses  and  frames;  nor  two  hundred  for  bracing  and  other  secondary 
members. 

(b)  In  structural  steel  columns  and  compression  members  of  trusses, 
subject  to  eccentric  loads  or  to  bending  other  than  that  incidental  to  axial 
loading,  the  maximum  unit  compression  shall  not  exceed  twenty  thousand 
pounds  per  square  inch — 

(1)  When  calculated  by  a  method  which  takes  full  account  of  deflection 
and  buckling  in  any  direction;  or, — 

(2)  When  the  applied  bending  is  in  the  plane  of  a  principal  axis  and  the 
stress  is  calculated  by  the  following  formula: — 

P  L2  Mc 

-  (1  + )  + 

A  18,000  r2  P  S2 

I 

10  E 

(229) 


Sees.  2807=2808 

in  which  (M)  is  the  applied  bending. 

(S)  is  the  length  of  column  unbraced  in  the  plane  of  the  bending. 
(I)  is  the  moment  of  inertia  about  a  center  of  gravity  axis  per- 
pendicular to  the  plane  of  the  bending, 
(c)  is  the  distance  from  that  axis  to  the  remote  fibre  in  compression. 

L 

(■ — )  is  the  slenderness  ratio  at  right  angles  to  the  plane  of  the  applied 
r         bending. 

(E)  is  the  modulus  of  elasticit}^  of  steel. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.   2808.     Steel    Beams  and  Girders.  —  (a)     In  rolled  steel  beams 

Li 

and  girders,  whether  of  solid  section  or  built  up,  the  ratio  ( — )  shall  not 

b 
exceed  forty. 

(b)  The  compression  flanges  of  beams,  girders,  lintels  and  similar  members 
in  bending  shall  in  general  be  braced  laterally,  by  the  floor  or  roof  construc- 
tion or  framing,  or  by  struts  or  tie  rods.  Steel  joists,  floor  slabs  or  other 
construction,  to  be  considered  effective  bracing  shall  have  positive  connection 
to  the  beam  or  girder  and  friction  shall  not  be  relied  upon.  Standard  dia- 
phragm separators,  joining  two  members  in  bending,  or  steel  pipe  separators 
with  concrete  filling,  shall  be  considered  effective  lateral  support  to  each  of 
the  members. 

(c)  The  span  of  beams  and  girders  shall  be  taken  as  the  distance  from 
center  to  center  of  bearings.  If  a  beam  or  girder  is  connected  to  the  face  of  a 
flange  or  web  of  a  column,  the  span  shall  be  taken  to  such  face. 

(d)  In  calculations  for  stress  due  to  bending  in  built  up  beams  and  girders, 
and  in  rolled  sections  with  punched  flanges,  the  moment  of  inertia  and  section 
modulus  of  net  sections  shall  be  used. 

(e)  Where  beams  or  girders  are  composed  of  two  or  more  I-beams  or 
channels,  they  shall  be  so  connected  as  properly  to  distribute  the  load  to  each 
member. 

(f)  Beams,  girders,  and  trusses  of  steel  shall  be  so  designed  that  the 
deflection  under  load  shall  not  exceed  one  three  hundred  and  sixtieth  of  the 
span.  The  modulus  of  elasticity  of  rolled  steel  shall  be  taken  as  twenty-nine 
million  pounds  per  square  inch. 

(g)  Beams  and  girders  subject  to  the  thrust  of  floor  arches,  purlins  or 
inclined  roofs,  crane  runway  girders  and  other  members  subject  to  bending 
in  more  than  one  plane  shall  be  so  designed  that  the  maximum  unit  stress 
due  to  combined  loading  shall  not  exceed  the  stress  allowed  in  this  chapter, 
except  as  provided  in  section  twenty-eight  hundred  and  twelve.  Eccentric 
loads  shall  be  provided  for. 

(h)  Beams  which  are  wholly  encased,  as  required  for  fireproofing,  in  the 
concrete  of  a  reinforced  concrete  floor  or  roof  may  be  designed  for  bending  as 
composite  beams,  as  provided  in  Part  26. 

(i)  Plate  girder  webs  shall  have  a  thickness  not  less  than  one  one  hundred 
and  sixtieth  of  the  clear  distance  between  flanges,  nor  less  than  one  fourth 
inch. 

(230) 


Sees,  2808=2809 

(j)  Web  splices  shall  have  at  least  one  plate  on  each  side  of  the  web 
riveted  thereto  in  such  manner  that  the  shear  is  transmitted;  and  bending, 
if  the  web  is  designed  to  resist  bending. 

(k)  Stiffeners  shall  be  provided  on  both  sides  of  the  webs  of  plate  girders 
over  end  bearings  and  where  necessary  at  points  of  concentrated  loads, 
designed  to  transmit  the  reactions  and  loads  to  the  web.  Bearing  stiffeners 
shall  not  be  crimped  over  flange  angles,  and  shall  be  fitted  to  the  flange  angles 
where  they  bear.  Where  the  ends  of  stiffener  angles  are  chamfered  to  clear 
the  fillets  of  flange  angles,  the  outstanding  legs  only  shall  be  computed  in 
bearing  and  the  average  unit  stress  in  bearing  shall  not  exceed  twenty-seven 
thousand  pounds  per  square  inch.  Where  stiffener  angles  are  raised  from  the 
web  on  fillers  to  clear  the  fillets  of  flange  angles  and  the  whole  of  the  stiffener 
angle  is  fitted  in  bearing,  the  average  unit  stress  shall  not  exceed  eighteen 
thousand  pounds  per  square  inch. 

(1)  Fitted  stiffeners  shall  also  be  provided  on  the  webs  of  rolled  I-beams 
and  channels  where  necessary  to  transmit  to  the  web  the  end  reactions  or  con- 
centrated loads. 

(m)     Intermediate  stiffeners  shall  be  provided  on  both  sides  of  the  webs 

of  plate  girders  where  the  thickness  of  the  web  is  less  than  one  sixtieth  of 

the  clear  distance  between  flanges.     Clear  spacing  between  stiffeners  shall 

not  exceed  84  inches  nor  be  more  than 

3_ 
270,000  t  V  vt 

V  h 

where  h  is  the  clear  depth  between  flanges,  in  inches 

t  is  the  thickness  of  the  web,  in  inches 

v  is  the  greatest  unit  shear  in  panel,  in  pounds  per  square  inch  under  any 

condition  of  complete  or  partial  loading. 
Plate  girder  stiffeners  shall  be  in  pairs,  one  on  each  side  of  the  web,  and  shall 
be  connected  to  the  web  by  rivets  spaced  not  more  than  8  times  their  normal 
diameter. 

Stiffeners  as  indicated  above  in  this  paragraph  need  not  be  provided  where 
adequate  provision  is  made  against  buckling  and  torsion.     Intermediate 
stiffeners  shall  overlap  but  need  not  bear  on  flange  angles. 
[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

JSect.  2809.  Steel  Connections  and  Details.  —  (a)  Rivets  driven 
in  the  field  or  shop  by  approved  pneumatic  hammers  shall  be  considered 
power-driven  rivets.  Turned  bolts  shall  have  a  clearance  in  reamed  holes 
not  more  than  one  fiftieth  inch;  holes  shall  be  reamed  after  assembly  of  the 
members  connected.  The  finished  shank  of  turned  bolts  shall  be  long  enough 
to  provide  full  bearing,  with  washers  under  the  nuts  to  permit  tight  gripping 
of  members  when  turned  up,  and  nuts  shall  be  locked. 

(b)  Riveted  joints  shall  be  designed  to  transmit  the  entire  stress  through 
the  rivets,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  paragraph  (c). 

(c)  Joints  in  compression  members  shall  be  fully  spliced,  except  that 
where  reversal  of  stress  is  not  possible  and  the  joint  is  supported  laterally, 
the  ends  of  the  members  may  be  milled  to  plane  parallel  surfaces  and  abutted, 
with  sufficient  splicing  to  hold  the  connected  members  accurately  and  firmly 
in  place  and  in  bearing. 

(231) 


Sec.  2809 

(d)  Riveted  connections  transmitting  calculated  stress,  except  in  lacing 
and  sag  bars,  shall  have  not  less  than  two  rivets. 

(e)  Members  in  tension  or  compression  meeting  at  a  joint  shall  have 
their  lines  of  center  of  gravity  pass  through  a  point,  if  practicable;  and  if 
not,  provision  shall  be  made  for  the  eccentricity. 

(f )  A  group  of  rivets  transmitting  stress  to  a  member  shall  have  its  center 
of  gravity  in  the  line  of  stress  if  practicable;  and  if  not,  the  group  shall  be 
designed  for  the  resulting  eccentricity. 

(g)  When  a  beam  or  girder  is  connected  by  a  connection  more  rigid  than 
a  standard  web  connection,  to  a  supporting  member  in  such  a  way  that  it  acts 
as  continuous  or  fixed  at  the  end,  proper  provision  shall  be  made  for  the 
bending  at  the  connection. 

(h)  When  stress  is  transmitted  from  one  member  to  another  by  rivets 
through  a  filler,  the  number  of  rivets  shall  be  increased  thirty  per  cent  over 
the  number  required  for  connecting  members  in  contact.  The  additional 
rivets  so  provided  may  be  used  to  produce  a  tight  filler. 

(i)  In  designing  riveted  or  bolted  connections,  the  nominal  diameter  of 
the  rivet  or  bolt  shall  be  used. 

(j)  Rivets  transmitting  calculated  stress,  when  the  grip  exceeds  five 
diameters,  shall  have  their  number  increased  one  per  cent  for  each  additional 
one-sixteenth  inch  in  rivet  grip. 

(k)  The  required  strength  of  riveted  connections  shall  be  developed  by 
the  shearing  and  bearing  values  of  the  rivets,  but  rivets  in  shelf  angles  or 
bracket  supports,  and  in  connections  in  so  far  as  they  also  afford  rigidity 
to  the  structure,  may  transmit  stress  by  tension. 

(1)  The  rivet  pitch  in  the  line  of  stress  in  compression  members  shall  not 
exceed  sixteen  times  the  thickness  of  the  thinnest  outside  plate  or  shape  nor 
twenty  times  the  thickness  of  the  thinnest  inclosed  plate  or  shape,  nor  in 
any  case  more  than  twelve  inches.  At  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  stress 
the  distance  between  lines  of  rivets  shall  not  exceed  thirty  times  the  thinnest 
plate  or  shape. 

(m)  In  built  up  sections  with  angles  having  two  gage  lines  with  rivets 
staggered,  the  rivet  pitch  in  the  line  of  stress  in  each  gage  line  shall  not  exceed 
twenty-four  times  the  thickness  of  the  thinnest  plate  or  shape,  nor  eighteen 
inches. 

(n)  In  built  up  sections  the  distance  from  the  center  of  rivet  holes  to  an 
edge  shall  not  exceed  twelve  times  the  thickness  of  the  thinnest  plate  or  shape 
nor  six  inches. 

(o)  The  provisions  of  this  section  for  riveted  connections  shall  also  apply, 
where  pertinent,  to  bolted  connections. 

(p)  Rivets  or  turned  bolts  shall  be  used  for  either  shop  or  field  work  in 
the  fabrication  and  erection  of  primary  members,  members  carrying  loads 
which  produce  impact  or  vibration  and  in  connections  subject  to  reversal  of 
stress,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  paragraphs  (q)  and  (r). 

(q)  Unfinished  bolts  may  be  used  for  primary  and  secondary  field  con- 
nections in  buildings  other  than  Type  I  and  Type  II,  in  buildings  of  Type  I 

(232) 


Sees.  2809=2810 

and  Type  II  less  than  ten  thousand  square  feet  in  total  floor  area,  and  in 
the  connections  to  cast  iron  or  filled  pipe  columns,  connections  of  secondary 
members  in  all  structures,  such  as  purlins,  girts,  door  and  window  framing, 
alignment  bracing,  and  secondary  beams  in  floors  and  roofs. 

(r)  Arc  and  gas  welding  may  be  employed  as  a  substitute  for  or  in  com- 
bination with  riveting,  bolting  or  other  connecting  means  permitted  under 
this  code,  for  connecting  to  one  another  or  assembling  the  component  parts 
of  structural  steel  of  buildings,  or  for  connecting  steel  to  wrought  iron  members 
of  pre-code  buildings,  provided  that  such  work  be  designed  and  executed  in 
accordance  with  the  American  Welding  Society  Code  for  Arc  and  Gas  Welding 
in  Building  Construction,  latest  edition,  and  modified  as  follows: 

1.  The  ability  of  welding  operators  to  produce  welded  connections  of 
the  required  strength  shall  be  determined  by  having  them  prepare  strength 
test  specimens. 

2.  The  preparation  of  these  specimens  and  strengths  required  shall  be 
as  determined  by  the  commissioner,  but  such  strengths  shall  not  be  less 
than  those  prescribed  in  the  American  Welding  Society  Code  for  Fusion 
Welding  and  Gas  Cutting  in  Building  Construction,  Part  2,  Structural  Steel. 

3.  The  building  Commissioner  shall  promulgate  rules  and  regulations 
as  to  operation  and  inspection  of  welding,  and  the  qualifications  of  welders, 
(s)     Qas  Cutting: 

Gas  cutting  may  be  substituted  for  shearing,  sawing  or  other  cutting 
means,  in  fabricating  or  altering  structural  steel  or  wrought  iron  members 
of  buildings  subject  to  the  following  limitations: 

1.  Gas  cutting  shall  be  done  by  experienced  and  competent  workmen. 

2.  Gas  cut  edges  shall  be  reasonably  smooth  and  regular. 

3.  Gas  cutting  may  be  used  in  preparing  base-metal  parts  for  welding, 
provided  that  the  edges  so  cut  be  thoroughly  cleaned  so  as  to  expose  a 
clean  surface. 

4.  Gas  cutting  shall  not  be  used  to  replace  milling  for  bearing  surfaces. 

5.  Gas  cutting  shall  not  be  performed  on  a  member  while  under  stress. 

6.  Gas  cutting  of  members  to  form  openings  or  to  remove  portion  of 
flanges  shall  not  be  done  unless  the  design  provides  therefor. 

7.  Gas  cutting  shall  not  be  used  to  form  rivet  holes  or  bolt  holes. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2810.  Cast  Iron  Columns. —  (a)  Cast  iron  columns  shall  not 
be  used  in  the  primary  structural  frames  of  buildings  whose  height  exceeds 
one  hundred  feet  or  twice  the  width  at  the  ground  level.  Cast  iron  shall  not 
be  used  for  columns  required  to  have  four-hour  fire-resistive  protection. 

(b)  The  ends  of  cast  iron  columns  shall  be  machined  to  a  smooth  plane 
surface  perpendicular  to  the  axis  to  provide  full  bearing  for  the  entire  cross- 
section  of  the  column. 

(c)  Hollow  cast  iron  columns,  except  when  open  at  both  ends  and  without 
flanges,  shall  have  two  three  eighths  inch  holes  drilled  in  the  shell  to  exhibit 
the  thickness  thereof.  If  the  columns  are  cast  on  the  side,  both  holes  shall 
be  in  the  top  side  as  cast,  one  hole  about  twelve  inches  toward  each  end  from 
mid-length  of  the  column.     If  the  columns  are  cast  on  end,  both  holes  shall 

(233) 


Sees.  2810=2811 

be  at  mid-height  at  ninety  degrees  from  one  another  about  the  axis  of  the 
column.  Additional  holes  shall  be  drilled  when  required  by  the  commissioner- 
If  the  core  of  a  cast  iron  column  is  found  to  have  shifted  more  than  one  quarter 
the  thickness  of  the  shell,  the  strength  shall  be  computed  assuming  the  thick- 
ness all  around  to  be  that  of  the  thinnest  part. 

(d)  Cast  iron  columns  shall  not  be  smaller  than  six  inches  in  outside 
diameter  or  side,  and  the  thickness  of  metal  shall  not  be  less  than  three  fourths 
inch  nor  less  than  one  twelfth  the  outside  diameter  or  widest  side. 

(e)  Cast  iron  columns  supporting  a  floor  shall  not  be  longer  than  seventy 
times  the  least  radius  of  gyration  or  twenty-four  times  the  outside  diameter 
or  least  side.  Cast  iron  columns  supporting  roof  loads  only  shall  not  be 
longer  than  ninety-six  times  the  least  radius  of  gyration  or  thirty  times  the 
outside  diameter  or  least  side. 

(f)  Cast  iron  columns  shall  not  be  used  where  the  loading  is  so  eccentric 
as  to  cause  tension,  nor  shall  they  be  used  in  garages  or  other  structures  where 
they  may  be  subject  to  impact  from  vehicles. 

*Sect.  2811.  Concrete  Filled  Pipe  Columns. —  (a)  Steel  pipes  filled 
with  concrete  may  be  used  as  columns  and  under  axial  loads  the  capacity  shall 
be  assumed  to  be  that  of  the  pipe  computed  as  provided  in  this  chapter  plus 
the  capacity  of  the  concrete.  The  unit  stress  in  the  concrete  shall  not  exceed 
one-fourth  the  28-day  strength  of  the  concrete  as  designated  in  Part  26- 
The  ratio  of  L/d  shall  not  exceed  40,  where  L  is  the  unbraced  height  of  the 
column  in  inches  and  d  is  the  outside  diameter  of  the  pipe  in  inches. 

(b)  Steel  equal  in  quality  to  that  described  in  Section  2802,  paragraph  (1) 
shall  be  used  for  pipe.  Pipe  shall  be  new  and  full  size,  shall  be  made  by  the 
seamless  process  or  equal  and  for  sizes  larger  than  four  inches  in  outside 
diameter,  shall  be  standard  weight  or  heavier.  Pipe  shall  be  cut  square  to  its 
length.     Ends  shall  be  milled  if  necessary  to  obtain  the  exact  length. 

(c)  Concrete  filling  shall  be  machine-mixed  and  proportioned  for  a  strength 
of  not  less  than  three  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch,  as  described  in  Part  26. 
Concrete  shall  be  compacted  by  a  satisfactory  mechanical  method  while  being 
placed. 

(d)  Where  required  to  increase  the  strength  of  columns,  longitudinal  steel 
reinforcement  may  be  used.  Reinforcement  shall  be  new,  straight,  con- 
tinuous for  the  entire  length  of  the  column,  symmetrically  placed  and  ends 
milled  for  bearing,  and  ends  arranged  for  even  bearing  with  the  pipe  and 
milled  after  filling  if  necessary  to  obtain  uniform  bearing.  The  strength  of 
this  reinforcement  shall  be  calculated  by  adding  its  net  area  to  the  area  of  the 
steel  pipe  in  paragraph  (a)  and  using  the  net  area  of  concrete. 

(e)  Bases,  caps,  web  ties  and  brackets  shall  be  of  steel.  Each  shall  be 
attached  by  an  approved  method.  Brackets  and  web  ties  shall  have  a 
mechanical  anchorage  in  addition  to  welding.  Welding  and  cutting  shall  be 
done  in  accordance  with  requirements  of  section  2809,  paragraphs  (r)  and  (s)  • 

(f)  Material  surrounding  a  filled  pipe  column  for  fire  protection  shall  not 
be  considered  either  load-bearing  or  as  increasing  the  stiffness. 

(g)  Filled  pipe  columns  shall  be  inspected  during  their  manufacture  by  an 

(234) 


Sees.  2811=2815 

inspector  appointed  by  the  commissioner.  This  inspector  shall  attach  a 
permanent  label  to  each  column  inspected  and  approved  and  shall  file  a  record 
of  all  inspections  with  the  commissioner. 

(h)  Copies  of  sanction  tests  of  filled  pipe  columns  made  according  to  this 
section  shall  be  filed  with  the  commissioner  for  each  diameter  of  column 
produced  by  a  manufacturer  to  be  of  approximate  L/d  of  24.  Tests  shall  be 
made  in  an  approved  laboratory.  For  acceptanpe  the  test  strength  shall 
not  be  less  than  three  times  the  working  strength  as  computed  by  paragraph 
(a)  hereof. 

(i)  For  columns  without  sanction  tests  or  existing  unapproved  columns, 
the  unit  working  stress  shall  not  exceed  in  pounds  per  square  inch 

for  steel  10,000 

for  concrete  500 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2812.  Stresses  in  Steel  due  to  Wind. —  Structural  steel  members 
subject  to  stress  due  to  wind  shall  be  so  designed  that  the  maximum  unit 
stress  from  all  loads  and  forces  combined  shall  not  exceed  by  more  than  one 
third  the  allowable  stresses  specified  in  this  chapter  and  the  unit  stress  due 
to  loads  and  forces  other  than  wind  shall  not  exceed  the  specified  allowable 
stresses. 

fSect.  2813.  Thickness  of  Structural  Steel. —  The  thickness  of  metal 
in  structural  steel  members  shall  not  be  less  than  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch 
where  exposed  to  moisture  or  the  weather,  and  not  less  than  one-quarter  of  an 
inch  where  protected  from  moisture  and  the  weather.  Both  these  require- 
ments do  not  apply  to  steel  joists  as  defined  in  section  2818,  members  formed 
of  flat  rolled  steel,  the  flange  edges  and  webs  of  rolled  beams,  channels,  stairs, 
fire  escapes,  signs,  skylights,  windows,  non-bearing  walls  and  partitions, 
suspended  ceilings,  cornice  brackets,  ventilator  hoods,  marquees,  and  other 
light  iron  work,  and  structural  steel  for  buildings  in  Type  V  one  story  high, 
[  ^As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2814.  Expansion  and  Contraction  in  Steel  Frames. —  Proper 
provision  shall  be  made  for  expansion  and  contraction. 

Sect.  2815.  Workmanship  in  Steel  Construction. —  (a)  Structural 
steel  members  shall  be  straight  and  true  and  any  piece  damaged  to  such  an 
extent  as  to  impair  its  strength  shall  not  be  used  in  the  construction  of  a 
building. 

(b)  Structural  steel  members  shall  not  be  cut,  notched,  or  pierced  for 
clearance  of  pipes,  conduits,  wires,  ducts,  or  for  other  reasons,  in  such  a  way 
as  to  impair  their  strength  unless  provision  therefor  has  been  made  in  the 
design. 

(c)  Drifting  to  enlarge  unfair  holes  shall  not  be  permitted.  Rivet  holes 
shall  not  be  burned. 

(d)  The  several  pieces  forming  built-up  sections  shall  be  straight  and  shall 

fit  closely  together;  and  finished  members  shall  be  free  from  twists,  bends  or 
open  joints. 

(235) 


Sees.  2815=2817 

(e)  Rolled  sections  shall  not  be  heated  in  any  manner  which  will  impair 
their  strength  or  quality,  nor  cut  with  the  torch  while  under  stress.  A  torch 
shall  not  be  used  in  the  field  to  cut  structural  steel  except  with  the  approval 
of  the  commissioner  and  in  the  presence  of  an  inspector  appointed  by  him. 

(f)  Steel  castings  shall  be  properly  annealed. 

(g)  Except  under  such  conditions  as  the  commissioner  may  specify, 
rivets  shall  be  driven  at  bright  red  heat,  and  wherever  practicable,  by  power 
riveters.  Rivet  heads  shall  be  of  hemispherical  shape,  uniform  in  size  through- 
out the  work  for  the  same  size  rivet,  full,  neatly  finished  and  concentric  with 
the  holes.  Rivets  after  driving  shall  be  tight,  completely  filling  the  holes, 
and  with  heads  in  full  contact  with  the  gripped  surfaces. 

*Sect.  2816.  Painting  Steel  and  Iron. —  (a)  Structural  steel  (except 
the  parts  which  are  to  be  welded,  surfaces  in  contact,  or  entirely  encased  in 
concrete)  shall  be  thoroughly  cleaned  before  erection  and  painted  one  coat  of 
approved  paint  well  worked  into  joints  and  open  spaces  including  surfaces 
which  have  been  welded. 

(b)  After  erection,  steel  work  (except  that  which  is  to  be  encased  in  con- 
crete) shall  be  painted  an  additional  approved  coat  of  another  color.  These 
requirements  shall  not  apply  to  steel  joists  and  other  secondary  members 
formed  from  sheet  steel  except  that  these  members  where  embedded  in 
exterior  walls  shall  be  painted  from  the  wall  to  a  point  one  foot  inside  the 
inside  face  of  the  exterior  wall.  If  the  shop  coat  of  paint  on  steel  members 
has  been  damaged  in  transit  or  erection,  the  damaged  portions  shall  be  field 
painted  after  erection. 

(c)  Required  shop  painting  of  shop-welded  work  shall  be  applied  after 
the  welding  is  completed.  Required  shop  painting  of  work  to  be  field  welded 
shall  consist  of  a  coat  of  linseed  oil  except  that  this  shall  not  apply  to  steel 
joists  and  other  secondary  members  formed  from  sheet  steel.  Required 
field  painting  of  field-welded  work  shall  be  applied  after  welding  is  finished 
and  shall  consist  of  two  coats  of  approved  paint. 

(d)  Primary  frame  steel  built  into  exterior  masonry  walls  shall  have 
adequate  protection  against  corrosion  by  encasing  in  one  and  one-half  inches 
of  Portland  cement  mortar,  see  section  2411  paragraph  (h)  or  by  a  mastic 
asphalt  or  pitch  one-eighth  inches  thick  or  its  approved  equivalent.  Masonry 
protection  herein  mentioned  shall  not  change  other  masonry  requirements. 

(e)  Welded  connections  and  cast  iron  columns  shall  not  be  painted  until 
after  inspection  and  approval  by  the  commissioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2817.  Erection  of  Steel. —  (a)  The  steel  frames  of  buildings 
or  other  structures  shall  be  erected  true  and  plumb,  and  temporary  bracing 
shall  be  provided  wherever  necessary  to  support  the  loads  to  which  the 
structure  may  be  subjected,  including  erection  equipment  and  its  operation. 
Such  bracing  shall  be  left  in  place  as  long  as  required  for  safety. 

(b)  As  erection  progresses,  the  work  shall  be  securely  bolted  up  to  resist, 
all  stresses  to^which  it  may  be  subjected. 

(236) 


Sees.  2817=2818 

(c)  No  field  riveting  or  welding  shall  be  done  in  any  portion  of  a  structure 
until  that  portion  has  been  properly  plumbed  and  aligned. 

(d)  In  the  setting  or  erecting  of  steel  work  the  individual  pieces  shall  be 
considered  plumb  or  level  when  the  error  does  not  exceed  one  in  five  hundred. 
Exterior  columns  and  columns  adjacent  to  elevator  shafts  shall  not  be  out 
of  plumb  in  excess  of  one  in  one  thousand,  in  the  total  height  of  the  columns. 

*Sect.  2818.  Steel  Joists. —  (a)  Steel  joists,  for  the  purposes  of  this 
chapter,  shall  mean  light  weight  rolled  steel  sections,  welded  truss  assemblies 
or  expanded  rolled  sections.     They  shall  include  — ■ 

(1)  Junior  Beams,  so-called. 

(2)  Other  rolled  steel  beams  of  (I)  or  channel  section  the  flanges  of 
which  are  narrower  than  two  inches  plus  one  sixth  the  depth  (except 
American  standard  channels)  or  the  webs  of  which  are  thinner  than  seven- 
teen hundredths  inch  plus  five  thousandths  of  the  depth. 

(3)  Beams  of  I-section,  channels  or  other  sections  fabricated  by  bend- 
ing, pressing,  welding  or  expanding  sheet  steel. 

(4)  Steel  joists,  so-called,  consisting  of  trussed  members  of  which  the 
chords  are  made  of  bars  or  of  structural  shapes  thinner  than  one  quarter 
inch,  or  the  webs  are  made  of  bars;  assembled  by  welding  or  otherwise; 
or  fabricated  by  shearing  and  expanding  the  web  of  rolled  I-beam;  or  any 
similar  trussed  steel  beam. 

(b)  Steel  joists  shall  not  be  more  than  twenty  inches  deep. 

(c)  Steel  joists  shall  not  be  used  in  floors  of  garages,  dance  halls,  gymna- 
siums, armories,  or  floors  used  for  any  other  purpose  where  subject  to 
extreme  vibration,  impact,  or  heavy  moving  load  concentrations,  nor  in 
floors  supporting  live  loads  in  excess  of  one  hundred  twenty-five  pounds  per 
square  foot. 

(d)  The  provisions  of  this  chapter  for  design  and  materials  of  structural 
steel  shall  apply  to  steel  joists. 

(e)  Every  steel  joist,  when  erected  and  bridged,  shall  be  capable  of  sup- 
porting safely  a  concentrated  load  of  at  least  eight  hundred  pounds  at  any 
panel  point.  Welded  joints  of  trussed  joists,  when  tested  shall  be  capable 
of  resisting  at  least  three  times  the  maximum  design  stress. 

(f)  The  span  of  joist  having  an  all  steel  top  chord  shall  not  exceed  five 
hundred  and  fifty  times  the  radius  of  gyration  of  the  top  chord  in  a  plane 
perpendicular  to  the  web  of  the  joist,  but  in  case  the  top  chord  consists  of  a 
flat  top  section  continuous  with  a  center  web,  the  radius  of  gyration  of  the 
top  plate  alone  shall  be  taken.  Joist  having  a  top  chord  of  steel  with  a  wood 
nailing  strip  attached  shall  be  limited  in  span  to  one  hundred  sixty  times  the 
total  width  of  the  top  chord.  The  span  shall  not  exceed  twenty-four  times 
the  depth  of  the  steel  portion  of  the  joist. 

(g)  Bridging  shall  be  provided  for  steel  joists  to  afford  lateral  support 
during  erection  and  to  distribute  concentrations  of  live  load  among  adjacent 
joists.  Bridging  shall  be  of  approved  rigid  type  capable  of  transmitting  at 
least  five  hundred  pounds  to  each  adjacent  joist  and  shall  securely  support 
the  top  chord  or  flange  against  lateral  displacement.     Such  bridging  shall 

(237) 


Sees.  2818=2820 

be  provided  at  intervals  not  more  than  eight  feet  nor  more  than  forty  times 
the  width  of  the  top  flange  or  chord.  Unless  steel  joists  are  supported  at 
the  ends  by  web  connections,  built  into  masonry  walls  or  otherwise  supported 
laterally,  they  shall  have  bridging  at  the  ends. 

(h)  Steel  joists  parallel  to  masonry  walls  or  to  steel  or  concrete  beams 
shall  have  both  top  and  bottom  chords  or  flanges  anchored  thereto  in  the 
line  of  bridging.  Such  anchors  shall  consist  of  flat  steel  not  less  than  one 
inch  by  one  eighth  inch  effectively  arranged,  or  other  equivalent  approved 

anchorage. 

(i)  Steel  joists  shall  have  at  least  four  inches  bearing  on  masonry  walls 
and  shall  be  anchored  thereto  by  approved  anchor.  Steel  joists  supported 
on  the  top  of  steel  beams  shall  have  at  least  three  inches  bearing  and  shall 
extend  at  least  one  inch  beyond  the  center  line  of  the  web.  Steel  joists 
depended  upon  for  lateral  support  to  a  beam  shall  have  positive  connection 
thereto  other  than  by  friction.  Steel  joists  shall  be  secured  against  lateral 
displacement  at  the  ends. 

(j)  Steel  joists  shall  not  be  used  in  the  first  floor  of  a  building  where 
there  is  not  a  basement  or  cellar  below,  unless  it  has  clearance  above  the 
ground  of  at  least  twenty-four  inches,  and  the  space  below  is  ventilated 
either  to  a  heated  basement  or  to  the  outside  air.  Ventilation  of  such  space 
to  a  heated  basement  shall  consist  of  at  least  two  remote  openings  in  the 
basement  wall  having  a  total  area  of  at  least  two  square  feet  for  each  twenty- 
five  linear  feet  of  wall.  Ventilation  of  such  space  to  outside  air  shall  consist 
of  one  or  more  openings  in  each  exterior  wall  thereof,  well  distributed,  except 
that  openings  need  not  be  provided  in  the  front  wall  when  the  space  is  ven- 
tilated in  the  rear  and  both  side  walls.  The  aggregate  area  of  openings 
shall  be  not  less  than  two  square  feet  for  each  twenty-five  linear  feet  of  wall. 
Openings  in  exterior  walls  shall  be  protected  by  non-corrodible  wire  mesh 
with  openings  not  greater  than  one  half  inch. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  eh.  8  } 

Sect.  2819.  Column  Bases  of  Steel  and  Iron.— (a)  Steel  or  cast 
iron  bases  under  steel,  cast  iron  or  filled  pipe  columns  shall  be  plane  and 
smooth.  They  shall  be  designed  on  the  assumption  that  the  column  bears 
uniformly  upon  the  base,  and  that  the  base  bears  uniformly  upon  the  sup- 
porting foundation,  except  when  the  column  is  anchored  to  the  foundation 
to  resist  calculated  bending. 

(b)  Cast  iron  bases  shall  be  planed  on  top  and  bases  which  rest  on  struc- 
tural steel  members  shall  be  planed  on  the  bottom.  The  thickness  of  cast 
iron  shall  be  not  less  than  one  inch.  The  outer  edge  of  the  ribs  of  ribbed 
bases  shall  be  inclined  not  less  steeply  than  forty-five  degrees.  A  side  of  the 
bed  plate  of  ribbed  bases  exceeding  three  feet  in  length  shall  have  a  rein- 
forcing flange  at  least  three  inches  high. 

fSect.  2820.  Steel  Deck  Floors  and  Roofs.—  (a)  This  type  of  con- 
struction for  the  purposes  of  this  Part  shall  mean  secondary  members  and 
decking  of  steel  in  the  form  of  flats  or  of  various  shapes  or  of  combination 
with  rolled  steel  sections. 

(238) 


Sec.  2820 

(b)  The  provisions  of  this  Part  for  design  of  structural  steel  shall  apply 
to  steel  deck  construction. 

(c)  The  quality  of  steel  shall  meet  the  specifications  of  the  American 
Society  of  Testing  Materials  for  Light  Gage  Structural  Quality  Flat  Hot- 
Rolled  Carbon  Steel.  Stresses  for  design  in  extreme  fibre  shall  not  exceed 
18,000  lbs.  per  square  inch.    Tests  shall  be  as  described  elsewhere  in  this  Codep 

(d)  Minimum  U.  S.  gage  of  sheets  for  floors  shall  be  18  gage  and  for 
roofs  22  gage.  Connections  shall  be  made  by  riveting,  bolting,  welding 
or  by  other  methods  equally  secure.  Provisions  shall  be  made  to  secure 
the  decking  against  uplift,  vibration  and  deflection.  Protection  shall  be 
made  by  painting  or  otherwise,  as  provided  for  steel  in  this  part. 

(e)  Steel  deck  construction  shall  not  be  used  in  floors  of  garages,  dance 
halls,  gymnasiums,  armories,  or  floors  used  for  any  other  purpose  where 
subject  to  vibration,  impact  or  heavy  moving  load  concentrations,  nor  in 
floors  supporting  live  loads  in  excess  of  one  hundred  twenty-five  pounds  per 
square  foot. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 


cm) 


Sec.  2901 


PART  29. 
EXCAVATIONS  AND   FOUNDATIONS. 

Section 

2901  —  Excavations. 

2902  —  Depth  of  Foundations. 

2903  —  Borings  and  Test  Pits. 

2904  —  Classification  and  Allowable  Loads  of  Foundation  Bearing 

Materials. 

2905  —  Foundation  Loads. 

2906  —  Foundation  Design. 

2907  —  Footings,  Caisson  Piers  and  Pile  Caps. 

2908  —  Piles  —  General  Requirements. 

2909  —  Allowable  Load  on  Piles. 

2910  — Wooden  Piles. 

291 1  —  Precast  Concrete  Piles. 

2912  —  Cast=in=Place  Concrete  Piles. 

2913  —  Concrete=Filled  Cylindrical  Steel  Piles. 

2914  —  Composite  Piles. 

2915  —  Foundation  Load  Tests. 

2916  —  Load  Tests  of  Bearing  Materials. 

2917  —  Pile  Loading  Tests. 

*Section  2901.  Excavations. —  (a)  Until  provision  for  permanent 
support  has  been  made,  excavations  shall  be  properly  guarded  and  protected 
by  the  persons  causing  them  to  be  made  so  as  to  prevent  such  excavation 
from  becoming  dangerous  to  life  or  limb.  Excavations  shall  be  sheet-piled, 
braced  or  shored,  and  permanent  excavations  shall  be  protected  by  retaining 
walls  or  other  permanent  structures,  where  necessary,  to  prevent  movement 
or  caving  of  the  adjoining  soil. 

(b)     Structures  near  an  excavation  and  owned  by  another  than  the  person 
causing  the  excavation  to  be  made  shall  be  supported  as  follows: — 

(1)  Where  an  excavation  is  carried  below  the  curb  grade  at  the  com- 
mon property  line,  or  below  the  surface  of  the  ground  where  there  is  no  such 
curb  grade,  the  person  causing  such  excavation  to  be  made  shall,  at  all 
times,  if  accorded  the  necessary  license  to  enter  upon  the  adjoining  land, 
and  not  otherwise,  at  his  own  expense,  preserve  and  protect  from  injury 
any  wall,  building,  or  structure,  the  safety  of  which  may  be  affected  by 
said  excavation,  and  shall  support  it  by  proper  foundations.  If  the  neces- 
sary license  is  not  accorded  to  the  person  making  such  excavation,  then  it 
shall  be  the  duty  of  the  owner  refusing  to  grant  such  license  to  make  such 
wall,  building  or  structure  safe  and  to  support  it  by  proper  foundations; 
and,  when  necessary  for  that  purpose,  such  owner  shall  be  permitted  to 
enter  upon  the  premises  where  such  excavation  is  being  made. 

(240) 


Sees.  2901-2903 

(2)  Where  a  party  wall  is  intended  to  be  used  by  the  person  causing 
the  excavation  to  be  made,  he  shall,  at  his  own  expense,  preserve  such 
party  wall  from  injury  and  shall  support  it  so  that  the  said  party  wall 
shall  be  safe  for  the  purposes  intended. 

(c)  If  the  person  whose  duty  it  shall  be  under  the  provisions  of  this 
section  to  guard  and  protect  an  excavation,  or  to  prevent  adjoining  soil 
from  moving  or  caving,  or  to  preserve  or  protect  any  wall,  building,  or 
structure  from  injury,  shall  neglect  or  fail  so  to  do,  the  commissioner  may 
enter  upon  the  premises,  and  make  safe  such  excavation,  wall,  building  or 
other  structure  as  provided  in  section  one  hundred  and  sixteen  of  Part  I. 
[  *As  amended  bij  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  2902.  Depth  of  Foundations.—  (a)  The  foundations  of 
every  permanent  structure  shall  be  supported  by  satisfactory  bearing  ma- 
terial, which  shall  mean  natural  deposits  of  rock,  gravel,  sand,  rock  flour 
(inorganic  silt),  clay,  or  any  combination  of  these  which  does  not  contain 
an  appreciable  amount  of  organic  matter. 

(b)  Where  footings  are  supported  at  different  levels,  or  at  different  levels 
from  footings  of  adjacent  structures,  foundation  plans  shall  include  vertical 
sections  showing  to  true  scale  all  such  variations  in  grade.  The  effect  of 
such  differences  in  footing  levels  on  the  bearing  materials  shall  be  considered 
in  the  design. 

(c)  The  foundations  and  grade  beams  of  permanent  structures,  except 
when  founded  on  rock,  and  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  paragraph  (d)  of 
this  section,  shall  be  carried  down  at  least  four  feet  below  an  adjoining  surface 
exposed  to  natural  or  artificial  freezing. 

(d)  Foundations  of  detached  garages  or  similar  accessory  structures  of 
six  hundred  fifty  square  feet  or  less  in  area  and  not  over  one  story  high,  and 
grade  beams  of  all  structures  need  not  be  carried  more  than  one  foot  below 
an  adjoining  surface  exposed  to  freezing  if  the  underlying  soil  to  a  depth  of  at 
least  four  feet  beneath  the  surface  is  clean  sand  and  gravel.  No  foundation 
shall  be  placed  on  frozen  soil.  Foundations  shall  not  be  laid  in  freezing 
weather  unless  adequately  protected. 

(e)  Basements  or  cellars  which  are  surrounded  by  water-bearing  soil  shall 
be  waterproofed  up  to  a  grade  at  least  two  feet  above  the  maximum  probable 
ground  water  level.  Walls  and  floors  to  be  so  water  proofed  shall  be  designed 
to  resist  full  hydrostatic  pressure.  Under  boilers,  furnaces  and  other  heat- 
producing  apparatus,  suitable  insulation  shall  be  installed  to  protect  the 
waterproofing  against  damage  from  heat  as  specified  in  Part  21. 

[  -\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8] 

Sect.  2903.  Borings  and  Test  Pits. —  (a)  Before  issuing  a  permit  for 
erection  or  alteration  of  a  permanent  structure,  the  commissioner,  in  the 
absence  of  satisfactory  data,  shall  require  the  owner  to  dig  pits  or  make 
borings  at  such  locations  and  carried  to  such  depths  as  will  disclose  the 
character  of  the  materials  underlying  the  site  of  the  proposed  structure. 
When  it  is  proposed  to  support  a  structure  directly  on  bedrock,  loading  the 
rock  to  more  than  ten  tons  per  square  foot,  the  commissioner  may  require  a 

(241) 


Sees.  2903-2904 

drill  hole  or  a  core  boring  to  be  made  at  each  pier  location,  carried  into  the 
rock  a  sufficient  depth  to  prove  that  sound  bedrock  has  actually  been  reached, 
(b)  Copies,  in  duplicate,  of  the  results  of  all  borings  and  pits  made  or 
started,  together  with  samples  properly  protected  from  evaporation  repre- 
senting the  various  classes  of  soil  as  nearly  as  possible  in  their  natural  state 
in  the  ground,  including  samples  of  the  materials  selected  for  the  support  of 
the  foundation,  shall  be  filed  with  the  commissioner  for  his  information  and 
classification.    Washed  or  bucket  samples  will  not  be  accepted. 

*Sect.  2904.  Classification  and  Allowable  Loads  of  Foundation 
Bearing  Materials. —  (a)  The  terms  used  in  the  following  classification 
shall  be  interpreted  in  accordance  with  generally  accepted  geological  and 
engineering  nomenclature.  Certain  terms  shall,  for  the  purposes  of  this 
chapter,  have  more  specific  interpretations,  as  follows: 

(1)  Rocks. 

Shale; —  A  laminated,  fine-textured,  soft  rock  composed  of  consolidated 
clay  or  silt,  which  cannot  be  molded  without  the  addition  of  water,  but 
which  can  be  reduced  to  a  plastic  condition  by  moderate  grinding  and 
mixing  with  water. 

Slate; — A  dense,  very  fine-textured,  soft  rock  which  is  readily  split 
along  cleavage  planes  into  thin  sheets  and  which  cannot  be  reduced  to  a 
plastic  condition  by  moderate  grinding  and  mixing  with  water. 

Schist; — A  fine-textured,  laminated  rock  with  a  more  or  less  wavy 
cleavage,  containing  mica  or  other  flaky  minerals. 

(2)  Granular  soil. 

Gravel; — An  uncemented  mixture  of  mineral  grains  one  quarter  inch 
or  more  in  diameter. 

Sand; —  A  type  of  soil  possessing  practically  no  cohesion  when  dry,  and 
consisting  of  mineral  grains  smaller  than  one  quarter  inch  in  diameter. 

Coarse  Sand; —  A  sand  consisting  chiefly  of  grains  which  will  be  retained 
on  a  sixty-five  mesh  sieve. 

Fine  Sand; — A  sand  consisting  chiefly  of  grains  which  will  pass  a  sixty- 
five  mesh  sieve. 

Compact  Gravel,  Compact  Sand; — 'Deposits  requiring  picking  for  re- 
moval and  offering  high  resistance  to  penetration  by  excavating  tools. 

Loose  Gravel,  Loose  Sand;—  Deposits  readily  removable  by  shoveling 
only. 

(3)  Cohesive  soil. 

Hardpan; —  A  thoroughly  compact  mixture  of  clay,  sand,  gravel,  and 
boulders,  for  example  boulder  clay;  or  a  cemented  mixture  of  sand  or  of 
sand  and  gravel,  with  or  without  boulders,  and  difficult  to  remove  by  pick- 
ing. 

Clay; — ■  A  fine-grained,  inorganic  soil  possessing  sufficient  cohesion  when 
dry  to  form  hard  lumps  which  cannot  readily  be  pulverized  by  the  fingers. 

Hard  Clay; —  A  clay  requiring  picking  for  removal,  a  fresh  sample  of 
which  cannot  be  molded  in  the  fingers. 

Medium  Clay; —  A  clay  which  can  be  removed  by  spading,  a  fresh  sample 
of  which  can  be  molded  by  a  substantial  pressure  of  the  fingers. 

(242) 


Sec.  2904 

Soft  Clay;—-  A  clay  which,  when  freshly  sampled,  can  be  molded  under 

relatively  slight  pressure  of  the  fingers. 

Rock  Flour  (Inorganic  Silt) ; —  A  fine-grained,  inorganic  soil  consisting 

chiefly  of  grains  which  will  pass  a  two  hundred  mesh  sieve,  and  possessing 

sufficient  cohesion  when  dry  to  form  lumps  which  can  readily  be  pulverized 

with  the  fingers. 

(b)  The  maximum  pressure  on  soils  under  foundations  shall  not  exceed 
the  allowable  bearing  values  set  forth  in  the  following  table  except  when 
determined  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  sections  twenty-nine  hundred 
and  fifteen  and  twenty-nine  hundred  and  sixteen,  and  in  any  case  subject  to 
the  modifications  of  subsequent  paragraphs  of  this  section. 


Class. 


Material. 


Allowable  Bearing 

Value  (Tons  per 

Square  Foot). 


3 

4 

5 
6 

7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 


Massive  bedrock  without  laminations,  such  as  granite,  diorite, 
and  other  granitic  rocks;  and  also  gneiss,  trap  rock,  felsite 
and  thoroughly  cemented  conglomerates,  such  as  the  Rox- 
bury  Puddingstone,  all  in  sound  condition  (sound  condition 
allows  minor  cracks) , 

Laminated  rocks  such  as  slate  and  schist,  in  sound  condition 
(minor  cracks  allowed) 

Shale  in  sound  condition  (minor  cracks  allowed) 

Residual  deposits  of  shattered  or  broken  bedrock  of  any  kind 
except  shale 

Hardpan , 

Gravel,  sand-gravel  mixtures,  compact 

Gravel,  sand-gravel  mixtures,  loose;  sand,  coarse,  compact 

Sand,  coarse,  loose;  sand,  fine,  compact 

Sand,  fine,  loose 

Hard  clay 

Medium  clay 

Soft  clay 

Rock  flour,  shattered  shale,  or  any  natural  deposit  of  unusual 
character  not  provided  for  herein 


100 

35 

10 

10 

10 

5 

4 
3 

1 
6 

4 
1 


*  Value  to  be  fixed  by  the  Commissioner. 


(c)  The  tabulated  bearing  values  for  rocks  of  Classes  1  to  3  inclusive 
shall  apply  where  the  loaded  area  is  less  than  two  feet  below  the  lowest  adja- 
cent surface  of  sound  rock.  Where  the  loaded  area  is  more  than  two  feet 
below  such  surface  these  values  may  be  increased  twenty  per  cent  for  each 
foot  of  additional  depth  but  shall  not  exceed  twice  the  tabulated  values. 

(d)  The  allowable  bearing  values  of  materials  of  Classes  4  to  9  inclusive 
may  exceed  the  tabulated  values  by  two  and  one  half  per  cent  for  each  foot 
of  depth  of  the  loaded  area  below  the  lowest  ground  surface  immediately 
adjacent,  but  shall  not  exceed  twice  the  tabulated  values.     For  areas  of 

(243) 


Sees.  2904-2906 

foundations  smaller  than  three  feet  in  least  lateral  dimension,  the  allowable 
bearing  values  shall  be  one  third  of  the  tabulated  bearing  values  multiplied 
by  the  least  lateral  dimension  in  feet. 

(e)  The  tabulated  bearing  values  for  Classes  10  to  12  inclusive  apply 
only  to  pressures  directly  under  individual  footings,  walls,  and  piers.  When 
structures  are  founded  on  or  are  underlain  by  deposits  of  these  classes,  the 
total  load  over  the  area  of  any  one  bay  or  other  major  portion  of  the  structure, 
minus  the  weight  of  excavated  material,  divided  by  the  area,  shall  not  exceed 
one  half  the  tabulated  bearing  values. 

(f)  Where  the  bearing  materials  directly  under  a  foundation  overlie  a 
stratum  having  smaller  allowable  bearing  values,  these  smaller  values  shall 
not  be  exceeded  at  the  level  of  such  stratum.  Computation  of  the  vertical 
pressure  in  the  bearing  materials  at  any  depth  below  a  foundation  shall  be 
made  on  the  assumption  that  the  load  is  spread  uniformly  at  an  angle  of 
sixty  degrees  with  the  horizontal;  but  the  area  considered  as  supporting  the 
1  oad  shall  not  extend  beyond  the  intersection  of  sixty  degree  planes  of  adjacent 
foundations. 

(g)  Where  portions  of  the  foundation  of  an  entire  structure  rest  directly 
upon  or  are  underlain  by  medium  or  soft  clay  or  rock  flour,  and  other  portions 
rest  upon  different  materials,  or  where  the  layers  of  such  softer  materials 
vary  greatly  in  thickness,  the  magnitude  and  distribution  of  the  probable 
settlement  shall  be  investigated  as  specified  in  section  twenty-nine  hundred 
and  sixteen,  paragraph  (f),  and,  if  necessary,  the  allowable  loads  shall  be 
reduced  or  special  provisions  be  made  in  the  design  of  the  structure  to  prevent 
dangerous  differential  settlements. 

(h)  Whenever,  in  an  excavation,  an  inward  or  upward  flow  of  water 
develops  in  an  otherwise  satisfactory  bearing  material,  special  methods 
satisfactory  to  the  commissioner  shall  be  immediately  adopted  to  stop  or 
control  the  flow  to  prevent  disturbance  of  the  bearing  material.  If  such 
flow  of  water  seriously  impairs  the  structure  of  the  bearing  material,  the 
allowable  bearing  value  shall  be  reduced  to  that  of  the  material  in  loose 
condition. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  of  1943,  eh.  8  and  Ord.  of  1955,  ch.  2  ] 

Sect.  2905.  Foundation  Loads. — (a)  The  loads  to  be  used  in  com- 
puting the  maximum  pressure  upon  bearing  materials  under  foundations 
shall  be  the  live  and  dead  loads  of  the  structure,  as  specified  in  Part  23,  includ  - 
ing  the  weight  of  the  foundations,  but  excluding  loads  from  overlying  soil. 

(b)  Eccentricity  of  loading  in  foundations  shall  be  fully  investigated  and 
the  maximum  pressure  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable  bearing  values. 

(c)  Where  the  pressure  on  the  bearing  material  due  to  wind  is  less  than 
twenty-five  per  cent  of  that  due  to  dead  and  live  loads,  it  may  be  neglected  in 
design.  Where  this  ratio  exceeds  twenty-five  per  cent,  foundations  shall  be 
so  proportioned  that  the  pressure  due  to  combined  dead,  live  and  wind  loads 
shall  not  exceed  the  allowable  bearing  values  by  more  than  twenty-five 
per  cent. 

fSect.  2906.      Foundation    Design. — Foundations  shall   be   designed   to 
distribute  to  the  supporting  media  all  vertical,  horizontal  and  inclined  loads, 

(244) 


Sees.  2906-2907 

as  specified  in  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  five,  without  exceeding  the 
allowable  stresses  specified  elsewhere  in  this  code  for  the  materials  of  which 
the  foundations  are  to  be  constructed.  Concrete  in  all  foundations  shall  be 
stone  or  gravel  aggregate  concrete  and  shall  be  porportioned  for  an  ultimate 
strength  of  at  least  fifteen  hundred  pounds  per  square  inch. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2  ] 

|Sect.    2907.      Footings,     Caisson    Piers   and    Pile    Caps. — (a)     The 

footings  of  foundation  walls  or  piers  shall  be  of  plain  or  reinforced  concrete  or 

other  satisfactory  masonry  units,  footing  stones,  or  steel  grillages.    Footings 

of  wood  may  be  used  under  temporary  structures  and,  where  they  are  entirely 
below  the  permanent  ground  water  level,  as  determined  by  the  commissioner 

under  permanent  structures  of  Type  V  or  Type  VI. 

(1)  Concrete  footings  and  pile  caps  shall  be  designed  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  Parts  24  and  26. 

(2)  Footing  stones  shall  be  at  least  ten  inches  in  thickness  and  shall  be 
fully  bedded.  They  may  be  laid  dry  for  buildings  not  exceeding  four 
stories  in  height.  For  buildings  higher  than  four  stories,  they  shall  be  laid 
in  cement  mortar.  Stresses  in  footing  stones  shall  not  exceed  the  maximum 
specified  in  Part  24. 

(3)  Structural  steel  grillage  foundations  and  all  structural  steel  below 
grade  shall  be  designed  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  Part  28,  shall 
have  at  least  six  inches  of  concrete  below  the  steel  and  shall  be  entirely 
embedded  in  and  surrounded  by  concrete  at  least  four  inches  thick  between 
steel  and  soil. 

(4)  Wooden  footings  shall  be  designed  in  accordance  with  the  provisions 
of  Part  25. 

(b)  Caisson  piers  may  be  constructed  of  either  plain  or  reinforced  con- 
crete. The  unit  compressive  stress  in  the  concrete  at  the  least  cross-section 
shall  not  exceed  0.225  f0.  When  the  height  of  the  shaft  H  exceeds  18  D, 
such  stress  shall  not  exceed 

1.5—  H   \ 
0.225  f'  I  I  wherein: 


( 


36D/ 


f'c  is  the  ultimate  compressive  strength  of  the  concrete  as  specified  in 

Part  26. 
H  is  length  of  shaft  in  feet  measured  from  the  top  of  the  bell  to  cut-off. 
D  is  shaft  diameter — in  feet  when  the  shaft  is  of  constant  cross-section. 
D  isd  +  0.014H  when  the  shaft  increases  two  inches  in  diameter  each 

six  feet  plus  or  minus  in  height, 
d  is  shaft  diameter  in  feet  at  top  of  bell, 
(c)  In  reinforced  concrete  caisson  piers  the  vertical  steel  shall  have  an 
area  at  least  one  half  of  one  per  cent  of  the  minimum  area  of  cross-section 
of  the  concrete.  Such  steel  shall  be  stayed  laterally  by  steel  ties  equivalent 
at  least  to  one  quarter  inch  round  bars  spaced  twelve  inches  on  center.  The 
stress  in  the  vertical  steel  shall  not  exceed  ten  thousand  pounds  per  square 
inch. 

C245) 


Sees,  2907=2908 

(d)  The  bell  of  a  belled  pier  shall  have  at  least  four  inches  thickness  at 
its  edge  and,  unless  designed  as  a  spread  footing,  the  sides  shall  slope  at  an 
angle  of  not  less  than  sixty  degrees  with  the  horizontal. 

(e)  Whenever  the  center  of  cross-section  of  a  caisson  pier  at  any  level 
deviates  from  the  center  of  the  load  more  than  one  sixtieth  of  its  height  or 
more  than  one  tenth  its  diameter  it  shall  be  reinforced  according  to  paragraph 
(c)  of  this  section. 

(f )  Piles  under  buildings  of  Types  I  to  IV,  inclusive,  shall  be  capped  with 
concrete  proportioned  for  an  ultimate  strength  of  at  least  two  thousand  pounds 
per  square  inch,  or  with  block  granite.  Concrete  capping  for  piles  shall 
extend  not  less  than  twelve  inches  above  the  pile  heads  and  shall  fill  the  space 
between  and  around  the  piles  for  a  depth  of  at  least  three  inches.  The 
minimum  horizontal  distance  from  the  edge  of  the  cap  to  the  nearest  pile 
surface  shall  be  three  inches  and  there  shall  be  at  least  two  inches  of  concrete 
between  the  top  of  a  pile  and  steel  reinforcement.  Block  granite  capping 
shall  be  not  less  than  twelve  inches  thick.  Each  block  shall  have  a  bearing 
on  at  least  two  piles  and  shall  be  bedded  in  cement  mortar  applied  to  the  pile 
heads.    The  capping  blocks  shall  be  sufficiently  large  to  cover  all  pile  heads. 

(g)  Foundation  walls  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  Part  14. 

[$  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

*Sect.  2908.  Piles — General  Requirements. —  (a)  A  detached 
column  or  pier  supported  by  piles  shall  rest  upon  not  less  than  three  piles, 
but  a  column  or  pier  connected  to  permanent  construction,  which  provides 
adequate  lateral  support  to  the  top  of  the  piles,  may  rest  upon  a  single  pile, 
or  upon  two  piles. 

(b)  A  foundation  wall  of  a  building  not  more  than  one  story  nor  more 
than  twenty  feet  high,  if  supported  laterally  by  masonry,  reinforced  concrete  or 
steel  construction  at  intervals  not  exceeding  twenty  feet,  may  be  supported  by 
a  single  row  of  piles.  If  the  distance  between  such  lateral  supports  exceeds 
ten  feet,  the  capping  shall  be  continuous  and  shall  consist  of  a  structural  steel 
grillage  or  reinforced  concrete  at  least  two  feet  wide  in  which  the  number  of 
square  inches  of  longitudinal  steel  reinforcement  near  each  vertical  face  is  at 
least  one  eighth  times  the  length  in  feet  between  lateral  supports.  Other 
foundation  walls  supported  upon  piles  shall  rest  upon  at  least  two  rows  of 
piles.  The  outer  rows  shall  be  at  least  two  feet  apart  on  centers  under  build- 
ings up  to  thirty  feet  in  height  and  at  least  three  feet  apart  under  buildings 
higher  than  thirty  feet. 

(c)  The  excavation  for  pile  foundations,  wherever  practicable,  shall  be 
completed  to  pile  cut-off  grade,  or  lower,  before  piles  are  driven.  In  no  case 
shall  piles  be  driven  through  more  than  three  feet  of  unexcavated  material 
above  pile  cut-off  grade. 

(d)  The  method  of  driving  shall  be  such  as  not  to  impair  the  strength 
of  the  pile  and  shall  meet  with  the  approval  of  the  commissioner.  A  steel  or 
iron  follower  may  be  used  subject  to  his  approval.  It  shall  be  equipped  with 
a  suitable  soeket  encasing  the  pile  head  sufficiently  to  prevent  damage  while 

(246) 


Sees.  2908=2909 

driving.  Shattered,  broomed  or  otherwise  damaged  pile  heads  shall  be  cut 
fyack  to  sound  material  before  driving  with  the  follower.  If  a  wooden  driving 
block  is  used,  it  shall,  at  the  time  it  is  used  for  measuring  the  penetration, 
be  of  sound  hard  wood  equal  to  oak,  not  more  than  twelve  inches  in  height, 
with  the  grain  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  pile,  and  shall  be  enclosed  in  a  steel 
casing  of  adequate  strength  to  resist  lateral  distension. 

(e)  Piles  shall  not  be  jetted  except  with  specific  approval  of  the  com- 
missioner.   After  jetting,  piles  shall  be  driven  to  the  required  resistance. 

(f)  Additional  piles  shall  be  driven  to  replace  piles  injured  during  driving, 
and  to  supplement  piles  having  capacity  less  than  required  by  the  design. 

(g)  Types  of  pile  construction  not  specifically  provided  for  in  this  part, 
such  as  rolled  steel  sections  or  other  types,  shall  meet  requirements  as  may 
be  prescribed  by  the  commissioner. 

[  *As  amended  by  Orel.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  2909.  Allowable  Load  on  Piles. —  (a)  The  supporting  capacity 
of  the  piles  shall  be  obtained  from  bearing  upon  or  embedment  in  satisfactory 
bearing  materials  as  defined  in  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  four. 

(b)  The  allowable  pile  loading  shall  be  limited  by  the  provision  that  the 
vertical  pressures  in  the  bearing  materials  at  or  below  the  points  of  the  piles 
produced  by  the  loads  on  all  piles  in  a  foundation  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable 
bearing  values  of  such  materials,  as  specified  in  sections  twenty-nine  hundred 
and  four,  twenty-nine  hundred  and  fifteen,  and  twenty-nine  hundred  and 
sixteen.  Piles  or  pile  groups  shall  be  assumed  to  transfer  their  loads  to  the 
bearing  materials  by  spreading  the  load  uniformly  at  an  angle  of  sixty  degrees 
with  the  horizontal,  starting  at  a  polygon  circumscribing  the  piles  at  the 
top  of  the  satisfactory  bearing  stratum  in  which  they  are  embedded,  but 
the  area  considered  as  supporting  the  load  shall  not  extend  beyond  the  inter- 
section of  the  sixty  degree  planes  of  adjacent  piles  or  pile  groups. 

(c)  The  allowable  load  on  each  pile  shall  be  further  limited  by  the  require- 
ment that  such  load  shall  not  cause  excessive  movement  of  the  pile  relative 
to  the  soil.  Satisfactory  proof  of  this  load  for  all  soil  conditions  and  all 
types  of  piles  can  be  obtained  from  load  tests  conducted  in  accordance  with 
section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  seventeen.  In  the  absence  of  such  proof  of 
the  supporting  capacity,  the  load  on  any  pile  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable 
value  determined  in  accordance  with  paragraphs  (d)  to  (h)  inclusive  of  this 
section. 


(d) 


2Wh 

( 1 )  R  = for  drop  hammers 

s  +  1-0 
2Wh 

(2)  R  =  for  steam  hammers 

s  +  0.1 

in  which  W  =  weight  of  striking  part  of  hammer  in  pounds 

h  =  height  of  fall  of  striking  part  of  hammer  in  feet 

s  =  average  penetration  per  blow,  in  inches,  for  the  last  five 

blows 
R  =  allowable  pile  load  in  pounds 

(247) 


Sees.  2909=2910 

(e)  For  double-acting  steam  hammers,  the  value  of  "s"  must  be  deter- 
mined onty  when  the  hammer  is  operating  at  the  maximum  number  of  blows 
per  minute  as  scheduled  in  the  Manufacturers'  Specifications. 

(f)  The  data  used  in  determining  driving  resistance  shall  be  obtained 
during  the  driving  and  not  upon  re-driving  when  a  pile  has  been  allowed  to 
stand  more  than  one  hour  after  having  been  driven.  When  driving  wooden 
piles,  broomed  heads  shall  be  cut  to  sound  wood  before  making  penetration 
measurements. 

(g)  For  cast-in-place  concrete  piles  in  which  the  driven  casing  is  with- 
drawn leaving  a  shell  pile  of  smaller  diameter  than  the  outer  casing,  the  pile- 
driving  formula  may  be  used  for  piles  in  soils  of  Classes  11  and  12  and  it  may 
also  be  used  for  piles  driven  into  soils  of  other  classes  when  the  supporting 
capacity  obtained  from  the  formula  is  at  least  doubled  in  the  last  three  feet  of 
driving. 

(h)  The  commissioner  shall  require  a  competent  inspector,  qualified  by 
experience  and  training  and  satisfactory  to  him,  to  be  on  the  work  at  all 
times  while  piles  are  being  driven.  The  inspector  shall  make  an  accurate 
record  of  the  material  and  the  principal  dimensions  of  each  pile,  of  the  weight 
and  fall  of  the  hammer,  if  a  single-acting  steam  hammer  or  drop  hammer, 
and  the  size  and  make,  number  of  blows  per  minute,  and  energy  per  blow, 
if  a  double-acting  steam  hammer,  together  with  the  average  penetration  of 
each  pile  for  at  least  the  last  five  blows  and  the  grades  at  tip  and  cut-off. 
A  copy  of  these  records  shall  be  filed  and  kept  in  the  office  of  the  commissioner. 
Where  piles  are  driven  through  soft  soil  to  hard  bearing  material,  providing 
high  point  resistance,  the  grades  of  all  piles  or  pile  shells  previously  driven 
shall  be  measured  to  detect  uplift;  and  if  uplift  occurs  in  any  pile  or  pile  shell 
while  other  piles  are  being  driven,  such  pile  or  pile  shells  shall  be  rejected  and 
additional  piles  driven  to  obtain  the  required  resistance. 
[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  2910.  Wooden  Piles. —  (a)  Every  wooden  pile  shall  be  in  one 
piece,  cut  from  a  sound  live  tree,  and  free  from  defects  which  may  materially 
impair  its  strength  or  durability.  It  shall  be  butt-cut  above  the  ground  swell, 
and  shall  have  substantially  uniform  taper  from  butt  to  tip.  Wooden  piles 
shall  measure  at  least  six  inches  in  smallest  diameter  at  the  tip,  at  least  eleven 
inches  in  smallest  diameter  two  feet  from  the  butt  and  at  least  ten  inches  in 
smallest  diameter  at  the  cut-off,  these  measurements  being  taken  under  the 
bark.  The  axis  of  a  wooden  pile  shall  not  deviate  from  a  straight  line  more 
than  one  inch  for  each  ten  feet  of  length  nor  more  than  six  inches.  Square 
timber  of  approved  quality  may  be  used  as  piling,  in  which  case  the  average 
cross-section  shall  be  not  less  than  the  commercial  ten  by  ten  inch  section. 

(b)  The  load  on  wooden  piles  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable  load  specified 
in  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  nine  and,  for  piles  of  the  minimum  dimen- 
sions specified  in  this  section,  shall  not  exceed  twelve  tons  for  spruce,  Norway 
pine,  and  woods  of  similar  strength,  nor  sixteen  tons  for  oak,  southern  yellow 
pine,  and  woods  of  similar  strength.  These  limits  may  be  increased  one  ton 
for  each  inch  by  which  the  diameters  at  both  cut-off  and  tip  exceed  the  minima 
specified. 

(248) 


Sees.  2910-2912 

(c)  Piles  shall  be  cut  to  sound  wood  before  capping  is  placed.  The 
cut-off  grade  shall  be  determined  by  the  commissioner  so  as  to  be  below  the 
probable  permanent  ground  water  level. 

(d)  The  center- to-center  spacing  of  wooden  piles  shall  be  not  less  than 
twenty-four  inches  nor  less  than  twice  the  butt  diameter. 

Sect.  2911.  Precast  Concrete  Piles. —  (a)  Precast  concrete  piles  shall 
be  designed,  cast  and  cured  to  have  the  strength  necessary  for  handling  and 
for  driving.  The  concrete  shall  be  proportioned  to  have  a  compressive 
strength  of  at  least  three  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch  as  specified  in 
Part  26.  No  pile  shall  be  handled  or  driven  until  it  has  cured  sufficiently  to 
develop  the  necessary  strength  as  shown  by  standard  test  specimens  made 
from  the  same  batches  of  concrete.    Each  pile  shall  be  cast  in  one  piece. 

(b)  Precast  concrete  piles  shall  be  reinforced,  except  as  otherwise  specified 
in  this  section,  in  the  manner  specified  for  Columns  in  Part  26.  The  ratio 
of  the  area  of  the  longitudinal  reinforcement  to  the  cross-sectional  area  of  the 
pile  at  mid-length  shall  be  not  less  than  two  per  cent.  For  a  length  of  four 
feet  at  both  ends  of  the  pile,  lateral  ties  shall  be  spaced  not  over  three  inches 
center-to-center  or  an  equivalent  spiral  shall  be  provided.  Reinforcing  steel 
shall  be  embedded  in  the  concrete  forming  the  body  of  the  pile  at  least  one  and 
one  half  inches  from  any  exposed  surface  and  in  piles  exposed  to  sea  water 
such  coverage  shall  be  at  least  three  inches. 

(c)  The  minimum  spacing  center-to-center  of  precast  concrete  piles  shall 
be  two  and  one  half  times  the  square  root  of  the  cross-sectional  area  at  the  butt. 

(d)  The  load  on  a  precast  concrete  pile  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable 
load  specified  in  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  nine,  and  shall  not  exceed 
thirty  tons  for  a  pile  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-nine  square  inches  cross- 
sectional  area.  For  piles  of  larger  cross-section,  this  limit  of  load  may  be 
increased  in  proportion  to  increase  in  area. 

(e)  When  precast  concrete  piles  are  driven  to  or  into  bearing  materials 
of  Classes  1  to  5  inclusive,  or  through  materials  containing  boulders,  they 
shall  have  metal  tips  of  approved  design.  The  driving  equipment  shall  be 
such  as  to  avoid  injury  to  the  piles. 

Sect.  2912.  Cast=in=Place  Concrete  Piles. —  (a)  Cast-in-place  con- 
crete piles  shall  be  so  made  and  placed  as  to  insure  the  exclusion  of  all  foreign 
matter  and  to  secure  a  well-formed  unit  of  full  cross-section.  In  forming 
such  piles,  the  concrete  shall  not  be  poured  through  water. 

(b)  The  spacing  of  cast-in-place  concrete  piles  shall  be  sufficient  to  insure 
the  preservation  of  the  full  cross-section.  The  spacing  center-to-center 
shall  be  not  less  than  twice  the  average  diameter  of  the  embedded  portion 
of  the  pile,  nor  less  than  thirty  inches.  When  the  center-to-center  spacing 
is  less  than  two  and  one  quarter  times  the  average  diameter  of  the  embedded 
portion  of  the  pile,  or  less  than  thirty-six  inches,  no  pile  shall  be  filled  with 
concrete  until  all  adjacent  piles  within  a  radius  of  four  and  one  half  average 
pile  diameters  and  not  less  than  five  feet  have  been  driven  to  the  required 
resistance. 

(249) 


Sees.  2912=2913 

(c)  The  load  on  a  cast-in-place  concrete  pile  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable 
load  specified  in  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  nine,  and  shall  not  exceed 
thirty  tons  for  a  conical  pile  having  an  eight-inch  tip  and  an  average  diameter 
of  eleven  inches,  for  an  uncased  cylindrical  pile  having  a  diameter  of  sixteen 
inches  and  for  a  cased  cylindrical  pile  having  an  average  diameter  of  fourteen 
inches.  This  allowable  load  may  be  increased  for  larger  piles  in  proportion 
to  the  increase  in  pile  area. 


Sect.  2913.  Concrete=Filled  Cylindrical  Steel  Piles.— (a)  Piles 
consisting  of  concrete-filled  steel  cylindrical  shells  filled  after  driving,  shall 
have  an  inside  diameter  not  less  than  ten  inches  and  a  shell  thickness  of  at 
least  three-eighths  inch,  except  that  ten-inch  and  twelve-inch  piles  may  have 
a  shell  thickness  of  five-sixteenths  inch.  Splices  of  shells  shall  be  of  such 
material  and  design  as  to  insure  alignment  of  shells  and  transmission  of  the 
load.  The  ends  of  each  section  of  the  shell  shall  be  perpendicular  to  its  axis, 
and  all  bearing  surfaces  shall  be  smooth  and  true.  The  outside  diameter 
of  the  pile  shall  be  at  least  one  fortieth  of  its  length. 

(b)  After  driving,  the  inside  of  the  shell  shall  be  carefully  cleaned  to  the 
bottom  and  its  direction  and  cross-section  verified.  The  cross-sectional 
area  shall  not  vary  more  than  ten  per  cent  from  its  original  cross-section. 
Shells  shall  be  filled  with  concrete  having  an  ultimate  strength  of  at  least  two 
thousand  pounds  per  square  inch.  Concrete  shall  not  be  placed  in  water 
except  with  written  approval  of  the  commissioner  after  submission  of  detailed 
specifications  for  procedure. 

(c)  The  center-to-center  spacing  of  concrete-filled  steel  piles,  when 
driven  open-ended,  shall  be  not  less  than  the  diameter  of  the  shell  plus  ten 
inches,  and  not  less  than  two  feet.  When  driven  with  closed  ends,  the  spac- 
ing shall  be  as  provided  in  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  twelve  for  cast- 
in-place  concrete  piles. 

(d)  The  load  on  a  concrete-filled  steel  pile  shall  not  exceed  the  safe  load 
on  the  concrete  at  four  hundred  pounds  per  square  inch  plus  that  on  the  steel 
shell  at  six  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch,  after  deducting  one  eighth 
inch  in  thickness  from  the  outside  of  the  tube;  nor  shall  the  load  carried  by 
the  steel  exceed  one  half  of  the  total  load  on  the  pile.  If  a  pile  as  actually 
driven  is  longer  than  forty  diameters,  the  limit  of  load  specified  in  this  para- 
graph shall  be  reduced  by  a  percentage  equal  to  the  excess  length  divided 
by  the  diameter.  If  splices  below  the  upper  section  are  closer  than  twenty 
feet,  the  safe  load  on  the  pile  shall  be  reduced  five  per  cent  for  each  splice 
in  excess  of  the  number  required  for  twenty-foot  spacing. 

(e)  The  load  on  a  concrete-filled  steel  pile  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable 
load  determined  in  accordance  with  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  nine. 
Where  it  is  positively  proven  that  the  piles  rest  upon  sound  rock  of  known 
quality,  the  allowable  bearing  value  of  the  rock,  instead  of  the  allowable 
load  determined  in  accordance  with  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  nine 
may  limit  the  allowable  load  on  the  pile. 

(250) 


Sees.  2915-2916 

(f)  When  a  single  concrete-filled  steel  pile  supports  a  detached  column  or 
pier,  as  provided  in  section  twenty-nine  hundred  and  eight,  the  load  shall 
not  exceed  two  thirds  the  capacity  of  the  pile  determined  as  provided  in 
paragraphs  (d)  and  (e)  of  this  section. 

Sect.  2914.  Composite  Piles. — (a)  Composite  piles  shall  Consist  of 
a  combination  of  any  two  of  the  types  of  piles  provided  for  in  this  part. 
The  minimum  dimensions  of  each  part  shall  be  those  specified  for  piles  of  its 
type.  The  allowable  load  shall  be  limited  by  the  strength  of  the  weaker 
type.  The  joint  between  the  two  types  shall  be  constructed  so  as  to  prevent 
their  separation,  maintain  alignment  and  support  the  load.  The  design  of 
composite  piles,  method  of  driving  and  the  details  of  the  joint  shall  be  subject 
to  the  commissioner's  approval. 

(b)  The  center-to-center  spacing  of  composite  piles  consisting  of  a  wood 
pile  and  a  cast-in-place  concrete  pile  shall  be  limited  by  the  requirements  of 
cast-in-place  concrete  piles. 

Sect.  2915.  Foundation  Load  Tests. — (a)  Whenever  the  allowable 
load  on  a  bearing  material  or  on  a  pile  is  in  doubt,  the  commissioner  may 
require  tests  to  be  made  to  enable  him  to  determine  such  load,  as,  in  his 
opinion,  will  not  cause  dangerous  or  objectionable  settlements.  The  load  so 
determined  shall  be  taken  as  the  allowable  load. 

(b)  The  proposed  testing  apparatus  and  specifications  of  the  procedure 
must  receive  the  approval  of  the  commissioner  before  it  is  used.  Loads  shall 
be  applied  by  direct  weight  or  by  means  of  hydraulic  jack  pressure  that  is 
automatically  maintained  constant.  Tests  shall  be  made  under  the  super- 
vision of  the  commissioner.  Settlement  readings  shall  be  referred  to  a  bench 
mark  established  at  a  sufficient  distance  from  the  test  to  be  unaffected  by  it 
and  they  shall  be  made  by  a  method  which  assures  accuracy  to  the  degree 
hereinafter  specified. 

Sect.  2916.  Load  Tests  of  Bearing  Materials. — (a)  For  bearing 
materials  of  Classes  1  to  5  inclusive,  the  loaded  area  shall  be  at  least  one 
square  foot  and  for  other  classes  at  least  four  square  feet.  For  materials  of 
Classes  6  to  13  inclusive,  the  loaded  area  shall  be  the  full  size  of  the  pit  and 
at  such  depth  that  the  ratio  of  the  width  of  the  loaded  area  to  its  depth  below 
the  immediately  adjacent  ground  surface  is  the  same  as  the  larger  of  the 
following  two  values: 

(1)  Ratio  of  the  width  of  any  footing  to  its  depth  below  the  immediately 
adjacent  ground  surface. 

(2)  Ratio  of  the  width  of  the  entire  foundation  or  group  of  footings  to 
its  depth  below  the  average  surrounding  ground  surface. 

(b)  When  loading  tests  are  made  on  bearing  materials  of  Classes  10  to  13 
inclusive,  suitable  methods  shall  be  used  to  prevent  evaporation  from  the 
materials  being  tested. 

(c)  A  test  load  shall  be  applied  which  will  produce  a  unit  pressure  equal 
to  that  for  which  the  proposed  foundations  are  designed.  This  load  shall  be 
allowed  to  remain  undisturbed  until  no  measurable  settlement  occurs  during 

(251) 


Sees.  2916=2917 

a  period  of  twenty-four  hours.  The  load  shall  then  be  doubled  in  increments 
not  exceeding  twenty-five  per  cent  of  the  design  load.  At  least  four  hours 
shall  elapse  between  the  application  of  successive  increments.  The  total 
load  shall  be  allowed  to  remain  undisturbed  until  no  measurable  settlement 
occurs  during  a  period  of  twenty-four  hours. 

(d)  Measurements  of  settlement  shall  be  accurate  to  one  thirty-second 
inch  and  shall  be  taken  and  recorded  every  hour  during  the  first  six  hours 
after  the  application  of  each  increment,  and  at  least  once  every  twelve  hours 
thereafter. 

(e)  When  the  design  load  upon  bearing  materials  of  Classes  1  to  10 
inclusive  causes  settlement  of  less  than  three  eighths  inch  and  twice  the 
design  load  causes  settlement  of  less  than  one  inch,  the  design  load  shall  be 
allowed;  but  if  medium  or  soft  clay  underlies  these  materials  the  vertical 
pressure  in  such  clay  shall  not  exceed  that  allowed  in  section  twenty-nine 
hundred  and  four. 

(f)  Whenever  the  proposed  foundation  rests  on  or  is  underlain  by  bearing 
materials  of  Classes  11  to  13,  inclusive,  the  results  of  loading  tests  must  be 
interpreted  in  conjunction  with  accurate  soil  profiles  showing  magnitude  and 
variation  of  the  thickness  of  these  strata.  If  this  information,  in  the  opinion 
of  the  commissioner,  is  not  sufficient  to  determine  whether  the  design  load 
will  cause  excessive  settlement,  as  might  occur  due  to  a  thick  stratum  of 
clay,  or  dangerous  differential  settlement,  as  might  occur  when  the  under- 
lying clay  stratum  varies  considerably  in  thickness,  the  commissioner  may 
require  an  analysis  to  be  made  of  the  probable  magnitude,  rate  and  distribu- 
tion of  settlement  of  the  proposed  structure.     Such  analysis  may  be  based 

upon: 

(1)  A  study  of  settlement  records  of  nearby  structures  having  essen- 
tially the  same  foundation  conditions. 

(2)  Consolidation  tests  and  other  investigations  of  undisturbed  samples 
of  the  compressible  materials. 

Sect.  2917.  Pile  Loading  Tests. —  (a)  A  pile  to  be  tested  shall  be 
loaded  to  at  least  twice  the  proposed  working  load,  the  load  being  applied  in 
increments  of  not  over  ten  thousand  pounds.  At  least  four  hours  shall  elapse 
between  the  addition  of  successive  increments.  Measurements  of  the  settle- 
ment, accurate  to  one  thirty-second  inch  shall  be  taken  and  recorded  imme- 
diately before  and  after  each  increment  of  load  is  added.  In  determining 
the  settlement,  proper  deduction  shall  be  made  for  elastic  compression  of  the 
pile  under  the  test  load. 

(b)  The  allowable  pile  load  shall  not  exceed  one  half  of  that  causing  a 
total  settlement  of  one  half  inch  which  remains  constant  for  forty-eight  hours, 
but  the  load  on  the  bearing  materials  at  the  level  of  the  points  or  upon  any 
1  ower  stratum  shall  not  exceed  the  bearing  values  specified  in  sections  twenty- 
nine  hundred  and  four  and  twenty-nine  hundred  and  nine. 


(252) 


Sees.  3001-3002 


PART  30. 

FIRE  EXTINGUISHING  APPARATUS. 

Section 

3001  —  Fire  Extinguishing  Apparatus  Required. 

3002  —  Fire  Department  Standpipes. 

3003  —  First  Aid  Standpipes. 

3004  —  Piping  for  Standpipes. 

3005  —  Automatic  Sprinklers. 

3006  —  Sprinkler  Control. 

3007  —  Water  Supply  for  Fire  Extinguishing. 

3008  —  Portable  Fire  Extinguishers. 

3009  —  Inspection  and  Tests  of  Fire  Extinguishing  Apparatus. 
[3010  —  Access  Panel  for  Fire  Extinguishing  Apparatus.] 

*Section  3001.     Fire  Extinguishing  Apparatus  Required. —  (a)     The 

owner  of  a  building  in  which  fire  extinguishing  apparatus  is  to  be  installed, 
altered  or  repaired  (except  repair  of  leaks  and  other  minor  repairs)  pursuant 
to  the  requirements  of  this  part,  or  connected  to  the  water  supply  of  the  city  of 
Boston,  shall  first  make  application  to  the  building  commissioner  and  obtain 
a  permit  therefor,  in  the  manner  specified  in  section  ten  of  Part  1  and  follow- 
ing sections  relating  to  permits. 

(b)  Fire  extinguishing  apparatus  shall  be  installed  in  buildings  where 
specified  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive.  The  commissioner  shall  require  auto- 
matic sprinklers  in  the  basement  or  basements  of  pre-code  buildings  of  occu- 
pancies of  Groups  E  and  F  or  of  either  of  the  two  combined  with  occupancies 
of  Groups  H  or  I,  when  in  his  judgment  public  safety  demands  such  protection. 

(c)  Such  fire  extinguishing  apparatus  shall  conform  to  the  requirements 
of  this  part  and  to  such  additional  requirements  as  are  specified  in  Parts  3  to  12, 
inclusive. 

(d)  All  devices  used  in  connection  with  fire  extinguishing  systems  shall 
have  the  approval  of  a  recognized  testing  laboratory  and  the  approval  of  the 
commissioner  or  shall  comply  with  the  recommendation  of  the  National  Fire 
Protection  Association. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  3002.  Fire  Department  Standpipes. —  (a)  A  fire  department 
standpipe  shall  consist  of  a  vertical  pipe  with  fire  department  connection  and 
outlet  valves  with  connections  for  hose  at  convenient  points  in  a  building,  by 
means  of  which  the  fire  department  may  distribute  water  through  the  building 
to  hose  to  be  attached  by  the  fire  department  for  extinguishing  a  fire  and  pro- 
tection against  fire  in  an  adjoining  building. 

(b)  Fire  department  standpipes,  where  required,  shall  be  of  such  number 
and  so  located  that  a  stream  from  a  nozzle  on  not  more  than  one  hundred  feet 
of  hose  connected  to  a  standpipe  can  be  played  upon  every  part  of  each  story, 
assuming  the  stream  to  reach  fifty  feet  from  the  nozzle. 

(253) 


Sec.  3002 

(c)  Fire  department  standpipes  shall  be  not  less  than  five  inches  in  internal 
diameter  throughout,  and  in  buildings  higher  than  ninety  feet,  or  where  the 
standpipe  has  a  roof  outlet,  not  less  than  six  inches. 

(d)  Every  fire  department  standpipe  shall  extend  to  every  story  of  the 
building  and  above  the  roof  unless  the  requirement  of  a  roof  outlet  is  waived 
by  the  commissioner.  Such  standpipe  shall  be  located  in  a  stair  enclosure  or 
other  approved  location  and  shall  have,  in  every  story  above  the  first,  an 
outlet  two  and  one  half  inches  in  inside  diameter  threaded  for  standard  fire 
hose  coupling,  and  an  approved  angle  globe  valve.  The  outlet  above  the  roof 
shall  have  two  such  hose  connections,  each  with  a  valve.  Hose  outlets  shall 
be  not  more  than  five  feet  above  the  floor,  roof  or  stair  landing.  Neither  the 
standpipe,  outlet  nor  valve  shall  project  within  the  width  required  for  a 
stairway  as  an  exit.  Convenient  to  every  roof  outlet  shall  be  provided  and 
properly  stored  not  less  than  fifty  feet  of  approved  two  and  one  half  inch  linen 
hose  and  a  tapered  nozzle  with  one  and  one  eighth  inch  smooth  orifice. 

(e)  Every  fire  department  standpipe  shall  have  a  fire  department  con- 
nection in  an  exterior  wall  of  the  building,  fronting  on  a  street,  in  an  approved 
location  not  less  than  ten  inches  nor  more  than  forty-eight  inches  above  the 
sidewalk  or  ground.  Two  or  more  standpipes  may  have  a  common  fire  depart- 
ment connection.  Where  a  building  is  required  to  have  two  or  more  fire 
department  standpipes  and  faces  on  two  streets  it  shall  have  two  fire  depart- 
ment connections  remote  from  one  another.  The  fire  department  connection 
shall  be  of  approved  design,  shall  have  two  couplings  and  if  it  serves  two  or 
more  standpipes,  shall  have  three  couplings  of  not  less  than  two  and  one  half 
inches  inside  diameter  threaded  to  receive  standard  city  of  Boston  fire  hose, 
and  protected  by  approved  caps. 

(f )  Where  a  building  contains  two  or  more  fire  department  standpipes  and 
two  or  more  fire  department  connections,  they  shall  be  cross  connected,  but 
the  commissioner  may  waive  this  requirement  subject  to  such  condition  as  he 
may  in  any  case  specify.  Each  fire  department  standpipe  connection  shall 
De  marked  by  a  cast  bronze  or  brass  plate  embossed  to  indicate  its  connection 
to  a  standpipe. 

(g)  A  fire  department  standpipe  shall  be  connected  to  an  adequate  source 
of  water  supply  and  if  subject  to  freezing  shall  be  equipped  with  an  approved 
control  valve.  An  approved  check  valve  shall  be  installed  in  the  water 
supply  pipe  which  will  prevent  water  from  the  fire  department  connection 
from  backing  up  in  the  supply  pipes,  and  a  check  valve  and  automatic  drain 
shall  be  installed  between  the  standpipe  and  the  fire  department  connection 
to  prevent  water  from  reaching  a  point  where  it  would  freeze. 

(h)  For  protection  against  fire  during  construction,  in  a  building  required 
to  have  one  or  more  fire  department  standpipes,  they  shall  be  installed  with 
fire  department  connection  and  extended  upward  with  the  building,  always 
reaching  within  one  story  of  the  highest  constructed  floor.  During  construc- 
tion of  the  building,  such  standpipes  shall  be  connected  to  an  approved 
source  of  water  supply  and  the  outlets  thereof  shall  be  provided  with  hose 
and  nozzles  as  required  by  the  commissioner.  Water  shall  be  kept  turned 
on  in  such  standpipes  during  construction  except  in  freezing  weather  and 
when  the  pipe  is  being  extended.  The  shut-off  valve  shall  be  accessible  and 
the  standpipes  in  readiness  for  use  at  all  times. 

(254) 


Sees.  3003=3005 

*Sect.  3003.  First  Aid  Standpipes. —  (a)  A  first  aid  standpipe  shall 
consist  of  a  pipe  or  system  of  pipes  connected  to  an  adequate  source  of  water 
supply,  with  valves,  hose  connections,  hose  and  nozzles  at  convenient  points 
inside  the  building  for  use  of  the  occupants  in  extinguishing  a  fire. 

(b)  Where  first  aid  standpipes  are  required  they  shall  have  hose  stations 
in  every  story  in  such  number  and  so  loc  ated  that  a  stream  from  a  nozzle  on 
the  length  of  hose  connected  to  an  outlet  can  be  played  on  every  part  of  the 
story  required  to  have  such  protection,  assuming  the  stream  to  reach  twenty 
feet  from  the  nozzle.  Pipes  shall  be  so  located  as  to  be  safe  from  injury  by 
frost  or  otherwise. 

(c)  The  risers  of  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  not  less  than  two  and  one 
half  inches  internal  diameter.  Branches  to  singl  e  hose  stations  shall  be  not ' 
less  than  one  and  one  half  inches. 

(d)  A  first  aid  hose  station  shall  consist  of  an  angle  globe  valve,  threaded 
hose  coupling,  not  more  than  fifty  feet  of  approved  linen  hose,  all  one  and 
one  half  inches  in  diameter,  and  a  tapered  nozzle  with  one  half  inch  smooth 
orifice,  attached,  ready  for  use  and  mounted  in  an  approved  rack  or  reel,  pref- 
erably in  a  cabinet.  The  valve  and  hose  shall  be  not  over  five  feet  above  the 
floor. 

(e)  First  aid  hose  stations  shall  be  located  in  corridors  or  other  approved 
locations  and  shall  be  visible  and  accessible  at  all  times. 

(f)  A  fire  department  standpipe  may  serve  as  piping  for  a  first  aid  stand- 
pipe  if  it  is  connected  to  an  adequate  water  supply  as  provided  in  section 
thirty  hundred  and  two  but  there  shall  be  no  interference  between  first  aid 
hose  stations  and  fire  department  outlets. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

jSect.  3004.  Piping  for  Standpipes.  —  (a)  Pipe  for  fire  department 
or  first  aid  standpipes  shall  be  of  wrought  iron  or  steel  of  standard  weight 
except  that  extra  heavy  pipe  and  fittings  shall  be  used  where  the  normal 
water  pressure  may  exceed  one  hundred  and  seventy-five  pounds  per  square 
inch. 

(b)  Piping  shall  be  connected  by  screw  fittings,  flanges  or  unions;  right 
and  left  fittings  shall  not  be  used.  Fittings  for  changes  in  direction  in  pipes 
more  than  two  inches  in  diameter  shall  be  standard  fittings.  Reduction  in 
pipe  size  shall  be  made  by  reducing  fittings. 

[  f  As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  J 

JSect.  3005.  Automatic  Sprinklers.  —  (a)  Where  automatic  sprin- 
klers are  required,  the  system  of  sprinklers  and  piping  shall  be  designed  to 
spray  walls,  ceilings  and  every  portion  of  the  floor  space  in  accordance  with 
the  requirements  of  this  part,  except  that  arrangement  and  placement  of 
sprinklers  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  the  National  Fire  Protec- 
tion Association  or  the  National  Board  of  Fire  Underwriters,  shall  be  accepted 
as  meeting  the  requirements  of  Sections  3005,  3006  and  3007  of  this  code. 

(b)  Where  ceilings  are  smooth  and  unbroken  there  shall  be  a  sprinkler 
for  approximately  every  one  hundred  square  feet  and  the  spacing  in  a  line 
shall  not  exceed  twelve  feet. 

(255) 


Sec.  3005 

(c)  Where  ceilings  are  of  wooden  joist  construction  the  spacing  of  sprin- 
klers shall  not  exceed  eight  feet  at  right  angles  to  the  joists  nor  ten  feet  parallel 
to  the  joists  and  sprinklers  shall  be  staggered  at  third  points  of  the  spacing 
in  lines  at  right  angles  to  the  joists. 

(d)  Where  ceilings  have  beams  not  less  than  five  nor  more  than  twelve 
feet  apart  on  centers,  sprinklers  shall  be  placed  midway  between  beams  not 
over  twelve  feet  apart  and  with  not  more  than  one  hundred  square  feet  of 
ceiling  for  each  sprinkler. 

(e)  Sprinklers  shall  be  placed  under  all  soffits,  inclined  surfaces,  decks, 
tables,  benches,  shelving,  mezzanines,  balconies  or  other  similar  construction 
more  than  forty-two  inches  wide  when  fixed  against  walls  and  more  than 
sixty  inches  wide  when  such  fixtures  are  clear  of  walls  or  partitions,  within 
floor  areas  where  sprinklers  are  required. 

(f)  Sprinklers  shall  not  be  placed  closer  than  twelve  inches  from  posts, 
walls,  hangers  or  other  vertical  construction.  Sprinklers,  where  required, 
shall  be  placed  not  further  from  walls  and  partitions  than  half  the  allowed 
spacing  in  the  given  direction,  and  under  a  joisted  ceiling,  not  more  than  two 
feet. 

(g)  Sprinklers  shall  be  placed  preferably  upright  and  the  deflector  shall 
be  not  more  than  ten  inches  nor  less  than  three  inches  from  the  ceiling  or 
soffit  to  be  sprayed,  the  stream  from  the  orifice  perpendicular  thereto. 

(h)  Sprinklers  shall  be  of  a  type  and  construction  approved  by  the  com- 
missioner and  shall  be  designed  to  release  at  not  more  than  seventy-five 
degrees  Fahrenheit  above  the  maximum  temperature  to  be  expected  at  the 
location  where  installed. 

(i)  Pipe  for  sprinkler  systems  shall  be  of  wrought  iron  or  steel,  of  standard 
weight  and  size,  or  other  approved  pipe,  and  shall  have  not  less  than  the  fol- 
lowing inside  diameters,  depending  on  the  number  of  sprinklers  within  one 
story  and  fire  division  supplied  through  each  section  of  pipe. 

Minimum  Pipe  Sizes  for  Automatic  Sprinklers. 


Number  of  Sprinklers. 

Minimum  Pipe 
Size  (Inches). 

1 

3 

2 

1 

3 

u 

5 

11 

10 

2 

20 

2| 

36 

3 

55 

3| 

80 

4 

140 

5 

200 

6 

400 

8 

(256) 


Sees.  3005-3006 

(j)  In  buildings  of  Type  I  and  Type  II  construction,  the  commissioner 
may  allow  not  more  than  two  hundred  and  fifty  sprinklers  to  be  supplied 
through  a  six-inch  pipe  and  not  more  than  five  hundred  sprinklers  through 
an  eight-inch  pipe,  in  one  story  and  fire  division. 

(k)  Piping  shall  be  connected  by  screw  fittings,  flanges,  or  unions;  right 
and  left  fittings  shall  not  be  used.  Fittings  for  changes  in  direction  in  mains 
and  risers  shall  be  standard  fittings.  Reduction  in  pipe  size  shall  be  made 
by  reducing  fittings. 

(1)  The  system  of  sprinkler  piping  shall  be  well  supported  and  pitched  to 
drain  completely.  Piping  and  equipment  shall  be  safe  from  injury  by  frost 
or  otherwise. 

(m)  Sprinkler  systems  or  portions  thereof  subject  to  freezing  shall  be 
equipped  with  approved  dry  pipe  valves.  The  capacity  of  a  system  depending 
upon  a  single  dry  valve  shall  not  exceed  three  hundred  twenty-five  gallons 
unless  provided  with  a  quick  opening  device,  in  which  case  the  capacity  shall 
not  exceed  five  hundred  seventy-five  gallons.  The  air  pressure  maintained 
in  a  dry  pipe  system  shall  not  exceed  thirty-five  pounds.  Every  dry  pipe 
valve  shall  be  equipped  to  give  an  alarm  upon  operation.  The  commissioner 
may  allow  that  part  of  an  automatic  sprinkler  system  controlled  by  a  cold 
weather  valve  to  be  shut  off  and  drained  in  cold  weather  subject  to  such 
conditions  as  he  shall  in  any  case  specify  and  the  Fire  Commissioner  so  notified 
in  writing  by  the  department. 

(n)  Nothing  in  this  code  shall  be  construed  to  prohibit  the  installation 
of  a  system  of  sprinklers  containing  twenty-five  or  less  heads  attached  to  the 
domestic  water  supply,  provided  the  system  is  not  mandatorily  required 
elsewhere  by  this  code. 

HAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2} 

*Sect.  3006.  Sprinkler  Control. —  (a)  The  main  supply  pipe  of  a 
sprinkler  system  and  each  connection  to  the  service  main,  if  more  than  one, 
shall  have  a  gate  valve  of  approved  indicator  pattern  with  bronze  stem,  a 
check  valve,  test  pipe  and  pressure  gage,  installed  in  approved  locations. 
The  main  supply  pipe  of  the  system  shall  have  a  visible  flow  test  pipe  not 
less  than  one  and  one  half  inches  in  diameter  with  approved  discharge.  Valve 
stems  shall  not  be  placed  below  the  horizontal  and  shall  be  within  seventy- 
eight  inches  from  the  floor  or  shall  be  made  accessible  by  permanent  ladders 
fixed  in  place,  or  other  approved  means.  Where  sprinklers  in  two  or  more 
fire  divisions  are  supplied  through  one  or  a  set  of  two  or  more  service  con- 
nections, each  fire  division  shall  have  a  separate  branch  supply  pipe  with 
control  valve  and  drain.  Every  required  sprinkler  system  shall  have  a  fire 
department  connection,  except  that  the  commissioner  may  waive  this  require- 
ment, subject  to  such  conditions  as  he  may  specify,  where  the  protected 
space  is  visible  and  directly  accessible  from  a  street  or  alley  or  where  the 
number  of  sprinklers  in  any  story  and  fire  division  does  not  exceed  twenty-five, 
(b)  A  fire  department  connection  shall  be  of  approved  design  and  threaded 
for  two  and  one  half  inch  standard  city  of  Boston  fire  hose  and  protected  by 
approved  caps.  The  pipe  leading  therefrom  shall  have  a  check  valve  and  an 
automatic  drain  to  prevent  water  from  reaching  a  point  where  it  would  freeze. 

(257) 


Sees.  3006=3007 

(c)  Every  fire  department  sprinkler  connection  shall  be  marked  with 
a  cast  bronze  or  brass  plate  embossed  to  indicate  its  connection  to  sprinklers. 

(d)  Every  system  of  automatic  sprinklers  shall  be  connected  to  a  per- 
manent and  adequate  water  supply  as  provided  in  section  thirty  hundred 
and  seven. 

(e)  An  inspector's  test  valve  shall  be  installed  at  the  top  of  every  auto- 
matic sprinkler  system. 

(f)  Where  a  main  supply  pipe  serves  automatic  sprinklers  in  a  basement 
or  sub-basement  concealed  from  view,  or  a  remote  building  or  a  garage  or 
part  of  a  building,  an  approved  sprinkler  alarm  shall  be  provided  unless  the 
commissioner  shall  waive  this  requirement. 

(g)  Neither  goods,  furniture,  machinery  or  other  materials  or  equipment 
shall  be  so  placed  as  to  interfere  with  the  effectiveness  of  sprinklers  nor  shall 
sprinkler  piping  be  used  to  support  such  materials  or  equipment. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  3007.  Water  Supply  for  Fire  Extinguishing. —  (a)  Water 
supply  for  required  fire  extinguishing  apparatus  shall  be  taken  from  the 
"high  service"  city  water  mains  where  available  and,  except  when  general 
service  is  permitted,  shall  be  independent  of  the  supply  for  sanitary,  in- 
dustrial or  other  purposes. 

(b)  In  buildings  where  first  aid  standpipes  or  automatic  sprinklers  are 
required  and  where  the  city  water  supply,  with  a  sufficient  flow  properly  to 
supply  the  sprinklers,  will  not  furnish  a  pressure  of  at  least  thirty-five  pounds 
per  square  inch  at  the  highest  first  aid  hose  station,  and  twelve  pounds  per 
square  inch  at  the  highest  sprinkler,  an  auxiliary  water  supply  for  fire  ex- 
tinguishing apparatus  shall  be  provided. 

(c)  An  auxiliary  water  supply  for  fire  extinguishing  apparatus  shall 
consist  of  a  storage  tank  or  a  fire  pump  or  both.  A  storage  tank  shall  be 
either  gravity  or  approved  pressure  type. 

(d )  A  gravity  storage  tank  shall  have  a  capacity  not  less  than  five  thousand 
gallons  of  water  and  the  bottom  of  the  tank  shall  be  not  less  than  twenty  feet 
above  the  highest  sprinkler  or  hose  outlet.  The  tank  and  connected  pipes 
shall  have  protection  from  freezing. 

(e)  A  pneumatic  pressure  storage  tank  of  such  capacity  (not  less  than 
thirty-five  hundred  gallons  of  water)  and  design,  and  with  such  automatic 
pumping  equipment  as  will  furnish  as  much  water,  at  the  same  pressure* 
at  the  upper  outlets  of  the  S3^stem,  as  the  gravity  storage  tank  specified  in 
paragraph  (d)  of  this  section,  may  be  substituted  therefor  with  the  approval 
of  the  commissioner. 

(f)  A  fire  pump,  to  serve  as  an  auxiliary  water  supply,  shall  be  auto- 
matically controlled,  shall  be  connected  to  the  city  mains  and  shall  be  capable 
of  delivering  water  at  the  rate  of  twenty  gallons  per  minute  for  each  sprinkler 
up  to  fifty  in  any  one  story  and  fire  division,  against  a  head  sufficient  to 
furnish  a  pressure  of  twelve  pounds  per  square  inch  at  the  highest  sprinklers 
and  of  thirty-five  pounds  per  square  inch  at  the  highest  outlets  of  connected 

(258) 


Sees.  3007=3010 

standpipes  in  the  building  and  shall  be  of  a  type  satisfactory  to  the  commis- 
sioner. A  fire  pump  shall  be  connected  to  a  permanent,  reliable  and  approved 
source  of  power. 

(g)  Auxiliary  water  supply  equipment  shall  have  all  necessary  approved 
gate  and  check  valves.  Motors  and  other  electrical  equipment  shall  be  en- 
closed, or  protected  by  a  hood  and  by  a  grille  or  partition  of  incombustible 

[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

Sect.  3008.  Portable  Fire  Extinguishers.—  (a)  A  portable  fire 
extinguisher  shall  consist  of  a  container  holding  not  less  than  two  and  one  half 
gallons  of  extinguishing  liquid  so  arranged  and  equipped  that  pressure  may 
be  generated  and  the  contents  discharged  through  a  hose  and  nozzle;  or  a 
portable  extinguisher  of  other  type  approved  as  equal  thereto  by  the  fire 
commissioner.  The  design  and  construction  of  portable  fire  extinguishers 
shall  be  approved  by  the  fire  commissioner. 

(b)  Portable  fire  extinguishers,  where  required,  shall  be  mounted  in 
corridors  or  other  approved  locations  generally  visible  to  the  occupants  of  the 
building.  Where  they  are  placed  in  cabinets  they  shall  be  visible  and  the 
doors  shall  be  unlocked  or  of  glass  which  can  be  broken  to  give  access  to  the 
extinguisher  in  case  of  fire. 

(c)  Portable  fire  extinguishers  shall  be  discharged  and  recharged  as  often 
as  shall  be  generally  required  by  the  fire  commissioner  for  extinguishers  of 
each  type,  and  shall  be  recharged  at  once  after  use. 

JSect.  3009.  Inspection  and  Tests  of  Fire=Extinguishing  Ap= 
paratus. —  (a)  Every  system  of  automatic  sprinklers  and  all  parts  thereof 
shall  satisfactorily  meet  a  pressure  test  of  two  hundred  pounds  per  square 
inch  and  when  water  pressure  is  over  two  hundred  pounds  it  shall  be  tested 
to  fifty  pounds  above  the  highest  static  pressure. 

(b)  Standpipes  and  all  parts  thereof  except  hose  shall  satisfactorily  meet 
a  pressure  test  of  two  hundred  and  fifty  pounds  per  square  inch  at  ground 
level. 

(c)  First  aid  hose  and  other  hose  required  for  extinguishing  purposes 
shall  satisfactorily  meet  a  pressure  test,  unless  this  requirement  is  waived  by 
the  building  commissioner,  in  his  presence,  when  first  installed,  and  shall  be 
thoroughly  dried  before  it  is  hung  in  racks  or  reels. 

(d)  All  required  fire  extinguishing  apparatus,  except  as  provided  in 
section  three  thousand  and  eight,  shall  be  inspected  at  least  once  each  year 
and  such  tests  shall  be  made  as  the  building  commissioner  shall  require. 
Defective  hose  and  other  defective  parts  shall  be  replaced  without  delay  on 
order  of  the  building  commissioner. 

(e)  Piping  shall  not  be  concealed  until  tested  and  approved. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  } 

*Sect.  3010.     Access    Panel    for    Fire    Extinguishing    Apparatus.— 

Where  basement  or  cellar  space  below  the  ground  floor  of  a  store  is  used  for 
storage  purposes  of  any  description  access  panels  shall  be  provided  in  open- 
ings incorporated  in  the  ground  floor  construction  for  use  of  fire  department. 

(259) 


Sec.  3010 

Each  access  panel  opening  shall  be  a  minimum  of  ten  inches  square  and  pro- 
vided with  a  removable  cover  of  suitable  strength  to  receive  the  live  load  for 
which  the  floor  is  designed.  This  removable  cover  shall  be  easily  distinguish- 
able from  the  rest  of  the  floor.  One  such  opening  shall  be  located  ten  feet  in 
from  the  main  entrance  door  to  store  in  line  perpendicular  to  door.  There 
shall  be  additional  access  panel  openings  in  the  same  continuous  line  as  the 
initial  installation  every  twenty  feet  or  portion  thereof  so  that  each  opening 
shall  provide  provisions  for  fire  extinguishing  apparatus  to  cover  each  four 
hundred  square  feet  of  floor  space.  Where  finished  material  of  floor  would 
cover  or  conceal  access  panel  such  covering  shall  be  painted  red  directly  over 
each  opening. 

Where  ceiling  material  is  provided  on  the  under  side  of  ground  floor  con- 
struction the  access  panel  openings  shall  be  provided  with  a  breakable  glass 
seal  located  below  the  removable  cover.  This  glass  seal  may  be  located  at 
the  level  of  the  ceiling,  if  above  the  level  of  the  ceiling  the  four  sides  of  the 
panel  opening  between  the  ceiling  and  the  removable  cover  shall  be  finished 
with  the  materials  joining  the  ceiling  proper,  or  equivalent  fire-resistive 
material. 

The  above  requirements  shall  not  apply  if  the  basement  or  cellar  is  equipped 
with  an  approved  automatic  sprinkler  system. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 


(260) 


Sec.  3101 


PART  31. 

PLUMBING. 

Section 

3101  —  Plumbing  in  Buildings. 

3102  —  Definitions  pertaining  to  Plumbing. 

3103  —  The  Drainage  System. 

3104  —  Soil  and  Waste  Pipes. 

3105  —  Rain  Water  Drains. 

3106  —  Indirect  Wastes. 

3107  —  Mechanically  Discharged  Drainage. 

3108  — Traps. 

3109  —  Venting. 

3110  — Vent  Pipes. 

3111  —  Buildings  more  than  One  Hundred  and  Twenty=five  Feet 

High. 

3112  —  Materials  of  the  Drainage  System. 

3113  —  Water  Supply. 

31 14  —  Hot  Water  Supply. 

3115  —  Plumbing  Fixtures  and  Units. 

3116  —  Cast  Iron  Pipes. 

3117  —  Wrought  Iron  and  Steel  Pipes. 

3118  —  Brass,  Copper  and  Lead  Pipes. 

3119  —  Hangers  and  Supports. 

3120  —  Inspection  and  Tests. 

3121  —  Prohibited  Fixtures,  Fittings  and  Connections. 

[  All  heading  as  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8] 

*Section  3101.  Plumbing  in  Buildings. —  (a)  Every  building  where 
people  live,  work  or  assemble  shall  have  a  supply  of  pure  and  wholesome 
water  and  a  drainage  system. 

(b)  Every  building  shall  have  such,  toilet  accommodations  and  plumbing 
fixtures  as  are  specified  in  Parts  3  to  12,  inclusive,  of  this  code  or  as  required 
by  any  Massachusetts  State  Law  or  Regulation.  If  not  so  covered,  to  be  as 
directed  by  the  Building  Commissioner  or  Health  Commissioner  of  the  City 
of  Boston. 

(c)  Plumbing  fixtures  shall  not  be  installed  in  rooms  which  do  not  con- 
form to  the  requirements  of  this  code. 

(d)  A  permit  to  install,  alter  or  repair  plumbing  shall  not  be  issued  unless 
the  work  is  to  be  performed  under  the  supervision  of  a  master  plumber, 
licensed  under  chapter  one  hundred  and  forty-two  of  the  General  Laws  and 
registered  by  the  Commissioner.  An  application  for  a  permit  for  plumbing 
shall  be  signed  as  provided  in  section  one  hundred  and  ten  of  this  code  by  a 
licensed  and  registered  master  plumber. 

(e)  Every  master  plumber  holding  a  certificate  issued  in  accordance  with 
section  three  of  chapter  five  hundred  and  thirty-six  of  the  Acts  of  nineteen 
hundred  and  nine,  section  two  of  chapter  five  hundred  and  ninety-seven  of 

(261) 


Sees.  3101=3102 

the  Acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  ten  or  chapter  five  hundred  and  eighteen 
of  the  Acts  of  nineteen  hundred  and  twelve,  or  licensed  under  chapter  one 
hundred  and  forty-two  of  the  General  Laws,  and  has  a  business  address  in 
Boston  or  does  business  in  Boston,  shall  personally  register  his  name  and 
business  address  with  the  Commissioner  each  year  on  or  before  the  fifteenth 
day  of  May.  He  shall  give  the  Commissioner  immediate  notice  of  any  change 
in  his  business  address. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  3102.  Definitions  Pertaining  to  Plumbing. —  For  the  purpose 
of  this  part  of  the  code  the  words  and  terms  defined  in  this  section  shall  be 
construed  as  so  defined  except  when  qualifying  words  or  the  context  clearly 
indicate  that  another  meaning  is  intended. 

Plumbing. —  Plumbing  is  the  art  of  installing  in  buildings  the  pipes, 
fixtures  and  other  apparatus  for  bringing  in  the  water  supply  and  removing 
liquid  and  water-carried  wastes;  also,  the  system  of  pipes,  fixtures,  and  other 
apparatus  installed  in  buildings  for  distributing  the  water  supply  and  for 
the  disposal  of  liquid  and  water-carried  wastes,  including  valves,  traps,  soil, 
drain,  waste  and  vent  pipes. 

Plumbing  System. —  The  plumbing  system  of  a  building  includes  the 
water  supply  distributing  pipes;  the  fixtures  and  fixture  traps;  the  soil, 
waste  and  vent  pipes;  the  storm  water  drainage;  with  their  devices,  appur- 
tenances, and  connections  all  within  or  adjacent  to  the  building. 

Master  Plumber. —  A  plumber  who  is  licensed  under  chapter  one  hundred 
and  forty- two  of  the  General  Laws  as  a  Master  plumber  having  a  regular 
place  of  business  and  who,  by  himself,  or  journeyman  plumbers  in  his  employ, 
performs  plumbing  work. 

Journeyman  Plumber. —  A  person  who  is  licensed  as  a  journeyman 
plumber  under  chapter  one  hundred  and  forty-two  of  the  General  Laws  and 
who  installs  plumbing  in  the  employ  and  under  the  direction  of  a  master 
plumber. 

Battery  of  Fixtures. —  A  group  of  fixtures  of  one  type,  at  the  same  level, 
not  less  than  three  in  number. 

Branch. —  That  part  of  a  system  of  piping  which  extends  from  the  main 
to  a  fixture  or  fixtures  and  which  serves  to  connect  to  the  main  the  fixtures 
which  are  not  directly  connected  thereto. 

Building  Drain. —  That  part  of  the  lowest  horizontal  piping  of  a  building's 
drainage  system  which  receives  the  discharge  from  soil,  waste  and  other 
drainage  pipes  inside  the  walls  and  extends  to  a  point  ten  feet  outside  the  inner 
face  of  the  exterior  walls. 

Indirect  Waste  Pipes. —  A  waste  pipe  which  is  not  directly  connected 
to  the  drainage  system  but  discharges  into  an  open  sink  or  other  fixture. 

Length  of  Pipe. —  The  developed  length  of  pipe  and  fittings  as  connected, 
measured  along  the  center  line. 

Main. —  A  general  term  signifying  the  principal  line  of  a  system  of  piping 
from  which  branches  extend  to  fixtures. 

Plumbing  Fixture. —  A  receptacle  or  outlet  intended  to  receive  and 
discharge  water,  liquids  or  water-carried  wastes  into  a  drainage  system  either 

(262) 


Sees.  3102=3103 

directly  or  indirectly  or  to  some  other  place  that  the  Building  Commissioner 
may  approve. 

Repair  of  leaks. — Such  repairs  as  are  necessary  to  protect  property  but 
do  not  involve  change  in  construction. 

Soil  Pipe. — A  pipe  which  conveys  the  discharge  of  water-closets,  with  or 
without  the  discharge  of  other  fixtures,  to  the  building  drain. 

Stack. — A  general  term  for  vertical  line  of  soil,  waste  or  vent  piping. 

Trap. — A  fitting  or  device  so  constructed  as  to  prevent  the  passage  of 
air  or  gas  through  a  pipe  without  materially  affecting  the  flow  through  it  of 
sewage  or  waste  water. 

Trap  Seal. — The  vertical  distance  between  the  crown  weir  and  the  invert 
of  the  trap  outlet. 

Vent  Pipe. — A  pipe  provided  to  ventilate  a  drainage  system  and  to  prevent 
back  pressure  and  trap  siphonage. 

Waste  Pipe. — A  pipe  which  receives  the  discharge  of  any  plumbing 
fixture  except  a  water  closet,  and  conveys  it  to  the  building  drain  or  to  a  soil 
pipe. 

Water  Distribution  Pipe. — A  pipe  which  conveys  water  from  the  water 
service  pipe  to  or  from  a  faucet,  valve  or  any  piece  of  equipment  requiring 
water. 

Water  Service  Pipe. — The  water  supply  pipe  from  the  City  main  to  the 
building  served. 

Cross  Connection. — Any  connection  whereby  the  potable  water  supply 
may  become  contaminated  by  any  other  substance  or  liquid. 
[  -\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  } 

JSect.  3103.  The  Drainage  System. — (a)  The  entire  drainage  system 
shall  be  so  designed,  constructed  and  maintained  as  to  dispose  of  sewage 
and  liquid  wastes  with  velocities  of  flow  that  will  avoid  the  deposit  of  solids 
and  prevent  clogging  the  pipes.  The  drainage  pipes  shall  be  so  designed, 
constructed  and  supported  as  to  be  free  from  leakage  of  water,  air  or  gas 
through  defective  materials,  imperfect  connections,  corrosion,  settlement, 
vibration,  temperature  changes,  freezing  or  other  causes.  The  entire  system 
shall  drain,  completely.  No  cement  joints  nor  connections  between  iron 
and  cement  or  tile  pipe  or  brick  drain  shall  be  made  within  any  building. 

(b)  The  plumbing  drainage  system  of  every  building  shall  be  separately 
and  independently  connected,  outside  of  the  building  to  the  public  sewer  if 
such  sewer  is  accessible,  to  an  approved  private  sewer  or,  if  a  sewer  is  not 
accessible,  to  an  approved  cesspool  or  septic  tank;  except  that  two  or  more 
buildings  may  have  a  common  sewer  if  approved  by  the  Building  Com- 
missioner and  the  Commissioner  of  Public  Works.  Sewage  discharge  into  a 
cesspool  shall  have  such  treatment  as  the  Commissioner  and  the  Health 
Commissioner  shall  require. 

(c)  No  substances  which  will  clog  the  drains,  produce  explosive  mix- 
tures or  injure  the  pipes  or  their  joints  shall  be  allowed  to  enter  the  drainage 
system  or  the  sewer. 

(d)  Steam,  vapor,  and  water  at  a  temperature  above  one  hundred  and 
thirty   degrees   Fahrenheit   shall   not  be  discharged   into   the  sewer.     The 

(263) 


Sec.  3103 

blow-off  of  boilers,  steam  exhaust  or  drip,  or  hot  water  from  any  other  source 
destined  to  be  discharged  into  a  sewer  shall  first  be  condensed  and  cooled 
to  one  hundred  and  thirty  degrees  Fahrenheit  in  a  blow-off  tank  or  other 
approved  device  of  which  the  size,  arrangement,  location,  venting  and  all 
connections  shall  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  Commissioner  and  the 
Commissioner  of  Public  Works. 

(e)  A  blow-off  tank  of  approved  design  and  connections,  connected  to 
one  or  more  high  pressure  boilers  shall  have  a  capacity  not  less  than  thirty 
per  cent  of  the  largest  boiler  to  which  it  is  connected.  Every  blow-off  tank 
shall  have  a  vapor  pipe  not  less  than  two  inches  in  size  extending  above  the 
roof  and  above  any  window  within  fifteen  feet. 

(f)  Where  a  drainage  system  may  be  subjected  to  back  flow  of  sewage 
suitable  provision  shall  be  made,  by  means  of  a  gate  and  check  valve  or 
otherwise  approved  device,  controlling  fixture  branches  subject  to  back 
flow  from  the  main  drain. 

(g)  The  building  drain  shall  have  a  Y-branch  fitting  with  an  end  cleanout 
or  with  an  iron  stopper  near  the  point  where  it  leaves  the  building.  The 
cleanout  shall  be  in  a  straight  line  with  the  drain  as  it  passes  through  the  wall. 
The  drainage  system  shall  have  an  adequate  number  of  cleanouts  so  arranged 
that  any  stoppage  in  the  pipe  can  be  readily  cleared.  Cleanouts  in  drains 
under  ground  shall  be  made  accessible.  Other  cleanouts  shall  be  so  located 
as  to  be  accessible  or  to  be  made  accessible  through  removable  panels  or 
otherwise. 

(h)  A  building  drain  shall  not  be  smaller  in  any  portion  than  the  largest 
soil  or  waste  pipe  or  stack  entering  the  drain. 

(i)  Stable  fixtures  and  their  drainage  piping  shall  be  installed  in  a  manner 
approved  by  the  Commissioner. 

(j)  A  building  drain  shall  have  a  fall  of  not  less  than  one-eighth  inch 
per  foot  of  run  and  its  size  shall  not  be  less  than  required  for  the  fixtures 
which  discharge  through  it  as  provided  in  the  following  table  in  accordance 
with  the  number  of  fixture  units  assigned  to  each  type  of  fixtures  as  specified 
in  section  thirty-one  hundred  and  fifteen.    Schedule  Paragraph  E. 


Maximum  Number  of  Fixture  Units  for  Pipe  Size. 


Pipe  Line     (Inches) 

Drains. 

Stacks. 

U 

1 

2.5 

9 

21 

45 

150 

370 

720 

1860 

3600 

6300 

11600 

1 

U 

3.5 

2 

12 

?!*- 

—  No  Water  Closets 

27 

3  — 

- 1  Water  Closet  by  permission 

72 

4.. 

210 

5 

540 

6 

1050 

8 

2640 

10 

5250 

12 

9300 

15 

16800 

(264) 


Sees.  3103=3105 

(k)  Changes  in  direction  of  building  drains  shall  be  made  with  Y-branches 
or  long  sweep  fittings.  Such  changes  in  direction  of  building  drains  shall 
have  full  size  cleanouts  up  to  four  inch  in  size  and  not  less  than  four  inch  for 
sizes  larger,  at  or  near  the  change  of  direction  and  at  or  near  the  foot  of  all 
stacks.  Cleanouts  shall  not  be  over  fifty  feet  apart  on  straight  runs.  Drains 
shall  not  be  laid  in  filled  ground  without  adequate  support  to  the  building 
structure.    Drain  pipes  passing  under  walls  shall  be  free  from  stress. 

(1)  All  other  connections  to  the  drainage  system  shall  be  made  with 
Y-branches  or  sweep  fittings  with  the  exception  of  vertical  soil  or  waste  pipe 
connections  which  may  be  made  with  short  pattern  TY's.  Tee  connections 
may  be  used  on  vents  only. 

(m)     Offsets  in  vertical  soil,  waste,  vent  and  conductor  stacks  shall  be 
made  as  direct  as  possible  and  short  radius  fittings  shall  not  be  used. 
[  XAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

*Sect.  3104.     Soil  and  Waste  Pipes. —  (a)     Soil  and  waste  pipes  from 
plumbing  fixtures  shall  discharge  into  the  building  drain. 

(b)  Every  building  drain  serving  water  closets  or  pedestal  urinals  shall 
have  at  least  one  four-inch  diameter  vent  extension  through  roof.  Branches 
of  soil  or  waste  pipes,  if  more  than  twenty  feet  long,  shall  be  extended  through 
roof  or  connected  to  vent  stack  undiminished  in  size,  except  that  a  two-inch 
waste  stack  may  be  connected  at  the  bottom  to  a  three-inch  waste  if  the 
number  of  connected  fixture  units  does  not  exceed  eight. 

(c)  A  horizontal  branch  of  soil  or  waste  pipe  shall  have  a  fall  not  less  than 
one-eighth  inch  per  foot  of  run. 

(d)  The  maximum  developed  length  of  one  and  one  half  inch  or  smaller 
waste  pipe  shall  not  exceed  fifty  feet. 

(e)  No  soil  pipe  shall  be  less  than  four  inches  in  size,  except  that  a  three- 
inch  soil  pipe  may  be  used  for  one  water  closet,  with  the  approval  of  the 
commissioner,  where  it  is  not  practicable  to  use  a  four-inch  pipe. 

(f )  No  waste  pipe  where  buried  underground  shall  be  less  than  three  inches 
in  size. 

(g)  In  buildings  more  than  one  hunched  and  twenty-five  feet  high,  soil 
stack  shall  be  at  least  five  inches,  waste  stacks  serving  slop  sinks  or  urinals 
shall  be  at  least  four  inches  and  waste  stacks  serving  lavatories  shall  be  at 
least  three  inches  in  size. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  S  ] 

fSect.  3105.  Rain  Water  Drains. — -(a)  All  rain  water  drains  from 
roofs,  including  area  drains  and  surface  drains,  shall  be  kept  separate  from 
the  building  drainage  system  of  a  building,  except  as  provided  in  this  section. 
Area  drains  and  surface  drains  may  be  connected  to  the  building  drainage 
system  or  otherwise  disposed  of  only  with  the  approval  of  the  commissioner, 
(b)  Where  a  storm  water  sewer  is  accessible  rain  water  drainage  shall  be 
discharged  therein.  In  locations  where  the  commissioner  shall  indicate  that 
storm  water  sewers  may  presently  be  laid,  the  main  rain  water  drain  shall 
extend  at  least  ten  feet  from  the  inner  face  of  the  foundation  wall  and  may 
there  be  connected  to  the  building  sewer.    Elsewhere  the  rain  water  shall  be 

(205) 


Sees.  3105=3106 

discharged  into  the  building  drain  near  the  point  where  it  leaves  the  building , 
or  otherwise  disposed  of  in  such  manner  as  not  to  flow  upon  a  public  way  or 
neighboring  land. 

(c)  A  main  rain  water  drain  outside  a  building,  except  where  a  storm 
water  sewer  exists  shall  be  laid  not  lower  than  four  feet  below  street  grade. 

(d)  Rain  water  leaders  shall  not  project  into  a  public  way  more  than 
seven  inches. 

(e)  All  rain  water  piping  shall  have  a  fall  of  not  less  than  one  eighth  inch 
per  foot  of  run.  The  size  of  a  rain  water  drain  or  leader  branch  shall  be  not 
less  than  as  provided  in  the  following  table. 

Maximum  Horizontal  Projection  of  Drained  Area. 


Pipe  Size  (Inches) 

Area  (Square  Feet) 

2 

600 

3 

1750 

4 

3600 

5 

6300 

6... 

8000 

8 

16000 

10 

25000 

12 

40000 

When  and  where  the  rain  water  and  sanitary  systems  are  combined,  the 
area  of  the  combination  drain  pipe  shall  be  not  less  than  sixty-six  and  two- 
thirds  per  cent  of  the  sum  of  the  pipe  areas  discharged  into  it. 
[  -\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

JSect.  3106.  Indirect  Wastes. — -(a)  Drips  from  refrigerators,  ice 
boxes  or  other  containers  in  which  food  is  stored,  heated  or  cooled  shall  not  be 
directly  connected  to  soil  or  waste  pipes  or  any  other  part  of  the  drainage 
system,  but  shall  discharge  in  open  sight  into  an  open  fixture  which  shall  have 
a  supply  of  running  water.  Wastes  of  instrument  sterilizers,  aspirators, 
compressors,  stills,  vacuum  and  other  similar  equipment  shall  enter  trap 
through  a  visible  broken  connection  of  not  less  than  one  and  one  half  inches 
long.     Trap  to  be  located  as  close  to  the  fixture  as  practicable. 

(b)  Indirect  wastes  discharging  into  open  fixture  from  fish  storage  tanks, 
corn  beef  tanks,  or  window  display  tanks  and  similar  equipment  shall  be  a 
separate  system  and  the  end  of  the  indirect  waste  shall  be  extended  independ- 
ently above  the  roof  for  ventilation. 

(c)  Each  fixture  and  piece  of  equipment  wasting  into  indirect  waste  pipes 
shall  have  separate  traps. 

(d)  An  indirect  waste  serving  two  or  more  fixtures  or  pieces  of  equipment 
shall  be  extended  through  the  roof  independently. 

(266) 


Sees.  3106=3108 

(e)  Vapor  vents,  from  sterilizers  and  other  hospital  equipment,  where 
required  shall  be  installed  as  a  separate  system  terminating  above  the  roof. 

(f)  Layouts  of  all  indirect  waste  systems  shall  be  submitted  for  approval 
to  the  building  commissioner. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

*Sect.  3107.  Mechanically  Discharged  Drainage. —  (a)  Floor  drains, 
drips  from  machinery  and  other  clean  wastes  approved  by  the  commissioner, 
too  low  to  drain  by  gravity  to  the  sewer,  may  drain  to  an  open  sump  or  receiv- 
ing tank  and  thence  be  discharged  by  mechanical  means  into  the  gravity 
drainage  system.  The  discharge  pipe  shall  be  equipped  with  a  check  valve 
and  shall  be  trapped  with  a  deep  seal  trap. 

(b)  Where  the  whole  or  a  part  of  a  drainage  system  receiving  the  discharge 
of  soil  and  waste  pipes,  other  than  those  provided  for  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph, is  too  low  to  drain  by  gravity  to  the  sewer  it  shall  drain  to  a  closed  iron 
sump  or  receiving  tank  and  thence  be  discharged  by  mechanical  means, 
automatically  operated,  into  the  gravity  building  drain  or  directly  to  the 
sewer.  Such  closed  iron  sump  or  receiving  tank  shall  form  part  of  the  drainage 
system  and  shall  be  made  tight  and  be  tested  as  provided  for  other  parts  of  the 
system.  It  shall  be  vented  by  means  of  an  independent  vent  pipe  not  less 
than  four  inches  in  size  extended  through  the  roof  as  provided  for  vent  stacks 
in  section  thirty-one  hundred  and  ten,  or  connected  to  a  vent  stack  not  less 
than  four  inches  in  size  at  least  twenty  feet  above  the  tank,  or  may  be  properly 
connected  to  the  vent  stack  of  the  fixtures  discharging  into  the  sump  if  such 
vent  is  four  inch  size  or  larger. 

(c)  The  discharge  pipe  from  a  sewage  ejector  shall  not  be  less  than  four 
inches  in  size  and  shall  be  fitted  with  a  check  and  gate  valve. 

(d)  The  plumbing  fixtures  which  drain  to  a  closed  sump  or  receiving  tank 
for  mechanical  discharge  shall  have  waste  or  soil  pipes,  traps  and  vent  pipes 
as  provided  for  in  gravity  drainage.  Such  vent  pipes  shall  be  extended  inde- 
pendently through  the  roof  or  be  connected  to  a  vent  stack  not  less  than 
twenty  feet  above  the  tank,  or  at  least  above  the  rim  or  over-flow  point  of  the 
lowest  fixture  of  the  gravity  drainage  system. 

(e)  Drainage  discharged  by  mechanical  means  into  the  gravity  drainage 
system  within  a  building,  as  provided  in  this  section,  shall  discharge  into  the 
top  of  the  receiving  drain. 

(f)  Where  closed  sumps  for  wastes  other  than  sewage  are  used,  they  shall 
have  a  chamber  vent  not  less  in  size  than  the  size  of  the  inlet. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  3108.  Traps.  —  (a)  Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section, 
the  waste  pipe  of  every  plumbing  fixture  shall  have  a  separate  trap  to  prevent 
emission  through  the  fixture  of  foul  air  from  the  drainage  system.  Such  trap 
shall  be  placed  as  near  the  fixture  which  it  serves  as  is  practicable. 

(b)  Single  tray  or  sink  may  be  fitted  with  a  one  and  one  half  inch  trap. 
A  two  part  or  a  three  part  tray  may  be  considered  as  one  fixture  and  shall 
be  fitted  with  a  trap,  the  outlet  of  which  shall  be  not  less  than  two  inches  in 
size.    Two  part  tray,  three  part  tray,  combination  of  two  trays  and  one  sink 

(267) 


Sec.  3108 

when  close  together,  combination  sink  and  tray,  each  of  which  may  be  con- 
sidered as  one  fixture  and  shall  be  fitted  with  a  trap,  the  outlet  of  which  shall 
be  not  less  than  two  inches  in  size.  Where  a  two  inch  half  S  trap  is  used,  the 
combined  waste  to  the  inlet  side  of  the  trap  shall  be  not  less  than  two  inch 
in  size.  When  placed  on  the  same  level  the  waste  pipe  from  the  traps  of  two 
fixtures  of  like  type  and  used  for  the  same  purpose  may  be  connected  to  the 
branch  openings  of  a  long  pattern  double  TY  type  of  fitting  placed  in  an  upright 
position  and  shall  require  no  other  vent  than  the  continuation  of  the  waste 
serving  these  two  fixtures  undiminished  in  size. 

(c)  The  waste  pipes  from  dishwashers  or  sinks  discharging  grease  in  a. 
kitchen  of  a  hotel,  restaurant  or  club  shall  have  individual  grease  traps  of 
approved  capacity  and  type  or  else  shall  waste  into  a  master  grease  trap  and', 
system.  When  individual  approved  grease  traps  are  used  they  shall  be- 
easy  of  access  to  open  and  clean  and  placed  as  near  as  practicable  to  the 
fixture  which  they  serve. 

(d)  The  waste  pipe  from  every  floor  drain  or  other  fixture  from  which, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  commissioner,  grease  may  be  discharged  in  such  quan- 
tity as  to  clog  or  injure  the  drain,  shall  have  an  approved  grease  trap.  A 
master  grease  trap  will  be  allowed  in  lieu  of  separate  grease  traps  when  sepa- 
rate system  of  drainage  is  installed  for  fixtures  requiring  a  grease  trap.  The 
master  grease  trap  must  be  in  an  accessible  location  for  cleaning.  Master 
grease  trap  will  be  required  in  lieu  of  separate  grease  traps  on  individual 
fixtures,  when  in  the  opinion  of  the  building  commissioner  it  is  necessary, 
to  protect  the  drainage  system  and  public  sewer  from  grease.  When  a 
master  grease  trap  is  installed,  each  fixture  discharging  into  a  master  grease 
trap  shall  be  fitted  with  individual  one  half  S  trap  properly  vented.  Master 
grease  traps  shall  be  approved  by  the  commissioner  as  to  capacity  and  type. 

(e)  The  waste  pipe  from  every  floor  drain  or  other  fixture  from  which 
gasoline,  naphtha  or  other  inflammable  liquid  may  be  discharged  to  a  sewer 
shall  have  a  special  trap  approved  by  the  commissioner  of  public  works  so 
constructed  as  to  prevent  the  passage  of  such  liquids  or  gas  into  the  sewer. 
Plans  of  approved  type  may  be  procured  at  the  office  of  the  commissioner. 
When  a  gasoline  separator  serves  floor  drains  on  the  same  level  as  the  gaso- 
line separator  and  each  entering  the  gasoline  separator  independently  and 
within  fifteen  feet  they  shall  require  no  other  than  the  chamber  vent. 

(f)  The  waste  pipe  from  wash  stand  for  vehicles  shall  have  an  approved 
trapped  combination  floor  drain  and  sand  arrestor  not  less  than  four  inch  in 
size. 

(g)  The  waste  pipe  from  an  area  drain  or  surface  drain  shall  have  a  deep 
seal  trap. 

(h)  Traps  shall  be  installed  in  all  conductor  leaders  terminating  below 
the  main  roof,  or  roofs  used  for  any  purpose,  other  than  weather  protection. 
Separate  traps  may  be  omitted  if  main  roof  drain  is  properly  trapped. 

(i)     Every  trap  installed  shall  be  so  located  as  to  be  accessible. 

(j)  Every  trap  shall  have  a  water  seal  of  at  least  one  and  one  half  inches. 
Deep  seal  traps  shall  have  a  water  seal  of  at  least  four  inches. 

(k)     All  fixture  trap  cleanouts  shall  be  water  sealed. 

(268) 


Sees.  3108=3110 

(1)     Slip  joints  or  unions  shall  not  be  used  on  the  outlets  of  traps. 

(m)  Threaded  outlet  connections  on  all  screw  traps  shall  be  iron  pipe 
size. 

(n)     Iron  traps  less  than  two  inch  in  size  shall  not  be  used  where  concealed. 

(o)  Non-syphon  trap  shall  only  be  used  by  special  permission  of  the 
commissioner  and  when  so  used  shall  be  of  an  approved  type  and  shall  have 
a  depth  of  seal  not  less  than  four  inches. 

[  fAs  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

|Sect.  3109.  Venting.  —  (a)  The  drainage  system  shall  be  so  designed 
that  there  will  be  circulation  of  air  in  all  pipes  thereof  and  no  danger  of 
syphonage,  aspiration  or  forcing  of  trap  seals  under  conditions  of  ordinary 
use. 

(b)  Traps,  except  non-syphon  traps  where  approved,  shall  be  protected 
from  syphonage  or  air  pressure  by  separate  vent  pipes,  not  less  in  size  than 
the  outlet  of  the  trap  they  serve,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section. 

(c)  The  trap  for  the  fixture  having  the  highest  connection  to  a  soil  or 
waste  stack  need  not  have  separate  vent  pipe  if  within  five  feet  from  the 
stack  and  the  soil  or  waste  pipe  is  not  connected  to  the  soil  or  waste  stack 
below  the  invert  of  the  trap,  with  the  exception  of  closets  and  similar  fix- 
tures which  shall  be  connected  to  soil  or  waste  stack  not  more  than  eighteen 
inches  below  the  weir  of  the  group. 

(d)  The  traps  of  a  battery  of  water  closets,  pedestal  and  stall  urinals  and 
bed  pan  washers,  may  have,  instead  of  separate  vent  pipes,  a  vent  pipe  con- 
nected to  the  common  waste  or  soil  pipe  just  before  the  branch  from  the 
fixture  most  remote  from  the  waste  or  soil  stack  and  between  the  first  fixture 
and  the  soil  or  waste  stack.  If  such  a  battery  has  more  than  six  fixtures 
there  shall  be  a  similar  vent  pipe  connection  before  the  branch  from  every 
sixth  fixture  and  in  no  case  shall  there  be  more  than  five  fixtures  between  the 
vents.  Vents  shall  not  be  less  than  four  inch  in  size.  This  type  of  venting 
may  be  used  only  when  the  vertical  distance  between  the  water  level  of  the 
trap  and  the  top  of  the  common  waste  or  soil  pipe  is  not  more  than  twenty- 
four  inches  and  where  the  developed  length  of  the  branch  waste  or  soil  pipe 
is  not  more  than  three  foot  six  inches  between  the  center  line  of  the  common 
waste  or  soil  pipe  and  the  water  level  of  the  trap.  Water  closets  and  pedestal 
urinals  shall  be  considered  one  type.  No  other  fixtures  shall  enter  the  battery 
system.  The  commissioner  shall  prepare  explanatory  sketches  showing  the 
method  of  construction  described  in  this  section. 

(e)  Single  floor  drains  shall  be  separately  vented  unless  otherwise  noted. 
Groups  of  two  or  more  floor  drains  discharging  through  separate  branch 
waste  pipes  not  more  than  fifteen  feet  long  into  four  inch  or  larger  main 
waste  pipe  serving  floor  drains  only,  may  be  vented  on  the  outlet  side  of  the 
end  floor  drain,  by  means  of  an  extension  of  the  main  waste  pipe  undiminished] 
in  size  as  a  vent  pipes, 

[  $As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

*Sect.  31 10.     Vent   Pipes. —  (a)     The  vent  pipes  from  traps   and   the 
extension  of  soil  and  waste  pipes  shall  be  extended  upward  through  the  roof. 

(269), 


Sec,  3110 

or  connected  to  vent  stacks  extended  through  the  roof.  Waste  and  soil 
stacks  shall  be  extended  through  the  roof  and  for  the  purpose  of  this  sec- 
tion, the  portion  of  a  waste  or  soil  stack  above  the  highest  fixture  connected 
to  it  shall  be  considered  a  vent  stack. 

(b)  Vent  pipes  shall  be  connected  at  the  bottom  with  a  soil  or  waste 
pipe  or  with  the  building  drain  in  such  manner  as  to  prevent  accumulation 
of  rust  scale  and  properly  to  drip  the  water  of  condensation.  The  foot  of  all 
vent  stacks  shall  be  connected  to  soil  or  waste  stack  through  a  separate  Y 
branch. 

(c)  Vent  stacks  shall  be  extended  to  a  height  of  not  less  than  two  feet 
above  the  roof  and  not  less  than  one  foot  above  the  top  of  any  window  within 
fifteen  feet.  Where  a  roof  is  to  be  used  for  purposes  other  than  weather 
protection,  vent  stacks  shall  extend  not  less  than  seven  feet  above  the  roof 
and  the  arrangement  shall  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  commissioner. 

(d)  No  vent  stack  through  roof  shall  be  less  than  four  inches  in  diameter 
from  a  point  within  the  building. 

(e)  Two  or  more  vent  pipes  may  be  connected  together  but  such  con- 
nection shall  be  above  the  fixtures  served. 

(f)  Vent  pipes  shall  not  be  connected  to  the  trap  or  branched  into  the 
waste  pipe  except  where  a  continuous  vent  is  not  practicable.  Vent  pipes 
shall  be  run  as  directly  as  practicable.  Horizontal  vent  pipes  when  below 
the  top  of  the  fixture  it  serves  shall  be  installed  with  the  shortest  possible 
horizontal  run.  The  opening  of  these  vents  shall  be  above  the  center  line  of 
the  waste  pipe. 

(g)  The  size  of  a  vent  pipe,  up  to  and  including  two-inch  shall  not  be 
less  in  size  than  the  outlet  of  the  trap  it  serves.  Such  vent  pipe  shall  connect 
to  the  waste  pipe  not  more  than  eighteen  inches  from  the  trap.  The  size  of  a 
vent  pipe  shall  not  be  less  than  as  provided  in  the  following  table  depending 
upon  the  number  of  fixture  units  which  it  serves  and  the  length  of  the  pipe. 


Pipe  Sizes  (Inches) 

Maximum  Number 
of  Fixture  Units 

Maximum  Length 
Feet 

11 

.5 

3 

25* 

100 

250 

500 

1250 

2400 

10 

1| 

25 

2" 

60 

3* 

125 

4" '..... 

5" 

6" 

8" 

250 

300 

400 

Not  limited 

*Note  exception  below. 


In  determining  the  length  of  a  vent  pipe  the  stack  and  branches  shall  be 
considered  continuous. 

(270) 


Sees.  3111=3112 

(h)  A  vent  pipe  serving  water  closets,  pedestal  urinals,  bed  pan  washers 
and  service  sinks  shall  not  be  less  than  two  inches  in  size.  Such  two  inch 
vent  pipe  shall  not  serve  more  than  three  fixtures  of  the  above  type  and  shall 
not  be  longer  than  forty  feet. 

(i)  The  size  of  a  vent  stack  shall  be  at  least  one  half  of  the  diameter  of  the 
waste  or  soil  stack  served.  Where  soil  stacks  are  installed,  fitted  with  con- 
nections for  future  use,  are  four  inch  in  size,  a  parallel  vent  stack  not  less  than 
three  inch  in  size  with  three  inch  branches  shall  be  installed.  The  parallel 
vent  stack  shall  be  connected  to  the  soil  stack  below  the  lowest  proposed 
fixture. 

(j)  Where  three  or  more  vent  stacks  are  connected  near  the  top  to  a  single 
pipe  extending  through  the  roof,  the  internal  area  of  the  combined  stack  shall 
be  not  less  than  one  half  the  sum  of  the  area  of  the  stacks  so  connected. 

(k)  Every  vent  pipe  shall  be  free  from  dips  or  sags  and  shall  be  so  graded 
and  connected  as  to  drip  back  to  the  soil  or  waste  pipe. 

(I)  Bow  vents  shall  be  installed  only  by  permission  of  the  commissioner 
and  in  accordance  with  his  instructions  and  shall  be  dripped  at  its  lowest 
point. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  } 

jSect.  3111.  Buildings  More  than  One  Hundred  Twenty=Five  Feet 
High. —  (a)     Vent  stacks  shall  not  be  less  than  three  inch  in  size. 

(b)  Vent  stacks  serving  water  closets,  pedestal  urinals,  bed  pan  washers 
or  service  sinks  shall  be  increased  to  at  least  four  inches  in  size  at  a  point 
eighty  feet  above  the  bottom  of  vent  stack. 

(c)  Vent  stacks  shall  not  be  connected  to  other  vents  or  vent  stacks  but 
shall  extend  through  the  roof  independently  where  practicable. 

(d)  Vent  stacks  including  the  upper  portion  of  soil  or  waste  stacks,  three 
inches  in  size  shall  be  increased  to  four  inch  in  size  from  a  point  below  the  roof. 

(e)  2"  Branch  vents  serving  water  closets,  pedestal  urinals,  bed  pan 
washers  and  service  sinks  shall  not  be  more  than  thirty  feet  long  and  shall 
serve  not  more  than  three  of  the  above  fixtures.  Branch  vents  for  other  fix- 
tures shall  comply  with  the  table  in  section  3110. 

I  -\As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

JSect.  3112.  Materials  of  Drainage  System. —  (a)  Waste,  soil  and 
vent  pipe  shall  be  of  cast  iron  hub  and  spigot  pipe,  cast  iron  screw  pipe, 
galvanized  steel  or  wrought  iron,  lead,  iron  size  brass  or  copper,  except  that 
cast  iron  screw  pipe,  and  galvanized  steel  or  wrought  iron  pipe  shall  not  be 
used  underground.  In  buildings  of  Group  I  Occupancy  galvanized  piping 
shall  not  be  used  for  built-in  waste  piping  in  floor  or  wall  construction. 

(b)  All  sanitary  and  rain  water  drains  within  a  distance  of  ten  feet  outside 
the  inner  face  of  the  foundation  wall  shall  be  cast  iron  hub  and  spigot  pipe 
coated  with  asphaltum  or  red  lead. 

(c)  Waste  and  vent  pipes,  traps  and  fittings  serving  fixtures  in  chemical 
laboratories  or  used  for  the  disposal  of  acid  or  other  corrosive  chemicals  shall 
be  of  approved  acid  resisting  materials.  The  arrangement  of  piping  shall  be 
approved  by  the  commissioner.     All  plumbing  fixtures  in  large  chemical 

(271) 


Sec.  3113 

laboratories  shall  have  a  separate  system  of  drainage  and  vent  piping  inde- 
pendent of  other  drainage  system  of  building.  When  diluting  chamber  is 
used  individual  vents  for  fixture  traps  in  group  fixtures  may  be  omitted  if 
main  waste  is  extended  through  roof  undiminished  in  size,  and  branch  from 
main  to  fixture  is  not  more  than  twenty-five  feet.  If  branch  waste  to  fixture 
is  more  than  twenty-five  feet  the  end  of  the  branch  shall  be  extended  full  size 
over  roof  or  reconnected  to  main  chemical  vent  stack. 

The  effluent  from  diluting  tank  may  waste  into  the  building  drainage 
system. 

The  design  and  location  of  the  dilution  tank  and  arrangement  of  the  piping 
shall  be  approved  by  the  commissioner. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  S  ] 

*Sect.  3113.  Water  Supply. —  (a)  All  water  piping  of  every  descrip- 
tion supplying  water  from  city  mains  to  all  plumbing  fixtures  and  equipment 
with  the  exception  of  the  distributing  piping  of  hot  water  building  heating 
system,  intercommunicating  piping  between  various  pieces  of  apparatus 
of  a  boiler  room  plant,  and  engine  room  apparatus,  shall  be  installed  by  a 
journeyman  plumber  licensed  under  chapter  one  hundred  and  forty- two  of 
the  General  Laws  under  a  permit  issued  to  a  registered  and  licensed  Master 
plumber. 

(b)  No  water  distribution  system  to  pjumbing  fixtures  and  equipment 
shall  be  installed  until  a  plan  submitted  to  the  commissioner  has  been  ap- 
proved for  a  safe  and  adequate  supply. 

(c)  Water  supplied  from  city  mains  shall  be  distributed  by  a  system  of 
piping  independent  of  water  from  any  other  source  unless  such  source  is 
approved  by  the  health  commissioner  for  drinking  purposes. 

(d)  No  connections  to  fixtures  supplied  with  city  water,  or  to  supply 
piping  thereof,  shall  be  made  from  other  pipes,  piping  systems,  mechanical 
apparatus,  equipment  or  device,  directly  or  indirectly,  in  such  manner  that 
in  the  opinion  of  the  health  commissioner,  and  the  building  commissioner, 
the  quality  of  the  potable  water  may  be  adversely  affected.  No  plumbing 
fixture,  device  or  construction  shall  be  installed  which  will  provide  a  cross 
connection  between  a  distributing  system  of  water  for  drinking  and  domestic 
purposes  and  a  drainage  system,  soil  or  waste  pipe  or  sprinkler  or  process 
piping  system  so  as  to  permit  or  make  possible  the  back  flow  of  sewage  or 
waste  or  non-potable  water  into  the  water  supply  either  by  gravity,  siphonage 
or  pressure. 

(e)  The  water  service  pipe  and  distribution  pipes  shall  be  of  sufficient 
size  to  permit  continuous  ample  flow  of  water  to  fixtures  and  equipment  in 
all  stories  at  all  times. 

(f)  Where  the  water  pressure  is  insufficient  to  supply  all  fixtures  freely 
and  continuously  a  house  supply  tank  or  pneumatic  system  shall  be  provided, 
adequate  for  the  purpose.  Such  tank  or  system  shall  be  supplied  by  city  pres- 
sure through  automatic  controls,  where  necessary  by  power  driven  pumps. 

(g)  The  over-flow  pipe  from  gravity  or  house  tank  or  drip  pans  shall  be 
extended  to  drain  into  suitable  plumbing  fixture  or  be  connected  to  rain 

(272) 


Sec.  31 13 

water  leader.  When  connected  to  leader  over-flow  shall  be  fitted  with  deep 
seal  trap  and  check  valve.  Over-flow  pipe  shall  be  at  least  twice  the  area  of 
the  water  supply  pipe  feeding  the  tank. 

(h)  All  plumbing  fixtures  shall  be  provided  with  a  sufficient  supply  of 
water  for  flushing  to  keep  them  in  a  sanitary  condition.  Every  water  closet 
and  urinal  shall  be  flushed  by  means  of  an  approved  flush  valve  or  individual 
tank  of  at  least  four  gallons  flushing  capacity  for  water  closets  and  at  least 
two  gallons  for  urinals,  and  shall  be  adjusted  to  prevent  the  waste  of  water. 
The  flush  pipe  for  water  closet  flush  tanks  shall  be  not  less  than  one  and  one 
quarter  inches  in  diameter  and  the  water  from  the  flush  tanks  shall  be  used 
for  no  other  purpose. 

(i)  No  plumbing  fixture,  mechanical  apparatus,  equipment  or  device 
shall  be  connected  with  building  water  supply  distributing  system  through 
automatic  flush  valve,  other  valve  or  tank,  unless  such  flush  valve,  valve  or 
tank  is  located  above  the  fixture  or  equipment  being  served. 

All  water  closets,  urinals,  slop  hoppers,  bed  pan  washers,  dish  washers 
and  other  fixtures  receiving  their  supply  of  water  through  flush  valves,  shall 
have  an  approved  type  of  vacuum  breaker  installed  between  flush  valve  and 
fixture  or  equipment  being  served.  The  vacuum  breaker,  shall  be  installed 
at  a  minimum  distance  of  four  inches  from  bottom  of  vacuum  breaker  to 
the  top  of  fixture  or  equipment. 

Fixtures  or  equipment  having  water  supplied  through  submerged  inlets 
shall  be  fitted  with  an  approved  type  of  vacuum  breaker  installed  in  the 
water  supply  line  between  the  water  supply  control  valve  and  the  fixture  or 
equipment  being  served  and  at  no  less  than  four  inches  above  the  top  of  the 
device  being  served. 

All  vacuum  breakers  shall  be  made  easity  accessible  for  observation,  in- 
spection and  repairs. 

For  all  fixtures  and  devices  supplied  through  faucets  or  equivalent,  such 
faucets  shall  be  located  above  the  top  of  the  receptacle  being  served  and  with 
a  minimum  approved  air  gap  between  the  end  of  supply  nozzle  and  the  top 
of  receptacle. 

(j)  An  accessible  shut-off  shall  be  provided  on  the  main  water  distribution 
pipe  just  inside  the  foundation  wall  which  shall  control  the  water  supply 
to  the  entire  building.  In  structures,  other  than  residences  occupied  by  one 
family,  accessible  shut-offs  shall  also  be  provided  which  shall  separately 
control  the  water  supply  for  each  flat,  apartment,  suite,  or  store  of  a  building. 

(k)  Supply  pipes  of  ferrous  material  shall  not  be  installed  under  bath 
room  floors  in  Group  I  occupancy. 

No  pipe  or  fittings  that  have  been  used  for  other  purposes,  nor  second 
hand  pipe  or  fittings  of  objectionable  origin  shall  be  used  for  distributing 
potable  water. 

(1)  Water  supply  branch  of  lead,  copper  or  brass  to  individual  fixture 
shall  not  be  less  than  three  eighths  inch  size;  of  other  material,  not  less  than 
one  half  inch  size.  Water  supply  branch  connected  to  a  flush  valve  shall 
not  be  less  than  one  inch  size  for  water  closet,  pedestal  or  blow-out  urinal 
and  not  less  than  one  half  inch  size  for  other  type  of  urinal. 

(273) 


Sees.  3113=3114 

Slip  joints  on  water  supply  system  shall  not  be  used  on  the  pressure  side 
of  fixture  faucets  or  cocks. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  3114.  Hot  Water  Supply. —  (a)  Hot  water  storage  tanks 
shall  be  installed  and  connected  by  a  licensed  plumber  under  a  permit  issued 
to  a  registered  and  licensed  master  plumber . 

(b)  No  hot  water  storage  tank  or  other  vessel  in  which  water  is  to  be 
stored  or  heated  under  pressure  shall  be  installed  or  connected  unless  there 
are  plainly  stamped  thereon  in  the  metal,  the  maker's  business  name,  its 
capacity  in  terms  of  Massachusetts  standard  liquid  measure,  maker's  guar- 
antee of  pressure  to  which  tank  has  been  tested,  maximum  working  pressure 
at  which  tank  may  be  installed.  The  test  pressure  shall  not  be  less  than  two 
hundred  pounds  hydraulic  or  hydrostatic  pressure.  The  working  pressure 
shall  not  be  greater  than  forty-two  and  one  half  per  cent  of  the  guaranteed 
test  pressure.  No  tank  shall  be  installed  at  pressure  greater  than  its  working 
pressure. 

(c)  Every  hot  water  tank  or  boiler  hereafter  installed,  or  relocated  to 
which  a  heating  device  or  appliance  is  connected,  in  which  water  is  to  be 
heated  under  pressure  above  fifteen  pounds  per  square  inch,  shall  be  equipped 
with  pressure  relief,  temperature  relief  and  vacuum  relief  valves  placed  in 
an  accessible  location.  These  valves  are  to  be  placed  on  the  hot  water  tank 
or  boiler,  or  on  the  piping  to  or  from  the  hot  water  tank  as  hereinafter  de- 
scribed. No  make  of  such  valves  shall  be  used  unless  approved  by  the 
building  commissioner. 

(d)  Individual  Pressure  Relief  Valves:  Pressure  relief  valves  shall 
have  a  disc  which  is  kept  closed  by  a  spring  on  which  tension  can  be  varied 
to  take  care  of  different  static  pressures.  The  valve  shall  be  set  to  open  at  a 
pressure  not  more  than  fifteen  pounds  higher  than  the  working  pressure 
stamped  thereon  in  the  metal  of  the  tank  or  boiler.  Valve  may  be  placed 
on  the  hot  or  cold  water  supply  above  tank  or  boiler  between  control  valve 
and  tank  or  boiler. 

(e)  Temperature  Relief  Valves:  Fusible  Plug  Type:  Temperature 
relief  valves  of  the  fusible  plug  type  shall  be  placed  in  a  separate  tapping  in 
the  shell  of  the  tank  or  boiler  within  twelve  inches  of  the  top  of  the  tank 
or  boiler,  or  on  the  hot  water  flow  pipe  from  tank  or  boiler.  Where  tem- 
perature relief  valve  is  installed  on  the  flow  pipe,  it  shall  be  within  eight 
inches,  developed  length,  from  the  top  of  the  tank  or  boiler  and  the  fusing 
element  shall  be  installed  within  two  inches  of  the  flowing  water.  The 
fusing  element  of  the  individual  temperature  relief  valve  shall  fuse  and  begin 
to  discharge  hot  water  from  the  tank  or  boiler  when  the  temperature  of  the 
water  has  reached  a  point  not  greater  than  two  hundred  and  twelve  degrees 
Fahrenheit. 

(f)  Temperature  Relief  Valves:  Automatic  Type:  Temperature 
relief  valves  of  the  automatic  type  shall  be  placed  in  a  tapping  in  the  shell 
of  the  tank  or  boiler  within  twelve  inches  of  the  top  of  the  tank  or  boiler,  or 
shall  be  installed  on  the  flow  pipe  from  the  top  of  the  tank  or  boiler  within 
eight  inches,  developed  length,  from  the  top  of  the  tank  or  boiler  and  shall  be 

(274) 


Sec.  3114 

installed  within  two  inches  of  the  flowing  water,  and  shall  begin  to  discharge 
hot  water  from  the  tank  or  boiler  when  the  temperature  has  reached  a  point 
not  greater  than  two  hundred  and  twelve  degrees  Fahrenheit  and  shall  close 
tight  when  the  temperature  of  water  in  tank  or  boiler  has  been  reduced 
approximately  thirty-five  degrees  lower  than  the  relief  temperature.  The 
capacity  of  the  temperature  relief  valve  shall  be  governed  by  the  maximum 
heating  rate  of  the  hot  water  heater.  A  differential  of  ten  degrees  plus  or 
minus  from  closing  temperature  will  be  considered  satisfactory. 

(g)  Vacuum  Relief  Valves:  Vacuum  relief  valves  shall  be  constructed 
so  as  to  relieve  vacuum  instantly  at  a  minus  pressure  not  greater  than  one 
inch  of  vacuum  in  the  tank  or  boiler. 

The  relieving  element  of  the  vacuum  valve  shall  be  of  materials  that  will 
not  corrode  or  hold  fast  to  the  seat  after  prolonged  use. 

The  valve  shall  not  leak  under  an  internal  pressure  of  from  ten  pounds 
to  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  pounds  per  square  inch. 

Valves  of  the  ball  check  type  shall  not  be  approved. 

Vacuum  relief  valves  shall  be  placed  on  the  cold  water  supply  pipe  to  tank 
or  boiler  above  top  of  tank  or  boiler. 

Where  cold  water  supply  enters  below  the  top  of  tank  or  boiler  from  a 
water  supply  located  below  the  tank  or  boiler,  the  supply  pipe  shall  rise  to 
above  the  top  of  tank  or  boiler  forming  a  loop  and  the  vacuum  valve  shall  be 
placed  on  top  of  loop  above  tank. 

(h)  All  internal  parts  of  pressure  relief  valves,  fusible  plug  valves  or 
automatic  relief  valves  shall  be  of  materials  impervious  to  corrosion  equal 
to  eighty-five  per  cent  copper,  five  per  cent  tin,  five  per  cent  lead  and  five  per 
cent  zinc,  except  fusing  element. 

(i)  The  casing  of  each  valve  shall  be  stamped,  or  have  a  metal  strap 
attached  to  it  stating  in  plain  lettering  the  manufacturer's  name,  type  of 
valve,  limit  of  pressure  relief  settings,  capacity  of  B.  T.  U.  discharge  and 
melting  point  of  fuse  plug. 

(j)  Pressure  relief,  temperature  relief  valves  shall  have  the  discharge  end 
of  the  valves  extended  to  an  open  fixture  or  to  the  basement  of  the  building 
near  to  the  floor  if  open  fixture  is  not  available. 

(k)  The  valve  shall  be  designed  so  that  it  will  discharge  water  at  a  rate 
that  will  prevent  any  increase  in  the  water  temperature  in  the  tank  or  boiler 
when  the  valve  is  in  operation. 

(1)  The  area  of  the  discharge  pipe  from  the  relief  valves  shall  not  be  less 
than  the  area  of  the  valve.  When  two  or  more  valves  are  connected  to  the 
same  discharge  pipe  the  pipe  area  shall  not  be  less  than  the  aggregate  area 
of  all  the  valves  it  serves.  The  discharge  pipe  shall  be  of  brass  or  copper 
and  pitch  down  from  the  valve  it  serves  to  prevent  the  trapping  of  water. 

(m)  Combination  pressure  and  temperature  relief  valves  may  be  used  if 
they  comply  with  all  of  the  requirements  as  described  for  individual  valves. 

Temperature  relief  of  the  fusible  plug  type  or  automatic  type  will  be  accept- 
able. 

(275) 


Sees.  3114=3115 

(n)  In  all  hot  water  tanks  or  boilers  having  a  capacity  of  one  hundred 
gallons  or  larger  the  pressure  relief  valve  shall  be  fitted  with  a  lever  type 
handle  to  allow  for  periodic  tests  by  inspectors. 

(o)  Tankless  Hot  Water  Heaters:  All  tankless  heaters  connected  to 
or  part  of  heating  boilers  operated  at  more  than  five  pounds  pressure  shall  be 
equipped  with  approved  type  pressure  relief  valve.  Pressure  relief  shall  not 
be  set  more  than  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  pounds.  Pressure  relief  valve 
shall  be  placed  between  control  valve  and  heating  coil, 

(p)  Cistern  Pressure  Hot  Water  Tank:  Cistern  pressure  hot  water 
tanks  in  which  water  is  to  be  heated  or  stored  shall  have  an  expansion  pipe 
extended  from  the  highest  point  of  the  hot  water  system  or  from  the  top  of 
the  hot  water  tank,  over  the  top  of  the  supply  tank  that  supplies  the  water 
to  the  hot  water  tank.  No  valve  of  any  description  shall  be  installed  on 
the  expansion  pipe  between  the  top  of  the  hot  water  tank  and  its  opening 
above  the  supply  tank.    The  expansion  pipe  shall  be  of  non-ferrous  material. 

(q)  No  check  valves  or  non-by-pass  pressure  regulators  shall  be  installed 
on  the  cold  water  supply  to  the  hot  water  tank. 

(r)  When  check  valve  or  pressure  regulator  is  installed  the  installation 
shall  be  approved  by  the  Commissioner. 

(s)  No  shut  off  valve  shall  be  installed  to  prevent  the  circulation  of  water 
between  the  hot  water  tank  and  its  heater,  unless  approved  by  the  Com- 
missioner. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

JSect.  3115.     Plumbing  Fixtures  and  Units. — (a)     The  orifice  of  the 
jet  of  every  drinking  fountain  shall  be  placed  above  the  rim  of  the  fixture  and 
shall  throw  an  inclined  stream.     The  water  supply  issuing  from  the  orifice  i 
shall  be  of  sufficient  volume  and  height  so  that  persons  using  the  fountain 
need  not  come  in  direct  contact  with  the  orifice. 

(b)  Earthenware  integral  fixture  traps  shall  have  a  flange  on  the  fixture 
bolted  to  a  flange  on  the  end  of  the  waste  or  soil  pipe,  the  joint  made  tight 
with  red  or  white  lead  or  other  approved  compound,  or  with  an  approved 
gasket.  A  rubber  gasket  shall  not  be  used.  If  the  waste  or  soil  pipe  is  of 
lead  the  flange  on  its  end  shall  be  of  heavy  brass  soldered  to  the  lead  pipe; 
if  of  cast  iron,  the  flange  shall  be  of  extra  heavy  cast  iron  caulked  or  screwed 
to  the  pipe.  Such  floor  flanges  for  water  closets,  slop  sinks  or  urinals  shall 
be  not  less  than  three  sixteenths  inch  thick.  The  joint  between  flange  and 
lead  bend  or  start  shall  be  examined  by  the  Plumbing  Inspector  before  the 
fixture  is  permanently  set. 

The  waste  or  soil  pipe  to  floor  or  wall  outlet  earthenware  fixtures  where 
used  with  a  flange  shall  terminate  at  the  finished  floor  or  wall  line. 

Brass  floor  or  wall  flanges  shall  be  of  heavy  pattern  with  no  openings 
except  for  bolts  and  waste  openings. 

Lead  closet  bends  or  starts  shall  be  limited  to  one  connection,  which  shall 
be  used  for  vent  only,  except  in  replacement  of  the  closet  bend  or  start  existing 
wastes  may  be  connected  to  new  bend  or  start. 

The  lead  bend  or  start  shall  be  connected  to  the  drainage  system  by  means 
of  a  heavy  bell  shaped  brass  ferrule  with  full  size  wiped  solder  joint. 

(276) 


Sec.  3115 

(c)  No  trough  or  multiple  type  urinal  or  water  closet  shall  be  installed 
except  for  exterior  temporary  use,  unless  approved  by  the  commissioner. 

(d)  Minimum  size  of  floor  drain  shall  be  3"  except  as  noted  for  refrig- 
erator wastes  in  table  below. 

(e)  The  following  schedule  shall  be  used  for  determination  of  the  minimum 
diameters  of  fixture  traps  and  the  equivalent  unit  of  value. 


Fixture. 


Trap  Size 
(Inches.) 


Unit 
Value. 


Bath  Room  Group  —  1  W.  C.  —  1  Lav.  —  1  Bath  Tub 

Bath  Room  Group  -1W.C.-1  Lav.  —  1  Bath  Tub  —  1  Shower  Stall 

Baby's  Bath  Slab 

Bed  Pan  Sterilizer 

Bed  Pan  Washer 

Combination  Sink  and  tray 

Commercial  laundry  tray  —  Revolving  type  —  1\  gallon  per  minute 
discharge 

Dish  washer  —  Hotel  —  Restaurant  —  Club 

Dental  Cuspidor 

Drinking  Fountain 

^loor  Drain  —  Unrated  Fixtures  —  for  each  gallon  per  minute  discharge 

Floor  Drain  —  For  Refrigerator  Wastes  —  Minimum  Trap  Size  2" 

Foot  Bath 

Instrument  Sterilizer 

Laundry  Tray 

Lavatory 

Pedestal  Urinal 

Bar  Sink 

Fish  Sink 

Kitchen  Sink 

Kitchen  Sink  —  Hotel  —  Restaurant  —  Club 

Laboratory  Sink 

Lunch  Counter  Bar  Sink  —  Combination  of  Same 

Pot  Sink 

Scullery  Sink  —  Hotel  —  Restaurant  —  Club 

Sewage  Ejectors  —  For  Each  25  Gallons  per  Minute  Discharge 

(277) 


3 
3 


6.0 
7.0 
2.0 
5.0 
5.0 


2.0 


4.0 


H 


6.0 
0.5 
0.5 


14 


2.0 
0.5 
2.0 


U 


0.5 


1§ 
14 


2.0 
1.0 


5.0 


U 

2.0 

2 

4.0 

14 

2.0 

2 

4.0 

1 1 

2.0 

2 

4.0 

2 

4.0 

2 

4.0 

50.0 

Sees.  3115=3116 


Fixture. 


Trap  Size 
(Inches.) 


Unit 
Value. 


Shower  Stall 

Slop  or  Service  Sink  —  Group  H  and  I  Occupancy 

Slop  or  Service  Sink 

Stall  Urinal 

Surgeon's  Sink 

Restaurant  Glass  Sink 

Restaurant  Silver  Sink 

Vegetable  Sink  —  Hotel  —  Restaurant  —  Club. .  . 

Wall  Hung  Urinal 

Water  Closet 

Water  Still 

Utensil  Sterilizer 


2 
2 
3 
2 

n 

2 


4.0 
4.0 
5.0 
4.0 
2.0 
2.0 
2.0 
4.0 


H 


4.0 
5.0 
0.5 


11 


0.5 


Unit  value  of  fixtures  not  contained  in  the  above  table  shall  be  determined  by  the  commissioner. 

[  |  As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  and  Ord.  1955,  ch.  2  ] 

*Sect.  3116.  Cast  Iron  Pipe. — (a)  Cast  iron  pipe  shall  be  sound, 
cylindrical  and  smooth,  free  from  cracks,  sand  holes  and  other  defects,  of 
uniform  thickness  and  of  the  grade  known  in  commerce  as  extra  heavy. 
If  buried  underground  it  shall  be  coated  with  asphaltum  or  red  lead;  otherwise, 
it  shall  be  uncoated  until  inspected  and  approved.  The  weight  of  cast  iron 
pipes  per  length,  in  lengths  to  lay  five  feet,  shall  not  be  less  than  listed  in 
the  following  table: 


Minimum  Weights  of  Cast  Iron  Pipe. 


Diameter  (Inches) 

Weight 

per 

Length 

(Pounds) 

Single  Hub. 

1     Double  Hub. 

2 

25 

45 

60 

75 

95 

150 

215 

270 

375 

26 

3 

47 

4 

63 

5 

78 

6 

100 

8 

157 

10 

225 

12 

285 

15 

395 

(278) 


Sec.  3116=3117 

(b)  Fittings  for  cast  iron  hub  and  spigot  pipe  shall  be  of  the  weight 
known  in  commerce  as  extra  heavy  and  shall  comply  with  the  weights  and 
dimensions  to  the  cast  iron  soil  pipe  fittings  as  approved  by  American  Stand- 
ards Association. 

(c)  Joints  in  cast  iron  hub  and  spigot  pipe  shall  be  made  with  hemp  or 
oakum  and  molten  lead  run  full  and  caulked  to  make  gas  and  water  tight 
without  the  use  of  wax  or  any  compound. 

(d)  No  double  hub  or  sleeve  shall  be  used  on  cast  iron  drain,  soil,  waste, 
or  vent  pipes.  The  drilling,  tapping  or  welding  of  cast  iron,  hub  and  spigot 
drain,  waste,  soil  or  vent  pipes,  and  the  use  of  saddle  hubs  or  bands  are 
prohibited. 

(e)  Caulking  ferrules  shall  be  of  approved  quality  bell  shaped  cast  brass, 
not  less  than  four  inches  long  and  not  less  than  diameter  and  weight  listed  in 
the  following  table: 

Minimum  Diameter  and  Weight  of  Cast  Brass  Ferrules. 


Diameter  (Inches) 

Weight  (Ounces) 

2\ 

16 

Z\ 

28 

4| 

40 

(f)  Cleanouts  in  cast  iron  hub  and  spigot  pipe  shall  have  brass  or  iron 
bodies.  Cleanouts  shall  be  the  full  size  of  the  pipe  up  to  four  inches  and 
not  less  than  four  inches  for  larger  pipes.  The  caps  shall  be  of  cast  brass  not 
less  than  one  quarter  inch  thick,  shall  have  square  or  hexagonal  nuts  not 
less  than  three  quarter  inch  high  and  one  and  one  half  inches  in  least  diameter, 
or  recesses  for  special  wrenches,  and  shall  have  not  less  than  six  tapered 
threads  standard  for  iron  pipe.  Caps  as  described  above  shall  also  be  used 
for  cleanouts  in  screw  pipe  drainage  systems. 

(g)  Where  steel  or  wrought  iron  pipe,  two  inches  or  less  in  diameter,  is 
connected  to  cast  iron  hub  and  spigot  pipe  the  joint  shall  be  made  by  means 
of  an  approved  caulking  sleeve  or  fitting. 

(h)  Caulking  hubs  when  used  on  screw  pipe  shall  be  heavy  pattern. 
Caulking  sleeves  shall  not  be  used  as  hubs. 

[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1948,  ch.  8  } 

fSect.  3117.  Wrought  Iron  and  Steel  Pipe. —  (a)  Galvanized 
wrought  iron  or  galvanized  steel  pipe  shall  be  of  not  less  than  the  following 
thickness  and  weight  per  linear  foot: — 


(279) 


Sees.  3117=3118 


Size 

Diameter 

(Inches) 

Thickness 
(Inches) 

Weight  Per  Foot 

(Pounds) 

Plain  Ends 

External 

Internal 

\i 

.675 
.840 
1.050 
1.315 
1.660 
1.900 
2.375 
2.875 
3.500 
4.000 
4.500 
5.563 
6.625 
8.625 
10.750 
12.750 

.493 

.622 

.824 

1.049 

1.380 

1.610 

2.067 

2.469 

3.068 

3.548 

4.026 

5.047 

6.065 

8.071 

10.136 

12.090 

.081 
.109 
.113 
.133 
.140 
.145 
.154 
.203 
.216 
.226 
.237 
.258 
.280 
.277 
.307 
.330 

0.567 

}/£ 

0.850 

% 

1 .  130 

1 

1.678 

1J4 

2.272 

\y2 

2.717 

2 

3.652 

2y2 

5.793 

3 

7.575 

3H 

9.109 

4 

10.790 

5 

14.617 

6 

18.974 

8 

24.696 

10 

34.240 

12 

43.775 

(b)  Nipples  when  used  shall  be  cut  from  standard  weight  pipe. 

(c)  Fittings  for  wrought  iron  or  steel  soil,  waste  or  drain  piping  shall  be 
cast  iron,  recessed  and  threaded  drainage  fittings,  with  smooth  interior 
water-way  and  threads  tapped  so  as  to  provide  a  uniform  slope  in  branches 
from  vertical  pipe  of  not  less  than  one  quarter  inch  per  foot.  Fittings  for 
wrought  iron  or  steel  vent  piping  shall  be  cast  pattern. 

(d)  All  screw  pipe  used  for  soil,  waste  and  vent  shall  be  reamed  to  eliminate 
burr. 

[  ]As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  S  ] 


JSect.  3118.  Brass,  Copper  and  Lead  Pipes. —  (a)  Brass  and  copper 
pipe  for  soil,  waste  and  vent  pipes  shall  be  of  the  weight  and  thickness  known 
in  commerce  as  iron  pipe  size. 

(b)  Fittings  for  brass  or  copper  soil,  waste  or  drain  pipes  shall  be  recessed 
heavy  cast  brass  or  cast  iron  drainage  fittings  with  smooth  interior  water-wajr 
and  iron  pipe  size  threads  tapped  so  as  to  provide  a  uniform  slope  in  branches 
from  vertical  pipes  of  not  less  than  one  quarter  inch  per  foot. 

(c)  Lead  pipes  for  soil,  waste  and  vent  pipes  including  bends  and  traps, 
shall  be  not  less  than  the  following  average  thickness  and  weight  per  linear 
foot  and  not  more  than  the  following  lengths: 

(280) 


Sees.  3118-3119 


Size     (Inches) 

Thickness 
(Inches) 

Weight  per 

Linear  Foot 

(Pounds) 

Maximum 

Lengths 

(Feet) 

1J 

1/8 

1/8 

1/8 

9/64 

11/64 

5/32 

2.50 
3.00 
4.00 
5.00 
8.00 
10.00 

6 

1§ 

10 

2 

10 

2\ 

10 

3 

4 

4 

4 

(d)  The  use  of  lead  pipes  In  a  drainage  system  is  restricted  to  the  above 
table.  Concealed  horizontal  lines  of  lead  pipe  shall  be  supported  for  their 
entire  length.  All  other  lead  pipes  shall  be  properly  supported  to  prevent 
sagging. 

(e)  Branch  connections  of  lead  pipe  shall  be  full  size  wiped  solder  joints; 
connections  of  lead  pipe  to  cast  iron  and  screw  pipe  shall  be  made  by  means 
of  brass  ferrules  and  soldering  nipples  respectively  to  which  the  lead  pipe 
shall  be  full  size  wiped  solder  joints,  other  connections  in  lead  pipe  shall  be 
made  by  means  of  a  round  or  flanged  full  size  wiped  solder  joint.  Overcast 
or  cup  joints  are  prohibited. 

(f )  Soldering  nipples  for  the  connection  of  lead  pipe  to  screw  pipe  shal  1 
be  of  approved  quality  cast  brass  or  of  brass  pipe,  iron  pipe  size.  If  cast, 
they  shall  have  not  less  than  the  weight  listed  in  the  following  table: 

Minimum  Weights  of  Cast  Brass  Soldering  Nipples. 


Diameter     (Inches) 


Weight     (Ounces) 


11 

8 

2 

14 

2\ 

22 

3 

32 

4 

56 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8 


*Sect.  3119.  Hangers  and  Supports. — Drainage  System:  All  drain, 
waste  and  vent  piping  shall  be  securely  supported  with  approved  metal 
hangers  or  supports,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  prevent  sagging  or  swaying. 

Drainage  piping  placed  in  filled  ground  or  other  shifting  soil  shall  be  securely 
hung  from  the  building  structure  by  brass  rod  of  approved  diameter  and  rust 
proof  hangers. 

(281) 


Sees,  3119=3121 

Drainage  piping  placed  in  filled  ground  or  other  shifting  soil  outside  or 
inside  the  building  structure,  shall  be  properly  supported  in  such  manner  as 
to  prevent  settling  of  the  pipe. 

Vertical  stacks  shall  be  supported  at  each  floor. 

Horizontal  lines  shall  be  supported  at  approximately  five  feet  on  centers 
when  of  calked  lead  joint  construction  and  approximately  eight  feet  on 
centers  when  of  screw  pipe  construction. 

Inserts  for  concrete  construction  shall  be  of  malleable  iron,  cast  iron  or 
pressed  steel.  When  pressed  steel  is  used  it  shall  be  rust  proof  and  not  less 
than  twelve  gauge. 

Expansion  shields  when  used  shall  be  of  an  approved  type. 

Friction  clamps  when  used  shall  not  be  made  of  less  than  one  and  one 
quarter  inch  by  one  quarter  inch  stock. 

Three  eighth  inch  rod  shall  be  the  minimum  size  used. 

Rod  sizes,  when  used  with  band  or  ring  type  hanger,  shall  be  as  follows: 
piping  up  to  and  including  two  inch  in  size,  three  eighth  inch,  piping  two 
and  one  half  inch  and  up  to  and  including  six  inch  in  size,  one  half  inch 
piping  above  six  inch  in  size  five  eighth  inch. 

Hangers  consisting  of  rod  only  shall  be  in  the  U  form  and  both  ends  of  the 
U  shall  be  fastened  to  the  structure,  and  of  sizes  called  for  above. 

Water  Supply  Piping:  All  water  supply  piping  shall  be  securely  supported 
with  approved  metal  hangers  or  supports,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  prevent 
sagging  or  swaying. 

Wire  hangers  shall  not  be  used  for  supporting  pipes  larger  than  one  inch 
in  size.  When  wire  hangers  are  used  the  wire  shall  be  not  less  than  one  eighth 
inch  gauge. 

Horizontal  lines  of  pipe  shall  be  supported  as  follows:  pipes  one  quarter 
inch  and  up  to  one  half  inch  in  size,  approximately  eight  feet  on  centers  and 
pipes  three  quarter  inch  or  larger  approximately  ten  feet  on  centers. 

Vertical  lines  of  water  supply  piping  shall  be  properly  supported. 
[  *As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

fSect.  3120.  Inspection  and  Tests. — (a)  No  part  of  a  plumbing 
system  shall  be  covered  or  concealed  from  view  until  it  has  been  examined 
by  the  plumbing  inspector  or  tested  in  the  presence  of  a  plumbing  inspector 
and  approved  by  the  commissioner,  who  shall  examine  or  test  it  within  two 
working  days  after  receiving  written  notice  that  the  work  is  ready  for  inspec- 
tion, weather  permitting.  No  part  of  a  plumbing  system  shall  be  used  unless 
the  drain,  soil,  waste,  vent  and  the  water  supply  pipes,  when  roughed  in, 
have  been  tested  by  the  plumber  in  the  presence  of  the  plumbing  inspector 
as  hereinbefore  provided  at  a  time  when  such  test  is  practicable. 

(b)     Tests  shall  be  made  by  water  if  practicable,  or  air  pressure  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  disclose  all  leaks  and  imperfections  in  the  work. 
[  \As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 

JSect.    3121.     Prohibited    Fixtures,     Fittings     and    Connections. — 

The  following  list  of  fixtures,  fittings,  connections,  and  devices  are  hereby 
prohibited: 

(282) 


Sec.  3121 

Fixtures:  Submerged  flushometer  closets. 

Second  hand  fixtures  of  objectionable  origin,  unless  approved 

by  the  commissioner. 
Unlined  wooden  sinks  or  trays  for  restaurants  and  laundries. 
Long  hoppers. 

Enameled  iron  water  closets  and  urinals. 
Wash  sinks  or  basins  so  fitted  as  to  retain  water  to  be  used 
simultaneously  by  more  than  one  person. 
Fittings:  Double  hubs. 

Sleeves  used  as  hubs. 
Saddle  hubs  and  bands. 
Repair  clamps. 
Connections:     Slip  and  union  joints  on  sewer  side  of  trap. 

Drilling  or  tapping  of  drain,  soil,  waste  or  vent  pipes. 
Devices:  Traps  depending  on  partitions  to  form  seal. 

Iron  bath  traps  up  to  two  inch. 
Water  jacketed  grease  traps. 
Fire  pot  hot  water  generators  except  on  gravity  supply  hot 

water   systems. 
Three  quarter  and  full  S  traps  under  three  inch  in  size. 
No  trap  or  water  supply  piping  shall  be  exposed  to  freezing 
without  adequate  protection. 

[  %As  amended  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  8  ] 


(283) 


Sees.  3201=3301 


PART  32. 
VALIDITY. 

Section  3201.     The  invalidit}^  of  any  section  or  provision  of  this  act  shall 
not  invalidate  any  other  section  or  provision  hereof. 


PART  33* 

WAR  PROVISION. 

Section  3301.  During  the  continuance  of  the  existing  state  of  war 
between  the  United  States  and  certain  foreign  countries,  and  for  the  period  of 
six  months  following  the  termination  of  such  existing  state  of  war,  the  Build- 
ing Commissioner  may  grant  a  permit  allowing  the  substitution  of  specified 
building  materials  and  methods  of  construction  for  the  materials  and  methods 
now  required  by  this  code,  whenever  he  shall  find  that  the  materials  required 
by  the  code  are  not  available  or  cannot  be  obtained  because  of  a  Federal 
law,  rule,  or  regulation,  and  that  the  substitution  shall  not  conflict  with  the 
spirit  and  intent  of  this  code. 

[*As  inserted  by  Ord.  1943,  ch.  9] 


(284) 


Sees.  1-5 


GASFITTING   REGULATIONS. 


Consistent  with  the  provisions  of  chapter  479,  Acts  of  1938  as  amended, 
known  as  the  Boston  Building  Code  and  hereinafter  referred  to  as  the  Code, 
the  building  commissioner  of  the  city  of  Boston  and  the  health  commissioner 
of  the  city  of  Boston  in  joint  meeting  this  22d  day  of  June,  1943,  hereby 
establish  regulations  governing  work  performed  or  to  be  performed  and 
materials  used  in  gasfitting  in  all  buildings  and  structures  in  the  city  of 
Boston  which  are  subject  to  the  provisions  of  the  above  mentioned  chapter 
as  amended. 

Said  regulations  known  as  City  of  Boston,  Massachusetts,  Gasfitting 
Regulations  are  as  follows: 

License  Required 

Section  1.  All  gasfitting  in  buildings  shall  be  done  by  licensed  master 
gasfitters,  either  by  themselves  or  through  licensed  journeyman  gasfitters 
employed  by  them  as  stated  in  Section  121  of  the  Code.  The  words  "master 
gasfitter"  and  the  words  "journeyman  gasfitter"  as  used  in  these  regulations 
shall  apply  to  persons  licensed  as  master  gasfitters  and  journeyman  gasfitters 
as  provided  in  Section  121  of  the  Code.  Persons  desiring  a  master  gasfitter's 
license  must  possess  a  journeyman  gasfitter's  license  before  they  can  be  eligible 
for  examination  or  registration  as  a  master  gasfitter.  The  fee  for  issuance  or 
renewal  of  a  master  or  journeyman  gasfitting  license  shall  be  as  provided  in 
paragraph  (e),  Section  121,  of  the  Code  or  as  changed  by  the  building  com- 
missioner with  the  approval  of  the  mayor. 

Application  for  Permits,  Permits  and  Fees 
Section  2.  Whoever  desires  in  the  city  of  Boston  to  install,  alter  or 
repair  any  gasfitting  system  shall  first  make  application  to  the  building 
commissioner,  pay  fee  and  obtain  a  permit  therefor  as  provided  for  in  Sec- 
tions 110,  111  and  112  of  the  Code.  Permits  for  gasfitting  shall  not  be  granted 
to  any  person  other  than  a  licensed  master  gasfitter. 

Definition  of  Gasfitting 

Section  3.  Gasfitting  shall  mean  the  work  of  putting  together  any  fit- 
tings, pipes  or  fixtures  or  other  appliances  which  are  to  contain  gas  for  heat,, 
light,  or  power  purposes  and  shall  be  subject  to  inspection  under  existing, 
laws. 

No  Pipe  or  Fitting  to  be  Concealed  Until  Approved 

Section  4.  No  pipe  or  fitting  shall  be  covered  or  concealed  from  view 
until  approved  by  gasfitting  division  of  the  building  department. 

Final  Test 

Section  5.  There  shall  be  a  final  test,  by  a  gasfitter,  of  all  fixtures  and' 
pipes  by  a  column  of  mercury  raised  not  less  than  two  inches,  which  must 

(285) 


Sees.  5=8 

stand  five  minutes;  this  test  to  be  made  in  the  presence  of  one  of  the  gas- 
fitting  inspectors  of  the  building  department;  the  gauge  to  be  made  of  tubing 
of  uniform  interior  diameter,  and  so  constructed  that  both  surfaces  of  the 
mercury  will  be  exposed  to  view. 

Gas  Not  to  be  Turned  on  Until  Piping  and  Fixtures  Approved 
Section  6.     Gas  shall  not  be  turned  on  in  any  building  until  the  piping, 
appliances  and  fixtures  have  been  approved  by  the  building  commissioner. 

Relative  to  the  Maintenance  and  Repairs  of  Gas  Piping,  Fixtures  and 

Appliances 

Section  7.  The  building  commissioner  may  condemn  and  order  the 
removal,  reconstruction  or  replacement  of  any  system  of  gas  piping,  fixtures 
or  appliances,  or  portions  thereof,  which  in  his  opinion  is  so  constructed  or 
installed  as  to  become  hazardous  to  life  or  property.  He  shall  order  the 
necessary  repairs  to  be  made  when  defects  are  found  in  any  system. 

Upon  notice  by  the  building  commissioner  gas  companies  supplying  gas  in 
the  city  of  Boston  shall  immediately  discontinue  the  supply  of  gas  in  any- 
building  where  a  dangerous  or  hazardous  condition  exists  due  to  a  faulty 
system.  Re-entry  of  the  supply  of  gas  into  a  system  shall  not  be  permitted 
until  so  ordered  by  the  building  commissioner. 

Service  to  Buildings 

Section  8.  Every  building  shall  have  an  independent  service  from  the 
street  unless  in  the  opinion  of  the  building  commissioner  this  is  found 
impractical. 

The  extension,  however,  of  a  gas  service  if  not  less  than  one  and  one  half 
inches  in  diameter  laid  under  ground  and  properly  graded,  may  be  permitted 
from  a  building  located  on  the  front  portion  of  a  lot  to  a  garage,  workshop 
or  a  building  of  a  similar  character  located  in  the  rear  of  said  lot  or  a  group 
of  buildings  connected  by  pipe  ways  or  tunnels,  and  owned  by  the  same  party. 

Every  service  pipe  shall  be  fitted  with  a  beaded  malleable  tee  placed  as  to 
be  easily  opened  to  clear  the  service  pipe  or  any  stoppage. 

The  unused  outlet  (opposite  the  service)  of  this  tee  must  be  fitted  with  a 
one  half  inch  nipple  and  cap.  The  side  outlet  of  the  tee  must  be  fitted  with 
a  street  ell  or  nipple  and  ell  and  service  gas  cock. 

When  service  pipes  are  over  two  inches  in  size  brass  composition  seated 
gate  valves  shall  be  used. 

All  main  or  service  cocks  and  gate  valves  shall  be  kept  readily  accessible 
for  emergency  operation  or  repairs. 

Pressure  Regulators  to  be  Vented 

In  cases  where  it  is  necessary  to  reduce  the  pressure  of  gas  at  the  meter  by 
means  of  a  pressure  regulator,  or  governor,  which  requires  access  to  the 
atmosphere  for  successful  operation,  the  regulator,  or  governor,  shall  be 
equipped  with  a  vent  pipe  leading  to  the  outer  air.     The  end  of  this  vent 

(286) 


Sees.  8-9 

pipe  shall  terminate  not  closer  than  five  feet  to  any  window  or  door  opening. 
Means  shall  be  employed  to  prevent  water  from  entering  this  pipe  and  also 
to  prevent  stoppage  by  insects  or  foreign  matter. 

Gas  Meters  and  Locations 

Section  9.  Gas  meters  shall  be  so  located  as  to  be  readily  accessible  for 
examination,  reading  and  replacement.  Meters  shall  not  be  set  above  the 
basement  or  cellar  and  shall  be  located  as  near  the  service  as  practical,  except 
on  the  approval  of  the  building  commissioner.  No  meters  shall  be  installed 
in  bedrooms,  elevator  shafts,  or  in  any  confined  space.  No  meter  shall  be 
installed  in  any  location  where  it  will  be  subject  to  damage  or  corrosion,  or 
where  it  will  be  subject  to  extreme  temperature  changes.  No  gas  meters 
shall  be  located  closer  than  five  feet  "measured  horizontally"  to  any  electric 
meter  or  other  electric  appliance  capable  of  producing  an  arc. 

On  all  installations  requiring  more  than  1,800  cubic  feet  per  hour,  dual 
meters  may  be  required.  Gas  company  approval  of  the  meter  layout  should 
be  received  before  starting  the  work. 

Where  dual  meters  are  installed  they  shall  be  sized  so  that  one  meter 
shall  have  a  capacity  of  at  least  sixty  per  cent  of  the  connected  load. 

All  meters  larger  than  the  100-light  size  shall  be  flange  connected. 

The  gas  company  will  install  a  meter  of  adequate  size  only  on  the  approval 
of  the  piping  from  the  gasfitting  division  of  the  building  department. 

No  sub-meters  shall  be  installed  unless  the  piping  has  been  approved  by 
the  gasfitting  division  of  the  building  department. 

No  person  shall  remove  any  gas  meter  from  the  premises  except  the  duly 
authorized  representative  of  the  gas  company  owning  such  meter. 

Meter  Connections 

There  shall  be  a  service  cock  at  the  inlet  side  of  each  meter.  When  piping 
to  the  meter  is  over  two  inches  brass  composition  seated  gate  valves  shall  be 
used. 

The  size  of  meter  connections  shall  be  determined  by  the  piping  scale.  See 
Section  11. 

Ail  meter  connections  up  to  and  including  the  100-light  size  are  to  be  made 
with  rigid  iron  connections  of  a  type  approved  by  the  building  commissioner, 
and  shall  be  held  in  alignment  by  double  swing  elbows  on  the  inlet  and  outlet 
of  meter  connections. 

Meters  shall  be  adequately  supported  and  connected  to  the  piping  so  as 
not  to  exert  undue  strain  on  the  connections. 


Size. 
5-Light 
10-Light 
20-Light 
30-Light 
60-Light 
100-Light 


Size  of 
Iron  Pipe. 

Width  Between 

Center  of  Tubes 

and  Face 

of  Flanges. 

Height  to  Top 
of  Tube  Screws 
Center  Flanges. 

3// 
4 

Ill" 

1'-  4«/ie" 

1" 

1'-  If" 

1'-  Qh" 

11" 

1'-  4" 

l'-lO" 

11" 

1  2 

1'-  6|" 

2'-  2" 

2" 

2'-  If" 

2'-  7f" 

2" 

2'-  5i" 

3'-  31" 

Depth  from 
Center  of  Tube 
Center  Flanges 
Back  of  Meter 

4f" 


<  2 

10" 


r 


i" 

a 


(287) 


Sees.  9-10 

Steel  Case  Meters  —  Tapered  Thread  Side  Connections 

Size.  Size  of  Pipe.  Width.  Connections.  Depth. 

No.  4§  4"  31"  25f"  827/32" 

No.  5  4"  37"  32f "  10£" 

Height  Over  All 

No.  4f  B'-^W 

No.  5  4'-3|" 

Meter  Capacity 

5-Light 110  cubic  feet  per  hour 

5-Light  B 150  cubic  feet  per  hour 

10-Light 210  cubic  feet  per  hour 

10-Light  B 300  cubic  feet  per  hour 

20-Light 330  cubic  feet  per  hour 

20-Light  B 450  cubic  feet  per  hour 

30-Light 400  cubic  feet  per  hour 

30-Light  B 600  cubic  feet  per  hour 

60-Light GOO  cubic  feet  per  hour 

60-Light  B 1,250  cubic  feet  per  hour 

100-Light 900  cubic  feet  per  hour 

100-Light  B 1,800  cubic  feet  per  hour 

No.  4|  Steel  Case 3,000  cubic  feet  per  hour 

No.  5  Steel  Case 5,000  cubic  feet  per  hour 


BUILDING   PIPING 
Material  of  Pipe  and  Fitting  Standard  Full  Weight 

Section  10.  All  gas  pipes  shall  be  of  standard  full  weight  wrought  iron  or 
steel;  all  fittings  of  malleable  iron,  except  above  two  inches  when  cast  iron 
if  not  concealed  will  be  allowed;  all  joints  shall  be  made  with  red  and  white 
lead  or  other  approved  material.  No  gasfitter's  cement  shall  be  used  except 
in  putting  lighting  fixtures  together. 

No  second-hand  pipe  shall  be  put  into  use  in  any  building  without  the 
written  permission  of  the  building  commissioner. 

No  pipe  shall  be  laid  so  as  to  support  any  weight  (except  lighting  fixtures) 
or  be  subject  to  any  strain  whatever. 

No  pipe  shall  be  embedded  in  the  required  fireproofing  of  columns  or  other 
structural  members. 

No  pipe  shall  be  installed  in  an  elevator  shaftway.  No  pipe  shall  be  laid 
in  ash  or  cinder  fill. 

No  pipe  shall  be  laid  within  six  inches  of  any  electric  wire  except  where 
the  electric  wire  is  in  conduit. 

The  supply  line  to  pilots  used  for  heating  or  power  boilers  shall  be  run 
overhead  and  shall  not  be  installed  in  any  floor  construction  or  in  any  place 
exposed  to  extreme  cold,  and  in  no  case  shall  such  supply  line  be  less  than 
one  half  inch  pipe. 

(288) 


Sec.   11 

Bracket  fixture-outlets  shall  not  be  placed  closer  than  two  inches  to  window 
or  door  casings  or  back  of  doors;  within  three  feet  under  any  overhead  shelving; 
or  within  three  feet,  measured  horizontally,  of  any  gas  meter. 

Pipes  laid  in  a  cold  or  damp  place  shall  be  properly  dripped,  painted  with 
two  coats  of  red  lead  and  boiled  oil  or  covered  with  felting  satisfactory  to 
the  building  commissioner. 

In  concealed  work,  above  the  basement,  the  piping  in  Type  IV  and  Type 
VI  buildings  shall  be  laid  above  the  timbers. 

No  gas  pipes  shall  be  let  into  any  timbers,  beams,  or  girders  more  than 
two  inches,  and  shall  be  placed  within  thirty-six  inches  of  the  end  of  said 
timbers,  beams  or  girders. 

Fixture  ceiling  outlet  drops  shall  be  fitted  in  the  piping  above  with  a  tee, 
and  a  pipe  must  be  run  not  less  than  four  inches  longer  or  to  a  bearing  and 
be  capped  and  securely  fastened  on  both  sides  of  the  tee. 

Fixture  wall  outlets  may  terminate  with  an  ell  and  must  be  fastened  with 
two  clips  on  the  riser.  Outlets  for  fixtures  and  risers  shall  extend  not  more 
than  one  inch  through  ceiling  or  wall  and  when  not  in  use  left  capped. 

All  piping  shall  be  constructed  and  installed  so  as  to  make  a  durable  and 
substantial  system  of  a  size  and  so  installed  as  to  provide  a  supply  of  gas 
sufficient  to  meet  the  maximum  demand  without  undue  loss  of  pressure 
between  the  street  and  the  fixtures  or  appliances. 

When  necessary  to  cut  out  pipe  for  extension  or  repair,  pipes  shall  be  put 
together  with  right  and  left  couplings  and  in  no  case  shall  unions  or  running 
threads  be  permitted. 

Fastening  Pipes 

Only  such  metal  pipe  strap,  iron  hooks,  hook  plates  or  hangers  suitable 
for  the  size  of  pipe  to  be  secured  and  of  standard  strength  and  quality  shall 
be  used  for  supporting  pipes. 

The  following  is  a  maximum  spacing  of  supports  which  shall  be  used  in 
continuous  piping  installations: 

|  inch  or  §  inch  pipe 6  feet 

|  inch  or  1  inch  pipe 8  feet 

1|  inch  or  larger  (horizontal) 10  feet 

1|  inch  or  larger  (vertical) 2  every  floor  level 

Piping  Size  Requirements 
Section  11.     Maximum  length  of  run  permitted  —  Flow  of  Gas  —  Cubic 
Feet  Per  Hour. 


(289) 


Sec.  12 

Normal  Pipe  Size 

(Fel5'|-In.Hn.  f-In.  1-In.  l|-In.  lj-ln.  2-In.    2£-In.  3-In.     4-In.        6-In. 

10  55  110  315  630  1100  1740  3630  6330  10100  20550  56800 

20  40  80  220  475  800  1265  2680  4590  7275  15000  39550 

30  —  65  190  380  665  1100  2050  3800  5850  12330  32900 

40  —  —  160  315  570  950  1740  3160  5060  10430  28400 

50  —  —  145  285  505  790  1580  2850  4590  9490  25900 

60  —  —  —  270  475  725  1580  2690  4110  8540  23700 

70  _  _  _  235  430  695  1425  2370  3790  7900  21650 

80  —  —  —  —  400  630  1265  2215  3640  7430  20400 

90  —  —  —  —  380  600  1265  2215  3480  7110  19100 

100  —  —  —  —  365  555  1100  2055  3160  6640  18150 

125  —  —  —  —  —  520  1100  1900  3000  6160  16250 

150  —  —  —  —  —  475  950  1740  2690  5525  14860 

175  —  —  —  —  —  —  950  1580  2530  5210  13900 

200  —  —  —  —  —  —  790  1425  2210  4740  12970 

250  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  1265  2055  4270  11370 

300  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  1100  1900  3790  10580 

350  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  1740  3480  9640 

400  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  1580  3320  9000 

450  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  1380  3160  8530 

500  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  3000  8210 

Approximate  Demands  for  Types  of  Gas  Appliances 
Section   12.     The  size  of  gas  pipe  to  be  installed  in  any  installation 

depends  on  the  maximum  gas  consumption  of  the  appliance  to  be  connected 

and  the  length  of  the  pipe  and  number  of  fittings. 

The  demand  of  appliances  in  cubic  feet  per  hour  should  be  determined 

by  dividing  the  manufacturer's  B.  t.  u.  rating  of  the  appliance  by  the  heating 

value  of  the  gas  (528). 

For  the  guidance  of  the  fitter,  when  the  rating  is  unknown,  the  following 

approximate  maximum  demands  for  some  common  gas  appliances  are  given: 

Demand 
B.  t.  u.  Cubic  Feet 

Per  Hour.         Per  Hour. 

Domestic  gas  cooker  (Three-Burner  Top) 37,100  70 

Domestic  gas  range  (Four-Burner  Top) 55,000  105 

Domestic  gas  range  (Six-Burner  Top),  extra  oven. . . .  104,000  195 

Domestic  range  with  kitchen  heater 83,000  155 

Domestic  hot  plate  or  laundry  stove,  per  burner 9,000  17 

Space  heater,  radiant,  per  radiant 1,875                3| 

Space  heater,  luminous  flame,  per  top 1,325                1\ 

Outlet  for  lighting  bracket 5,300  10 

Gas  steam  radiator,  per  section 2,120                4 

Gas  log 13,250  25 

Dental  Bunsen,  curling  iron 1,325                2\ 

Hotel  range,  per  section 116,600  220 

Restaurant  range 106,000  200 

Confectioner's  stove 66,250  125 

Domestic   circulating   tank   water  heater 21,200  to   37,100        40-70 

Domestic  automatic  storage  water  heater  (20  gallons),  18,550  35 

Domestic  automatic  storage  water  heater  (45  gallons),  42,400  80 

(290) 


Sec.  13 

Automatic  Instantaneous  Water  Heaters 

(Gas  line  to  be  run  full  size  of  inlet  of  heaters) 

Capacity  2§  gallons  per  minute 95,400  180 

Capacity  3  gallons  per  minute 116,600  220 

Capacity  4  gallons  per  minute 143,100  270 

Capacity  6  gallons  per  minute 212,000  400 

Capacity  8  gallons  per  minute 291,500  550 

Gas-fired  boiler,  per  horse  power 47,520  90 

Gas  engine,  per  horse  power 21,200  40 

Definitions 

B.  t.  u. —  The  British  thermal  unit  is  the  quantity  of  heat  required  to 
raise  the  temperature  of  one  pound  of  water  one  degree  Fahrenheit. 

Specific  Gravity  —  Specific  gravity  is  the  ratio  of  the  weight  of  a  given 
volume  of  gas  to  that  of  the  same  volume  of  air. 

Gas  pressure  is  measured  by  the  height  of  the  water  column,  in  inches,  it 
will  support. 

Appliances  and  Appliance  Installations 

Section  13.  Except  as  otherwise  provided  for  in  these  regulations,  no 
appliance  shall  be  installed  unless  it  meets  the  requirements  of  safety  and 
service,  established  by  an  approved  representative  organization  such  as  the 
American  Gas  Association  Testing  Laboratory,  the  American  Society  of 
Mechanical  Engineers  or  other  recognized  authorities. 

In  the  case  of  appliances  of  a  type  on  which  no  such  requirements  have 
been  established,  the  building  commissioner  may  require  tests  of  the  appli- 
ances and  on  the  results  of  these  tests  shall  determine  whether  or  not  the 
appliance  shall  be  installed. 

Appliances  shall  be  installed  so  that  their  continued  operation  shall  not 
in  any  way  create  a  hazard  to  persons  or  property. 

No  appliances  shall  be  installed  in  a  room  in  which  the  normal  conditions 
for  ventilation  do  not  permit  the  proper  combustion  of  the  gas  under  normal 
conditions  of  use. 

No  appliance  shall  be  installed  which  is  not  easily  adjusted  or  readily 
cleaned,  and  whose  adjustable  parts,  such  as  air  shutters  and  orifices,  do  not 
remain  securely  fixed  in  any  desired  position. 

No  device  or  attachment  shall  be  installed  in  any  piping  or  on  any  appli- 
ance which  may  in  any  way  impair  the  combustion  of  the  gas. 

A  gas  cock  or  shut-off,  which  constitutes  the  means  of  gas  control,  shall  be 
easily  accessible  and  within  convenient  reaching  distance  when  lighting  the 
burner. 

All  appliances  shall  be  connected  with  a  right  and  left  coupling  and  a 
master  cock  to  the  house  piping.  Gas  refrigerators  may  be  connected  with 
one-foot  length  of  copper  tubing  with  swadged  joints  and  union  in  place  of  a 
right  and  left  coupling. 

Cocks  controlling  several  appliances  or  lighting  fixtures  shall  be  placed 
at  an  adequate  distance  from  each  other  so  that  they  will  be  readily  distin- 
guishable —  this  distance  to  be  not  less  than  six  inches. 

(291) 


Sec.  13 

Appliances  equipped  with  a  control  cock  or  cocks  shall  not  be  connected 
with  rubber  or  flexible  tubing. 

When  air  or  oxygen  under  pressure  is  used  in  connection  with  the  gas 
supply,  effective  means  such  as  a  check  valve  for  air  and  a  relief  trap  for 
oxygen  of  an  approved  type  shall  be  provided  to  prevent  the  air  or  oxygen 
from  going  back  into  the  gas  pipe. 

Every  flue-connected  appliance  (except  an  incinerator),  unless  its  con- 
struction serves  the  same  purpose,  shall  be  equipped  with  an  effective  back- 
draft  diverter.  If  the  draft  hood  is  the  cone  type,  it  must  be  installed  in  a 
vertical  position  adjacent  to  the  appliance.  The  flue  pipe  of  dual -oven 
ranges  shall  be  equipped  with  a  fly  damper  installed  in  a  horizontal  position. 

No  gas  appliances  shall  be  installed  in  locations  where  their  continued 
operation  will  raise  the  temperature  of  surrounding  combustible  material, 
including  woodwork,  more  than  90  degrees  Fahrenheit  from  a  normal  tem- 
perature of  the  room  unless  adequate  protection  is  provided. 

No  space  heater  shall  be  installed  in  any  room  or  place  where  its  operation 
would  cause  a  hazard  to  persons  or  property. 

Individual  fixed  heating  appliances,  which  include  gas-fired  steam  radiators, 
hot  air  radiators,  gas  logs,  gas  mantles,  radiant  fires  and  similar  types  of 
appliance,  shall  be  connected  with  rigid  iron  pipe  to  the  house  piping. 

Portable  gas  heater,  which  includes  many  miscellaneous  types  of  small 
heaters  for  temporary  or  quick  heat,  when  constructed  to  meet  the  minimum 
requirements  of  safetj^  and  service  and  without  a  controlling  cock  on  the 
heater  may  be  connected  with  flexible  tubing;  only  approved  quality  tubing 
of  not  more  than  an  eight-foot  length  with  the  controlling  cock  at  the  house 
piping  will  be  permitted. 

Any  floor,  wall  or  ceiling  which  is  constructed  wholly  or  partially  of  wood 
or  combustible  material,  or  is  of  such  construction  that  the  temperature  main- 
tained will  cause  deterioration  of  material,  shall  be  regarded  as  combustible. 

No  range,  oven  or  other  appliance  of  the  hotel  or  restaurant  type  shall  be 
installed  on  a  combustible  floor  unless  raised  to  provide  an  air  space  of  at 
least  four  inches  between  the  bottom  of  the  appliance  and  the  combustible 
floor.  The  combustible  floor  beneath  the  appliance  shall  be  given  protection 
as  effective  as: 

(1)  A  sheet  of  asbestos  one-half  inch  thick  laid  beneath  No.  26  gauge  gal- 
vanized metal  extending  six  inches  beyond  the  appliance  and  an  intermediate 
baffle  consisting  of  a  sheet  of  asbestos  one-half  inch  thick  between  two  sheets 
of  No.  26  gauged  galvanized  metal  held  in  place  half  way  between  the  bottom 
of  the  appliance  and  the  floor;  or 

(2)  Terra  cotta  blocks,  with  the  cells  arranged  to  provide  continuous  air 
spaces,  placed  over  a  sheet  of  asbestos  one-half  inch  thick  laid  beneath  No.  26 
gauge  galvanized  metal  extending  six  inches  beyond  the  appliance,  and 
covered  with  three-eighths  inch  of  boiler  plate. 

The  air  space  required  above  may  be  omitted  provided  eight  inches  of 
brick  or  concrete  is  placed  between  the  bottom  of  the  appliance  and  the 

floor. 

Every  hotel  and  restaurant  type  range  shall  have  erected  over  it  a  hood 
adequate  in  size  to  receive  the  products  of  combustion  from  the  appliance. 

(292) 


Sees.  14=16 

The  hood  is  to  be  vented  through  a  masonry  chimney,  or  by  a  metal  duct 
and  fan,  to  the  outer  air. 

The  owner  or  his  agent  must  receive  a  permit  for  the  installation  of  gas- 
fired  house  heating  boilers  and  furnaces,  bake  and  industrial  ovens,  power 
boilers,  gas  engines,  and  if  existing  appliances  are  converted  to  gas  fuel 
irrespective  of  the  gasfitter's  permit  for  performing  the  work. 

Kitchen  Regulations 
Section  14.  No  domestic  gas  stove  or  appliance  for  cooking  shall  be 
installed  in  a  room  which  does  not  meet  the  requirements  of  the  Code.  Every 
kitchen,  kitchenette,  or  room  adapted  for  cooking  purposes  shall  be  not  less 
than  the  minimum  dimensions  established  by  the  Code.  Ventilation  of 
every  such  room  shall  be  in  compliance  with  the  provisions  of  the  Code. 
Interior  kitchens  or  kitchenettes,  provided  with  mechanical  ventilation, 
shall  be  in  continuous  operation  while  range  is  lighted  and  the  door  to  kitchen 
or  kitchenette  shall  have  bottom  panels  removed  and  louvres  of  wire  mesh 
screen  not  less  than  one  quarter  inch  mesh  installed  in  place  of  panels. 

Installation  of  Fuel  Oil,  Coke,  Gas  and  Electric  Ranges 

Commercial  and  domestic  stoves  and  ranges  as  well  as  any  other  heat 
producing  apparatus  shall  be  installed  in  compliance  with  the  provisions  of 
Part  21  of  the  Code. 

Section  15.  All  master,  service,  meter  and  controlling  gas  cocks,  as  well 
as  the  gas  keys  on  lighting  fixtures,  shall  be  of  brass  and  conform  to  the 
Boston  type. 

The  plugs  of  all  cocks  and  keys  must  be  ground  to  a  smooth  and  true 
surface  for  their  entire  length;  have  not  less  than  three-quarter  inch  bearing; 
have  two  flat  sides  on  the  end  for  the  washer  and  have  two  nuts.  Stop  pins 
to  cocks  and  fixture  keys  must  be  screwed  into  place. 

Cocks  which  are  integral  parts  of  gas  appliances  and  are  supplied  through 
master  cocks  shall  have  screwed-in  stop  pins  or  an  equivalent  means  to 
provide  definite  closing  positions. 

Section  16.  No  swinging  gas  brackets  will  be  permitted  unless  the 
burner  is  provided  with  a  globe  or  guard.  A  stiff  gas  bracket  may  be  used 
without  a  globe  or  guard  if  the  length  of  the  bracket  is  not  less  than  five 
inches,  measured  from  the  burner  to  the  wall. 

Brass  tubing  used  for  arms  of  fixtures  shall  be  at  least  No.  18  standard 
gauge  with  full  threads.  Rope  or  square  tubing  shall  be  brazed  or  soldered 
into  fittings. 

When  brass  or  copper  piping  is  used  on  the  outside  of  plastering,  in  dentist 
chairs  or  work  of  a  similar  character,  it  shall  be  classed  as  fixtures. 

In  theatres  and  buildings  where  illuminating  gas  is  used  for  emergency 
exit  lights  there  shall  be  at  each  exit  a  gas  outlet  equipped  with  a  two-light 
bracket.  The  brackets  shall  be  fitted  with  open  flame  burners  having  built-in 
lava  tips. 

The  drawings  of  said  theatres  and  buildings  shall  be  marked  showing  gas 
outlets. 

(293) 


Sees.  17=18 

Flexible  Tubfrig 
S^tion  17.  Appliances  which  are  necessarily  portable,  or  which  have 
to  be  moved  from  place  to  place,  may  be  connected  with  flexible  tubing. 
Only  practicable  lengths  of  not  over  eight  feet,  approved  quality  tubing,  and 
designed  so  as  to  permit  of  secure  attachment  to  the  nozzle  of  the  appliance 
and  the  controlling  cock  on  the  house  piping  will  be  permitted. 

Cocks  controlling  tubing  connected  appliance  shall  be  located  on  the  rigid 
piping  at  the  source  of  the  gas  supply  to  the  tubing. 

Water  Heaters 

Section  18.  Gas  water  heaters  shall  not  be  installed  in  bathrooms, 
industrial  wash  rooms,  toilets,  shower  baths,  bedrooms,  or  in  any  room  or 
place  where  its  operation  would  cause  a  hazard  to  persons  or  property.  Water 
heaters  of  the  closed  bottom  type  shall  not  be  placed  directly  on  combustible 
floors,  but  suitable  insulation  shall  be  provided.  No  gas  water  heaters  shall 
be  located  closer  than  six  inches  to  any  combustible  wall,  even  though  the 
wall  is  protected. 

No  water  heating  appliance  shall  be  installed  in  a  closed  system  of  water 
piping  unless  proper  water  relief  valves  are  provided  and  the  storage  boiler 
conforms  to  the  requirements  of  the  Code. 

No  manually  controlled  water  heater  shall  be  placed  in  a  cellar  or  base- 
ment unless  approved  by  the  building  commissioner. 

No  range  boiler  or  other  vessel  or  tank  in  which  heated  water  is  stored 
shall  be  connected  with  the  street  pressure  unless  it  is  equipped  with  tem- 
perature, pressure  relief  and  vacuum  relief  valves  or  valve  placed  on  boiler 
or  tank  side  of  shut-offs.  Temperature,  pressure  relief  and  vacuum  relief 
valves  shall  have  their  discharge  openings  piped  to  conform  with  the  Code. 

No  such  valve  shall  be  used  unless  approved  by  the  building  commissioner. 

The  manually  controlled  circulating  and  storage  types  of  gas  water  heater 
ntermittently  operated,  may  be  exempt  from  the  requirements  for  a  flue 
connection. 

All  automatic  storage  types  of  water  heater  shall  be  connected  to  a  chimney 
or  suitable  flue  and  shall  be  equipped  with  an  effective  device  which  will 
automatically  turn  off  the  gas  to  the  main  burner  in  the  event  that  the  flame 
is  extinguished. 

Any  storage  type  water  heater  equipped  with  automatic  control  which 
has  a  demand  rating  greater  than  31,800  B.  t.  u.  (60  cubic  feet  per  hour) 
shall  be  supplied  by  an  independent  fuel  line  from  the  meter  to  the  appliance. 

Automatic  instantaneous  water  heaters  shall  be  supplied  by  an  independent 
fuel  line  from  the  meter  to  the  appliance.  The  fuel  line  must  never  be  smaller 
in  diameter  than  the  inlet  of  the  heater.  The  appliances  must  be  connected 
to  a  chimney  or  suitable  flue. 

The  cold  water  supply  to  an  automatic  instantaneous  water  heater  shall 
be  such  as  to  provide  sufficient  pressure  to  properly  operate  the  water  valve 
when  drawing  water  from  any  hot  water  faucet. 

(294) 


Sec.  19 

Chimney  and  Flue  Connections 

Section  19.  Every  gas  appliance  having  a  demand  in  excess  of  37,100 
B.  t.  u.  (70  cubic  feet  per  hour)  and  all  automatically  controlled  appliances 
shall  be  connected  to  an  effective  flue.  On  account  of  its  intermittent  use, 
the  domestic  size  gas  range,  the  hand  controlled  water  heater,  and  room 
space  heater  may  be  exempt  from  the  requirement  for  a  flue  connection. 

Water  heaters  classed  as  observation  heaters  with  no  remote  control  and 
equipped  with  safety  device  to  shut  off  gas  to  the  main  burner  in  the  event  the 
pilot  flame  is  extinguished  shall  be  exempt  from  this  section. 

Automatic  controlled  appliances  having  a  demand  rating  not  greater  than 
13,250  B.  t.  u.  (25  cubic  feet  per  hour)  and  equipped  with  an  effective  device 
which  will  automatically  turn  off  the  gas  to  the  main  burner  in  the  event 
that  the  flame  is  extinguished  shall  be  exempt  from  the  requirements  for  a 
flue. 

When  gas  appliances  are  connected  to  a  ventilating  flue,  the  flue  shall  be 
constructed  of  brick  walls  not  less  than  eight  inches  thick,  or  with  walls  four 
inches  thick  lined  with  suitable  flue  lining.  Steel  stacks  shall  be  permissible 
under  such  conditions  as  the  commissioner  shall  prescribe. 

All  chimney  flues  shall  have  a  well  with  a  built-in  clean-out  door  at  least 
two  feet  below  the  entrance  of  the  lowest  flue  piping. 

The  horizontal  flue  piping  from  an  appliance  shall  enter  the  side  of  a  chimney 
through  a  metal  thimble  or  masonry  flue  ring,  and  shall  not  be  inserted  beyond 
the  inside  wall  of  the  chimney.  If  more  than  one  entrance  is  made  to  the 
chimney,  the  thimble  should  be  at  different  levels  or  at  right  angles  to  each 
other. 

The  horizontal  flue  piping  should  be  as  straight  and  short  as  possible 
and  the  appliance  should  be  located  as  near  the  chimney  as  practicable. 
No  horizontal  flue  greater  in  length  than  twenty  feet  shall  be  allowed  and 
for  long  runs  a  pitch  or  rise  of  at  least  one  half  inch  to  the  foot  shall  be  main- 
tained from  the  appliance  to  the  chimney. 

Flue  piping  shall  be  at  least  twelve  inches  from  any  combustible  material 
unless  the  material  is  provided  with  a  protection  as  effective  as  a  metal  shield 
laid  on  a  sheet  of  asbestos  one-quarter  inch  thick;  placed  one  inch  from  the 
combustible  material,  in  which  case  the  distance  shall  not  be  less  than  six 
inches.  The  width  of  the  shield  shall  be  at  least  twice  the  diameter  of  the 
flue  pipe. 

No  flue  piping  of  any  appliance  shall  be  connected  to  the  flue  piping  of  any 
other  appliance  by  the  use  of  right-angle  connections;  such  connections  shall 
be  made  with  a  Y  or  45-degree  fitting. 

The  flue  piping  or  connections  shall  not  be  smaller  than  the  size  indicated 
by  the  vent  collar  of  the  appliance.  Where  the  appliance  has  more  than 
one  vent  the  flue  piping  shall  equal  the  combined  area  of  the  vents  for  which 
it  acts  as  a  common  connection  to  the  chimney. 

Every  flue  connected  appliance  (except  an  incinerator),  unless  its  con- 
struction serves  the  same  purpose,  shall  be  equipped  with  an  effective  back 
draft  diverter.  If  the  draft  hood  is  the  cone  type  it  must  be  installed  in  a 
vertical  position  adjacent  to  the  appliance. 

(295) 


Sees.  20=21 

In  the  absence  of  suitable  masonry  chimneys,  the  vents  from  hotel  kitchen 
equipments,  industrial  and  other  heavy  duty  appliances,  exhausting  into 
hoods,  may  have  products  of  combustion  from  the  hoods  removed  through 
an  exterior  wall  to  the  outer  air  by  a  fan  and  metal  duct. 

The  discharge  from  the  system  shall  be  carried  to  a  sufficient  height  to 
protect  adjoining  buildings  from  the  products  of  combustion. 

Vent  stacks  erected  on  the  outside  of  buildings  may  be  fastened  to  the 
building  walls  by  brackets  or  strap  iron  anchors  and  must  conform  to  the 
requirements  of  the  commissioner. 

Central  House  Heating  Boilers  and  Furnaces 

Section  20.  Gas  boilers  and  furnaces  shall  be  located  so  that  all  parts 
are  accessible  for  adjustment,  operation  and  repairs.  The  location  of  any 
house  heating  boiler  or  furnace  must  be  ventilated  to  provide  sufficient  air 
for  combustion  and  the  location  of  the  heater  shall  not  constitute  a  fire 
hazard. 

Heaters  should  be  located  near  the  chimney  so  as  to  provide  as  short  and 
direct  a  flue  connection  as  possible. 

Down  draft  diverters  come  as  standard  equipment  on  all  A.  G.  A.  approved 
appliances  and  must  be  used  on  all  installations. 

A  master  cock  shall  be  provided  ahead  of  all  control  devices  on  the  appliance. 

All  central  house  heating  appliances  shall  be  supplied  by  an  independent 
fuel  line  from  the  meter  to  the  appliances. 

The  gas  pressure  regulator  or  governor  requiring  access  to  the  atmosphere 
for  successful  operation  shall  be  vented  to  the  outer  air  by  standard  weight 
wrought  iron  or  steel  pipe  not  less  than  three-eighths  inch  or  into  the  com- 
bustion chamber  adjacent  to  a  constantly  burning  pilot  unless  its  construc- 
tion is  such  as  to  prevent  an  escape  of  gas  from  the  vent  opening  in  the  event 
of  diaphragm  failure. 

Conversion  of  Central  House  Heating  Appliances 

Section  21.  No  boiler  or  furnace  designed  for  other  fuels  shall  be  con- 
verted to  the  use  of  gas  fuel  unless  the  following  regulations  are  complied 
with : 

(1)  Either  a  thermostatic  pilot  light,  so  constructed  and  adjusted  that 
no  gas  can  flow  through  the  main  burner  unless  the  pilot  light  is  burning, 
or  some  other  similar  type  of  safety  device  serving  this  same  end  shall  be 
employed.  The  operation  of  the  safety  device  shall  not  depend  on  the  clos- 
ing of  an  electric  circuit  to  shut  off  the  main  gas  supply. 

(2)  The  boiler  or  furnace  shall  be  equipped  with  safety  devices  arranged 
to  limit  high  steam  pressure  or  water  temperatures  or  high  air  temperatures 
in  warm-air  furnaces  which  are  equipped  with  air  circulating  fans.  It  is 
recommended  that  in  steam  or  vacuum  vapor  boilers  means  be  provided  to 
guard  against  firing  a  dry  boiler  or  one  in  which  the  water  is  dangerously 
low,  and  that  in  warm-air  furnaces  not  equipped  with  air  circulating  fans 
means  be  provided  to  guard  against  excessive  temperatures  in  the  distrib- 
uting system.     Safety  devices  operated  electrically  shall  not  depend  upon 

(296) 


Sees.  22-24 

the  closing  of  the  circuit  to  shut  off  the  main  gas  supply.  This  requirement 
should  not  be  construed  as  prohibiting  the  use  of  electrical  regulating  devices, 
provided  the  required  safety  devices  are  also  installed. 

An  approved  gas  pressure  regulator  of  sufficient  size  shall  be  installed  in 
the  gas  line  leading  to  the  appliance. 

All  boilers  or  furnaces  shall  be  connected  to  chimneys.  The  size  of  the 
flue  and  flue  piping  shall  be  proportionate  to  the  maximum  rate  of  gas 
consumption  not  less  than  one  square  inch  in  cross-sectional  area  for  each 
7,500  B.  t.  u.  of  gas  per  hour. 

No  damper  shall  be  installed  in  the  flue  pipe  unless  provided  with  means 
for  permanently  securing  it  in  the  proper  position  or  unless  so  arranged  that 
the  main  gas  valve  will  not  open  until  the  damper  has  opened  and  the  damper 
will  not  close  until  the  main  gas  valve  has  closed,  in  which  case  the  damper 
and  draft  hood  shall  be  so  located  and  so  proportioned  that  failure  of  damper 
operation  will  not  cause  the  formation  of  carbon  monoxide. 

Incinerators 
Section  22.     All  incinerators  shall  be  installed  in  accordance  with  pro- 
visions of  the  Code,  Section  2116. 

Gas  Engines 

Section  23.  Gas  engines  must  be  connected  to  a  service  from  which  no 
gas  for  illuminating  purposes  or  constant  burning  pilot  lights  is  used. 

Diaphragms  and  bags  must  be  inclosed  in  substantial  gas  tight  metal 
housing,  vented  to  the  outer  air. 

Exhaust  pipes  shall  be  run  to  the  roof  of  building  when  possible  and  be 
kept  at  least  eight  inches  from  woodwork  and  any  combustible  material 
and  when  carried  through  floors  or  partitions  must  be  covered  with  a  fire- 
proof covering  and  provided  with  a  ventilated  thimble  at  least  six  inches 
larger  in  diameter  than  the  pipe. 

Mufflers  and  exhaust  pots  must  be  made  equal  in  strength  to  the  cylinders 
of  the  engine,  and  be  placed  at  least  twelve  inches  from  any  combustible 
floor  or  material. 

Gas=Fired  Power  Boilers 

Section  24.  Power  boilers  above  three  horse  power  capacity  shall  con- 
form to  the  Massachusetts  Standard  established  by  the  Massachusetts 
Department  of  Public  Safety. 

Power  boilers  of  three  horse  power  capacity  or  less  shall  conform  either 
to  the  requirements  of  the  American  Society  of  Mechanical  Engineers  or  to 
the  Massachusetts  Standard,  and  shall  be  satisfactory  to  the  building 
commissioner. 

All  such  boilers  shall  bear  the  stamp  of  approval  of  the  Massachusetts 
Department  of  Public  Safety  or  of  the  American  Society  of  Mechanical 
Engineers  indicating  conformity  with  respective  requirements. 

No  furnace  or  boiler  for  heating  shall  be  placed  upon  a  wooden  floor  unless 
the  floor  is  made  safe  with  fire-resistive  materials  satisfactory  to  the  building 
commissioner. 

(297) 


Sees.  25=27 

General  Requirements 

Gas  boilers  shall  be  located  so  that  all  parts  are  accessible  for  adjustment, 
operation  and  repairs.  The  location  must  be  ventilated  to  provide  sufficient 
air  for  combustion  and  the  location  of  the  boiler  shall  not  constitute  a  hazard 
to  persons  or  property. 

Gas  boilers  (other  than  the  pressing  machine  and  similar  individual 
small  units)  when  located  above  the  cellar  shall  be  supported  on  two  parallel 
I-beams,  placed  out  of  the  heat  zone  and  laid  across  the  floor  timbers, 
adequate  in  length  and  weight  to  distribute  the  floor  load. 

The  floor  shall  be  covered  with  a  protection  as  effective  as  a  sheet  of  asbestos 
one-half  inch  thick  laid  beneath  a  sheet  of  No.  26  gauge  galvanized  metal 
extending  under  the  I-beams;  with  four-inch  hollow  tiles  laid  between  the 
I-beams  under  appliance,  the  cells  arranged  to  provide  a  continuous  open 
air  space,  the  tiles  to  be  covered  with  a  sheet  of  three-eighths  inch  boiler  plate 
supported  on  the  I-beams. 

Boilers  for  pressing  machines  and  similar  small  units  having  closed  or 
semi-closed  bases  shall  not  be  placed  directly  on  combustible  floors,  but 
suitable  insulation  shall  be  provided. 

Bakery  Ovens 

Section  25.  Application  must  be  filed  in  and  permit  obtained  from  the 
building  department  for  the  location  of  ovens  and  the  building  must  con- 
form to  the  Building  Code. 

Change  of  Use  or  Occupancy 
Section  26.     No  additional  gas  appliances  or  meters  shall  be  permitted 
in  a  place  of  habitation  where  there  is  a  change  of  use  or  occupancy  unless  a 
permit  for  such  change  has  been  obtained  and  the  building  conforms  to 
the  requirements  of  the  Building  Code. 

Gas  Company  Exceptions 
Section  27.     Nothing  in  these  regulations  shall  be  construed  to  affect  the 
operations  of  any  gas  company  upon  its  own  premises  or  upon  its  mains  or 
service  pipes. 

James  H.  Mooney, 

Building  Commissioner. 

G.  Lynde  Gately,  M.  D., 

Health  Commissioner. 


(298) 


FIRST  FIRE  ZONE 

All  that  portion  of  the  city  which  is  included  within  a  line  beginning  at  the 
intersection  of  the  centre  lines  of  Dover  and  Albany  streets,  and  thence 
running  east  through  the  centre  of  said  Dover  street  to  the  harbor  commis- 
sioners' line;  thence  by  said  harbor  commissioners'  line  around  the  northerly 
portion  of  the  city  to  a  point  on  Charles  river  at  the  intersection  of  said  line 
with  the  easterly  line  of  St.  Mary's  street  extended;  thence  along  said  east- 
erly line  of  St.  Mary's  street  and  the  boundary  line  between  Brookline  and 
Boston  to  the  centre  of  Longwood  avenue;  thence  through  the  centre  of  said 
avenue  to  the  centre  of  St.  Alphonsus  street;  thence  through  the  centre  of 
said  street  to  the  centre  of  Ward  street;  thence  through  the  centre  of  said 
Ward  street  to  the  centre  of  Parker  street;  thence  through  the  centre  of  said 
Parker  street  to  the  centre  of  Ruggles  street;  thence  through  the  centre  of 
said  Ruggles  street  to  the  centre  of  Washington  street;  thence  through  the 
centre  of  said  Washington  street  to  a  point  opposite  the  centre  of  Palmer 
street;  thence  through  the  centre  of  said  Palmer  street  and  through  the 
centre  of  Eustis  street  to  the  centre  of  Hampden  street;  and  thence  through 
the  centre  of  said  Hampden  street  and  the  centre  of  Albany  street  to  the 
point  of  beginning. 


SECOND   FIRE  ZONE 

All  that  portion  of  the  city  which  is  included  within  a  line  beginning  at  the 
intersection  of  the  boundary  lines  between  the  City  of  Boston  and  the  cities 
of  Somerville  and  Everett;  thence  by  the  boundary  lines  between  the  City  of 
Boston  and  the  cities  of  Everett  and  Chelsea  to  the  intersection  with  the 
centre  line  of  Trumbull  street  extended  northerly;  thence  by  said  centre  line 
of  Trumbull  street  extended,  the  centre  line  of  Trumbull  street  and  said 
centre  line  extended  southerly  to  the  harbor  line;  thence  by  said  harbor 
line  to  its  intersection  with  the  easterly  line  of  Pier  No.  5,  belonging  to  the 
Boston  and  Albany  Railroad  Company;  thence  by  a  straight  lirle  across 
Boston  Harbor  to  its  intersection  with  the  harbor  line  at  the  easterly  corner 
of  Pier  No.  1  in  South  Boston;  thence  by  the  harbor  line  in  the  northerly, 
easterly  and  southerly  portions  of  South  Boston  to  an  angle  in  said  harbor 
line  nearly  opposite  the  intersection  of  the  centre  line  of  Columbia  road  with 
the  centre  line  of  location  of  the  Old  Colony  Railroad;  thence  by  a  straight 
line  to  the  said  intersection;  and  by  the  centre  lines  of  Columbia  road,  Blue 
Hill  avenue,  Seaver  street,  Columbus  avenue,  Atherton  and  Mozart  streets, 
Chestnut  avenue,  Sheridan,  Centre  and  Perkins  streets,  South  Huntington 
avenue,  Castleton  street  and  the  centre  line  of  said  Castleton  street  extended 
to  the  boundary  line  between  the  City  of  Boston  and  the  town  of  Brookline; 
thence  by  said  boundary  line  to  a  point  therein  one  hundred  feet  southwest 
of  Washington  street  in  the  Brighton  district;  thence  by  a  line  parallel  to 

(299) 


and  one  hundred  feet  southwesterly  from  the  centre  line  of  Washington 
street  to  an  angle  formed  by  the  intersection  of  said  line  with  the  extension 
of  a  line  parallel  to  and  one  hundred  feet  northwesterly  of  the  centre  line  of 
Market  street;  thence  by  said  extension  and  said  line  parallel  to  and  one 
hundred  feet  northwesterly  of  the  centre  line  of  Market  street  to  a  point 
one  hundred  feet  south  of  the  centre  line  of  Western  avenue;  thence  by  a 
line  parallel  to  and  one  hundred  feet  south  of  the  centre  line  of  Western 
avenue  and  said  line  extended  to  a  point  in  the  boundary  line  between  the 
City  of  Boston  and  the  town  of  Watertown  south  of  Watertown  Bridge, 
so  called;  thence  by  said  boundary  line  and  the  boundary  lines  between  the 
cities  of  Cambridge  and  Somerville  to  the  point  of  beginning,  but  not  includ- 
ing area  within  the  boundaries  of  the  first  fire  zone. 

Also  those  portions  of  Hyde  Park  upon  or  within  one  hundred  feet  of  the 
following  named  streets  and  squares:  Everett  square,  so  called;  Fairmount 
avenue  from  River  street  to  the  Neponset  river;  River  street  from  the  loca- 
tion of  the  Boston  and  Providence  Railroad  to  Winthrop  street;  Hyde  Park 
avenue  on  the  easterly  side  from  the  northerly  side  of  Oak  street  to  Everett 
street;  Hyde  Park  avenue  on  the  westerly  side  from  the  northerly  side  of 
Pine  street  extension,  so  called,  to  a  point  on  said  Hyde  Park  avenue  oppo- 
site the  southerly  line  of  Everett  street;  Harvard  avenue  from  River  street 
to  Winthrop  street;  Maple  street  from  River  street  to  a  point  one  hundred 
and  eighty  feet  southerly  therefrom;  Central  avenue  from  River  street  to 
Winthrop  street;  Davison  street  from  Fairmount  avenue  to  a  point  three 
hundred  feet  northeasterly  therefrom;  Grove  street;  Pierce  street  from 
Fairmount  avenue  to  a  point  three  hundred  feet  northeasterly  therefrom; 
Knott  street  from  Fairmount  avenue  to  a  point  three  hundred  feet  easterly 
therefrom;  Railroad  avenue  from  Fairmount  avenue  to  a  point  three  hun- 
dred feet  northeasterly  therefrom;  Station  street  from  the  Neponset  river 
to  a  point  three  hundred  feet  northeasterly  from  Fairmount  avenue;  Walnut 
street  from  Fairmount  avenue  to  a  point  three  hundred  feet  southwesterly 
therefrom;  Maple  street  from  Fairmount  avenue  to  a  point  one  hundred 
and  twenty-five  feet  westerly  therefrom. 

[Orel  1913,  ch.  4  and  Rev.  Orel.  1947,  ch.  41,  sec.  1\ 


(300) 


INDEX  TO   BUILDING  CODE 

Section 
Group  A— THEATRES 301 

Group  B — HALLS  (Churches,  gymnasiums,  dance  halls  with  main  floor  over  900  square 

feet) 401 

Group  C — SCHOOLS  (Buildings  partly  or  wholly  so  used) 501 

Group  D— HOSPITALS,  JAILS,  ASYLUMS,  HOMES  FOR  AGED,  ORPHAN- 
AGES, SANITARIUMS,  NURSERIES 601 

Group  E— COMMERCIAL  BUILDINGS  OF  HAZARDOUS  OCCUPANCY  (Plan- 
ing mills,  woodworking  plants,  box  or  mattress  manufacturing,  dry 
cleaning) 701 

Group  F— OFFICES  AND  COMMERCIAL  BUILDINGS,  RESTAURANTS, 
WHARF  BUILDINGS,  POLICE  AND  FIRE  STATIONS,  MU- 
SEUMS, LIBRARIES.  Also  buildings  for  storage  and  sale  of  goods, 
wholesale  and  retail  stores  and  factories  and  workshops  (materials 
handled  not  highly  flammable),  and  printing  plants  and  buildings  for 
storage  of  transient  freight;  garages  for  more  than  six  cars  and  hangars,       801 

Group  G— COMMERCIAL  BUILDINGS  OF  NON-HAZARDOUS  OCCUPANCY 

(Ice,  power  and  pumping  plants,  cold  storage  plants,  creameries,  brew- 
eries; also  factories  and  workshops  using  incombustible  and  non- 
explosive  materials) 901 

Group  H— HOTELS,  DORMITORIES,  LODGING  HOUSES,  CONVENTS, 
MONASTERIES  AND  CLUB  HOUSES  (With  sleeping  accommoda- 
tions for  ten  or  more  persons  or  for  more  than  three  families).  Also 
apartment  houses  accommodating  more  than  three  families 1001 

Group  I — DWELLINGS  (For  not  over  three  families),  and  dormitories,  lodging  houses, 
clubs,  convents  and  monasteries  (with  sleeping  accommodations  for  less 
than  ten  persons) 1 101 

Group  J— MISCELLANEOUS  STRUCTURES,.  Tanks,  towers,  signs,  amusement 
park  structures,  grandstands,  reviewing  stands  and  garages  for  six  cars 
or  less 1201 


Section 

ACCESS  PANEL  for  fire  extinguishing  apparatus 3010 

ACOUSTICAL  CEILING  CONSTRUCTION  in  Buildings  of  Type  I 1602-f 

ADMINISTRATION 

Abandon  application  after  six  months 110-g 

Actions  pending  on  effective  date  of  Code 103 

Acts  repealed 102 

Amendments  of  Code  by  City  Council 105A 

Annual  Report 115 

Appeals  (see  Board  of  Appeal) 118,  119 

Application  of  other  statutes  to  Building  Department 104 

Applications  for  permit 110 

Appointment  of  employees 109-d,e 

Building  Commissioner — qualifications 109-b 

Building  height  allowed 136 

Boards  (see  Boards  of) 

Civil  Service  rights  of  employees , 109-c 

Courts  and  jurisdiction 123 

Deputy  Commissioner  may  be  appointed 109-e 

Dynamos — Applications  for 110-a 

Elevators  and  escalators — Installation  of 135 

Employees  not  to  engage  in  other  work 109-f 

Employees — Reappointment 109 

Examination  of  plans 1 10-h 

Extension  of  application  may  be  granted 110-g 

Extension  of  permit  may  be  granted ....... H  1-e 

Fees , ...... 112 

Inspection 113 

Inspectors — Appointments  and  qualifications 109»-d 

Maintenance  of  furnaces  and  boilers HO-a 

Organization  of  department 109i 

Permits -.••••. ; Ill 

Hans — Submit,  with  specific  information . .. 1 10-e,f 

Powers  and  duties  of  Building  Commissioner 116 

Records 109-g 

Refusal  of  permits 11 1-b 

Scope  of  Code J07 

(301) 


Section 
AFFIDAVITS  FROM  ARCHITECTS  AND  ENGINEERS 110-i,    111-h 

AGGREGATE  (see  Concrete) 

AISLES  (see  Group — Occupancies  under  Exits  or  Assembly  rooms) 

AISLES  AND  SEATING  in  class  rooms 506 

ALLOWABLE  BEARING  VALUE  ON  SOIL  FOR  FOUNDATION 2904-b 

ALLOWABLE  LOAD  ON  PILES 2909 

ALLOWABLE  STRESSES  (see  under  Stresses) 

ALTERATON  of  pre-Code  buildings 107-c,  d,  e,  f,  g,  and  1414 

AMUSEMENT  PARK  STRUCTURES 1201  to  1207 

ANCHORAGE  OF 

Columns,  steel  and  iron 2819 

Masonry  veneer 1415-b 

Masonry  walls 1408-b,c 

Reinforced  concrete  walls 1405-k 

Reinforcements 2644,  2645 

Steel  joists 2818-h,i 

Web  reinforcements 2646 

Wood  floors— Type  III.  . 1604-h 

Wood  joists,  beams  and  girders 1605-d,  2506-i 

APARTMENTS,  Houses  (Group  H-Part  10) 

Assembly  halls 1001-c 

Boiler  rooms  to  have  two-hour  separation 1009-d 

Construction  of  ceiling  and  first  floor 1001-d 

Corridor  and  stairway  to  be  lighted 1005-f 

Corridor  walls 1005-d 

Corridor  width 1005-d 

Doors  to  roof  not  to  be  locked . 1005-e 

Exit  from  an  apartment  to  be  not  more  than  50  feet  from  nearest  exit 1005-c 

First  floor  more  than  2,000  square  feet  and  more  than  three  stories  high  shall 
be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II.     Basement  ceiling  of  all  other  more  than  2,000 

square  feet  and  three  stories  to  be  of  one-hour  fire  resistance 1001-d 

Kitchens,  light  and  ventilation 1006 

Partition  separating  apartments 1001-e 

Sleeping  rooms 1007 

Sprinklers 1008 

To  have  one  room  120  square  feet 1007-a 

Toilets :m 1006,  1007-d,  1009-a,c 

Type  V  construction  not  to  be  used .  1001-b 

Type  VI  not  to  be  used  for  more  than  four  families  or  more  than  two  families 

above  first  story 1001-f 

Windows 1006 

APPEAL  (see  Board  of  Appeal) 

APPLICATION  for  Permits 110-a 

May  be  extended  ninety  days 110-g 

Number  of  persons  to  be  served  by  an  exit  to  be  stated  on 1803 

ARBITRARY  moment  coefficients 2636 

ARCHES,  MASONRY 2414 

AREA  (see  Group — Occupancies  and  305-b  and  106) 

Within  a  stairway  in  Group  C 501-c 

Within  a  stairway  not  to  be  used  for  storage 1507 

ASSEMBLY  HALLS,  Lights  and  Ventilation 408 

In  Group  B  under  Exits  and  Entrances 405 

(see  Group  Occupancies  also) 1001-c,  1008-a,  1803 

ASSUMED  STRENGTH  OF  CONCRETE  MIXTURES 2611 

ATTICS,  Exits 1804-b 

AUDITORIUM,  DANCE  HALLS,  ETC.,  One  person  per  6  square  feet 1803 

AUTOMATIC  SPRINKLERS  IN  PRE=CODE  BUILDINGS,  in  Groups  E  and  F,  3001-b 
(see  also  under  Sprinklers) 

AWNINGS,  roof  drains 1703-a 

BAKERY   OVENS  (see  also  Sec.  25,  Gas  Regulations) 2119 

BACKFLOW  OF  SEWAGE 3103-f 

BALCONIES,  CONNECTING 1815-f,g 

BALCONY  RAILING 2309 

BASEMENT,  CEILING  To  be  at  least  one-hour  fire  resistant 1001-d 

LIVING  AND  SLEEPING  ROOMS 1007-c 

Not  to  have  wooden  columns  or  partitions 1507-b,  1604-d 

TO  BE  WATERPROOFED  (if  surrounded  by  water-bearing  soil),  2902-e 

BATHROOM,  windows  not  less  than  one  eighth  floor  area  and  not  less  than 

6  square  feet 1006-a 

BEAMS,  Built-up,  wooden 2506-g 

Deflection 2808-f 

(302) 


BEAMS — Continued  Section 

Encased  in  concrete 2650 

Notches  in  wooden ; 2506 

Reinforced  concrete  beams  that  serve  as  walls  to  meet  requirements  of 

non-bearing  walls 1405-f 

Spandrel 2651 

Steel  beams  and  girders . 2808 

Structural  steel  beams  framed  into  wall  to  have  protection  against  fire.  .    1405-j 
Support  on  hollow  masonry 1410-a 

BEARING,  On  concrete  footings 2682 

Partitions  of  masonry  for  one-story  to  have  thickness  of  one-twentieth 

the  height  or  length,  etc 1406-e 

PARTY  WALLS  of  masonry  not  less  than  12  inches  thick 1406-f 

WALLS,  exterior 1406-d 

Panel 1406-g 

BLOW-OFF  TANK 3103-e 

BOARD  OF  APPEAL 117 

Appeals  to 118 

Decisions  of 119 

BOARD  OF  EXAMINERS 120 

OF  QASFITTERS 121 

BOILER  OR  FURNACE,   Maintenance  of 110 

Permit  for  installation  required 2119 

Waterproofing  to  be  protected  against  damage 2902-e 

IN  ASSEMBLY  HALL  NEAR  STAGE,  to  have  two-hour  separation,    410 

BOILER  ROOMS 

In  buildings  more  than  three  stories,  to  have  two-hour  separation 1009-d 

In  Group  D  buildings,  to  have  three-hour  separation 608 

In  Group  H  buildings,  to  have  two-hour  separation 1009-d 

In  schools,  to  have  two-hour  separation 510 

In  Type  IV  and  Type  VI  buildings,  more  than  one  family 1101-c 

BOILERS 2105-b,  2108-a,  2109 

Water  pressure  in 3114 

BOND  IN  MASONRY 2412 

BONDING  OF  FRESH  AND  HARDENED  CONCRETE 2623 

BORINGS  AND  TEST  PITS 2903 

BOUNDARIES  OF  FIRE  ZONES 202 

BOUNDARY  LINE  OF  A  LOT 1006-f 

BRACES  IN  WOODEN  WALLS 1417-c 

BRASS  PIPE 3118 

BREWERIES 901 

BRICK 2202,  2403 

UNIT  COMPRESSIVE  STRESS 2413-a 

BRIDGING,  Steel 2818-g 

Walls  and  partitions 2508-a-c 

Wood 2506-e 

BUILDING  COMMISSIONER 109-a,b 

HEIGHT  ALLOWED 136 

INSPECTION 113 

LICENSE 120 

BY  TYPE  OF  CONSTRUCTION 124 

CLASSIFICATION  AS  TO  TYPE 125 

FIRE  RESISTANCE 124 

BUILDINGS  ON  WHARVES  USED  FOR  STORAGE 801-d 

GROUP  C,  in  first  or  second  fire  zone  shall  be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II 

construction 203-h 

To  have  a  supply  of  pure  water 3101-a 

To  have  toilet  accommodations 3101-b 

IN  first  or  second  fire  zones  erected  as  garages  for  more  than  four 

cars  to  be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II 203-g 

MORE  THAN   125  FEET  HIGH,  soil  stack  at  least  5  inches...   3104-g 
MORE  THAN  THREE  STORIES  HIGH,  first  floor  commercial, 

and  more  than  two  families  above  second  floor;  sprinklers 3101-b 

OF  TYPES  III,   IV,  VI,  wooden  roof  not  to  extend  beyond  wall,  1701-e 

OF  TYPE  VI — Not  to  be  used  for  more  than  four  families 1001-f 

For  dwellings  in  secoud  fire  zone 203-d 

V — In  second  fire  zone 203-e 

BUILDING  DRAINS,  for  waterclosets  and  urinals 3104-b 

(303) 


Section 

BUILT-UP  GIRDERS,  wooden 2506 

BULKHEADS,  for  display  windows 1902-j 

CAISSON  PIERS 2907-b,c 

CAISSONS 2907 

CAST  IN  PLACE  PILES  (Concrete) 2909-g,  2912 

IRON 2805 

COLUMN  CAPS 1604-e 

PIPE 3116 

STEEL 2804 

STONE 2405 

CEILINGS  of  buildings  more  than  2,000  square  feet  and  three  stories  high,  one- 
hour  fire  resistance 1001-c,  1101-c 

Acoustical  in  Type  II,  of  wood  or  other  combustible  material 1602-f 

Finished  in  wood  —  Type  I  and  Type  II 1602,  1603 

BASEMENT,  in  buildings  more  than  three  stories  high,  one-hour  fire 

resistance 1101-j.  2210 

In  Group  D,  Division  2,  buildings 601-c 

CEILING  UNDER  ROOF  (see  also  under  Floor  Construction) 1701-b 

CELLAR 1603-f,  1608,  1902 

CEMENT   MORTAR  SHALL  BE  COMPOSED  OF 2411-h 

PLASTER  SHALL  BE  COMPOSED  OF 2202 

CHANGE  OF  OCCUPANCY 107,    133 

CHASES,  RECESSES,  CORBELS  AND  LINTELS 1405-i,  1411 

CHIMNEY  FLUE  LINING 2102 

FOUNDATION 1411-g,  2101 

IN  APARTMENT  OR  HOTEL ...   1009-c 

NOT  TO  BE  BUILT  NEAR  WOODEN   MEMBERS.  .2103,  2104,   2105 
CHIMNEYS  (see  Part  21) 

CHURCHES— Group  B 401 

CHUTES  AND  DUMB-WAITERS 1503-h 

CLASSIFICATION  OF  BUILDINGS  BY  TYPE  OF  CONSTRUCTION 124 

AND  ALLOWABLE  LOADS  ON  FOUNDATION  BEAR- 
ING MATERIALS 2904 

CLAY  TILE 2102,  2407 

For  chimney  construction 2407 

CLEARANCES 

Ends  of  wooden  beams  resting  upon  masonry  to  have  four-inch  clearance ....   2506-1 

Furnace 2109 

Over  hot  plates 2112 

Pipes  and  chimneys 2104,  2111 

Range  hoods 2114 

Smoke  stacks 2105 

Steel  joists 2818-j 

CLEAN-OUTS  IN  DRAINS 3103-g 

CLOSETS  on  or  under  stairways 1507,  1808-n 

COLUMN  BASES  OF  STEEL  AND  IRON 2819 

COLUMNS 

Cast  iron 2810,  2816 

Combination 2677 

Concrete 2669  to  2674,  2677 

Concrete  filled  pipe  columns 281 1 

Steel 2807 

Type  1 1602-b 

Wood 2505 

Wooden,  not  to  be  used  in  basement 1604-d,  1607-b 

COMBINATION  AND  RIBBED  SLABS 2653 

COMPOSITE  BEAMS 2808-h 

PILES 2914 

CONCEALED  OPENINGS  THROUGH  FLOORS 2508-d 

CONCENTRATED  LOADS 2306,  2652 

CONCENTRATION  OF  HEAVY  LOAD 2820-e 

CONCRETE  (see  Part  26) 

Aggregate 2606 

Anchorage 2644,  2645,  2646 

Assumed  strength  of  mixtures 2611 

Average oovi 

Axial  and  bending  stresses 2676 

Beams,  compressive  reinforcement ..,.,.. 2649 

(304) 


CONCRETE— Continued  Section 

Bearing  on  footings 2682 

Ronding  to  fresh  or  hardened  concrete 2623 

Cement 2605 

Columns 2669,  2674 

Combined  footings 2680-d 

Construction  joints 2622,  2668 

Controlled 2610,  2612 

Cover  for  reinforcement 2627 

Reinforcement  in,  for  pile  caps 2907-f 

Curing 2621 

Depositing  in  cold  weather 2620 

Exposed  to  weather 2611,  2612 

Forms  and  equipment 2615 

Inspection  of 2603 

Moment  coefficient 2636 

Openings  in  fiat  slabs 2667 

Placing 2619 

Point  of  inflection  in  fiat  slabs 2660 

Proportions  and  consistencies 2614 

Reinforcement 2608 

Ribbed  slabs 2653 

Shrinkage  reinforcement 2651 

Slenderness  ratio 2807-b 

of  reinforced  concrete  beam 2647 

Spandrel  beams 2651-b 

Stress 2629,  2930 

Structural  concrete 2610 

T  beams 2648 

Table  of  stresses 2629,  2630 

Temperature  reinforcement 2651 

Test  of  materials 2604,  2612,  2613 

Transporting 2618 

Two-way  slabs 2654 

CONCRETE  BLOCKS 2202,  2406 

CLASS  I  AND  CLASS  II 2202 

DEPOSITED  IN  COLD  WEATHER 2620 

FILL 2202 

FILLED  PIPE  COLUMNS 2811 

STEEL  PILES 2913 

FOOTINGS 2642,  also  2679  to  2682 

INSPECTION 2603 

REINFORCEMENT 

Bending 2624 

Compression  in  beams  and  girders 2649 

Placing 2625 

Protective  cover 2627 

Shrinkage  and  temperature 2651 

Splices  in 2626 

Web  reinforcement 2639,  2640 

WALLS 1405,  2678 

CONDUIT  EMBEDDED  IN  CONCRETE 2202-g,  2628 

CONNECTING  BALCONIES 1815-f 

CONSTRUCTION  JOINTS  IN  CONCRETE 2622 

FLAT  SLABS 2668 

TYPES  OF 125 

WITHIN  FIRE  ZONES 203 

COPINGS 1703-a 

COPPER,  Pipe 3118 

CORNICES,  Metal 1402-d 

Rain  water  discharging  on  a  public  way 1703-a 

Wood  (not  in  fire  zones) 1402-d 

CORRIDORS,  General  (see  Group — Occupancy) 

And  passageways 1805 

And  stairways  in  Group  H  to  be  lighted 1005-f 

Group  C 505 

Group  H 1005-d 

Not  to  have  any  obstruction 1005-c 

Space  to  lobby 1814 

Walls  in  Group  H  to  be  one-hour  fire  resisting 1005-d 

Width  of,  in  Group  H 1005-d 

COURT  WALLS 1402-c 

DANCE  HALLS,  Steel  deck  floor  not  to  be  used 2830-e 

(305) 


Section 
DEFINITIONS 

Concrete 2601 

General 106 

Masonry 2402 

Pertaining  to  plumbing 3102 

Walls  and  partitions 1401 

DEFLECTION  OF  STEEL  BEAMS,  1/360  of  span 2808-f 

DEPTH  OF  FOUNDATION 2902 

DESIGN,  Of  wood 2501 

DETACHED  GARAGES,  Foundation  of 2902-d 

DIAGONAL  FLOOR  FRAMING 2507-b 

DINING  ROOMS,  Light  and  ventilation 1006-c,e 

DISPLAY  WINDOWS 1902-j 

DISTANCE  FROM  LOT  LINES  (see  Group— Occupancies  under  Exterior  Walls) 
DOORS,  FROM  STAIRWAY  TO  ROOF  NOT  TO  BE  LOCKED 1005-e 

FIRE,  CONSTRUCTION 2214 

fire-resistive  requirements 2213 

on  each  side  of  party  wall  openings 1901-C-4 

General  requirements 1302,  1901,  2213,  2214 

To  swing  in  direction  of  egress 1806-d,e,  1817-c 

AUTOMATIC  SELF=CLOSING 1901 

DOORWAYS  IN   ENCLOSURES 1503-f 

AS  EXITS 1806 

NEAR  FIRE  ESCAPES 1812 

DOWELS,  from  Pedestal  to  Column 2682 

DRAINAGE,  Filling,  on  roof  of  Type  I  and  Type  II 1701-c,  1703,  2620 

Mechanically  discharged 3107 

SYSTEM  AND  MATERIALS 3112 

System  design  and  method  of  construction 3103 

DRAINS 3103 

DRAINS  FOR  RAIN  WATER 3105 

DRINKING  FOUNTAIN 3115 

DUCTS,  Ventilating 1506 

DUMB=WAITER  AND  CHUTES 1503-f 

DUTIES  OF  THE  COMMISSIONER 116 

DYNAMOS,  Application  for 110-a 

EFFECTIVE  DEPTH  of  reinforced  concrete  beams  and  slabs 2634 

EGRESS,  Pre-code  buildings  to  have  at  least  two  in  number  (see  also  Exits,  Part  18)     107-e 

ELECTRIC  PLATES 106,  2112 

ELEVATORS,    ESCALATORS  AND   ELEVATOR     SHAFTS 135 

As  exits , 1814 

Fire  protection  on  support  for  elevator  guides  and  elevator  machines 1602-b 

Group  A  buildings 304-b 

Group  B  buildings 404 

Group  C  to  Group  G,  same  as  in 504-a 

Passenger  enclosure  doorways 1503-f 

Shafts  to  be  ventilated  at  top 1503-i 

Shaft  windows 1902 

ENCLOSURE  OF  CHUTES  AND  DUMB=WAITERS 1503-h 

VERTICAL  OPENINGS  (see  also  Group— Occupancy) 1504 

TO  BE  USED  FOR  PURPOSE  FOR  WHICH  IT  WAS  CON- 
STRUCTED     1507 

ENGINES,  Applications  for 110-a 

ERECTION  OF  STEEL 2817 

EXCAVATION,  Removal  of  water 2617,  2901 

EXEMPT  FROM  CODE 107-a 

EXISTING  MASONRY  WALLS 1414 

EXITS  (see  Group — Occupancies) 

And  entrances,  Group  B — Part  4  . 405 

Corridors  not  to  have  any  obstructions 1805 

Description  and  kind  of  exits 1802 

Distance  to  an  exit  from  an  occupancy 1804-h,i 

Enclosures _ • •  ■  J817 

Exit  doors  shall  swing  in  direction  of  egress 305-k,  1806-e 

From  a  flat  roof  occupied  by  persons 1804-b 

From  an  apartment — must  not  be  over  50  feet  from  nearest  exit 1005-c 

From  H  and  I  occupancies 1005-b,g,  1105 

From  or  to  an  attic 1804-b 

(306) 


EXITS— Continued  Section 

General  requirements,  Part  18 1801 

Group  C— Part  5,  Schools , 505 

In  Group  E  no  point  in  story  to  be  over  100  feet  from  nearest  exit 705-b 

Lighting  and  maintenance 1819 

Must  be  in  a  continuous  path 1802-e 

Number  and  location  of 1803,  1804 

Number  of  persons  served  by,  based  on  square  feet  per  person 1803 

Number  of  persons  to  be  served  by,  to  be  stated  in  application  for  permit.. . .  1803-a 

One  from  every  story  must  be  an  interior  stairway 1802-f 

Passageways  to  and  from  required  exits  not  to  be  obstructed 1808-ni 

Room  or  group  of  rooms  more  than  2,500  square  feet,  or  containing  more  than 

75  persons,  to  have  two  remote  exits 1804-c 

Signs 307,  1802-e,  1818 

To  be  lighted 307,  1005-f 

To  be  satisfactory  to  the  Commissioner 116-d 

Two  remote  from  each  story 1804-e 

EXPANSION  AND  CONTRACTION  OF  STEEL 2814 

JOINTS 2651-c 

EXTENSION  OF  APPLICATION 110-g 

WOODEN  RAFTERS  BEYOND  MASONRY  WALLS 1701-e 

EXTERIOR  BEARING  WALLS,  Thickness  of 1406-e 

Of  masonry  1/16  height  or  length  between 
lateral  supports  in  top  story,  or  1/20  in 
all  other  stories,  and  not  less  than  8  inches 

in  Type  V  or  Type  VI 1406-e 

AND  BEARING  WALLS  OF  REINFORCED  CONCRETE  shall 

be  anchored  to  floors,  etc 1405-k 

BEARING  WALLS  OF  REINFORCED  CONCRETE  to  have  1/25 

height  or  length 1405-d 

NON   BEARING   WALLS 1406-g 

STAIRWAYS  AND  RAMPS 1811 

STAIRWAY  FROM  A  LOT  LINE 1811-a.c 

to  be  enclosed  if  less  than  15  feet  from  a  lot  line 1811-c 

OUTSIDE  PASSAGEWAY  to  be  as  wide  as  an  interior  passageway,  1805-h 

WOOD  FRAME  WALLS 1417 

WALL  (see  also  Group — Occupancies) 1402-d 

OPENINGS 1402-d 

WALLS,   TYPE   III,   MAY   BE  2-HOUR   FIRE   RESISTANT,  2201-e 

IV,    MAY   BE   2-HOUR   FIRE   RESISTANT,  2201-d 

BEARING  WALL,  WOOD  TRIMMINGS 1402-d 

FACTORIES  AND  WORK  SHOPS,  One  person  per  35  square  feet 1803 

FEES 112-a 

FENCE 107 

FINISH,  Outside , 1402-j 

FIRE  DAMAGE,  restoration  of 107-d 

DOORS 2213,  2214 

in  fire  walls 1302-g 

stop  walls 1417-e 

ESCAPES,  As  exits 1812 

EXTINGUISHING  APPARATUS  (Part  30) 

Access  panel 3010 

Water  supply 3007 

LIMITS 201 

boundaries  of 202 

PLACE 2107 

PROTECTION,  For— 

Cast-iron  columns 2204 

Reinforced  concrete  beams 2207 

Reinforced  concrete  columns 2205 

Reinforced  floors  and  roofs 2208 

Steel  beams,  girders  and  trusses 2206 

Steel  columns 2203 

PROTECTIVE,  Covering  injured  by  moving  vehicles 2202-h 

RESISTIVE 

Bearing  walls  and  partitions 2211 

Brick  of  Grade  B 2403-g 

Ceiling  construction 2210 

Doors 2213 

Fire  door  construction 2214 

Materials,  construction  and  minimum  qualities 2202 

(307) 


Section 
FIRE  RESISTIVE— Continued 

Non-bearing  walls  and  partitions 2212 

Requirements,  Commissioner  may  not  alter 116-1 

Roof  and  floor  construction 2209 

Roof  covering 2217 

Shutters 2215 

Windows 2216 

STOPPING 1604-a,  1607-a,  2202-i.  250S-d 

and  nogging  masonry  may  be  supported  on  wood 1406-b 

STOP  WALLS 403-g,  1402-a,  141 1-e,  2202-i,  2508-d 

TOWERS 1810 

WALL,  Definition  (see  also  134.  1301,  1302-g) 1401 

Openings,  fire  door  on  each  side  of 1302-g 

FIRE  WINDOWS 2216 

As  substitute  for  firedoor,  doors 1302-i 

ZONES 201 

Boundaries 202 

FIRST  FLOOR,  More  than  2,000  square  feet  in  Type  I  or  Type  II 1001-d 

FLAG  POLES,  Not  part  of  building 136-c,  2003-c 

FLAT  SLABS 2641,  2655,  2657  to  2668 

FLOOR  CONSTRUCTION,  Within  enclosures 1504 

CONSTRUCTION: 

To  be  three-hour  fire  resistive 1602-a 

To  conform  to  code  as  to  design 1601 

TYPE  I— FIREPROOF 1602-a 

Ceiling  may  be  finished  in  wood 1602-f 

May  be  covered  with  wood 1602-c 

Mezzanine  floor  may  be  of  wood 1602-d 

No  hollow  space  under  flooring 1 602-c 

TYPE  II— SEMI-FIREPROOF 1603 

Ceilings  may  be  finished  in  wood 1603-f 

May  be  wood  covered 127,  1603-c,  2209 

Steel  joists  with  ceiling 1603-e 

TYPE  III — Thickness  of  steel  stirrups  and  column  caps 1604-e 

Wood  not  to  be  used  for  columns  in  basement 1604-d 

TYPE  IV 1605 

TYPES  I  and  II — May  be  covered  with  wood — no  hollow  space 

under  flooring 1602-c,  1603 

TYPE  I— Mezzanine  may  be  of  wood 1602-d 

TYPES  I  and  II— CEILINGS,  May  bo  wood  finished. ..  .1602-f,  1603-e 
Floor  of  steel  joists  with  ceiling 1603-e 

TYPE  IV — No  structure  of  combustible  material  to  support  seats 

or  aisles  to  be  superimposed  on  floor  construction 401-b 

GROUP  H — First  floor  more  than  2,000  square  feet  and  more  than 
three  stories  shall  be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II.  Basement  ceilings  of 
all  others  less  than  2,000  square  feet  and  three  stories  to  be  one- 
hour  fire  resistive 1001-d 

WOOD  NOT  TO  BE  USED  for  columns  or  partitions  in  basement. .   1604-d 

FRAMING,  Diagonal 2507-b 

LOADS,  Posting 114 

Steel  Joists— Type  II 127,  1603,  2209 

Unprotected  against  fire 1605,  1607 

Wooden 1405-b,  2507 

Not  to  be  used  for  finish  in  garages 1208 

FOOTINGS 2642,  2679,  2907-a 

At  different  levels 2902-b 

Wooden 2907 

FOUNDATIONS  (General— Part  29) 

Allowable  loads  on  piles 2909 

Borings  and  test  pits 2903 

Cast  in  place  concrete  piles 2912 

Classification  and  allowable  load  of  foundation  bearing  materials 2904 

Composite  piles 2914 

Concrete  filled  cylindrical  piles 2913 

Depth  of — 4  feet  minimum 2902 

Excavation 2617,  2901 

Footings,  caissons  and  pier  caps 2907 

Foundation  design 2906 

loads 2905 

load  tests 2915 

to  be  supported  on  natural  deposits 2902-a 

(308) 


Section 
FOU  N  DAT  I  ON  S— Continued 

Load  test3  on  bearing  material 2916 

Of  detached  garages 2902-d 

Piles,  general  requirements 290S 

loading  tests 2917 

precast  concrete 291 1 

wooden 2910 

Special  permit 111-d 

Walls 1405-e,  1412 

Walls,  reinforced  concrete,  not  less  than  8  inches 1405-e,  1412 

Wood,  not  to  be  used 2501-d 

FURNACES 2110,  2111 

AND  BOILERS,  Maintenance 110-a 

FUTURE  FLOOR,  Present  roof  in  Type  I  and  Type  II,  the  filling  for  drainage  may 

be  of  wood 1701-c 

GARAGE  SEPARATION 801-f  to  805,  1102,  1201,  1202-a,  1301-d 

GARAGES,  To  be  Type  I— Section  203-g 801-f,     805 

Cast  iron  columns  not  to  be  used  in 2810-f 

Finish  floor  in,  wood  not  to  be  used  for 1208 

Foundation  for  detached 2902-d 

Over  six  cars — Type  VI  not  to  be  used 801-b 

Six  cars  or  less 1201-b 

Steel  deck  construction  not  to  be  used  for  floors _. 2820-e 

To  have  sprinklers  if  more  than  10,000  square  feet  in  area  or  if  five 

stories  or  more  in  height 807-f 

GASFITTER'S  LICENSE 121 

GIRDERS,  Wooden  built-up 2506 

GREENHOUSES 1903-a,b 

GRILLAGE,  Structural  steel 2907 

GROUP  C  BUILDINGS  in  first  or  second  Fire  Zone  to  be  of  Type  I  or  Type  II 

construction 203-h 

GYMNASIUM,  Steel  deck  floor  not  to  be  used ' 2820-c 

GYPSUM,  General— (Part  27) 2202 

Plain 2202-b 

Concrete 2410 

Concrete  design  and  stress 2701 

Not  to  be  used  for  a  wearing  surface 270 1-g,  2706 

Not  to  be  used  in  floors  of  garages,  dance  halls 270 1-g,  2706 

Tile 2408 

HALLS , 401 

HANGARS— Section  801-Division  5 

HANGERS,  For  wooden  joists 2506-d 

And  support  for  drainage  system 3119 

HEATING,  Apparatus  given  (Part  21) 

Apparatus  support 2117,  2119 

And  PLUMBING  —  Group  H 1009 

HEIGHT  (see  Group — Occupancies) 

HORIZONTAL  EXITS 1815 

HOT  PLATES 2112-a,b 

WATER  SUPPLY 3114 

Heater,  tankless 3114-o 

Tank,  cistern  pressure 3114-p 

Tank  pressure 3114 

IMPACT , 2308,  2504-c 

INCINERATORS 2116 

INCREASE  in  area  or  in  number  of  stories 107-f 

INSPECTION   113 

AND    TEST    OF    FIRE    EXTINGUISHING    APPARATUS, 

HOSE,  ETC 3009 

PLUMBING 3120 

OF  GAS  FIXTURES 116-i 

INSULATION,  Filling  FOR  ROOF 1701-c 

INTAKE,  FRESH  AIR,  IN  COURTS 1006-b 

INTERIOR  BEARING  WALLS  AND  PARTITIONS,  THICKNESS  OF 1406-e 

RAMPS 1809 

STAIRWAYS 1808-n 

Closet  under  stairway 1 808-  i 

(309) 


Section 
INTERIOR  STAIRWAYS— Continued 

If  enclosed  corridor  is  omitted  then  basement  and  first  floor  to  have  automatic 

sprinklers 1805-d 

No  obstruction  on  stairway  or  landing 1808-m 

Spiral  stairs  not  to  be  used lS08-m 

To  be  enclosed  above  the  second  story 1817-b 

To  extend  to  roof 1808 

Tread,  rise  and  landings 1808-f ,g,h 

Width  of  stairway  not  to  be  less  than  30  inches 1808-d 

INTERPRETATION  OF  CODE  BY  COMMISSIONER 111-g 

IRON  PIPE  PLUMBING 311b,  3117 

JOISTS,  WOODEN  NAILING  STRIPS 2506-k 

JUNIOR  BEAMS 2818 

KITCHEN  FLOOR  AREA  MORE  THAN  70  SQUARE  FEET 1006-a,c 

not  to  be  less  than  six  feet  wide  and  48  square  feet  minimum 1007-a 

VENTILATION 1006-a,c,d 

WINDOWS,  one-third  of  floor  area  and  not  less  than  11  square  feet. .    1006 

LADDERS  AS  EXITS 1813 

LATERAL  FORCES 2309 

BRACING  OF  BEAMS 2803-d,  2808-b 

BRACING  OF  STEEL  FLOOR  FRAMING 1602-b 

not  to  be  of  wood 1603-b 

SUPPORT  OF  WALLS 1403,  1408 

LEAD  PIPE  IN  PLUMBING 3118 

LIBRARIES 801 

LIGHT,  exit 307,  1819-c 

and  ventilation 806,  1006-a,  1106 

in  assembly  halls 408 

LIME  PLASTER 2202 

LIMITED  HABITATION  (Group  I) 1101-1107 

LINTELS  NEED  NOT  BE  FIREPROOFED,  if  span  is  not  over  6  feet  in  bearing 

walls  or  10  feet  in  non-bearing  walls 1602-b 

LIVING  ROOM   1006-a,  1106 

FLOOR,  and  floor  on  ground 1007-e 

LOADS,  LIVE  AND  DEAD  (Part  23) 2301  to  2312 

Due  to  partitions ^ 2304 

LOAD  TESTS  OF  STRUCTURES 2313 

LODGING  HOUSES,  READING  ROOMS,  One  person  per  25  square  feet 1803-a 

LOT  LINE  BOUNDARY,  For  light  and  ventilation 1006-f 

STAIRS,  Not  nearer  than  five  feet  from 1811-a 

LOUVRES 1505-a,l 

LUMBER,  To  be  grade  marked 2504-f 

SECOND-HAND 2504-f 

MAINTENANCE  OF  BUILDINGS 108 

FURNACES  AND  BOILERS 110-a 

MASONRY  ARCHES 2414 

CHASES,  RECESSES,  CORBELS  AND  LINTELS 1411 

DEFINITION  OF 2202,  2402 

PIERS 1409 

REINFORCED 2415 

SECOND-HAND  MATERIALS 2416 

STRUCTURAL,  not  to  be  supported  on  wooden  floor 1405-b,  1607-e 

UNIT  STRESS 2413 

VENEER 1405-h,  1415-b 

WALL  ANCHORAGES 1406-d,  1408-b 

WALLS  1406  to  1412 

Existing 1414 

Non  bearing 1406-g 

OR  PIERS  not  to  be  supported  on  wood 1406-b 

MATERIALS  AND  METHODS  NOT  COVERED  BY  CODE 116-1 

OF  DRAINAGE  SYSTEMS 3112 

MECHANICAL  VENTILATION 1006-d 

MECHANICALLY  DISCHARGED  DRAINAGE 3107 

MEZZANINE  FLOOR 1004-c,  1602-d 

(310) 


Section 

MINIMUM  THICKNESS  OF  STEEL 2818 

MOMENT  COEFFICIENTS 2636 

MORTAR,  CEMENT 2411 

MOVING,  TYPE  VI  BUILDINGS 107-h,  203-d 

PICTURE  HOUSES 301,  401 

MULTIPLE  OCCUPANCIES 124-b,  134,  1301 

TYPE  URINALS 3115-c 

WATER  CLOSET 3115-c 

NAILING  STRIPS  for  wooden  joists  on  girders 2506-k 

NON-BEARING  PARTY  WALLS  OF  MASONRY  to  be  not  less  than  eight 

inches  thick 1406-f 

PARTITIONS  OF  MASONRY  to  have  thickness  1/45  the 
height  or  length  between  lateral  supports  and  at  least 
3  inches 1406-f 

PARTITIONS  OF  REINFORCED  CONCRETE  to  have 
thickness  1/60  the  height  or  length  between  lateral  sup- 
ports and  at  least  3  inches 1405-f 

WOOD  PARTITIONS  may  be  used  in  Types  I,  II,  III  and  V 

under  certain  conditions 1417 

In  Group  F  and  Group  G  to  subdivide  space  occupied  by 
one  tenant 1417-b 

In  Group  H  and  Group  I  to  subdivide  apartment  occupied 
by  one  tenant 1417-b 

OBSTRUCTIONS  IN  AISLES  PROHIBITED 306-c,    406-c 

OCCUPANCIES,  Number  of  persons  for  certain  area 1803 

BY  GROUPS 132-a 

CHANGE  OF 133 

MULTIPLE 134 

OIL  BURNERS 1152 

OPENINGS,  IN  MASONRY  WALLS 1411-h 

IN  FLAT  SLABS 2667 

FLOOR  OR  ROOF,  not  covered  by  trap  door  to  have  railing 

30  inches  high 1501-b 

ROOF 1501-d 

FOR  VENTILATING  SHAFTS 1505 

FOR  WALLS,  percentage  allowed  according  to  fire  resistance 1302 

OUTSIDE  FINISH 1402-d 

PASSAGEWAYS  from  a  building 1805-h 

PAINTING  STEEL  AND  IRON 2816 

PANIC  BOLTS 305-k 

PARAPET  WALLS 1413,  1414,  1415,  1701-e 

PARTY  WALLS 1401,  1405-g,j  1406-h 

IN  BUILDINGS  OF  TYPES  III,  IV,  VI,  To  extend  through 

roof 1405-j 

TO  HAVE  FIRE  DOORS 1901-a,c 

PARTITIONS,  BETWEEN  ADJOINING  APARTMENTS,  1-hour  fire  resistant,  1001-e 

Covered  with  acoustical  material  in  Type  II 1603-f 

PASSAGEWAY 1805 

PASSENGER  ELEVATORS  ENCLOSURE  DOORWAYS 1503-f 

PEDESTALS,  PLAIN 2685 

PENALTIES,  For  violation  of  Code 122 

PENTHOUSES 2002 

PERM  ITS,  Applications  for 1 10-a 

May  be  revoked 111-d 

Shall  become  invalid 11 1-d 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  STUDIO  SKYLIGHT 1903-b 

PIERS 2907 

MASONRY 1409 

PILE    CAPS 2907-f 

REINFORCEMENT  in  cover  for 2907-f 

LOADING  TEST 2917 

PILES,  GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 2908 

INSPECTION  OF,  WHILE  DRIVING 2909-h 

PIPE  AND  CONDUIT  EMBEDMENT 2202-g,  2628 

(311) 


Section 

PLASTER  AND  MORTAR 2202,  2402 

PLUMBING  FIXTURES  AND  UNITS 3114 

DEVICES  PROHIBITED 3121 

AND  HEATING  (Group  H  Buildings) 1009 

POINT  OF  INFLECTION  in  flat  slabs 2660 

in  reinforced  concrete  beams 2637 

POLICE  STATIONS 801-c 

PORTABLE  FIRE  EXTINGUISHERS 3008-b 

POSTING  FLOOR  LOADS 114 

POWERS  AND  DUTIES  OF  THE  BUILDING  COMMISSIONER 116 

Buildings  to  be  made  safe  or  removed 116-d 

Commissioner  can  order  any  alteration  on  a  Pre-Code  building  if  not  specif- 
ically covered  by  Code - 1 16-g 

Condemn  any  unsafe  building  ....... 116-d 

Enter  any  building  or  premises  in  line  of  duty 116-a 

Examinations  of  dangerous  buildings 116-h 

Exits  satisfactory  to  Commissioner 116-d,  1802-d 

Fine  for  hindering  the  Commissioner 116-d 

Inspection  of  gas  fixtures 1 16— i 

Opening  in  fire  wall — Commissioner  may  vary 1302-h 

Provisions  of  Section  116  to  apply  to  Pre-Code  buildings 116-k 

Rules  and  regulations 1 16— j 

Substitution  of  materials  and  methods 116—1 

Work  may  be  stopped 116-b,  1302-b 

Working  stresses  may  not  be  altered  by  Commissioner 116-1 

PRECAST  CONCRETE  PILES 2911 

PRE=CODE  BUILDINGS 107,  116-g,k,  124-c,  1414 

ENLARGED  IN  AREA  OR  NUMBER  OF  STORIES 107-f 

MOVED  TO  ANOTHER  LOCATION 107-e 

OF  GROUP  "C"  (Schools),  To  conform  to  new  code 501-g 

SECTIONS  WHICH  APPLY  TO 107-b 

TO  HAVE  ELECTRICAL  FIRE  ALARM  SYSTEM 107-e 

SAFE  EGRESS 107-e 

PRESSURE  RELIEF  VALVE 3114-d 

PROJECTION  ROOM 314 

PROTECTION  OF  STRUCTURAL  STEEL 2202-d 

AGAINST  CORROSION 2816 

PROTECTIVE  COVERING  OF  REINFORCEMENTS 2627 

PROPERTY  LINE,  walls  less  than  ten  feet  from,  two-hour  fire  resistant 1003-a 

PROSCENIUM 310 

RAILING,  BALCONY 2309 

RAIN  WATER,  Discharged  from  cornices  or  copings  on  a  public  way 1703-a 

Drains  to  be  laid  not  lower  than  four  feet  below  street  grade 3105 

RANGE  HOODS 2114 

RAT-PROOFING 1608,  1902-i 

RECESSES,  CHASES  AND  CORBELS 1411 

REDUCTION  OF  LIVE  LOAD 2310 

REINFORCED  CONCRETE  WALLS 1405 

MASONRY 2415 

REINFORCEMENTS,  in  concrete  exposed  to  weather  to  have  two-inch  cover. . .   2627-a 

REMOVAL  OF  WATER  FROM  EXCAVATION 2617 

RESTAURANTS,  RETAIL  STORES,  ETC.  one  person  for  every  15  square  feet,  1803 

RETAIL  STORES 901 

Stairways  and  ramps  serving  basement  only 804-c 

REVIEWING  STANDS 203-c,  1204-a 

REVOLVING  DOORS 1806-f 

RIBBED  SLABS 2653 

RIVET  CONNECTIONS 2809 

RIVETS 2815,  2817-c 

ROOF  CONSTRUCTION,  roofing 107-g,  1417-f ,  1700,  2003,  2217 

COVERING 2217 

DRAINAGE 1703 

of  Marquees 1703-c 

FILLINGS,  For  drainage  of  future  floor  in  Type  I  or  Type  II  may  be  of 

wood 1701-c 

(312) 


Section 
ROOF  GUTTERS,  CORNICES,  ETC.,  In  Types  I,  II,  III  and  IV  buildings 

outside  fire  limits  may  be  of  wood 1402-d 

LOADS 2311 

PROJECTION,  Maximum  of  12  inches  to  form  eaves,  except  in  first  or 

second  fire  zones 1701-e 

ROOFS  SHALL  BE  SLOPED,  To  drain  at  a  pitch  of  not  less  than  1  inch  in  10  feet,  1703-a 

ROOMS  IN  APARTMENTS,  Minimum  70  square  feet  of  floor  area 1007-a 

LIGHTING  AND  VENTILATION  OF,  606,  706,  806,  906,  1006,  1106,  1206 

MINIMUM  HEIGHT,  8  feet i 1007-b 

RULES  AND  REGULATIONS,  For  tearing  down  buildings 116-j 

SALVAGED  LUMBER 2504-f 

SCHOOLS  (see  Part  5-Group  C) 

SCOPE  OF  CODE 107-a 

SECOND-HAND  MATERIALS,  MASONRY 2416 

STRUCTURAL  STEEL 2802-c,d 

SEPARATION,  ANGLE  OF 1301-g 

BETWEEN  FIRE  DIVISION  WALLS 1302-g 

OF  OCCUPANCIES  (see  Group— Occupancies),  also  134,  1301,  1302 

SHOW  WINDOWS     IN  A  STORE 1902- j 

SIDEWALK  LIGHTS 1904 

SIGNS,  EXIT 1818 

FLAT 1201-c 

SKYLIGHTS 1903 

In  stair  enclosures  in  roofs 1501-b,  1503 

Parts  exposed  to  weather  to  have  wire  glass 1903-e 

Ventilation 1006-c 

SLABS,  Two-way 2654 

SLEEPING  ROOMS 1006-a,  1106 

Floor  and  walls  on  ground 1007-c,e 

SLENDERNESS  OF  BEAMS. 2647 

SMOKE  PIPES 2106 

PROOF  TOWERS 1810 

STACKS 2105 

SOIL  AND  WASTE  PIPE 3104 

BEARING  FOR  FOUNDATIONS 2904 

PIPE  not  to  be  less  than  four  inches  diameter 3104-e 

SPANDREL  BEAMS 2651 

SPECIFICATION,  Of  steel  and  iron 2802 

SPIRAL  COLUMNS 2671 

STAIRS,  Not  to  be  used 1808-j 

SPLICES,  In  reinforcements 2626 

Lapped  in  longitudinal  reinforcements .- 267 1-c 

SPREAD  FOOTINGS,  not  to  be  supported  on  fill 2902-a 

SPRINKLERS 

Definitions 106 

Group  A 313 

Group  B 411 

Group  C 509 

Group  D 607 

Group  E — Higher  than  two  stories  or  10,000  feet 707-a,  1 

Cellars  and  basements,  floor  area  1,500  square  feet 707-a,  2 

Certain  manufacturing  plants 707-a,  3,  4,  5 

Group  F — Cellars  and  basements  more  than  1,500  square  feet 807 -a 

Divisions  2  and  3 — -six  or  more  stories 807-b 

Division  4 — Types  III,  IV  and  VI  on  wharves  5,000  square  feet..  .      807-c 

I,  II  and  V  20,000  square  feet 807-c 

Garages  to  have  sprinklers  if  more  than  10,000  square  feet 807-f 

Group  G — -Cellars,  basements,  Divisions  2  and  3 — more  than  1,500  square  feet,     907-a 

Divisions  2  and  3  of  Type  IV,  7,500  square  feet 907-b 

Group  H — Cellars,  basements,  Types  I  and  II — six  stories  high 1008-a 

All  others  more  than  three  stories 1008-a 

Group   I — Cellars,  basements  in  buildings  more  than  six  stories 1 107-a 

Fire   windows,    exterior   wall — Commissioner    may   allow   ordinary   windows 

with  sprinklers 1902-g,  2216-i 

In  pre-code  buildings,  Group  E  and  F,  or  either,  in  combination  with  Group 

H  or  I 3001-b 

Multiple  Occupancies  if  building  is  more  than  three  stories — first  floor  for  com- 
mercial and  more  than  two  families  above  second  floor 1301-h 

(313) 


Section 
SPRINKLERS— Continued 

CONTROL 3006 

Construction  of 3001-a,d 

OBSTRUCTIONS,  Not  to  interfere  with  sprinklers 3006-a 

One  of  the  enclosed  corridors  in  the  first  floor  may  be  omitted  provided  the 

basement  and  first  story  are  equipped  with  automatic  sprinklers 1805-d 

STAIR  LANDINGS  in  school  buildings 505 

STAIRS,  Group  A — Rise  not  to  exceed  7  1/2  inches.  Tread  not  to  be  less  than 
10  1/2  inches.  Flights  not  more  than  fifteen  nor  less  than  three  be- 
tween landings  and  winders 305-m,n 

STAIRS,  Product  of  tread  and  rise  to  be  not  less  than  70  inches  nor  more  than  77 

inches  except  in  schools 1808-h 

Rise  and  tread  7  1/2  inches  and  10  inches  and  not  more  than  15  steps.  .     505-g 

RISERS  not  more  than  fifteen  nor  less  than  two  in  flight 1808-i 

SPIRAL  not  to  be  used 1808-j 

TREAD  not  less  than  9  1/2  inches  and  rise  not  more  than  7  3/4  inches  1808-h 

STAIRWAY  CLOSETS 1808-n 

ENCLOSURES  (see  Group — Occupancies,  also) 1503-b 

INTERIOR,  to  extend  to  roof 1808 

LANDINGS,  To  have  no  obstruction 1808-m 

Over  eight  feet  wide  to  have  a  central  rail 305-p 

Railing  design 2309-e 

To  be  enclosed 1004-b 

STANDPIPES  1008-b 

FIRE  DEPARTMENT 3002 

FIRST  AID 3003 

STEEL  AND  IRON  (Part  28) 2801  to  2820 

Beams  and  girders 2808 

Beams  encased  in  concrete 2650 

Columns 2807 

Connection  details 2809 

Construction  workmanship 2815 

Deck  floors  and  roofs 2820 

Frame 2814,  2815 

Frame  walls 1416 

Frames  not  to  be  supported  on  wood 1416-g 

In  reinforced  concrete  exposed  to  weather,  two-inch  protection 2627 

STEEL  Joists 2818,  2820 

Not  to  be  used  in  first  floor  of  certain  buildings 2818-c 

Member,  minimum  thickness 2813 

PIPE : 3117 

STIRRUPS,  Hangers  not  less  than  3/16  inch  thick 1604-e 

STONE 2202,  2404,  2405 

STORE  FRONTS 1902-j 

STOVES  AND  RANGES 2113 

STRESSES,  Working,  Commissioner  may  not  alter 116-1 

IN 

Cast  iron 2805 

Cast  steel 2804 

Concrete 2629,  2630 

Concrete,  due  to  wind 2631 

Due  to  short  period  loading 2504 

Gypsum  concrete 2701 

Masonry 2413 

Steel 2803 

Steel,  due  to  wind 2812 

Temperature  stresses 2504-a 

Wood 2504 

Wood,  due  to  wind 2504 

STRUCTURAL  STEEL,  Used  in  one  building,  not  to  be  used  in  another  building, 

without  the  permission  of  the  Commissioner 2802-d 

Members  in  pre-code  buildings  prior  to  1924  not  to  be 
stressed  in  excess  of  8/10  of  allowable  stresses,  and 
those  of  1924  and  prior  to  1943  not  to  be  in  excess  of 

9/10  of  allowable  stresses 2802-c 

STRUCTURES  NEAR  AN  EXCAVATION 2901 

SUPPORT,  For  drainage  systems 3119 

TABLE  OF  STRESSES 2629,  2630 

MINIMUM  DIAMETERS  FOR  FIXTURE  TRAPS 3115-e 

TANKS  ON  ROOFS 2003 

TEMPERATURE  RELIEF  VALVES 3114-e,f 

(314) 


Section 

TEMPORARY  STRUCTURES 203-c,  2504-g 

ERECTED  IN  FIRE  ZONES 203-c,  1201-c 

To  be  removed  in  one  year 2504-g 

TENTS,  REVIEWING  STANDS,  ETC.  IN  EITHER  FIRE  ZONE 1201-c 

TEST  PITS  AND  BORINGS 2903 

TESTS  FOR  LOADS  ON  BEARING  MATERIALS 2915,  2916,  2917 

OF  FIRE  EXTINGUISHING  APPARATUS 3009 

MATERIALS 2604,  2612,  2613 

THEATRES  (Part  3-Group  A) 301 

AND  MOVING  PICTURE  HOUSES 301,     401 

THICKNESS  OF  METAL  IN  STRUCTURAL  STEEL 2812,  2813 

THRESHOLDS,  To  be  of  incombustible  material 1402-e 

Shall  not  be  over  one  inch  high 1806-c 

TIED  REINFORCED  CONCRETE  COLUMNS 2672 

TILE,  GYPSUM 2408 

TOILETS,  Accommodations  and  plumbing 3101-b 

Accommodations  for  schools ' 511 

Floors  of,  to  be  tile,  terazzo,  etc 1007-d 

Minimum  size,  33  inches  wide;    15  square  feet  area 1007-a 

No  wood  work 1007-d 

Number  in  each  apartment 1009-b 

Windows  not  less  than  1/8  floor  area 1006-a 

TOWERS,  FIRE  OR  SMOKEPROOF 1810 

TRANSFER  BY  OWNER  OF  HIS  RIGHTS  AND  RESPONSIBILITIES 106-d 

TRAP  DOORS 1502 

TRAPS,  For  waste  pipes  of  plumbing  fixtures 3108 

TREADS  AND  RISERS 1808-f 

TRUSSES,  WOOD 2509 

TWO-WAY  SLABS  (reinforced  concrete) 2659 

TYPES  OF  CONSTRUCTION 125 

TYPE  V,  NOT  TO  BE  USED  FOR  GROUP  H  OR  1 1001-b,  1101 

VI,  FOR  NOT  MORE  THAN  FOUR  FAMILIES 1001-f 

VI,  MOVING  OF,  to  different  location 107-h,  203-d 

VI,  NOT  TO  BE  USED  FOR  MORE  THAN    SIX-CAR    GARAGE.  801-b 

UNIT  COMPRESSIVE  STRESS  IN  MASONRY 2413 

STRESS  IN  WOODEN  STRUCTURAL  MEMBERS 2504 

URINALS,  Plumbing 3113-i 

Multiple  type 3115-c 

USE  OF  STAIRWAY  ENCLOSURE  AREAS 1507 

USED  BUILDING  MATERIALS 

Lumber 2504-f 

Structural  steel 2802-d 

UPWARD    PRESSURE   DUE   TO    LATERAL   AND    UPLIFT   FORCES    IN 

ADJACENT  SOILS  (taking  weight  of  soil  as  dimin- 
ished by  buoyancy,  plus  full  hydrostatic  pressure) . . .   2309-a 

UPWARD  PRESSURE  of  water  in  structures  below  grade 2309-b 

VACUUM  RELIEF  VALVES 3114-g 

VALIDITY  (Part  32) 

VENEER  MASONRY 1405-h,  1415-b 

VENT,  Water  closet  and  urinal 1505,  3104-b 

VENT  PIPES,  to  extend  above  roof 3110 

Size  of,  for  water  closets,  urinals 3110-h 

VENTILATING  DUCTS 1506 

SHAFTS  for  kitchens,  etc 1004-a,  1006-c,  1505 

VENTILATION  IN  ASSEMBLY  HALLS 408 

VENTILATING  SHAFTS 1505 

AND  LIGHT 806,  1106 

LIGHT  IN  GROUP  H  BUILDINGS 1006 

IN  KITCHENS 1006-a,d 

MECHANICAL 1006-d 

UNDER  FIRST  FLOOR  WITHOUT  BASEMENT  .2507,  2818-j 

VENTING 3109 

VERTICAL  OPENINGS 1104,  1500 

Protection  of 1104,  1500,  1502 

Railing 1501 

Trap  doors 1502 

SHAFT  AND  FLOOR  OPENINGS 1004-a,c 

(315) 


Section 

WALLS  AND  PARTITIONS 1401,  1405 

Existing  masonry 1414 

COVERED  WITH  ACOUSTICAL  MATERIAL,  1603-f 

OF  CONCRETE 1405,  2678 

OF  WOOD 2508 

EXTERIOR,  Wooden  frame 1417 

FACING  A  COURT 1402-c 

FOUNDATION,  OF  MASONRY 1412 

REINFORCED  CONCRETE 1405-e 

LATERAL  SUPPORT  OF 1403 

MASONRY 1406,  1412,  1414 

OF  WOOD  in  basement 1607-b 

Non-bearing,  exterior 1406-g 

OPENINGS  IN 1302 

FOR  DOORS  AND  WINDOWS  IN  PARTY 1901 

OPENINGS  FOR  DOORS  AND  WINDOWS  IN  PARTY 1901 

REQUIREMENTS 1402 

STEEL  FRAME 1416 

WAR  PROVISION  (Part  33) 

WASTE  FROM  HOSPITALS  or  other  indirect  waste 3106 

PIPES  IN  GROUND,  not  to  be  less  than  three  inches  in  diameter ....   3104-f 
STACKS  SERVING  LAVATORIES,  to  be  three  inches  in  diameter,  3104-g 
FOR  SLOP  SINKS  OR  URINALS,  to   be   four   inches   in 
diameter 3104-g 

WATER  CLOSET  BUILDING  DRAIN 3104-b 

AND  PLUMBING 3113-i 

MULTIPLE  TYPE . . . .   3115-c 

VENTILATION,  need  not  have  windows 1006-c,d,h 

WATER  FROM  EXCAVATION 2617,  2901 

HEATERS 2112 

SUPPLY 3113 

TANKS  ON  ROOFS 2003 

WATERPROOFING  IN  BASEMENT 2902-e 

OF  BOILERS  OR  FURNACES,  to  be  protected  against 

damage 2902-e 

OF  WALLS  OR  FLOORS  of  sleeping  or  living  rooms  in 

contact  with  ground 1007-c 

WEIGHT  OF  ELEMENTS  OF  CONSTRUCTION 2303 

WELDING 2809-r 

WHOLESALE  STORES '. . .     801-a 

WIDTH  OF  CORRIDORS  AND  PASSAGEWAYS 1805-a,b 

WIND  LOADS 2312,  2631 

PRESSURE  on  signs 2312-d 

on  walls 1402-b 

STRESSES  in  concrete 2631 

in  steel 2812 

in  wood 2504 

WINDOWS 1006-b,  1402-d,  1902 

AS  EXITS 1807 

AS  SUBSTITUTE  for  fire  doors 1302-i 

FRONTING  UPON  OPEN  SPACE  or  ventilating  shaft 1006-c 

IN  EXTERIOR  WALL  OR  ELEVATOR  SHAFT,  to  be  protected  by 

metal  bars 1902-h 

Kitchen  area 1006-a 

Toilet  area 1006-a 

To  open  on  open  space 1006,   1106 

WIRE  GLASS  IN  FIRE  RESISTIVE  WINDOWS 2216 

LATH 2202 

SCREENS  OVER  SKYLIGHTS 1903 

WOOD 

Design 250)1 

Floors  and  roofs 2507,  2508 

Nailing  strips . 2506-j,k 

Notches  in  wooden  beams 2506 

Stirrups,  hangers 1604-e 

Stresses 2504 

Trusses 2509 

Wooden  columns  on  concrete  or  masonry 2505-g 

Wooden  framing 2509, 

(316) 


Section 

WOOD  BEARING  PARTITION  NOT  TO  SUPPORT  FIRST  FLOOR 1607-b 

WOOD  FLOORS  AND  ROOFS 

Floor  boards  and  planking  not  to  penetrate  a  party  or  fire  wall 2507-c 

Not  to  be  used  in  first  floor  and  where  there  is  no  basement 2507 

Rough  floors  to  be  at  an  angle  of  not  less  than  45  degrees 2507-b 

WOOD  FRAMING,  Bolts,  washers  and  nuts 2509 

Timber  joints 2509-b 

FRAME  WALLS,  EXTERIOR 1417,  2508 

NEAR  CHIMNEYS  AND  HEATING  APPARATUS 2104 

NOT  TO  BE  USED  FOR  FOUNDATION 2501-d,  2907 

WORKING  PLANTS 701-a 

WOODEN  BEAMS 2506 

Bridging 2506-e 

Built-up  beams •.•••: 2506-g 

Joists  and  headers  to  be  hung  in  stirrups 2506-d 

Joists  to  be  doubled  under  partitions 2506-f 

Nailers  may  be  spiked  if  live  load  under  40  lbs.  per  square  foot 2506-j 

Nailing  strips  on  steel  girders 2506-k 

Notched  at  end  supports 2506-b,c 

Resting  on  masonry  to  be  separated 2506-1 

Resting  upon  masonry  walls 2506-i 

That  meet  at  columns 2506-h 

WOODEN  COLUMNS 2505 

Wood  shall  not  be  used  for  columns  in  basement 1604-d,  1607-b 

WOODEN  FRAME  FLOOR  CONSTRUCTION 1607 

JOISTS  MAY  REST  ON  CLEATS 2506-j 

AND  RAFTERS  NOT  TO  EXTEND   BEYOND  exterior 

wall 1701-e 

JOISTS  OR  BEAMS  THAT  FRAME  INTO  EXTERIOR  or  party 

walls 1405-j 

MEMBERS  UNDER  ROOFS  of  Types  III,  IV,  VI,  not  to  extend 

across  exterior  walls 1701-e 

WOODEN  PARTITIONS 1417,  1607-b 

PILES 2910 

STRUCTURES 

GROUP  B— If  less  than  5,000  square  feet  (I  story)  may  be  Type  VI,  401-b 

Exterior  walls  of  wood  to  be  more  than  ten  feet  from  lot  line 403-a 

Exterior  walls  of  wood  to  be  more  than  20  feet  from  combustible 

wall  or  roof  on  further  side  of  street 403-b 

GROUP  C — If  less  than  5,000  square  feet  (1  story)  may  be  of  Type 

VI 501-b 

Pre-Code   building,    two   stories,   4,000   square   feet,  may  be  of 

Type  VI 502-g 

See  above  for  wood  walls 503 

GROUP  D— If  less  than  2,500  square  feet  and  one  story,  Type  VI. .  601-b 

See  above  for  wood  walls 603 

GROUP  E— For  Type  VI,  see  table 701-b 

See  above  for  wood  walls 703 

GROUP  F— For  Type  VI,  see  table 801-b 

Garages  over  six  cars  —  No  Type  VI  allowed 801-a 

No  buildings  of  Type  VI  on  wharves 801-d 

See  above  for  wood  walls 803 

GROUP  G— See  table  for  Type  VI 901-b 

For  exterior  walls  to  lot  line,  etc 903 

GROUP  H— See  table  for  Type  VI 1001-b 

Exterior  walls  less  than  ten  feet  from  lot  line 1003-a 

Exterior  walls  less  than  15  feet  from  another  building,  etc 1003-b 

GROUP  I— Type  VI,  three  stories,  5,000  square  feet 1101-b 

Exterior  walls  more  than  five  feet  from  lot  line 1 103 

GROUP  J — Garages  for  six  cars  or  less,  two  stories  in  height,  less 

than  1,300  square  feet,  no  Type  VI  allowed 1201 

Garages  for  three  cars  or  less  (one  story),  not  more  than  600  square 

feet,  may  be  Type  VI 1201 

Walls,  Type  VI,  and  floors  and  ceilings — every  hollow  space  to  be 

fire-stopped 1402-a 

TYPE  VI  buildings  in  first  fire  zone 203-b 

TYPE  VI  buildings  in  second  fire  zone 203-d 

WALLS  NOT  TO  BE  USED  FOR  PARTY,  FIRE  OR  ENCLOSURE 

WALLS,    or   when  required  to  have  more  than  one-hour  fire 

resistance 1417-a 

WORKMANSHIP  IN  STEEL  CONSTRUCTION 2815 

CITY  OP  BOSTON    a^^^>  PRINTING  SECTION